Professional Documents
Culture Documents
->WSXW830400LD50010
7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010
7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010
Workshop manual
CONTENTS
0 - Introduction
0.1 - Introduction
0.1.1 - Safety notes
0.1.2 - General safety rules
0.1.3 - Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations
0.1.4 - Lifting instructions
0.1.5 - Tightening torques
0.1.6 - Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants
0.1.7 - Conversion factors
0.2 - Tightening torques for nuts and bolts of electrical connections
0.2.1 - Standard tightening torques
0.2.2 - Battery terminal tightening torques
0.2.3 - Starter motor tightening torques
0.2.4 - Alternator tightening torques
0.3 - Wheel rim to hub screws and nuts tightening torques
0.4 - Introduction
0.4.1 - Safety notes
0.4.2 - General safety rules
0.4.3 - Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations
0.4.4 - Lifting instructions
0.4.5 - Tightening torques
0.4.6 - Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants
0.4.7 - Conversion factors
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-8
0-10
0-12
0-12
0-12
0-13
0-13
0-14
0-15
0-15
0-15
0-16
0-17
0-18
0-21
0-23
10 - Technical characteristics
10.1 - Engine
10.1.1 - Motor description - construction type
10.1.2 - Engine description - Images of engine
10.1.3 - Engine description - Lubricant oil diagram
10.1.4 - Engine description - Fuel circuit diagram
10.1.5 - Engine description - Coolant diagram
10.1.6 - Engine description - Exhaust gas recovery
10.1.7 - Engine description - Exhaust gas after-treatment
10.1.8 - Engine description - Electrical/electronic system
10.1.9 - Use - Environmental conditions
10.1.10 - Use - First start-up
10.1.11 - Usage - Starting procedure
10.1.12 - Usage - Controlling engine operation
10.1.13 - Use - exhaust gas after-treatment systems
10.1.14 - Usage - Active regeneration
10.1.15 - Usage - Passive regeneration
10.1.16 - Use - Stop procedure
10.1.17 - Operating materials - lubricant oil
10.1.18 - Operating materials - Fuel
10.1.19 - Operating materials - Coolant
10.1.20 - Fluids - SCR reduction agent
10.1.21 - Maintenance - Maintenance schedule
10-2
10-2
10-9
10-19
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-27
10-29
10-30
10-35
10-37
10-43
10-45
10-47
10-50
10-51
10-53
10-54
10-56
10-58
III
CONTENTS
10.1.22 - Care and maintenance work - Lubricant oil system
10-60
10.1.23 - Care and maintenance work - Fuel distribution system
10-68
10.1.24 - Care and maintenance - SCR
10-76
10.1.25 - Care and maintenance work - Cooling system
10-77
10.1.26 - Care and maintenance work - Engine cleaning
10-80
10.1.27 - Care and maintenance work - Intake system
10-80
10.1.28 - Care and maintenance work - Belt transmissions
10-84
10.1.29 - Care and maintenance - Adjustments and settings
10-88
10.1.30 - Care and maintenance work - Electrical system
10-90
10.1.31 - Malfunctions - Malfunction table
10-92
10.1.32 - Faults - Engine management
10-94
10.1.33 - Transport and storage - Transport
10-98
10.1.34 - Transport and storage - Transport and storage
10-99
10.1.35 - Technical data - Engine data and adjustment data
10-102
10.1.36 - Technical data - Tools
10-104
10.2 - Engine accessories
10-112
10.2.1 - Pressure transducer (L3)
10-112
10.2.2 - Pressure sensor (L3)
10-113
10.2.3 - Temperature sender (L3)
10-114
10.2.4 - Temperature sender (L3)
10-115
10.2.5 - Temperature sender (L3)
10-118
10.2.6 - Temperature sender (L3)
10-119
10.2.7 - Speed indicator (L3)
10-121
10.2.8 - NOx sensor (L3)
10-123
10.2.9 - NOx sensor (L3)
10-123
10.2.10 - Removing and fitting fuel lines (fuel delivery pump - fuel control block) (L3)
10-124
10.2.11 - Fitting and removing the temperature sender (exhaust gas) (L3)
10-128
10.2.12 - Temperature sender (L3)
10-130
10.2.13 - Removing and fitting NOx sensor (L3)
10-130
10.2.14 - Temperature sender (exhaust gas) (L3)
10-133
10.3 - Transmission
10-134
10.3.1 - Transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
10-134
10.3.2 - Transmission (50 Km/h) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
10-139
10.3.3 - Transmission (60 Km/h) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
10-145
10.3.4 - System diagram (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
10-152
10.3.5 - Description of function (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
10-155
10.3.6 - Transmission control (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
10-159
10.4 - Front axle
10-162
10.4.1 - Front axle - Version with disc brakes
10-162
10.5 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
10-164
10.5.1 - Air conditioning system
10-164
10.5.2 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - General description
10-166
IV
CONTENTS
10.5.3 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Description of operation
10.5.4 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Faults
10.5.5 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Technical specifications
10.5.6 - Supplementary heater - Webasto - Wiring diagrams
10.6 - Hydraulic system
10.6.1 - Hydraulic system
10.6.2 - 45 cc variable displacement pump
10.6.3 - 63 cc variable displacement pump
10.6.4 - Hydraulic pump
10.6.5 - Load sensing valve, pressure cut-off valve
10.6.6 - Priority valve
10.6.7 - Power steering
10.6.8 - Hydraulic front axle suspension
10.6.9 - Servo-brake valve for front axle
10.6.10 - Hydraulic trailer braking system - Italy version
10.6.11 - Hydraulic trailer braking system - Export version
10.6.12 - Steering gear pump - Version without compressor
10.6.13 - Steering gear pump - Version with compressor
10.6.14 - Braking system
10.6.15 - Master cylinder
10.6.16 - Remote control valve - 8-way version
10.6.17 - Ancillary utility distributor - 10-way version
10.6.18 - Remote control valve - 12-way version
10.6.19 - Remote control valve - 14-way version
10.6.20 - Air trailer braking system - Italy version
10.6.21 - Air trailer braking system - DE Export version
10.6.22 - Air trailer braking system - CH Export version
10.6.23 - Compressor
10.6.24 - Pressure cut-off valve
10.6.25 - Quick pressure release valve
10.6.26 - Pressure limiting valve
10.6.27 - Trailer air braking valve (2-way)
10.6.28 - Pneumatic trailer braking valve with unbraked front axle (2-way)
10.6.29 - Trailer air braking valve (1-way)
10.6.30 - Trailer air brake boost solenoid valve
10.6.31 - Trailer parking brake control solenoid valve
10-170
10-172
10-173
10-174
10-178
10-178
10-181
10-183
10-185
10-189
10-195
10-196
10-197
10-199
10-200
10-202
10-204
10-205
10-206
10-207
10-208
10-209
10-210
10-211
10-212
10-214
10-216
10-218
10-219
10-220
10-221
10-222
10-223
10-224
10-225
10-226
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-3
20-5
20-5
20-6
20-6
V
CONTENTS
20.2.4 - SDF Analyser/CVT Diag connection
20.2.5 - ART connection
20.3 - Diagnostic tools
20.3.1 - All Round Tester (ART SAME)
20.3.2 - SDF Analyser
20.3.3 - Serdia 2010
20.4 - Commissioning and calibrating the tractor
20.4.1 - Putting in service - Introduction (Software HLHP versione SC134AE)
20.4.2 - Putting in service - Basic procedure for startup
20.4.3 - Putting in service - End of line settings
20.4.4 - Putting in service - Transmission
20.4.5 - Putting in service - PTO
20.4.6 - Putting in service - ASM
20.4.7 - Putting in service - Lift
20.4.8 - Putting in service - Suspension
20.4.9 - Putting in service - System
20.4.10 - Putting in service - Distributors
20.4.11 - Putting in service - Engine
20.4.12 - Putting in service - Air conditioner
20.4.13 - Putting in service - Park brake
20.4.14 - Putting in service - Agrosky
20.4.15 - Putting in service - MR-D Cabin
20.4.16 - Putting in service - Delete alarms
20.5 - ECU alarms
20.5.1 - Engine alarms
20.5.2 - Transmission alarms
20.5.3 - Armrest alarms
20.5.4 - Electrohydraulic control valve alarms
20.5.5 - HLHP alarms
20.5.6 - AC system alarms
20.5.7 - EPB Alarms
20.5.8 - Electronic battery master switch alarms
20-6
20-6
20-7
20-7
20-11
20-14
20-108
20-108
20-108
20-112
20-113
20-122
20-123
20-125
20-129
20-131
20-139
20-147
20-151
20-154
20-155
20-155
20-158
20-160
20-160
20-229
20-459
20-462
20-462
20-484
20-488
20-497
30 - Method of intervention
30.1 - Index Repair instructions (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30.1.1 - Repair level III
30.2 - Index Repair instructions (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30.2.1 - Repair level III
30.3 - Installation of solenoid valves and cartridge valves
30.3.1 - Installation
30.3.2 - Solenoid valve tightening torques
30.3.3 - Cartridge valve tightening torques
30.4 - B0 - Engine
30.4.1 - Removal and refitting of the crankcase breather
30.4.2 - Removal and refitting of the crankcase breather
30.4.3 - Renewal of the crankshaft oil seal
VI
30-2
30-2
30-4
30-4
30-6
30-6
30-6
30-7
30-8
30-8
30-11
30-14
CONTENTS
30.4.4 - Changing the crankshaft ring gasket (flywheel side)
30.4.5 - Installation and removal of the crankshaft sleeve
30.4.6 - Removal and refitting of the front cover (fixing elements)
30.4.7 - Removal and refitting of the oil sump pan
30.4.8 - Removal and refitting of the oil filler pipe
30.4.9 - Removal and refitting of the V-belt pulley
30.4.10 - Removal and refitting of the torsional vibration damper
30.4.11 - Removal and refitting of the flywheel (fixing elements)
30.4.12 - Compression test
30.4.13 - Removal and refitting of the cylinder head cover
30.4.14 - Check and adjust valve clearances
30.4.15 - Removal and refitting of oil cooler (auxiliary services)
30.4.16 - Removal and refitting of the lube oil cooler housing
30.4.17 - Removal and refitting of the pilot block
30.4.18 - Removal and refitting of the high-pressure pump, Installation position A
30.4.19 - Installation and removal of the high pressure pump, Assembly position B
30.4.20 - Removal and refitting of the injector
30.4.21 - Removal and refitting of the common rail
30.4.22 - Removal and refitting of the charge air duct
30.4.23 - Removal and refitting of the charge air manifold
30.4.24 - Removal and refitting of the air intake pipe
30.4.25 - Removal and refitting of the water pump
30.4.26 - Removing and installing the belt tensioner (Level 1).
30.4.27 - Removing and installing the support plate (Level 1)
30.4.28 - Removing and installing the support console (Level 1)
30.4.29 - Removal and installation of the exhaust pipe (auxiliaries)
30.4.30 - Removal and refitting of the exhaust gas turbocharger
30.4.31 - Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
30.4.32 - Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil return pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
30.4.33 - Removing and installing the belt tensioner (Level 2)
30.4.34 - Removing and installing the vee-groove pulley (#1)
30.4.35 - Removing and installing the vee-groove pulley (#2)
30.4.36 - Removing and installing the support console (Level 2)
30.4.37 - Removing and installing the console (Level 1)
30.4.38 - Removing and installing the support console (Level 2)
30.4.39 - Assembly and disassembly of the piston cooling nozzles (L3)
30.4.40 - Assembly and disassembly of the piston cooling nozzles (L3)
30.4.41 - Replacing the starter ring gear on the flywheel (L3)
30.4.42 - Replacing the starter ring gear on the flywheel (L3)
30.4.43 - Fitting and removing counterweight drive system, checking (L3)
30.4.44 - Assembly and disassembly of the crankshaft (L3)
30.4.45 - Crankshaft check (L3)
30.4.46 - Check the endfloat of the crankshaft (L3)
30.4.47 - Fitting and removing crankshaft bearings (L3)
30.4.48 - Check the crankshaft bearings (L3)
30.4.49 - Assembly and disassembly of the connecting rod drum (L3)
30.4.50 - Connecting rod drum check (L3)
30.4.51 - Replace the crankshaft O-ring (flywheel end) (L3)
30-18
30-20
30-23
30-25
30-28
30-30
30-31
30-33
30-35
30-37
30-40
30-43
30-45
30-47
30-50
30-54
30-58
30-66
30-74
30-75
30-77
30-79
30-81
30-82
30-85
30-87
30-89
30-92
30-94
30-97
30-98
30-101
30-103
30-104
30-105
30-107
30-108
30-109
30-110
30-112
30-120
30-122
30-125
30-128
30-131
30-132
30-140
30-147
VII
CONTENTS
30.4.52 - Disassembly and assembly of the gear box (L3)
30-151
30.4.53 - Disassembly and assembly of the gear box (L3)
30-154
30.4.54 - Disassembly and assembly of the gear box (L3)
30-157
30.4.55 - Assembly and disassembly of the camshaft (L3)
30-159
30.4.56 - Check the camshaft (L3)
30-160
30.4.57 - Assembly and disassembly of the distribution valve (L3)
30-161
30.4.58 - Removing and refitting the valve timing system (L3)
30-164
30.4.59 - Assembly and disassembly of the control elements (L3)
30-166
30.4.60 - Assembly and disassembly of the oil intake pipe (L3)
30-168
30.4.61 - Assembly and disassembly of the oil intake pipe (L3)
30-170
30.4.62 - Disassembly and completion of the pilot unit (L3)
30-171
30.4.63 - Disassembly and completion of the pilot unit (L3)
30-175
30.4.64 - A/C drive belt alignment and tension adjustment
30-179
30.5 - C0 - Engine accessories
30-185
30.5.1 - Removal and installation of the fuel filter console
30-185
30.5.2 - Removal and installation of the fuel lift pump
30-187
30.5.3 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (fuel lift pump - pilot block)
30-189
30.5.4 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - high pressure pump)
30-193
30.5.5 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - fuel lift pump)
30-195
30.5.6 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (rail, cylinder head, pilot block - fuel filter)
30-198
30.5.7 - Removal and refitting of the heater
30-202
30.5.8 - Removal and refitting of the heater (details)
30-204
30.5.9 - Installing and removing the thermostat
30-207
30.5.10 - Thermostat check (with thermostat disassembled)
30-210
30.5.11 - Removal and installation of the thermostat housing
30-211
30.5.12 - Removal and refitting of the fan support
30-214
30.5.13 - Removal and assembly of the fan support
30-215
30.5.14 - Installing and removing the temperature transmitter (Exhaust gas)
30-220
30.5.15 - Removal and refitting of the starter motor
30-221
30.5.16 - Removal and refitting of the alternator (ribbed V-belt, level 2)
30-223
30.5.17 - Removal and refitting of the alternator (ribbed V-belt, level 1)
30-224
30.5.18 - Removal and refitting of the crankshaft speed sensor
30-226
30.5.19 - Removal and refitting of the camshaft speed sensor
30-227
30.5.20 - Installation and removal of the rotation device
30-229
30.5.21 - Installation and removal of the rotation device (torsional vibration damper)
30-231
30.5.22 - Removal and installation of the air conditioning compressor
30-232
30.6 - D0 - Transmission
30-235
30.6.1 - Separation of Rear Axle from Transmission (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-235
30.6.2 - Removal of cartridge (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-236
30.6.3 - Removal of Cartridge (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-238
30.6.4 - Disassembly of shifting drum (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-241
30.6.5 - Disassembly of Shifting Drum (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-241
30.6.6 - Disassembly of P1 ring gear carrier
30-242
30.6.7 - Disassembly of P1/P2 Planetary drive
30-245
30.6.8 - Disassembly of P5/P6 Planetary drive
30-247
VIII
CONTENTS
30.6.9 - Disassembly of KV clutch
30-249
30.6.10 - Disassembly of K1 clutch
30-250
30.6.11 - Disassembly of K3/K4 clutch and P3/P4 planetary drive
30-251
30.6.12 - Disassembly of K3/K4 clutch
30-252
30.6.13 - Disassembly of P3/P4 planetary drive
30-253
30.6.14 - Disassembly of KR clutch
30-254
30.6.15 - Disassembly of K2 clutch (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-254
30.6.16 - Disassembly of K2 Clutch (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-256
30.6.17 - Disassembly of hydrostatic unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-258
30.6.18 - Disassembly of Hydrostatic Unit (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-260
30.6.19 - Disassembly of control (TCU) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-262
30.6.20 - Disassembly of Control (TCU) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-262
30.6.21 - Disassembly of pump (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-263
30.6.22 - Disassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-265
30.6.23 - Disassembly of Suction filter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-267
30.6.24 - Disassembly of suction filter (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-267
30.6.25 - Disassembly of filter head (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-268
30.6.26 - Disassembly of pressure relief valves (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-268
30.6.27 - Disassembly of control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-269
30.6.28 - Disassembly of valves, pressure sensor, inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-269
30.6.29 - Disassembly of wiring harness, valve block and plate (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-271
30.6.30 - Disassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple) (7210 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-274
30.6.31 - Disassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-276
30.6.32 - Disassembly of valve block (all-wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-278
30.6.33 - Disassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-279
30.6.34 - Disassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-281
30.6.35 - Disassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-282
30.6.36 - Disassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-283
30.6.37 - Disassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-283
30.6.38 - Disassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit
30-285
30.6.39 - Disassembly of W.H. and E.C.U. (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-287
30.6.40 - Disassembly of inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-289
IX
CONTENTS
30.6.41 - Disassembly of Inductive Sensors (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-289
30.6.42 - Disassembly of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-290
30.6.43 - Disassembly of Plug-In Module (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-291
30.6.44 - Disassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drive) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-298
30.6.45 - Disassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-302
30.6.46 - Disassembly of pinion (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-302
30.6.47 - Disassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-304
30.6.48 - Disassembly of output shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-306
30.6.49 - Disassembly of Output Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-307
30.6.50 - Disassembly of intermediate housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-308
30.6.51 - Disassembly of Intermediate Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-309
30.6.52 - Disassembly of drive shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-310
30.6.53 - Disassembly of Drive Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-312
30.6.54 - Reassembly of Transmission Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-313
30.6.55 - Reassembly of Drive Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-314
30.6.56 - Reassembly of Intermediate Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-317
30.6.57 - Reassembly of Plug-In Module (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-319
30.6.58 - Reassembly of Output Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-331
30.6.59 - Preassembly of Housing Lid (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-333
30.6.60 - Reassembly of Inductive Sensors (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-334
30.6.61 - Reassembly of W.H. and E.C.U. (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-334
30.6.62 - Reassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-336
30.6.63 - Reassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-337
30.6.64 - Reassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-339
30.6.65 - Reassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-343
30.6.66 - Reassembly of Control (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-345
30.6.67 - Reassembly of Hydrostatic Unit (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-346
30.6.68 - Reassembly of Suction filter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-349
X
CONTENTS
30.6.69 - Preassembly of transmission housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-349
30.6.70 - Reassembly of drive shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-350
30.6.71 - Reassembly of intermediate housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-353
30.6.72 - Reassembly of pinion (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-355
30.6.73 - Reassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-359
30.6.74 - Reassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drIve) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-363
30.6.75 - Reassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-372
30.6.76 - Reinstallation of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-373
30.6.77 - Reassembly of output shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-374
30.6.78 - Preassembly of housing lid (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-376
30.6.79 - Reassembly of plate (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-377
30.6.80 - Reassembly of valve block (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-380
30.6.81 - Reassembly of wiring harnesses (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-381
30.6.82 - Reassembly of inductive sensors, pressure sensors, valves (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-383
30.6.83 - Reassembly of control unit (hydrostatic unit) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-386
30.6.84 - Reassembly of pressure relief valves (PRV) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-386
30.6.85 - Reassembly of filter head (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-387
30.6.86 - Reassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-388
30.6.87 - Reassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-390
30.6.88 - Reassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-391
30.6.89 - Reassembly of valve block (all wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-393
30.6.90 - Reassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple) (7210 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-394
30.6.91 - Reassembly of pump (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-397
30.6.92 - Reassembly of control (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-399
30.6.93 - Reassembly of hydrostatic unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-400
30.6.94 - Reassembly of suction filter (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-403
30.6.95 - Reassembly of K2 Clutch
30-403
30.6.96 - Reassembly of KR clutch
30-406
30.6.97 - Reassembly of P3/P4 planetary drive
30-408
30.6.98 - Reassembly of K3/K4 clutch (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-409
30.6.99 - Reassembly of K3/K4 Clutch (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-414
30.6.100 - Reassembly of K1 Clutch
30-419
30.6.101 - Reassembly of KV Clutch
30-419
30.6.102 - Reassembly of P5/P6 planetary drive
30-422
30.6.103 - Reassembly of P1/P2 planetary drive
30-426
30.6.104 - Reassembly of P1 Ring gear carrier
30-431
30.6.105 - Reinstallation of cartridge (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-437
30.6.106 - Reinstallation of Cartridge (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-440
XI
CONTENTS
30.6.107 - Fitting of rear axle to the transmission (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-444
30.6.108 - Pipes and closing components (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-445
30.7 - E0 - Rear axle
30-446
30.7.1 - Removing the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-446
30.7.2 - Removing brakes (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-449
30.7.3 - Removing the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-451
30.7.4 - Removing the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-454
30.7.5 - Removing the oil feed (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-466
30.7.6 - Removing the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-467
30.7.7 - Fitting lifter, oil feed and blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-468
30.7.8 - Fitting the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-468
30.7.9 - Fitting the oil feed (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-471
30.7.10 - Fitting blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-473
30.7.11 - Fitting the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-473
30.7.12 - Fitting the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-500
30.7.13 - Fitting brakes (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-504
30.7.14 - Fitting the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30-507
30.7.15 - Separating rear axle from transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010) 30-513
30.7.16 - Axle Stub - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-514
30.7.17 - Brake Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-517
30.7.18 - Differential - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-519
30.7.19 - PTO Transmission - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-522
30.7.20 - Oil Supply - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-528
30.7.21 - Lifting Unit - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-529
30.7.22 - Rear Axle Housing - Preassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-530
30.7.23 - Lifting Unit - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-530
30.7.24 - Oil Supply - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-533
30.7.25 - Fitting the PTO transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-536
30.7.26 - Fitting the differential (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-550
30.7.27 - Brake Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-555
30.7.28 - Axle Stub - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-558
30.7.29 - Attaching rear axle to gearbox (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-564
XII
CONTENTS
30.7.30 - Procedure for checking EPB travel (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30.7.31 - Procedure to check EPB stroke (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30.8 - F0 - Front axle
30.8.1 - Toe-in/steering angle/assembly tests
30.8.2 - Steering cylinders assembly
30.8.3 - Axle shaft assembly
30.8.4 - Flange assembly
30.8.5 - Differential assembly - carrier
30.8.6 - Checking the bevel gear pair
30.8.7 - Differential disassembly
30.8.8 - Axle pivot bearings assembly
30.8.9 - Bevel pinion assembly
30.8.10 - Planetary reduction gear assembly
30.8.11 - Wheel hub assembly
30.8.12 - Brake assembly
30.9 - G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
30.9.1 - Handbrake adjustment
30.9.2 - Supplementary heater - Webasto - Troubleshooting
30.9.3 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Functional tests
30.9.4 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Maintenance
30.9.5 - Supplementary heater - Webasto - Disassembly and reassembly
30.10 - H0 - Hydraulic system
30.10.1 - Tightening the hydraulic power steering unit fastener screws
30.11 - L0 - Electrical system
30.11.1 - Fitting BDS cables
30.11.2 - Steering position sensor assembly
30.12 - R0 - Rear lift
30.12.1 - 939272 - Pulling force sensor (23/11/2010)
30.13 - S0 - Wheels
30.13.1 - 939267 - Tyre fitting (23/11/2010)
30-565
30-578
30-590
30-590
30-593
30-598
30-601
30-604
30-612
30-613
30-622
30-628
30-635
30-638
30-649
30-657
30-657
30-659
30-663
30-664
30-674
30-684
30-684
30-686
30-686
30-687
30-695
30-695
30-696
30-696
40 - Wiring diagrams
40.1 - Introduction
40.1.1 - Introduction
40.1.2 - Basic electronics for mechanics (1/2)
40.1.3 - Basic electronics for mechanics (2/2)
40.1.4 - Electrical and electronic components (1/2)
40.1.5 - Electrical and electronic components (2/2)
40.2 - Components
40.2.1 - 2.8519.134.0/50 - HLHP control unit
40.2.2 - 2.8519.133.0/20 - Transmission control unit
40.2.3 - Engine control unit
40.2.4 - Main power relay switch (TGC/RME-SA1)
40.2.5 - A - Starting and charging
40.2.6 - B - Fuses
40.2.7 - C - Grounds
40-2
40-2
40-4
40-7
40-13
40-21
40-26
40-26
40-28
40-30
40-35
40-42
40-42
40-52
XIII
CONTENTS
40.2.8 - D - Intermediate connections
40.2.9 - E - On-board instruments and visual and audible indicators
40.2.10 - F - External lights
40.2.11 - G - Interior lights
40.2.12 - H - Electrical and manual controls
40.2.13 - I - Circuit breakers
40.2.14 - J - Relays
40.2.15 - K - Sensors and transmitters
40.2.16 - L - Electromagnets and solenoid valves
40.2.17 - M - Electrical/electronic devices, flasher units and timers
40.2.18 - N - Electric motors and actuators
40.2.19 - O - Resistors, rheostats, diodes and diode boards
40.2.20 - P - Various services
40.2.21 - R - Diagnostics
40.2.22 - T - Power supply points (+15 o +30)
40.3 - Systems
40.3.1 - S001 - Electrical engine governor
40.3.2 - S002 - Starter
40.3.3 - S003 - Preheating
40.3.4 - S004 - AdBlue
40.3.5 - S005 - Transmission
40.3.6 - S005A - Transmission - Version with performance steering
40.3.7 - S006 - Front axle suspension
40.3.8 - S007 - Instrument panel
40.3.9 - S008 - Lights Version without front hitch
40.3.10 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch
40.3.11 - S010 - Turn indicators
40.3.12 - S011 - Work lights
40.3.13 - S012 - Semi-active cab suspension
40.3.14 - S013 - Manual air conditioner
40.3.15 - S014 - Automatic air conditioning
40.3.16 - S015 - +15 Positives
40.3.17 - S016 - +30 Positives
40.3.18 - S017 - CAN BUS Line - Standard version
40.3.19 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system
40.3.20 - S017B - Visual guidance Can Bus line - Version without ISO11783
40.3.21 - S018 - CAN BUS Line - Version with ISO 11783
40.3.22 - S018A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
40.3.23 - S018B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
40.3.24 - S018C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
40.3.25 - S019 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor
40.3.26 - S020 - PTO
40.3.27 - S021 - Front and rear hitches
40.3.28 - S022 - Brakes
40.3.29 - S023 - Hydraulic trailer braking
40.3.30 - S024 - Hydraulic distributors
40.3.31 - S025 - Windscreen wipers
40.3.32 - S026 - Radio
XIV
40-55
40-78
40-79
40-82
40-82
40-83
40-88
40-90
40-95
40-96
40-99
40-100
40-102
40-104
40-104
40-106
40-106
40-112
40-117
40-120
40-125
40-134
40-141
40-144
40-148
40-157
40-169
40-178
40-194
40-196
40-201
40-207
40-211
40-217
40-231
40-245
40-250
40-269
40-278
40-287
40-297
40-309
40-315
40-321
40-332
40-337
40-342
40-346
CONTENTS
40.3.33 - S027 - Accessories
40.3.34 - S028 - Diagnostics
40.3.35 - S029 - Monitor
40.3.36 - S030 - Agrosky - Version with visual guidance, without ISO11783
40.3.37 - S031 - ISO 11783
40.3.38 - S031A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
40.3.39 - S031B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
40.3.40 - S031C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
40.3.41 - S032 - Webasto
40.3.42 - S033 - Lights - Version without front hitch (U.S.A.)
40.3.43 - S034 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.)
40.3.44 - S035 - Turn indicators (U.S.A.)
40.3.45 - S036 - Work lights (U.S.A.)
40.3.46 - S037 - +15 Positives (U.S.A.)
40.3.47 - S038 - +30 Positives (U.S.A.)
40.3.48 - S039 - PTO (USA)
40.3.49 - S040 - Braking (U.S.A.)
40.3.50 - S041 - ISO 11783 (U.S.A.)
40.4 - Wiring harnesses
40.4.1 - 0.012.2018.4/20 - License plate light
40.4.2 - 0.014.0007.4/20 - Lights selector switch
40.4.3 - 0.014.5144.4/10 - Battery negative
40.4.4 - 0.015.3974.4/10 - Front axle suspension
40.4.5 - 0.015.4257.4/10 - PTO sensor (USA)
40.4.6 - 0.015.5429.4/20 - Front lift control
40.4.7 - 0.016.0642.4/20 - Rear LH lower work light on cab - Xenon version
40.4.8 - 0.016.0642.4/20 - Rear RH lower work light on cab - Xenon version
40.4.9 - 0.016.0650.4/10 - LH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version
40.4.10 - 0.016.0650.4/10 - RH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version
40.4.11 - 0.017.0496.4/10 - Supplementary RH front work light on arm
40.4.12 - 0.017.0496.4/10 - Supplementary RH front work light on arm
40.4.13 - 0.017.0497.4/10 - Rear RH lower work light on cab
40.4.14 - 0.017.0497.4/10 - Rear LH lower work light on cab
40.4.15 - 0.017.8425.4/10 - Rear trailer socket
40.4.16 - 0.017.8426.4 - Rear trailer socket (U.S.A.)
40.4.17 - 0.017.8887.4/10 - ISO 11783 - Front line
40.4.18 - 0.018.8803.4 - Battery positive terminal
40.4.19 - 0.018.9843.4/20 - ISO 11783 - Rear line
40.4.20 - 0.018.9845.4/10 - Fuses and relays
40.4.21 - 0.018.9990.4/10 - Distributors
40.4.22 - 0.018.9992.4/10 - AdBlue
40.4.23 - 0.019.2378.4/40 - LH mudguard
40.4.24 - 0.019.2378.4/40 - RH mudguard
40.4.25 - 0.019.2379.4/20 - Front LH lower work lights on cab
40.4.26 - 0.019.2379.4/20 - Front RH lower work lights on cab
40.4.27 - 0.019.2380.4/30 - Hazard warning lights switch (USA)
40.4.28 - 0.019.2383.4/20 - Engine cowl
40.4.29 - 0.019.2474.4/10 - Rear PTO
40-350
40-366
40-371
40-374
40-380
40-388
40-398
40-408
40-419
40-423
40-431
40-442
40-450
40-466
40-469
40-475
40-481
40-487
40-496
40-496
40-497
40-498
40-499
40-500
40-500
40-501
40-502
40-502
40-503
40-504
40-505
40-506
40-507
40-508
40-509
40-511
40-512
40-513
40-515
40-517
40-518
40-521
40-523
40-525
40-527
40-528
40-530
40-532
XV
CONTENTS
40.4.30 - 0.019.2539.4/10 - Hydraulic braking
40.4.31 - 0.019.2571.4/10 - ISO 11786
40.4.32 - 0.019.2617.4/70 - ISO 11783 - Cab line
40.4.33 - 0.019.3658.4/20 - Agrosky solenoid valve
40.4.34 - 0.019.3659.4/10 - On-board monitor - Armrest
40.4.35 - 0.019.4559.4/10 - Rear service work light
40.4.36 - 0.019.4688.4/10 - Front top work lights on cab
40.4.37 - 0.019.4689.4/20 - RH rear work lights on cab roof
40.4.38 - 0.019.4689.4/20 - LH rear work lights on cab roof
40.4.39 - 0.019.4711.4/10 - Semi-active cab
40.4.40 - 0.019.4913.4/10 - Front top work lights on cab - LED version
40.4.41 - 0.019.4914.4/20 - LH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version
40.4.42 - 0.019.4914.4/20 - RH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version
40.4.43 - 0.019.5311.4/10 - Automatic A/C system interface
40.4.44 - 0.019.9825.4/10 - Agrosky antenna (Assisted Steering)
40.4.45 - 0.019.9826.4/30 - Agrosky - I-Monitor
40.4.46 - 0.019.9827.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - LED version with Agrosky
40.4.47 - 0.019.9828.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - Version with Agrosky
40.4.48 - 0.019.9829.4/20 - Agrosky antenna (Visual guidance)
40.4.49 - 0.020.1009.4 - Front LH lower work lights on cab (USA)
40.4.50 - 0.020.1009.4 - Front RH lower work lights on cab (USA)
40.4.51 - 0.020.1026.4/10 - LH front supplementary work light on arm (U.S.A.)
40.4.52 - 0.020.1026.4/10 - RH front supplementary work light on arm (U.S.A.)
40.4.53 - 0.020.5056.4 - Brake hydraulic system pressure sensor - 60 km/h
40.4.54 - 0.020.8658.4 - Side instrument panel
40.4.55 - 0.020.8664.4 - RH transmission
40.4.56 - 0.020.8854.4 - Windscreen washer pumps
40.4.57 - 0.020.8862.4 - Roof
40.4.58 - 0.021.0396.4 - LH transmission
40.4.59 - 0.021.0489.4 - Auxiliary heating - Webasto
40.4.60 - 0.021.0490.4 - Trailer socket with ABS brakes
40.4.61 - 0.900.0816.0 - Front PTO
40.4.62 - 04217216 - Preheating relay power supply
40.4.63 - 04217217 - Preheating
40.4.64 - 04218107 - Engine
40.4.65 - 04436707 - Left hand rotating beacon
40.4.66 - 04436707 - RH rotating beacon
40.4.67 - 04502029 - Fuel injectors
XVI
40-533
40-535
40-538
40-541
40-543
40-544
40-545
40-546
40-548
40-549
40-551
40-553
40-554
40-556
40-558
40-560
40-562
40-564
40-565
40-566
40-567
40-568
40-569
40-570
40-571
40-577
40-579
40-581
40-583
40-585
40-586
40-588
40-589
40-589
40-590
40-591
40-592
40-593
0 - Introduction
0-1
Introduction
0.1 - Introduction
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instruction for repair technicians and a practical guide to improving the quality
of repairs. This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the machine, indicating the correct methods
for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections. The instructions also indicate
the products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data. The technical material contained in this manual is reserved to
Authorised Dealers and Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the machines in question through the
issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and supplements for optional equipment. All technicians and their colleagues
are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties
without the express written permission of the Manufacturer, who remains the sole owner of this document with all rights reserved in
accordance with applicable laws.
To ensure that machines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue to function correctly, it is very important that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner. The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are
safe and effective. Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment; these tools have been specifally
designed for the intended purpose and may be ordered directly from the Manufacturers. DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not
only is there a risk of personal injury, but such tools are rarely suited to the purpose for which they are used. In potentially hazardous
situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary actions to eliminate the danger
l
l
l
l
l
0-2
Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the machine as regards its components, operation and controls, always take special care when carrying out the following operations; Remember that the machine you are working on is in need of repair or
overhaul and consequently may not always behave as expected.
Before starting work, clean the tractor thoroughly to remove all mud, dust and road dirt. Also clean the cab to remove all traces
of oil, snow and ice from the access steps and grab rails.
When climbing up to or down from the cab, always ensure you maintain three points of contact at a time (foot or handholds)
in order to keep your balance and prevent accidental falls.
Always take special care when carrying out fault diagnosis operations; these operations often require two persons, who must
never stand in front of the wheels when the engine is running.
When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close-fitting clothing, safety goggles and protective gloves that are suitable for
the task (cleaning, draining fluids, repairs). When working near moving parts, long hair should be gathered up and tied back
safely under a cap to prevent the risk of entanglement and severe injury.
Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in the work to come near the tractor; ensure that they remain at a safe distance.
Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is running, some moving parts are not easily visible and therefore present a
risk of entanglement, even if protected by safety guards.
Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting the engine in order to avoid the formation of dangerous concentrations
of toxic gases; always connect suitable fume extraction equipment to the exhaust pipe.
Do not start the engine with the safety guards removed under any circumstances; all repair and adjustment operations must
be carried out with the engine stopped.
Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the engine is running.
Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames nearby when topping up fuel or oil. Always remove the battery from the
machine before recharging.
Before checking or removing the battery, stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated area where the temperature exceeds 0C.
When checking or recharging the battery, do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity as the hydrogen gas given off by
the battery is highly explosive.
The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very harmful if it comes into contact with the skin and the eyes; for this reason, always wear gloves and safety goggles with side shields when checking or topping up the battery. Should any electrolyte
accidentally come into contact with your skin, wash the affected areas immediately with plenty of fresh water; if electrolyte
comes into contact with your clothing, this should be removed as soon as possible. In case of accidental ingestion of electrolyte, drink copious amounts of water, milk or vegetable oil and take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbonate, etc. and seek
medical attention immediately.
Before working on the electrical systems, always disconnect the battery terminals.
Introduction
DANGER
Always disconnect the negative lead (--) before the positive lead (+); when re-connecting the battery on completion of
the work, first connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative (--).
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Before carrying out any arc welding (permitted only on implements attached to the machine) always disconnect the battery
terminals and unplug all the connectors of the electronic control units and the alternator.
When topping up lubricants, always wear suitable protective gloves.
Do not wear clothing contaminated by engine or hydraulic oil; prolonged contact with the skin can be harmful and may cause
allergic reactions.
Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed of properly; recover used lubricants and dispose of them in accordance
with the applicable regulations.
Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or pneumatic systems, discharge all residual pressure from the circuits.
Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system or engine, allow the oil and engine coolant to cool down.
When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it will be necessary to support the tractor; use stands, jacks or blocks capable
of supporting the weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to prevent the machine from overturning.
To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not worn and that hooks are
not damaged.
Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for the weight of the components to be removed. Ensure lifting equipment is
attached correctly.
When lifting or supporting an assembly or component, manoeuvre the parts slowly and carefully to avoid swinging movements
or collision with other components.
Never work on components suspended from a hoist or crane.
When removing the retaining bolts of a component that could fall, always leave two opposing bolts in place for safety; before
removing these last two bolts, attach the component to suitable lifting equipment or position support blocks.
Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling operations should be cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent the risk
of slipping and fire.
When refitting electrical wiring looms and wires, ensure that they are properly secured with their original retaining straps or
brackets to prevent the possibility of damage caused by vibration.
Never insert your fingers or hands to check the alignment between fixing holes in components; always use a suitable dowel
of soft material.
When refitting assemblies or components, always use the specified tightening torques; the tightening torques indicated in the
paragraphs regarding assembly/refitting operations have been determined through experimentation and must be scrupulously
adhered to.
When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or that rotate at high speed, take particular care when carrying out final installation checks.
l
l
l
l
l
Unless otherwise indicated, lower the lifting equipment until it the component or assembly rests on the ground.
After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the open ends of the pipes to prevent ingress of dirt.
Before removing a cylinder, fully retract the piston and secure it in this position using a retaining strap.
Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings indicating the correct assembly position. If necessary,
make new markings to ensure correct assembly.
When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly to avoid pulling on the wires.
Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion when reconnecting.
Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them together in a safe place.
To lift the tractor or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of suitable capacity.
When using eyebolts for lifting components, first check that they are not deformed or damaged; screw them fully home and
then turn the bolt so that the eye is aligned with the lifting hook.
Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the part, cover it to protect it from dirt and dust.
0-3
Introduction
Precautions for refitting operations
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and pour in new coolant to the correct level. Start the engine
to circulate the coolant and then check the level again and top up.
After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the
hydraulic circuits and then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
After having removed a variable displacement pump, connect the drain pipe and fill the pump casing with oil through the filler
hole provided.
Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts thoroughly after assembly.
Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:
Table 1
WIRE ROPES (standard twisted S or Z type)
rope mm Capacity (kg)
8
10
12
14
16
18
25
50
62
75
100
150
650
1000
1450
2000
2600
3300
620
1740
2500
3460
4500
5710
500
1420
2050
2820
3670
4660
500
1000
1250
1400
2000
2500
400
800
1000
1120
1600
2000
860
1730
2160
2420
3460
4330
700
1410
1760
1980
2820
3530
0-4
The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the rope/
sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
Introduction
DANGER
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
l
Never lift a heavy load when the two legs of the ropes form a wide angle. the permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse proportion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension
for two 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000 kg.
Fig. 1
DANGER
The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the relative
assembly paragraphs.
The tightening torques indicated below refer to screws and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where applicable, with anaerobic
threadlocking compound. the values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, copper, plastic, sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.
Table 2
BOLT SIZE
M6x1
M8x1.25
M10x1.5
M12x1.75
M14x2
M16x2
M18x2.5
M20x2.5
M22x2.5
M24x3
M27x3
BOLT CLASS
8.8
Nm
8.0 8.8
19.4 21.4
38.4 42.4
66.5 73.5
106 117
164 182
228 252
321 355
441 487
553 611
816 902
lb.ft.
5.9 6.5
14.3 15.8
28.3 31.2
49.0 54.2
78.1 86.2
120.9 134.1
168.0 185.7
236.6 261.6
325.0 358.9
407.6 450.3
601.4 664.8
10.9
Nm
11.8 13.0
28.5 31.5
56.4 62.4
96.9 107
156 172
241 267
334 370
472 522
647 715
812 898
1198 1324
lb.ft.
8.7 9.6
21.0 23.2
41.6 46.0
71.4 78.9
115.0 126.8
117.6 196.8
246.2 272.7
347.9 384.7
476.8 527.0
598.4 661.8
882.9 975.8
12.9
Nm
13.8 15.2
33.3 36.9
67.4 74.4
115 128
184 204
282 312
391 432
553 611
751 830
950 1050
1419 1569
lb.ft.
10.2 11.2
24.5 27.2
49.7 54.8
84.8 94.3
135.6 150.3
207.8 229.9
288.2 318.4
407.6 450.3
553.5 611.7
700.2 773.9
1045.8 1156.4
0-5
Introduction
FINE
M8x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x2
20.8 23.0
40.6 44.8
72.2 79.8
69.4 76.7
114 126
175 194
256 282
355 393
482 532
602 666
15.3 17.0
29.9 33.0
53.2 58.8
51.1 56.5
84.0 92.9
129 143
188.7 207.8
261.6 289.6
355.2 392.1
443.7 490.8
30.6 33.8
59.7 65.9
106 118
102 112
168 186
257 285
375 415
523 578
708 782
884 978
22.6 24.9
44.0 48.6
78.1 87.0
75.2 82.5
123.8 137.1
189.4 210.0
276.4 305.9
385.5 426.0
521.8 576.3
651.5 720.8
35.8 39.6
71.2 78.6
126 140
121 134
199 220
301 333
439 485
611 676
821 908
1035 1143
26.4 29.2
52.5 57.9
92.9 103.2
89.2 98.8
146.7 162.1
221.8 245.4
323.5 357.4
450.3 498.2
605.1 669.2
762.8 842.4
Fittings
The tightening torques indicated below refer to fittings assembled on any material.
Table 3
METRIC
17
19
19
19
22
24
27
30
36
36
41
50
60
17
19
19
22
24
27
30
36
41
46
50
60
T end fittings
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
17
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
13
37
19
37
53
24
73
27
73
100
36
160
41
160
250
50
305
60
L end fittings
90 end fittings
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
17
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
Torque Nm
10%
14
30
40
48
58
65
73
95
100
160
250
305
13
37
19
37
19
37
53
73
24
27
53
73
24
27
53
73
100
160
36
41
100
160
36
41
100
160
250
305
50
60
250
305
50
60
250
305
Plugs
Table 4
Hex plugs
Thread size
0-6
Wrench
Torque Nm 10%
Wrench
Torque Nm 10%
Introduction
METRIC
M6x1
M8x1
M10x1
M10x1.25
M10x1.5
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M12x1.75
M14x1.5
M14x2
M16x1.5
M16x2
M18x1.5
M18x2.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
M24x2
M27x2
M28x1.5
M30x1.5
M32x1.5
M35x1.5
M40x1.5
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 5/8
G 3/4
G 1
10
13
13
13
13
17
17
17
19
19
22
22
17
17
19
22
22
22
22
14
19
22
19
22
22
22
10
12
14
14
14
30
30
30
40
40
48
48
58
58
65
80
80
100
130
13
37
53
73
85
100
160
10
12
12
17
19
22
24
14
30
40
48
58
73
80
110
150
180
225
Thread size
7/16 - 20
1/2 - 20
9/16 - 18
3/4 - 16
7/8 - 14
1 1/16 - 12
1 3/16 - 12
1 5/16 - 12
1 5/8 - 12
1 7/8 - 12
2 1/2 - 12
Wrench
14
16
17
22
27
32
36
36
38
50
60
75
Torque Nm 10%
13
19
28
47
76
110
110
138
155
215
290
345
0-7
Introduction
Fittings for pipes with banjo union
These tightening torques refer to tightening the fitting with new copper sealing washers.
Table 6
Unions for one-way fittings
Thread size
Wrench
M8x1
M8x1.25
M10x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
M26x1.5
M28x1.5
M30x1.5
M35x2
M38x1.5
M42x2
M45x1.5
M50x2
M52x1.5
M65x2
13
13
17
19
22
22
27
32
36
41
50
60
Torque
10%
14
20
30
40
48
58
65
80
110
180
250
320
Nm Wrench
12
Torque
10%
14
14
17
19
22
24
27
32
36
46
55
60
75
20
30
40
48
58
73
95
130
200
280
320
450
Nm Wrench
Torque
10%
14
17
19
22
24
27
32
36
46
55
60
75
20
30
40
48
58
73
95
130
200
280
320
450
Nm
FUNCTION
THREADLOCKER
0-8
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Loctite 222 Colour: opaque fluorescent Anaerobic product suitable for low-strength locking of retaining,
purple
adjustment and precision fasteners. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 242 Colour: fluorescent blue
Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and
bolt; used in place of conventional mechanical locking systems.
Used for medium-strength locking. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 243 Colour: opaque fluorescent Alternative product to 242 ; oil tolerant and so can be used on
blue
lightly lubricated surfaces without prior use of activator.
Loctite 270 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs
that do not normally require disassembly. Parts must be heated
to approximately 80C for removal. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Introduction
DEGREASERS
Loctite 703
AND ACTIVATORS
SEALANTS
(for
faces and fittings)
INSTANT
SIVES
ADHE-
SEALANTS
CONE
SILI-
SEALANTS
URETHANE
POL-
Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to application of Loctite anaerobic products; after drying, promotes uniform
curing of threadlockers
Loctite 747
Product used specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to
use of slow-cure anaerobic threadlockers (series 5 and 6). Can
also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in applications where there are large gaps between the parts.
Loctite 510 Colour: red
Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal
faces; can eliminate the need for conventional gaskets as it can
fill gaps up to 0.4 mm. Does not shrink and therefore fasteners
do not need re-tightening to specified torque values after curing.
Loctite 542 Colour: Brown
Anaerobic product used as a liquid sealant for threaded fittings
up to 3/4 gas; rapid curing and parts may be disassembled with
ordinary tools.
Loctite 554 Colour: red
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cooling and industrial fluid circuits. Slow curing, also suitable for use
on non-ferrous alloys
Loctite 572 Colour: White
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes
and threaded fittings up to 2 in diameter. Very slow curing on
most metal surfaces.
Loctite 573 Colour: green
Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between
metal faces. Ensures total contact between surfaces with maximum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling microvoids caused by flatness
errors. Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires
prior application of an activator.
Loctite 576 Colour: brown
Anaerobic product used as a liquid thread sealant for large diameter threaded fittings (up to 2). Very slow curing; also suitable for
non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent removal.
Loctite 401 Colour: colourless
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range
of acidic and porous materials including, ceramics, wood, rubber and plastic (excluding polyolefin). Curing takes place in a few
seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental conditions.
Loctite 495 Colour: colourless
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber,
plastics and metal in any combination.
Silastic 738 (Dow Corning) Colour: milky One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, non dhrinking, ready for use.
white
Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the
need for conventional seals on flexible joints, filling gaps greater
than 1 mm.
Dirko Transparent Colour: transparent
One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.
Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rubbery solid; resistant to high temperatures.
Betaseal HV3 (Gurit Essex) Colour: black Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity,
suitable for permanent, high-strength flexible bonding. Slow curing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates,
etc. surfaces must be degreased with primer.
0-9
Introduction
RETAINING COM- Loctite 601 Colour: fluorescent green
POUNDS
LUBRICANTS
Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive. Suitable for sealing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of
up to 0.10 mm; used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys,
bushes etc. on shafts.
Loctite 638 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength;
suitable for bonding cylindrical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
Loctite 648 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical parts, permanent retention of threaded parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of bearings,
etc. Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.
Loctite 986/AVX Colour: Fluorescent red Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.
Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemical attack. Parts must be first treated with an activator.
Grease (NLGI 2 EP ASTM D217: 265/295) Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to prevent oxidization and to facilitate assembly operations.
Molikote (Dow Corning)
Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, used
neat or diluted with engine oil for assembly of main engine bearings.
Vaseline
Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against
oxidization and corrosion.
Engine oil 10W - 30
Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of
main engine bearings.
Table 8
inch x 25.40
foot x 0.305
yard x 0.914
Eng.miles x 1.609
Sq.in. x 6.452
Sq.ft. x 0.093
Sq.yard x 0.835
Cu.in. x 16.39
Cu.ft. x 28.36
Cu.yard x 0.763
Imp.gall. x 4.547
US gall. x 3.785
pint x 0.568
quart x 1.137
US.gpm x 3.785
oz. x 0.028
lb. x 0.454
lb.ft. x 0.139
lb.in. x 17.87
psi x 0.070
lb./Imp.gall x 0.100
lb./US.gall x 0.120
lb./cu.ft. x 16.21
lb.ft. x 1.356
psi x 1.379
= mm
=m
= km
= cm
= m
= cm
= m
= litres
= ,/min
= kg
= kgm
= kg/m
= kg/cm
= kg/,
= kg/m
= Nm
= bar
Table 9
mm x 0.0394
m x 3.281
m x 1,094
km x 0.622
cm x 0.155
m x 10.77
0-10
= inch
= foot
= yard
= Brit.miles
= Sq.in.
= Sq.ft.
Introduction
m x 1.197
cm x 0.061
m x 0.035
m x 1.311
litres x 0.220
litres x 0.264
litres x 1.762
litres x 0.880
,/min x 0.2642
kg x 35.25
kg x 2.203
kgm x 7.233
kg/m x 0.056
kg/cm x 14.22
kg/, x 10.00
kg/, x 8.333
kg/m x 0.062
Nm x 0.737
bar x 14.503
= Sq.yard
= Cu.in.
= Cu.ft
= Cu.yard
= Imp.gall.
= US gall.
= pint
= quart
= US.gpm
= oz.
= lb.
= lb.ft.
= lb.in.
= psi
= lb./Imp.gal.
= lb./US.gal.
= lb./cu.ft.
= lb.ft.
= psi
0-11
Introduction
0.2 - Tightening torques for nuts and bolts of electrical connections
Tighten all nuts and bolts of wiring harnesses, leaving the battery negative cable until last.
l
General table
Pitch
6x1
8x1
8x1.25
10x1
10x1.5
12x1.25
12x1.75
14x1.5
Torque
5.5
14.4
13.4
29.5
26.5
50
46
79
Table 11
General table
Pitch
14x2
16x1.5
16x2
Tolerance 20%
Torque
73
121
113
Fig. 2
0-12
Introduction
0.2.3 - Starter motor tightening torques
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
0-13
Introduction
0.3 - Wheel rim to hub screws and nuts tightening torques
DANGER
These tightening torques are not applicable to special self-locking fixing systems.
Table 12
p/n
2.0122.511.6
2.0122.615.2
2.0399.235.6
2.0399.129.6
2.0399.140.6
2.0399.003.6/10
2.1011.308.6
01101323
2.1099.175.6
0.012.8307.0
2.1019.176.6
2.1099.083.0/20
01104070
2.1099.085.0/20
2.1099.177.6
0-14
Description
Screw M14x1.5
Screw M16x1.5
Screw M16x1.5
Screw M18x1.5
Screw M18x1.5
Screw M20x1.5
Nut M14x1.5
Nut M18x1.5
Nut M18x1.5
Nut M20x1.5
Nut M20x1.5
Nut M20x1.5
Nut M20x1.5
Nut M22x1.5
Nut M22x1.5
Class
8.8
8.8
10.9
10.9
10.9
10.9
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Tightening torque
Tolerance
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
Introduction
0.4 - Introduction
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instructions for repair technicians and a practical guide for improvement of the
quality of repairs. This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the engine, indicating the correct methods for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections of parts subject to repair.
The instructions also indicate the products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data. The technical material contained in
this manual is reserved for Authorised Dealers and Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the engines
in question through the issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and supplements for optional equipment. All technicians
and their colleagues are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties without the express written permission of the Manufacturer, which remains the sole owner of this document with
all rights reserved in accordance with applicable laws.
To ensure that engines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue to function correctly, it is very important that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner. The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are
safe and effective. Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment; these tools have been specifically designed for the intended purpose and may be ordered directly from the Manufacturer. DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not
only is there a risk of personal injury, but such tools are rarely suited to the purpose for which they are used. In potentially hazardous
situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary actions to eliminate the danger
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the engine as regards its components, operation and controls, always take particular care when carrying out manoeuvres or movements; Remember that the engine you are working on is in need of repair or
overhaul and consequently may not always behave as expected.
Before starting work, clean the engine thoroughly to remove all mud, dust and road dirt.
When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close-fitting clothing, safety goggles and protective gloves that are suitable for
the task (cleaning, draining fluids, repairs). When working near moving parts, long hair should be gathered up and tied back
safely under a cap to prevent the risk of entanglement and severe injury.
Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in the work to come near the engine; ensure that they remain at a safe distance.
Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is running, some moving parts are not easily visible and therefore present a
risk of entanglement, even if protected by safety guards.
Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting the engine in order to avoid the formation of dangerous concentrations
of toxic gases; always connect suitable fumes extraction equipment to the exhaust pipe.
Do not start the engine with the safety guards removed under any circumstances; all repair and adjustment operations must
be carried out with the engine stopped.
Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the engine is running.
Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames nearby when topping up fuel or oil.
Before checking or removing the battery, stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated area where the temperature exceeds 0C.
When checking or recharging the battery, do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity as the hydrogen gas given off by
the battery is highly explosive.
The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very harmful if it comes into contact with the skin and the eyes; for this reason, always wear gloves and safety goggles with side shields when checking or topping up the battery. Should any electrolyte
accidentally come into contact with your skin, wash the affected areas immediately with plenty of fresh water; if electrolyte
comes into contact with your clothing, this should be removed as soon as possible. In case of accidental ingestion of electrolyte, drink plenty of water, milk or vegetable oil, take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbonate, etc. and seek medical
attention immediately.
Before working on the electrical systems, always disconnect the battery terminals.
DANGER
Always disconnect the negative lead (--) before the positive lead (+); when re-connecting the battery on completion of
the work, first connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative (--).
l
l
l
0-15
Introduction
l
l
l
l
l
l
Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed of properly; recover used lubricants and dispose of them in accordance
with the applicable regulations.
Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or pneumatic systems, discharge all residual pressure from the circuits.
Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system or engine, allow the oil and engine coolant to cool down.
When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it will be necessary to support the engine; use stands, jacks or blocks capable
of supporting the weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to prevent the engine from overturning.
To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not worn and that hooks are
not damaged.
Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for the weight of the components to be removed. Ensure lifting equipment is
attached correctly.
When lifting or supporting an assembly or component, manoeuvre the parts slowly and carefully to avoid swinging movements
or collision with other components.
Never work on components suspended from a hoist or crane.
When removing the retaining bolts of a component that could fall, always leave two opposing bolts in place for safety; before
removing these last two screws, attach the component to suitable lifting equipment or position support blocks.
Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling operations should be cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent the risk
of slipping and fire.
When refitting electrical wiring looms and wires, ensure that they are properly secured with their original retaining straps or
brackets to prevent the possibility of damage caused by vibration.
Never insert your fingers or hands to check the alignment between fixing holes in components; always use a suitable dowel
of soft material.
When refitting assemblies or components, always use the specified tightening torques; the tightening torques indicated in the
headings regarding assembly/refitting operations have been determined through experimentation and must be scrupulously
adhered to.
When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or that rotate at high speed, take particular care when carrying out final installation checks.
l
l
l
l
l
After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the open ends of the pipes to prevent ingress of dirt.
Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings indicating the correct assembly position. If necessary,
make new markings to ensure correct assembly.
When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly to avoid pulling on the wires.
Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion when reconnecting.
Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them together in a safe place.
To lift the engine or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of suitable capacity.
When using eyebolts for lifting components, first check that they are not deformed; screw them fully home and then turn the
bolt so that the eye is aligned with the lifting hook.
Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the part, cover it to protect it from dirt and dust.
l
l
l
l
l
0-16
Introduction
Precautions to be taken on completion of removal/refitting operations
l
If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and pour in new coolant to the correct level. Start the engine
to circulate the coolant and then check the level again and top up.
After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the
hydraulic circuits and then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
After having removed a variable displacement pump, connect the drain pipe and fill the pump casing with oil through the filler
hole provided.
Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts thoroughly after assembly.
Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:
Table 13
WIRE ROPES (standard twisted S or Z type)
rope mm Capacity (kg)
8
10
12
14
16
18
25
50
62
75
100
150
650
1000
1450
2000
2600
3300
620
1740
2500
3460
4500
5710
500
1420
2050
2820
3670
4660
500
1000
1250
1400
2000
2500
400
800
1000
1120
1600
2000
860
1730
2160
2420
3460
4330
700
1410
1760
1980
2820
3530
The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the rope/
sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
DANGER
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
Never lift a heavy load when the two legs of the ropes form a wide angle. The permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse proportion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension
for two 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000 kg.
0-17
Introduction
Fig. 4
DANGER
The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the relative
assembly headings.
The tightening torques indicated below refer to screws and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where applicable, with anaerobic
threadlocking compound. the values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, copper, plastic, sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.
Table 14
SCREW SIZE
FINE
0-18
M6x1
M8x1.25
M10x1.5
M12x1.75
M14x2
M16x2
M18x2.5
M20x2.5
M22x2.5
M24x3
M27x3
M8x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x2
SCREW CLASS
8.8
Nm
lb.ft.
8.0 - 8.8
5.9 - 6.5
19.4 - 21.4
14.3 - 15.8
38.4 - 42.4
28.3 - 31.2
66-5 - 73-5
49.0 - 54.2
106 - 117
78.1 - 86.2
164 - 182
120.9 - 134.1
228 - 252
168.0 - 185.7
321 - 355
236.6 - 261.6
441 - 487
325.0 - 358.9
553 - 611
407.6 - 450.3
816 - 902
601.4 - 664.8
20.8 - 23.0
15.3 - 17.0
40.6 - 44.8
29.9 - 33.0
72.2 - 79.8
53.2 - 58.8
69.4 - 76.7
51.1 - 56.5
114 - 126
84.0 - 92.9
175 - 194
129 - 143
256 - 282
188.7 - 207.8
355 - 393
261.6 - 289.6
482 - 532
355.2 - 392.1
602 - 666
443.7 - 490.8
10.9
Nm
11.8 - 13.0
28.5 - 31.5
56.4 - 62.4
96.9 - 107
156 - 172
241 - 267
334 - 370
472 - 522
647 - 715
812 - 898
1198 - 1324
30.6 - 33.8
59.7 - 65.9
106 - 118
102 - 112
168 - 186
257 - 285
375 - 415
523 - 578
708 - 782
884 - 978
lb.ft.
8.7 - 9.6
21.0 - 23.2
41.6 - 46.0
71.4 - 78.9
115.0 - 126.8
117.6 - 196.8
246.2 - 272.7
347.9 - 384.7
476.8 - 527.0
598.4 - 661.8
882.9 - 975.8
22.6 - 24.9
44.0 - 48.6
78.1 - 87.0
75.2 - 82.5
123.8 - 137.1
189.4 - 210.0
276.4 - 305.9
385.5 - 426.0
521.8 - 576.3
651.5 - 720.8
12.9
Nm
13.8 - 15.2
33.3 - 36.9
67.4 - 74.4
115 - 128
184 - 204
282 - 312
391 - 432
553 - 611
751 - 830
950 - 1050
1419 - 1569
35.8 - 39.6
71.2 - 78.6
126 - 140
121 - 134
199 - 220
301 - 333
439 - 485
611 - 676
821 - 908
1035 - 1143
lb.ft.
10.2 - 11.2
24.5 - 27.2
49.7 - 54.8
84.8 - 94.3
135.6 - 150.3
207.8 - 229.9
288.2 - 318.4
407.6 - 450.3
553.5 - 611.7
700.2 - 773.9
1045.8 - 1156.4
26.4 - 29.2
52.5 - 57.9
92.9 - 103.2
89.2 - 98.8
146.7 - 162.1
221.8 - 245.4
323.5 - 357.4
450.3 - 498.2
605.1 - 669.2
762.8 - 842.4
Introduction
Fittings
The tightening torques indicated below refer to fittings assembled on any material.
Table 15
METRIC
Thread
Wrench
M10x1.25
17
19
19
19
22
24
27
30
36
36
41
50
60
17
19
19
22
24
27
30
36
41
46
50
60
M12x1.25
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M26x1.5
M27x2
M33x2
M42x2
M48x2
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 3/4
G 1
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
T end fittings
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
17
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
13
37
19
37
53
24
73
27
73
100
36
160
41
160
250
50
305
60
L end fittings
90 end fittings
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
17
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
Torque Nm Wrench
10%
14
14
14
30
17
40
19
48
22
58
24
65
27
73
30
95
36
100
36
160
41
250
50
305
60
13
14
Torque Nm
10%
14
30
40
48
58
65
73
95
100
160
250
305
13
37
19
37
19
37
53
73
24
27
53
73
24
27
53
73
100
160
36
41
100
160
36
41
100
160
250
305
50
60
250
305
50
60
250
305
Plugs
Table 16
Hex plugs
Thread
Wrench
Torque Nm 10%
Wrench
Torque Nm 10%
0-19
Introduction
METRIC
M6x1
M8x1
M10x1
M10x1.25
M10x1.5
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M12x1.75
M14x1.5
M14x2
M16x1.5
M16x2
M18x1.5
M18x2.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
M24x2
M27x2
M28x1.5
M30x1.5
M32x1.5
M35x1.5
M40x1.5
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 5/8
G 3/4
G 1
10
13
13
13
13
17
17
17
19
19
22
22
17
17
19
22
22
22
22
14
19
22
19
22
22
22
10
12
14
14
14
30
30
30
40
40
48
48
58
58
65
80
80
100
130
13
37
53
73
85
100
160
5
6
6
8
10
12
12
17
19
22
24
-
14
30
40
48
58
73
80
110
150
180
225
-
Thread
7/16 - 20
1/2 - 20
9/16 - 18
3/4 - 16
7/8 - 14
1 1/16 - 12
1 3/16 - 12
1 5/16 - 12
1 5/8 - 12
1 7/8 - 12
2 1/2 - 12
0-20
Wrench
14
16
17
22
27
32
36
36
38
50
60
75
Torque Nm 10%
13
19
28
47
76
110
110
138
155
215
290
345
Introduction
Fittings for pipes with banjo union
These tightening torques refer to tightening the fitting with new copper sealing washers.
Table 18
Unions for one-way fittings
Thread
Wrench
M8x1
M8x1.25
M10x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M12x1.5
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
M26x1.5
M28x1.5
M30x1.5
M35x2
M38x1.5
M42x2
M45x1.5
M50x2
M52x1.5
M65x2
13
13
17
19
22
22
27
32
36
41
50
60
Torque
10%
14
20
30
40
48
58
65
80
110
180
250
320
Nm Wrench
12
Torque
10%
14
14
17
19
22
24
27
32
36
46
55
60
75
20
30
40
48
58
73
95
130
200
280
320
450
Nm Wrench
-
Torque
10%
-
14
17
19
22
24
27
32
36
46
55
60
75
20
30
40
48
58
73
95
130
200
280
320
450
Nm
FUNCTION
THREADLOCKER
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Loctite 222 Colour: opaque fluorescent Anaerobic product suitable for low-strength locking of retaining,
purple
adjustment and precision fasteners. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 242 Colour: fluorescent blue
Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and
bolt; used in place of conventional mechanical locking systems.
Used for medium-strength locking. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 243 Colour: opaque fluorescent Alternative product to 242 ; oil tolerant and so can be used on
blue
lightly lubricated surfaces without prior use of activator.
Loctite 270 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs
that do not normally require disassembly. Parts must be heated
to approximately 80C for removal. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
0-21
Introduction
DEGREASERS
Loctite 703
AND ACTIVATORS
SEALANTS
(for
faces and fittings)
INSTANT
SIVES
ADHE-
SILICONE
ANTS
SEAL-
POLYURETHANE
SEALANTS
0-22
Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to application of Loctite anaerobic products; after drying, promotes uniform
curing of threadlockers
Loctite 747
Product used specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to
use of slow-cure anaerobic threadlockers (series 5 and 6). Can
also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in applications where there are large gaps between the parts.
Loctite 510 Colour: red
Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal
faces; can eliminate the need for conventional gaskets as it can
fill gaps up to 0.4 mm. Does not shrink and therefore fasteners
do not need re-tightening to specified torque values after curing.
Loctite 542 Colour: brown
Anaerobic product used as a liquid sealant for threaded fittings
up to 3/4 gas; rapid curing and parts may be disassembled with
ordinary tools.
Loctite 554 Colour: red
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cooling and industrial fluid circuits. Slow curing, also suitable for use
on non-ferrous alloys
Loctite 572 Colour: white
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes
and threaded fittings up to 2 in diameter. Very slow curing on
most metal surfaces.
Loctite 573 Colour: green
Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between
metal faces. Ensures total contact between surfaces with maximum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling microvoids caused by flatness
errors. Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires
prior application of an activator.
Loctite 576 Colour: brown
Anaerobic product used as a liquid thread sealant for large diameter threaded fittings (up to 2). Very slow curing; also suitable for
non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent removal.
Loctite 401 Colour: colourless
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range
of acidic and porous materials including, ceramics, wood, rubber and plastic (excluding polyolefin). Curing takes place in a few
seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental conditions.
Loctite 495 Colour: colourless
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber,
plastics and metal in any combination.
Silastic 738 (Dow Corning) Colour: milky One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, non shrinking, ready for use.
white
Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the
need for conventional seals on flexible joints, filling gaps of up to
1 mm or more.
Dirko Transparent Colour: transparent
One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.
Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rubbery solid; resistant to high temperatures.
Betaseal HV3 (Gurit Essex) Colour: black Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity,
suitable for permanent, high-strength flexible bonding. Slow curing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates,
etc. surfaces must be degreased with primer.
Introduction
RETAINING COM- Loctite 601 Colour: fluorescent green
POUNDS
LUBRICANTS
Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive. Suitable for sealing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of
up to 0.10 mm; used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys,
bushes etc. on shafts.
Loctite 638 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength;
suitable for bonding cylindrical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
Loctite 648 Colour: fluorescent green
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical parts, permanent retention of threaded parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of bearings,
etc. Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.
Loctite 986/AVX Colour: fluorescent red
Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.
Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemical attack. Parts must be first treated with an activator.
Grease (NLGI 2 EP ASTM D217: 265/295) Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to prevent oxidation and to facilitate assembly operations.
Molikote (Dow Corning)
Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, used
neat or diluted with engine oil for assembly of main engine bearings.
Vaseline
Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against
oxidization and corrosion.
Engine oil 10W - 30
Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of
main engine bearings.
Table 20
inch x 25.40
foot x 0.305
yard x 0.914
Brit.miles x 1.609
Sq.in. x 6.452
Sq.ft. x 0.093
Sq.yard x 0.835
Cu.in. x 16.39
Cu.ft. x 28.36
Cu.yard x 0.763
Imp.gall. x 4.547
US gall. x 3.785
pint x 0.568
quart x 1.137
US.gpm x 3.785
oz. x 0.028
lb. x 0.454
lb.ft. x 0.139
lb.in. x 17.87
psi x 0.070
lb./Imp.gall x 0.100
lb./US.gall x 0.120
lb./cu.ft. x 16.21
lb.ft. x 1.356
psi x 1.379
= mm
=m
= km
= cm
= m
= cm
= m
= litres
= ,/min
= kg
= kgm
= kg/m
= kg/cm
= kg/,
= kg/m
= Nm
= bar
Table 21
mm x 0.0394
m x 3.281
m x 1.094
km x 0.622
cm x 0.155
m x 10.77
= inch
= foot
= yard
= Eng.miles
= Sq.in.
= Sq.ft.
0-23
Introduction
m x 1.197
cm x 0.061
m x 0.035
m x 1.311
litres x 0.220
litres x 0.264
litres x 1.762
litres x 0.880
,/min x 0.2642
kg x 35.25
kg x 2.203
kgm x 7.233
kg/m x 0.056
kg/cm x 14.22
kg/, x 10.00
kg/, x 8.333
kg/m x 0.062
Nm x 0.737
bar x 14.503
0-24
= Sq.yard
= Cu.in.
= Cu.ft
= Cu.yard
= Imp.gall.
= US gall.
= pint
= quart
= US.gpm
= oz.
= lb.
= lb.ft.
= lb.in.
= psi
= lb./Imp.gal.
= lb./US.gal.
= lb./cu.ft.
= lb.ft.
= psi
10 - Technical
characteristics
10-1
Technical characteristics
10.1 - Engine
TCD 4.1 L4
TCD 6.1 L6
Table 22
TCD
T
C
D
Turbocharger
Turbocharger
Diesel
Table 23
4.1/6.1
4.1
6.1
Capacity in litres
Capacity in litres
Table 24
L4/L6
L
4
6
in series
Number of cylinders
Number of cylinders
Table 25
With exhaust after-treatment system
USA
UE
EPA Tier 4i
Level IIIB
Table 26
Without exhaust gas after-treatment systems
The precise certification is stamped on the engines identification plate or is located on a separate plate for the concerned markets.
DANGER
The engine and the respective EAT system (Exhaust After Treatment) are combined together and connected reciprocally by suitable electronic control. They are certified by the competent authorities and are able to comply with the
permitted exhaust gas emission limits only if provided in this combination. The engine may not be operated with other
EAT systems
DANGER
The engines for this user manual may only be operated with the exhaust gas after treatment system functioning (if
included in the DEUTZ supply)
10-2
Technical characteristics
Model plate
Fig. 5
The engine type A, the engine number B and the data concerning the power are engraved on the plate
Each spare part order must include the engine type and number.
10-3
Technical characteristics
Fig. 6
10-4
Technical characteristics
C
Fig. 7
Engine number
The engine number D is punched on the crankcase (arrow) and on the model plate.
10-5
Technical characteristics
xxxxxxx
Fig. 8
The serial numbers for the exhaust gas after treatment system components are stamped on the data plates
10-6
Technical characteristics
Fig. 9
10-7
Technical characteristics
Cylinder numbering
Fig. 10
Cylinder layout
The cylinders are numbered progressively from (1) from the flywheel side.
Direction of rotation
View from flywheel side.
Left hand rotation: Anticlockwise.
Engine sides
View from flywheel side.
10-8
Technical characteristics
10.1.2 - Engine description - Images of engine
11
10
9
2
8
10-9
Technical characteristics
1
10-10
Technical characteristics
11
10
1
9
8
7
3
6
4
5
10-11
Technical characteristics
1
2
3
10-12
1 - Burner
2 - Recirculated exhaust gas radiator
3 - Flexible pipe
4 - Compressor
5 - Exhaust gas outlet
Technical characteristics
11
10
2
9
10-13
Technical characteristics
1
4
Fig. 16 - TCD 6.1 L6
Engine for agriculture - Left side view (example)
l
l
l
l
l
10-14
Technical characteristics
10
8
7
6
5
10-15
Technical characteristics
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 18 - TCD 6.1 L6
Industrial engine with regenerative burner - Left side view (example)
l
l
l
l
l
l
10-16
Technical characteristics
1
2
8
3
7
4
6
5
1 - Coolant inlet
2 - Compensation container
3 - Charge air cooler
4 - Radiator
5 - Lubricant oil cartridge filter
6 - Fuel pre-filter
7 - Fuel cartridge filter
8 - Lubricant oil dipstick
10-17
Technical characteristics
6
1
10-18
Technical characteristics
10.1.3 - Engine description - Lubricant oil diagram
13
10
11
12
9
6
10-19
Technical characteristics
7
10
10-20
1 - Fuel tank
2 - Fuel pre-filter
3 - Fuel delivery pump
4 - Fuel cartridge filter
5 - Fuel supply line for the fuel control unit (FCU)
6 - Fuel Control Unit (FCU)
7 - High pressure pump
8 - Lubricant oil filter
9 - Rail
10 - Injector
11 - Return line
11
Technical characteristics
10.1.4 - Engine description - Fuel circuit diagram
7
10
11
1 - Fuel tank
2 - Fuel pre-filter
3 - Fuel delivery pump
4 - Fuel cartridge filter
5 - Fuel supply line for the fuel control unit (FCU)
6 - Fuel Control Unit (FCU)
7 - High pressure pump
8 - Rail
9 - Injector
10 - Fuel return to tank
11 - Return line
10-21
Technical characteristics
10.1.5 - Engine description - Coolant diagram
6
x1
10
x2
x2
6
x1
10-22
1 - Coolant pump
2 - Lubricant oil radiator
3 - Coolant feed line for cooling engine
4 - Cylinder sleeve/head cooling
5 - Air compressor (optional)
6 - Fitting for cab heater
7 - Recirculated exhaust gas radiator
8 - Temperature sender
9 - Thermostat
10 - Compensation container
11 - Radiator
11
Technical characteristics
10.1.6 - Engine description - Exhaust gas recovery
7
4
Fig. 25
10-23
Technical characteristics
10.1.7 - Engine description - Exhaust gas after-treatment
8
10
3
11
10-24
Technical characteristics
1
1 - Burner
2 - Compressor
3 - Fuel metering unit
4 - Flexible pipe
5 - Exhaust gas temperature sensor
6 - Diesel oxidation catalytic converter
7 - Differential pressure sensor
8 - Diesel particulate filter
9 - NOx sensor
10-25
Technical characteristics
1
10-26
1 - Throttle valve
2 - Flexible pipe
3 - Exhaust gas temperature sensor
4 - Diesel oxidation catalytic converter
5 - Differential pressure sensor
6 - Diesel particulate filter
Technical characteristics
10.1.8 - Engine description - Electrical/electronic system
5
1
12
13
6
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
10
21
22
l
l
l
l
Engine side
1 - Fuel pressure transducer
2 - Coolant temperature sensor
3 - Intake air pressure transducer, intake air temperature transducer TCD 6.1 L6
4 - Intake air pressure transducer, intake air temperature transducer TCD 4.1 L4
5 - Engine control unit
6 - Central connector (engine control)
7 - Crankshaft speed sensor
8 - Rail pressure sensor
9 - Lubricant oil pressure sensor transducer
10- Oil level glass (optional)
11 - Camshaft speed sensor
From the side of the device
12 - Electric power feed (battery)
13 - Multifunction indicator lamps
14 - Signal outputs (e.g. for indicator lamps, rpm signal, engine run signal etc.)
15 - Inputs (e.g. override button)
16 - Accelerator
17 - Hand throttle
18 - Optional function converter, e.g. P curve, governor type, ceiling curve, fixed engine speed etc. May also be multiple position switch
19 - Key operated start/stop switch
20 - Diagnostics key
21 - Error warning light
22 - CAN bus diagnostic interface
10-27
Technical characteristics
Recommendations for the engine electronics
This engine is equipped with an electronic control device.
The equipment for each system depends on the functions required and the type of engine use.
The resulting wiring with the respective configuration of the connectors can be seen on the corresponding connection diagram.
Also, the assembly instructions from DEUTZ AG must be followed.
Precautionary measures
DANGER
The control unit pin connections are dust and water resistant only when the counter piece is inserted (IP69K class of
protection)! The control unit must be protected against spraying water and humidity until the counter piece is installed!
Switching polarity can cause damage to the control unit. To avoid damaging the control unit, before welding remove
the pin connections from the control unit. Any work on the electrical system that is not carried out in compliance with
DEUTZ directives or by non-qualified personnel may damage the engine electronics in the long term, which is a condition not covered by the manufacturers warranty.
DANGER
The following is strictly prohibited: a) Making changes or connections to the electric control unit wiring or the data
transmission line (CAN lines). b) Switching the control devices. Otherwise, the warranty rights shall be void! Diagnosis
and maintenance may only be performed by authorised personnel using the tools and devices permitted by DEUTZ.
Assembly instructions
The control devices are calibrated based on the respective engine and marked with a specific engine number. Each engine may only
be operated with the respective control device.
To operate the device, connect the nominal value transducers (pedal transducers) to the wiring of the device and calibrate them using
the DEUTZ SERDIA (SERvice DIAgnose) diagnostics program. The connection and installation of the device wiring are shown in the
connection diagram in the DEUTZ assembly instructions.
Supply voltage
l
l
12 Volts
24 Volts
A sufficient battery charge level must be guaranteed. Interrupting the supply voltage to the engine while it is operating may damage
the electrical or electronic system. A drop in the supply voltage stops the engine.
Voltages above 32 Volt destroy the control device.
Diagnostics
The DEUTZ control devices are equipped with a self-diagnostics system. The active and passive error conditions are recorded in the
error memory. Active errors are indicated by the fault indicator/diagnostic lamp.
See para. 10.1.32 - Faults - Engine manage... - page 10-94
The diagnostics can be carried out using:
l
l
l
l
Device wiring
Follow the DEUTZ AG assembly instructions. In particular, crimp the connector contacts correctly with commercially available tools.
If necessary, the inserted contacts must be removed from their housings only using the specific tools.
10-28
Technical characteristics
10.1.9 - Use - Environmental conditions
Low ambient temperatures
Fig. 30
Lubricant oil
l
l
Select the viscosity of the lubricant oil based on the ambient temperature.
In the case of frequent cold starts, reduce the oil change times by half.
Fuel
l
Battery
l
Depending on engine configuration, a choice of different accessories are available for cold starting. These include pin-type
glow plugs, a heater and a flame glow plug starting system
See para. 10.1.11 - Usage - Starting proce... - page 10-35
10-29
Technical characteristics
Coolant
l
Reason: as the altitude or ambient temperature increases, the air density decreases. As a result, the quantity of oxygen contained in
the air aspirated by the engine also reduces, and the fuel/air mixture produced would be excessively rich unless the quantity of fuel
injected is also reduced.
The consequences would be:
l
l
l
l
If there are additional questions, contact your DEUTZ partner or equipment supplier.
l
l
l
When performing a general overhaul on an engine, the following operations are also necessary:
l
l
l
l
l
10-30
Check and if necessary replace the fuel prefilter and the main filter.
Intake air filter (if installed, perform the maintenance based on the relative indicator).
Drain the lubricant oil from the turbocharging air radiator and the condensate water.
Add the engine lubricant oil.
Fill the coolant system.
See para. 10.1.35 - Technical data - Engin... - page 10-102
Technical characteristics
Add the engine lubricant oil
Fig. 31
Note
An too low or too high level of lubricant oil could damage the engine.
Note
In general, engines are delivered with no lubricant oil. Before filling it, select the quality and viscosity of the lubricant
oil. Order DEUTZ lubricant oils from your DEUTZ partner.
l
l
Pour the lubricant oil into the engine through the filler.
Pay attention to the lubricant oil filler cap.
See para. 10.1.35 - Technical data - Engin... - page 10-102
10-31
Technical characteristics
Load the fuel
Note
Only refuel when the engine is stopped. Ensure maximum cleanliness. Do not scatter the fuel. It is necessary to bleed
the fuel system again by carrying out a test cycle for 5 minutes at idle speed or at a reduced load
l
The fuel low pressure system must be bled after filling with the manual delivery pump after the 1st start-up.
Use only commercially available, clean diesel fuel. Pay attention to fuel quality.
Use summer or winter fuel depending on the external temperature.
AdBlue
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Fig. 32
NOTE
Only fill the system with the engine off. Only fill with AdBlue!
Even very small quantities of other fluids (such as diesel, for example) will damage the system. If any other fluid,
such as diesel fuel, for example, is accidentally put into the tank and reaches the system, the entire AdBlue injection
system must be replaced! If another fluid (such as diesel) has been put into the tank but has not reached the delivery
lines and delivery pump/metering module of the system, the AdBlue tank may be simply drained and thoroughly
cleaned. Ensure maximum cleanliness.
10-32
Technical characteristics
Fill the coolant system
2
1
Fig. 33
NOTE
The coolant must have the required concentration of the cooling system protective action! Never use the engine without the coolant, not even briefly!
NOTE
The cooling system protective agents must be ordered from your DEUTZ partner.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Connect the coolant outlet (2) and the coolant inlet (1) to the cooling system. Connect the delivery line between the compensation container and the coolant pump or the coolant inlet line (3).
Connect the engines breather lines and if necessary the radiator lines to the compensation container.
Fill the cooling system through the compensation container.
Close the compensation container with the valve.
Start the engine and heat it until the thermostat opens (line 2 heats up).
Engine cycle with the thermostat open 2 - 3 minutes.
Check the coolant level, top up if necessary
10-33
Technical characteristics
DANGER
Risk of scalding caused by contact with very hot coolant. The cooling system is pressurised! Open the plug only after
it has cooled down. When handling coolant observe the safety directives and specific local regulations.
l
l
l
l
Operating test
NOTE
It is necessary to bleed the fuel system again by carrying out a test cycle for 5 minutes at idle speed or at a reduced
load.
After preparations, perform a brief test cycle up to the operating temperature (approx. 90 C).
If possible, do not load the engine during the test.
Work with the engine stationary:
l
l
l
10-34
Technical characteristics
Fig. 34
NOTE
Do not place loads on the cover.
10-35
Technical characteristics
NOTE
If the engine fails to start and the fault indicator lamp flashes, this indicates that the electronic control system has
inhibited starting to protect the engine. The starter block is eliminated by deactivating the system with the ignition key
for approx. 30 s. Run the starter motor for no longer than 20 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, wait one
minute before repeating the starting manoeuvre. If the engine does not start after two attempts, identify the cause of
the problem by referring to the table. When the engine is still cold, avoid revving immediately to high engine speeds
either under load or with no engine load.
See para. 10.1.31 - Malfunctions - Malfunc... - page 10-92
NOTE
If possible separate the engine by decoupling the device lines.
P 0
1
2
Fig. 35
10-36
Technical characteristics
l
If the starter motor is checked by an electronic regulator relay from the engine:
l
l
If the pulse starting function is programmed, a single start signal is sufficient with the ignition key in position 2, or if present, with the
starter button.
Operation check
m With the ignition active, the error warning light will flash for approx. 2 seconds.
m If there is no reaction during ignition, check the error warning light.
The warning light does not turn on
m After the lamp test, a warning light that is off signals a possible condition that is correct and without errors during the
checks that can be carried out.
Permanent light
m System error.
m Operation continues with certain limitations.
m Have a check performed by a DEUTZ service partner.
m If the light is fixed, this means that a controlled unit of measure (e.g. the coolant temperature, the lubricant oil pressure)
exceeded the permitted interval.
Depending on the type of problem, the electronic engine regulator can reduce the engine power to protect the engine.
l
Flashing
m Serious system error.
m Deactivation request for the operator. Note: Failure to respect this causes the warranty to be voided!
m The switching off condition for the engine was not reached.
m To cool the engine, forced operation with power reduced, if necessary with automatic switching off.
m Switching off process.
m After the engine has stopped, there may be a starter block.
m The starter block is eliminated by deactivating the system with the ignition key for approx. 30 s.
m Other control warning lights may turn on, e.g. for oil pressure or temperature.
m With the optional override key on the instrument panel for avoiding critical situations, power reduction can be excluded,
automatic deactivation can be delayed or a starter block can be excluded. This brief deactivation of the engine protection functions is recorded in the control unit.
The overload cutout is established together with the manufacturer and DEUTZ consultants and can be fixed in a customised manner.
Therefore it is absolutely necessary to follow what is indicated in the user manual provided by the system manufacturer.
10-37
Technical characteristics
Signalling instrument
Fig. 36
Colour scale
m Operating status warning light with coloured sectors:
m Green = normal operating status.
m Red = critical operating.
10-38
Technical characteristics
Instruments and symbols
Table 27
Instruments/symbols
Designation
Measurement
Coolant temperature
Lubricant oil pressure warning Lubricant oil pressure in the red stop the engine
light
zone
Lubricant oil pressure warning Lubricant oil pressure below stop the engine
lamp
minimum limit
Lubricant oil change necessary Lubricant oil change:
(flashing)
10-39
Technical characteristics
Instruments/symbols
10-40
Designation
Measurement
Coolant level
Operating counter
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
flashing (0.5 Hz)
flashing (1 Hz)
flashing (2 Hz)
Permanent light
Technical characteristics
Instruments/symbols
Designation
Measurement
Permanent light
The soot indicator lamp indicates that diesel particulate filter is permanently clogged and
cannot be regenerated within
the system.
Instruments/symbols
Designation
Permanent light
flashing (0.5 Hz)
flashing (2 Hz)
Measurement
Permanent light
Flashing
Measurement
Instruments/symbols
Designation
Permanent light
10-41
Technical characteristics
Instruments/symbols
Designation
Permanent light
Flashing
Measurement
Fig. 37
A CAN display may be integrated into the drivers instrument cluster to view the parameters and error signals relative to the EMR
control system.
The following data can be displayed if they are transmitted by the control unit.
l
l
l
10-42
Engine speed
Engine torque (current)
Coolant temperature
Technical characteristics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
The error messages are signalled by a text and acoustically, the control device error memory can be read.
A detailed description is provided in the instruction manual provided with the DEUTZ Electronic Display.
Power reduction
In the event of a severe fault or should it not be possible to rectify the fault, the system responds by reducing engine power.
Depending on the type of fault, engine power may be reduced by one or two steps.
Table 30
Power reduction
Level 1
Level 2
Technical characteristics
AdBlue filling level
Warning signal activation when level in AdBlue tank drops below 15%.
Table 31
AdBlue filling
level
<15%
Permanent light
off
<10%
off
<5%
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
<5%
flashing (1 Hz)
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
0%
flashing (2 Hz)
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
SCR symbol
Text message
SCR symbol
Text message
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
Power reduction
None
None
Level 1 after the prealarm period
Level 2 after the prealarm period
Level 2 after the prealarm period
Table 32
Efficiency of the
SCR operating warn- Engine warning light DEUTZ CAN display
catalytic converter/ ing light
Adblue quality
Too low
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
Power reduction
Handling
If the system detects that a component in the system itself has been tampered with or filled with an incorrect reducing agent, engine
power is reduced. Power reduction is implemented progressively and in relation to engine power demand.
Table 33
Handling
recognised
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
not solved
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
not solved
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
Power reduction
System errors
A system error may consist of an error concerning an individual component of the SCR, such as an implausible value received from
one of the NOx or temperature sensors. In the event of a system error which may compromise the AdBlue injection cycle, engine
power is reduced.
Table 34
System errors
recognised
10-44
Permanent light
Acoustic signal
Permanent light
SCR symbol
Text message
Acoustic signal
Power reduction
Technical characteristics
Diesel oxidation catalytic converter
The diesel oxidation catalytic converter has a catalytic surface, through which the harmful substances that are contained in the
exhaust gas are transformed into a harmless substance. This causes the carbon monoxide and unburned hydrocarbons to react with
oxygen and are transformed into carbon dioxide and water. Furthermore, nitric oxide is transformed into nitrogen dioxide.
For better performance, temperatures of > 250 C are required.
Regeneration
When necessary, the active particulate filter system burns off the soot accumulated in the filter using residual oxygen contained in
the exhaust gases. This process requires temperatures exceeding 600C, which are achieved during active regeneration by catalytic
combustion. The active particulate filter includes a burner.
The passive particulate filter system burns off soot in the filter using nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust system (oxidised
previously in the DOC). This process occurs continuously as soon as the exhaust gas temperature exceeds 250C. The passive
particulate filter system does not include a burner. An adequate ratio between nitrogen oxides and soot must exist in the untreated
exhaust gases in order for continuous passive regeneration to take place.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode, the DPF system is activated with no input from the operator.
When the filter load has reached 100% of the normal load, regeneration must be carried out.
The filter regeneration indicator lamps starts to flash
The regeneration cycle starts after a delayed engine start.
During the regeneration phase, the regeneration warning light remains on constantly.
On average, regeneration lasts 30 minutes.
Once regeneration has been completed correctly, the regeneration warning light turns off.
Should it be necessary to disable regeneration or interrupt a regeneration cycle that is already in progress (e.g. when vehicle is operating in an indoor environment), the operator must use the regeneration disable switch.
If the regeneration cycle is not performed, the request for regeneration remains active.
The regeneration warning light starts to flash.
The regeneration cycle cannot be performed as long as the regeneration disable switch is active.
Soot will continue to accumulate in the filter if the regeneration disable switch is left permanently on.
The engine warning lamp lights continuously and engine power is reduced.
The engine alarm warning light flashes, then there is a reduction in power and finally a reduction in the maximum engine speed.
This action is recorded as an error in the control unit.
If the request for generation is not taken into consideration and the DPF is overloaded to an extend that is not permitted, the filter may
only be generated by DEUTZ customer service.
10-45
Technical characteristics
Manual mode
When the filter load has reached 100% of the normal load, regeneration must be carried out.
The regeneration warning light starts to flash.
Regeneration must be enabled by the operator using the enable button.
Regeneration starts immediately after enabling.
During the regeneration phase, the regeneration warning light remains on constantly.
On average, regeneration lasts 30 minutes.
Once regeneration has been completed correctly, the regeneration warning light turns off.
The operator may press the enable button again to stop the regeneration cycle if necessary.
If the regeneration cycle is not performed, the request for regeneration remains active.
The regeneration warning light starts to flash.
The regeneration cycle must be started again by the operator.
Regeneration starts immediately after enabling.
During the regeneration phase, the regeneration warning light remains on constantly.
If the operator fails to press the regeneration cycle enable button for a prolonged period when there is an active regeneration request,
soot will continue to accumulate in the filter.
The engine warning lamp lights continuously and engine power is reduced.
The engine alarm warning light flashes, then there is a reduction in power and finally a reduction in the maximum engine speed.
This action is recorded as an error in the control unit.
If the request for generation is not taken into consideration and the DPF is overloaded to an extend that is not permitted, the filter may
only be generated by DEUTZ customer service.
Table 35
Instruments/symbols
Regeneration warn- Engine warning light Ash warning light
ing light
off
flashing (0.5 Hz)
off
off
off
off
flashing (2 Hz)
flashing (2 Hz)
off
Permanent light
off
off
10-46
Power reduction
Regeneration
-30 %
Normal operation
Automatically enabled
Operator authorisation
Operator authorisation
Operator authorisation
Technical characteristics
Instruments/symbols
Regeneration warn- Engine warning light Ash warning light
ing light
Power reduction
Regeneration
flashing (2 Hz)
Flashing
off
flashing (2 Hz)
Flashing
Permanent light
Ash load 100 %
-30 %
Authorisation only by the
+ limitation of engine DEUTZ partner
speed 1200 rpm
-30 %
No regeneration possible
+ limitation of engine
speed 1200 rpm
Under normal operating conditions (exhaust gas temperature > 250 C) the load of the filter with soot remains within a permitted
interval and no further actions are required.
The regeneration warning light turns off.
Support mode
If engine operating conditions do not permit passive regeneration, soot will continue to build up in the particulate diesel filter.
If the necessary conditions for passive regeneration are not met during normal operation, a butterfly valve in the combustion air
inlet and controlled by the engine control unit is used to increase the exhaust gas temperature and permit regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter.
This may be the case when:
l
This process is activated automatically by the engine control unit, no interventions are required by the user.
The regeneration warning light turns off.
NOTES
During this process, the engine sound changes perceptibly
Technical characteristics
Carrying out regeneration when stationary
The engine must be brought to a safe state for regeneration:
l
l
l
l
Stop the engine on an empty terrain at a safe distance from inflammable objects.
Warm the engine to a coolant temperature of at least 75C.
Idle the engine.
The engine control unit now requires a signal indicating that the machine is parked safely (stationary signal).
This takes place based on the application, for example by:
m Activating the parking brake.
m Engaging a defined ratio in the gearbox.
Confirming with the authorisation key. Position based on the application, see the device manual.
Table 36
Instruments/symbols
Regeneration warn- Engine warning light Ash warning light
ing light
off
off
10-48
off
off
off
off
Power reduction
Regeneration
Normal operation
Support mode
Technical characteristics
Instruments/symbols
Regeneration warn- Engine warning light Ash warning light
ing light
Power reduction
Regeneration
off
off
flashing (2 Hz)
Permanent light
off
flashing (2 Hz)
Flashing
off
flashing (2 Hz)
Flashing
Permanent light
Ash load 100 %
10-49
Technical characteristics
10.1.16 - Use - Stop procedure
Stop
P 0
1
2
Fig. 38
NOTE
It should be avoided to stop from operating at full speed (coking/clogging with residuals of lubricant oil in the turbocharger bearing body). This inhibits the supply of turbocharger lubricant oil! This compromises the useful duration of
the turbocharger. After the discharge, let the engine run at a low speed for approx. one minute.
Turn the key to position 0.
l
l
l
l
10-50
Technical characteristics
Inertia time
NOTE
The control device remains active for another 40 seconds to store the system data (inertia) and then is deactivated
automatically. On engines with the SCR system, this process may take up to 2 minutes, as the SCR lines must first be
completely emptied by the pumps. Do not cut power to the engine with the ignition switch during this process.
Modern diesel engines require lubricant oils with very high performance requisites. The continuous increase in the specific performance of diesel engines in recent years has led to an increase in the thermal stress oil sustained by the oil. Furthermore, reduced oil
consumption and longer oil change intervals have meant that the lubricant oil itself is subject to greater contamination. For this reason
it is necessary to comply with what is described in this user manual and observe the recommendations in order not to compromise
engine duration.
Lubricant oils always consists of a base oil and a mixture of additives. The primary functions of a lubricant oil (e.g. protection against
wear and corrosion, neutralising acids produced during combustion, preventing carbon coke and soot encrustation on engine components) are performed by these additives. The characteristics of the lubricant oil are equally a decisive index of product quality, with
regard to thermal load, for example.
Substantially, all engine oils with the same specifications can be mixed together. However, it is advisable not to mix engine oils considering that the worst characteristics in the mix will always predominate.
The lubricant oils authorised by DEUTZ have been thoroughly tested with every engine type. The additives they contain have been
combined together with great care. Therefore, it is not permitted to use other additives for lubricant oils in DEUTZ engines.
The quality of the lubricant oil has great influence on the duration, performance and therefore also the economic aspect of the engine.
Substantially, the following applies: a better lubricant oil quality means that these characteristics are better.
The viscosity of the lubricant oil describes the sliding behaviour of the lubricant oil based on temperature. The viscosity of the lubricant oil has a limited influence and repercussions on the quality of the lubricant oil.
Synthetic lubricant oils are used more and offer specific advantages. These oils are more temperature and oxidant resistant, and
have a relatively low viscosity at low temperatures. As some procedures are important for determining the lubricant oil change intervals and depend substantially on the quality of the lubricant oil (for example, outflow of soot and other impurities), the lubricant oil
change interval must not be increased beyond what is indicated in the lubricant oil change intervals even if you are using synthetic
lubricant oils.
Biodegradable lubricant oils can be used with DEUTZ engines if they satisfy the requirements of this manual.
Quality
The lubricant oils are divided by DEUTZ based on their performance and their quality class (DQC: DEUTZ Quality Class). Substantially, the following applies: in higher quality classes (DQC I, II, III, IV) the lubricant oils have higher performance and characteristics.
The DQC quality classes are integrated with the DQC-LA categories, which include the modern low ash content lubricant oils (LA =
Low Ash).
Or see the website www.deutz.com
Table 37
http://www.deutz.com
de
en
The selection of the lubricant oil depends basically on the exhaust gas after-treatment system.
For the engines in this user manual, the following lubricant oils may be used:
Reliable quality classes
l
10-51
Technical characteristics
l
For low ash content engine oils, authorised according to the DQC system, a list of authorised oils is provided.
Table 38
Lubricant oils
DEUTZ DQC III
TLX - 10W40 FE
Not with DPF
Drums
5 litre container
20 litre container
209 litre drum
Order code:
0101 6335
0101 6336
0101 6337
Table 39
DEUTZ DQC III LA low ash content lubricant oils
DEUTZ Oil Rodon 10W40 Low SAPS
Drums
20 litre container
209 litre drum
Order code:
0101 7976
0101 7977
Table 40
DEUTZ DQC IV synthetic lubricant oils
DQC IV - 5W30-UHP
Not with DPF
Drums
20 litre container
209 litre drum
Order code:
0101 7849
0101 7850
The lubricant oil change interval must be reduced by half if at least one of the following conditions occurs:
m Permanent ambient temperatures below -10 C (14 F) or lubricant oil temperature below 60 C (84 F).
m Sulphur content in the Diesel fuel >0.5 of the % in weight.
If the oil change intervals are not reached within one year, the oil change must be carried out at least 1 time a year.
Viscosity
The ambient temperature in the installation site (where the engine is used) plays a crucial role in determining the correct viscosity
grade. Too high viscosity can lead to ignition difficulties, too low viscosity can place the lubricating effect at risk and cause elevated
consumption of the lubricant oil. In the case of ambient temperatures of below -40 C the lubricant oil must be preheated (e.g. if the
vehicle or work machine is parked in a shed).
Viscosity is classified according to SAE. Substantially, polyvalent lubricant oils must be used. In closed and heated environments
where the temperature is above >5 C monovalent lubricants can also be used.
NOTE
When selecting the viscosity class, it is essential to comply with the prescribed lubricant oil quality.
Based on the ambient temperature, we recommend the following customary viscosity classes:
10-52
Technical characteristics
Fig. 39
In order to comply with standards regarding emissions, diesel engines equipped with an exhaust gas after-treatment system can only
run on sulphur-free fuels.
The operating safety as well as the durability of individual exhaust gas after-treatment systems cannot be guaranteed if this instruction is ignored.
10-53
Technical characteristics
Table 41
Exhaust gas after-treatment systems:
SCR
DPF
DOC
DIN 51628
EN 590
EN 590 quality
Table 42
http://www.deutz.com
de
en
Special diesel fuels are available for arctic climate zones for use in temperatures down to -44 C.
DANGER
Never use the engine without the coolant, not even briefly!
In the case of water cooled engines, coolant must be prepared and controlled, otherwise damage may be caused to the engine due
to:
l
l
10-54
corrosion
cavitation
Technical characteristics
l
l
freezing
overheating
Water quality
The correct water quality is fundamental when treating the coolant. Basically, clean water that does not lie outside the following
analysis values must be used:
Table 43
Analysis values
pH value
Chlorine (Cl)
min
[mg/l]
Sulphate (SO4)
[mg/l]
Total hardness (CaCO3) [mmol/l]
[mg/l]
[dGH]
[e]
[fH]
max
6.5
-
8.5
100
100
3.56
356
20.0
25.0
35.6
ASTM
D 1293
D 512
D 4327
D 516
D 1126
-
Table 44
DEUTZ cooling system protective product
Drums
5 litre container
20 litre container
210 litre drum
Order code:
0101 1490
0101 4616
1221 1500
This cooling system protective agent does not contain nitrites, ammonia, phosphates and is suitable for the materials in our engines.
It can be ordered from your DEUTZ partner.
If you do not have a DEUTZ cooling system protective agent available, please contact your DEUTZ partner.
Or see the website www.deutz.com
Table 45
http://www.deutz.com
de
en
The cooling system must be checked periodically. This includes, in addition to checking the coolant level, also checking the concentration of the cooling system protective agent.
10-55
Technical characteristics
The check of the cooling system protective agent concentration can be done using a commercial test (for example refractometer).
Table 46
Percentage of the cooling system
protective agent
min. 35 %
40 %
45 %
max. 50 %
Water percentage
65 %
60 %
55 %
50 %
-22 C
-28 C
-35 C
-41C
In the case of temperatures below -41 C contact your DEUTZ support service.
The use of other cooling system protective agents (e.g. chemical anti-corrosive agents) is permitted in exceptional cases. Contact
your DEUTZ partner.
Table 47
Exhaust gas after-treatment systems:
SCR
AdBlue is a 32.5% solution of extremely pure urea in water, which is used as an NOx reduction agent in SCR exhaust after-treatment systems to reduce the nitrogen oxide emissions produced by diesel engined vehicles.
This product is denominated AdBlue or AUS32 (AUS: Aqueous Urea Solution) and is compliant with the standard ISO 22241-1 NOx
reduction agent AUS 32.
The shelf life of AdBlue without quality impairment depends on storage conditions.
The product crystallizes at -11C, and triggers a hydrolysis reaction above +35C, causing its gradual decomposition into ammonia
and carbon dioxide.
Unprotected storage containers must be kept away from direct sunlight.
Do not keep containers in storage for more than one year!
Ensure that all the materials and containers used to store AdBlue are resistant to urea.
AdBlue freezes at -11 C.
The selective catalytic system must be preheated in ambient temperatures below 11 C.
Table 48
AdBlue
Drums
10 litre container
210 litre barrels
10-56
Order code:
0101 7982
0101 7983
Technical characteristics
AdBlue tank
Fig. 40
The AdBlue tank must only be filled with AdBlue. Filling with any other fluids will damage the system.
In case of accidental filling with incorrect fluid, replace the metering pump.
AdBlue may be left in the tank for up to 4 months.
Keep proof of the last filling date.
If the machine is not used, drain and clean the AdBlue tank.
Contact your DEUTZ partner.
Table 49
http://www.deutz.com
email:
info@deutz.com
10-57
Technical characteristics
10.1.21 - Maintenance - Maintenance schedule
Associating service levels with service intervals
Table 50
E10
First start-up
E20
Daily check
E30
E40
E50
E55
E60
E70
Maintenance
Extended maintenance I
Extended maintenance II
Extended service III
Intermediate overhaul
General overhaul
To be performed by
Maintenance interval
every ..... Operating hours
(o.d.e)
Table 51
Comments
1)
Based on use case, the stress on the lubricant oil may be high. In
this case, halve the oil change interval
See para. 10.1.17 - Operating materials - ... - page 10-51
Lubricant oil change intervals in reference to DQC III quality.
2)
Table 52
General overhaul
3)
Maintenance operations
Table 53
Stage
Activity
E20
Check
E10
10-58
Measurement
Document
10-30
10-60
10-30
10-80
Technical characteristics
Stage
E30
Activity
Renewal
Check
E40
Check
Renewal
E50
Adjustment
Renewal
Check
E55
Renewal
E60
Annual
Renewal
Check
Renewal
Every 2 years
Renewal
Measurement
Document
10-51
10-60
10-60
10-76
10-77
10-90
10-84
10-68
10-68
10-80
10-88
10-84
[LNK]
10-84
[LNK]
T.$84.21.B0.00.04.00.21
10-68
10-51
10-60
10-80
10-84
10-54
10-77
AdBlue feed pump filter car- 10-76
tridge
10-59
Technical characteristics
Stage
Activity
Renewal
Draining
Measurement
Document
10-80
10-45
10-47
10-51
10-60
10-68
Maintenance diagram
A self-adhesive maintenance diagram is provided with each engine. It must be stuck in a visible position on the engine or on the
machine.
Order code: 0312 3775 (TCD 4.1 L4/TCD 6.1 L6)
10-60
Technical characteristics
Check the lubricant oil level
Fig. 41
NOTE
An too low or too high level of lubricant oil could damage the engine.
The oil level can only be checked with the engine horizontal and stationary. Once it is hot, stop the engine and check
the oil level after 5 minutes. If the engine is cold, the check can be made immediately.
DANGER
Pay attention in the case of hot lubricant oil. Burn hazard! Do not remove the dipstick while the engine is running. Risk
of injury!
l
l
l
l
Remove the dipstick and clean it with a clean cloth that does not leave fibres.
Insert the lubricant oil dipstick to the stop.
Remove the dipstick and read the level of the lubricant oil.
The lubricant oil level must always be between the MIN and MAX notches! Top up to the MAX notch if necessary.
10-61
Technical characteristics
Lubricant oil change:
NOTE
On engines with passive regeneration, all active oil change requests must be cancelled in order to reset the idle regeneration cycle counter.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Press and hold the enable button for 10 seconds with the engine off and the ignition on.
At the end of this period, the regeneration indicator lamp lights briefly.
Release the button.
The oil change request is now cancelled.
If the button is not released within the following two seconds, the cancel request is ignored.
The procedure or cancelling requests from a CAN device is defined by the manufacturer of the device.
10-62
Technical characteristics
Replace the lubricant oil cartridge filter
Fig. 42
NOTE
The filter cartridge must never be pre-loaded. Risk of fouling!
l
l
l
l
10-63
Technical characteristics
Fig. 43
l
l
l
10-64
Lightly oil the seal on the new cartridge for the original DEUTZ filter.
Manually screw in the new filter until it is sealed and tighten to a torque of: 15-17 Nm
Tighten the tightening clamps of the anti-twist safety (optional).
Technical characteristics
Fig. 44
10-65
Technical characteristics
Replace the lubricant oil filter cartridge
5
3
4
Fig. 45
l
l
l
l
l
l
1 - Cover
2 O-ring
3 Body
4 - Drive
5 - Filter cartridge
6 - Bracket
NOTE
The filter cartridge must never be pre-loaded. Risk of fouling!
l
l
l
l
10-66
Technical characteristics
1
6
5
Fig. 46
l
l
l
10-67
Technical characteristics
1
2
5
4
3
Fig. 47
l
l
l
l
10-68
Technical characteristics
NOTE
It is necessary to bleed the fuel system again by carrying out a test cycle for 5 minutes at idle speed or at a reduced
load. In consideration of the high precision production of the system, ensure maximum cleanliness! The fuel system
must be watertight and closed. Visually inspect for system leaks/damage.
NOTE
Before starting work, fully clean and dry the engine and the engine compartment. Cover areas of the engine compartment from which dirt may separate using a new clean film. Work on the fuel distribution system may only be carried
out in a completely clean environment. Avoid impurities in the air, such as dirt, dust, humidity, etc.
Fig. 48
NOTE
The filter cartridge must never be pre-loaded. Risk of fouling!
l
l
l
Technical characteristics
l
Clean the filter holder sealing surface with a clean cloth that does not leave fibres.
Fig. 49
l
l
l
l
10-70
Lightly oil the seal on the new cartridge for the original DEUTZ filter.
Manually screw in the new filter until it is sealed and tighten to a torque of: 10-12 Nm
Tighten the tightening clamps of the anti-twist safety (optional).
Bleed the fuel distribution system.
Technical characteristics
Fig. 50
10-71
Technical characteristics
5
3
4
Fig. 51
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10-72
1 - Cover
2 O-ring
3 Body
4 - Drive
5 - Filter cartridge
6 - Bracket
Stop the engine.
Loosen the cover by 2 -3 turns and wait 30 seconds.
Unscrew the cover with the filter cartridge in an anticlockwise direction.
Disengage the filter cartridge upwards from the guide in the body.
Technical characteristics
1
6
5
Fig. 52
l
l
l
10-73
Technical characteristics
1
2
5
4
3
Fig. 53
l
l
l
l
10-74
Technical characteristics
Cleaning/replacing/bleeding the filter cartridge
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 54
1 - Bleed screw
2 - Pump fuel supply
3 - Fuel return from the fuel control unit (FCU)
4 - Fuel delivery pump
5 - Electric connection for the water level sensor
6 Drain plug
7 - Filter cartridge
8 - Fuel tank inlet
9 - Fuel return to tank
l
l
Technical characteristics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
3
Fig. 55
l
l
l
10-76
1 - Cover
2 - Compensator
3 - Filter cartridge
Technical characteristics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Add new coolant and bleed the system following the instructions of the cooling system manufacturer.
Carefully open the cooling system plug.
The lubricant oil level must always be between the MIN and MAX notches! Top up to the MAX notch if necessary.
10-77
Technical characteristics
Check the coolant additive concentration
Fig. 56
l
l
The relative measurement device may be ordered from your DEUTZ partner with the part number: 0293 7499.
10-78
Technical characteristics
Empty the cooling system
1
Fig. 57
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Technical characteristics
l
l
l
General information
The following causes of dirt make it necessary to clean the engine:
l
l
l
l
l
As operating conditions vary from application to application, clean as necessary in relation to degree of dirt and contamination
Remove the dirt with compressed air. Blow the air on the radiator and the cooling fins always from the exhaust air side towards
the clean air side.
Spray the engine with cold detergent and leave it on for approx. 10 minutes.
Clean the engine with a strong jet of water.
Rotate the engine until it heats up to evaporate the residual water.
Clean the engine with a jet of steam (maximum pressure 60 bar, maximum steam temperature 90C, min. distance 1m).
Rotate the engine until it heats up to evaporate the residual water.
Clean the radiator and the cooling fins always from the exhaust air side towards the clean air side.
NOTE
Maximum cleanliness is essential when working on the intake system. Close the intake openings if necessary. Used
filter elements must be disposed of in compliance with law.
10-80
Technical characteristics
Service the dry air filter
Fig. 58
DANGER
Do not clean the filter element (3) with petrol or hot liquids! Replace damaged filter elements.
l
l
l
l
Service the filtering element (3) based on the maintenance plan interval.
Open the retaining bracket (1).
Remove the filter cover (2) and withdraw the filter element (3).
Filter element (3):
m in the case of a low amount of contamination, blow dry compressed air on it from the inside towards the outside (max.
5 bar);
m replace in the case of a large amount of contamination.
10-81
Technical characteristics
Replace the dry air filter safety cartridge
NOTE
Never clean the safety cartridge (4).
l
l
Replace the safety cartridge (4) based on the maintenance plan interval.
For this purpose:
m Unscrew the hexagonal nut (5), withdraw the safety cartridge (4).
m Insert a new safety cartridge, tighten the hexagonal nut.
Insert the filter element (3), fit the cover (2) and fasten with the tightening bracket (1).
1
Fig. 59
l
l
10-82
Dry air filter maintenance is carried out based on the maintenance indicator or switch.
Filter maintenance is necessary when:
m the yellow maintenance switch control warning light turns on while the engine is running.
m the red service field (1) of the maintenance indicator is completely visible.
After performing the maintenance, press the maintenance indicator reset button. The maintenance indicator is again ready
for use.
Technical characteristics
Clean the dry air filter dust exhaust valve
Fig. 60
l
l
l
Empty the dust exhaust valve (1) by pressing the exhaust slot.
Any dust incrustations inside the device can be removed by squeezing the upper part of the device with your fingers.
Clean the exhaust slot.
10-83
Technical characteristics
Clean the centrifugal pre-filter
1
2
3
4
Fig. 61
NOTES
Never fill the dust bowl (3) with lubricant oil
l
l
l
Loosen the wingnut (1) and remove the housing cover (2).
Remove the dust bowl (3) from the underside (4) and empty. Clean the bowl with a brush and new diesel fuel, then dry.
Fit the dust bowl (3) onto the underside (4) and fasten the housing cover (2) with the wingnut (1).
10-84
Technical characteristics
l
l
2
Fig. 62
l
l
l
l
l
l
Tool
The belt tension tester (part number: 0189 9062) may be ordered from your DEUTZ partner.
10-85
Technical characteristics
Replacing the belt
4
A
B
2
3
Fig. 63
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10-86
1 Screw
2 Screw
3 Screw
4 - Adjustment wrench
Unscrew the screw and check nut.
Move the alternator above the adjustment wrench towards (B) until the belt loosens.
Remove the belts and fit the new ones.
Move the alternator above the adjustment wrench towards (A) until the belt is correctly tensioned.
Check the belt tension.
See para. 10.1.35 - Technical data - Engin... - page 10-102
Retighten the screw and check nut (torque 30 Nm).
Technical characteristics
Replacing the ribbed V-belt
1
Fig. 64
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10-87
Technical characteristics
10.1.29 - Care and maintenance - Adjustments and settings
Check valve clearance and adjust if necessary
l
l
l
l
l
Leave the engine to cool for at least 30 minutes before adjusting valve clearance: The engine oil temperature must be below
80 C.
Remove the electric line from the injectors.
Remove the cylinder head cover.
Fit the rotation tool on the pulley fastener screw.
Turn the crankshaft into the valve overlap position.
Table 54
Valve overlap
angle
Adjustment
1
3
4
2
4
2
1
3
TCD 6.1 L6
Table 55
Valve overlap
angle
Adjustment
1
5
3
6
2
4
6
2
4
1
5
3
EX
IN
4
5
Fig. 65
l
l
l
l
l
10-88
1 - Self-locking nut
2 - Adjustment wrench
3 - Rotation angle gauge
4 - Socket wrench insert
5 - Magnet
Technical characteristics
Table 56
Valve clearance
TCD 4.1 L4
TCD 6.1 L6
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
In
EX
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
75 15
120 15
Fit the rotation angle gauge on the adjustment screw with the socket wrench insert.
Fasten the magnet of the rotation angle gauge.
Turn the rotation angle gauge clockwise until it stops (no rocker free play) and set the scale to zero.
Turn the rotation angle gauge anticlockwise to reach the specified rotation angle
Hold the rotation angle gauge to prevent it from turning.
Tighten the check nut (tightening torque 20 Nm).
Then adjust the other two valves on the rocker as described above.
Perform the adjustment procedure for each cylinder.
Refit the cylinder head cover (fitting a new gasket if necessary), following the removal procedure in reverse order.
Tighten the screws (tightening torque 9 Nm).
Tool
The rotation angle gauge (part number: 0189 9093) may be ordered from your DEUTZ partner.
Fig. 66
Crankshaft position 1
l
l
l
l
Turn the crankshaft into the valve overlap position for cylinder 1.
Exhaust valve not yet closed, intake valve starts to open.
Adjust the black valves.
Mark the respective rocker with chalk to check the adjustment made.
Crankshaft position 2
10-89
Technical characteristics
l
l
NOTE
Make sure the polarity of the connections is correct. For engine cleaning, cover the electric/electronic components and
connections (e.g. control devices, alternator, solenoid valves, etc.). Do not use a direct water/steam jet for cleaning.
Then heat the engine. Do not check the presence of voltage by tapping against ground. If it is necessary to perform
electric welding work, the ground clamp of the welder must be directly connected to the part to be welded. Threephase current alternator: Do not interrupt the connection between the battery, alternator and regulator while the engine
is running.
Battery
NOTE
Disconnecting the battery from the terminals could cause electronically stored data to be lost. Keep the battery clean
and dry. Make sure that the battery is positioned correctly and safely. Dispose of depleted batteries in an environmentally friendly manner.
DANGER
Risk of explosion! The gas released from the battery is explosive! Flames, sparks, smoke and bare lights prohibited!
Risk of corrosion! Wear safety footwear and protective goggles! Avoid contact with skin and clothes! Risk of short
circuit! Do not place metal tools on the battery!
Test the battery voltage with a common voltmeter. The voltage provides information about the state of charge.
Table 57
Battery
12 Volts
24 Volts
12-14.4
24-28.4
l
l
10-90
Technical characteristics
Check the acid density
Fig. 67
l
l
l
l
Table 58
Acid density [kg/ l]
Normal
1.28
1.20
1.12
Tropical
1.23
1.12
1.08
Charge status
Measurement
good
half
return
None
charge
charge
10-91
Technical characteristics
Remove the battery
l
l
To disconnect, always disconnect the negative pole first. Otherwise there is a risk of short circuit!
Remove the fastening element and the battery.
Malfunctions
Causes
The engine does not start or starts with dif- The clutch did not uncouple (if possible)
Empty fuel tank
ficulty
Fuel intake line blocked
Limit temperature for start-up not reached
With the starter device cold
Incorrect engine oil SAE viscosity class
Fuel quality not compliant with specifications in instruction manual
The battery is defective or discharged
Starter cable connections loose or oxidised
Starter faulty or the pinion does not engage
Incorrect valve clearance
The engine does not start and the diagnostics warning light flashes
The engine starts, however operates irregularly or loses strokes
10-92
Action
Technical characteristics
Table 60
Malfunctions
Causes
Action
Clean
Lubricant oil change:
Check/replace
Renew/change
10-93
Technical characteristics
Table 61
Malfunctions
Causes
The engine oil pressure is too low or it is Lubricant oil level too low
The engine position is too sloped
depressurised
Action
10-94
Technical characteristics
Engine protection strategy of electronic engine management system
Fig. 68
l
l
l
1 - Diagnostics key
2 - Error warning light
3 - Electronic engine regulation (EMR)
NOTE
The warning light turns off as soon as all faults are eliminated. In the case of some anomalies, it is necessary to deactivate the ignition, wait 30 s and only then reactivate the ignition. If a sensor is faulty, all the corresponding monitoring
functions are deactivated. Only the sensor fault is documented in the error memory.
Depending on the monitoring function instruments, electronic engine regulation could protect the engine in some error situations
from possible damage by monitoring compliance with the important limit values during operation and checking correct operation of
the system components.
Depending on the seriousness of a detected anomaly, the engine can continue to operate with certain limits, with the error warning
light remaining on, or the error light flashes, indicating a serious system error. In this case, the engine must be stopped as soon as
it is possible to do so safely.
10-95
Technical characteristics
Error warning light
The error warning light is located near the drivers seat in the vehicle.
The error warning light could issue the following signals:
l
Operation check
m With the ignition active, the error warning light will flash for approx. 2 seconds.
m If there is no reaction during ignition, check the error warning light.
The warning light does not turn on
m After the lamp test, a warning light that is off signals a possible condition that is correct and without errors during the
checks that can be carried out.
Permanent light
System error
m Operation continues with certain limitations.
m Have a check performed by a DEUTZ service partner.
m If the light is fixed, this means that a controlled unit of measure (e.g. the coolant temperature, the lubricant oil pressure)
exceeded the permitted interval.
m Depending on the type of problem, the electronic engine regulator can reduce the engine power to protect the engine.
Flashing
Serious system error.
m Deactivation request for the operator. Note: Failure to respect this causes the warranty to be voided!
m The switching off condition for the engine was not reached.
m To cool the engine, forced operation with power reduced, if necessary with automatic switching off.
m Switching off process.
m After the engine has stopped, there may be a starter block.
m The starter block is eliminated by deactivating the system with the ignition key for approx. 30 s.
m With the optional override key on the instrument panel for avoiding critical situations, power reduction can be excluded,
automatic deactivation can be delayed or a starter block can be excluded. This brief deactivation of the engine protection functions is recorded in the control unit.
In the case of operating anomalies and the need for spare parts, contact one of our competent support service dealers
. In the case of a fault, our qualified personnel can make any repair in a quick and appropriate manner using original DEUTZ spare
parts.
Diagnostics key
The diagnostics key is used to display the errors currently present in the electronic engine regulation error memory, in the form of
flashing codes.
The flashing codes offer:
l
l
10-96
Technical characteristics
2s
0,4 s
0,4 s
0,8 s
2s
0,8 s
0,4 s
0,4 s
Fig. 69
Example:
Flashing code 1-2-8
l
l
l
1 x brief flash
2 x long flashes
8 x short flashes
This flashing code signals damage or a short circuit in the supply air temperature sensor cables. The time sequence of the flashing
signals is indicated in the figure.
The flashing codes can only be interpreted by a DEUTZ service partner.
10-97
Technical characteristics
10.1.33 - Transport and storage - Transport
Suspension device
Fig. 70
DANGER
The transport devices fit on this engine are calibrated based on the engine weight. If you want to transport the engine
with additional components, the transport devices must be reconfigured.
l
l
l
10-98
Technical characteristics
1
2
Fig. 71
DANGER
Danger of death! If errors are made when implementing the suspension, the engine could overturn or fall!
l
l
l
The fastening device may not be fastened securely to the barycentre (1).
The fastening material could slip and the engine could overturn (1).
A fastening device that is too short could cause the transport device (2) to bend, damaging it.
10-99
Technical characteristics
After placing the engine out of service, the following protection treatments satisfy the requirements for protecting for a 12 month
period.
The following procedures for applying protective treatment must only be performed by qualified personnel who has been adequately
informed of the risks involved.
Failure to comply with the instructions and exposing the engine or any parts treated with wax to any unfavourable conditions (placing
outside or storage in humid and non-ventilated areas) or if there is any damage to the layer of the protective material, a shorter protection and treatment period must be considered for the device.
The engines protective treatment must be checked approx. every 3 months by opening the covers. If traces of corrosion are found,
a new treatment is necessary
To prevent the protective product from being removed from bearings, bushes and the cylinder sleeves, do not rotate the crankshaft
after applying the protective treatment.
Before starting up a treated engine, remove the protective wax.
The internal protective treatment is done by wetting the interior walls with the protective product, using an engine treatment
cycle.
The treatment cycle may be carried out once to protect the various systems:
or
l
wet all accessible components with protective oil for running-in, and use a separate pump to circulate protective oil for runningin, heated to 60C, throughout the engine until all the bearings and bushes are coated.
Cooling system
l
l
l
Depending on the series, the engines are equipped with air, oil or coolant (cooling water with a cooling system protective
agent) based cooling systems.
Cooling air system, see the External protection treatment section.
For oil cooled engines, the lubricating oil in circulation also is used for cooling. In this way the cooling compartments are automatically treated with the oil lubrication system.
If a protective product that has preserving characteristics is added to the cooling system for liquid cooled engines, once
drained no other measures are required.
Otherwise, the coolant must be drained and in order to create a protective layer on the inner surfaces of the cooling system,
carry out a protective treatment with a mixture consisting of:
m 95 % treated water
m 5 % anti-corrosive agent
The duration of the protective treatment cycle and the concentration of the anti-corrosive product must be decided based on
the data provided by the anti-corrosive agent manufacturer.
Then drain the coolant.
10-100
Technical characteristics
Exhaust after-treatment system - Selective catalytic reduction
l
l
l
l
Provided that the following conditions are met, the SCR system may remain out of use for up to 4 months after total shut-down
of the engine (including all inertial functions):
In the event of a prolonged periods out of use, the vehicle or engine must be stored in a covered location, such as a garage
or factory shed.
Fill the AdBlue tank completely.
The water contained in the AdBlue solution must not be allowed to evaporate.
Do not disconnect electric or hydraulic connections.
Maximum storage time with ambient temperatures between - 40 C and 40 C: 2 months.
Maximum storage time with ambient temperatures between - 40 C and 25 C: 4 months.
AdBlue
m Drain the tank completely.
m Fill the tank completely with new AdBlue.
m Replace the filtration element of the delivery pump.
Warm the engine to operating temperature and load the engine until the AdBlue system pressure and delivery rate increases.
If a fault occurs:
l
Spray the intake air duct with ANTICORIT VCI UNI O 40 anti-corrosion oil or TITAN EM 2020 DEUTZ (SAE 20W-20) protective oil for running-in.
Before carrying out the external protection treatment, the engine must be cleaned thoroughly with detergent. Eliminate any
signs of corrosion or paint damage.
All glossy metal external surfaces and parts (e.g. flywheel, flange surfaces) must be painted or sprayed with the protective
product.
Rubber parts
l
Unpainted rubber parts (e.g. sleeves) are rubbed with talcum powder.
Belt transmissions
l
l
Disassemble the belts and the ribbed V-belt and store them packaged.
Spray anti-corrosive liquid on the V-belt pulleys and on the belt tensioner rollers.
Engine openings
l
l
l
To delay the evaporation of the protective substances, air and water tight covers must be placed on all engine openings.
With the air compressor installed, close the intake and pressure connector with a plug.
Block the air inlet again to avoid engine ventilation (chimney effect).
after applying the protective treatment, store the engine in a dry, well ventilated building under adequate cover.
This cover must be placed on the engine with a certain clearance so that air can circulate around it and condensate water
cannot form. Use a drier if necessary.
10-101
Technical characteristics
Dewaxing
l
l
l
Connect the fuel tank line to the engine. Ensure maximum cleanliness.
Fill the fuel tank and system with the specified fuel.
Unscrew the lubricant oil discharge auger, drain the lubricant oil.
Pour the lubricant oil into the engine through the filler.
Coolant system
l
In the case of compatibility between the preserving agent with the protective product for the cooling system, this can be added
directly to the coolant system based on the requirements.
If you are not perfectly certain of compatibility between the anti-corrosive product to be used with the protective product for the
cooling system, before adding it first perform a washing cycle with clean water for approx. 15 minutes.
Wash all the surfaces and components covered with the preserving protect with fuel distillate or a suitable detergent.
If necessary wash the toothed belt pulley grooves.
Fit the belts and V-belts based on the instructions.
Top up the coolant.
Preserving/cleaning products
For information about reference products to be used for protecting or cleaning that comply with DEUTZ requirements, contact your
DEUTZ partner.
Or see the website www.deutz.com
Table 62
http://www.deutz.it
de
en
Engine type
Operating mode
Turbocharging
Type of cooling
Cylinder layout
Number of cylinders
Bore/stroke
Total capacity
Injection system
Exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas after-treatment
Valves per cylinder
Dimensions
[mm]
[cm3]
TCD 4.1 L4
TCD 6.1 L6
*The lubricant oil quantities indicated are for standard versions. For engines with non-standard configurations, such as other oil sump/dipstick variants and/or special installations in inclined positions, the quantity of oil may vary.
Always refer to what is indicated on the notch of the lubricant oil dipstick.
10-102
Technical characteristics
Engine type
Dimensions
[]
TCD 4.1 L4
TCD 6.1 L6
1-3-4-2
on the left
1-5-3-6-2-4
75 15 / 120 15
[kW]
[rpm]
[l]
5.9/5.0
[C]
max. 110
[C]
4-8
[C]
[C]
[l]
86
102
11.5*
[C]
125
[kPa/bar]
80/0.8
[C]
50
[N]
[kg]
8.7/7.5
15.5*
pretension/tension correction
65050/40050
Spring belt tensioner with automatic tension
400
510
*The lubricant oil quantities indicated are for standard versions. For engines with non-standard configurations, such as other oil sump/dipstick variants and/or special installations in inclined positions, the quantity of oil may vary.
Always refer to what is indicated on the notch of the lubricant oil dipstick.
10-103
Technical characteristics
10.1.36 - Technical data - Tools
Tool order
TORX tool
Fig. 72
Excellent accessibility.
Superior torque transmission when loosening and tightening.
No risk of the tool slipping or breaking, causing operator injury.
10-104
Technical characteristics
V-belt tension tester
Fig. 73
10-105
Technical characteristics
Special wrench for loosening the cartridge filters
Fig. 74
10-106
Technical characteristics
Rotation angle gauge
Fig. 75
10-107
Technical characteristics
Socket wrench insert
Fig. 76
10-108
Technical characteristics
Rotation device
Fig. 77
10-109
Technical characteristics
Rotation device
Fig. 78
10-110
Technical characteristics
Refractometer
Fig. 78
Coolant
Battery acidity
AdBlue
10-111
Technical characteristics
10.2 - Engine accessories
Fig. 79
Wiring diagram
1.
Table 64
Diagnostics
Overpressure
Negative pressure
Ground
Signal (UDC)
Signal (UDC)
Signal (UDC)
(+)
4.75
0.25
4.8
(S)
3
4
(-)
Fig. 80
Connector configuration
1.
Table 65
Pin / socket
1
2
3
4
Supply voltage
Signal
not used
Ground
4
(-)
1
(+)
(S)
2
Fig. 81
10-112
Technical characteristics
10.2.2 - Pressure sensor (L3)
Technical data
1.
2.
Fig. 82
Wiring diagram
1.
(-)
(S1)
(+)
(S2)
Fig. 83
Connector configuration
1.
Table 66
Pin / socket
1
2
3
4
Ground
Signal
Supply voltage
Signal
4
3
(S2) (+)
2
(S1)
1
(-)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
Fig. 84
10-113
Technical characteristics
2.
Measurement
n Temperature sender
Table 67
Temperature
C
-40
-20
0
20
50
100
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
Nominal
k
48,150 ( 5%)
15,610 ( 5%)
5,880 ( 5%)
2,510 ( 5%)
0.850 ( 5%)
0.186 ( 5%)
Measurement
l
l
Table 68
Pressure
kPa
100
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
Nominal
k
5.1 ( 8%)
Fig. 85
10-114
Technical characteristics
Wiring diagram
1.
(-)
1
(S)
2
Fig. 86
Connector configuration
1.
Table 69
Pin / socket
1
2
2
(S)
1
(-)
Ground
Signal
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
Fig. 87
Measurement
l
Temperature sender
Table 70
Temperature
C
-40
-20
0
20
25
100
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
Nominal
k
45,313 ( 10.5%)
15,460 ( 8%)
5,890 ( 7%)
2,500 ( 6%)
2,057 ( 5.5%)
0.186 ( 2.5%)
10-115
Technical characteristics
2.
Fig. 88
Wiring diagram
1.
2
(S)
Fig. 89
Connector configuration
1.
Table 71
Pin / socket
1
2
Ground
Signal
1
(-)
2
(S)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
Fig. 90
10-116
Technical characteristics
2.
Measurement
n Temperature sender
Table 72
Temperature
C
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
-40
25
50
1
1
1
2
2
2
39,656 ( 6.7%)
2,000 ( 3.3%)
0.833 ( 2.4%)
Value table
Temperature
C
Nominal
k
Idle
k
Maximum
k
Table 73
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
39,656
30,080
23,026
17,781
13,846
10,867
8,594
6,845
5,490
4,432
3,601
2,943
2,420
2,000
1,662
1,166
0.833
0.605
0.447
0.387
0.338
0.255
0.197
0.154
0.121
0.097
0.078
0.063
37,013
28,173
21,639
16,783
13,092
10,305
8,172
6,526
5,248
4,247
3,458
2,833
2,334
1,934
1,610
1,133
0.812
0.593
0.439
0.380
0.331
0.252
0.195
0.152
0.119
0.095
0.076
0.062
Nominal
k
42,298
31,986
24,414
18,800
14,600
11,429
9,015
7,154
5,732
4,618
3,743
3,053
2,505
2,067
1,715
1,198
0.853
0.618
0.456
0.393
0.341
0.259
0.199
0.155
0.123
0.098
0.079
0.085
10-117
Technical characteristics
10.2.5 - Temperature sender (L3)
Technical data
1.
2.
Fig. 91
Wiring diagram
1.
Rv
(S) 2
(-) 1
Fig. 92
Connector configuration
1.
Table 74
Pin / socket
1
2
Ground
Signal
1
(-)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
(S)
2
Fig. 93
10-118
Technical characteristics
2.
Measurement
n Temperature sender
Table 75
Temperature
C
0
25
100
600
850
Table 76
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Value table
Temperature
C
-40
0
25
50
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
850
Nominal
k
0.169 ( 1.1%)
0.200 ( 1%)
0.219 ( 0.9%)
0.238 ( 0.8%)
0.275 ( 0.7%)
0.349 ( 0.5%)
0.419 ( 0.5%)
0.488 ( 0.5%)
0.554 ( 0.5%)
0.617 ( 0.6%)
0.679 ( 0.6%)
0.738 ( 0.6%)
0.766 ( 0.6%)
Nominal
k
0.200 ( 1%)
0.219 ( 0.9%)
0.275 ( 0.7%)
0.617 ( 0.6%)
0.767 ( 0.6%)
Idle
k
0.725
0.835
0.900
0.963
1,081
1,293
1,478
1,640
1,783
1,909
2,022
2,123
2.170
Fig. 94
10-119
Technical characteristics
Wiring diagram
1.
Rv
(S) 2
(-) 1
Fig. 95
Connector configuration
1.
Table 77
Pin / socket
1
2
Ground
Signal
1
(-)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
(S)
2
Fig. 96
10-120
Technical characteristics
2.
Measurement
n Temperature sender
Table 78
Temperature
C
0
25
100
600
900
Table 79
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Value table
Temperature
C
-40
-20
0
25
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Nominal
k
0.169 ( 1.1%)
0.185 ( 1.1%)
0.200 ( 1%)
0.219 ( 0.9%)
0.238 ( 0.8%)
0.276 ( 0.7%)
0.313 ( 0.7%)
0.349 ( 0.5%)
0.384 ( 0.5%)
0.419 ( 0.5%)
0.454 ( 0.5%)
0.488 ( 0.5%)
0.521 ( 0.5%)
0.554 ( 0.5%)
0.617 ( 0.6%)
0.679 ( 0.6%)
0.738 ( 0.6%)
0.795 ( 0.6%)
0.849 ( 0.6%)
Nominal
k
0.200 ( 1%)
0.219 ( 0.9%)
0.276 ( 0.7%)
0.617 ( 0.6%)
0.795 ( 0.6%)
Idle
V
0.725
0.781
0.835
0.900
0.963
1,081
1,191
1,293
1,389
1,478
1,562
1,640
1,713
1,783
1,909
2,022
2,123
2,214
2,296
Fig. 97
10-121
Technical characteristics
Wiring diagram
1.
(S1)
1
3
(S2)
Fig. 98
Connector configuration
1.
Table 80
Pin / socket
1
2
3
Signal
Signal
Shielding
(S1) 1
(S2) 2
Fig. 99
2.
Measurement
n Speed indicator
Table 81
Condition
C
20
Pin / socket
Pin / socket
Nominal
880 ( 10%)
DANGER
Hot components! Risk of injury!
3.
Measurement
n Speed indicator
Table 82
Condition
Pin / socket
10-122
Pin / socket
Nominal
V
1.65
Polarity
Technical characteristics
10.2.8 - NOx sensor (L3)
Technical data
1.
2.
Table 83
Power supply voltage 12 ( 5%)
(UDC)
Measurement interval 0 - 500
-40 - 105
(NOx)
V
ppm
C
Fig. 100
Connector configuration
1.
Table 84
Pin / socket
1
2
3
4
4
(+)
3
(-)
2
(CAN-low)
1
(CAN-high)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
Fig. 101
10-123
Technical characteristics
2.
Table 85
Power supply voltage 12 ( 5%)
(UDC)
Measurement interval 0 - 500
-40 - 105
(NOx)
V
ppm
C
Fig. 102
Connector configuration
1.
Table 86
Pin / socket
1
2
3
4
4
(+)
3
(-)
2
(CAN-low)
1
(CAN-high)
DANGER
Hot components! Burn hazard!
Fig. 103
10.2.10 - Removing and fitting fuel lines (fuel delivery pump - fuel control block) (L3)
Special tools:
l
10-124
Technical characteristics
Removal of fuel lines
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
Fuel line
Fuel line
Fuel line
Hex valve
Pipe retaining clip
O-ring
Hollow screw
Pressure transducer
Flexible pipe support
Flexible pipe support
Fig. 104
2.
Squeeze the retaining springs (1) on both sides of the of the connection fitting.
1
1
Fig. 105
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 106
10-125
Technical characteristics
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 107
5.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 108
6.
m
m
m
Fig. 109
10-126
Technical characteristics
Refitting fuel lines.
1.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 110
2.
WARNING
When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not under tension. Make sure the assembly position is correct.
m
m
m
m
m
3.
WARNING
When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not under tension. Make sure the assembly position is correct.
m
m
10-127
Technical characteristics
4.
WARNING
When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not under tension. Make sure the assembly position is correct.
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 87
ID no.
Designation
A07 090
A12 093
A12 096
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
30 Nm
39 Nm
30 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
10.2.11 - Fitting and removing the temperature sender (exhaust gas) (L3)
Removal of the temperature sender
1.
m
m
Fig. 114
10-128
Technical characteristics
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 115
m
m
m
Fig. 116
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 88
ID no.
Designation
A13 048
Temperature transmitter
(exhaust gas) on exhaust
pipe
Closing screw (temperature transmitter, exhaust
gas) on exhaust pipe
A13 049
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
45 Nm
32 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
10-129
Technical characteristics
10.2.12 - Temperature sender (L3)
1.
1 - Temperature sender
Fig. 117
2.
1 - Temperature sender: 25 Nm
Fig. 118
10-130
Technical characteristics
Disassembly of the sensor
1.
Note
The following procedure illustrates how to select, remove
and fit a single sensor. Follow the same procedure to remove/fit other sensors. Mark the cables and the respective
connections before continuing with disassembly.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 119
m
m
Fig. 120
2.
WARNING
Do not twist the cable. Check that the cables are positioned
correctly.
m
m
Fig. 121
10-131
Technical characteristics
3.
WARNING
Ensure that the correct sensor is installed in the correct position.
m
Table 89
Installation location
Black
Fig. 122
Route the cable between the NOx sensor and the NOx ECU, with an
additional loop of cable for safety.
X
WARNING
Check that the cables are positioned correctly. Route the cables without friction or tension points. The length of the additional loop of cable must be as indicated in the documentation provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle/machine.
Table 90
Position
1
2
3
4
X
10-132
180
1
2
4
3
Note/Name
Value
180
at least 100 mm
Fig. 123
Technical characteristics
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 91
ID no.
Designation
A71 068
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
DANGER
High temperature components! Risk of burns/risk of explosion! Let the engine/components cool down sufficiently (at least to ambient temperature). The duration of the so-called post-operation time depends on the application; in engines with the SCR system, for example, it can last up to 2 minutes, which is the time necessary
to completely empty the SCR pipes. Filter regeneration must be deactivated before carrying out the service
operations, or cannot be activated in systems with filter regeneration request.
WARNING
2.
Ensure maximum cleanliness during all work. Before proceeding with removal, remove any paint residue or
debris. Thoroughly clean the area around the components to be worked on. Dry any wet areas with an air jet.
When handling fuel observe the safety directives and specific local regulations. All fuel lines and unions should
be closed immediately after opening using new, clean plugs or caps. Remove plugs and caps only immediately
prior to assembly. Collect operating materials in suitable containers and dispose of them in compliance with
the applicable regulations.
m
Temperature sender 45 Nm
Fig. 124
10-133
Technical characteristics
10.3 - Transmission
The tractors in this series are equipped with an infinitely variable hydrostatic/mechanical POWER SPLIT transmission The
main feature of this transmission is the ability control and manage tractor travel speed from 0 to 50 km/h in accordance with
operator commands and the traction effort to which the tractor is subjected Transmission management is fully automatic and
controlled by an electronic control unit
The transmission can be divided into the following sections:
m A. Gearbox
B. Rear axle
C. Rear PTO
D. Auxiliary hydraulic oil tank
D0060110
10-134
Technical characteristics
Main components
2
3
D0060120
10-135
Technical characteristics
6
5
3
4
1
LH trumpet housing
Oil filler plug
PARK LOCK release button
Brake assembly
Hydrostatic transmission assembly
Rx axle housing
10-136
Technical characteristics
3
2
1
D0060150
1
5
4
D0060160
Technical characteristics
1
5
4
D0060160
10-138
Technical characteristics
D0060170
10.3.2 - Transmission (50 Km/h) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Introduction
10-139
Technical characteristics
l
The tractors in this series are equipped with an infinitely variable hydrostatic/mechanical POWER SPLIT transmission The
main feature of this transmission is the ability control and manage tractor travel speed from 0 to 50 km/h in accordance with
operator commands and the traction effort to which the tractor is subjected Transmission management is fully automatic and
controlled by an electronic control unit
The transmission can be divided into the following sections:
m A. Gearbox
B. Rear axle
C. Rear PTO
D. Auxiliary hydraulic oil tank
D0068890
10-140
Technical characteristics
Main components
D0068900
10-141
Technical characteristics
3
1
4
5
10
2
11
D0068910
10-142
Technical characteristics
2
D0068920
1
4
3
D0068930
Technical characteristics
1
4
3
D0068930
10-144
Technical characteristics
D0068940
10.3.3 - Transmission (60 Km/h) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Introduction
10-145
Technical characteristics
l
The tractors in this series are equipped with an infinitely variable hydrostatic/mechanical POWER SPLIT transmission The
most important characteristic of this transmission is the ability to control and manage tractor speed from 0 to 60 Km/h in relation to operator commands and the traction strain to which the tractor is subjected Transmission management is fully automatic and controlled by an electronic control unit
The transmission can be divided into the following sections:
m A. Gearbox
B. Rear axle
C. Rear PTO
D. Auxiliary hydraulic oil tank
D0068890
10-146
Technical characteristics
Main components
D0068900
10-147
Technical characteristics
3
1
4
5
10
2
11
D0068910
10-148
Technical characteristics
2
D0068920
1
4
3
D0068930
Technical characteristics
1
4
3
D0068930
10-150
Technical characteristics
D0068940
10-151
Technical characteristics
10.3.4 - System diagram (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Cartridge
SG
C
ZW
HA
ZA
GS
HY
K1
K2
KR
ZK
K4
K3
KV
D
B
nMotor
nSt1_2
P1P2
P3 P4
nSt3_4
nPTO
nAbtrieb1 nAbtrieb2
P5 P6
P
A
S
F1
F2
Description
F1
F2
HY
GS
Hydrostatic gearbox
Lubrication and system pressure pump
Components
Planetary gear P1
Planetary gear P2
Ranges I-IV
Planetary gear P3
Planetary gear P4
K1 clutch
K2 clutch
K3 clutch
K4 clutch
Forward/reverse ranges
Planetary gear P5
Planetary gear P6
Clutch KV
Clutch KR
Table 93
Designation
ZW
C
E
10-152
Description
Connector housing between input shaft (drive shaft nEngine) and PTO transmission
Cartridge
Engage/disengage system (rear axle)
Technical characteristics
Designation
R
P
B
D
A
ZA
ZK
HA
SG
Description
Cartridge
l
Selector, engaged automatically throughout entire range of forward and reverse speeds without interrupting power transmission, consisting of:
m Accumulator planetary reduction unit
2 planetary gears
m Planetary reduction unit for ranges I-IV
2 planetary gears with 4 dog clutches
The dog clutches are synchronised. These clutches are engaged by system pressure and disengaged by Belleville
washers.
m Planetary reduction unit for forward/reverse ranges
2 planetary gears with 2 dog clutches
The dog clutches are synchronised. These clutches are engaged by system pressure and disengaged by Belleville
washers.
Hydrostatic gearbox
l
Gearbox electronics
l
Including transmission sensors for controlling and regulating the transmission via the TCU (electronic transmission control
unit)
Transmission control
TCU
l
VDC
l
Driving characteristics
10-153
Technical characteristics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Transmission ratio varied continuously to maintain optimum vehicle speed independently of engine speed.
Greater operating comfort.
A choice of different operating modes for different applications: constant vehicle speed for precision applications, harvesting
and pulling; constant engine speed for working with PTO.
Automatic guidance system which keeps engine power and torque at optimum fuel efficiency.
Increased yield per hectare by making optimum use of the power available.
Reduced emissions through optimised engine management.
Approximately equivalent draft in both forward and reverse.
Uphill/downhill
m 25
Left/right
m 35
Rear axle
HA = rear axle
P = planetary gear
B = brake
D = differential with lamellar clutch
Fig. 138
Table 94
PTO rotation speed
(rpm)
540 E
1000
1000 E
l
l
l
Engine speed
(rpm)
1580
1943
1605
Engine power
(kW)
100
171
171
PTO
E = PTO transmission
ZK= PTO clutch
ZS= PTO output shaft
Fig. 139
10-154
Technical characteristics
l
PTO clutch
m Oil bath PTO coupling clutch with electrohydraulic engagement and thrust spring disengagement.
Activate arms with link for mechanical drive.
On one side, torque from the input shaft drives the ring gear of the accumulator planetary gear set via a face gear, providing purely
mechanical power transmission.
A hydrostatic unit is driven simultaneously by another face gear on the rear input shaft.
Within the unit, the fixed displacement pump is driven directly by the oil flow delivered by the variable displacement hydrostatic pump.
The swashplate inside the hydrostatic pump is moved electrohydraulically to alter both the speed and direction of rotation of the
hydrostatic motor. By rotating the regulator unit on the pump, the speed of the hydrostatic motor can be varied within a range from
the maximum negative value of the hydraulic pump to the maximum positive value of the pump.
Torque from the hydrostatic motor is transmitted via a face gear to the central pinion on the accumulator planetary gear set.
To ensure adequate gear spacing and limit the hydrostatic power element, a planetary reduction unit is included for ranges I-IV, with
four different mechanical ratio ranges.
Four dog clutches enable the use of the four ranges in both forward and reverse operation.
A forward/reverse planetary reduction unit is connected after the continuously variable range gearbox.
Direction inversions are performed by 2 integrated dog clutches.
By operating the KV (forward) and KR (reverse) dog clutches simultaneously, direction inversion manoeuvres are performed with no
interruption in drive through the transmission, which therefore remains engaged throughout the manoeuvre.
10-155
Technical characteristics
Fig. 140
Table 95
Colour
10-156
Pos. No.
Description
Technical characteristics
Colour
Pos. No.
Description
P1-P6
K1-K4
KV
KR
nEngine
nSt1 2
nSt3 4
nOutputs (1 and 2)
KR
X
X
X
X
Speed*
Km/h
0.00-9.07
9.07-16.58
16.58-31.89
31.89-58.33
0.00-8.18
8.18-14.96
14.96-28.79
28.79-52.64
KR
X
X
X
X
Speed*
Km/h
0.00-7.75
7.75-14.16
14.16-27.24
27.24-49.82
0.00-6.99
6.99-12.78
12.78-24.58
24.58-44.96
10-157
Technical characteristics
Description of function of accumulator planetary gear unit
The accumulator planetary gear unit consists of a set of 5 shafts with two input
shafts and three output shafts, and allows the mechanical and hydrostatic power
transmission components to overlap seamlessly.
The ring gear (1) is driven directly by the input shaft via a face gear.
The central pinion (2) is driven by the hydrostatic motor. Two narrow planet gears
between the ring gear and the central pinion mesh with two broad planet gears to
invert the direction of rotation of the planetary gear unit.
These broad planet gears mesh on the output side with the ring gear (5) and the
central pinion (4) to transmit the output power.
Output power may also be transmitted through the shaft connected to the planet
gear carrier (3).
These three possible outputs from the accumulator planetary reduction unit (ring
gear, central pinion and gear carrier) create four different multiplication ranges.
This achieves the gear spacing between ratios necessary for vehicles with both
high draft requisites and high final drive speeds.
1
3
Fig. 141
Output 0%
Mechanical +100%
Hydrostatic -100%
Fig. 142
State II
Output 50%
Mechanical +100%
Hydrostatic 0%
Fig. 143
10-158
Technical characteristics
State III
Output 100%
Mechanical +100%
Hydrostatic +100%
Fig. 144
The S-Matic transmission is fed with pressurised oil from a system pump unit consisting of a variable displacement pump and a fixed
displacement lubrication pump. The system circuit (system pressure) feeds the hydrostatic transmission, the 3/2 way solenoid valves
for the clutches and front wheel drive, and the 20 bar circuit.
The 20 bar circuit feeds the deviators for the differential locks, the PTOs and the external deviators.
Oil from the lubrication pump is routed through the radiator. The radiator is bypassed if the radiator pressure differential limiting
valve exerts excessive resistance, and the oil is sent directly to the lubrication circuit. Lubrication oil is sent via lines from the
radiator return line to the lubrication unions and to the lubrication pressure limiting valve. The lubrication circuit feeds the selector,
the rear differential, the PTO transmission and the PTO engagement clutch.
Excess oil is dumped from the lubrication circuit by the lubrication pressure limiting valve and used to cool the brakes and lubricate
the ring gear/pinion connection. At higher speeds, the delivery rate of the lubrication pump exceeds the demand for lubrication oil of
the utilities. The resulting excess oil is discharged into the pick-up channel via brake lubrication pressure limiting valve situated after
the pick-up filter, and aspirated again by the pumps. This allows the system to warm to operating temperature more rapidly in the
case of cold starting. At higher operating temperatures and speeds, the pickup oil temperature is kept low by the proportion of the
delivery flow routed through the radiator.
Oil is picked up by the delivery pumps from the bottom of the gearbox sump via a pick-up filter with a filtration size of 15 m (or 125
m in bypass mode). The bypass valve opens at a pressure differential across the filter of 0.2 bar.
The hydraulic system consists of two oil circuits:
Lubrication circuit
The lubrication pump (metering unit) sends all the oil through the oil radiator. At a resistance exceeding 6.5 bar between the unions
to and from the radiator, a proportion of the flow is bypassed by the pressure differential limiting valve.
The lubrication points are fed by the return flow from the radiator, which is also connected to the lubrication pressure limiting valve
(calibrated at 2 bar). After leaving the lubrication pressure limiting valve, the oil is used to cool the braked and lubricate the ring gear/
pinion connection. If the pressure in this duct exceeds 2 bar, the excess oil flow in the pickup channel is deviated and aspirated
again by the pumps. A proportion of the flow is always directed from the cooling circuit to the pickup channel, and only the quantities
required by the utilities (losses from hydrostatic transmission, lubricant etc.) are aspirated from the oil sump via the pick-up filter. As
a result, the oil heats rapidly in the event of cold starting, and once at operating temperature, the temperature of all the oil aspirated
is lower than the temperature in the oil sump.
At temperatures below 65C, the operating temperature regulator system sends only a part of the oil to the radiator. At oil temperatures of 65C and above, the cooling circuit is completely open, allowing the system to reach operating temperature rapidly.
System circuit
The variable displacement pump (rotary vacuum pump) delivers the quantity of oil necessary to cover hydrostatic transmission losses
(variable displacement axial pump + variable displacement axial piston motor) and the hydrostatic transmission flush volume, and
to feed the directional solenoid valves for the clutches and the 20 bar circuit, which in turn feeds the clutches with pressurised oil.
The hydrostatic transmission losses increase with increasing load, while the hydrostatic transmission flush volume is evacuated by
the low pressure difference between the hydrostatic transmission and the tank, and is used to cool and lubricate the gear teeth (on
hydrostatic motor side). The flow of flush oil is generated by a low hydrostatic pressure differential. Oil for this utility is directed through
10-159
Technical characteristics
the filter (10 m(c) = 200) under pressure and, in the event of high oil viscosity, is deviated via a bypass valve. The bypass valve
opens at a pressure differential across the filter of 7 bar.
At low temperatures, the pressure differential across the filter may reach values as high 10 bar. A check valve with an aperture
pressure of 0.5 bar is installed after the pressurised filter. This valve prevents backflow returning through the filter to protect the filter
element.
System diagram
A = Valve block II Clutch solenoid valves.
B = Valve block I Filter unit.
C = Valve block IV Front wheel drive solenoid valve.
D = Valve block III Pressure reducing valve solenoid valve.
Fig. 145
Sensors
Inductive transducer
2 = Engine speed (n Engine)
3 = P1/P2 planet gear carrier speed (n St1_2)
Fig. 146
Inductive transducer
1 = Output speed (n Output 1 and 2)
4 = P3/P4 planet gear carrier speed (n St3_4)
Fig. 147
10-160
Technical characteristics
Inductive transducer
5 = PTO output shaft speed
Fig. 148
Pressure sensors
1 = system pressure
2 = lubrication pressure
Fig. 149
Delivery valves
Directional valves
Filter
Switches
Electric deviator
10-161
Technical characteristics
10.4 - Front axle
10-162
Technical characteristics
Table 98
Steering angle B
30
35
40
45
50
53
Dimension C
79 mm
66 mm
52 mm
37 mm
23 mm
16 mm
Components key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10-163
Technical characteristics
10.5 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
10.5.1 - Air conditioning system
Charging the A/C system
-
Table 99
2,000 g.
200 g.
1a
4
8
7
6
9
Fig. 151 - System diagram, general
Colour key
l
l
l
10-164
B
C
Technical characteristics
Table 100
Position
Description
Compressor
1a
Condenser
3
3rd
4
5
6
Expansion valve
Evaporator
7
8
Temperature sensor
Fan
Air shroud
Notes
10-165
Technical characteristics
10.5.2 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - General description
General description
e
Th
9
mo
0S
5
6
7
9
11
10-166
10
Technical characteristics
4
3
1
2
5
11
10
The Thermo 90 S and Thermo 90 ST water heaters work in conjunction with the heating system of the vehicle to:
l
l
l
The water heater functions independently from the engine of the vehicle and is connected to the cooling system, the fuel system and
the electrical system of the vehicle.
The heater, an evaporator system, is controlled to operate intermittently by a temperature sensor.
The output of the burner is adjusted between 1.8 and 7.6 kW (for both diesel and petrol fuelled heaters) in relation to the discrepancy
between the effective coolant temperature measured by the temperature sensor and the nominal temperature value. When a parti10-167
Technical characteristics
cular high thermal output is needed (engine pre-heat), diesel fuelled heaters are capable of producing a maximum of 9.1 kW for a
maximum period of 2 hours after activation.
Thermo 90 S and Thermo 90 ST heaters consist essentially of the following components:
l
l
l
l
an external ECU
a flame sensor
a glow plug
a temperature sensor
a temperature limiter installed in the device itself
In the case of the Thermo 90 S heater, the ECU may also be fitted onto the combustion air fan with a flange.
The Thermo 90 ST heater is supplied with the ECU already mounted onto the combustion air fan with a flange.
Fuel delivery is controlled by an external metering pump.
Combustion air fan
The combustion air fan delivers the air necessary for combustion to the combustion air inlet of the burner insert.
Fig. 154
Heat exchanger
Inside the heat exchanger, the heat generated by combustion is transferred to the
cooling circuit.
l
l
Fig. 155
Temperature sensor
The temperature sensor measures the coolant temperature at the coolant outlet of the heater as an electrical resistance value. This
signal is received and processed by the ECU.
Temperature limiter
The (Bimetal) overheat protection device prevents the heater from operating at excessively high temperatures. The overheat protection device is activated when the heat exchanger exceeds a temperature of 127 7 C, and cuts out the heater.
Burner insert
In the burner insert, fuel is distributed via the cross section of the burner into the burner tube.
10-168
Technical characteristics
Glow plug
The glow plug ignites the fuel-air mixture when the heater is switched on. The
glow plug is an electrical resistor situated inside the burner insert facing towards
the flame source.
l
l
l
1
2
Fig. 156
Flame sensor
The flame sensor is a low voltage PTC Ohmic resistor with variable resistance in relation to the temperature produced by the flame.
The signals are received and processed by the ECU.
The flame sensor monitors the state of the flame throughout the entire operation of the heater.
Burner tube
The fuel/air mixture combusts in the burner tube, heating the heat exchanger.
Fig. 157
Circulation pump
The circulation pump delivers coolant to the vehicle circuit or to the heater circuit.
The pump is activated by the ECU and continues to run throughout the entire operation of the heater, even during temperature regulation standby states.
Fig. 158
Control unit
The ECU is the central component controlling combustion and the operation of the system as a whole. The ECU is mounted onto
the combustion air fan via a flange, although in the case of the Thermo 90 S, it may also be installed externally, inside the vehicle.
Metering pump
An external metering pump delivers and meters the fuel to the heater. This pump also acts as a cut-off valve when the heater is
switched off.
The magnetic coil of the metering pump receives control signals from the microprocessor of the ECU.
10-169
Technical characteristics
10.5.3 - Supplementary heating - Webasto - Description of operation
Description of operation
Power on
Component query cycle
40 sec. pre-heat cycle (with controlled interval pulses)
Metering pump, 5-7 sec. delivery (1)
Metering pump / Partial load (1/4)
Flame sensor detection
Stabilisation period
Full load
Vehicle fan On
Adjustment range
Temperature regulation standby
Flame sensor cold (0)
End of inertial operating state
15 -20 sec. pre-heat cycle (with controlled interval pulses)
Metering pump, 5-7 sec. delivery (1)
Metering pump / Partial load (1/4)
Flame sensor detection
Stabilisation period
Drop in coolant temperature
Full load
Power off (inertial operation)
Flame sensor cold (0)
10-170
Technical characteristics
A - Glow plug
B - Metering pump
C - Combustion air fan
D - Flame sensor
E - Indicator lamp
F - Circulation pump
G - Vehicle fan
* If combustion is not detected, the start cycle is repeated automatically (20 second pre-heat with controlled interval pulses
followed by 90 second safety period)
Power on
When the operator presses the Immediate heating button, the indicator lamp on the pre-selector timer illuminates
or
when the system is switched on from the switch, the indicator lamp incorporated in the switch itself illuminates.
The system activates the circulation pump, glow plug and combustion air fan.
Heating
Combustion is initiated after approximately 60-140 seconds. Automatically controlled heating now commences, with the heater operating at full load for a maximum of 2 hours.
The vehicle heating system fan only activates when the heat exchanger (coolant) has heated sufficiently. Once the predetermined
nominal operating temperature is reached (see regulation temperature table), the heating output of the burner is reduced gradually
and precisely to reach the minimum operating partial load.
Temperature regulation function
The coolant temperature continues to increase until the temperature regulation standby threshold is reached. The heater now enters
standby mode. The circulation pump, vehicle heating fan and indicator lamp remain active even during the temperature regulation
10-171
Technical characteristics
standby state. The heater restarts when the coolant has cooled to the preset reactivation temperature.
Diesel heaters
If after reaching the nominal value, the water temperature in the heater exceeds the nominal value without reaching the temperature
regulation standby threshold, and then drops again to the nominal value within 10 minutes, the heater output is increased to 9.0 kW
again.
Once the nominal temperature has been reached, the heater will only reactivate automatically in 7.6 kW heating mode.
Petrol heaters
The maximum power output is always 7.6 kW with petrol heaters.
Power off
When the heater is switched off, the indicator lamp on the pre-selector timer/switch extinguishes.
Combustion is stopped and the heater starts to operate in inertial mode. The circulation pump and combustion air fan continue to
operate to cool the heater (inertial operation), and deactivate automatically after approximately 105 seconds. The operator may restart the heater at any time during inertial operation.
Temperature regulation with the vehicle heating system fan may also be controlled by an ambient temperature thermostat.
An ADR situation (forced shutdown) occurs in the following conditions:
l
l
In these cases, the resulting short duration inertial operation state ends after 20 seconds (Thermo 90 S) or 40 seconds (Thermo 90
ST).
At the end of this period, the ECU is in error lockout state. Turn the On/Off switch to Off before turning the heater back on.
The emergency cut-off switch must only be used in the event of real danger, as it switches the heater off immediately without a subsequent inertial operating state, and may cause the system to overheat.
Table 101
Thermo 90 S and Thermo 90 ST
10.5 V - 0.5 V
21 V -1 V
12 Volts
24 Volts
Diagnosis in case of automatic shutdown due to fault for Thermo 90 S and Thermo 90 ST
Check fuses and pin connectors.
Heater with standard selector timer
If the heater is equipped with the standard timer, any faults are indicated by an error message on the display of the selector timer:
Table 102
F
F
F
F
F
F
01
02
03
04
05
06
F
F
07
08
09
10-172
Technical characteristics
F
F
10
11
Overheating
Broken circulation pump connection or circulation pump short
circuit
Heater button
In the case of a switch operated heater, the type of fault is indicated while the heater is operating in inertial mode by a flashing code
indicated by the power-on lamp.
To determine the error code, count the number of long flashes following the initial sequence of five short flashes:
Table 103
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
9x
10x
11x
Where limit values are not specified, a tolerance of 10 % is applicable for the following technical specifications. This is the standard
tolerance for heaters at an ambient temperature of +20C and operating at rated voltage.
Electrical components
The ECU, combustion air fan and circulation pump motors, glow plug, switch and selector timer (for ADR operation, timer function is
not applicable) are specific for 12 of 24 V voltages.
The temperature limiter, temperature sensor and flame sensor are the same for both 12 and 24 V heaters.
Fuel for Thermo 90 S / Thermo 90 ST Petrol
Use the fuel specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
The heater may operate with both leaded and unleaded petrol.
Fuel for Thermo 90 S / Thermo 90 ST and Thermo 90 S-ADR /Thermo 90 ST-ADR (Diesel)
Use the fuel specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
No adverse affects of using additives are known. When the heater is fed from the same fuel tank as the vehicle, observe the indications of the vehicle manufacturer regarding fuel/additive mixtures.
When changing over to cold weather fuel, run the heater for 15 minutes to fill the fuel line and pump with the new fuel.
Table 104
Heater
Operation
Thermo 90 S
Petrol
Thermo 90 ST
Petrol
Thermo 90 S
Diesel
Thermo 90 SADR
Thermo 90 ST
Diesel
Thermo 90 STADR
~S299
~S298
Water heater with Ferro-Tec technology
Max. adjustment 2.0 kW - 7.6 kW
9.1 kW
1.8 kW - 7.6 kW
range
Fuel
petrol
diesel
Fuel consumption
Max. adjustment 0.25 l/h -1.0 l/h
1.1 l/h
0.19 l/h - 0.9 l/h
range
Rated voltage
12 Volts
12 or 24 Volts
Operating voltage range
10 ... 15 Volts
10 ... 15 or 20 ... 30 Volts
Rated power absorption with circu- Max. adjustment 37 W - 83 W
90 W
37 W - 83 W
lation pump active (without vehicle range
fan)
10-173
Technical characteristics
Heater
Permitted
range:
Heater
Operation
ambient
Thermo 90 S
Petrol
Thermo 90 ST
Petrol
temperature
- operation
-in storage
Control unit
- operation
-in storage
Metering pump - operation
-in storage
Permitted operating overpressure Low
(heat transfer fluid)
Fill volume of heat transfer fluid
Max. incoming combustion air temperature
Minimum quantity in circuit
Flow capacity of circulation pump at
0.15 bar
CO2 in exhaust gas (permitted oper- Low
ating range)
CO2-value at approximately +20 C Low
and altitude above sea level
Heater dimensions (tolerance 3
mm)
* ECU mounted on heater
Weight
Thermo 90 S
Diesel
Thermo 90 SADR
6.00 l
1,650 l/h
10 ... 12.0 Vol .-%
0 m: 10 % / 500 m: 10.6 % / 1,000 m: 11.3 %
Length
310
(355*) mm
Width 131 mm H
232 mm
4.8 kg
Length
307
(352*) mm
Width 131 mm H
232 mm
Length
310
(355*) mm
Width 131 mm H
232 mm
General information
These wiring diagrams show the possible connection solutions for the Thermo 90 ST heater with:
l
l
l
10-174
0.15 l
+40 C
Thermo 90 ST
Diesel
Thermo 90 STADR
Length
307
(352*) mm
Width 131 mm H
232 mm
Technical characteristics
7,5 - 15 m
< 7,5 m
0,75 mm 2
1,0 mm 2
1,0 mm 2
0,75 mm2
1,0 mm 2 1,5 mm 2
1,5 mm 2 2,5 mm 2
4,0 mm 2
2,5 mm 2
6,0 mm 2
4,0 mm 2
COLOURS TABLE
bl
Blue
sw Black
br
Brown
vi
ge Yellow
gn Green
or Orange
Violet
ws White
Red
rt
3
4
Vehicle fuse
Vehicle fan switch
see table Supplementary heating - Webasto - Description of operation - Operating process of Thermo 90 S
and ST
= continuous operation with immediate heating
= user settable programmable heating period (from 10
min to 120 min); default setting 120 min
Table 106
Pos.
A1
A2
B1
B2
B3
B4
E
F1
F2
F3
Designation
Heater
Control unit
Flame sensor
Temperature sensor
Temperature limiter/overheat protection
Ambient temperature thermostat
Glow plug
20A fuse
5A fuse
20A fuse
Note
Technical characteristics
Pos.
Designation
H1
H3
H6
K5
M1
M2
M3
P2
S8
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X8
X9
X10
X11
Y1
Relay
Engine
Engine
Engine
Standard selector timer
Push-on/push-off button
Pin connector, 4 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 12 poles
Pin connector, 12 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Metering pump
Note
7,5 - 15 m
< 7,5 m
0,75 mm 2
1,0 mm 2
1,0 mm 2
0,75 mm2
1,0 mm 2 1,5 mm 2
1,5 mm 2 2,5 mm 2
4,0 mm 2
2,5 mm 2
6,0 mm 2
4,0 mm 2
COLOURS TABLE
bl
Blue
sw Black
br
Brown
vi
ge Yellow
gn Green
or Orange
Violet
ws White
Red
rt
Fig. 161 - Wiring diagram with standard selector timer and separate external circulation pump control
10-176
Technical characteristics
Table 107
1
3
4
Vehicle fuse
Vehicle fan switch
see table Supplementary heating - Webasto - Description of operation - Operating process of Thermo 90 S
and ST
= continuous operation with immediate heating
= user settable programmable heating period (from 10
min to 120 min); default setting 120 min
Table 108
Pos.
A1
A2
B1
B2
B3
B4
E
F1
F2
F3
H1
H3
H6
Heater
Control unit
Flame sensor
Temperature sensor
Temperature limiter/overheat protection
Ambient temperature thermostat
Glow plug
20A fuse
5A fuse
20A fuse
Heating symbol on display
Symbol lighting
Red LED
Designation
Note
K3
K5
M1
M2
M3
P2
S8
S9
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X8
X9
X10
X11
Y1
Relay
Relay
Engine
Engine
Engine
Standard selector timer
Self resetting switch
Switch
Pin connector, 4 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 12 poles
Pin connector, 12 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Pin connector, 2 poles
Metering pump
10-177
Technical characteristics
10.6 - Hydraulic system
1110 cm3
17
C
d
T
b
a
LS
PO =
B
B1
B1
30
90 bar
B2
T
B2
TB
10-178
D0079720
1110 cm3
Technical characteristics
17
C
d
T
b
a
LS
PO =
B
B1
B1
30
90 bar
B2
T
B2
TB
D0079720
10-179
Technical characteristics
10-180
Technical characteristics
10.6.2 - 45 cc variable displacement pump
a - Port L - To gearbox
b - Port X - From auxiliary distributor or services
c - Port B - To auxiliary distributor (Port P) or services
d - Port S - From boost pump
Function
l
l
l
l
Port L: drain
Port X: LS signal
Port S: pick-up
Port B: delivery
Components
1.
2.
Specifications
l
l
l
10-181
Technical characteristics
Shaft
Seal ring
Swashplate return spring
Swashplate
Positioning rod
Control piston
Cylinder block
Shim
Cover
Bearing
Flat disc
Piston (x 9)
Drive plate
Shoe
Taper roller bearing
Pump body
10-182
Technical characteristics
a - Port L - To gearbox
b - Port X - From auxiliary distributor or services
c - Port B - To auxiliary distributor (Port P) or services
d - Port S - From boost pump
Function
l
l
l
l
Port L: drain
Port X: LS signal
Port S: pick-up
Port B: delivery
Components
1.
Technical characteristics
2.
Specifications
l
l
l
Shaft
Seal ring
Swashplate return spring
Swashplate
Positioning rod
Control piston
Cylinder block
Shim
Cover
Bearing
Flat disc
Piston (x 9)
Drive plate
Shoe
Taper roller bearing
Pump body
10-184
Technical characteristics
The rotation and torque transmitted to the pump shaft are converted into hydraulic energy and the flow of pressurised oil is
regulated in accordance with the demand from the various actuators.
Pump displacement can be varied by altering the swash plate angle.
Description
l
l
l
l
l
Cylinder block (3) is held by and joined to shaft (1) by broaching B. Shaft (1) is supported by the front and rear bearings.
The end of piston (4) is spherical; piston shoe (5) is staked to form a single assembly. Piston (4) and shoe (5) together form
a ball joint.
Swash plate (2) has a flat surface A against which shoe (5) is pressed. Shoe (5) performs a circular movement.
Pistons (4) stroke axially inside the cylinder bores in cylinder block (3).
Rotation of cylinder block (3) pressurises the oil in the cylinder bores; valve plate (6) determines the inlet and outlet ports. The
oil in each of the cylinder bores is drawn in and discharged through the openings in valve plate (6).
10-185
Technical characteristics
Operation
Pump operation
1.
2.
Cylinder block (3) rotates with shaft (1) and piston shoe (5) slides over flat surface A. Swash plate (2) moves over cylindrical
surface B; angle a between the axis of shaft (1) and axis X of swash plate (2) changes, altering the axial position of the
pistons with respect to the cylinder block. Angle a is called the swash plate angle.
When axis X of swash plate (2) is at angle a to shaft (1) and consequently also to cylinder block (3), flat surface A acts as
cam for shoe (5). As a result, as the shaft rotates, piston (4) strokes inside cylinder block (3), thereby creating a difference between volumes C and D and drawing in and discharging oil in a quantity equal to this difference in volume (D -- C=delivery). In
other terms, when cylinder block (3) rotates, the volume of cylinder D is reduced, thereby forcing out the oil, while the volume
of cylinder C is increased, thereby drawing oil into the bore.
10-186
Technical characteristics
Fig. 168 - Condition of the pump on completion of the suction stage in chamber D and the delivery stage in
chamber C
1.
When axis X of swash plate (2) is parallel to the axis of cylinder block (3) (swash plate angle a=0), the difference between
volumes C and D inside cylinder block (5) is zero and no oil is pumped. (In reality, swash plate angle a, is never exactly
equal to zero).
Fig. 169 - Condition of the pump when the difference between volumes C and D is equal to zero
1.
10-187
Technical characteristics
l
When the pump runs at a given speed, the quantity of oil delivered to the work ports is regulated by angle a of swash plate
(2). The swash plate is maintained in the maximum displacement position by spring (7) in contrast with the positioning piston,
which defines angle a.
When the pump operates below maximum pressure, angle a is controlled in such a way that differential pressure between
pump outlet pressure and LS signal pressure is set to a certain value (control differential pressure).
When the pump operates at maximum pressure, angle a is set in such a way as to guarantee the flow rate without exceeding maximum pressure. This means that angle a is set to a slightly lower value than that requested by the LS signal.
10-188
Technical characteristics
10.6.5 - Load sensing valve, pressure cut-off valve
Operating principle
Controls the angle of the pump swash plate
l
The swash plate angle (and thus pump delivery) is controlled in such a way that the pressure difference ?PR between the
pump delivery pressure PP and the delivery pressure to the actuator PLS at the work port of the directional control valve is
maintained at a constant value. (?PR = Pump delivery pressure PP Delivery pressure to actuator PLS ).
If the pressure difference ?PR decreases relative to the pressure setting of the LS valve, the swash plate angle will increase.
If the pressure difference ?PR increases, the swash plate angle will decrease.
m For more detailed information on this mechanism, see the description of the HYDRAULIC PUMP
10-189
Technical characteristics
Control piston
Directional control valve
Pump delivery
Pressure cut-off valve
Load Sensing valve
The LS valve controls the pump delivery according to the stroke of the directional control valve lever, i.e., according to the
demand for oil flow from the actuators.
The LS valve determines the demand from the actuators by way of the pressure difference ?PR between the pump delivery
pressure PP and the pressure PLS at the outlet of the directional control valve; this difference is then used to control the
delivery Q of the hydraulic pump. (PP, PLS and ?PR, are respectively: the pump delivery pressure, the pressure of the Load
Sensing signal and the pressure difference between these two values).
10-190
Technical characteristics
l
In other terms, the LS valve determines the pressure difference ?PR, generated by the flow of oil through the passage opened
up by the directional control valve spool and controls the pump delivery Q so as to maintain a constant pressure difference.
This means that the pump delivery is proportional to the demand from the directional control valve.
Operation
l
The pressure PLS of the LS from the control valve outlet enters chamber a of the LS valve spring; the pump delivery pressure
PP enters the chamber b on the opposite side of the spool.
The movement of the spool (1) is determined by the combination of the force created by the pressure PLS plus the force exerted by the spring (2) and by the force exerted in the opposite direction by the pressure PP.
Before the engine is started, the control piston (6) is pushed by the spring (5) to the right (corresponding to the maximum
swash plate angle).
When the engine is started, all the control valve spools are in NEUTRAL, the pressure PLS of the LS remains at 0 bar (0 psi)
as no fluid is delivered from the control valve outlets and the signal is connected to drain. At the same, pump delivery pressure
PP increases as there is no demand from the users. When the force exerted by pressure PP in chamber b balances the force
exerted by spring (2), spool (1) moves to the right and allows the fluid at pressure PP to flow into chamber X of piston (6) by
connecting passages c and d.
The force exerted by the fluid pressure on the piston (6) overcomes the force of the spring (5). The control piston is thus
pushed to the left, i.e. towards the minimum swash plate angle position.
The pump delivery pressure PP stabilizes around the value of 22 bar (319 psi), which corresponds to the standby pressure.
Technical characteristics
l
When a control valve lever is shifted from the NEUTRAL position, this generates an LS signal corresponding to the pressure
PLS.
The LS signal pressure in chamber a moves the spool to the left, thereby connecting passages d and e. Chamber X is thus
depressurised and the swash plate is moved to the maximum delivery position by the action of spring (5).
System balance is restored when the pressure difference ?PR acting on the spool (1) balances the force exerted by the spring
(2) and thus re-opens the connection between passages c and d.
l
l
l
When the pump delivery matches the demand from the directional control valve, the pump delivery pressure PP present in
chamber b of the LS valve balances the combination of the forces exerted by the pressure PLS of the LS in chamber a and
by the spring (6). On reaching the state of balance, piston (1) stops in an intermediate position.
In this condition, the passage from chamber c to chamber d remains partially open so that the pressure is maintained in chamber d. A sufficient flow of fluid to balance the force exerted by spring (5) enters control piston (6).
This state of balance is maintained by a stabilized flow of fluid from the choke g.
The force of spring (2) is adjusted in such a way that piston (1) is balanced when PP??PLS?=??PR?=?22 bar (319 psi).
In practical terms, pump delivery is made proportional to the aperture of the control valve, maintaining the pressure difference
?PR?=?22 bar (319 psi).
This state is maintained until there is a change in the operating conditions (for example, a change in the engine speed, an
increase or reduction in the demand for fluid flow or pressure, etc.).
10-192
Technical characteristics
If the engine speed is reduced while one or more hydraulic actuators are in operation, pump delivery will also be reduced.
Consequently the swash plate angle is changed to increase pump delivery.
When the pump reaches its maximum displacement, and therefore the delivery can no longer be increased, the difference
between the pump pressure PP and the Load Sensing pressure PLS (pressure difference ?PR) is reduced (saturation
condition).
The pressure PLS in chamber a of the LS valve becomes almost equal to the pump pressure PP and the control piston (1)
shifts to the left under the combined action of the pressure PLS and the spring (2). The piston thus closes passage c and
opens the connection between passages d and e.
The pressurised oil in chamber X of the control piston (6) flows through passages d and e and into the drain chamber of the
pump; consequently the pressure in chamber X of the control piston (6) becomes equal to the drain pressure.
The control piston (6) is therefore shifted to the right by the action of the spring (5), to the position corresponding to the maximum swash plate angle.
10-193
Technical characteristics
The pressure cut-off valve determines the pump displacement at maximum delivery pressure.
10-194
Technical characteristics
The pressure control valve monitors the pump delivery pressure, and when this reaches the set pressure limit, it reduces the
pump delivery to the minimum, by-passing the action of the LS valve.
Pump delivery is then regulated at the minimum value to ensure internal lubrication of the main auxiliary services pump and
maximum pressure in the hydraulic system.
Technical characteristics
10.6.7 - Power steering
LS
LS
T
D0019310
Port P: delivery
Port T: outlet
Port R: RH steering
Port L: LH steering
Port LS: Load Sensing signal
Characteristics
l
Displacement:
m Normal steering: 180 cc/rev
m Emergency steering: 90 cc/rev
Relief valve: 170-175 bar
10-196
Technical characteristics
10.6.8 - Hydraulic front axle suspension
Description
The function of the hydraulic front suspension system is to absorb impacts when travelling over rough terrain and to keep the tractor
body on an even keel on the road. The system is composed of:
l
l
l
l
l
In addition to the primary function of enabling front axle suspension by charging the hydraulic-pneumatic accumulators that
constitute the elastic elements of the system, the front suspension control valve also serves to control the raising and lowering
of the front axle.
10-197
Technical characteristics
Accumulator
Accumulator
Cylinder extension solenoid valve
Cylinder retraction solenoid valve
Axle suspension control lock solenoid valve
Cylinder pressure discharge valve (base side)
Cylinder pressure discharge valve (top side)
Relief valve (setting 2507 bar)
10-198
Technical characteristics
10.6.9 - Servo-brake valve for front axle
Specifications
l
l
10-199
Technical characteristics
10.6.10 - Hydraulic trailer braking system - Italy version
l
l
When lever (1) is in position 1 (valve activated) and the brake pedals are not pressed, there is a pressure of 12.5 bar (181.3
psi) available at port B. This pressure is supplied constantly to the trailer to release the parking brake.
When the operator applies the tractor brakes, the pressure in the circuit pilots the braking valve and the pressure at port B
increases proportionally to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
When the operator engages the parking brake, solenoid valve (2) is energised; this nullifies the pressure at port B.
The pressure at port B is directly proportional to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit (Y).
When lever (1) is in position O (valve deactivated), there is no pressure at port B. As a result, the pressure switch (4) detects
the lack of pressure and illuminates the indicator light (3 on the instrument panel. In this condition, the pressure at port B
remains null regardless of the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
10-200
Technical characteristics
Characteristics
l
l
l
l
10-201
Technical characteristics
10.6.11 - Hydraulic trailer braking system - Export version
10-202
Technical characteristics
Characteristics
l
l
l
l
10-203
Technical characteristics
10.6.12 - Steering gear pump - Version without compressor
P
L
D0059550
Port L - inlet
Port P - pressure outlet to services
Specifications
l
l
10-204
Technical characteristics
10.6.13 - Steering gear pump - Version with compressor
L
D0035150
Port L - inlet
Port P - pressure outlet to services
Specifications
l
l
10-205
Technical characteristics
10.6.14 - Braking system
Description
The braking system is composed of 4 braking devices (1 for each wheel) operated by a double hydraulic master cylinder with mechanical control.
When the brake pedals are latched together, all the braking systems are operated simultaneously on all 4 wheels (front and rear).
When the brake pedals are operated separately (latch disengaged), only the front brakes are applied and a single rear brake corresponding to the pedal that has been pressed (right pedal - right brake, left pedal - left brake).
The front braking devices are operated simultaneously and independently by the brake pedal pressed (only one or both) thanks to
the pilot valve that intercepts the oil from both master cylinders selecting the circuit with the higher pressure value as the pilot circuit.
The pilot valve thus directs oil from the hydraulic services circuit to the front brakes, modulating the pressure according to the pilot
pressure from the brake master cylinders.
Front axle
Master cylinder
Pilot valve for front brakes
Rear axle
Disc brake calipers
10-206
Technical characteristics
10.6.15 - Master cylinder
1
3
D0055860
1.
2.
3.
Technical data
l
l
Pistons stroke: 39 mm
Displacement: max. 20 cc per circuit
10-207
Technical characteristics
10.6.16 - Remote control valve - 8-way version
2
1
8
A1 B1
A2 B2
T T
A3 B3
A4 B4
LS
P
Y
R
T T
8
D0059520
End plate with pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections
Valve section 1
Valve section 2
Manifold section
Lift control section
Valve section 3
Valve section 4
End plate with LS signal output
10-208
Technical characteristics
10.6.17 - Ancillary utility distributor - 10-way version
2
1
9
A1 B1
A2 B2
T T
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
LS
P
Y
R
T T
9
D0067650
End plate with pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections
Distributor section 1
Distributor section 2
Manifold section
Lift control section
Distributor section 3
Distributor section 4
Distributor section 5
End plate with LS signal output
10-209
Technical characteristics
10.6.18 - Remote control valve - 12-way version
2
1
10
A6 B6
A1 B1
A2 B2
T T
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
LS
P
Y
R
T T
10
D0059530
End plate with pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections
Valve section 6
Valve section 1
Valve section 2
Manifold section
Lift control section
Valve section 3
Valve section 4
Valve section 5
End plate with LS signal output
10-210
Technical characteristics
10.6.19 - Remote control valve - 14-way version
2
10
1
11
A7 B7
A1 B1
A6 B6
A2 B2
T T
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
LS
P
Y
R
T T
10
11
D0059540
End plate with pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections
Valve section 7
Valve section 6
Valve section 1
Valve section 2
Manifold section
Lift control section
Valve section 3
Valve section 4
Valve section 5
End plate with LS signal output
10-211
Technical characteristics
10.6.20 - Air trailer braking system - Italy version
5
3
7
8
1
10
11
12
D0078800
10-212
Technical characteristics
5
3
7
8
1
10
11
12
D0078800
10-213
Technical characteristics
10.6.21 - Air trailer braking system - DE Export version
5
3
A
B
7
8
1
10
11
12
D0078810
10-214
Technical characteristics
5
3
A
B
7
8
1
10
11
12
D0078810
A: Red connector
B: Yellow connector
10-215
Technical characteristics
10.6.22 - Air trailer braking system - CH Export version
7
A
B
6
A
B
9
10
1
12
11
13
14
D0078820
10-216
Technical characteristics
7
A
B
6
A
B
9
10
1
12
11
13
14
D0078820
A: Red connector
B: Yellow connector
10-217
Technical characteristics
10.6.23 - Compressor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Specifications
l
l
l
l
Bore: 85 mm
Stroke: 42 mm
Displacement: 238 cm
Max. pressure: 8,5 bar
10-218
Technical characteristics
l
21
3
0.017.0166.4
Components
1. Filter
2. Silencer
3. Electrical connection for heater
Connections
a - Port 1 -
From compressor
b. Port 21 -
To compressed air reservoir
c - Port 3 - Compressed air pressure release vent
Specifications
l
l
l
Technical characteristics
l
l
Heating on temperature: 76 C
Heating off temperature: 29.53 C
11
11
12
11
12
2
0.019.8598.4
10-220
Technical characteristics
10.6.26 - Pressure limiting valve
21
1
1- 2
7,80,2 bar
21
0
12 + 2 bar
22
1- 2
D0004690
Fig. 201
l
l
l
Specifications
l
l
l
10-221
Technical characteristics
10.6.27 - Trailer air braking valve (2-way)
Fig. 202 - Trailer air braking valve (2-way) components and connections
Components
1.
2.
Connections
l
l
l
l
10-222
Technical characteristics
10.6.28 - Pneumatic trailer braking valve with unbraked front axle (2-way)
2
1
VIEW "A"
P2 (bar)
Delivery pressure
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
10
12
14
16
18
20 22
24
26
28
30
P4 (bar)
0.019.7919.0
Fig. 203 - Pneumatic trailer braking valve with unbraked front axle (2-way)
Components
l
l
Functions
l
l
l
Technical characteristics
10.6.29 - Trailer air braking valve (1-way)
10-224
Technical characteristics
10.6.30 - Trailer air brake boost solenoid valve
10-225
Technical characteristics
10.6.31 - Trailer parking brake control solenoid valve
10-226
20 - Calibrations and
electronic diagnosis
20-1
Diagnostics is the set of analytical and reporting activities which, through the measurement of certain physical parameters characterising the machine monitored, provide significant information on the status of the machine itself and on how its status varies over time,
to enable the evaluation and prediction of both short and long term reliability.
When connected to the diagnostic sockets of tractors with specific cables, the All Round Tester (ART) and SDF Analyser tools connect to and interrogate the different ECUs in the machine, and display the relative data acquired on screen.
20.1.3 - ECUs interrogated by the All Round Tester (ART) and SDF Analyser
The All Round Tester (ART) and SDF Analyser tools may acquire and analyse data from the following electronic control units. Rear
hitch (EKR), front suspension, HPSA, HLHP1, HLHP2, PTO, Pre-heat, Hydraulic reverse shuttle (Smart Lever), Transmission, ZF
transmissions (TCU/VDC, SGR/FMGR), SLH engines, CLUSTER on-board instrument, and INFOCENTER on-board instrument.
WARNING
The primary diagnostic functions of Deutz-AG ECUs are performed with the Serdia 2000/Serdia 2010 diagnostic tools.
WARNING
However, certain procedures are accessible and certain information viewable also with the All Round Tester (ART)
and SDF Analyser diagnostic tools.
1 2 3 -
M E N U -
E N G I N E
E C U
S M A R T
L E V E R
C L U S T E R
E ]
E X I
Fig. 207
WARNING
To change from one ECU to another, switch the tractor off, reconnect and select the new ECU.
--20-2
WARNING
To interrogate a different ECU, simply select the name of the desired ECU
(the image aside shows an example of a selection screen visible when using the
SDF Analyser in this case connected to the Dorado 100 tractor).
Fig. 209
The number of ECUs listed varies in relation to the model of tractor the tool is connected to.
After selecting an ECU, the list of options available usually consists of either
5 choices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Monitors/Monitor Menu:
Analyses all sensors in monitor mode. View data received from the different
electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.)
managing the tractor systems.
Parameters/Parameter Menu:
For setting certain machine options.
Calibrations/Calibration Menu:
For calibrating the different subsystems of the machine, performing the operations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic
reverse shuttle and calibrating sensors.
Tests/Test Menu:
For testing actuators and testing the functions of the electric components
installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
Alarms/Alarm list:
Displays all active and passive alarms. Alarms may also be cancelled from
this menu.
M E N U
- - - - -
1
2
3
4
5
M
P
C
T
A
O
A
A
E
L
N
R
L
S
A
E ]
I
A
I
T
R
T
M
B
S
M
M E N U
- - - - -
O R S
E T R E S
R A T I O N S
S
E X I
Fig. 210
or
20-3
2.
3.
4.
Monitors/Monitor Menu:
Analyses all sensors in monitor mode. View data received from the different
electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.)
managing the tractor systems.
Calibrations/Calibration Menu:
For calibrating the different subsystems of the machine, performing the operations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic
reverse shuttle and calibrating sensors.
Tests/Test Menu:
For testing actuators and testing the functions of the electric components
installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
Alarms/Alarm list:
Displays all active and passive alarms. Alarms may also be cancelled from
this menu.
M A I
- - -
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
O
A
E
L
N
L
S
A
E ]
I
I
T
R
N
- -
M E N U
- - - - -
T O R S
B R A T I
S
M S
E X I
O N S
Fig. 211
--Hidden menus are also available for certain ECUs, which can only be accessed by
entering a specific password.
M E N U
- - - - -
1
2
3
4
5
M
P
C
T
A
O
A
A
E
L
N
R
L
S
A
N I
C -
I
A
I
T
R
T
M
B
S
M
T I
E ]
M E N U
- - - - -
O R S
E T R E S
R A T I O N S
S
A L I
T .
E X I
Fig. 212
20-4
To access the diagnostics sockets (2) remove the cover (1) positioned on the front part of the right side console.
Fig. 213
The socket (3) allows you to conduct diagnostics on the engine control unit.
The socket (4) allows you to conduct diagnostics on the HLHP2 control unit and the PLA2 Armrest.
Fig. 214
20-5
Connect the cable P/N 0.020.0441.4 (5) to the tractor diagnostics socket:
m The 19 pin end to the diagnostics socket (3).
m The 14 pin end to the diagnostics socket (4).
Connect the Serdia interface (6) to the cable 0.020.441.4 (5) using the E4
end.
E4
6
Fig. 215
Connect the cable P/N 5.9030.997.7 (9) to the diagnostics socket (4),
Connect the cable P/N 5.9030.997.2 (8) to the cable P/N 5.9030.997.7 (9)
and to the SDF Analyser (7).
Fig. 216
Connect the cable P/N 5.9030.997.4 (10) to the diagnostics socket (4) and
to the SDF Analyser (7).
10
Fig. 217
Connect the cable P/N 5.9030.997.7 (9) to the diagnostics socket (4),
Connect the cable P/N 5.9030.681.4 (12) to the cable P/N 5.9030.997.7 (9)
and to the ART (13).
12
13
Fig. 218
20-6
Data is exchanged between the ART and the ECUs by way of a diagnostic socket incorporated in the combine wiring. The ART is
supplied with a number of different interface cables, which are to be selected in accordance with the type of vehicle and the methods
described in the relative workshop manual or in the CD supplied with the tester.
Description of the kit
the ART is supplied to authorised service centres in a case containing:
l
Fig. 219
*
Notes on use
The ART is protected against battery polarity inversion and positive and negative over voltages of brief duration (1 msec). Do not
attempt to connect the ART to any sockets other than those specifically designed for use with the tester and do not use extension
leads. The display is permanently backlit to ensure visibility on all light conditions. The knob on the side of the tester allows contrast
adjustment. If the display appears blank, it is possible that the contrast knob is positioned in such a way that the data are not visible
on the screen. The tester operates correctly at temperatures between 0 and 40C; it is advisable to switch the tester off every 30
minutes to help prolong its service life. Before disconnecting the ART from the diagnostic socket, turn the starter key to the O
(OFF) position.
Description of the tester
20-7
Fig. 220
Fig. 221
20-8
The ART has the possibility to display information in a number of different languages (factory setting: ITALIAN). To change
the display language, proceed as follows.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
Connect the ART to a diagnostic socket
While holding pressed key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to I (ON).
Fig. 222
6.
Fig. 223
7.
Press C to change and then the key corresponding to the desired language. In the example above, key 2 - ENGLISH was pressed to select
English.
Press E EXIT twice to quit
Turn the starter key to O (OFF) and disconnect the ART from the diagnostic socket.
Fig. 224
20-9
2.
3.
4.
5.
The vehicle electronic systems to which the ART can be connected differ from one another and utilize different pinouts at
the diagnostic socket.
For this reason, the serial ports must first be configured so as to guarantee full compatibility of the ART with all SAME electronic systems.
To change the configuration of the serial ports, proceed as follows.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
Connect the ART to a diagnostic socket
While holding pressed key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to I (ON)
Enter the password 1 2 3 F.
Fig. 224
6.
Fig. 225
7.
Enable all the serial ports by pressing 1 - Port Enable seven times.
Press E EXIT twice to quit.
Turn the starter key to O (OFF) and disconnect the ART from the diagnostic socket.
Fig. 226
20-10
l
l
View data received from the different electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.) managing the
tractor systems.
Test the functions of the electric components installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
Perform the operations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic reverse shuttle and calibrating sensors.
View errors (faults).
Advantages
Using the SDF Analyser offers a number of significant advantages because:
l
l
l
It has a screen refresh rate two time faster than previous diagnostic systems.
It is compatible with all laptop operating systems in use today. It is faster than the ART (All Round Tester).
It functions as an active interface, with its own microprocessor and flash memory. New software updates are easily installable
with a guided menu.
It may be used on both old and new tractors, using the specific adapter cables included following the instructions given in the
relative training and workshop manuals.
May be connected to the laptop either with a USB cable or by Bluetooth connection within a 10 metre range.
Description of Kit
The SDF Analyser is delivered to Authorised Service Centres in a case containing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
7
8
10
5
Fig. 227
Fig. 228
20-11
CVT Diag
For connection to Infocenter on-board instruments.
CVT Diag
SDF Analyser
For connection to ZF electronic control units on tractors without CANBUS network.
SDF Analyser
3.
-
Tool-Laptop side
Connect the SDF Analyser to the laptop as follows:
l
l
l
Launching functions
To launch any of the functions, double-click the respective icon on the desktop.
Basic settings in PC Tester
The user may configure a number of basic settings (e.g. language, COM ports, screen layout etc.) for the PC Tester function before
starting to use the function itself. Proceed as follows:
20-12
Fig. 229
Menus available:
l
l
l
Interface / Interface,
Lines Selection / Lines Selection,
Interface / Interface.
Fig. 230
Fig. 231
Fig. 232
20-13
Fig. 233
Interface,
Display language,
COM ports,
Font type, and
Window layout.
Fig. 234
20-14
Fig. 235
Table 109
Pos.
1
2
3
P/N
5.9030.740.4/10
5.9030.740.0
5.9030.740.2
5.9030.741.0
Description
Case, complete
. Installation disk
. Level III interface General overhaul
Adapter cable (not included in kit)
Qty
1
1
1
1
Data is exchanged between the SERDIA software and the control units by way of a diagnostic socket incorporated in the tractor
wiring. Accordingly, the SERDIA package is supplied with an interface cable that must be used on the particular model and version
of tractor being serviced.
Engines involved: DEUTZ AG type TCD 3.6 L4, TCD 4.1 L4, TCD 6.1 L6
Part Number: 10002785
Function group: B0
Description
With the introduction of the new Tier 4i / Stage 3b engines, a new Serdia diagnostic software is required for use with the existing
diagnostic interface. The new software is titled Serdia 2010 and is now available.
This Software will be used in parallel to the existing Software Serdia 2000. This is necessary as Serdia 2010 at present only supports
EMR 3 and 4, therefore Serdia 2000 will remain in service for use on previous EMR1, EMR2, EMR3 engines.
The new Software will be released under a License agreement and an individual license will be required for each single SerdiaInterface (HS-Light II).
This License is available through our parts departments using the part number 10002785.
20-15
Fig. 236
When placing the order, insert the Serial Number of the Serdia Interface HS-Light II wire in the input box Order-No.
000-130241
Fig. 237
The License is available within 5 days after placing the order and will require a License data file installation in your computer.
Serdia 2010 Software installation procedure
The Serdia 2010 Software is immediately available to download from the following web link. http://serdia.deutz.com
After using the Link the following page appears:
Serdia 2010 icon:
Fig. 238
- Click the Icon Serdia 2010. The download page for Serdia 2010 appears:
20-16
7
2
3
6
5
Fig. 239
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
- Click the file Serdia 2010 V... to download it. (N.2) in the installation green box.
- After the successful Download of the Software, refer to the document Manual_Serdia2010:_EN_Level2_Version100_02052011.
pdf Chapter 3.3.4. on how to install the software.
License data file installation procedure
- Go to weblink http://serdia.deutz.com to find out if your License has been activated
- Click Serdia 2010 to enter the screen that shows the License box.
Fig. 240
- Click on the icon Interface Lis.txt to open the document showing the list of Interface serial numbers activated.
20-17
Fig. 241
Exemple of list:
Fig. 242
- Scroll the list until you find your Interface serial number.
- If not present, you have to wait more time.
- If present, close the document and click the file named: Serdia 2010 License.exe to download it in your computer.
Serdia2010 Licence.
Fig. 243
10
11
Fig. 244
Please do not hesitate to contact your Technical Advisor for any help to install the new Serdia 2010 Software.
Table 110
Updating the license file
Name
Publication date
Software download
20-19
Fig. 245
Access the website http://serdia.deutz.com/ and click SerDia 2010 (Figure 2).
Figure 2.
Fig. 246
A link to the new SerDia2010 license file (License ... .exe) is visible in the window opened (Figure 3).
Figure 3.
Fig. 247
Click the link to download the file, and follow the attached installation instructions. Click Next (Figure 4).
Figure 4.
Fig. 248
20-20
Fig. 249
Fig. 250
Fig. 251
At the end of the installation procedure, the following table is displayed. Refer to this table to check if your license is listed and has
been updated correctly. The license code matches the serial number of the interface in your possession (Figures 8 and 9).
Figure 8 - Identifying interface.
Fig. 252
20-21
Fig. 253
Please contact your Area Technical Inspector for any queries on this subject.
We recommend visiting the News Service section of the technical documentation portal daily to check for new documents and view them as soon as they become available.
Introduction
With the introduction of the new engine generation in the beginning of 2011, which fulfill the new emission standards EU stage III B,
US Tier4i. Therefore Deutz releases a new Version of its diagnostics software SerDia2010 release 2.0.221. All engines fulfilling this
emission standard are equipped with the EMR4 ECU, which allows many new diagnostic features, due to its new software concept
and additional interfaces.
SerDia2010 is a must for engine diagnostic purposes at engines according stage III B / Tier4i and higher.
Important
This manual was created for user with SerDia access level 1.
Important
If you use a higher access level with SerDia2010 it is possible, that some functions, which are visible or useable for
you, are not described in this script.
DEUTZ AG
Application Engineering
Safety instructions
WARNING
The use and the application of SerDia2010 can be dangerous!
WARNING
It is critical that you carefully read and follow the instructions and warnings below and in the associated installation
manuals:
WARNING
Serdia2010 enables a user to influence or control the electronic system in a vehicle or machine. SerDia2010 is specially designed for the exclusive use by personnel, who have special experience and training.
WARNING
Improper use or unskilled application may alter the machine performance or system performance in a manner, that
results in death, serious personal injury or property damage.
20-22
Important
It is recommended, that in-vehicle use of SerDia2010 shall be conducted on enclosed test tracks, or ensured machine
surroundings.
Important
Use of SerDia2010 on a public road should not occur unless the specific calibration and settings have been preciously
tested and verified as safe.
Important
When using SerDia2010 with machine systems, that influence vehicle behaviour and can affect the safe operation
of the machine, you have to ensure, that the machine can be transitioned to a safe condition, if a hazardous incident
should occur.
Important
All legal requirements, including regulations and statutes regarding vehicles and machines must be strictly followed
when using this product.
WARNING
If you fail to follow these instructions, there might be a risk of death, serious injury or property destruction.
Important
Any data acquired through the use of SerDia2010 must be verified for reliability, quality and accuracy prior to use or
distribution. This applies both to calibration and to measurements, that are used as a basis for calibration work.
Important
The DEUTZ AG and its representatives, agents and affiliated companies deny any liability for the functional impairment of DEUTZ products in terms of fitness, performance and safety, if non-DEUTZ software, parameter settings or
model components are used with or deployed to access DEUTZ products.
Important
The DEUTZ AG and its representatives, agents and affiliated companies will never be liable for any damage or injury
caused by improper use of SerDia2010.
Important
DEUTZ provides training regarding the proper use of SerDia2010.
Important
Before using SerDia2010 it is required to verify, that the software is up to date and all updates are installed.
Important
The DEUTZ AG and its representatives deny any liability for any injury caused by the use of a non up to date software
version of SerDia2010. If necessary the software can be updated from serdia.deutz.com.
20-23
Important
If you cannot agree with these limitations, you are excluded from using SerDia2010. In this case contact the supplier.
The purchase price and the not used licence fee will be refunded within one month after receipt.
General preferences
Subject of the present documentation is the use of SerDia2010 at DEUTZ engines with electronic injection equipment.
Important
This document shows the functionality of SerDia2010 and its use to communicate with and parameterize of DEUTZ
ECUs. The information contained herein only correspond to the state of the art at the time of setting and are not subject to an immediate revision service.
Important
In case of problems with SerDia2010 please contact the supplier.
Before contacting please collect information about the individual circumstances of the problem you have, as much as possible. The
following information has to be given as a minimum:
l
l
l
l
l
l
PC-hardware
Windows operating system
SerDia2010 version
Type of interface
DEUTZ ECU part number
Engine number
WARNING
To allow the access to the ECU it is recommended to install a diagnostic socket according DEUTZ wiring diagram for
the respective engine.
WARNING
SerDia2010 will be delivered with access level 2 in general. The access level is not depending on the hardware interface level.
20-24
l
l
l
Complete details as name and address of applicant (if different to the licence user).
Complete details as name, address and qualification of the prospective licence user.
Detailed description because of the reasons for changing the access level.
WARNING
It is not permitted to resell or transfer the licence and within also the interface for SerDia2010 without knowledge and
agreement of DEUTZ AG! Is a transfer needed, please contact the supplier to get a confirmation. Without a written
confirmation (email feedback) from DEUTZ a resell or transfer is strictly forbidden!
20-25
Important
Enter interface serial-no.in pop-up window.
Important
Download of actual SerDia2010 software 5 days after release of the order. Install SerDia2010 on all required PCs.
20-26
Interface (Dongle with wiring, diagnostic plug, serial number and authorization level).
state of the art notebook or personal computer, optionally with printer are needed (see also Hardware).
Overwiev
PC or Notebook
DeCom or HS light II USB Interface
20-27
Hardware
Software SerDia2010 is able to work with Interface
l
l
HS-Light
DEUTZ Communicator DeCom
WARNING
Once SerDia2010 is compatible to EMR3 ECUs the compatibility with HS-Light will not be enhanced any more. So
HS-Light will not be provided in the far future any more!
Important
If a new interface is needed for communication with SerDia2010 it is recommended to order
a Deutz Communicator DeCom as soon as available.
20-28
20-29
20-30
K-Line and L-Line interface according ISO 9141-2 and ISO 14230-4. Baudrate up to 500 Kbaud
2 Full Can with max. 1 Mbit/s adjustable, according CAN-specification 2.0A and 2.0B
USB 2.0 full-speed
Galvanic isolation of inputs and to the PC
Power supply from PC, current max. 250 mA
LEDs for showing state of interface communication:
Table 111
LED
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
USB/device status
Ubat
CAN communication 2
CAN communication 1
K-/L-Line communication
SAE J1708/J1587 communication
20-32
Status 2x CAN
Table 112
PIN
1
2
3
4
Signal
VBUS
DD+
GND
Description
+5VDC
Data Data +
Ground
20-33
Fig. 261 - Standard Plug for Pin Contacts (ITT Cannon Part Number 192922-1270)
Table 113
Pin
U_bat
U_bat
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
GND
not connected
J1708a
J1708b
not connected
CANL
CANH
not connected
K
L
not connected
GND
not connected
J1708a
J1708b
CANL2
CANL1
CANH1
not connected
K
L
CANH2
Norm
Ordering DeCom
The licence can only be purchased through the official DEUTZ dealer net respectively the central OEM. For ordering please use the
DIWI-system only! It is currently not possible to place an order via SAP or file transfer.
The registration / release of the interface serial no. is completed usually within 5 working days.
After tis delay the software can be downloaded from serdia.deutz.com. You can check the registration easily: All registered serial
no. are mentioned in the licences overview file licence.txt also available on the website.
Procedere
Important
Allways enter the consignee (e.g.2nd dealer stage, OEM dealer, customer)!
20-34
Important
Release the order.
Important
Download of actual SerDia2010 software 5 days after release of the order. Install SerDia2010 on all required PCs.
PC/Notebook
Minimum hardware
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Diagnostic plug
A connection plug has to be installed in the machine to connect the engine ECU with the SerDia2010 hardware interface. The plug
has to be easily accessible (for example in cabin). While doing the wiring of the plug and connecting it to the control unit, please use
20-35
CANH
CANL
CANH
CANL
K
L
J1708a
J1708b
Ubat
Gnd
20-36
Function
Norm
ISO-1941
ISO-1941
J1708/J1587
J1708/J1587
-
Assignment
H
G
F
M
K
L
D
E
A
B
WARNING
To use SerDia2010 you need a released licence (see chapter Order procedure and Ordering DeCom). Release is
done for each interface separately.
Installation of SerDia2010
Important
For all following actions admin rights are necessary!
20-37
After installation SerDia2010 can be launched via SerDia2010 icon on the desktop.
Important
For all administrators who configure the PCs for other users: The path C:\Deutz\SerDia\*.* must be entirely accessible.
Important
Via internet serdia.deutz.com , the so called Bugfixes can be provided also. This bug fixes are files the user can
manually copy to SerDia-directory. These data can solve problems as a short time solution in the actual SerDia program. In the next SerDia version this will be automatically included.
Access level
WARNING
SerDia2010 will be delivered with access level 2 in general. The access level is not depending on the hardware interface level.
20-38
Table 115
No.
Version
Application
Note
Table 116
EMR4
Operating software
update the operating software (Flashen without password)
supported control unit EMR4 (EDC17CV52, CV54,
CV56)
supported control unit EMR3 (EDC7, EDC16)
supported control unit EMR2
Dataset
read and write the dataset (without extra data) without
access to parameter
read and write of dataset (without extra data) with access to parameter
overall programming without possibility of change the
operation data
overall programming with possibility of change the operation data
Dataset
access to all parameters according to the available
competence level (UseCases)
adjustment of service parameters in form of pre-defined
tasks with running engine
Measured Values
showing the selected measured values
showing the internal calculated values for Level IIIa and
Level IIIaS
CAN-Status
v
v
v
v
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
2
v
v
v
v
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
v
2
2
v
v
v
v
L/S
20-39
Error Memory
show the errors in error memory 1 including the environment data
delete all errors or single error in error memory 1
show the errors in error memory 2 including the environment data
delete all errors or single error in error memory 2
Extras data (Logistic data, operating data and customer data)
access to the logistic data
read, reset the maintenance counter
access to the load spectrum data
read and reset the override memory
Calibration and test functions
drive pedal calibration
low idle adjustment
droop calibration
Test the inputs and outputs
Control Unit Functions
reset
activate and deactivate a test bench dataset
engine shut off
v
v
v
v
2
2
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
v
2
v
2
v
2
v
(L = Read / S = Write)
2
v
L
L
L/S 2
L
L/S
L/S
L/S
L/S
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
(L = Read / S = Write)
v
v
v
2
v
v
Now the available interface for SerDia will be searched automatically and the connection will be created.The setting for the hard- and
software of the ECU will be adjusted automatically. During program start the following information window is shown.
20-40
Using button display for supported ECU software a page with an overview regarding in SerDia2010 implemented software versions
of ECU-software and assisted ECU hardware is shown.
20-41
Fig. 268
l
20-42
Fig. 269
l
ECU software.
The ECU software of the connected control unit is shown in the lower right window.
Fig. 270
l
Engine number.
Fig. 271
Table 118
Fig. 272
Fig. 273
Home
Error memory
Access to memory 1
Access to memory 2
Fig. 274
20-43
Fig. 275
Fig. 276
Fig. 277
Fig. 278
Fig. 279
Fig. 280
Fig. 281
20-44
UseCases
guided diagnostics
report documents
configuration
Adjust: language, access level elevation, setting folders for file storage
help
program exit
exit SerDia2010
rebuild connection
20-45
Button Clear error memory delete of all passive errors. Active errors can also be deleted but come up
again directly.
Button Save as CSV file list of errors will be saved in a CSV file.
20-46
20-47
20-48
Zoom function
If a measurement has been loaded, the screen can be zoomed in and out with the highlighted slider.
20-49
Color palette.
Fig. 289
For all changes of parameters while using the use cases, the following is obligatory:
WARNING
The user has to check all changes and make plausible all influence and risk of the changes.
WARNING
The user is bearing the responsibility for all expected and unexpected effects because of the parameter changes.
WARNING
After changing parameters the effects regarding functionality of the engine / machine hast to be checked under ensured machine surroundings.
Assembly Inspection and Initialisation Tests
After installation and commissioning of a plant inspections of warning lights and simulations of warning limits can be performed on
this site. Parameters can be set to the window for the given values.
20-50
Important
First enter the relevant value then set the hook otherwise exists danger of uncontrolled engine switch off!
In the input field several values can be entered to check the warning limits. After entering the values the hook will be set next to the
description to confirm the respective value. This value will be shown next to the input field.
20-51
20-52
20-53
20-54
Fig. 295
Table 119
Fig. 296
Start of measurement record (before starting measurement a file name for storing data has to be defined).
Fig. 297
Fig. 298
Start of measurement.
Stop of measurement.
Fig. 299
20-55
Fig. 300
Fig. 301
Fig. 302
Fig. 303
20-56
Delete measurement.
Fig. 306
20-57
Color palette.
Fig. 308
Similarly is the setting for measurements of engine start, measurement configuration of EAT and applications.
Dynamic Reading-Gauge
Using the Dynamic Reading-Gauge in the Use-Case graphic display, allows you to create individual Experiments, regarding your
engine. The possibility of recording up to 20 different engine controller parameters at the same time, SerDia 2010 allows a simple
but effective diagnosis. For example to monitor the fuel injected output, air-mass flow and engine speed, diagnosing wether plausible
values are caused.
20-58
20-61
20-62
20-63
Trip Recorder
Important
This function is only available with access level 2 or higher!
Sensors
The UseCase sensors provides an overview of various measurements. For 4 of these measurements the upper and lower limits are
displayed in the bar graph with corresponding measured value.
Boost pressure
Ambient pressure
Fuel delivery pressure
Engine oil pressure
Boost temperature
Ambient temperature
Cooling temperature
Battery voltage
Vehicle velocity
EGR, Throttle
The UseCase for analyze and diagnose exhaust gas recirculation and throttle is only available with engines, who are equipped with
this features.
20-64
Engine hours
Important
This function is only available with access level 2 or higher!
SCR-Overview
Important
Provided for a correct use of the UseCases is an engine, equipped with a system of SCR exhaust after treatment.
20-65
Mouse clicking the next icon starts the SCR-End Of Line Test (see description SCR-EOL).
20-66
20-67
Fig. 320
Fig. 321
Turn to page diesel particulate filter and burner then click on the burner.
Fig. 322
20-68
Fig. 323
20-69
Fig. 325
Important values of the DPF-burner system are shown in various labels in the
upper half of the functional area. For example the combustion chamber temperature at the top, the burner air mass flow reference value, the burner air mass
flow actual value in the left labels, such as the secondary fuel injection mass of
the burner in the right label. In the middle the status display of the burner is placed.
Next image shows functional area upper half.
Fig. 326
In the lower half of the functional area important values of the DPF in various labels are shown. These are:
the exhaust gas temperature at the entry of the diesel oxidation catalyst
(DOC) in the left label
l the exhaust gas temperature reference value and the actual value in the
right label
l In the middle the status display of the DPF is placed
Next image shows functional area lower half.
l
Fig. 327
In the picture on the upper left hand side the time since last successful regeneration is shown.
Fig. 328
Values DPF
The overview page for the measurement Measuring Data Acquisition shows the indicated values from the DPF main page as a
graphical tool.
20-70
20-71
20-72
The button Measuring Data Acquisition traces the indicated values from the DPF main page for measurement into a graphical tool.
20-73
The actual status of the burner is shown during regeneration at the status display.
Fig. 333
Table 120
Possible burner conditions
Fig. 334
20-74
Fig. 335
Fig. 336
Fig. 337
Fig. 338
state 32 of burner: on
Fig. 339
20-75
Fig. 340
Fig. 341
state 4 DPF: cat-warm up (start burner) / state 8 DPF: warm up phase (HC-injection)
Fig. 342
At the same time the temperatures before and after DPF (or DOC), and the DPF differential pressure, can be checked in the lower
half of the screen.
Fig. 343 - Check temperatures before and after DPF (or DOC)
DPF End of Line Test
20-76
WARNING
The EOL (End of line) Test is available with software P_802_592_XXX or higher.
Important
The tests are running fully automatic. At the end a result for the complete test is shown (Test successful / not successful).
WARNING
The individual test functions can be activated only above a minimum coolant temperature of 70C.
If a filter regeneration was not possible for an extended period, a service regeneration is required. A click on this button will start the service regeneration.
Fig. 345
If a filter regeneration was not possible for an extended period, a service regeneration is required. A click on this button will start the
service regeneration.
By pressing the shown button the window Measuring Data Acquisition DPF will open (see Values DPF).
By pressing next button the screen of the supply module will be opened.
By pressing next button the results of the individual EOL-tests will be stored (with added information about
engine type, machine type, etc.).For documenting the EOL-test results either a unencrypted as well as a
encrypted file will be generated.
20-78
20-79
Air pump
The system component air pump is described on the overview page as well.
20-80
With the linear regulator an air mass flow can be chosen for setpoint of the air pump. The label above the linear regulator shows the
actual setpoint.
After that the setpoint has to be confirmed by pressing the button ok.
Following values will be shown in the left picture above the air pump:
20-81
Spark plug
WARNING
Keep ready to use the emergency stop of the machine!
20-82
20-83
20-84
Fig. 352
20-85
Fig. 353
Fig. 354
Scaling y-axis: double click onto the values of the axis. Above shown window will
pop up and a new value can be given.
Fig. 355
20-86
Functions of diagrams
Table 123
Button
Function
Start of measurement
Fig. 357
Fig. 358
Fig. 359
Fig. 360
Fig. 361
Description
Start of measurement record (before start- Before starting recording the data name of the recording must
ing measurement a file name for storing be entered.
data has to be defined).
Stop of measurement
Open measurement
Delete measurement
Fig. 362
20-87
Function
Fig. 363
Fig. 364
Fig. 365
Description
Save measurement
spreadsheet window separating / docking The table of measurement names and the actual measurements
for placing on the screen
can be separated or renewed docked.
Switch to Bosch acronyms instead of nor- By default measurement names will be shown in the selected
mal parameter labels
language. By pushing this button the Bosch acronyms will be displayed. By renewed entering the button the selected language
will be displayed renewed.
Fig. 366
20-88
20-89
20-90
20-91
20-92
20-93
Important
It is recommended to use the automatic mode for calibration of the foot pedal. If the hand mode is used by the experienced user, the values for the throttle have to be prepared by user himself.
Constant speed adjustment EMR3
To use this function, the engine has to be in fixspeed mode or the setting allows to activate the fixspeed mode.
20-94
Important
The values for fixspeed 1 (low idle) and fixspeed 4 (high idle) cannot be changed free because they are linked to low,
respectively high idle.
Text box Constant Speed 2,Constant Speed 3.
Changes in these text boxes have to be confirmed with ENTER. After confirmation
the new value will get active, if switched on (see marking point at fixspeed). It is not
possible to install a speed below fixspeed one or above fixspeed four.
The fixspeed 1 and 4 are not changeable in this screen (see hints above).
Fig. 373
20-95
Important
The emergency speed range is limited from low idle up to 1200 rpm!
20-96
Parameters
Characteristics
Maps
20-97
If a parameter is selected, either default and current parameter value is displayed below the graphical
display. Actual measurements and initial values can be confirmed by entering following button.
By default the settings, as described in chapter measurements, are possible to adjust except adjusting the background color.
Scaling y-axis: double click onto the values of the axis. Above shown window will
pop up and a new value can be given.
Fig. 377
Functions of diagrams
Table 124
Button
Function
Start of measurement
Fig. 378
Fig. 379
Fig. 380
20-98
Description
Start of measurement record (before start- Before starting recording the data name of the recording must
ing measurement a file name for storing be entered.
data has to be defined).
Function
Fig. 381
Fig. 382
Fig. 383
Fig. 384
Fig. 385
Fig. 386
Description
Stop of measurement
Open measurement
Delete measurement
Save measurement
spreadsheet window separating / docking The table of measurement names and the actual measurements
for placing on the screen
can be separated or renewed docked.
Switch to Bosch acronyms instead of nor- By default measurement names will be shown in the selected
mal parameter labels
language. By pushing this button the Bosch acronyms will be displayed. By renewed entering the button the selected language
will be displayed renewed.
Fig. 387
20-99
Characteristics
Actual measurements are shown below the graphical display in tabular form with the x-value and the respective FNC.
20-100
Maps
Current and initial values of the map for fan speed are shown below graphical display and can be changed directly in the map.
20-102
20-103
Buttonstore in ECU writes all variables for idle speed back into the ECU. If the engine is still running,
SerDia will offer to stop the engine automatically, so that the programming of the ECU can take place.
Text box new value, an input into this text box has to be confirmed by ENTER.
After that, SerDia changes all variables for idle speed and switches over to working page, so all changes will be activated in realtime.
Fig. 393
20-104
Fault location
The most frequent reasons for problems in SerDia2010 are:
l
l
l
l
FAQ
1. Error
l
Action
l
Go to the Folder C:\DEUTZ\SerDia\lic\... and execute workaround2.reg by double-clicking it. Follow the systems-instruction
and restart SerDia2010
2. Error message
l
Fig. 394
Action
l
To install the workarounds you unpack the ZIP archive (from Z_ into ZIP):C: \DEUTZ\SerDia\Lic and rename the R_data in
.REG. By double clicking on the REG file the workaround will be installed.
3. Error message
l
Action
l
Open the .reg file, which can only runs on the target system. This can be seen in: C:\ \Windows\SysWOW64\
4. Error message
l
Action
l
5. Error message
l
Serdia2010.daps and default .daps find no ECU or no SW-Version. Data speed (baud-rate) error is shown.
Action
l
Check termination resistors. CAN-High and CAN-Low exchange. With different baud rates on the Bus take an ECU with 250
KBaud-DS or repair the bus.
6. Error message
l
Fig. 395
Action
20-105
Will be displayed when a new license file is replaced by an older one. Use newer license file!
7. Error message
ZIP-installation problem.
Fig. 396
Action
l
l
(Firewall problem)
Solve the problem:
1. By IT-department which untreated takes or
2. new FTP-Link with the same file but harmless file ending adjust
8. Error message
l
Device manager.
Fig. 397
Action
l
Fig. 398
9. Error message
l
Fig. 399
20-106
Install newest SerDia-Version (1.8.750) with newest licence file, because older databases contain old passwords.
20-107
These procedures must be performed in the event of replacing an HLHP con unit in an Agrotron TTV 72-10-7230-7250 models or in
the event of a software update.
Table 125
PROCEDURE
Suspension
System
Distributors
Engine
Air conditioner
Park brake
Agrosky
MR-D Cabin
Delete alarms
HEADING
. Configuration
. Calibration
. Options
. Calibration
. Calibration of potentiometer
. Type
. 4WD
. System
. PLA configuration
Parameters
CAN program
Curves
Flow control
JoyNeut. Calibration
Step +- Analog
Throttle pedal
Hand gas
Engine speed
Valve
Recirculation
Enable
Cabin suspension calibration
20-108
20-108
20-112
20-113
20-122
20-123
20-125
20-129
20-131
20-138
20-147
20-150
20-154
20-155
20-155
20-158
2. Tractor model
3. Software version
4. Software date
5. Type of transmission
6. Maximum set velocity
7. Selected tyres
8. Type of front suspension
9. Front PTO presence
10. Radar Presence
11. Automatic air clima presence
12. Type of el. Distributors
13. Front lift assignment
14. Semiactive Cabine suspension presence
- - A g r
T
S
T
S
A
F
R
A
D
F
C
- o t
D
0 5
N S
E D
E
P .
L
n
r
4
R A
:
P E
:
Y R
:
U S
:
S M
:
. P T O
:
A D A R
:
/ C
:
I S T R .
:
. L I F T
:
A B . M R D :
[
r
F
M
H
o
_
0
.
E ]
H P
T
2 5
- 2
E C
4 0
2 0
3 V
Y e
Y e
N o
Y e
7 C
N o
N o
T
5
0
C
.
I
s
s
- V
1
O
k
8
3
M 1 . 5
m / h
R 3 8
s
A N
E X I
Fig. 400
M E N U -
P a s s w o r
d :
C 1 B 0 9 0
Fig. 401
2.
M A I
- - -
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
o
a
e
l
n
l
s
l
A -
i
i
t
a
N
- -
t o r s
b r a t i
s
r m s
E E P R O M
E ]
M E N U
- - - - - -
o n s
n i
E X I
Fig. 402
20-109
E E P R O M
E E
b e e n
w i t
p a
P R O
i n i
h
d
r a m
N I
M
t i
e f
e t
h
a
a
e
T .
a
l
u
r
s
i s e d
l t
s
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 403
4.
In order to end correctly the initialization turn off and then turn on ignition key.
T
S
T
S
A
F
R
A
D
F
C
- - ?
?
R
P
Y
U
S
.
A
/
I
.
A
?
D F
0 5 A N S M
E E D
R E
S P .
M
P T O
D A R
C
S T R .
L I F T
B . M R
[
H L
?
_ r
0 4
. :
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
D :
E ]
H P
?
2 5
- 2
N o
2 0
1 8
N o
N o
N o
N o
N o
N o
C 1
N o
- - - ?
?
5
0 1 3
C o n f i g
k m / h
. 4 R 3 8
E X I
> D 1
T
Fig. 404
2.
5 -
M A I
- - -
C o n f
E ]
N
- -
M E N U
- - - - - -
g u r
a t
E X I
o n s
Fig. 405
20-110
Press [F] if your model is not shown and you want to look next page.
-
T R A C T O R
- - - - - - - -
M O D E L
- T 7 1 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
K
I
R
X
K
I
R
X
i
L
r
v
R O
6 .
M
P
R O
6 .
M
r o f
N
H
H i
H i -
i
i
L
L
P
e
n
i
o
e
F ]
P a g e
E ]
E X I
e
n e
f i l
l
Fig. 406
4.
1 2 3 -
[
[
T R A C T O R
- - - - - - - -
A g r o t
S A M E
L a m b .
D ]
F ]
M O D E L
- E C C O M
r o n
C o n t
R 7 .
P a g e
P a g e
E ]
T T V
i n u o
V R T
E X I
Fig. 407
5.
1 2 3 -
[
[
T R A C T O R
- - - - - - - -
M O D E L
- E C C O M
D e u t z
T T V
S A M E
T T V
L a m .
b
T T V
D ]
F ]
P a g e
P a g e
E ]
E X I
+
T
Fig. 408
6.
20-111
Switch off and then switch on the ignition key to complete the configuration .
S
s
c
c
w
w
o
o
i
i
m
n
t
t
p
f
c
c
l
i
h
h
e t
g u
O F F
O N
t
e
t h
r a t i
a n d
o
e
o n
Fig. 409
- - A g r
T
S
T
S
A
F
R
A
D
F
C
- o t
D
0 5
N S
E D
E
P .
L
n
r
4
R A
:
P E
:
Y R
:
U S
:
S M
:
. P T O
:
A D A R
:
/ C
:
I S T R .
:
. L I F T
:
A B . M R D :
[
r
F
M
H
o
_
0
.
E ]
H P
T
2 5
- 2
N o
0 0
1 8
3 V
Y e
N o
N o
N o
N o
N o
N o
T
5
0
C
.
I
s
E X I
- V
1
o
k
4
3
n f
m / h
R 3 8
Fig. 410
2.
Press [E]. Enter main menu and press [2] to enter in calibration menu.
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 411
20-112
T R
= = = =
1 - C o
2 - C a
A
=
n
l
N
=
f
i
E ]
S
=
i
b
M
=
g
r
I
=
u
a
S
=
r
t
S
=
a
i
E X I
I
=
t
o
O N
= = = =
i o n
n
Fig. 412
2.
C O N
= = = =
1 - T r
2 - W h
3 4 5 -
G U R A T
= = = = =
s m i s s
B a s
l
W h e e l
C i r
S p e e d
R e v .
L e v e
F
=
a
e
I
=
n
e
E ]
E X I
I O N
= = = = =
i o n
e
c u m f
Fig. 413
3.
=
1
2
3
4
5
=
-
T
=
S
S
S
S
S
R
=
1
1
1
2
2
A
=
8
8
8
4
4
[
[
A ]
C ]
N S M I S S I O N
= = = = = = = = = = =
0
S T D
N e w
0
S T D
O l d
0
H D
0
S T D
0
H D
A b o r
S t o r
t
e
Fig. 414
20-113
W a i t
c o m m u n i
f o r
c a t
o n
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 415
5.
Switch off and switch on the tractor and then connect again the SAME ART.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
c o n f i g u r a t i
s u c c e s s f u l
o n
l
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 416
6.
An error can occur during the configuration. The errors have the following code:
Table 126
VALUE
7.
0D
0E
2A
3F
48
DESCRIPTION
Return in transmission configuration menu and press [2] to set the wheel
type.
T T V
W H E E L
B A S E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 2 3 -
1 8 .
2 0 .
2 0 .
[
[
A ]
C ]
4
8
8
R 3 8
R 3 8
R 4 2
A b o r
S t o r
t
e
Fig. 417
20-114
From configuration menu, pressing [3] you can modify the preset value for
the wheel circumference. Enter the new value and then press [E] to save it.
Fig. 418
9.
From configuration menu, press [4] and set the maximum speed for the
tractor according with the law of the appropriate country.
V E L O C I T Y
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
0
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
[
[
6
0
0
0
0
0
A ]
C ]
k
k
k
k
k
k
m
m
m
m
m
m
/
/
/
/
/
/
h
h
h
h
h
h
A b o r
S t o r
t
e
Fig. 419
10.
From configuration menu, press [5] and indicate if reverser lever on the
steering wheel is present or not.
R E V E R S E R
L E V E R
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
0 1 -
N o t
P r e s e n t
P r e s e n t
[
[
A ]
C ]
A b o r
S t o r
t
e
Fig. 420
20-115
C A L I B R A T I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 2 -
C l u t
H y s t
c h
a t .
4 5 -
P T O
P r
F r o n t
P e d a l
U n i t
o p .
W h e e l
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 421
Press [1] in order to calibrate the minimum and maximum stroke of the
pedal position.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
P
p
e
t
p
b
t
p
r
e
n
h
e
r
h
o
e
d
d
e
d
i
e
s
[
[
C ]
E ]
s s
a l
o
n
a l
n g
s
i t
f
r
t
i
t h e
s l o
t r
e l e
s l o
i t
a r t
o n
S t a r
E x i t
w
a
a
w
b
i
c
l
v
s
l
a
n
l u t
y
t
e l ,
e
t
y
a
c k
g
C a l
c h
o
h e
n d
t o
b .
Fig. 422
2.
c a l
i n
i b r a t
p r o g r
i o n
e s s
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 423
20-116
c a l i b r a t
s u c c e s s f
i o n
u l l
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 424
4.
Table 127
VALUE
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x46
0x55
0x56
0x57
DESCRIPTION
From calibration menu press [2] to calibrate TCU (hydrostatic unit). On the
screen it is possible to read the condition that it has to be reached. Engine
has to run at least at 800 RPM, EPB has to be activated, brake and clutch
have to be released.
Fig. 425
2.
c a l
i n
i b r a t
p r o g r
i o n
e s s
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 425
20-117
Table 128
VALUE
0x0A=11
0x0B=11
0x0C=12
0x0D=13
0x0F=31
0x20=32
0x46=70
00
01
02
03
06
07
08
09
0B
4.
5.
DESCRIPTION
Fig. 426
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
c a l i b r a t
s u c c e s s f
i o n
u l l
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E X I
Fig. 426
20-118
The vehicle is equipped on the basic configuration with the rear proportional PTO. In optional, the front proportional PTO is
available. Each PTO has to be calibrated, in order to assure a proper behaviour of the clutch modulation.
From Calibration menu press [4] in order to start the PTO calibration.
Before start the calibration the following conditions must be satisyed:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
3.
Fig. 428
4.
When ACTIVATE PTO message appears on the screen activate rear PTO
with the corresponding button. Calibration process will start automatically.
Fig. 429
5.
If something goes wrong, an error message appears on the screen with the
corresponding error code.
Fig. 430
20-119
Look at the code error in order to get information on the error in the following table.
Table 129
VALUE
0x0A=10
7.
0x0B=11
0x0C=12
0x0D=13
0x0F=31
0x20=32
0x46=70
00
02
03
07
0E
19
21
28
64
DESCRIPTION
Action not permitted, check enviroment condition; TCU change to shutdown, restart of TCU via ignition
necessary
Action running
Action aborted, read enviroment information
Waiting for ePTO-ON signal
Calibration data valid (transition only)
Calibration data invalid (transition only)
Operation completed successfully
Enviroment conditions OK
Delay limit of activating of PTO exceeded
Park brake not engaged
PTO speed above limit
Calibration value range exceeded
Engine speed deceleration range exceeded
Engine load exceeded limit
Oil temperature limits exceeded
Calibration time limit exceeded
When the calibration process for the PTO is finished, the TCU calibration
successuful message will be shown on the sreen.
Fig. 431
20-120
From calibration menu push [5] in order to start Front wheels calibration.
Fig. 432
2.
Fig. 432
3.
Fig. 433
20-121
If something goes wrong, e.g. velocity less than 5 km/h, an error message
appears on the display.
Fig. 434
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 434
2.
The following points explain the meaning of each row on the screen:
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 435
20-122
Press [1] to set if is it present or not the front PTO. Options from 2 to 6 are
tuneable parameters.
Option Present auto means that the front PTO works in auto mode related
to the position of rear lift.
Fig. 436
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 436
2.
The following points explain the meaning of each row on the screen:
m
m
m
m
Fig. 437
20-123
Fig. 438
4.
From ASM menu press [7] in order to calibrate the steering sensor. Move
the steering wheel until the wheels are straight, than press [E] to confirm
and [C] to store the new value.
Fig. 439
5.
From ASM menu, press [8] to set the front speed sensor. The sensor can be
present or not [0]; if it is present, it can be active[1] or not [2].
When active, all the warnings are displayed otherwise the warnings are not
displayed .
Fig. 440
20-124
From ASM menu, press [9] to set if the hitch link is disabled [0] or enabled
[1]. With hitch link enabled, when rear lift reached the PTO auto threshold,
differential lock will be deactivated. This support user to change direction
during work with tools.
Fig. 441
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 441
Options
1.
Fig. 442
20-125
The following list describe the meaning of each row of the screen:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 443
Auto drop
1.
From previous screen press [1] to set the Auto drop functionality.
MANUAL: The lowering of the rear lift is commanded with the same
parameters of the rear lift control algorithms
m AUTOMATIC: The lowering of the rear lift is commanded with a
controller velocity up to the memorized rear lift postion, then the
lowering is done with the same parameters of the rear lift control
algorithms
m SEMI-AUTOMATIC: The lowering of the rear lift is commanded with
a controller velocity
Based on the type of Auto drop push [0],[1] or [2] button.
Press [C] to store the mode and exit.
m
Fig. 444
Mix mode
1.
From previous screen press [4] to set the Mix mode functionality. Operator can enable [1] or disable [0] Mix mode control of the lift using a mixed
position/draft control.
When MixMode is enabled, the MIX potentiometer work in a way to mix the
position control mode and the draft control mode according to the position
of the potentiometer itself.
When MixMode is not enabled, the MIX potentiometer work in draft control
mode, moving the potentiometer in the direction of the position control the
rear lift works in draft control with progressive reducing of max depth. Close
to the control position position of the potentiometer, the rear lift work in
position control.
Fig. 445
20-126
From previous screen press [6]to set the 100mm lift cylinder functionality.
Press [0] if the bigger cylinder is absent or [1] if it is present.
Fig. 446
Radar
1.
From previous screen press [8]to set the Radar function. Press [0] if the
radar is not present or [1] if the radar is present.
Fig. 447
Buzzer
1.
From previous screen press [B]to set how the system inform the user about
the lockage of the lift.
Press the number for the corresponding option and than [C] to store the
configuration.
Fig. 448
20-127
Fig. 449
Calibration
1.
Fig. 449
2.
20-128
Fig. 450
Fig. 450
2.
Fig. 451
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 451
20-129
Option [2] is the velocity limit below which the front suspension will be
blocked ([km/h]).
Fig. 452
3.
Fig. 453
Type
1.
Fig. 454
20-130
From Suspension menu, press [4] to if the 4WD check is on or off. This
function disable the lockage of the front suspension because of 4WD activation.
Fig. 455
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 455
System
1.
Fig. 456
20-131
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 457
Language
1.
Choose a language from the list, then press the corresponding button ([0]
[7]).
Fig. 458
Air brake
1.
From System menu, press [2] to set if the air brake system is present or
not.
Fig. 458
20-132
Fig. 459
Air conditioner
1.
From System menu, press [3] to set if the automatic air conditioner system is present or not.
Fig. 460
TC filter
1.
Fig. 460
20-133
Actual is the last time when the filter has been changed. New is the
actual value, in hours, of the filter.
Press [E].
Fig. 461
3.
Press [C] to update and store the actual value of hours for the filter.
Fig. 462
TC oil
1.
Fig. 462
20-134
Actual is the last time when the oil has been changed. New is the actual
value, in hours, of the transmission oil.
Press [E].
Fig. 463
3.
Press [C] to update and store the actual value of hours for the transmission
oil.
Fig. 464
Rape oil
1.
From System menu, press [7] to set if the Rape oil is present or not.
Fig. 465
20-135
From System menu, press [8] to set the actual instrumentation mounted
on the tractor.
Fig. 465
2.
m
m
m
m
m
0 = No iMo0nitor
1 = Only iMonitor
2 = Only TECU ISOBUS 11783
3 = Imonitor + TECU ISO 11783
4 = Imonitor + TECU + Auxiliary Input/output ISO11783
Fig. 466
Aux tank
1.
From System menu, press [9] to set if the aux tank is present or not. If it is
present set the value to 1, if it is not present set the value to 0.
Fig. 467
20-136
From System menu, press [A] to set if the engine brake is present or not.
If it is present set the value to 1, if it is not present set the value to 0.
Fig. 468
Hydraulic Oil
1.
From System menu, press [B] to reset interval maintenance hydraulic oil.
Fig. 468
2.
Actual is the last time when the oil has been changed. New is the actual
value, in hours, of the hydraulic oil.
Press [E].
Fig. 469
20-137
Press [C] to update and store the actual value of hours for the hydraulic oil.
Fig. 470
PLA configuration
1.
From the first System menu press [2] to start PLA automatic configuration.
Fig. 471
2.
Fig. 472
20-138
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 472
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 473
20-139
From previous menu, press [1] to set the parameters of the distributors.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Configuration
1.
Press [1] to enter in configuration and set the number of distributors present
on the tractor.
Fig. 475
Commands
1.
Fig. 476
20-140
Press [4] to enter in type menu and set the correct type of regulation for
the distributors.
Press [0] if there arent distributors.
Press [1] if distributors are commanded with PWM signal.
Press [2] if distributors are commanded with CAN message.
Fig. 477
External pushbutton
1.
Fig. 478
Front lift
1.
Press [6] to enter in Front lift menu and set if it is present or not. If there is
a the front lift, set which distributor it corresponds.
Fig. 479
20-141
From previous menu, press [1] to set manually the CAN distributors configuration.
Fig. 480
2.
Connect only one distributors and than press [1] to set distributors 1, [2] to
set distributors 2 and so on.
When a configuration for one distributor is complete, disconnect it in order
to configure the next distributor.
Fig. 481
3.
After connect one at time all the distributors the configuration is complete.
Fig. 482
4.
This procedure is useful to set manually the configuration, e.g. when the operator has to replace a particular distributors.
Mount all the distributors.
20-142
From previous menu, press [2] to set sequentially the CAN configuration
for all the distributors.
All the distributors have to be disconnected.
Connect one at time the distributors when requested.
Fig. 482
2.
Fig. 483
3.
Fig. 484
4.
Continue with this procedure without disconnect the previous distributor until the operator will connect all the distributors.
At the end the operator will find all the distributors already connected.
20-143
From Distributors menu, press [3] to set the type of curves for the distributors that correlate the joystick position to the commanded oil flow.
Fig. 485
2.
Fig. 486
Flow control
1.
From Distributors menu, press [5] to set the configuration for the flow
control.
Fig. 487
20-144
From previous menu, press [1] to set the dimension of the oil pump mounted on the tractor.
Fig. 488
Priority distributor
1.
Fig. 489
Mode
1.
From previous menu, press [3] to set the advanced oil flow management.
m
m
m
1. no advanced management;
2. the available flow is shared between the el.valves;
3. the engine is raised up to 1800 rpm in order to provide more oil
flow. The tractor velocity is kept;
4. Mix of 1 and 2.
Fig. 490
20-145
From Distributors menu, press [9] to calibrate the neutral position for the
joysticks.
Fig. 491
2.
Fig. 492
3.
Fig. 493
20-146
From Distributors menu, press [A] to set the type of control for the joystick.
Joystick can control the distributor in ballistic mode or analog mode.
m
Balistic mode: with the joystick the operator just command more
or less.
Analog mode: the position of the joystick is related the value.
Fig. 494
2.
Press [0],[1],[2],[3] to set the range inside which the value reach the corresponding set point with time [4],[5],[6],[7].
Press [A] to insert a decimal number that enable or disable the ballistic mode on distributor. To determinate the number use
the following table:
Table 130
Distributor
3.
Value
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
8
5
16
6
32
7
64
Insert in A-Enable bm the sum of the value of the distributors that are controlled in ballistic mode.
Example
If you want to enable balistic mode for distributor 1,4 and 5 you have to insert: 1 +8 + 16 = 25
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 494
20-147
From Engine calibrations menu, press [1] in order to calibrate the throttle
pedal.
Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Fig. 495
2.
Pedal to min.
Fig. 496
3.
Pedal to max.
Fig. 497
20-148
Pedal calibration OK
Fig. 498
Hand gas
1.
From Engine calibrations menu, press [2] in order to calibrate the hand
gas command. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Fig. 498
2.
Handgas at min .
Fig. 499
20-149
Handgas at max .
Fig. 500
4.
Handgas calibration OK
Fig. 501
Engine speed
1.
From Engine calibrations menu, press [3] in order to set minimum and
maximum speed of the engine.
Fig. 502
20-150
C
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
A
=
-
L I
= =
T r
P T
A S
L i
S u
S y
C A
Di
E n
A i
P a
A g
M R
[
B
=
a
O
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
R A T I O N
M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
E ]
r
n
o
B
s
i
e
n
r
k
C
o n
b u t
o r
d i t .
a k e
y
P S
a b
E X I
Fig. 502
2.
If air conditioner is not present, the Air conditioner not installed message
appears on the display.
Fig. 503
3.
If the air conditioner is present the following screen appears on the screen.
Fig. 504
20-151
From Air conditioner menu, press [1] to calibrate the water valve.
Fig. 505
2.
If the calibration procedure failure the following screen appears on the display:
Fig. 506
3.
Fig. 507
20-152
From Air conditioner menu, press [1] to calibrate the recirculation valve.
Fig. 508
2.
If the calibration procedure failure the following screen appears on the display:
Fig. 509
3.
Fig. 510
20-153
Fig. 511
engine off
tractor not in slope and without trailer, implements or ballasts
tires inflated at the right pressure
CAUTION
The vehicle must not have any ballast on the front or on the rear and any implement.
Calibration
1.
Form Park brake menu, press [2], the following page will be shown.
Fig. 512
2.
20-154
In order to calibrate the sensor press [B]Memo. The indication NOT CALIBRATED became CALIBRATED and the procedure is finished.
In order to restore the factory calibration press [D]Reset (the status became NOT CALIBRATED).
If [B]Memo is pressed and the calibration conditions are not satisfied (the
engine is running or the slope signal is not available), the calibration could
not be done. Verify the calibration conditions before go on.
Fig. 513
Fig. 514
Enable
1.
Fig. 515
20-155
Press [1] and set if the cabin suspension is installed [1] or not installed [0].
Fig. 516
From Cabin suspension menu, press [2] in order to start the calibration of
the cabin suspension.
If the suspension is not installed, the following screen appears on the display.
If the cabin suspension is installed, it is possible to start calibration.
Fig. 517
2.
Position the cabin at the lower mechanical end and store the position with
[C].
Fig. 518
20-156
Position the cabin at the higher mechanical end and store the position with
[C].
Fig. 519
4.
Move the levelling mechanical lever until the Position indication shown
OK.
Fig. 520
5.
Fig. 521
20-157
When the entire procedure it is done, then all the passive error must be
deleted.
Go to Main menu.
Fig. 522
2.
Fig. 523
3.
Fig. 524
20-158
Erase, one after the other, all the passive errors of the different ECUs
pressing the corresponding number.
Fig. 525
20-159
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
29
29
29
29
51
51
51
51
51
51
20-160
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN 29
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 29
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 29
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 29
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
51
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 4
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
12
51
12
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 6
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 6
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 6
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-161
51
12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN 51
FMI 12
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Actuator
EGR-Valve
(2.9;3.6) or ThrottleValve (6.1,7.8); over temperature
Table 132
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
84
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
11
94
20-162
Engine
alarm
SPN 84
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN 91
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN 94
FMI 1
Fault
94
94
94
97
97
97
12
100
100
100
100
100
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN 94
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN 94
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 94
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 97
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN 97
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN 97
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-163
100
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
100
FMI 4
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Table 133
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
102
102
102
102
105
105
105
20-164
Engine
alarm
SPN
102
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
102
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
102
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
102
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
105
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
105
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
105
FMI 3
Fault
105
107
107
107
108
108
110
110
110
110
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
105
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
107
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
107
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
107
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
108
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
108
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
110
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
110
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
110
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
110
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-165
111
132
11
132
11
132
11
132
11
20-166
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
111
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
132
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
132
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
132
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
132
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
157
157
164
168
168
168
168
168
168
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
157
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
157
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
164
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
168
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-167
171
171
172
172
172
174
174
175
175
175
20-168
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
171
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
171
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
172
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
172
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
172
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
174
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
174
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 0
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
175
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Customer
oiltemperature: signal unplausible
20-169
190
190
190
190
190
11
190
12
190
12
190
14
190
14
20-170
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
190
FMI 14
Component
Fault
Sensor
crankshaft
speed; disturbed signal
Sensor
crankshaft
speed; no signal
Controls
Link to system
411
411
411
411
412
412
520
597
624
624
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
411
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
411
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
411
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
411
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
412
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
412
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
520
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
597
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
624
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
624
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-171
624
624
12
630
12
630
12
630
12
20-172
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
624
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
624
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
630
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
630
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
630
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
639
14
651
651
651
652
652
652
653
653
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
639
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
651
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
651
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
651
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
652
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
652
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
652
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
653
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
653
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
CAN-Bus 0 BusOff-Status
20-173
653
654
654
654
655
655
655
656
656
656
20-174
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
653
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
654
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
654
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
654
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
655
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
655
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
655
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
656
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
656
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
656
FMI 5
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
676
11
676
11
677
677
677
677
677
677
12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
676
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
676
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
677
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-175
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
703
703
703
703
12
729
898
975
975
975
20-176
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
703
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
703
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
703
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
703
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
729
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
898
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
975
975
975
975
12
975
12
1079
13
1080
13
1109
1136
1136
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
975
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1079
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
1080
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
1109
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
1136
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
1136
FMI 1
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-177
1136
1136
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
1136
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
1136
FMI 4
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Table 138
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
20-178
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 1
Component
Fault
1180
1180
1180
11
1188
1188
1188
11
1188
11
1188
11
1188
11
1188
11
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
1180
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Wastegate
blocked
actuator;
20-179
1188
13
1231
14
1235
14
1237
1322
12
1323
12
1324
12
1325
12
20-180
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
1188
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
1231
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
1235
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
1237
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
1322
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1323
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1324
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1325
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Wastegate
actuator
calibration deviation too
large, recalibration required
CAN-Bus 1 BusOff-Status
CAN-Bus 2 BusOff-Status
Controls
Link to system
1326
12
1327
12
1328
12
1639
1639
1761
14
2621
2621
2621
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
1326
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1327
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1328
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
1639
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
1639
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
1761
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
2621
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
2621
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
2621
FMI 5
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-181
2621
12
2797
2798
2798
2798
3031
3031
3031
3031
3224
20-182
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
2621
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
2797
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
2798
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
2798
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
2798
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
3031
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3031
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3031
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
3031
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
3224
FMI 1
Component
Fault
DEF-Tank temperature:
below minimum
Controls
Link to system
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
3224
Engine
alarm
SPN
3224
FMI 2
3224
3224
Engine
alarm
SPN
3224
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
3224
FMI 9
3234
Engine
alarm
SPN
3234
FMI 2
3234
Engine
alarm
SPN
3234
FMI 9
3234
Engine
alarm
SPN
3234
FMI 9
3234
11
Engine
alarm
SPN
3234
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-183
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
3241
3241
3248
3248
3248
3248
3248
3248
3248
20-184
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
3241
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3241
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 2
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
3248
3251
3251
3253
3253
3253
3253
3361
3361
3361
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
3248
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
3251
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
3251
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
3253
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
3253
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
3253
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
3253
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
3361
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
3361
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
3361
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-185
3361
3361
3532
3532
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
3361
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
3361
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
3532
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
3532
FMI 4
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
AdBlue dosing
blocked (SCR)
valve
Table 141
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
3711
12
4243
11
4334
4334
20-186
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
3711
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
4243
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 0
Component
Fault
4334
4334
4334
4334
4341
4341
4341
4341
4343
4343
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4334
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4341
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4341
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4341
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4341
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4343
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4343
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-187
4343
4343
4343
11
4345
4345
4345
4345
4345
11
4360
20-188
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4343
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4343
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4343
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
4345
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4345
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4345
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4345
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4345
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
4360
FMI 0
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
4360
4360
4360
4365
4366
4366
4366
4366
4366
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4360
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
4360
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4360
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4365
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 5
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-189
4366
4366
12
4374
13
4375
4375
4375
4376
4376
4376
4376
20-190
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4366
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
4374
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
4375
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4375
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4375
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 5
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
4376
4376
12
4376
12
4765
4765
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
4376
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
4765
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
4765
FMI 1
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-191
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
4766
4766
4768
4768
4768
4769
4769
4769
4769
20-192
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4766
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
4766
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
4768
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
4768
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
4768
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
4769
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
4769
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
4769
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
4769
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
4769
523006 3
523006 4
523008 1
523008 2
523009 9
523009 10
523212 9
523216 9
523240 9
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
4769
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523006
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523006
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523008
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523008
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523009
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523009
FMI 10
Engine
alarm
SPN
523212
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523216
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523240
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-193
523330 14
523350 4
523352 4
523354 12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523330
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523350
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523352
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523354
FMI 12
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Injector cylinder-bank 1;
short circuit
Injector cylinder-bank 2;
short circuit
Table 144
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523450 2
523450 3
523450 4
523451 2
20-194
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523450
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523450
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523450
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523451
FMI 2
Component
Fault
523451 3
523451 4
523452 2
523452 3
523452 4
523470 2
523470 2
523470 7
523470 11
523470 12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523451
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523451
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523452
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523452
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523452
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-195
523470 12
523470 14
523550 12
523601 13
523602 0
523602 0
523603 9
523605 9
523606 9
20-196
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523470
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523550
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523601
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523602
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523602
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523603
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523605
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523606
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-197
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 12
523612 14
20-198
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 14
Component
Fault
Controls
Softwarereset
SWReset_0
CPU
Link to system
523612 14
523612 14
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523612
FMI 14
Fault
Softwarereset
SWReset_1
CPU
Softwarereset
SWReset_2
CPU
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523613 0
523613 0
523613 0
523613 0
523613 0
523613 0
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 0
Component
Fault
20-199
523613 1
523613 2
523615 3
523615 3
523615 4
523615 4
523615 5
523615 12
523632 0
523632 1
20-200
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523613
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523615
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523632
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523632
FMI 1
Component
Fault
Controls
Setpoint of metering
unit in overrun mode not
plausible
Metering unit (Fuel-System); short circuit to battery highside
Metering unit (Fuel-System); short circuit to battery low side
Metering unit (FuelSystem); short circuit to
ground high side
Metering Unit (FuelSystem); short circuit to
ground low side
Metering unit (Fuel-System); open load
of
Link to system
523632 2
523632 16
523632 18
523633 11
523633 11
523633 11
523698 11
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523632
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523632
FMI 16
Engine
alarm
SPN
523632
FMI 18
Engine
alarm
SPN
523633
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523633
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523633
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523698
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-201
523718 3
523718 4
523718 5
523719 3
523719 4
523719 5
523719 5
523720 2
523720 2
20-202
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523718
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523718
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523718
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523719
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523719
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523719
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523719
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523720
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523720
FMI 2
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523720 8
523720 8
523721 2
523721 2
523721 8
523721 8
523721 11
523722 8
523722 8
523723 11
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523720
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523720
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523721
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523721
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523721
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523721
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523721
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523722
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523722
FMI 8
Engine
alarm
SPN
523723
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-203
523766 9
523767 9
523768 9
523769 9
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523766
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523767
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523768
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523769
FMI 9
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Table 148
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523770 9
523776 9
523777 9
523778 9
20-204
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523770
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523776
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523777
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523778
FMI 9
Component
Fault
523779 9
523788 0
523788 0
523788 0
523788 0
523788 12
523803 9
523867 12
523895 13
523896 13
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523779
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523788
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523788
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523788
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523788
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523788
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523803
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523867
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523895
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523896
FMI 13
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-205
523897 13
523898 13
523899 13
523900 13
523909 5
523910 0
523910 0
523910 6
523910 7
523910 9
20-206
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523897
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523898
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523899
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523900
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523909
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 6
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523910 12
523910 14
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523910
FMI 14
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523911 0
523911 3
523911 3
523911 4
523911 7
523911 11
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 11
Component
Fault
20-207
523911 12
523912 0
523912 1
523912 2
523912 3
523912 4
523913 3
523913 4
523914 3
20-208
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523911
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523912
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523912
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523912
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523912
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523912
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523913
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523913
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523914 4
523914 5
523914 5
523914 11
523914 12
523915 0
523915 3
523915 3
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523914
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-209
523915 4
523915 7
523915 7
523915 11
523915 12
523916 0
523916 1
523916 2
523916 3
20-210
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523915
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523916
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523916
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523916
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523916
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523916 4
523917 0
523917 1
523917 2
523917 3
523917 4
523918 0
523918 1
523918 2
523918 3
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523916
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523917
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523917
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523917
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523917
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523917
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523918
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523918
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523918
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523918
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-211
523918 4
523919 0
523919 1
523919 2
523919 2
523919 3
523919 4
20-212
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523918
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523919
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523920 0
523920 1
523920 2
523920 2
523920 3
523920 4
523921 0
523921 1
523921 2
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523920
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 2
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-213
523921 3
523921 4
523921 11
523922 3
523922 4
523922 4
523922 5
523922 5
523922 7
523922 7
20-214
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523921
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 7
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
523922 12
523922 12
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523922
FMI 12
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523929 0
523929 1
523930 0
523930 1
523931 0
523931 1
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523929
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523929
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523930
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523930
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523931
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523931
FMI 1
Component
Fault
20-215
523932 0
523932 1
523933 0
523933 1
523934 0
523934 1
523935 12
523936 12
523938 9
20-216
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523932
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523932
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523933
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523933
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523934
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523934
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523935
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
523936
FMI
Engine
alarm
SPN
523938
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
523939 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523939
FMI 9
523940 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523940
FMI 9
523941 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523941
FMI 9
523942 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523942
FMI 9
523943 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523943
FMI 9
523946 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523946
FMI 0
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-217
523946 1
523947 0
523947 1
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
523946
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523947
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523947
FMI 1
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Table 153
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
523948 0
523948 1
523949 0
523949 1
523950 0
20-218
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523948
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523948
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523949
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523949
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523950
FMI 0
Component
Fault
523950 1
523951 0
523951 1
523960 0
523960 0
523960 1
523960 1
523973 14
523974 14
523975 14
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523950
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523951
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523951
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523960
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523960
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523960
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523960
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523973
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523974
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523975
FMI 14
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-219
523976 14
523977 14
523978 14
523980 14
523982 0
523982 1
523988 3
523988 4
523988 5
523988 12
20-220
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523976
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523977
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523978
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523980
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
523982
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523982
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523988
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
523988
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
523988
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
523988
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Controls
Powerstage diagnosis
disabled; high battery
voltage
Powerstage diagnosis
disabled; low battery voltage
Charging lamp; short circuit to battery
Charging
load
lamp;
open
Link to system
523989 0
523989 1
523990 0
523990 1
523992 9
523993 9
523995 13
523996 13
523998 4
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523989
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523989
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523990
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
523990
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
523992
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523993
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
523995
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523996
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
523998
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-221
523999 12
524000 3
524000 4
524000 5
524001 3
524001 4
524001 5
524004 12
524005 12
524011 0
20-222
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
523999
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524000
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
524000
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
524000
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
524001
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
524001
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
524001
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
524004
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524005
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524011
FMI 0
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
524011 1
524012 0
524012 1
524013 7
524013 7
524014 1
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
524011
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
524012
FMI 0
Engine
alarm
SPN
524012
FMI 1
Engine
alarm
SPN
524013
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
524013
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
524014
FMI 1
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-223
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
524016 2
524016 2
524016 11
524017 12
524017 12
524018 14
524019 11
524020 14
524021 11
20-224
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
524016
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524016
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524016
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524017
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524017
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524018
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
524019
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524020
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
524021
FMI 11
Component
Fault
Controls
air
lines
Link to system
524022 14
524023 14
524024 11
524025 5
524025 14
524028 2
524029 2
524030 7
524031 13
524033 7
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
524022
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
524023
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
524024
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524025
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
524025
FMI 14
Engine
alarm
SPN
524028
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524029
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524030
FMI 7
Engine
alarm
SPN
524031
FMI 13
Engine
alarm
SPN
524033
FMI 7
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
20-225
524034 3
524034 4
524034 5
524034 12
524035 12
524036 12
524037 3
524037 4
524037 5
524038 9
20-226
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
524034
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
524034
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
524034
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
524034
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524035
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524036
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524037
FMI 3
Engine
alarm
SPN
524037
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
524037
FMI 5
Engine
alarm
SPN
524038
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Controls
Link to system
524039 9
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
524039
FMI 9
Fault
Controls
Link to system
Controls
Link to system
Table 156
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
524040 9
524041 9
524042 9
524043 9
524044 9
524045 9
524046 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524040
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524041
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524042
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524043
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524044
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524045
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524046
FMI 9
Fault
20-227
524047 9
524048 9
524049 9
524052 11
524052 11
524052 11
524055 4
524057 2
524062 12
524062 12
20-228
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Engine
alarm
SPN
524047
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524048
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524049
FMI 9
Engine
alarm
SPN
524052
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524052
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524052
FMI 11
Engine
alarm
SPN
524055
FMI 4
Engine
alarm
SPN
524057
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524062
FMI 12
Engine
alarm
SPN
524062
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Master-Slave
CAN;
Messsage-Length-Error
of CAN-Receive-Frame
ComMSMoFOvR
Timeout error CAN message ComMSMoFOvR1TO error memory Slave
Message copy error in
the Master / Slave data
transfer
Error memory Slave reports FID MSMonFC2;
Shut-Off Path test error
of fuel injection system
Error memory Slave reports FID MSMonFC3;
timeout of engine state
messages
(ComMS_
Sys17) from master ECU
Master ECU and Slave
ECU data sets or software are not identical
Spark Plug Control Unit
(SPCU); short circuit to
ground
Electric fuel pump; fuel
pressure build up error
Regeneration
inhibit
switch not available;
ComInhSwtNA
Regeneration
release
switch not available;
ComRegSwtNA
Controls
Link to system
524068 2
524069 9
Severity
Instrument
panel
display
error
Component
Engine
alarm
SPN
524068
FMI 2
Engine
alarm
SPN
524069
FMI 9
Fault
Controls
Link to system
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Description
Link
20-234
20-235
20-236
20-237
20-238
20-238
20-239
20-240
20-240
20-240
20-241
20-242
20-243
20-244
20-245
20-246
20-247
20-248
20-249
20-250
20-251
20-252
20-253
20-254
20-255
20-256
20-257
20-258
20-259
20-260
20-261
20-229
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Description
Link
20-262
20-263
20-264
20-265
20-266
20-267
20-268
20-270
20-271
20-272
20-273
20-274
20-275
20-276
20-277
20-278
20-279
20-280
20-281
20-282
20-283
20-283
20-284
20-284
20-285
20-285
20-286
20-288
20-289
Table 159
Cod.
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
84
85
86
87
88
89
20-230
Description
Link
20-289
20-290
20-292
20-294
20-295
20-296
20-298
20-300
20-301
20-302
20-304
20-306
20-307
20-308
20-310
20-312
20-313
20-313
20-313
20-314
20-314
20-315
20-317
90
91
92 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
93 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
94 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
95 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
96
97
98
99
Description
Link
20-318
20-319
20-320
20-321
20-323
20-324
20-325
20-326
20-327
Table 160
Cod.
100
101
102
103
104
Description
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Lubrication pressure sensor - signal voltage above permitted
range
105
Lubrication pressure sensor - lubrication pressure too low
106
Lubrication pressure sensor - lubrication pressure too low
107
Lubrication pressure sensor Signal voltage below permitted
range
108
Lubrication pressure sensor lubrication pressure too high
109
Not implemented
110
Not implemented
111
Not implemented
112
System pressure sensor - signal voltage above permitted range
113
System pressure sensor - system pressure too low, no driving
operation possible
114
System pressure sensor - system pressure too low, engine speed
elevation initiated
115
System pressure sensor signal voltage below permitted range
116
System pressure sensor - system pressure too high
117
System pressure sensor - pressure drop during gear change
118
System pressure sensor - system pressure too low, engine speed
elevation without effect
119
Not implemented
120
Temperature sensor - interruption or short to plus
121
Temperature sensor - temperature gradient above permitted
range
122
Temperature sensor - temperature too high
123
Temperature sensor - short to ground
124
Temperature sensor - temperature too low, limited driving operation
125
Temperature sensor - temperature gradient below permitted
range
126
Temperature sensor - temperature too low, no driving operation
127 (SDF S180 / SDF S240 / High transmission temperature - limitation is active
SDF S180+)
128
Not implemented
129
Not implemented
130
System pressure sensor pressure drop during clutch 1 shift procedure
131
System pressure sensor pressure drop during clutch 2 shift procedure
132
System pressure sensor pressure drop during clutch 3 shift procedure
Link
20-328
20-329
20-329
20-330
20-330
20-331
20-332
20-333
20-333
20-334
20-335
20-335
20-336
20-337
20-338
20-338
20-339
20-340
20-340
20-340
20-342
20-342
20-342
20-231
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
161 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
162
163
164
165
Description
Link
20-343
20-343
20-344
20-344
20-344
20-347
20-350
20-353
20-354
20-354
20-354
20-354
20-354
20-355
20-355
20-355
20-355
20-355
20-355
20-357
-
Table 162
Cod.
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
20-232
Description
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Voltage supply hydrostatic unit electronics - short to plus
Voltage supply hydrostatic unit electronics - short circuit or short
to ground
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Solenoid valve four wheel drive - interruption of control
Link
20-358
20-359
20-360
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
Description
Link
20-362
20-364
20-366
20-368
20-370
20-372
20-374
20-376
20-378
20-380
20-382
20-384
20-386
20-388
20-390
20-392
20-394
Table 163
Cod.
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
Description
Not implemented
Solenoid valve clutch 1 - interruption of control
Solenoid valve clutch 1 - faulty signal PWM
Solenoid valve clutch 1 - short to plus
Solenoid valve clutch 1 - short circuit or short to ground
Clutch 1 solenoid valve clutch does not open
Clutch 1 solenoid valve clutch does not close
Solenoid valve clutch 1 - differential speed too high, clutch slipping
Not implemented
Solenoid valve clutch 2 - interruption of control
Solenoid valve clutch 2 - faulty signal PWM
Solenoid valve clutch 2 - short to plus
Solenoid valve clutch 2 - short circuit or short to ground
Clutch 2 solenoid valve clutch does not open
Clutch 2 solenoid valve clutch does not close
Solenoid valve clutch 2 - differential speed too high, clutch slipping
Not implemented
Solenoid valve clutch 3 - interruption of control
Solenoid valve clutch 3 - faulty signal PWM
Solenoid valve clutch 3 - short to plus
Solenoid valve clutch 3 - short circuit or short to ground
Clutch 3 solenoid valve clutch does not open
Clutch 3 solenoid valve clutch does not close
Solenoid valve clutch 3 - differential speed too high, clutch slipping
Not implemented
Solenoid valve clutch 4 - interruption of control
Solenoid valve clutch 4 - faulty signal PWM
Solenoid valve clutch 4 - short to plus
Solenoid valve clutch 4 - short circuit or short to ground
Clutch 4 solenoid valve clutch does not open
Clutch 4 solenoid valve clutch does not close
Link
20-396
20-398
20-400
20-402
20-404
20-405
20-406
20-407
20-409
20-411
20-413
20-415
20-416
20-417
20-418
20-420
20-422
20-424
20-426
20-427
20-428
20-429
20-431
20-433
20-435
20-437
20-438
20-233
Description
Link
Solenoid valve clutch 4 - differential speed too high, clutch slip- 20-439
ping
Not implemented
-
230
231
Table 164
Cod.
232
232 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
233
234
234 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
235
235 (SDF S240 / SDF S180+)
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Description
Link
20-440
20-442
20-443
20-445
20-446
20-448
20-449
20-450
20-450
20-452
20-454
-
Transmission alarm 01
Description
Processor error (Arithmetics, Push, Pop, System Stack)
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 165
For TCU pin assignment
20-234
Transmission alarm 02
Description
Processor error (Register)
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 166
For TCU pin assignment
20-235
Transmission alarm 03
Description
Processor error (internal watchdog)
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 167
For TCU pin assignment
20-236
Transmission alarm 05
Description
Processor error (external watchdog)
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 168
For TCU pin assignment
20-237
Transmission alarm 07
Description
ECU in as-delivered condition without valid parameters
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit are not valid. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
Correction
1.
Check whether parameters are present (e.g. voltage supply 12V/24V; rear axle ratio; max. speed), check their settings and
correct them as far as possible. If this error occurs after re-programming please repeat accordingly.
Transmission alarm 08
Description
Processor memory error (flash checksum) at initialization
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
20-238
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 169
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 09
Description
Processor memory error (flash checksum) during operation
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 170
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 10
Description
Application error - data fields incongruent with basic program
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit are not valid.
Correction
1.
Transmission alarm 11
Description
Configuration error - no data field has been selected yet or the selected data field does not exist
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit are not valid.
Correction
1.
Transmission alarm 12
Description
Internal processor memory error (RAM address error) at initialization.
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
20-240
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
3.
4.
Table 171
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 13
Description
Internal processor memory error (RAM address error) during operation.
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
20-241
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
3.
4.
Table 172
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 14
Description
External processor memory error (RAM address error) at initialization
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
20-242
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
4.
Table 173
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 15
Description
External processor memory error (RAM address error) during operation.
Cause
False memory entries are identified in the control unit. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Sporadically occurring error due to an open circuit of the power supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following
on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground)
and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V
or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
20-243
Transmission alarm 16
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 0 incorrect).
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 175
For TCU pin assignment
20-244
Transmission alarm 17
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 0 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 176
For TCU pin assignment
20-245
Transmission alarm 18
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 2 incorrect).
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 177
For TCU pin assignment
20-246
Transmission alarm 19
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 3 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 178
For TCU pin assignment
20-247
Transmission alarm 20
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 4 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 179
For TCU pin assignment
20-248
Transmission alarm 21
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 5 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 180
For TCU pin assignment
20-249
Transmission alarm 22
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 6 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 181
For TCU pin assignment
20-250
Transmission alarm 23
Description
Processor memory error (EEPROM checksum 7 incorrect)
Cause
The parameters stored in the control unit (manufacturer data and transmission settings) have been changed.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the control unit configuration and correct erroneous settings where necessary.
Correct the control unit checksum by resetting the checksum error (see diagnosis tool instructions).
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
Table 182
For TCU pin assignment
20-251
Transmission alarm 24
Description
Processor error (external bus access incorrect)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 183
For TCU pin assignment
20-252
Transmission alarm 25
Description
Processor error (instruction incorrect)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 184
For TCU pin assignment
20-253
Transmission alarm 26
Description
Processor error (access to odd address, compiler error)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 185
For TCU pin assignment
20-254
Transmission alarm 27
Description
Processor error (memory protection range indicator)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 186
For TCU pin assignment
20-255
Transmission alarm 28
Description
Program error (no valid C167 command)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 187
For TCU pin assignment
20-256
Transmission alarm 29
Description
Processor memory error (stack range undershot)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 188
For TCU pin assignment
20-257
Transmission alarm 30
Description
Processor memory error (stack range exceeded)
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 189
For TCU pin assignment
20-258
Transmission alarm 31
Description
Non-maskable interrupt active without permission
Cause
Faulty access operations are detected in the control unit.
l
l
l
l
Processor defective.
Problem during programming.
Error that occurs sporadically due to an open circuit of the voltage supply.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) problem.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the error occurs immediately after programming the control unit, the programming should be repeated.
Ensure that the control unit has a stable voltage supply. With the ignition switched ON and using a voltmeter, check the following on connector A21/1 (see below); the voltage across the connectors of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31
(ground) and on terminal 15 against terminal 31. The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power
supply (12V or 24V).
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. Replace the control unit if
the error continues to occur.
If the error does not occur again, it may be the case that the error is due to a one-off EMC interference (electromagnetic
compatibility).
Table 190
For TCU pin assignment
20-259
Transmission alarm 32
Description
Local CAN - timeout TR1 message
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors shall be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 33 (21h) or 35 (23h) is also recorded and if error 47 (2Fh) is inactive, the VDC should be examined
first.
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
20-260
Transmission alarm 33
Description
Local CAN timeout TR5 message
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) or 35 (23h) is also recorded and if error 47 (2Fh) is inactive, the VDC should be examined
first.
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
20-261
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
6.
Table 192
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 34
Description
Local CAN - timeout register2
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
20-262
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
5.
Table 193
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 35
Description
Local CAN - timeout engine (EHS) message
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
If error VDC 240 (F0h) is active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU32 (20h) to 46 (2Eh) is also recorded and if error 47 (2Fh) is inactive, the VCU should be examined.
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
20-263
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
5.
6.
Table 194
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 36
Description
Local CAN timeout KLECU1 message
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
20-264
If one of the errors TCU 32 to 35 or 37 to 46 is also active, it should be verified that the transmission control unit is online using
the diagnosis tool (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 195
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 37
Description
Local CAN timeout KLECU2 message
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
20-265
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3F) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 to 36 or 38 to 46 is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the transmission control unit is
online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 196
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 38
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 6
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
20-266
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors shall be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 37 (25h) or 39 (27h) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the VDC
is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 197
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 39
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 7
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
20-267
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors shall be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 38 (26h) or 40 (28h) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, it should be verified that the VDC is online
using the diagnosis tool (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 198
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 40
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 8
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
20-268
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors shall be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 39 (27h) or 41 (29h) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that VDC
is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
Table 199
For TCU pin assignment
20-269
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 40 (28h) or 42 (2Ah) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the
VDC is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
Table 200
For TCU pin assignment
20-270
Transmission alarm 42
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 10
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 41 (29h) or 43 (2Bh) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the
VDC is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
20-271
Transmission alarm 43
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 11
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 42 (2Ah) or 44 (2Ch) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the
VDC is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
20-272
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
6.
Table 202
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 44
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 12
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 43 (2Bh) or 45 (2Dh) to 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the
VDC is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
20-273
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
5.
6.
Table 203
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 45
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 13
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
Correction
The cause of the absence of the message in the TCU must be located. If the error is automatically reset, it is a sporadically occurring
error or is due to an excessive bus load.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
20-274
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 44 (2Ch) or 46 (2Eh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the VDC is online
(see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 204
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 46
Description
Local CAN - timeout register 14
Cause
The control unit detects false or unsent CAN bus signals in the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC. As an error response, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in a controlled manner.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Open circuit or short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between VDC and transmission control unit.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
Transmission control unit is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU or VDC has an internal defect.
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Incompatible control unit software in the TCU or VDC.
20-275
If one of the errors TCU 47 (2Fh) or 63 (3Fh) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h) to 45 (2Dh) is also active, use the diagnosis tool to verify that the VDC is online (see diagnosis tool manual).
Check the voltage supply of the transmission control unit.
Check the internal CAN connection for open circuits - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
Check the program versions of the TCU and VDC and correct them where necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 205
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 47
Description
CAN bus error local CAN offline
Cause
The control unit detects an open circuit to the periodic data transmission between TCU and VDC.
l
l
l
l
Short circuit of the local CAN bus connection between the transmission control unit and the VDC.
Faulty termination of the CAN bus connection.
VDC is offline or has an insufficient voltage supply.
TCU has an internal defect.
20-276
A control unit connected to the local CAN bus has an internal defect.
Correction
The cause of the open circuit in the data transmission must be localized via the local CAN. If the error is reset automatically, then
this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Use the diagnosis tool to verify that the TCU is online (see diagnosis tool manual). The most probable cause is a CAN connection short circuit. Therefore, check the internal CAN connection for a short circuit in particular with regard to faulty plug
connections.
Check the terminating resistor belonging to the CAN connection. Check the resistance using an ohmmeter with the ignition
switched OFF and with adapter A21/1 disconnected. The resistance value must be 120 10 . Replace the TCU if the value
measured at the TCU deviates. If a deviation is measured at the TCU mating connector, each control unit that is connected to
the local CAN bus should be examined for a CAN connection defect after the wiring harness has been ruled out as the cause
of the error (see Repair Instructions of the respective control units).
2.
Table 206
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 48
Description
Voltage supply too low
Cause
Depending upon the power supply of the vehicle, the control unit detects a voltage below 9 V or 18 V on the supply input of terminal
30 for a period of at least 1.5 seconds. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
l
l
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. For this purpose, on connector A21/1 (vehicle side), check the voltage on
the connector of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground) whilst the ignition is switched OFF using a voltmeter.
The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V or 24V). Where necessary, check the
fuse of the TCU terminal 30.
If the error occurs after a (sluggish) vehicle start, the vehicle battery may not be charged sufficiently. Recharge the battery to
ensure that it is sufficiently charged.
In the same way as Point 1, check the voltage at terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground) whilst the engine is
running. If the measured voltage does not correspond to the vehicle power supply, the wiring to the alternator especially the
ground wiring should be checked. Check the function of the alternator as well as the settings of the alternator control unit.
Check the setting of the control unit parameter for the supply voltage (12V/24V).
2.
3.
4.
Table 207
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 49
Description
Supply voltage (term. 30) too high
Cause
Depending on the power supply of the vehicle, the control unit detects a voltage above 15 V or 30 V on the supply input of terminal
30 for a period of at least 1 second. As an error response, the valve power stage main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the excessive supply voltage to the control unit (terminal 30) must be localized.
20-278
Check the setting of the control unit parameter for the supply voltage (12V/24V).
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. For this purpose, on connector A21/1 (vehicle side), check the voltage on
the connector of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground) whilst the ignition is switched OFF using a voltmeter.
The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V or 24V).
In the same way as Point 2, check the voltage at terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground) whilst the engine is
running. If the measured voltage does not correspond to the vehicle power supply, the wiring to the alternator especially the
ground wiring should be checked. Check the function of the alternator as well as the settings of the alternator control unit.
3.
Table 208
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 50
Description
Internal main stage end switch not functioning
Cause
The semiconductor switch integrated in the control unit could not be switched on. As an error response, the valve power stage main
switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the faulty control of the semiconductor switch should be located.
1.
Make sure that the TCU has a stable voltage supply. For this purpose, on connector A21/1 (vehicle side), check the voltage on
the connector of terminal 30 (steady plus) against terminal 31 (ground) whilst the ignition is switched OFF using a voltmeter.
The measured voltage should correspond to the respective vehicle power supply (12V or 24V). Where necessary, check the
fuse of the TCU terminal 30.
20-279
Check the wiring of the TCU for a short to ground. Delete error and wait for at least 10 seconds after the ignition has been
switched OFF. The TCU has to be replaced should error TCU 50 continue to occur following ignition ON.
Table 209
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 51
Description
Internal main stage end switch permanently ON (stuck)
Cause
The semiconductor switch integrated in the control unit is permanently switched ON. As an error response, the valve power stage
main switch is switched OFF.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the faulty control of the semiconductor switch should be located.
1.
Check the wiring of the TCU for a short-circuit to plus (supply voltage), particularly on connector A21/1. Delete the error and
wait at least 10 seconds after ignition OFF. The TCU must be replaced should error TCU 51 continue to occur following ignition ON.
Table 210
For TCU pin assignment
20-280
Transmission alarm 52
Description
Hydrostatic unit outside tolerance
Cause
The calibration process of the hydrostatic unit that is automatically activated in neutral position supplies values outside of the permissible tolerance.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect calibration process should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h) or 118 (76h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be carried out as a priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then start the vehicle and bring the transmission temperature to above 20 C. If the error does not occur again, the issue was a one time calibration error no further measures are
required.
Perform a recalibration of the hydrostatic unit using the diagnosis tool. Following successful calibration, switch the ignition
OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds, then start the vehicle.
Check the wiring - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts from the
TCU to the HCU and from the HCU to the stepping motor.
The TCU has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
The stepping motor has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
The hydrostatic unit has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
Table 211
For TCU pin assignment
20-281
Transmission alarm 53
Description
Hydrostatic unit - ratio cannot be reached
Cause
The hydrostatic unit cannot set the stipulated transmission ratio.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect transmission ratio should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h) or 118 (76h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be carried out as
a priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then start the vehicle and bring the transmission temperature to above 20 C. If the error does not occur again, the issue was a one time calibration error no further measures are
required.
Perform a recalibration of the hydrostatic unit using the diagnosis tool. Following successful calibration, switch the ignition
OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds, then start the vehicle.
Check the wiring - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts from the
TCU to the HCU and from the HCU to the stepping motor.
The TCU has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
The stepping motor has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
The hydrostatic unit has to be replaced should error TCU 52 (34h) continue to occur following ignition ON.
Table 212
For TCU pin assignment
20-282
Transmission alarm 54
Description
Max. hydrostatic unit high pressure reached
Cause
The maximum permitted hydrostatic unit high pressure and thus, the maximum possible traction force are reached. To protect the
hydrostatic unit from overloading transmission ratio and thus, vehicle speed is reduced until the hydrostatic high pressure falls below
the max. permitted value.
Correction
The required traction force must be reduced.
1.
2.
If one of the errors TCU 52 (34h) or 53 (35h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
If one of the errors TCU 92, 93, 94, 95 (5Ch, 5Dh, 5Eh, 5Fh) or 160, 161, 162 (A0h, A1h, A2h) is also active, the elimination
of this error should be given priority.
If the error occurs alone, this is a protective function of the transmission from overloading, no further measures are required.
If error 54 (36h) reoccurs, the load should be reduced.
3.
Transmission alarm 56
Description
Impermissible control of transmission clutches
Cause
Clutches are being actuated although such combinations are not permissible.
l
l
l
Correction
1.
If the error occurs immediately after a TCU programming procedure, the programming should be repeated.
20-283
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. If the error occurs repeatedly, the wiring must be checked and where necessary, replaced. If the wiring is ok, then replace the TCU.
The vehicle is moved too fast (downhill in overrun mode, possibly actuated clutch). The vehicle must be moved with the operating brake within the permitted speed.
Transmission alarm 60
Description
Loss of step during hydrostatic unit calibration
Cause
The calibration process of the hydrostatic unit that is automatically activated in neutral position indicates a loss of step.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the loss of step should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h) or 118 (76h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be carried out as
a priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then start the vehicle and bring the transmission temperature to above 20 C.
If the error does not occur again, this concerns an operating error no further measures are required.
Perform a recalibration using the diagnosis tool. Following successful calibration, switch the ignition OFF and wait for at least
10 seconds, then start the vehicle.
Check the wiring - in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts from the
TCU to the HCU and from the HCU to the stepping motor.
If the TCU 60 (3Ch) error occurs repeatedly after ignition ON, then replace the HCU.
If the TCU 60 (3Ch) error occurs repeatedly after ignition ON, then replace the stepping motor.
The hydrostatic unit should be replaced if error TCU 60 (3Ch) continues to occur following ignition ON.
Table 213
For TCU pin assignment
20-284
Transmission alarm 61
Description
Hydrostatic unit implausible calibration data
Cause
The calibration data of the hydrostatic unit is recognized as invalid following ignition ON. As an error response, it is no longer possible
to drive.
l
l
l
Correction
A calibration should be performed.
1.
Start the manual calibration process with the diagnosis tool or activate the automatic calibration by engaging the parking lock,
the process may take a few minutes.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. The TCU should be replaced if the error continues to occur.
2.
Transmission alarm 63
Description
CAN Bus error local CAN, faulty communication
Cause
The compatibility test of TCU and VDC is incongruent.
l
l
l
l
20-285
If one of the errors TCU 32 (20h), 33 (21h), or 35 (23h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. If the error does not occur
again, then this concerns an incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
Using the diagnosis tool, read out the software version of the VDC and TCU and ascertain whether they are compatible. A
reprogramming should be performed where necessary.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. If the error continues to
occur, the wiring between TCU and VDC (vehicle wiring; CAN lines) must be checked and where necessary, replaced.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the ignition ON. If the error reoccurs, TCU
and / or VDC should be replaced.
3.
4.
5.
Transmission alarm 64
Description
Speed sensor transmission input - interruption or short-circuit to plus
Cause
The speed sensor has an open circuit or a short-circuit to plus. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Set the
engine speed to 1000 rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only slightly deviates from 1347
rpm, the issue was a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/7 (grey) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/7 (grey) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, switch the ignition ON and start the engine. Unplug the sensor when the engine is running. The
TCU should be replaced if the speed does not change.
Table 214
For TCU pin assignment
20-286
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Set the
engine speed to 1000 rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only slightly deviates from 1347
rpm, the issue was a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/7 (grey) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/7 (grey) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, switch the ignition ON and start the engine. Unplug the sensor when the engine is running. The
TCU should be replaced if the speed does not change.
Table 215
For TCU pin assignment
20-288
Transmission alarm 66
Description
Speed sensor transmission input speed too high
Cause
The transmission input speed is above 3500 rpm (engine speed > 2600 rpm).
l
Correction
The transmission input speed should be reduced.
1.
Transmission alarm 67
Description
Speed sensor transmission input - signal dropout
Cause
The continuity of the speed sensor speed pulses was interrupted for a short period.
l
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the signal dropout should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 64 (40h) or 65 (41h) is also active, the repair of this error should be carried out as a priority.
20-289
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then apply the parking brake, switch the ignition ON, and
start the engine. Set the engine speed to 1000 rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only
slightly deviates from 1347 rpm, the issue was a one-time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/7 (grey) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If the error continues to occur, the sensor should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the shifting drum should be checked for mechanical damage.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Table 216
For TCU pin assignment
Transmission alarm 68
Description
Speed sensor ridge1/2 Interruption or short to plus
Cause
The speed sensor has an open circuit or a short to plus. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then apply the parking brake, switch the ignition ON, and
start the engine and select a direction of travel, in doing so, the vehicle should remain stationary. Using the throttle hand lever,
set the engine speed to 1000 rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only slightly deviates from
700 rpm, this issue was a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
20-290
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/6 (black) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/6 (black) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, switch the ignition ON and start the engine. Unplug the sensor when the engine is running. The
TCU should be replaced if the speed does not change.
20-291
Transmission alarm 69
Description
Speed sensor ridge1/2 Sensor short circuit
Cause
The speed sensor has a short circuit. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then apply the parking brake, switch the ignition ON, and
start the engine and select a direction of travel, in doing so, the vehicle should remain stationary. Using the throttle hand lever,
set the engine speed to 1000 rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only slightly deviates from
700 rpm, this issue was a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
20-292
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/6 (black) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/6 (black) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 k.
If the error continues to occur, switch the ignition ON and start the engine. Unplug the sensor when the engine is running. The
TCU should be replaced if the speed does not change
20-293
Transmission alarm 70
Description
Speed sensor ridge 1/2 speed too high
Cause
The speed of the planetary carrier 1/2 is above 3500 rpm.
l
Correction
The speed of the planetary carrier 1/2 should be reduced.
1.
20-294
Correction
The cause of the signal dropout should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 68 (44h) or 69 (45h) is also active, the repair of this error should be carried out as a priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then apply the parking brake, switch the ignition ON, and
start the engine and select a direction of travel, in doing so, the vehicle should remain stationary. Set the engine speed to 1000
rpm and, using the diagnosis tool, check the sensor value. If this value only slightly deviates from 700 rpm, this issue was a
one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/6 (black) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If the error continues to occur, the sensor should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the shifting drum should be checked for mechanical damage.
20-295
Transmission alarm 72
Description
Speed sensor output 1 Interruption or short to plus
Cause
The speed sensor has an open circuit or a short to plus. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
20-296
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/10 (orange) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/10 (orange) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 k.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-297
Transmission alarm 73
Description
Speed sensor output 1 Sensor short circuit
Cause
The speed sensor has a short circuit. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
20-298
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/10 (orange) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/10 (orange) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-299
Transmission alarm 74
Description
Speed sensor output 1 Speed too high
Cause
The speed of output 1 is above 6000 rpm (approx. 68 km/ (standard version) or 57 km/h (heavy duty version) vehicle speed). As an
error response shift to neutral is performed and the output speed is limited to max. 4500 rpm (for 5 min).
l
Correction
The speed of output 1 should be reduced.
1.
20-300
Correction
The cause of the signal dropout should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If one of the errors TCU 72 (48h) or 73 (49h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/10 (orange) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If the error continues to occur, check the sensor wheel through the opening of the sensor cover for damage and where necessary, replace it.
If the error continues to occur, the sensor should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the shifting drum should be checked for mechanical damage.
20-301
Transmission alarm 76
Description
Speed sensor ridge 3/4 Interruption or short to plus
Cause
The speed sensor has an open circuit or a short to plus. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
20-302
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/8 (brown) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/8 (brown) using an ohmmeter with the ignition switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates greatly
from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-303
Transmission alarm 77
Description
Speed sensor ridge 3/4 Sensor short circuit
Cause
The speed sensor has a short circuit. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required
20-304
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/8 (brown) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/8 (brown) using an ohmmeter with the ignition switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates greatly
from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-305
Transmission alarm 78
Description
Speed sensor ridge 3/4 Speed too high
Cause
The speed of planetary carrier 3/4 is above 6000 rpm.
l
Correction
The speed of the planetary carrier 3/4 should be reduced.
1.
20-306
Correction
The cause of the signal dropout should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If one of the errors TCU 76 (4Ch) or 77 (4Dh) is also active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/8 (brown) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If the error continues to occur, the sensor should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the shifting drum should be checked for mechanical damage.
20-307
Transmission alarm 80
Description
Speed sensor output 2 Interruption or short to plus
Cause
The speed sensor has an open circuit or a short to plus. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures
are required.
20-308
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and checked for faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts on connector A21/9 (green).
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/9 (green) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-309
Transmission alarm 81
Description
Speed sensor output 2 - sensor short circuit
Cause
The speed sensor has a short circuit. As an error response max. traveling speed is reduced.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Carry
out a test drive with constant speed forward and check the values of the speed sensors output 1, output 2 and ridge 3/4 using
the diagnosis tool. If the speed values only differ slightly, this issue is a one time incorrect diagnosis no further measures are
required.
20-310
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and checked for faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts on connector A21/9 (green).
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the sensor resistance on the mating connector to plug connection
A21/9 (green) using an ohmmeter when the ignition is switched OFF. The sensor should be replaced if the value deviates
greatly from 1 kW.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-311
Transmission alarm 82
Description
Speed sensor output 2 - speed too high.
Cause
The speed of output 2 is above 6000 rpm (approx. 68 km/h (standard version) or 57 km/h (heavy duty version) vehicle speed). As an
error response shift to neutral is performed and the output speed is limited to max. 4500 rpm (for 5 min).
l
Correction
The speed of output 2 should be reduced.
1.
20-312
The vehicle is moved too fast (downhill in overrun mode, possibly actuated clutch). The vehicle must be moved with the operating brake at the permitted speed
Transmission alarm 84
Description
Speed sensor transmission input Implausible speed
Cause
Taking the hydrostatic unit position and the engaged clutches into consideration, the measured speeds are not plausible. As an error response a substitute value from another speed information is used. In case of several speed sensor errors the transmission is
switched into neutral.
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the missing plausibility of the speed signals should be located.
1.
If the errors TCU 64 (40h), 65 (41h) or 67 (43h) also occur (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given priority. The errors indicate a false input speed.
If the errors TCU 52 (34h), 53 (35h) or 61 (3Dh) also occur (hydrostatic error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority. The errors indicate a permanent hydrostatic unit defect.
If the error TCU 85 (55h) also occurs, the elimination of this error should be given priority. Delete error. Wait for at least 10
seconds after the ignition has been switched OFF. Switch ignition ON and start the engine. The transmission temperature
should be above 20 C. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was a short-term hydrostatic unit malfunction no further measures are required.
Check the program version and perform a reprogramming where necessary. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was an old
software status no further measures are required.
If the errors 144 (90h), 145 (91h) or 146 (92h) also occur (hydrostatic electronic error), the elimination of these errors should
be given priority. Delete error. Wait for at least 10 seconds after the ignition has been switched OFF. Switch ignition ON and
start the engine. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was a HCU malfunction.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Transmission alarm 85
Description
Speed sensor ridge 1/2 - implausible speed
Cause
Taking the hydrostatic unit position and the engaged clutches into consideration, the measured speeds are not plausible. A value
which is calculated on the basis of other transmission speeds is used as an error response. In case of further speed sensor errors
the transmission is shifted to neutral
l
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the missing plausibility of the speed signals should be located.
20-313
If the errors TCU 68 (44h), 69 (45h) or 71 (47h) occur (electronic errors), the elimination of these errors should be given priority. The errors indicate a false speed of planetary carrier 1/2.
If the errors TCU 52 (34h), 53 (35h) or 61 (3Dh) also occur (hydrostatic error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority. The errors indicate a permanent hydrostatic unit defect.
If the error TCU 84 (54h) also occurs, the elimination of this error should be given priority. Delete error. Wait for at least 10
seconds after the ignition has been switched OFF. Switch ignition ON and start the engine. The transmission temperature
should be above 20 C. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was a short-term hydrostatic unit malfunction no further measures are required.
Check the program version and perform a reprogramming where necessary. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was an old
software status no further measures are required.
If the errors 144 (90h), 145 (91h) or 146 (92h) also occur (hydrostatic electronic error), the elimination of these errors should
be given priority. Delete error. Wait for at least 10 seconds after the ignition has been switched OFF. Switch ignition ON and
start the engine. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was a HCU malfunction.
If error TCU 87 (57h) also occurs, this means that there is a malfunction in a range clutch and the elimination of this should
be given priority. K1 corresponds to TCU 200 (C8h) 205 (CDh); K2 corresponds to TCU 208 (D0h) 213 (D5h); K3 corresponds to TCU 216 (D8h) 221 (DDh); K4 corresponds to TCU 224 (E0h) 229 (E5h)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Transmission alarm 86
Description
Speed sensor output 1 implausible speed
Cause
Taking the hydrostatic unit position and the engaged clutches into consideration, the measured speeds are not plausible. The error
86 (56h) often occurs in conjunction with error 87 (57h). A value which is calculated on the basis of other transmission speeds is used
as an error response. In case of further speed sensor errors the transmission is shifted to neutral.
l
l
Correction
The cause for the missing plausibility of the speed signals should be located
1.
If the errors TCU 72 (48h), 73 (49h), 75 (4Bh), 80 (50h), 81 (51h) or 82 (52h) occur (electric errors nAb1 and nAb2), the elimination of these errors should be given priority. The errors indicate a false input speed.
Check the program version and perform a reprogramming where necessary. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was an old
software status no further measures are required.
If errors TCU 188 (BCh) and 189 (BDh) occur for KV or 196 (C4) - or 197 (C5) occur for KR, this means that there is a malfunction in the direction clutch and the elimination of this should be given priority.
If error TCU 88 (58h) also occurs, this means that there is a defect in the speed sensor of output side 1 or output side 2. The
sensor should be replaced.
2.
3.
4.
Transmission alarm 87
Description
Speed sensor ridge 3/4 Implausible speed
Cause
Taking the hydrostatic unit position and the engaged clutches into consideration, the measured speeds are not plausible. A value
which is calculated on the basis of other transmission speeds is used as an error response. In case of further speed sensor errors
the transmission is shifted to neutral.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the missing plausibility of the speed signals should be located.
1.
2.
If the errors TCU 77 (4Dh), 78 (4Eh) or 79 (4Fh) occur (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
The errors indicate a false speed recording of planetary carrier 3/4.
Check the program version and perform a reprogramming where necessary. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was an old
software status no further measures are required.
20-314
If error TCU 85 (55h) also occurs, this means that there is a malfunction in a range clutch and the elimination of this should
be given priority.
m a) K1 corresponds to TCU 200 (C8h) 205 (CDh).
m b) K2 corresponds to TCU 208 (D0h) 213 (D5h).
m c) K3 corresponds to TCU 216 (D8h) 221 (DDh).
m d) K4 corresponds to TCU 224 (E0h) 229 (E5h).
If error TCU 86 (56h) also occurs in conjunction with 87 (57h), this means that there is a malfunction in one direction clutch
and the elimination of this should be given priority.
m a) KV corresponds to TCU 188 (BCh) und 189 (BDh).
m b) KR corresponds to TCU 196 (C4h) und 197 (C5h).
4.
Transmission alarm 88
Description
Output speed incongruent sense of rotation
Cause
The sense of rotation determined by the output speed sensors does not match the sense of rotation which is stored in the control
unit (TCU).
l
l
l
l
Correction
Calibration is performed automatically when the ignition is switched OFF (after the vehicle has been moved).
1.
2.
3.
Delete error. Ignition ON and move the vehicle. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition
ON.
If the error continues to occur, the output speed sensors must be replaced.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU must be replaced.
20-316
Transmission alarm 89
Description
Speed sensor transmission input - implausible vehicle engine speed signal
Cause
Taking the transmission input speed and the transmission ratio into consideration, the engine speed is not plausible.
l
l
l
Correction
The cause for the missing plausibility of the speed signals should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If one of the errors TCU 64 (40h), 65 (41h) or 67 (43h) is also active (electric error), the elimination of this error should be
given priority.
If error TCU 84 (54h) is also active, the elimination of this error should be given priority.
If engine control unit and VDC errors are also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Check the CAN bus connection between the vehicle engine and the VDC. If the error ceases to occur, the issue was a CAN
bus connection malfunction no further measures are required.
20-317
The vehicle engine speed sensor has to be replaced should the error continue to occur.
Transmission alarm 90
Description
Vehicle accelerates from standstill despite absence of VDC requirement
Cause
A speed is recorded on the transmission output when the vehicle is under standstill control, despite the absence of VDC requirement.
The transmission is shifted to neutral in connection with an actuation of the clutch or the brake, as an error response. The direction
of travel can no longer be preselected.
l
l
l
l
l
Correction
The cause of the false hydrostatic unit activation should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the speed sensor errors TCU 64 (40h), 65 (41h), 68 (44h), 69 (45h) or 85 (55h) are also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If the hydrostatic unit errors TCU 144 (90h), 145 (91h), 146 (92h), 170 (AAh) or 171 (ABh) are also active, the correction of
these errors should be given priority.
Perform a calibration of the hydrostatic unit using the diagnosis tool. If the error TCU 60 (3Ch) (loss of step) also occurs, this
error should be eliminated.
Disassemble the HCU and check the wiring in particular with regard to defective plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If the error occurs in a driving situation with large external forces (e.g. use of a cable winch), this can also have the consequence that the standstill control is left and that this error is activated. This is an overload of the transmission and must be
prevented.
20-318
The hydrostatic unit has to be replaced should the error continue to occur.
Faulty wiring.
Sensor has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Perform
a test journey. If the error does not reoccur, no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/4 (green) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts. Disassemble the complete wiring harness between A21/4 and the passage into
the interior of the transmission and check for incorrect plug connections and corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If no error is detected, disassemble the cartridge and check the inner wiring (faulty plug connections as well as corroded or
damaged plug contacts).
If no error is detected in the wiring, replace the sensor (the high pressure sensor 1 is connected to the short cable).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-319
Faulty wiring.
Sensor has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Perform
a test journey. If the error does not reoccur, no further measures are required.
20-320
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/4 (green) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts. Disassemble the complete wiring harness between A21/4 and the passage into
the interior of the transmission and check for incorrect plug connections and corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If no error is detected, disassemble the cartridge and check the inner wiring (faulty plug connections as well as corroded or
damaged plug contacts).
If no error is detected in the wiring, replace the sensor (the high pressure sensor 1 is connected to the short cable).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
3.
4.
5.
Faulty wiring.
Sensor has an internal defect.
20-321
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Perform
a test journey. If the error does not reoccur, no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/4 (green) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts. Disassemble the complete wiring harness between A21/4 and the passage into
the interior of the transmission and check for incorrect plug connections and corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If no error is detected, disassemble the cartridge and check the inner wiring (faulty plug connections as well as corroded or
damaged plug contacts).
If no error is detected in the wiring, replace the sensor (the high pressure sensor 2 is connected to the long cable).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-322
Faulty wiring.
Sensor has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Correction
The cause of the incorrect signal must be located. If the error is reset automatically, then this is an error that occurs sporadically.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds, then switch the ignition ON, and start the engine. Perform
a test journey. If the error does not reoccur, no further measures are required.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be removed and connector A21/4 (green) checked for faulty plug connections
such as corroded or damaged plug contacts. Disassemble the complete wiring harness between A21/4 and the passage into
the interior of the transmission and check for incorrect plug connections and corroded or damaged plug contacts.
If no error is detected, disassemble the cartridge and check the inner wiring (faulty plug connections as well as corroded or
damaged plug contacts).
If no error is detected in the wiring, replace the sensor (the high pressure sensor 2 is connected to the long cable).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-323
Transmission alarm 96
Description
Input A0-S (BOC) - voltage too high
Cause
The applied voltage on the input exceeds the maximum permissible value.
l
l
l
Faulty wiring.
TCU has an internal defect.
Overvoltage on the vehicle side.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
On the TCU, check the wiring of connector A21/1 in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check voltage at the input (Pin 5). Term.15 - voltage may not be considerably exceeded.
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-324
Transmission alarm 97
Description
Input A0-S (BOC) - incorrect signal
Cause
The applied voltage value on the input is outside the valid range.
l
l
Faulty wiring.
TCU has an internal defect.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
On the TCU, check the wiring of connector A21/1 in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts.
Check voltage at the input (Pin5).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-325
Transmission alarm 98
Description
BOC plausibility error between VDC and TCU
Cause
Der The signal comparison between VDC and TCU results in an implausible combination.
l
l
l
l
Faulty wiring.
Incompatible software combination.
TCU has an internal defect.
VDC has an internal defect.
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
20-326
Transmission alarm 99
Description
Input A0. + (analog limp home or BOC input) - voltage too low
Cause
The applied voltage on the input exceeds the minimum permissible value.
l
l
l
Faulty wiring.
Supply on the vehicle side is insufficient.
TCU has an internal defect.
Correction
1.
2.
On the TCU, check the wiring of connector A21/1 in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or
damaged plug contacts. Check the power supply of the input (BOC).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
20-327
Correction
The cause of the false signal voltage value on the sensor should be located
1.
Check the correct setting of the sensor type. Use the service tool to set the correct pressure sensor type.
20-328
Assemble the adapter for pressure sensors between the lubrication pressure sensor and the wiring harness and, when the
ignition is switched ON, measure the voltage between signal and ground. If the measured voltage is greater than 4.5 V or
4.7 V (depending on the used sensor type), it must be checked whether there is a defective wiring harness (see next point);
otherwise replace the lubrication pressure sensor.
If the measured voltage is greater than 4.5 V or 4.75 V (depending on the used sensor type), connector A21/2 is to be unplugged from the TCU and the voltage is to be measured again on the adapter. The transmission-internal wiring harness
should be replaced if the voltage value remains unchanged (short-circuit in the wiring harness).
If the error continues to occur, the TCU should be replaced.
3.
4.
Correction
The cause of the drop in lubrication pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Correction
The cause of the drop in lubrication pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
2.
20-329
Connect a manometer to the designated lubrication pressure measuring connection and check the lubrication pressure
when the engine is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using
the diagnosis tool. The lubrication pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by
more than 0.5 bar.
Check the shifting drum, the oil cooler, oil pipes as well as the rear axle lubrication for leakages.
Check the lubrication pressure relief valves.
Replace the lubrication pressure pump.
4.
5.
6.
Correction
The cause of the false signal voltage value on the sensor should be located.
1.
Assemble the adapter for pressure sensors between the lubrication pressure sensor and the wiring harness and, when the
ignition is switched ON, measure the voltage between supply voltage and ground using the voltmeter. If the voltage is below 5
V, the plug connection is to be unplugged from the lubrication pressure sensor and the voltage should be measured. If the voltage remains below 5 V, the plug connection should also be unplugged from the system pressure sensor. The system pressure
sensor should be replaced if the voltage is now greater than or equal to 5 V (short circuit system pressure sensor). Otherwise,
the transmission-internal wiring harness should be replaced.
Assemble the adapter for pressure sensors between the lubrication pressure sensor and the wiring harness and, when the
ignition is switched ON, measure the voltage between signal and ground using the voltmeter. If the voltage is below 0.5 V or
0.25 V (depending on the used sensor type), the lubrication pressure sensor should be replaced.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
2.
3.
Correction
The cause of the lubrication pressure increase should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect a manometer to the designated lubrication pressure measuring connection and check the lubrication pressure
when the engine is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using
the diagnosis tool. The lubrication pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by
more than 0.5 bar.
Use the diagnosis tool to check the set sensor type.
Inspection of the lubrication pressure relief valves.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum, the oil cooler as well as the rear axle lubrication, if necessary,
should be performed.
20-330
Correction
The cause of the false signal voltage value on the sensor should be located
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the correct setting of the sensor type. Use the service tool to set the correct pressure sensor type.
Assemble the adapter for pressure sensors between the system pressure sensor and the wiring harness and, when the ignition is switched ON, measure the voltage between signal and ground using a voltmeter. If the measured voltage is greater
than 4.5 V or 4.75 V (depending on the used sensor type), check for a defective wiring harness (see next point), otherwise the
system pressure sensor should be replaced.
If the measured voltage is greater than 4.5 V or 4.75 V (depending on the used sensor type), connector A21/2 is to be unplugged from the TCU and the voltage is to be measured again on the adapter. The transmission-internal wiring harness
should be replaced if the voltage value remains unchanged.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-331
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located. If the error is automatically reset, this
means that it was possible to increase the system pressure to at least 22 bar.
1.
20-332
4.
5.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located. If the error is automatically reset, this
means that it was possible to increase the system pressure to at least 29 bar via the increased engine speed.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h) (pSys<20bar) or 118 (76h) (pSys<25bar) is also active, the elimination of this error should
be given priority.
Transmission oil level check.
Check suction filter and pressure filter.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the system pressure with the
engine running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis
tool. The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
Check the suction filter.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Correction
The error is activated if a voltage value below the minimum value is applied to the TCU input
1.
2.
3.
Assemble the adapter for pressure sensors between the system pressure sensor and the wiring harness and, when the ignition is switched ON, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 2 using the voltmeter (supply voltage of system and lubrication
pressure sensor). If the voltage is below 5 V, the plug connection is to be unplugged from the system pressure sensor and
the voltage should be measured. If the voltage remains below 5 V, the plug connection should also be unplugged from the
lubrication pressure sensor. The lubrication pressure sensor should be replaced if the voltage is now greater than or equal to
5 V. Otherwise, the transmission-internal wiring harness should be replaced.
The voltage between pins 1 and 3 should be measured on the system pressure sensor (pressure sensor signal). The voltage
should amount to approx. 0.5 V when the ignition is ON but the engine is off, otherwise the system pressure sensor should
be replaced.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-333
Correction
The cause of the system pressure increase should be located.
1.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine
is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool.
The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
20-334
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), or 118 (76h) is also active (system pressure too low), the elimination of this error
should be given priority.
Check whether an error between TCU 130 (82h) and 135 (87h) is also active; the treatment of this error should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the system pressure when the
engine is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool. The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Check the pressure accumulator preload pressure.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 25 clutch changes occur (preferably shift several times
through the complete driving range forward and reverse). If the error does not occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located. If the error is automatically reset, this
means that it was possible to increase the system pressure to at least 27 bar via the increased engine speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If the error TCU 113 (71 h) also occurs (system pressure < 20bar), the elimination of this error should be given priority.
Transmission oil level check.
Check suction filter and pressure filter.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine
is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool.
The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Check the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages.
Replace the system pressure pump.
20-335
Correction
The cause of the false sensor signal should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check the plug connection on the temperature sensor for a defective connection, in particular with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the sensor-sided connector
using an ohmmeter when the sensor is unplugged. The resistance value should amount to approx. 1 k or, on older vehicles
(production date prior to 06/2007) approx. 2 k (at approx. 23C). The sensor should be replaced in the event of damage or
significant resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/2 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection, in particular also
with regard to faulty plug connections such as corroded or damaged plug contacts.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the engine on. The TCU has to be replaced
should the error occur again.
The temperature sensor and the transmission-internal wiring harness should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
20-336
Correction
The cause of the increased heat entry in the transmission should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 120 (78h) or 123 (7Bh) is also active (temperature sensor error), the elimination of this error should
be given priority.
Inspect the transmission oil cooler for contamination and damage.
Check the connection lines from the transmission to the transmission oil cooler for damage.
20-337
Correction
The cause of the increased heat entry in the transmission should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 120 (78h) or 123 (7Bh) is also active (temperature sensor error), the elimination of this error should
be given priority.
Inspect the transmission oil cooler for contamination and damage.
Check the connection lines from the transmission to the transmission oil cooler for damage.
Check the transmission temperature controller.
Check the brake setting of the rear axle.
If the error occurs following a programming of the TCU, check the parameterization of the temperature sensor using the diagnosis tool and correct it where necessary.
Check the transmission oil temperature using the diagnosis tool. The temperature sensor should be replaced if the measured
oil temperature does not drop below 95 C when the vehicle is idling, even after an extended period of time.
Check the cooler bypass valve.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the transaxle should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Correction
The cause of the false sensor signal should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the sensor resistance. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the sensor-sided connector using an ohmmeter when the sensor is unplugged. The resistance value should amount to approx. 1 kW 100 W or, on
older vehicles (production date before 06/2007) approx. 2 kW (at approx. 23C). The sensor should be replaced in the event
of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/2 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection and damage.
Delete error. Once the ignition is OFF, wait for at least 10 seconds and then switch the engine on. The TCU has to be replaced
should the error occur again.
The temperature sensor and the transmission-internal wiring harness should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
20-338
Correction
The activation of the error shows an operation of the vehicle in low outside temperatures
1.
The full operation of the vehicle is automatically permitted once a transmission oil temperature of -5 C is reached, no further
measures are required (up to 0C engine speed limitations are still active).
20-339
If the cold start condition is not reset despite the warm-up period of the vehicle, first check the transmission temperature
controller. If no measure is effective check the transmission oil temperature using the diagnosis tool. The temperature sensor
should be replaced if the measured oil temperature does not rise above -5 C during the operation of the vehicle, even after
an extended period of time.
Correction
The cause for the lack of increase in the transmission oil temperature should be located.
1.
2.
Correction
The activation of the error shows an operation of the vehicle in low outside temperatures.
1.
Restricted driving operation is possible once a transmission oil temperature of -25 C is reached. The full operation of the
vehicle is automatically permitted once a transmission oil temperature of -5 C is reached, no further measures are required.
If the error occurs following a programming of the TCU, check the parameterization of the temperature sensor using the diagnosis tool and correct it where necessary.
Check the transmission temperature controller if the cold start condition is not reset despite the warm-up period of the vehicle.
Check the transmission oil temperature using the diagnosis tool if the cold start condition is not reset despite the warm-up
period of the vehicle. The temperature sensor should be replaced if the measured oil temperature does not rise above -5 C
during the operation of the vehicle, even after an extended period of time.
2.
3.
4.
20-340
If one of the errors TCU 120 (78h) or 123 (7Bh) is also active (temperature sensor error), the elimination of this error should
be given priority.
Inspect the transmission oil cooler for contamination and damage.
Check the connection lines from the transmission to the transmission oil cooler for damage.
Check the transmission temperature controller.
Check the brake setting of the rear axle.
If the error occurs following a programming of the TCU, check the parameterization of the temperature sensor using the diagnosis tool and correct it where necessary.
Check the transmission oil temperature using the diagnosis tool. The temperature sensor should be replaced if the measured
oil temperature does not drop below 90 C when the vehicle is idling, even after an extended period of time.
Check the cooler bypass valve.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the transaxle should be performed.
20-341
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the system pressure when the
engine is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool. The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from K1 to K2 occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine
is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool.
The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from K1 to K2 occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
20-342
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine
is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool.
The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from K2 to K3 occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the system pressure when the
engine is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool. The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from K3 to K4 occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure with the engine
running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool. The
system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from KV to KB occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measure is effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
20-343
Correction
The cause of the drop in system pressure or the insufficient oil feed rate should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 113 (71h), 114 (72h), 118 (76h) (system pressure too low) or 117 (75h) (system pressure drops during
gear changes) is active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated system pressure measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine
is running. Compare the pressure measurement value with the manometer with the value displayed using the diagnosis tool.
The system pressure sensor should be replaced if the determined values deviate from each other by more than 1 bar.
Delete error and perform a test run in such a manner that at least 15 clutch changes from KV to KB occur. If the error does not
occur, the issue may be a short-term malfunction in the oil circuit. No further measure is necessary in this case.
The system pressure pump must be replaced.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit and the shifting drum for leakages should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
1.
Check the condition of the pressure filter. It is essential that the filter is replaced if the service interval has been reached or
exceeded. Changing the suction filter and the pressure filter together is recommended.
If unusual metallic parts are found in the filter that indicate a defect to the transaxle, the transaxle should be inspected for
damage.
The maintenance switch should be replaced if the oil filter exchange is ineffective.
The entire filter head should be replaced if no measure is effective.
2.
3.
4.
Correction
The cause of the faulty HCU response signal should be located.
1.
Dismantle the HCU and check the plug connection of the HCU for a defective connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
20-344
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connections A21/4 and A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose,
bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
Ensure that plug connection A21/5 is reassembled. Using a voltmeter, measure the voltage between pins 6 and 7 on connector
A23 with the ignition ON. The transmission-internal wiring should be checked and, where necessary, replaced if the measured
voltage is more than 1 V below the vehicle power supply.
Start the engine and, with the aid of the diagnosis tool, ascertain the status of the HCU response signal. The HCU should be
replaced if the measured value is below 20% on a sustained basis.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
20-345
20-346
Correction
The cause of the incorrect HCU activation should be located
1.
Start the engine and, with the aid of the diagnosis tool, ascertain the status of the HCU response signal. If the measured value
is in the range of 35% and 50% on a sustained basis, the issue was a short-term HCU malfunction. If the error does not occur
again during a test drive, no further measures are required.
20-347
Dismantle the HCU and check the plug connection of the HCU for a defective connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connections A21/4 and A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose,
bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
Ensure that plug connection A21/5 is reassembled. Using a voltmeter, measure the voltage between pins 6 and 7 on connector
A23 with the ignition ON. The transmission-internal wiring should be checked and, where necessary, replaced if the measured
voltage is more than 1 V below the vehicle power supply.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
20-348
20-349
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 144 (90h) or 145 (91h) is also active, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Short-term malfunctions may occur, especially following a long service life of the vehicle at low exterior temperatures or following a transmission oil change. Therefore, perform three calibrations of the hydrostatic unit in succession using the diagnosis
tool. If the calibrations are successfully completed and no error occurs during a mandatory subsequent test drive, no further
measures are required.
Dismantle the HCU and check the plug connection of the HCU for a defective connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
20-350
The stepping motor has to be replaced and the fork on the hydrostatic unit needs to be checked for damage should the error
occur again. Furthermore, the wiring running from the HCU to the stepping motor should be checked for damage, especially
bent, corroded, or pushed-back pins.
20-351
20-352
Correction
The activation of the error shows that multiple attempts were required for an initialization. This is not a functional impairment of the
transmission, no measures are required
20-353
Correction
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From time to time, the stepping motor is unable to move the swash plate of the hydrostatic unit into the activated position. If
the error does not occur again during a test drive or following a new start, no further measures are required.
If the error occurs after a (sluggish) vehicle start, the vehicle battery may not be charged sufficiently. Recharge the battery to
ensure that it is sufficiently charged.
Short-term malfunctions may occur, especially following a long service life of the vehicle or following a transmission oil change.
Therefore, perform three calibrations of the hydrostatic unit in succession using the diagnosis tool. If the calibrations are successfully completed and no error occurs during a mandatory subsequent test drive, no further measures are required.
The stepping motor has to be replaced and the fork on the hydrostatic unit needs to be checked for damage should the error
occur again.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the hydrostatic unit should be performed.
20-354
Not yet any valid calibration data in the TCU (e.g. after TCU exchange or faulty reprogramming of the TCU).
An electric error of the HP sensors was detected (0x5C; 0x5D; 0x5E; 0x5F).
Implausible values of both HP sensors have been detected (error 0xA1; both sensors show pressures> pSys).
Implausible values between the measured high pressure values and the estimated high pressures have been detected.
The automatic high pressure sensor calibration has determined a new preceding sign (e.g. after disassembly of the sensors).
20-355
5.
Check the error memory for electric errors of the high pressure sensors (0x5C; 0x5D; 0x5E; 0x5F). If at least one of these
errors can be found in the error memory, the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
If an error occurred after replacing the TCU / reprogramming the TCU, calibration of the high pressure sensor should be carried out (see below).
If an error occurred after disassembly of the HP sensors, calibration of the high pressure sensor should be carried out (see
below).
The high pressure sensor calibration is carried out as follows:
m Start engine and bring direction of travel lever / transmission into N, engage parking lock / parking brake.
m Put engine speed in idle position and wait approx. 2 min.
m Preselect direction of travel (V or R).
m Switch ignition OFF and wait approx. 10 s.
After that error 0xAO should no longer occur.
If the error reoccurs despite successful calibration, check the high pressure sensors using the diagnosis tool (in particular for
implausible values). Exchange the high pressure sensors where necessary.
20-356
High pressure sensors should be checked using the diagnosis tool. If a high pressure sensor has values considerably higher
than 5 bar even when the engine is not running, this sensor must be exchanged.
During normal operation only one high pressure sensor may have values higher than the system pressure. With a range shift
of the transmission the high pressure side in the hydrostatic unit is also changed. Thanks to this information the defective high
pressure sensor can be detected.
20-357
Correction
The cause of the incorrect HCU supply should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dismantle the HCU and check the plug connection of the HCU for a defective connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connections A21/4 and A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose,
bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
Ensure that plug connectors A21/4 and A21/5 are disconnected from the TCU. Using a voltmeter, measure the voltage between pins 6 and 7 on connector A23 whilst the ignition is ON. The transmission-internal wiring must be checked for a short to
plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
The TCU and/or the HCU should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
20-358
Correction
The cause of the incorrect HCU supply should be located.
1.
2.
Dismantle the HCU and check the plug connection of the HCU for a defective connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connections A21/4 and A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose,
bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
20-359
Ensure that plug connectors A21/4 and A21/5 are connected to the TCU. Using a voltmeter, measure the voltage between
pins 6 and 7 on connector A23 when the ignition is ON. The transmission-internal wiring should be checked for a short circuit
or a short to ground and, where necessary, replaced if the measured voltage is more than 1 V below the vehicle power supply.
The TCU and/or the HCU should be replaced if no measure is effective on a sustained basis.
4.
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
The solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
The transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
20-360
Check the plug connection on the four wheel drive control solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 W. The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-361
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 178 (B2) or 179 (B3) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the four wheel valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU must be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-362
20-363
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the four wheel drive control solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-364
Ensure that plug connection A21/5 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-365
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the four wheel drive control solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
20-366
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-367
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch forward solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
20-368
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 (see) as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-369
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 186 (BAh) or 187 (BBh) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-370
20-371
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch forward solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-372
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-373
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch forward solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
20-374
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-375
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 184 (B8h) to 187 (BBh) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-376
3.
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit errors) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair. Dismantle the connector
from the direction clutch forward solenoid valve. Connect a manometer to the designated KV measuring connection and
check the pressure with the engine running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring
point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that
belonging to clutch forward - for mechanical damage should be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch KV for mechanical damage.
20-377
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 184 (B8h) to 187 (BBh) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-378
Assemble a manometer on the designated KV measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running
(selected direction of travel is forward) . The solenoid valve direction clutch forward should be replaced if no pressure is measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutch in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch forward - for leakages
should be performed.
20-379
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 184 (B8h) to 187 (BBh) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors is given priority.
Replace the direction clutch forward solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch forward - for leakages
should be performed.
20-380
20-381
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch reverse solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
20-382
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-383
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 194 (C2h) or 195 (C3h) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-384
20-385
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch reverse solenoid valve (see installation drawing solenoid valve clutch reverse) for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage
Dismantle the TCU (see installation drawing TCU) and check plug connections A21/3 (see TCU pin assignment) as well as the
wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
20-386
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-387
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the direction clutch reverse solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded
contacts) and damage.
20-388
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 (see) as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-389
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 192 (C0h) to 195 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-390
3.
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit errors) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair. Dismantle the connector
from the direction clutch reverse solenoid valve. Assemble a manometer on the designated KR measuring connection and
check the pressure when the engine is running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutch in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that
belonging to clutch reverse - for mechanical damage should be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch KR for mechanical damage
20-391
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 192 (C0h) to 195 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-392
Assemble a manometer on the designated KR measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running
(the selected direction of travel is reverse). The solenoid valve direction clutch reverse should be replaced if no pressure is
measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch reverse - for leakages
should be performed.
20-393
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
If one of the errors TCU 192 (C0h) to 195 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Replace the direction clutch reverse solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
20-394
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch reverse - for leakages
should be performed.
20-395
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 1 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
20-396
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-397
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 202 (CAh) or 203 (CBh) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-398
20-399
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 1 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 (see) as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
20-400
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-401
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 1 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
20-402
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-403
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 200 (C8h) to 203 (CBh) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-404
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit error) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair. Dismantle the connector
from the range clutch 1 solenoid valve. Assemble a manometer on the designated K1 measuring connection and check the
pressure when the engine is running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring point.
Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 1 - for mechanical damage must be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch K1 for mechanical damage.
3.
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 200 (C8h) to 203 (CBh) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Assemble a manometer on the designated K1 measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running
(the selected direction of travel is forward or reverse). The solenoid valve range clutch 1 should be replaced if no pressure is
measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 1 - for leakages must be
performed.
20-405
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 200 (C8h) to 203 (CBh) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Replace range clutch 1 solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 1 - for leakages must be
performed.
20-406
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 2 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-407
20-408
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 210 (D2h) or 211 (D3h) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-409
20-410
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 2 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-411
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-412
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 2 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
20-413
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-414
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 208 (C0h) to 211 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-415
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit error) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair! Disassemble the connector from the range clutch 2 solenoid valve. Connect a manometer to the designated K2 measuring connection and check
the pressure when the engine is running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring
point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that
belonging to clutch 2 - for mechanical damage should be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch K2 for mechanical damage.
3.
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 208 (C0h) to 211 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Connect a manometer to the designated K2 measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running (driving forward in the range K2). The solenoid valve range clutch 2 should be replaced if no pressure is measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 2 - for leakages should
be performed.
20-416
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 208 (C0h) to 211 (C3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Replace range clutch 2 solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 2 - for leakages should
be performed.
20-417
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 3 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-418
20-419
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 218 (DAh) or 219 (DBh) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU must be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-420
20-421
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 3 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-422
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-423
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 3 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
20-424
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-425
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 216 (D8h) to 219 (DBh) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-426
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit error) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair. Dismantle the connector
from the range clutch 3 solenoid valve. Assemble a manometer on the designated K3 measuring connection and check the
pressure when the engine is running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring point.
Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 3 - for mechanical damage should be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch K3 for mechanical damage.
3.
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 216 (D8h) to 219 (DBh) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Connect a manometer to the designated K3 measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running (driving forward in the range K3). The solenoid valve range clutch 3 should be replaced if no pressure is measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 3 - for leakages should
be performed.
20-427
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 216 (D8h) to 219 (DBh) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Replace range clutch 3 solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 3 - for leakages should
be performed.
20-428
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
Transmission-internal wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 4 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5. The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-429
20-430
Correction
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 226 (E2h) or 227 (E3h) is also active (short to plus / short to ground), the elimination of these errors
should be given priority.
Check the wiring of the solenoid valve to the TCU for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and damage.
The TCU should be replaced if no measure is effective.
20-431
20-432
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 4 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-433
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-434
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the range clutch 4 solenoid valve for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts) and
damage.
20-435
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/3 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-436
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
If one of the errors TCU 224 (E0h) to 227 (E3h) is also active (electric error), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
20-437
Keep in mind that additional TCU errors (line open circuit error) occur in the following step due to the disassembly of the connectors; these are not relevant with regard to troubleshooting and should be deleted following repair! Dismantle the connector
from the range clutch 4 solenoid valve. Assemble a manometer on the designated K4 measuring connection and check the
pressure with the engine running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if pressure is measured on the measuring point.
Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind. An inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 4 - for mechanical damage should be performed.
If no pressure is measurable check clutch K4 for mechanical damage.
3.
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 224 (E0h) to 227 (E3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Connect a manometer to the designated K4 measuring connection and check the pressure when the engine is running (driving forward in the range K4). The solenoid valve range clutch 4 should be replaced if no pressure is measured on the measuring point. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 4 - for leakages must be
performed.
20-438
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
If one of the errors TCU 224 (E0h) to 227 (E3h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given
priority.
Replace range clutch 4 solenoid valve. Keep possible consequential damage to the dog clutches in mind.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the shifting drum - particularly that belonging to clutch 4 - for leakages must be
performed
20-439
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
The wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the engagement of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-440
20-441
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
The wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for brake oil cooling for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
20-442
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 8.0 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
3.
4.
20-443
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the engagement of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-444
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve of brake cooling for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or corroded contacts)
and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-445
Ensure that plug connector A21/3 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
4.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
20-446
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the engagement of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-447
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the engagement of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent,
or corroded contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
20-448
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
4.
Correction
The cause of the faulty clutch control should be located.
20-449
If one of the errors TCU 232 (E8h), 234 (EAh), 235 (EBh) or 240 (F0h) is also active (electric error PS ON), the elimination
of these errors should be given priority.
Check the parking lock emergency release, it should be fully released.
Assemble a manometer on the designated PSU measuring connection and check the pressure during a parking lock engagement process when the engine is running. The solenoid valve should be replaced if no pressure is measured on the
measuring point at any time.
Assemble a manometer on the designated PSA measuring connection and check the pressure during a parking lock engagement process when the engine is running. Do not apply any pressure during the engagement process and afterwards. If
this is not the case, replace the solenoid valve PSA.
If no measures are effective, an inspection of the parking lock for mechanical damage should be performed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Correction
1.
If one of the errors TCU 232 (E8h), 234 (EAh), 235 (EBh), 236 (ECh) or 240 (F0h) is also active (electric errors), the elimination of these errors should be given priority.
Check the parking lock emergency release, it should be fully released.
If the error occurs when the vehicle was repeatedly exposed to jerks with engaged parking lock, no further measures are
necessary.
An inspection of the parking lock for mechanical damage should be performed should the error continue to occur.
2.
3.
4.
The plug connection belonging to the solenoid valve on the TCU is loose or has a poor contact.
Solenoid valve has an internal defect.
TCU has an internal defect.
The wiring is damaged or interrupted.
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the release of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 20 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-450
20-451
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the release of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
20-452
Ensure that plug connectors A21/5 is disconnected from the TCU. With the ignition switched ON, use a voltmeter to measure
the voltage between both pins on the solenoid valve connector on the wiring harness side. The transmission-internal wiring
must be checked for a short to plus and, where necessary, replaced if voltage is applied between the pins.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-453
Correction
The cause of the faulty valve control should be located.
1.
2.
Check the plug connection on the solenoid valve for the release of the parking lock for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
Check the resistance of the solenoid valve. For this purpose, determine the resistance between the two pins on the valvesided connector using an ohmmeter with the solenoid valve unplugged. At 25 C, the resistance value should approximately
amount to 2.5 . The solenoid valve should be replaced in the event of damage or resistance value deviations.
20-454
Dismantle the TCU and check plug connection A21/5 as well as the wiring harness for a faulty connection (loose, bent, or
corroded contacts) and damage.
With the solenoid valve connected, delete the error, switch the ignition OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then start the engine. The TCU has to be replaced should the error occur again.
20-455
20-456
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Signal
CAN_H1
CAN_L1
31
TEST
A0.+
A0.S
A0.
ER
CAN_G1
GND
30
30
15
EV
ISO K
LED
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Table 218
A21/2
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Signal
CAN_L1
CAN_G1
TEMP+
SD.+
OD.S
SD.S
SD.
OD.
GND
TEMP
OD.+
CAN_H1
n.c.
n.c.
Sensor transmission oil temperature
Vers. + sensor system pressure
Signal sensor lubrication pressure
Signal sensor system pressure
Vers. sensor System pressure
Vers. sensor lubrication pressure
n.c.
Sensor Transmission oil temperature
Vers. + sensor lubrication pressure
n.c.
Table 219
A21/3
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Signal
KR+
KV+
K4+
K3+
K2+
K1+
K1
K2
K3
K4
KV
KR
Use
Mod.
20-457
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Signal
HP2.+
SF
DF
HP2.S
HP1.S
HP1.+
HP1.
HP2.
DF GND
SF GND
HYDIST
HYDSOLL
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Use
Mod.
Supply HP sensor 2
n.c.
Maintenance switch Pressure filter
Signal HP sensor 2
Signal HP sensor 1
Supply HP sensor 1
Ground HP sensor 1
Ground HP sensor 2
Maintenance switch pressure filter
n.c.
Hydrostatic unit actual position
Hydrostatic unit nominal position
Table 221
A21/5
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Signal
HYD
HYD+
HYDV+
PSE+
PSA+
KA+
KA
GND
HYDV
MTSR
MRST
SCLK
Table 222
A21/6
Pin no.
1
2
Signal
DZST1.+
DZST1.
Speed ridge 1
Speed ridge 1
Table 223
A21/7
Pin no.
1
2
Signal
DZMOZ.+
DZMOT.
Speed engine
Speed engine
Table 224
A21/8
Pin no.
1
2
Signal
DZS23.+
DZS23.
Table 225
A21/9
Pin no.
1
2
Signal
DZAB2.+
DZAB2.
Speed output 2
Speed output 2
Table 226
A21/10
20-458
Pin no.
1
2
Signal
DZAB1.+
DZAB1.
Speed output 1
Speed output 1
A21/2
A21/6
A21/4
A21/7
A21/8
A21/10
A21/9
12
12
gruen
grau
grau
braun
1 12
1 12
6.
6.
braun
schwarz
schwarz
6.
6.
1
A21/1
gruen
A21/3
A21/5
Fig. 542
Table 227
Cod. ART
Spn
Instrument panel
display error
Severity
Component
Fault
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
1008
1009
1010
Medium
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
20-459
Instrument panel
display error
Severity
Component
Fault
1011
1012
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
1013
1014
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
1015
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
1016
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Medium
Low
Low
Medium
Medium
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Low
Low
Low
Medium
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
Low
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Instrument panel
display error
Severity
Component
Fault
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
Digital Spare
Table 228
Cod. ART
Spn
1030
1031
1032
1033
Instrument panel
display error
Table 229
Cod. ART
Spn
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
Instrument panel
display error
Table 230
Cod. ART
Spn
1043
1044
1045
Instrument panel
display error
Mini MMI
Table 231
Cod. ART
Spn
1046
20-460
1047
1048
Instrument panel
display error
Severity
Component
Fault
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
Table 232
Cod. ART
Spn
Instrument panel
display error
1049
1050
1051
1052
1018
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
Medium
Medium
Medium
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Medium
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
1064
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
1065
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
1066
1067
1068
Low
Low
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
1069
Low
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
Low
-
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
0.019.2557.4/XX
Severity
Component
Fault
Low
Medium
Medium
Medium
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
0.019.2557.4/XX
EEPROM failure
CAN Line 1 (Vehicle CAN) failure
CAN Line 2 (Auxiliary CAN) failure
CAN Line 3 (Internal CAN: Power
Command Mini MMI connection) failure
Analog Spare
Table 233
Cod. ART
Spn
1070
1071
1072
1074
Instrument panel
display error
Table 234
Cod. ART
Spn
1074
Instrument panel
display error
CAN + EEPROM
Table 235
Cod. ART
Spn
1075
1076
1077
1078
Instrument panel
display error
20-461
Cod. ART
Spn
Fmi
Severity
Fault
Controls
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
21
Low
22
Low
23
24
25
26
31
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
32
Low
41
42
Medium
Medium
43
81
Medium
Medium
82
83
Medium
Medium
No receive message 1
No receive message 2
Implausible receive message 1
Implausible receive message 2
Potentiometer/PWM fault
EEPROM inconsistent
No faults, but valve had switched off for >
1...4s and can only switch itself back on when
setpoint = neutral has been received
Undervoltage < customer value (optional shutdown)
Overvoltage > customer value (optional shutdown)
Spool deflection too short (optional shutdown)
Spool deflection excessive
Open centre position not reached
Manual operation
Undervoltage < 8V, valve shuts off output
stage
Overvoltage 36...45V, valve shuts off output
stage
High overvoltage ( > approx. 45V )
Output stage fault (output stage for pilot solenoid valve)
Postion transducer fault
Valve spool cannot be brought back to neutral
position
Valve spool not in neutral when switched on
Checksum error
Link to system
ART code
Spn
Fmi
51
12
63
158
20-462
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 51
FMI 12
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 63
FMI 2
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 158
FMI 2
Component
Fault
Link to system
Battery
510
511
13
522
531
11
12
13
540
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 510
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 511
FMI 13
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 531
FMI 13
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 540
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 540
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
EPB device
Medium
EPB device
Low
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
Medium
Medium
shorting
40-474
40-309
to 40-315
20-463
541
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
Link to system
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 541
FMI 3
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 541
FMI 4
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
shorting
to 40-315
Table 238
ART code
Spn
Fmi
550
11
12
20-464
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 550
FMI 12
Fault
Link to system
40-474
40-309
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
551
11
12
552
11
12
560
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 551
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 522
FMI 12
HLHP
alarm
SPN 560
FMI -
Component
Fault
Link to system
40-474
40-309
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
40-474
40-309
Medium
[LNK]
Medium
Medium
Medium
[LNK]
Medium
[LNK]
Medium
[LNK]
Medium
[LNK]
20-465
561
12
562
600
601
12
20-466
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 561
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 562
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 562
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 600
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 600
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 601
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 601
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 601
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
shorting
shorting
shorting
to 40-125
to 40-315
to 40-315
40-315
602
11
603
11
604
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 602
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 602
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 602
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 602
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 602
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 603
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 603
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 603
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 603
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 603
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 604
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 604
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
40-315
40-315
40-315
40-315
20-467
605
606
607
620
20-468
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 605
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 605
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 606
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 606
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 607
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 607
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 620
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 620
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Medium
Medium
shorting
to 40-141
621
11
12
622
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 621
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
40-141
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
Medium
20-469
622
11
12
623
11
12
624
625
20-470
13
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 622
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 623
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 624
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 624
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 625
FMI 13
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
40-141
Medium
Medium
High
Operator
sensor
626
11
629
11
12
630
631
632
633
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
High
Alarm
SPN 626
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 629
FMI 12
HLHP
alarm
SPN 630
FMI HLHP
Alarm
SPN 631
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 632
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 633
FMI 9
Medium
Component
Fault
Link to system
Operator
sensor
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
Medium
40-309
Medium
40-474
Low
[LNK]
Medium
Armrest
High
High
20-471
653
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 2
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 3
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Link to system
40-125
Table 241
ART code
Spn
Fmi
653
11
12
654
655
656
12
657
20-472
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 653
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 654
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 655
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 656
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 657
FMI 2
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Medium
40-125
Medium
40-125
Medium
40-125
Medium
HLHP unit
Medium
HLHP unit
Medium
Radar
Device faulty
Medium
Limp-home
signal
40-315
[LNK]
658
11
12
13
659
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 658
FMI 13
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 659
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 659
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
High
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
Medium
Medium
20-473
660
11
12
13
20-474
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 660
FMI 13
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
40-474
40-309
661
662
664
665
11
666
667
11
12
668
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 661
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 662
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 664
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 665
FMI 11
HLHP
alarm
SPN 666
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 667
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 668
FMI 7
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
HLHP unit
[LNK]
Medium
Medium
Device malfunction
Medium
Rear PTO
Medium
Front PTO
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
40-474
40-309
Medium
Front PTO
[LNK]
40-474
40-309
[LNK]
40-474
40-309
20-475
669
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
20-476
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 669
FMI 7
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 689
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 689
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 690
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 691
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 692
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 693
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 693
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 694
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 695
FMI 3
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Rear PTO
[LNK]
Medium
Medium
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Medium
shorting
to 40-125
697
698
700
701
702
11
12
13
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 697
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 698
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 700
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 701
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 702
FMI 13
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Armrest
Medium
Armrest
Low
Low
High
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
High
40-194
20-477
703
704
706
707
708
709
710
20-478
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 703
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 703
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 704
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 704
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 706
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 706
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 706
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 707
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 708
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 709
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 709
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 710
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 710
FMI 4
Component
Fault
Link to system
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
RH
distributor Button signal shorting to ground 40-336
DOWN button (on
mudguard)
Low
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
Low
Armrest
shorting
shorting
shorting
to 40-194
to 40-194
to 40-125
711
712
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
Link to system
HLHP
Low
Alarm
SPN 711
FMI 3
HLHP
Low
Alarm
SPN 711
FMI 4
HLHP
High
Alarm
SPN 712
FMI 8
Armrest
Armrest
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
Table 244
ART code
Spn
Fmi
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 713
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 714
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 715
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 716
FMI 9
HLHP
alarm
SPN 717
FMI HLHP
Alarm
SPN 718
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 719
FMI 8
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 720
FMI 8
Link to system
40-125
Medium
Low
4WD clutch
Medium
4WD clutch
Low
Armrest
Low
Medium
Medium
Steering
switch
Medium
[LNK]
20-479
722
723
724
725
726
12
727
728
729
730
731
732
20-480
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 722
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 723
FMI 2
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 724
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 724
FMI 4
HLHP
alarm
SPN 725
FMI HLHP
Alarm
SPN 726
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 726
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 727
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 728
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 729
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 730
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 731
FMI 9
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 732
FMI 9
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Medium
Low
SmartWheel
Low
SmartWheel
Sensor signal
ground.
Medium
EPB device
Medium
Medium
Low
iMonitor 2.0
Medium
Low
Medium
Low
MMI
Low
Auto A/C
shorting
to [LNK]
[LNK]
733
12
734
735
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
Medium
EPB device
Medium
EPB device
Medium
EPB device
Medium
Agrosky
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
Component
Fault
Link to system
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 736
FMI 13
Agrosky
40-373
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 733
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 734
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 734
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
Link to system
Table 245
ART code
Spn
Fmi
736
13
737
13
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 737
FMI 13
Agrosky
738
HLHP
Alarm
Medium
Agrosky
739
11
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 739
FMI 11
Agrosky
740
HLHP
Alarm
Agrosky
744
HLHP
Medium
Alarm
SPN 744
FMI7-
Medium
EPB device
40-373
40-373
40-373
40-373
[LNK]
20-481
745
13
998
11
12
13
20-482
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 745
FMI 13
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 998
FMI 12
Component
Fault
Link to system
Medium
Rear PTO
40-309
40-474
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
[LNK]
999
11
12
13
Instru- Severity
ment
panel
display
error
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 3
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 4
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 5
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 6
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 11
HLHP
Alarm
SPN 999
FMI 12
HLHP
Alarm
SPN
6999 FMI
12
Component
Fault
Link to system
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
[LNK]
20-483
The faults will be signalled by a function LED flashing (A/C or recirculation) timed as described below:
Fig. 543
Flashes
The first part (flash every 100 msec) indicates that a fault has been detected, whereas the second part indicates the type of fault as
indicated in the table below:
Table 246
Priority
1
2
3
Description
Function LED
Valve stepper motor Open Circuit (O.C.) or Short Circuit (S.C.) RECIRCULATION
to Earth
Valve stepper motor Short Circuit (S.C.) to Battery +
RECIRCULATION
Recirculation DC motor Short Circuit (S.C.)
RECIRCULATION
No. of flashes
1
2
3
Table 247
Only for the air conditioned version
Priority
Description
1
2
3
20-484
Function LED
No. of flashes
1
2
3
Function LED
A/C
No. of flashes
WARNING
In the event of several simultaneous faults they will be managed through the priority table and therefore the one with
the highest priority will be displayed.
WARNING
Therefore one fault will be managed at a time. When the managed fault is removed the next one in order or priority
will be displayed.
The following are the fault validation times:
Table 248
Description
Check period
(msec)
100
100
500
100
1000
Check period
(msec)
500
Table 249
Only for the air conditioned version
Description
100
1000
100
1000
1000
1000
WARNING
Any faults are memorised in the EEPROM.
Calibration of the water valve
Calibration of the valve consists in rotating the stepper motor for about 30 seconds clockwise (toward the valve closing) in order to
have a certain point of reference (zero).
The stepper motor stroke applied to the valve is 300 which corresponds to 6,000 steps.
Therefore the completely closed valve (0%) corresponds to 0 steps, whereas the completely open valve (100%) corresponds to 6,000
steps.
The duration of the valve calibration must be greater than 6,000 steps in order to guarantee certain mechanical stop (consider 6,000
+ 100 = 6,100 steps).
Considering that the configuration of the stepper motor outputs will be updated every 5 msec (200Hz), the duration of the calibration
phase will be:
6,100 x 5 msec = 30.5 seconds.
20-485
Name
01
02
03
04
Not used
Input from recirculation ac- The signal from the potentituator #2 failure.
ometer of recirculation actuator #2 is outside its working
limits.
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
14
Input from recirculation ac- The signal from the potentituator #1 failure.
ometer of recirculation actuator #1 is outside its working
limits.
15
20-486
Description
Qualification
Effect
The signal from the potentiometer is lower than minimum threshold TInRicMin
or is higher than maximum
threshold TInRicMax.
The signal from ambient air
sensor is higher than maximum threshold TSensMax
[V].
The signal from ambient air
sensor is lower than minimum threshold TSensMin
[V].
The signal from external air
sensor is higher than maximum threshold TSensMax
[V].
The signal from external air
sensor is lower than minimum threshold TSensMin
[V].
The signal from evaporator
sensor is higher than maximum threshold TSensMax
[V].
The signal from evaporator
sensor is lower than minimum threshold TSensMin
[V].
The signal from the solar
sensor is higher than maximum threshold or the reading
it is not impossible with the
external conditions.
The signal from the potentiometer is lower than minimum threshold TInRicMin
or is higher than maximum
threshold TInRicMax.
The potentiometer reference is lower than minimum
threshold [V].
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Name
Description
Qualification
Input from selected tempera- The signal is outside its work- The signal is lower than miniture potentiometer failure.
ing limits.
mum threshold or is higher
than maximum threshold.
Input from selected blower The signal is outside its work- The signal is lower than minispeed potentiometer failure. ing limits.
mum threshold or is higher
than maximum threshold.
Cab sensor fan failure.
The fan does not rotate.
Shorted circuit to ground or to
power supply.
Stepper motor output failure The stepper motor doesnt Phases of stepper motor
(Water valve).
work correctly.
opened or shorted circuit to
ground or to power supply.
Recirculation actuator motor The recirculation actuator Outputs of the recirculation
(#1 & #2) output failure.
does not work correctly.
actuator shorted circuit to
ground or to power supply.
A/C relay output failure.
The relay does not work cor- Output opened or shorted cirrectly.
cuit to power supply.
Water pump relay output fail- The relay does not work cor- Output opened or shorted cirure.
rectly.
cuit to power supply.
Not Used.
Engine RPM failure.
The message from CAN is CANBUS failure.
not valid.
Not Used.
Engine water temperature The message from CAN is CANBUS failure.
failure.
not valid.
Effect
The system goes in automatic mode with a default selected temperature (+21C).
The system controls the
blower speed automatically.
The recirculation actuator (#1 & #2) motor output is
turned off.
The system considers the
last value received for 2 consecutive seconds.
If no CAN message are
received, after this time, the
system takes a default value
of 1500 RPM.
20-487
4106
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
N004 - E.P.B.
4108
N004 - E.P.B.
4109
N004 - E.P.B.
4111
K007 - E.P.B.
4112
N004 - E.P.B.
4113
N004 - E.P.B.
4114
N004 - E.P.B.
device
EPB_014
Fig. 546
4119
4127
4128
4129
4138
EPB_014
4147
Fig. 546
EPB_003
Fig. 547
20-488
RESPONSE
Controls
Link to system
4107
4115
Fault
T001 - Battery Main battery voltage be- The EPB switches to the
positive terminal low 10V
back-up battery and it
keeps it operating. Note:
The capacity of the backup battery is limited. It is
important to restore the
functionality of the main
battery, otherwise the
EPB may stop functioning.
4148
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
Fault
RESPONSE
4161
4163
4167
4169
4177
T004 - Auxiliary Auxiliary battery volt- No limitation of the norbattery positive age not within permitted mal EPB reaction. Note:
terminal
range
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
T004 - Auxiliary Auxiliary battery charge No limitation of the norbattery positive level invalid
mal EPB reaction. Note:
terminal
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
EPB_003
Fig. 547
4149
EPB_003
Fig. 547
EPB_005
Fig. 549
4178
EPB_005
Fig. 549
Controls
Link to system
20-489
4179
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
EPB_005
Fig. 549
4180
EPB_005
Fig. 549
4181
EPB_005
Fig. 549
4182
EPB_012
Fig. 550
4197
EPB_014
Fig. 550
20-490
Fault
RESPONSE
T004 - Auxiliary Auxiliary battery discon- No limitation of the norbattery positive nected
mal EPB reaction. Note:
terminal
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
T004 - Auxiliary Auxiliary battery test cy- No limitation of the norbattery positive cle failed
mal EPB reaction. Note:
terminal
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
T004 - Auxiliary Auxiliary battery voltage No limitation of the norbattery positive too high
mal EPB reaction. Note:
terminal
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
Problems with both bat- The EPB is blocked in
teries
the last position. If a command is given while the
fault is being checked.
The EPB opens and
closes again immediately
until the alarm reappears
Travel speed signal not No limitation of the norwithin permitted range
mal EPB reaction. Note:
The fault must be eliminated immediately in
order to re-establish the
correct reaction of the
EPB.
Controls
Link to system
4227
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
Fault
RESPONSE
Controls
Link to system
Fault
Controls
Table 253
ART
code
Spn
4228
4229
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
RESPONSE
Link to system
20-491
4230
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
Fault
RESPONSE
Problems with engine The parking brake maincontrol unit CANBUS line tains complete functionality. Attention: The
fault must be eliminated
immediately in order to
re-establish the correct
reaction of the EPB.
4231
4232
Problems with transmis- The parking brake mainsion control unit CAN- tains complete funcBUS line
tionality. Attention: The
fault must be eliminated
immediately in order to
re-establish the correct
reaction of the EPB.
4233
Problems with transmis- The parking brake mainsion control unit CAN- tains complete functionality. Attention: The
BUS line
fault must be eliminated
immediately in order to
re-establish the correct
reaction of the EPB.
4237
4238
4239
4240
20-492
Controls
Link to system
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
4241
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
4242
4246
EPB_014
4248
Fig. 550
4251
4255
4257
EPB_014
4258
4267
4277
4278
4279
4280
Fig. 550
Fault
RESPONSE
Controls
Link to system
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-321
40-480
40-231
40-297
40-216
20-493
4281
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
4282
EPB_011
4283
Fig. 552
4284
EPB_011
4286
Fig. 553
EPB_009
4287
Fig. 554
EPB_007
Fig. 554
4288
EPB_007
Fig. 554
20-494
Fault
RESPONSE
Controls
Link to system
H001 - Armrest E.P.B. control lever pow- The EPB operates norer not within permitted mally with the redundant
range
lever that is connected
to the supervisor in the
ECU. Note: The fault
must be eliminated immediately in order to reestablish the correct reaction of the EPB.
H001 - Armrest E.P.B. control lever sig- The EPB operates nornals not within permitted mally with the redundant
range
lever that is connected
to the supervisor in the
ECU. Note: The fault
must be eliminated immediately in order to reestablish the correct reaction of the EPB.
20-495
4290
Component
Instrument
panel
display
error
EPB_001
Fig. 554
4292
EPB_009
4308
4310
20-496
Fig. 554
Fault
RESPONSE
Controls
Link to system
Line problems due to sig- The EPB system funcnal loss or invalid signal tions normally
Line problems due to sig- The EPB system funcnal loss or invalid signal tions normally. The comfort functions are not
available. Automatic activation after switching on
remains active
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
Table 256
No. of
flashes
Type
Error Identification
01
02
X
COM
03
COM
Not used.
Short circuit to positive in command signal reading channels.
Interrupted command signal reading channels.
04
MCO
05
AUX
06
MCO
07
COM
08
COM
09
COM
Conditions of occurrence
Not used.
Both command signal reading channels (CH1
and CH2) at same voltage as battery positive.
Both command signal reading channels (CH1
and CH2) interrupted.
Close or open manoeuvre failure.
Device does not detect main contact state requested by user after 4 repetitions of manoeuvre
following initial attempt (for a total of 5 attempts).
Short circuit to ground of AUX line
Short circuit to ground detected in AUX line,
causing interruption in electric power delivered
through AUX line itself. This condition is ONLY
detectable during activation of line itself.
Unexpected contact state.
Undesired aperture of main contact detected
during activation.
Short circuit to negative in command signal read- Both command signal reading channels (CH1
ing channels.
and CH2) at same voltage as battery negative.
First unexpected state of command signal read- Command signal reading channel CH1 disconing channels.
nected and channel CH2 shorted to negative, or
vice versa.
Second unexpected state of command signal Command signal reading channel CH1 disconreading channels.
nected and channel CH2 shorted to positive, or
vice versa.
20-497
20-498
30 - Method of intervention
30-1
Method of intervention
30.1 - Index Repair instructions (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30.1.1 - Repair level III
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Link
30-236
30-241
30-242
30-245
30-247
30-249
30-250
30-251
30-252
30-253
30-254
30-254
30-258
30-262
30-263
30-267
See para. 30.6.25 - Disassembly of filter ... - page 30-268
Table 258
Removal
No.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Link
30-268
30-269
30-269
30-271
30-274
30-278
30-281
30-283
30-283
30-289
30-290
30-298
30-302
30-302
30-304
30-306
30-308
See para. 30.6.52 - Disassembly of drive s... - page 30-310
Table 259
Installation
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
30-2
Link
30-349
30-350
30-353
30-355
30-359
30-363
30-372
30-373
30-374
30-376
30-377
Method of intervention
Installation
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
Link
30-380
30-381
30-383
30-386
30-386
See para. 30.6.85 - Reassembly of filter h... - page 30-387
Table 260
Installation
No.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Link
30-285
30-388
30-390
30-391
30-393
30-394
30-397
30-399
30-400
30-403
30-403
30-406
30-408
30-409
30-419
30-419
30-422
30-426
30-431
See para. 30.6.105 - Reinstallation of cart... - page 30-437
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Link
30-513
30-514
30-517
30-519
30-522
30-528
See para. 30.7.21 - Lifting Unit - Disasse... - page 30-529
Table 262
Assembly
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Link
30-530
30-533
30-536
30-550
30-555
30-558
30-564
See para. 30.7.30 - Procedure for checking... - page 30-565
30-3
Method of intervention
30.2 - Index Repair instructions (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
30.2.1 - Repair level III
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Link
30-235
30-238
30-241
30-242
30-245
30-247
30-249
30-250
30-251
30-252
30-253
30-254
30-256
30-260
30-262
30-265
30-267
30-276
30-279
30-282
30-287
30-289
30-291
30-307
30-309
See para. 30.6.53 - Disassembly of Drive S... - page 30-312
Table 264
Installation
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
30-4
Link
30-313
30-314
30-317
30-319
30-331
30-333
30-334
30-334
30-336
30-337
30-339
30-343
30-345
30-346
30-349
30-403
30-406
30-408
30-414
30-419
30-419
30-422
30-426
30-431
Method of intervention
Installation
No.
25
26
27
Link
30-440
30-444
See para. 30.6.108 - Pipes and closing comp... - page 30-445
01
02
03
04
05
06
Link
30-446
30-449
30-451
30-454
30-466
See para. 30.7.6 - Removing the lifter (7... - page 30-467
Table 266
Assembly
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Link
30-468
30-468
30-471
30-473
30-473
30-500
30-504
30-507
See para. 30.7.31 - Procedure to check EPB... - page 30-578
30-5
Method of intervention
30.3 - Installation of solenoid valves and cartridge valves
30.3.1 - Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove packaging and protective coverings from solenoid valve bodies and cartridge valves only at the moment of installation, so as to minimize the risk of contamination.
Lubricate all O-rings fitted to solenoid valves and valve cartridges using a suitable mineral oil or grease compatible with AKROS oil.
Contamination of lubricating fluid must be no higher than level 18/15, as specified in ISO 4406.
For further information on contamination, refer to SAME specification 92349
Containers of lubricating fluids must be closed and fitted with the specific dispensing nozzle.
The use of open containers or brushes is not permissible.
Screw the solenoid valves and cartridge valves into the relative seats by hand, engaging at least one turn of the thread.
Power drivers must not be used at this stage.
Complete the tightening operation, applying torques as specified in the table of headings 3 and 4.
Fig. 555
Threads
p/n
7/8-14 UNF
2.3719.750.0/XX
2.3729.410.0/XX
2.3729.610.0/XX
15-20
5-8
7/8-14 UNF
2.3729.250.0/XX
2.3729.270.0/XX
2.3729.290.0/XX
2.3729.300.0/XX
2.3729.697.0/XX
2.3729.600.0/XX
2.3729.330.0/XX
2.3729.340.0/XX
2.3729.400.0/XX
15-20
50.5
15-20
15-20
5-8
50.5
7/8-14 UNF
2.3729.310.0/XX
2.3729.698.0/XX
2.3729.718.0/XX
15-20
50.5
3/4-16 UNF
2.3719.510.0/XX
15-20
20-25
M18X1.5
Fig. 556
Fig. 557
Fig. 558
30-6
Tightening torque
A (Nm)
B (Nm)
Method of intervention
Type of solenoid valve
Threads
p/n
Tightening torque
A (Nm)
B (Nm)
M33X2
2.3729.709.0/XX
45-50
Threads
p/n
M18X1.5
2.3729.686.0/XX
2.3719.760.0/XX
Tightening torque
A (Nm)
35-40
3/4-16 UNF
2.3729.691.0/XX
35-40
M22X1.5
M18X1.5
2.3729.692.0/XX
2.3719.630.0/XX
45-50
35-40
7/8-14 UNF
0.006.6161.4/XX
0.015.5426.4/XX
45-50
45-50
5-8
Fig. 559
Type of valve
Fig. 560
Fig. 561
Fig. 562
Fig. 563
30-7
Method of intervention
30.4 - B0 - Engine
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 564
Fig. 565
3.
Fig. 566
30-8
Method of intervention
1.
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
Fig. 568
m
m
Fig. 569
2.
m
m
Fig. 570
30-9
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
Fig. 570
4.
WARNING
Caution! Be careful not to lose the banjo bolt.
m
m
m
m
m
m
5.
m
m
m
Insert banjo bolt (5) and seal (4) in the hose end fitting.
Fit oil return pipe (1).
Locate pipe retaining clips (2).
Tighten screw (3).
n Tightening torque: 30 Nm
Fit new seals (4).
Tighten banjo bolt (5).
n Tightening torque: 29 Nm
Fig. 571
Fig. 572
30-10
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 269
Designation
Type of tractor
Notes:
Value
10 Nm
30 Nm
80 Nm
29 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 573
Fig. 574
30-11
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 575
4.
m
m
m
m
m
5.
m
m
Fig. 577
30-12
Method of intervention
Refitting the crankcase breather
1.
m
m
Fig. 578
2.
m
m
Fig. 579
3.
m
m
Fig. 580
4.
Insert banjo bolt (5) and seal (4) in the hose end fitting.
WARNING
Caution! Be careful with the banjo bolt.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 581
30-13
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 582
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 270
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
10 Nm
30 Nm
80 Nm
29 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
Fig. 583
30-14
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 584
3.
m
m
Fig. 585
Fig. 586
2.
Fig. 587
30-15
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 588
4.
m
m
Fig. 589
5.
m
m
Fig. 590
6.
m
m
Fig. 591
30-16
Method of intervention
7.
m
m
Fig. 592
8.
Fig. 593
9.
Fig. 594
30-17
Method of intervention
30.4.4 - Changing the crankshaft ring gasket (flywheel side)
Special tools:
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
(1) Gearbox
(2) Hex screw
(3) Hex screw
(4) Crankshaft ring gasket
(234) Sealant
Fig. 595
2.
3.
Fig. 597
4.
m
m
Fig. 598
30-18
Method of intervention
Fit crankshaft ring gasket
1.
m
m
Fig. 599
2.
m
m
Fig. 600
3.
Fig. 601
4.
m
m
Fig. 602
30-19
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
Fig. 603
6.
m
m
Fig. 605
2.
m
m
m
m
30-20
Method of intervention
3.
WARNING
Caution! Be careful not to damage the sealing surfaces.
m
m
Fig. 607
4.
Gently tap the centre of installation tool (1) with a mallet to drive in
the wear sleeve until the installation tool seats against the crankshaft.
Drive the crankshaft sleeve forward square.
WARNING
The installation depth is determined by the length of the installation tool.
WARNING
The wear sleeve should cover all signs of wear on the crankshaft journal.
5.
Fig. 608
WARNING
After installing the crankshaft wear sleeve, check that there
are no grooves or ridges on the crankshaft journal.
m
Fig. 609
30-21
Method of intervention
Removal of the crankshaft wear sleeve
1.
m
m
Fig. 610
2.
Apply two levers to the sides (arrowed) of the front cover casting.
WARNING
Caution! Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Fig. 611
3.
m
m
Fig. 612
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 613
30-22
Method of intervention
30.4.6 - Removal and refitting of the front cover (fixing elements)
Special tools:
-
Components:
m
m
m
Fig. 614
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
3.
Clean the mating surfaces of the front cover and the engine block.
Fig. 616
WARNING
Use a gasket with steel reinforcement ribs.
WARNING
Consult the documentation supplied with the replacement
parts.
m
m
30-23
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 618
3.
4.
m
m
Fig. 620
5.
Push the front cover upwards and align it with the mating surface of
the oil sump pan (arrowed).
Fig. 621
30-24
Method of intervention
6.
Fig. 622
7.
WARNING
Caution! Do not trim off the protruding part of the gasket
(arrowed).
m
m
Fig. 623
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 271
Designation
Screw type
M8x35-10.9
-
Note:
Value
Stage 1:
5 Nm
Observe the tightening sequence indicated.
Stage 2:
21 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-25
Method of intervention
Removal of the oil sump pan
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 624
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 625
3.
m
m
m
m
m
4.
Prise off the sump pan by using a lever in the apertures (arrowed).
Remove the the oil sump pan.
Carry out a visual inspection of the components.
Fig. 626
Fig. 627
30-26
Method of intervention
Refitting the oil sump pan
1.
Fig. 628
2.
Fig. 629
WARNING
Caution! Make sure that no sealant enters the oil way (2).
3.
To align the sump pan, screw four stud bolts in a diagonal pattern
into the crankcase holes.
Fit the oil sump pan.
WARNING
Be careful not to dislodge the sealant when fitting the oil
sump pan.
Fig. 630
4.
Fig. 631
30-27
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
Fig. 632
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 272
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
Fig. 633
30-28
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 634
3.
Fig. 635
m
m
m
Fig. 636
2.
m
m
Fig. 637
30-29
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 273
Designation
Type of tractor
M8x16-10.9
-
Note:
Value
22 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Fig. 638
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
30-30
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 274
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
170 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 641
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 642
30-31
Method of intervention
Refitting the torsional vibration damper.
1.
Fig. 644
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 645
3.
Tighten the new screws (1) using the long reach socket and the
rotation angle gauge.
n Stage 1, Tightening torque 40 Nm
n Stage 2, Angle: 60
n Stage 3, Angle: 60
WARNING
Caution! The screws must be renewed each time they are
disturbed.
Fig. 646
4.
m
m
m
30-32
Fig. 647
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 275
Designation
Screw type
M16x80-10.9
-
Note:
Value
Stage 1:
Use new screws
Stage 2:
40 Nm
60
Stage 3:
60
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
Fig. 648
2.
Fig. 649
30-33
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 650
Fig. 651
2.
m
m
Fig. 652
3.
DANGER
Caution! The screws must be renewed each time they are
disturbed.
m
m
m
30-34
Fig. 653
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 654
5.
CAUTION
For part numbers, see replacement parts documentation.
Fig. 655
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 276
Designation
Flywheel to engine
Flywheel to engine
Flywheel to engine
Screw type
M10x35-12.9
M10x40-12.9
M10x45-12.9
M10x50-12.9
M10x55-12.9
M10x70-12.9
M10x75-12.9
M10x80-12.9
M10x85-12.9
-
Note:
Stage 1:
Value
30 Nm
Stage 2:
60
Stage 3:
60
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-35
Method of intervention
Compression test
1.
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 656
Fig. 657
3.
Fig. 658
4.
m
m
Fig. 659
30-36
Method of intervention
5.
WARNING
The pressure reading will depend on the number of starter
revolutions during the testing process and on the altitude at
which the test is performed. The limit values therefore cannot be defined precisely. We recommend that that the readings obtained are used solely for comparison between the
different cylinders. A difference between cylinders of over
15% should be investigated by dismantling the cylinder giving the low reading.
Fig. 660
6.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 661
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 277
Designation
Screw type
Notes:
Value
20 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 662
30-37
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 663
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 664
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 665
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 666
30-38
Method of intervention
Refitting the cylinder head cover
1.
m
m
m
Fig. 667
2.
m
m
Fig. 668
3.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 669
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 278
Designation
Screw type
M6x12-10.9
-
Note:
Value
8.5 Nm
8.5 Nm
1.5 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-39
Method of intervention
30.4.14 - Check and adjust valve clearances
Special tools:
WARNING
Pay attention to the direction of rotation of the engine - see instruction manual.
WARNING
Before adjusting valve clearance, allow engine to cool for at least 30 minutes. Engine oil temperature < 80C.
WARNING
For this procedure it is not necessary to remove the cover gasket.
2.
Fig. 670
Fig. 670
Table 279
Valves
Cylinder
Adjust on overlap 1
Angle
6
30-40
5
2
3
4
6
1
2
5
4
3
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 671
Check
1.
m
m
m
Fig. 672
2.
Fig. 673
Adjustment
1.
Fig. 674
30-41
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 675
3.
Tighten the adjuster screw with screwdriver (1) until reaching the
specified rotation angle.
Intake valve
n Angle: 75
Exhaust valve
n Angle: 120
Fig. 676
4.
30-42
Fig. 677
Method of intervention
Technical data
Test and adjustment data
Table 280
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
75
120
Table 281
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
20 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
(1) Gasket
(2) Lube oil cooler
(3) Hex head screw
Fig. 678
30-43
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 679
m
m
m
Fig. 680
2.
Fig. 681
3.
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 282
Designation
Screw type
M8x20-10.9
-
Note:
Value
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-44
Method of intervention
30.4.16 - Removal and refitting of the lube oil cooler housing
Special tools:
WARNING
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
To drain and replenish the engine oil, follow the instructions provided.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 682
Fig. 683
30-45
Method of intervention
Refitting the lube oil cooler housing
1.
m
m
m
Fig. 684
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 685
3.
m
m
m
30-46
Fig. 686
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 283
Designation
Screw type
M8x20-10.9
M8x25-10.9
M8x50-10.9
Threaded plug on oil cooler housing
M33X2
Threaded plug on oil cooler housing
M16x1.5
Threaded plug on oil cooler housing
M26x1.5
Blank flange on oil cooler housing
M8x20-10.9
Oil pressure switch connected to oil cooler housing
Blank flange on oil cooler housing
-
Note:
Value
30 Nm
110 Nm
42 Nm
90 Nm
20 Nm
30 Nm
25 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-47
Method of intervention
Removal of the pilot block
1.
Components:
m
Fig. 687
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 689
30-48
Method of intervention
2.
WARNING
Caution! Tighten the screws in the sequence indicated below.
m
Fig. 689
WARNING
Check that connector is positioned correctly.
30-49
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 284
Designation
Type of tractor
Note:
Value
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
DANGER
The pressure in the fuel system may still be as high as several hundred bar even after the engine has been switched
off. In this case, the fuel pressure can only be reduced by opening the fuel system to allow fuel to escape.
WARNING
Maximum cleanliness is essential when working on the fuel system. Carefully clean the area around the components
to be worked on. Dry wet areas with a compressed air jet.
WARNING
When handling fuels, observe safety standards and all applicable local regulations.
WARNING
All fuel lines and fittings should be closed immediately after opening using new, clean plugs or caps. Plugs or caps
should only be removed immediately prior to assembly.
WARNING
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Always bleed the fuel system after every intervention.
30-50
Method of intervention
Removal of the high-pressure pump.
1.
Components:
m
Fig. 690
2.
m
m
m
3.
Fig. 690
m
m
4.
Fig. 691
Carefully remove O-ring (1) from the high-pressure pump using the
removal tool.
WARNING
Be careful not to damage the high-pressure pump.
Fig. 692
30-51
Method of intervention
5.
WARNING
Do not use magnetic tools to remove the roller tappet.
Fig. 693
Turn the crankshaft using the rotation device to bring the pump cam
to the base circle position (arrowed).
WARNING
Roller tappet stroke less than 0.5 mm.
Fig. 694
2.
Lightly oil the roller tappet and insert it carefully using the special
pliers.
WARNING
Locating pin (1) on the roller tappet should engage groove
(2).
Fig. 695
3.
m
m
Slide the O-ring installation tool (1) onto the high-pressure pump.
Slide a new O-ring (2) onto the installation tool.
Fig. 696
30-52
Method of intervention
4.
Using installation tool (2), slide O-ring (1) into its groove (3).
Fig. 697
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 698
6.
m
m
m
Fig. 698
30-53
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 285
Designation
Screw type
M10x30-10.9
M10x30-10.9
-
Note:
Stage 1
Oiled screws
Stage 2
Value
10 Nm
50 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30.4.19 - Installation and removal of the high pressure pump, Assembly position B
Special tools:
30-54
Method of intervention
Removing the high pressure pump
1.
Components:
m
Fig. 699
2.
m
m
m
3.
Fig. 699
m
m
4.
Fig. 700
Carefully detach round O-ring (1) from the high pressure pump using the disassembly tool.
WARNING
Take care not to damage the high pressure pump.
Fig. 701
30-55
Method of intervention
5.
WARNING
To remove the roller tappet do not use magnetic tools.
Fig. 702
Turn the crankshaft with the rotation device until the cam for the high
pressure pump is on the basic circle of the cam (arrow).
WARNING
Stroke of roller tappet less than 0.5 mm.
Fig. 703
2.
Lightly oil the roller tappet and fit it carefully using the special pliers.
WARNING
Guide pin (1) on the roller tappet must engage in groove (2).
Fig. 704
3.
m
m
Fig. 705
30-56
Method of intervention
4.
Slide round O-ring (1) with assembly bush (2) up to groove (3).
Fig. 706
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 707
6.
m
m
m
Fig. 707
30-57
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 286
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Class 1:
oiled screws
Class 2:
Value
10 Nm
50 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-58
Method of intervention
Removal of the injectors
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
(1) Screw
(2) Retaining bracket
(3) Injector
(4) O-ring
(5) Seal
(6) Delivery pipe sleeve
(7) Thrust cap
(8) O-ring
(9) O-ring
(10) Swivel nut
(11) O-ring
Fig. 708
WARNING
Each injector is assigned to its respective cylinder on the
basis of its IMA code (1).
Fig. 709
WARNING
The assignments are saved in the control unit memory.
WARNING
Whenever an injector is renewed or swapped over, it must
be assigned to its respective cylinders by entering the new
IMA code in the control unit memory.
3.
WARNING
The procedures for the removal and refitting of the fuel injectors are described in the following paragraphs.
WARNING
These procedures apply to all the injectors.
m
m
Fig. 710
30-59
Method of intervention
4.
Remove the sleeves of delivery pipes (1) using removal tool (2)
Fig. 711
5.
Fig. 712
6.
m
m
Fig. 713
7.
Fig. 714
30-60
Method of intervention
Variant: Threaded retaining bracket
1.
Fig. 715
2.
m
m
Fig. 716
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 717
m
m
Fig. 718
30-61
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 719
3.
WARNING
Do not attempt to clean the injector nozzle using a brush.
WARNING
When removing seal (1), take care not to damage the injector nozzle.
m
Grip the fixed seal (1) with the special pliers (2) and remove it by
twisting it gently.
Fig. 720
Fig. 721
2.
Screw in spindle (1) until the seal is seated on the removal tool.
WARNING
Counterhold the removal tool.
Fig. 722
30-62
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
Fig. 723
4.
Carefully remove the O-ring (1) from the injector using the removal
tool.
WARNING
Be careful not to damage the injector.
Fig. 724
m
m
Fig. 725
2.
Using installation tool (2), slide O-ring (1) into its groove (3).
Fig. 726
30-63
Method of intervention
3.
4.
Fig. 727
WARNING
Before installing the injector, clean any carbon deposits from
the injector bore in the cylinder head.
WARNING
Remove any particles of dirt.
Position the injector so that hole (1) is oriented towards the control
side.
Fig. 728
5.
WARNING
Caution! Note that each injector is paired with a specific cylinder.
m
Carefully insert injector (1) and retaining bracket (2) in the cylinder
head.
Fig. 729
6.
30-64
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 731
8.
m
m
Fig. 732
9.
WARNING
Renew the delivery pipe sleeve.
WARNING
Position the delivery pipe sleeve and apply pressure to the
thrust cap so that balls (1) of the anti-twist connection locate
in grooves (2) in the thrust cap.
m
10.
Insert the delivery pipe sleeve with the new O-ring in the cylinder
head.
Fig. 733
Fig. 734
30-65
Method of intervention
11.
Fig. 735
12.
m
m
Fig. 736
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 287
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
Stage 1:
Observe the installation sequence.
Fit the injector without applying force.
Stage 2:
4 Nm
33 Nm (+3)
15 Nm
Stage 2:
42 Nm
80 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-66
Method of intervention
DANGER
Never work on the fuel system when the engine is running. The fuel system is under high pressure. Danger of death!
DANGER
The pressure in the fuel system may still be as high as several hundred bar even after the engine has been switched
off. In this case, the fuel pressure can only be reduced by opening the fuel system to allow fuel to escape.
WARNING
Caution! Maximum cleanliness is essential when working on the fuel system. Carefully clean the area around the
components to be worked on. Dry wet areas with a compressed air jet.
WARNING
Do not allow any contaminants to enter the rail system. Ensure maximum cleanliness. In particular, ensure that the
threads and the mating surfaces of the rail are clean.
WARNING
When handling fuels, observe safety standards and all applicable local regulations. All fuel lines and fittings should be
closed immediately after opening using new, clean plugs or caps. Plugs or caps should only be removed immediately
prior to assembly.
WARNING
Always bleed the fuel system after every intervention.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
(1) Rail
(2) Spacer
(3) Hex head screw
(4) Injection pipe
(5) Injection pipe
(6) Injection pipe
(7) Injection pipe
(8) Injection pipe
(9) Injection pipe
(10) High-pressure line
(11) High-pressure line
(950) Pressure relief valve
(951) Pressure sensor
Fig. 737
m
m
30-67
Method of intervention
Removal of the injection pipes
1.
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 740
Unscrew rail pressure sensor (1) using the long reach socket.
WARNING
Collect leaked fuel and dispose of it properly.
Fig. 741
2.
WARNING
Caution! To avoid electrostatic discharge, do not touch the
male connectors of the rail pressure sensor with bare hands.
WARNING
Ensure that the connection plug is clean.
Carry out a visual inspection of the thread and the sealing edge (arrowed) of the rail pressure sensor.
Fig. 742
30-68
Method of intervention
Refitting the pressure sensor
1.
WARNING
Caution! Do not allow any contaminants to enter the rail system. Ensure maximum cleanliness. In particular, ensure that
the threads and the mating surfaces of the rail are clean.
WARNING
Read the instructions in the documentation supplied with the
replacement part.
WARNING
The rail pressure sensor and the pressure relief valve must
be renewed together as a pair.
m
m
2.
Fig. 743
m
m
Fig. 744
Fig. 745
2.
Carry out a visual inspection of the thread and the sealing edge (arrowed) of the rail pressure sensor.
Fig. 746
30-69
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 747
DANGER
Do not allow any contaminants to enter the rail system. Ensure maximum cleanliness. In particular, ensure that the
threads and the mating surfaces of the rail are clean.
DANGER
Read the instructions in the documentation supplied with the
replacement part.
DANGER
The rail pressure sensor and the pressure relief valve must
be renewed together as a pair.
2.
Fig. 748
Fig. 749
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 750
30-70
Method of intervention
Refitting the common rail
1.
m
m
Fig. 751
WARNING
Once disturbed, the injection pipes must be completely renewed. When fitting the injection pipes, ensure they are not
under tension.
WARNING
Make sure the pipes are installed in the correct positions.
2.
WARNING
Check that the injection pipes are aligned correctly.
WARNING
Do not rest wires in the holes (1) of the swivel nuts.
m
m
3.
Fig. 754
30-71
Method of intervention
4.
Tighten the swivel nuts in the sequence indicated using the special
wrench.
n Start with cylinder No.1
n Stage 1, Tightening torque 10 Nm
n Stage 2, Angle: 60 (+15)
WARNING
Use the rotation angle gauge.
Fig. 755
WARNING
Once disturbed, the high-pressure pipes must be completely renewed. When fitting the high-pressure pipes, ensure
they are not under tension.
WARNING
Make sure the high-pressure pipes are installed in the correct positions.
m
2.
DANGER
Check that the high-pressure pipes are aligned correctly.
DANGER
Do not rest wires in the holes (1) of the swivel nuts.
m
m
30-72
Method of intervention
3.
Tighten the swivel nuts in the sequence indicated using the special
wrench.
n Start from the high-pressure pump (installation position A,
flywheel end)
n Stage 1, Tightening torque 10 Nm
n Stage 2, Angle: 60
DANGER
Use the rotation angle gauge.
m
m
Fig. 758
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 288
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Stage 1:
Observe the installation indications.
Use new pipes.
Stage 2:
Observe the installation indications.
Value
10 Nm
60
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-73
Method of intervention
30.4.22 - Removal and refitting of the charge air duct
Special tools:
-
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 759
Fig. 760
m
m
m
30-74
Fig. 761
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
WARNING
Caution! Check that the cables are positioned correctly.
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 289
Designation
Type of tractor
Note:
Value
13 Nm
13 Nm
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-75
Method of intervention
Removal of the charge air manifold
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 763
Fig. 764
30-76
Method of intervention
Refitting the charge air manifold
1.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 765
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 290
Designation
Screw type
M8x30-10.9
M8x95-10.9
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 766
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 767
30-77
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 768
m
m
Fig. 769
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 770
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 291
Designation
Screw type
M8x16-10.9
-
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-78
Method of intervention
30.4.25 - Removal and refitting of the water pump
Special tools:
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
(1) Connector
(2) O-ring
(3) Hex head screw
(4) Gasket
(5) Hex head screw
(242) Assembly product
Fig. 771
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 772
3.
Fig. 773
30-79
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 774
m
m
m
Fig. 775
2.
m
m
Fig. 776
3.
m
m
Fig. 777
30-80
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 778
5.
m
m
Fig. 779
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 292
Designation
Screw type
M8x35-10.9
M8x90-10.9
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 780
30-81
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 781
m
m
m
Fig. 782
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 293
Designation
Screws type
M10x70-10.9
-
Notes:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Fig. 783
30-82
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 784
3.
m
m
Fig. 785
4.
m
m
Fig. 786
30-83
Method of intervention
Installing the support plate
1.
m
m
Fig. 787
2.
Tighten assembly tool (1) in the direction of the arrow on the stud
screw.
Tighten the stud screw with assembly tool (1).
n Tightening torque: 8 Nm
Fig. 788
3.
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 294
Designation
Screws type
M8-10
M8x40-10.9
M8
M8x20-10.9
Note:
Value
35 Nm
8 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-84
Method of intervention
30.4.28 - Removing and installing the support console (Level 1)
Special tools:
-
Components:
m
m
m
m
(1) Console
(2) Idle roller
(3) Hex screw
(4) Hex screw
Fig. 789
2.
m
m
Fig. 790
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 791
4.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 792
30-85
Method of intervention
Installing the idle roller
1.
2.
m
m
Fig. 794
3.
m
m
Fig. 795
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 295
Designation
Screws type
M10x45-10.9
M10x52-10.9
M10x65-10.9
M8x35-10.9
M8x55-10.9
Note:
Value
60 Nm
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-86
Method of intervention
30.4.29 - Removal and installation of the exhaust pipe (auxiliaries)
Special tools:
-
Components:
m
m
m
m
(1) Gasket
(2) Stud screw
(3) Spacer bush
(4) Hex screw
Fig. 796
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 797
3.
Fig. 798
4.
m
m
Fig. 799
30-87
Method of intervention
Installing the exhaust pipe
1.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 800
2.
Tighten the assembly tool (1) in the direction of the arrow on the
stud screws.
Tighten stud screws (1) using the assembly tool.
n Tightening torque: 10 Nm
Fig. 801
3.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 802
4.
Fig. 803
30-88
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 296
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 804
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 805
30-89
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
Fig. 806
4.
m
m
Fig. 807
5.
m
m
Fig. 808
6.
m
m
Fig. 809
30-90
Method of intervention
Refitting the exhaust gas turbocharger
1.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 810
2.
m
m
Screw installation tool (1) onto the studs in the direction of arrow.
Tighten studs (1) using the installation tool.
n Tightening torque: 10 Nm
Fig. 811
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 812
4.
m
m
Screw installation tool (1) onto the studs in the direction of arrow.
Tighten studs (1) using the installation tool.
n Tightening torque: 10 Nm
Fig. 813
30-91
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 297
Designation
Type of tractor
M10x30
M12x35
Exhaust gas turbocharger connected to ex- M12
haust pipe
Studs on turbocharger
M10x30
M12x35
Note:
Value
10 Nm
63 Nm
10 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30.4.31 - Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
Special tools:
WARNING
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
To drain and replenish the engine oil, follow the relative instructions.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
30-92
Fig. 815
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 816
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 817
m
m
m
m
Fig. 818
2.
m
m
m
m
30-93
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 820
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 821
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 298
Designation
Type of tractor
Banjo bolt
M8
M8x20-10.9
Note:
Value
39 Nm
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30.4.32 - Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil return pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
Special tools:
30-94
Method of intervention
Removal of the lubricating oil pipe
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
Fig. 822
Fig. 823
3.
m
m
Fig. 824
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 825
30-95
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
Fig. 826
m
m
m
Fig. 827
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 828
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 829
30-96
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 830
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 299
Designation
Type of tractor
Note:
Value
30 Nm
30 Nm
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 831
30-97
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 832
m
m
m
Fig. 833
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 300
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
42 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-98
Method of intervention
Removing the vee-groove pulley
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
(1) Alternator
(4) Hex screw
(5) Conical retaining ring
(6) Vee-groove pulley
(950) Tension adjuster
Fig. 834
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 835
3.
WARNING
Place the alternator on a soft surface.
Fig. 836
4.
WARNING
The socket must rest on shoulder (1) of the vee-groove pulley, and not on locking cone (2)!
Fig. 837
30-99
Method of intervention
5.
DANGER
Risk of injury!
WARNING
Take care not to damage the components
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 838
m
m
m
Fig. 839
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 840
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 301
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
75 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-100
Method of intervention
30.4.35 - Removing and installing the vee-groove pulley (#2)
Readily available commercial tools:
8 mm hex wrench
27 mm socket wrench, outside diameter of socket 37 mm
Offset tubular box wrench with extension
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 841
Fig. 842
3.
WARNING
Place the alternator on a soft surface.
Fig. 843
30-101
Method of intervention
4.
WARNING
The socket must rest on shoulder (1) of the vee-groove pulley, and not on locking cone (2)!
Fig. 844
5.
DANGER
Risk of injury!
WARNING
Take care not to damage the components
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 845
m
m
m
m
Fig. 846
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 847
30-102
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 302
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
75 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 848
Fig. 849
30-103
Method of intervention
Installing the support console
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 303
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
(1) Console
(2) Suspension plate
(3) Hex screw
(4) Hex screw
Fig. 851
30-104
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 852
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 304
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 853
30-105
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 854
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 855
m
m
Fig. 856
2.
m
m
Fig. 857
30-106
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 305
Designation
Screws type
M10x45-10.9
M10x52-10.9
M10x65-10.9
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
m
m
Fig. 858
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 859
30-107
Method of intervention
Assembly of the piston cooling nozzles
1.
m
m
m
m
Clean the holes for the piston cooling nozzles in the crankcase.
Fit the piston cooling nozzle (1).
Tighten the screw (2): 21 Nm
Assemble the crankshaft.
Construction unit
05
Fig. 860
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 306
ID no.
Designation
Screws type
A02 071
Information/observa- Value
tions
21 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
Fig. 861
30-108
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Push out the piston cooling nozzle (1) using a suitable tool (2).
Carry out a visual inspection of the components.
Fig. 862
m
m
m
Clean the holes for the piston cooling nozzles in the crankcase.
With the bolt, insert a new piston cooling nozzle (1) to the stop.
Assemble the crankshaft.
Construction unit
05
1
Fig. 863
1.1. Flywheel
1.2. Ring gear
Fig. 864
30-109
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 865
3.
m
m
Fig. 866
m
m
Fig. 867
30-110
Method of intervention
Disassembly of the starter ring gear
1.
1.1. Flywheel
1.2. Ring gear
Fig. 868
2.
Fig. 869
3.
m
m
Fig. 870
30-111
Method of intervention
Assembly of the starter ring gear
1.
m
m
Fig. 871
Torque wrench
Special tools:
l
Plaster
DEUTZ DW 72 mastic
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
3 - Mounting pin
4 - Gear wheel
5 - Self-tapping screw
6 - Washer
8 - Hex screw
9 O-ring
11 - O-ring
12 - Mounting pin
Fig. 872
2.
Fig. 873
30-112
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 874
4.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 875
Fig. 876
30-113
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 877
3.
m
m
Fig. 878
4.
Fig. 879
30-114
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
Fig. 880
6.
Fig. 881
7.
m
m
Fig. 882
30-115
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 883
9.
m
m
Fig. 884
10.
Fig. 885
30-116
Method of intervention
11.
m
m
Fig. 886
12.
Fig. 887
13.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 888
30-117
Method of intervention
14.
Fig. 889
15.
m
m
Fig. 890
16.
Fig. 891
30-118
Method of intervention
17.
m
m
Fig. 892
18.
m
m
Fig. 893
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 307
ID no.
Designation
A72 001
A72 003
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
9 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-119
Method of intervention
30.4.44 - Assembly and disassembly of the crankshaft (L3)
Disassembly of the crankshaft
1.
m
m
1 - Crankshaft
5 - Threaded insert
Fig. 894
2.
01
09
Place the mark of reference (1) on the ring gear of the camshaft.
Note
The reference mark must be located on a line between the
marking (2) and the mid point (3) of the camshaft.
30-120
Fig. 895
Method of intervention
3.
Uniformly rotate the crankshaft until the mark (1) on the flange of the
shaft coincides with the auxiliary mark (2) on the camshaft ring gear.
Note
If the crankshaft flange is aligned, the mark on the camshaft
ring gear will be covered.
01
Fig. 896
05
m
m
05
m
m
Fig. 897
30-121
Method of intervention
2.
Special tools:
l
Fig. 898
30-122
Method of intervention
2.
Lift (1) the probe and press the release device (2).
Note
The probe (1) falls downward, briefly hits the surface and
goes up to the measurement value.
Fig. 899
3.
m
m
Fig. 900
Note
Measurement diagram of the main journals on points 1 and
2 in surfaces a and b.
Fig. 901
30-123
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 902
m
m
Fig. 903
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 904
30-124
Method of intervention
Measuring the length of the flanged bearing
1.
m
m
Fig. 905
2.
Measure the width of the flanged bearing using the internal bore
meter between the support surfaces of the thrust rings.
n Nominal value: 32.2(+0.04,+0) mm
n Degree of undersizing: 0.4 mm
Fig. 906
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 308
ID no.
P02 03
P02 04
P02 07
P02 11
P02 12
P02 21
P02 22
P02 23
P02 26
Designation
Additional information
Value
Standard
84(+0,-0.02) mm
two degrees of undersizing, 0.25 mm
each
Main bearing pin, manoeuvre
55 HRc
pin, surface hardness
Guide bearing pin, width
Standard
32.2(+0.04,+0) mm
Guide bearing pin, width
one degree of oversizing
0.4 mm
Manoeuvre pins, width
32.08(+0.02,+0) mm
Manoeuvre pin, diameter
Standard
69.994 (+0 0.02) mm
Manoeuvre pin, diameter
one degree of undersizing
0.25 mm
Crankshaft eccentricity
maximum permitted deviation 0.1 mm
Special tools:
l
30-125
Method of intervention
Check the endfloat
1.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 907
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 908
3.
m
m
Fig. 909
30-126
Method of intervention
4.
Push the internal bore meter between the test surfaces of the palmer and bring to 0.
Fig. 910
5.
Fig. 911
6.
Apply the thrust ring halves on the flanged bearing cover (arrows).
m
m
Table 309
Calculation example:
Target:
Data:
Measured value:
Calculation:
Dimension (a) - dimension (b)
The results of all this are:
Endfloat
(a) = 32.8 mm
(b) = 32.7 mm
= 0.1 mm
Fig. 912
30-127
Method of intervention
7.
m
m
Fig. 913
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 310
ID no.
P02 34
P02 35
P02 36
Designation
Additional information
Value
Table 311
1
2
952
953
Main bearing
Thrust
Main bearing
Thrust
Standard
Standard
Degree of undersizing
Degree of undersizing
Fig. 914
30-128
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
3.
Fig. 915
Fig. 916
30-129
Method of intervention
Fitting crankshaft bearings
1.
m
m
Fig. 917
2.
m
m
Fig. 918
3.
Insert the lower shells of the main bearings in the relative main bearing covers.
Fit the bearing shell, with the anti-twist retainer (1) in the groove (2).
WARNING
Take care to couple the bearing shells.
Fig. 919
30-130
Method of intervention
4.
Fix the two halves of the shims onto the flanged bearing cover with
a little grease.
Note
Fig. 920
Palmer
Internal bore meter
Table 312
1
2
952
953
Main bearing
Thrust
Main bearing
Thrust
Standard
Standard
Degree of undersizing
Degree of undersizing
Fig. 921
2.
Fig. 922
30-131
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 923
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 313
ID no.
Designation
P02 31
P02 32
P02 33
P02 35
P02 36
Additional information
Value
Standard
84.030 (+ 0.042, + 0) mm
0.25 mm
0.030 -0.092 mm
Special tools:
l
l
l
30-132
Method of intervention
Disassembly of the connecting rod drum
1.
Table 314
1
2
3
4
970
Fig. 924
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 925
WARNING
Do not place the connecting rod bearing cover on the break
section.
3.
Note
Put the components to one side in the order in which they were removed. Note the cylinder order.
30-133
Method of intervention
4.
WARNING
Do not damage the break sections of the connecting rod
drum!
5.
Fig. 927
6.
Note
To better represent the operation, the assembly of the assembly device (1) and the protective plug (2) is shown on a
removed connecting rod drum.
2
1
Fig. 928
30-134
Method of intervention
7.
m
m
m
Fig. 929
Insert the connecting rod bearing shell into the connecting rod drum.
WARNING
Take care to couple the bearing shells. The anti-twist safety
(1) must enter the groove (2).
Fig. 930
2.
Insert the connecting rod bearing shell into the relative flanged bearing cover.
WARNING
Take care to couple the bearing shells. The anti-twist safety
(1) must enter the groove (2).
Fig. 931
30-135
Method of intervention
3.
WARNING
The arrow (1) on the connecting rod bearing cover is facing
the flywheel. The flywheel/crankshaft symbol (2) is facing
the flywheel.
Fig. 932
4.
Insert the connecting rod bearing shell into the relative flanged bearing cover.
Note
Ensure that the bearing shells are matched correctly.
The anti-twist retainer must locate correctly in the
groove (1).
Fig. 933
5.
m
m
Fig. 934
30-136
Method of intervention
6.
m
m
Fig. 935
7.
Lightly oil the cylinder sliding surface, piston, piston rings and connecting rod pins.
n Piston diameter: 98 mm
Compress the piston rings with a compression collar (1) 130660.
n Piston diameter: 101 mm
Compress the piston rings with a compression collar (1) 130670.
Fig. 936
8.
m
m
Fig. 937
30-137
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 938
10.
Use the assembly device (1) to tighten the connecting rod drum until
it is aligned with the manoeuvre pin.
Disassemble the assembly device and the protective plug.
WARNING
Do not damage the break sections of the connecting rod
drum!
Fig. 939
11.
Delicately press the connecting rod drum against the connecting rod
pins.
WARNING
Do not bend the connecting rod drum with the crankshaft.
Fig. 940
30-138
Method of intervention
Assembly of the flanged bearing cover
1.
WARNING
Pay attention to coupling the flanged bearing cover. The numeric marks (1) on the connecting rod drum and on the connecting rod bearing cover must be identical and positioned
in front of each other during assembly.
WARNING
The allocation of the connecting rod drum and flanged bearing cover must be maintained. If the connecting rod drum
and the flanged bearing cover are switched when assembled, the connecting rod drum will not be usable! Do not
damage the breaking surfaces of the connecting rod drum
and flanged bearing cover!
2.
Fig. 941
Fit the cover (1) and the connecting rod bearing shell.
WARNING
The screws must be renewed after being removed.
Fig. 942
3.
16
Fig. 943
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 315
ID no.
P02 95
P02 96
Designation
Additional information
Value
120
180
30-139
Method of intervention
Tightening torque
Table 316
ID no.
Designation
A02 020
A02 020
A02 020
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
60
Stage 3:
60
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
Palmer
Rotation angle gauge: 8190
Internal bore meter
Connecting rod tester
Special tools:
l
Fit the dial gauge with a preload of approx. 1 mm in the internal bore meter.
Fig. 944
30-140
Method of intervention
2.
Note
Fig. 945
3.
m
m
Fig. 946
Note
The clearance of the piston pin results from the difference between the inner diameter of the connecting rod
small end bush (dimension A) and the diameter of the piston pin (dimension B).
Construction unit
07
Table 317
Calculation example:
Target:
Data:
Measured value:
Calculation:
Dimension (a) - dimension (b)
The results of all this are:
30-141
Method of intervention
Check the connecting rod bearing hole
1.
Fig. 947
2.
Alternatively tighten the screws with the rotation angle gauge and
the box spanner insert.
n Stage 1: 30 Nm
n
Stage 2: 60
Stage 3: 60
Fig. 948
3.
Fit the dial gauge with a preload of approx. 1 mm in the internal bore meter.
Fig. 949
30-142
Method of intervention
4.
Note
Measurement diagram of the connecting rod bearing hole in
points a and b in surfaces 1 and 2.
Fig. 950
5.
m
m
Fig. 951
Insert the connecting rod bearing shell into the connecting rod drum.
DANGER
Take care to couple the bearing shells. The anti-twist safety
(1) must enter the groove (2). The allocation of the connecting rod drum and flanged bearing cover must be maintained.
If the connecting rod drum and the flanged bearing cover
are switched when assembled, the connecting rod drum will
not be usable! Do not damage the breaking surfaces of the
connecting rod drum and flanged bearing cover!
Fig. 952
30-143
Method of intervention
2.
Insert the connecting rod bearing shell into the relative flanged bearing cover.
DANGER
Take care to couple the bearing shells. The anti-twist safety
(1) must enter the groove (2).
Fig. 953
3.
Fig. 954
4.
Alternatively tighten the screws with the rotation angle gauge and
the box spanner insert.
n Stage 1: 30 Nm
n
Stage 2: 60
Stage 3: 60
Fig. 955
30-144
Method of intervention
5.
Fit the dial gauge with a preload of approx. 1 mm in the internal bore meter.
Fig. 956
6.
Note
Measurement diagram of the internal diameter of the connecting rod bearing shells in points a and b in surfaces
1 and 2.
Fig. 957
7.
m
m
Fig. 958
30-145
Method of intervention
Determine the clearance of the connecting rod bearing
Note
The clearance of the connecting rod bearing results from the difference between the inner diameter of the connecting
rod bearing shell (C) and the diameter of the main journal (D).
l
Table 318
Calculation example:
Target:
Data:
Measured value:
Calculation:
Dimension (a) - dimension (b)
The results of all this are:
DANGER
It is not permitted to straighten the connecting rod drum.
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
C
D
Fig. 960
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 319
ID no.
P02 41
30-146
Designation
Additional information
Value
Method of intervention
ID no.
Designation
P02 42
Additional information
P02 43
P02 45
P02 49
P02 51
P02 52
P02 54
P02 55
P02 56
Value
0.04 mm
40 (+ 0.045, + 0.035) mm
0.035 - 0.051 mm
43 (+ 0.02, + 0) mm
24 ( 0, 0.3) mm
70.026 - 70.065 mm
0.25 mm
73.6 (+ 0.019, + 0) mm
0.036 - 0.095 mm
Tightening torque
Table 320
ID no.
Designation
A02 020
A02 020
A02 020
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
Stage 2:
60
Stage 3:
60
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
Bradawl: 8202
Assembly lever: 9017
Special tools:
l
Self-tapping screw
Washer
30-147
Method of intervention
Removal of the crankshaft oil seal
1.
m
m
m
m
m
1- Gear case
2- Hex screw
3- Hex screw
4- Shaft O-ring
234- Sealant
Fig. 961
2.
Fig. 962
3.
Fig. 963
30-148
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 964
m
m
Fig. 965
2.
m
m
Fig. 966
30-149
Method of intervention
3.
Note
If the crankshaft flange has an entry groove, the Oring can be installed at three different depths: - First
assembly = 2 washers. 1st repair - assembly level =
1 washer 2nd repair - assembly level = 0 washers
Fig. 967
4.
m
m
Fig. 968
5.
m
m
Fig. 969
30-150
Method of intervention
6.
m
m
Fig. 970
DEUTZ DW 67 sealant
m
m
m
m
m
1- Gear case
2- Hex screw
3- Hex screw
4- Shaft O-ring
234- Sealant
Fig. 971
30-151
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 972
m
m
m
3.
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the front cover.
Fig. 973
30-152
Method of intervention
Assembly of the gear case
1.
Clean the sealing surfaces of the gear box cover and the crankcase.
Note
The mating surfaces must be clean, dry and free of
grease or other contaminants. Sealing edge thickness, approx. 1.4 mm.
Apply mastic (arrowed).
WARNING
Assembly must be completed within a maximum of 1 hour.
Fig. 974
2.
m
m
Fig. 975
3.
Push up the gear box cover and align it flush with the sealing surface
of the oil sump (arrows).
Fig. 976
30-153
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 977
52
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 321
ID no.
Designation
Screws type
A03 092
Indications/observa- Value
tions
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
DEUTZ DW 67 sealant
m
m
m
m
m
1- Gear case
2- Hex screw
3- Hex screw
4- Shaft O-ring
234- Sealant
Fig. 978
30-154
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 979
m
m
3.
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the front cover.
Fig. 980
30-155
Method of intervention
Assembly of the gear case
1.
Clean the sealing surfaces of the gear box cover and the crankcase.
Note
The mating surfaces must be clean, dry and free of
grease or other contaminants. Sealing edge thickness, approx. 1.4 mm.
Apply mastic (arrowed).
WARNING
Assembly must be completed within a maximum of 1 hour.
Fig. 981
2.
m
m
Fig. 982
3.
Push up the gear box cover and align it flush with the sealing surface
of the oil sump (arrows).
Fig. 983
30-156
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 984
05
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 322
ID no.
Designation
Screws type
A03 092
Indications/observa- Value
tions
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
m
m
5- Hex screw
6 - Washer
Fig. 985
30-157
Method of intervention
2.
Note
Fig. 986
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 323
ID no.
Designation
Screws type
A03 092
Indications/observa- Value
tions
70Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-158
Method of intervention
30.4.55 - Assembly and disassembly of the camshaft (L3)
Disassembly of the camshaft
1.
1 - Camshaft
Fig. 988
2.
Disassemble the high pressure pump and the roller tappet (assembly position A).
Construction unit
17
Disassemble the high pressure pump and the roller tappet (assembly position B).
Construction unit
17
Fig. 989
11
m
m
30-159
Method of intervention
Assembly of the camshaft
1.
m
m
m
m
Assemble the high pressure pump and the roller tappet (assembly
position B).
Construction unit
Fig. 990
17
Assemble the high pressure pump and the roller tappet (assembly
position A).
Construction unit
17
Palmer
Prisms
m
m
Fig. 991
30-160
Method of intervention
Check the diameter of the bearing pin
1.
Fig. 992
Technical data
Test data and settings
Table 324
ID no.
P10 31
Designation
Additional information
Value
63 ( 0.05, 0.07) mm
Table 325
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Hex valve
Rocker support
Spring pin
Rocker
Rocker
Adjuster screw
Hexagonal head nut
Compression spring
Rotating ring bearing
Circlip
Rocker axis
Plug
Inlet
Drain
Fig. 993
30-161
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Turn the crankshaft until all the cylinder 3 and 4 pushrods reach the
lowest point.
Disengage the check nuts (1).
Turn all the adjustment screws (2) in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 994
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 995
m
m
m
m
Insert pushrods.
Turn the crankshaft until all the cylinder 3 and 4 pushrods reach the
lowest point.
Disengage the check nuts (1).
Turn the adjustment screw (2) in the direction of the arrow to the
end of stop.
Fig. 996
30-162
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 997
3.
Tighten the screws to torque in an even manner following the indicated tightening sequence.
n Stage 1: Hand-tighten
n Stage 2: 20 Nm
n Stage 3: 30 Nm
Check the valve clearances and adjust if necessary.
Construction unit
11
Fig. 998
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 326
ID no.
Designation
A01 002
A01 002
A01 002
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
20 Nm
Stage 3
30 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-163
Method of intervention
30.4.58 - Removing and refitting the valve timing system (L3)
Disassembly of the distribution valve
1.
Table 327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Hex valve
Rocker support
Spring pin
Rocker
Rocker
Adjuster screw
Hexagonal head nut
Compression spring
Rotating ring bearing
Circlip
Rocker axis
Plug
Inlet
Drain
Fig. 999
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1000
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1001
30-164
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Detach the rocker mount and the rocker from the rocker shaft.
Put the components to one side in the correct order of assembly.
Fig. 1002
m
m
Fig. 1003
2.
Slide the components onto the rocker shaft in the correct order of
assembly.
Note
Fit the intake rocker first (1), then the mount and finally the exhaust rocker (2). Ensure that the rocker
mounts are assembled in the correct positions.
Fig. 1004
30-165
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1005
4.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1006
m
m
m
1- Tappet
2- Pushrod
3 - Valve bridge
Fig. 1007
30-166
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 1008
3.
m
m
Fig. 1010
30-167
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1011
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1012
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1013
30-168
Method of intervention
Refitting the oil pickup pipe
1.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1014
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1015
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 328
ID no.
Designation
A08 015
A08 016
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
21 Nm
21 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-169
Method of intervention
30.4.61 - Assembly and disassembly of the oil intake pipe (L3)
Removal of the oil pickup pipe
1.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1016
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1017
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1018
30-170
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1019
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 329
ID no.
Designation
A08 015
A08 016
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
21 Nm
21 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-171
Method of intervention
Removal of the fuel control unit
1.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1020
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1021
3.
m
m
Fig. 1022
30-172
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 1023
5.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1024
m
m
Fig. 1025
30-173
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1026
3.
Fig. 1027
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 1028
30-174
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 1029
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 330
ID no.
Designation
A17 033
A17 034
A17 035
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
4.5 Nm
12 Nm
33 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
30-175
Method of intervention
Removal of the fuel control unit
1.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1030
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1031
3.
m
m
Fig. 1032
30-176
Method of intervention
4.
m
m
Fig. 1033
5.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1034
m
m
Fig. 1035
30-177
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1036
3.
Fig. 1037
4.
m
m
m
Fig. 1038
30-178
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 1039
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 331
ID no.
Designation
A17 033
A17 034
A17 035
Screws type
Indications/observa- Value
tions
4.5 Nm
12 Nm
33 Nm
Note
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of +/- 10 % is permitted.
Models: Agrotron M 600 - M 610 - M 620 - M 615 - M 625 - M 640 - M 650 - 6150.4 - 6160.4 - 6150 - 6160 - 6180 - 6190 - 150 165.7 - 265 - X 710 - X 720 - TTV 410 - TTV 420 - TTV 430 - TTV 610 - TTV 620 - TTV 630 - 6160 TTV - 6180 TTV - 6190 TTV - 7210
TTV - 7230 TTV - 7250 TTV
1.
2.
Loosen the compressor fastener screws, insert the shims 0.011.3980.0 and 0.011.3981.0 between the compressor and the
mounting brackets, and re-tighten the screws.
Misalignment X: max. 1.5 mm
Fig. 1040
30-179
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1041
4.
Fig. 1042
5.
Fig. 1043
6.
Fig. 1044
30-180
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 1045
8.
Shim positions on AT 6150 - 6160 - 6180 - 6190, AT TTV 6160 - 6180 6190.
Fig. 1046
9.
Fig. 1047
30-181
Method of intervention
Setting belt tension
Models Agrotron 150, 165.7, 265, M600 - 610 - 620, X710 - 720
1.
2.
Turn the tension adjustment screw to obtain a belt tension of 55050 N; run the engine for 5 minutes, allow the belt to cool,
then repeat the tension adjustment.
Tension adjustment screw AT 150, M600 - 610 - 620
Fig. 1048
3.
Fig. 1049
4.
Fig. 1050
5.
Fig. 1051
30-182
Method of intervention
Setting belt tension
Models Agrotron M 410 - 420 - 615 - 625 - 640 - 650; Agrotron 6150.4 - 6160.4; Agrotron 6150 - 6160 - 6180 - 6190; TTV 610
- 620 - 630 - 640; L710 - 720 - 730; TTV 410 - 420 - 430; TTV 6150.4 - 6160.4 TTV 6160 - 6180 - 6190; TTV 7210 - 7230 -7250
1.
2.
Turn the tension adjustment screw to obtain a belt tension of 59050 N; run the engine for 5 minutes, allow the belt to cool,
then repeat the tension adjustment.
Tension adjustment screw with lock nut AT M410 - 420 AT 6150.4 - 6160.4;
TTV 410 - 420 - 430; TTV 6150.4 - 6160.4
Fig. 1052
3.
Tension adjustment screw AT M615 - 625 - 640 - 650, TTV610 - 620 - 630
Fig. 1053
4.
Fig. 1054
5.
tension adjustment AT 6150 - 6160 - 6180 - 6190 TTV6160 - TTV 6180 TTV 6190
Fig. 1055
30-183
Method of intervention
6.
Fig. 1056
30-184
Method of intervention
30.5 - C0 - Engine accessories
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1057
30-185
Method of intervention
2.
WARNING
Make sure the parts are clean.
WARNING
Make sure no dirt falls into the fuel filter housing.
WARNING
Collect any spilled fuel and dispose of it correctly.
m
m
m
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1058
Fig. 1059
m
m
Fig. 1060
30-186
Method of intervention
2.
WARNING
Use new oil seals.
Fig. 1061
m
m
3.
Fig. 1062
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 332
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
30 Nm
42 Nm
39 Nm
49 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Method of intervention
WARNING
During work on the fuel system always maintain conditions of the maximum cleanliness. Before disassembling, remove any paint residues and particles of dirt. Carefully clean the area around the components concerned, time by
time. Dry any damp spots with a compressed air jet.
WARNING
When handling fuel observe the safety directives and specific local regulations.
WARNING
After opening the circuit, immediately close all the unions with new and clean plugs and caps. Remove plugs and caps
only immediately prior to assembly.
WARNING
Collect auxiliary materials in suitable containers and dispose of them in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
After all work on the fuel system the circuit must be bled of air.
Components:
m
Fig. 1063
2.
m
m
m
m
m
30-188
Method of intervention
Installing the fuel lift pump
1.
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 333
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30.5.3 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (fuel lift pump - pilot block)
Special tools:
30-189
Method of intervention
Removal of fuel lines
1.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1065
2.
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1067
4.
m
m
Fig. 1068
30-190
Method of intervention
5.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1069
6.
m
m
m
Fig. 1070
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1070
30-191
Method of intervention
2.
DANGER
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
DANGER
Check that the installation position is correct.
Fig. 1071
DANGER
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
m
3.
m
m
30-192
Fig. 1072
Method of intervention
4.
DANGER
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
DANGER
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
DANGER
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 334
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
14 Nm
30 Nm
30 Nm
39 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30.5.4 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - high pressure pump)
Special tools:
30-193
Method of intervention
WARNING
All fuel lines and fittings should be closed immediately after opening using new clean plugs or caps. Plugs or caps
should only be removed immediately prior to assembly.
WARNING
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Always bleed the fuel system after every intervention.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1074
2.
WARNING
Collect spilt fuel and dispose of it properly.
m
m
m
m
m
30-194
Fig. 1075
Method of intervention
Refitting the fuel line.
1.
WARNING
Fit new seals.
Fig. 1076
m
m
m
Install new seals on banjo bolts (2) and fit without tightening.
Install new seals on banjo bolt (1) and fit without tightening.
Tighten the banjo bolts in the specified sequence.
n Banjo bolt (1), Tightening torque 39 Nm
n Banjo bolts (2), Tightening torque 29 Nm
Fit the fuel return pipe.
n See para. 30.5.6 - Removal and refitting ... - page 30-198
n See para. 30.5.5 - Removal and refitting ... - page 30-195
n See para. 30.5.3 - Removal and refitting ... - page 30-189
WARNING
Check that the fuel lines are positioned correctly.
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 335
Designation
Type of tractor
Banjo bolt
M12x1.5 29 Nm
Banjo bolt
M14x1.5 39 Nm
Note:
Value
29 Nm
39 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30.5.5 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - fuel lift pump)
Special tools:
30-195
Method of intervention
WARNING
Before proceeding wit the operation, remove any paint residue and dirt. Carefully clean the area around the components to be worked on. Dry wet areas with a compressed air jet.
WARNING
When handling fuels, observe safety standards and all applicable local regulations.
WARNING
All fuel lines and fittings should be closed immediately after opening using new clean plugs or caps. Plugs or caps
should only be removed immediately prior to assembly.
DANGER
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Always bleed the fuel system after every intervention.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1078
30-196
Method of intervention
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1079
4.
Fig. 1080
WARNING
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
WARNING
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
m
m
2.
Fig. 1081
WARNING
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
WARNING
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
30-197
Method of intervention
3.
WARNING
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
WARNING
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
m
4.
Fig. 1083
m
m
Fig. 1084
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 336
Designation
Screws type
M8x16-10.9
Sleeve
Banjo bolt
M16x1.5
Banjo bolt
M10x1 18 Nm
M6x16-10.9
-
Note:
Value
20 Nm
49 Nm
18 Nm
13 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30.5.6 - Removal and refitting of fuel lines (rail, cylinder head, pilot block - fuel filter)
Special tools:
30-198
Method of intervention
DANGER
Danger! Do not work on the fuel system when the engine is running. The fuel system is under high pressure. Danger
of death! The pressure in the fuel system may still be as high as several hundred bar, even after the engine has been
switched off. In this case, the fuel pressure can only be reduced by opening the fuel supply system to allow the fuel
to flow out.
WARNING
Caution! Maximum cleanliness is essential when working on the fuel system.
WARNING
Before proceeding wit the operation, remove any paint residue and dirt. Carefully clean the area around the components to be worked on. Dry wet areas with a compressed air jet.
WARNING
When handling fuels, observe safety standards and all applicable local regulations.
WARNING
All fuel lines and fittings should be closed immediately after opening using new clean plugs or caps. Plugs or caps
should only be removed immediately prior to assembly.
DANGER
Collect used service products in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Always bleed the fuel system after every intervention.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
30-199
Method of intervention
2.
3.
m
m
Fig. 1087
4.
m
m
Fig. 1088
5.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1089
30-200
Method of intervention
Refitting fuel lines.
1.
WARNING
Fit new seals.
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1090
Fig. 1091
3.
m
m
Fig. 1092
30-201
Method of intervention
4.
WARNING
Caution! When installing the fuel line, make sure it is not
under tension.
WARNING
Check that the installation position is correct.
m
m
WARNING
Check that the wiring connector is properly connected.
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 337
Designation
Screws type
M12x1.5
Banjo bolt (with connection fitting) on M14x1.5
adapter
Swivel nut on fuel line, hose diameter 6 mm M 12x1.5
Hose end fitting
Banjo bolt
M14x1.5
Hose end fitting
Banjo bolt
M16x1.5
Note:
Value
29 Nm
29 Nm
20 Nm
39 Nm
49 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-202
Method of intervention
Removal of the heater
1.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
Fig. 1094
Fig. 1095
3.
DANGER
Note the installation position.
m
m
m
m
m
30-203
Method of intervention
Refitting the heater
1.
DANGER
Note the installation position.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1097
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 338
Designation
Screw type
M8x100-10.9
-
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
30-204
Fig. 1098
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
Fig. 1099
3.
m
m
Fig. 1100
4.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1101
30-205
Method of intervention
Refitting the heater
1.
WARNING
Before tightening the positive terminal screw, tighten screws
(1), (2) and (3).
WARNING
Do not turn the heater elements.
m
m
m
2.
Fig. 1102
Fig. 1103
3.
m
m
Fig. 1104
4.
m
m
m
m
m
30-206
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 339
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
25 Nm
11 Nm
8.5 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1106
30-207
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1107
3.
Fig. 1108
4.
Insert extractor tool (1) in the thermostat, turn clockwise and engage
thermostat.
Remove thermostat from thermostat housing using puller tool.
Fig. 1109
5.
m
m
m
m
30-208
Fig. 1110
Method of intervention
Installing the thermostat
1.
m
m
m
Fig. 1111
2.
With the assembly tool press the new oil sea until locating disc (1)
on the thermostat housing.
Remove the assembly tool.
Fig. 1112
3.
m
m
Fig. 1113
4.
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 340
Designation
Screws type
M8x40-10.9
M8x55-10.9
Note:
Value
30 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-209
Method of intervention
30.5.10 - Thermostat check (with thermostat disassembled)
Readily available commercial tools:
Thermometer
DANGER
Risk of injury! Hot water and hot thermostat.
m
m
Fig. 1114
2.
m
m
Fig. 1115
Nominal value: 86 C
m
m
Fig. 1116
30-210
Method of intervention
4.
Technical data
Test and adjustment data
Table 341
Designation
Additional Information:
at 98 C
-
Value
86C
minimum 9.5 mm
98C
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1117
30-211
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1118
3.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1119
4.
Fig. 1120
5.
m
m
Fig. 1121
30-212
Method of intervention
Installing the thermostat housing
1.
m
m
m
Fig. 1122
2.
m
m
Fig. 1123
3.
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1124
4.
m
m
m
m
m
m
30-213
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 342
Designation
Screws type
M10x70-10.9
Closing screw on thermostat housing
M14x1.5
Flexible hose connection on thermostat M14x1.5
housing
Closing screw on thermostat housing
M26x1,5
Relay (heater) on thermostat housing
M6x16-8.8
-
Note:
Value
60 Nm
34 Nm
34 Nm
110 Nm
8.5 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
COMPONENTS:
m
Fig. 1126
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1127
30-214
Method of intervention
Refitting the support
1.
WARNING
Check the installation position of the fan support.
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 343
Designation
Type of tractor
M10x45-10.9
M10x50-10.9
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1129
30-215
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1130
3.
m
m
Fig. 1131
4.
m
m
Fig. 1132
5.
m
m
m
Fig. 1133
30-216
Method of intervention
6.
m
m
Fig. 1134
7.
Fig. 1135
8.
Fig. 1136
9.
Fig. 1137
30-217
Method of intervention
10.
m
m
Fig. 1138
Press the spindle into the inner ball bearing until seated.
Fig. 1139
2.
Press the washer into the inner ball bearing until seated.
Fig. 1140
3.
Press the outer ball bearing into its housing until seated.
DANGER
The press tool (1) must bear on the outer race of the ball
bearing (arrowed).
Fig. 1141
30-218
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1142
5.
Press the spindle and the inner ball bearing until seated.
DANGER
Support the inner race of the outer ball bearing using a suitable tool (arrowed).
Fig. 1143
6.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1144
7.
30-219
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1146
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 344
Designation
Type of tractor
M12LHx85-12.9
M12LHx85-12.9
-
Note:
Stage 1:
Use a new screw.
Stage 2:
Value
30 Nm
90
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
Fig. 1147
2.
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1148
30-220
Method of intervention
Installing the temperature transmitter
1.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1148
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 345
Designation
Screws type
Note:
Value
45 Nm
32 Nm
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
Components:
m
Fig. 1149
30-221
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1150
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1151
m
m
Fig. 1152
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1153
30-222
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 346
Designation
Type of tractor
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1154
Fig. 1155
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1156
30-223
Method of intervention
Refitting the alternator
1.
m
m
Fig. 1157
2.
m
m
Fig. 1158
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 347
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
Fig. 1159
30-224
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1160
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1161
m
m
Fig. 1162
2.
m
m
Fig. 1163
30-225
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque
Table 348
Designation
Screw type
Note:
Value
60 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
DEUTZ DW 72 mastic
Components:
m
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1164
2.
m
m
m
Fig. 1165
3.
m
m
m
Fig. 1166
30-226
Method of intervention
Refitting the speed sensor
1.
m
m
Fig. 1167
2.
m
m
m
WARNING
Caution! Check that the cables are positioned correctly.
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 349
Designation
Type of tractor
M6x16-8.8
M6x30-10.9
-
Note:
Value
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30-227
Method of intervention
Removal of the speed sensor
1.
Components:
m
Fig. 1169
2.
m
m
m
m
m
Fig. 1170
m
m
m
Fig. 1171
30-228
Method of intervention
2.
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 350
Designation
Type of tractor
Note:
Value
9 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
m
m
Fig. 1173
30-229
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1174
3.
Fig. 1175
m
m
Fig. 1176
2.
m
m
Fig. 1177
30-230
Method of intervention
Technical data
Tightening torque:
Table 351
Designation
Cover to gearbox
Type of tractor
M8x55-10.9
M8x60-10.9
Note:
Value
21 Nm
IMPORTANT
When tightening fasteners to the specified torque using a torque wrench, a torque dispersion of 10 % is permitted.
30.5.21 - Installation and removal of the rotation device (torsional vibration damper)
Special tools:
Fig. 1178
2.
Fig. 1179
30-231
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1180
Components:
m
m
Fig. 1181
30-232
Method of intervention
2.
m
m
m
m
3.
m
m
Fig. 1183
m
m
Fig. 1184
2.
WARNING
Emptying and filling the air conditioning system must be performed as per the instructions and as shown in the
respective documentation/indications of the manufacturer of the vehicle/air conditioner.
m
m
m
m
Technical data
Tightening torque prescriptions
Table 352
Designation
Screws type
M8x80-10.9
-
Note:
Value
30 Nm
30-233
Method of intervention
IMPORTANT
For the tightening procedure on the basis of the tightening torque, using a torque wrench a tolerance of the tightening
torque value of 10% is permitted.
30-234
Method of intervention
30.6 - D0 - Transmission
Loosen all screw plugs (transmission/rear axle) and drain the oil.
WARNING
Waste oil to be disposed of ecologically and according to the
legal provisions!
Fig. 1185
2.
Fig. 1186
3.
Fig. 1187
4.
Put the complete unit (transmission with rear axle) on a heavy-duty pallet,
supporting the rear axle at the same time.
Then secure the rear axle by means of lifting device and loosen the screws.
(S) Eyebolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
Fig. 1188
30-235
Method of intervention
5.
Install two locating pins (S) and separate rear axle from the transmission.
(S) Locating pins (M14): 5.9035.197.0
(S) Assembly lever: 5.9035.203.0
Fig. 1189
Fix the transmission (without rear axle) on the assembly truck (see Figures)
(S) Assembly truck: 5.9035.193.0
(S) Clamping device: 5.9035.388.0
(S) Holding fixtures: 5.9035.389.0
Legend:
1 = Assembly truck
2 = Support
DANGER
Make sure that the transmission is sufficiently supported to
avoid any accidents (see Figure)!
2.
Fig. 1190
Legend:
3 = Clamping device
3
Fig. 1191
3.
Fig. 1192
30-236
Method of intervention
4.
Loosen the cylindrical screws and pull the releasing sensor lid out of the
housing.
IMPORTANT
Pull the sensor lid out of the housing by using the hexagon
screw of the cover (see previous Figure)!
WARNING
Do NOT use cables for pulling!
Fig. 1193
5.
Turn output shaft until slotted pin in the sleeve becomes visible (also refer
to the next Figure).
Then force out slotted pin and push back the sleeve.
(S) Assembly fixture: 5.9035.387.0
IMPORTANT
Slotted pin remains in the output shaft!
Fig. 1194
6.
Legend:
1 = Output shaft
2 = Sleeve
3 = Slotted pin
2
1
Fig. 1195
7.
Secure cartridge by means of the lifting tackle and loosen the bolted connection.
(S) Lifting hook: 5.9035.382.0
Fig. 1196
30-237
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1197
9.
Pull the sleeve off the output shaft and remove the slotted pin (see Figure).
Fig. 1198
Fix the transmission, without rear axle, to the assembly truck (see 1^ and
2^ figures).
(S) Assembly truck: 5.9035.193.0
(S) Clamping device: 5.9035.388.0
(S) Holding fixtures: 5.9035.389.0
WARNING
Fig. 1199
2.
To 1^ and 2^ figures:
2.1. Assembly truck
2.2. Clamping device
2.3. Support
Fig. 1200
30-238
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1201
4.
Loosen cylindrical screws (2x) and pull releasing sensor cover out of the
housing.
WARNING
Pull the sensor cover out of the housing by using the hexagon screw of the cover (3^ figure)!
WARNING
Do NOT use cables for pulling!
Fig. 1202
5.
Turn pinion until slotted pin in the sleeve becomes visible (also refer to the
following figure).
Then force out slotted pin and push back the sleeve.
(S) Assembly fixture: 5.9035.387.0
WARNING
Slotted pin remains in the output shaft!
Fig. 1203
6.
Legend to figure:
6.1. Pinion
6.2. Sleeve
6.3. Slotted pin
Fig. 1204
30-239
Method of intervention
7.
Secure cartridge by means of the lifting tackle and loosen the bolted connection.
(S) Hook: 5.9035.382.0
Fig. 1205
8.
Fig. 1206
9.
Pull the pinion off the output shaft and remove the slotted pin (5 figure).
Fig. 1207
30-240
Method of intervention
30.6.4 - Disassembly of shifting drum (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1208
Fig. 1209
2.
Fig. 1210
3.
Fig. 1211
30-241
Method of intervention
30.6.6 - Disassembly of P1 ring gear carrier
1.
Fig. 1212
2.
Loosen the tight-fit screws (2x) and the hexagon screws (2x).
Remove the releasing bracket.
WARNING
To prevent seizing, loosen the tight-fit screws first. Do NOT
use an impact wrench!
Fig. 1213
3.
4.
Bring snap ring into contact position within the annular groove of the spur
gear.
Pull off ring gear.
Fig. 1215
30-242
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1216
6.
Pull off the spur gear and remove the releasing tapered roller bearing.
Now force both bearing outer rings out of the spur gear.
Fig. 1217
7.
Fig. 1218
8.
Fig. 1219
30-243
Method of intervention
9.
If required, pull needle bearing (1) and slotted pin (2) out of the bearing
flange.
Fig. 1220
10.
Heat inner ring and press it off the bearing flange using the cut-off device
(S).
(S) Cut-off device: 5.9035.384.0
WARNING
Difficult disassembly, bearing inner ring is secured with Loctite!
Fig. 1221
11.
Drive tapered roller bearing off the spur gear (equally thru the holes).
Fig. 1222
30-244
Method of intervention
30.6.7 - Disassembly of P1/P2 Planetary drive
1.
Fig. 1223
2.
Fig. 1224
3.
Fig. 1225
4.
Fig. 1226
30-245
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1227
6.
Fig. 1228
7.
Remove the central shaft together with hollow shaft and ring gear.
Now pull needle sleeves out of hollow shaft and ring gear.
WARNING
Pay attention to releasing thrust washer!
Fig. 1229
30-246
Method of intervention
30.6.8 - Disassembly of P5/P6 Planetary drive
1.
Fig. 1230
2.
Fig. 1231
3.
Fig. 1232
4.
Fig. 1233
30-247
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1234
6.
Fig. 1235
7.
Fig. 1236
8.
Fig. 1237
30-248
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1238
Disengage the retaining ring and remove the adjusting washer behind.
Fig. 1239
2.
Fig. 1240
3.
Fig. 1241
30-249
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1242
5.
Preload the cup springs with a press, and disengage the retaining ring.
Now remove washer, cup springs and clutch ring out of the clutch carrier.
(S) Assembly fixture: 5.9030.971.0
WARNING
Piston remains in the clutch carrier; clutch carrier is supplied
as a complete component with preassembled piston!
Fig. 1243
Fig. 1244
2.
Fig. 1245
30-250
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1246
4.
Fig. 1247
Remove the O-rings (See arrows) from the annular grooves of the clutch
carrier.
Fig. 1248
2.
Loosen the clutch carrier (complete with planetary drive) with a plastic hammer and pull it out of the bracket.
WARNING
Use a plastic hammer!
WARNING
Be careful when pulling out the clutch carrier to avoid damage to the contact faces of the piston rings in the bracket!
Fig. 1249
30-251
Method of intervention
30.6.12 - Disassembly of K3/K4 clutch
1.
Fig. 1250
2.
Fig. 1251
3.
Fig. 1252
4.
Fig. 1253
30-252
Method of intervention
5.
6.
If required, pull needle bearing (1) and slotted pin (2) out of the clutch carrier.
Fig. 1254
Fig. 1255
Loosen the countersunk screws and remove the releasing fixing plate.
Fig. 1256
2.
Pull the planetary pins and remove the releasing single parts.
Fig. 1257
30-253
Method of intervention
30.6.14 - Disassembly of KR clutch
1.
Fig. 1258
2.
Fig. 1259
3.
Loosen the tight-fit screws (2x) and the hexagon screws (2x), and remove
the releasing bracket.
Note
Piston remains in the bracket. The bracket is supplied as a
complete component with preassembled piston!
WARNING
To prevent seizing, loosen the tight-fit screws first. Do NOT
use an impact wrench!
Fig. 1260
Loosen the hexagon screws and separate the cover from the bearing
bracket.
Fig. 1261
30-254
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1262
3.
Preload the cup springs with a press and disengage the snap ring.
(S) Pressure plate: 5.9035.464.0
Fig. 1263
4.
Pull the holder out of the cover and remove the releasing single parts.
Note
Piston remains in the cover; cover is supplied as a complete
component with preassembled piston!
Fig. 1264
5.
Fig. 1265
30-255
Method of intervention
6.
Loosen the cylindrical screws and remove the releasing bearing bracket.
Fig. 1266
Fig. 1267
2.
Fig. 1268
3.
Fig. 1269
30-256
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1270
5.
Fig. 1271
6.
Fig. 1272
30-257
Method of intervention
30.6.17 - Disassembly of hydrostatic unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1273
2.
Pull off the temperature sensor plug and loosen the screw plug (cpl. with
temperature sensor).
Fig. 1274
3.
Fig. 1275
4.
Fig. 1276
30-258
Method of intervention
5.
Loosen the plug with bayonet locking from the hydrostatic unit.
Fig. 1277
6.
Support the spur gear (see arrow) and loosen the hexagon screw.
IMPORTANT
This operation is to be done on both spur gears!
Fig. 1278
7.
Fig. 1279
8.
Fig. 1280
30-259
Method of intervention
30.6.18 - Disassembly of Hydrostatic Unit (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1281
2.
Fig. 1282
3.
Fig. 1283
4.
Fig. 1284
30-260
Method of intervention
5.
Loosen the plug with bayonet locking from the hydrostatic unit.
Fig. 1285
6.
Fig. 1286
7.
Fig. 1287
8.
Fig. 1288
30-261
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1289
Fig. 1290
2.
Separate the control (TCU) from the housing lid and loosen all plug connections.
WARNING
Do NOT bend the control unit (you may use a knife to loosen
the sealing compound)! NEVER dismantle the upper aluminum plate separately!
Fig. 1291
Fig. 1292
30-262
Method of intervention
2.
Separate the control (TCU) from the housing lid and loosen all plug connections..
WARNING
No further disassembly is permitted!
WARNING
Control is supplied as a component.
Fig. 1293
Fig. 1294
2.
Fig. 1295
3.
Fig. 1296
30-263
Method of intervention
4.
Pull the spacer ring and the lines (see arrows) out of the holes by means
of a spring hook (S).
(S) Spring hook: 5.9035.381.0
WARNING
When dismantling the upper line (check valve) take care not
to damage the spring!
Fig. 1297
5.
Fig. 1298
6.
Fig. 1299
7.
Pull the pump out of the housing lid and remove the releasing spur gear.
Fig. 1300
30-264
Method of intervention
30.6.22 - Disassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1301
2.
Fig. 1302
3.
Fig. 1303
4.
Fig. 1304
30-265
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1305
6.
Fig. 1306
7.
Fig. 1307
8.
Fig. 1308
30-266
Method of intervention
30.6.23 - Disassembly of Suction filter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1309
2.
Fig. 1310
Fig. 1311
2.
Fig. 1312
30-267
Method of intervention
30.6.25 - Disassembly of filter head (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Loosen the cable clip and separate the plug connection (service switch).
Fig. 1313
2.
Loosen the service switch and remove the releasing compression spring
and valve out of the hole.
Fig. 1314
3.
Loosen the cylindrical screws and remove the releasing filter head.
Fig. 1315
Fig. 1316
30-268
Method of intervention
2.
3
1
Fig. 1317
Fig. 1318
2.
Fig. 1319
30.6.28 - Disassembly of valves, pressure sensor, inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1320
30-269
Method of intervention
Disassembly of 4/3-directional valve
1.
Loosen the hexagon nut and pull releasing coils off the valve.
Fig. 1321
2.
Remove valve.
Fig. 1322
Loosen the cylindrical screw, remove claw and pull the releasing directional
valve out of the hole.
Fig. 1323
Fig. 1324
30-270
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1325
Fig. 1326
Take cable out of cable clip and loosen the inductive sensors by means of
plug insert (S).
(S) Plug insert: 5.9035.404.0
Fig. 1327
30.6.29 - Disassembly of wiring harness, valve block and plate (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1328
30-271
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1329
3.
Fig. 1330
4.
Fig. 1331
5.
Loosen the cylindrical screw and remove the releasing wiring harness.
Fig. 1332
30-272
Method of intervention
6.
Loosen the hexagon screws and pull the releasing wiring harness out of
the housing lid.
Fig. 1333
7.
Loosen the threaded joint and remove the rele sing valve block.
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the releasing seal rings!
Fig. 1334
8.
Secure plate with the lifting tackle and loosen the threaded joint.
Now separate the plate from the housing lid.
(S) Eyebolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
Fig. 1335
30-273
Method of intervention
30.6.30 - Disassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple)
(7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1336
2.
Loosen the service switch and remove the rele sing compression spring
and valve out of the hole.
Fig. 1337
3.
Loosen the cylindrical screws and remove the releasing filter head.
Fig. 1338
4.
Fig. 1339
30-274
Method of intervention
5.
4
1
Fig. 1340
6.
Fig. 1341
7.
Remove the complete thermocouple with co pression spring from the hole.
Fig. 1342
8.
Loosen the cylindrical screws and remove the releasing valve block.
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to releasing O-rings and rectangular rings!
Fig. 1343
30-275
Method of intervention
30.6.31 - Disassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Filter head, Pressure relief valves, Thermocouple
1.
Fig. 1344
2.
Fig. 1345
3.
Fig. 1346
4.
Fig. 1347
30-276
Method of intervention
5.
Screw plug
Pressure relief valve (Bake Cooling Oil)
Spacer part
Pressure relief valve (Lubrication)
Pressure relief valve (Cooler)
5
4
3
1
Fig. 1348
6.
Fig. 1349
7.
Remove the complete thermocouple with compression spring from the hole.
Fig. 1350
8.
Fig. 1351
30-277
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1352
30.6.32 - Disassembly of valve block (all-wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1353
2.
Loosen the cylindrical screw, remove claw and pull the releasing directional
valve out of the hole.
Fig. 1354
3.
Fig. 1355
30-278
Method of intervention
4.
Loosen plug with bajonet locking and remove wiring harness (filter pressure).
Fig. 1356
Fig. 1357
2.
Fig. 1358
3.
Fig. 1359
30-279
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1360
5.
Fig. 1361
6.
Fig. 1362
30-280
Method of intervention
30.6.34 - Disassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1363
2.
Loosen the cylindrical screw, remove claw and pull the releasing directional
valve out of the hole.
Fig. 1364
3.
Fig. 1365
4.
Fig. 1366
30-281
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1367
6.
Fig. 1368
30.6.35 - Disassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1369
2.
Fig. 1370
30-282
Method of intervention
30.6.36 - Disassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1371
2.
Loosen the hexagon nuts and remove the rele sing valve block.
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the releasing rectangular rings!
Fig. 1372
30.6.37 - Disassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1373
2.
Fig. 1374
30-283
Method of intervention
3.
Separate the cable clip and remove the releasing wiring harnesses (2x,
hydraulic control and oil sensors) from the housing lid.
Fig. 1375
4.
Loosen the bayonet locking and separate the plug connection (HCU, see
arrow).
Fig. 1376
5.
Loosen the hexagon screw, remove the fixing plate and remove the releasing wiring harness (TCU / HCU) from the housing lid.
Fig. 1377
6.
Fig. 1378
30-284
Method of intervention
7.
Loosen the hexagon screw, remove the fixing plate and pull the releasing
wiring harness (hydrostatic unit) out of the housing lid.
Fig. 1379
Fig. 1379
2.
Fig. 1379
3.
Separate the cable clip and remove the releasing wiring harnesses (2x,
hydraulic control and oil sensors) from the housing lid.
Fig. 1379
30-285
Method of intervention
4.
Loosen the bayonet locking and separate the plug connection (HCU, see
arrow).
Fig. 1379
5.
Loosen the hexagon screw, remove the fixing plate and remove the releasing wiring harness (TCU / HCU) from the housing lid.
Fig. 1379
6.
Fig. 1379
7.
Loosen the hexagon screw, remove the fixing plate and pull the releasing
wiring harness (hydrostatic unit) out of the housing lid.
Fig. 1379
30-286
Method of intervention
30.6.39 - Disassembly of W.H. and E.C.U. (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1380
2.
Fig. 1381
3.
Fig. 1382
4.
Loosen the bayonet locking and separate the plug connection (HCU, See
arrow).
Fig. 1383
30-287
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1384
6.
Fig. 1385
7.
Fig. 1386
30-288
Method of intervention
30.6.40 - Disassembly of inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1387
2.
Fig. 1388
Fig. 1389
2.
Fig. 1390
30-289
Method of intervention
30.6.42 - Disassembly of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Loosen the hexagon screws and pull out the output shaft by approx. 10 cm.
Fig. 1391
2.
Fig. 1392
3.
Loosen screws and lift the releasing plug-in module out of the transmission
housing by using a lifting tackle (S).
(S) Assembly lever set: 5.9035.203.0
(S) Load carrying fixture: AA00 633 706
Fig. 1393
4.
Fig. 1394
30-290
Method of intervention
30.6.43 - Disassembly of Plug-In Module (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1395
2.
Fig. 1396
3.
Loosen screws.
Lift the releasing plug-in module out of the transmission housing by using a
load carrying fixture (S).
(S) Assembly lever: 5.9035.203.0
(S) Load carrying fixture: 5.9035.460.0
Fig. 1397
4.
Fig. 1398
30-291
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1399
6.
Fig. 1400
7.
Fig. 1401
8.
If required, push the clutch carrier downward by slight hits until the spur
gear is in contact with the housing (See arrow).
Disengage retaining ring.
WARNING
Protect the releasing clutch carrier from falling down!
Fig. 1402
30-292
Method of intervention
9.
Take spur gear, retaining ring and tapered roller bearing out of the housing.
Fig. 1403
10.
Fig. 1404
11.
Fig. 1405
12.
Use the pressure sleeve (S) to relieve retaining ring via the cup spring and
disengage retaining ring.
Remove the releasing washer.
(S) Pressure sleeve: 5.9035.461.0
Fig. 1406
30-293
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 1407
14.
Fig. 1408
15.
Disengage retaining ring and pull off the releasing ball bearing.
Now remove the retaining ring (See arrow).
Fig. 1409
16.
Use a lever to pull the pressure cylinder off the clutch carrier.
Remove the releasing disk package.
Fig. 1410
30-294
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 1411
18.
Fig. 1412
19.
Fig. 1413
20.
Fig. 1414
30-295
Method of intervention
21.
Fig. 1415
22.
Fig. 1416
23.
Fig. 1417
24.
Fig. 1418
30-296
Method of intervention
25.
Fig. 1419
26.
Fig. 1420
27.
Fig. 1421
30-297
Method of intervention
30.6.44 - Disassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drive) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1422
2.
Fig. 1423
3.
Fig. 1424
4.
Use two-armed puller to force out clutch carrier until the spur gear is in
contact with the housing (see arrow).
Fig. 1425
30-298
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1426
6.
Take spur gear, retaining ring and tapered roller bearing out of the housing.
Fig. 1427
7.
Fig. 1428
8.
Fig. 1429
30-299
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1430
10.
Fig. 1431
11.
Fig. 1432
12.
Fig. 1433
30-300
Method of intervention
13.
Disengage retaining ring and pull off the releasing ball bearing.
Now remove the retaining ring (see arrow).
Fig. 1434
14.
Use a lever to pull the pressure cylinder off the clutch carrier and remove
the releasing disk package.
Fig. 1435
15.
Fig. 1436
16.
Fig. 1437
30-301
Method of intervention
30.6.45 - Disassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1438
2.
Pull the bearing bolt out of the housing and remove the releasing spur gear
out of the housing.
Fig. 1439
3.
Remove tapered roller bearing and drive both bearing outer rings out of
the spur gear.
Fig. 1440
Fig. 1441
30-302
Method of intervention
2.
Use two-armed puller to force pinion out of the housing until the ratchet
wheel gets into contact with the housing (see arrow).
Then remove the two-armed puller and the releasing tapered roller bearing.
Fig. 1442
3.
Fig. 1443
4.
Remove spur gear, disengage retaining ring and pull tapered roller bearing
off the pinion.
(S) Grab sleeve: 5.9035.431.0
(S) Basic tool: 5.9035.293.0
Fig. 1444
5.
Remove ratchet wheel out of the housing and force out both bearing outer
rings.
Fig. 1445
30-303
Method of intervention
30.6.47 - Disassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Loosen screw plug and remove the releasing spring and ball out of the hole.
Fig. 1446
2.
Fig. 1447
3.
Fig. 1448
4.
Loosen hexagon screw and pull bolt out of the housing by using a pulling
device (S).
(S) Pulling device: 5.9035.258.0
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the releasing single parts (lever and support roller)!
Fig. 1449
30-304
Method of intervention
5.
Disengage retaining ring, pull out flange bolt and remove support roller.
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the releasing rollers of the support roller!
Fig. 1450
6.
Loosen hexagon screw and pull bolt out of the housing by using a pulling
device (S).
(S) Pulling device: 5.9035.258.0
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the releasing single parts (ratchet and
spring)!
Fig. 1451
7.
Fig. 1452
8.
Fig. 1453
30-305
Method of intervention
30.6.48 - Disassembly of output shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Remove output shaft together with bearing cover out of the transmission
housing.
Fig. 1454
2.
Fig. 1455
3.
Drive output shaft out of the bearing cover and remove the releasing single
parts.
Fig. 1456
4.
Pull bearing outer ring (1) out of the bearing cover and drive out shaft seal
(2).
1
2
Fig. 1457
30-306
Method of intervention
5.
Disengage retaining rings and pull both roller bearings off the output shaft.
Fig. 1458
Remove output shaft together with bearing cover out of the transmission
housing.
Fig. 1459
2.
Fig. 1460
3.
Fig. 1461
30-307
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1462
5.
Fig. 1463
Fig. 1464
2.
Fig. 1465
30-308
Method of intervention
3.
Disengage retaining ring and pull the releasing intermediate tube out of the
housing.
Fig. 1466
4.
Secure the intermediate housing by a lifting tackle and loosen the threaded
joint.
Then separate intermediate housing from the transmission housing.
(S) Eyebolts: 5.9035.425.0
Fig. 1467
Fig. 1468
2.
Fig. 1469
30-309
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1470
4.
Secure the intermediate housing by a lifting tackle and loosen the threaded
joint.
Then separate intermediate housing from the transmission housing.
(S) Eyebolts: 5.9035.425.0
Fig. 1471
Fig. 1472
2.
Install two locating pins (S) and separate bearing cover from transmission
housing by using the assembly lever set (S).
(S) Locating pins (M10): 5.9035.253.0
(S) Assembly lever set: 5.9035.253.0
WARNING
Pay attention so that the drive shaft does not drop!
Fig. 1473
30-310
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1474
4.
Fig. 1475
5.
Pull bearing outer ring (1) out of the bearing cover by means of pulling device (S) and drive out shaft seal (2).
(S) Pulling device: 5.9035.213.0
1
2
Fig. 1476
6.
Fig. 1477
30-311
Method of intervention
30.6.53 - Disassembly of Drive Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1478
2.
Fig. 1479
3.
Fig. 1480
4.
Fig. 1481
30-312
Method of intervention
5.
Pull bearing outer ring (Arrow 1) out of the bearing cover by means of pulling device (S).
Drive out shaft seal (Arrow 2).
Fig. 1482
6.
Fig. 1483
Install cylindrical pins (2x, See arrows 1) and stud bolts (4x, See arrows 2).
Tightening torque:
MA = 33 Nm
1
2
WARNING
Wet threads of stud bolts with Loctite (Type # 243)!
2
1
Fig. 1484
2.
Fig. 1485
30-313
Method of intervention
3.
Insert plate (See arrow) into the transmission housing and fix it by hexagon
screws.
Tightening torque:
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1486
Insert bearing outer ring (See arrow) into the housing hole until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1487
2.
Heat both tapered roller bearings and mount them to the drive shaft until
contact is obtained.
WARNING
Adjust both bearings after cooling down!
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Fig. 1488
3.
Insert shaft seal into the bearing cover until contact is obtained.
(S) Driver tool: 5.9035.359.0
(S) Handle: 5.9035.222.0
WARNING
Wet outer diameter of the shaft seal ring with spirit just before installation!
Fig. 1489
30-314
Method of intervention
4.
Legend to figure:
4.1. Bearing cover
4.2. Shaft Seal
Fig. 1490
5.
Grease O-ring (See arrow) and insert it into the annular groove.
Fig. 1491
6.
Insert bearing outer ring (Arrow 1) into the bearing hole until contact is
obtained.
Grease O-ring (Arrow 2) and insert it into the annular groove.
2
Fig. 1492
7.
Fig. 1493
30-315
Method of intervention
8.
Insert the preassembled drive shaft into the transmission housing and fix it
by means of the preassembled bearing cover.
Fig. 1494
9.
Fig. 1495
10.
Position the dial indicator at the drive shaft and measure the existing axial
play.
WARNING
Any deviation from the required axial play must be corrected
with appropriate shims (10 ^ figure)!
Fig. 1496
30-316
Method of intervention
30.6.56 - Reassembly of Intermediate Housing (7230 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1497
MA = 120 Nm
Wet mounting face (see arrow) with sealing agent with Loctite (Type # 574).
Fig. 1498
3.
Use lifting tackle to bring the intermediate housing into contact position with
the transmission housing.
(S) Eyebolts: 5.9035.425.0
Fig. 1499
30-317
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1500
5.
Fig. 1501
6.
Insert intermediate tube into the intermediate housing and fix it using a
retaining ring.
Fig. 1502
7.
Fig. 1503
30-318
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1504
If nominal dimension deviation on pinion, tapered roller bearing and housing is zero, shim thickness is 1.40 mm.
The deviations indicated on housing and pinion are understood to be in
1/100 mm.
2.
Fig. 1506
3.
Fig. 1507
30-319
Method of intervention
4.
5.
Deviation / example:
Basic shim dimension/thickn. = 1.40 mm
Housing deviation e.g. +5
Pinion deviation e.g. 0
Bearing deviation e.g. 38.95 mm
----+ 1.40 mm
+ 0.05 mm
0.00 mm
+ 0.05 mm
Thickness of determined shim = 1.50 mm
In case of results up to 0.02 mm or 0.07, respectively, round down to next shim thickness.
In case of results as of 0.03 mm or 0.08, respectively, round up to the next shim thickness.
Place the determined shim (e.g. thickness = 1.50 mm) into the bearing
hole.
Insert bearing outer ring until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1508
6.
Heat tapered roller bearing and mount it to the pinion until contact is obtained.
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Fig. 1509
7.
Fig. 1510
30-320
Method of intervention
8.
Mount spur gear to the pinion and fix it by using retaining ring.
WARNING
Observe the installation position!
WARNING
Mount spur gear with identifying groove (See arrow) showing upwards!
Fig. 1511
9.
Fig. 1512
10.
Secure pinion.
Rotate housing by 180.
Fig. 1513
11.
Insert bearing outer ring into the housing hole until contact is obtained.
Then heat the tapered roller bearing and mount it to the pinion until contact
is obtained.
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Fig. 1514
30-321
Method of intervention
12.
Fig. 1515
13.
Fig. 1516
14.
Relieve bearing by means of slight hits and rotate pinion in both directions
several times.
Then check rolling torque using the torque wrench.
Setting of the bearings:
WARNING
New bearings Try to achieve the upper value of the bearing rolling torque!
WARNING
Fig. 1517
Used bearings Try to achieve the lower value of the bearing rolling torque!
15.
Fig. 1518
30-322
Method of intervention
16.
Fig. 1519
17.
Oil O-rings (See arrows) and place them into the annular grooves of pressure cylinder and piston.
Fig. 1520
18.
Fig. 1521
19.
Mount preassembled pressure cylinder onto the clutch carrier until contact
is obtained.
Fig. 1522
30-323
Method of intervention
20.
21.
Fig. 1524
22.
Fig. 1525
23.
Engage retaining ring (also see other figure) into the annular groove of the
clutch carrier.
Fig. 1526
30-324
Method of intervention
24.
Fig. 1527
25.
Mount shim:
Optional thickness = 3.8 mm
(Recommended value).
Fig. 1528
26.
Fig. 1529
27.
Fig. 1530
30-325
Method of intervention
28.
Fig. 1531
29.
Install bearing outer ring (Arrow 1) into the housing hole until contact is
obtained.
Insert spur gear (Arrow 2).
WARNING
Observe the installation position!
WARNING
Mount spur gear with identifying groove (See arrow) showing upwards!
30.
2
Fig. 1532
Fig. 1533
31.
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the clutch carrier.
Fig. 1534
30-326
Method of intervention
32.
Insert bearing outer ring (See arrow) into the housing hole until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1535
33.
Then heat tapered roller bearing (See arrow) and mount it to the clutch carrier until contact is obtained.
WARNING
Install the tapered roller bearing whilst maintaining contact
to the mounted All-Wheel-Drive clutch.
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Fig. 1536
34.
Fig. 1537
35.
Position dial indicator at the clutch carrier and measure the axial play.
Fig. 1538
30-327
Method of intervention
36.
Fig. 1539
37.
Fig. 1540
38.
Mount bearing unit (Tapered roller bearing with spacer ring) into the spur
gear.
WARNING
Replace bearing unit as a complete assy only (Both tapered
roller bearings and spacer ring)!
Fig. 1541
39.
30-328
Fig. 1542
Method of intervention
40.
Fig. 1543
41.
Fig. 1544
42.
Grease O-ring (See arrow) and insert it into the annular groove of the cover.
Fig. 1545
43.
Fig. 1546
30-329
Method of intervention
44.
Fig. 1547
45.
Fig. 1548
46.
Use lifting tackle (S) to place the plug-in module into the transmission housing.
Fix it by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M12/10.9):
MA = 115 Nm
(S) Load carrying fixture: 5.9035.460.0
Fig. 1549
47.
Fig. 1550
30-330
Method of intervention
30.6.58 - Reassembly of Output Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the output shaft.
Fig. 1551
2.
Heat both tapered roller bearings and mount them onto the shaft until contact with the retaining ring is obtained.
WARNING
Adjust bearings after cooling down!
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Then fix tapered roller bearings by means of retaining ring.
3.
Fig. 1552
Mount bearing outer ring into the bearing cover until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1553
4.
Fig. 1554
30-331
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1555
6.
Engage the retaining ring into the annular groove until contact with the
groove base is obtained.
Then oil the O-ring (See arrow) and insert it into the annular groove.
Fig. 1556
7.
DANGER
Use of the specified driver tool (S) ensures the exact installation position of the shaft seal!
Fig. 1557
8.
DANGER
Use of the specified driver tool (S) ensures the exact installation position of the screen sheet!
Fig. 1558
30-332
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1559
MA = 6 Nm
WARNING
Wet threads of stud bolts and breather valve with Loctite
(Type # 243)!
2.
Fig. 1560
Fig. 1561
3.
Fig. 1562
30-333
Method of intervention
30.6.60 - Reassembly of Inductive Sensors (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Mount inductive sensors (5x) into housing lid and sensor cover.
Tightening torque:
MA = 45 Nm
(S) Socket insert: 5.9035.404.0
WARNING
Connection plugs of the inductive sensors are marked in different colors.
WARNING
Fig. 1563
WARNING
Wet threads of inductive sensors with Loctite (Type # 243)!
Legend:
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
Orange
Green
Brown
Black
Grey
1
2
3
4 5
Fig. 1564
3.
Fix cables of inductive sensors with cable clip (See arrow), clamp and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8):
MA = 9.5 Nm
Fig. 1565
Fig. 1566
30-334
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1567
3.
Fig. 1568
4.
Fit plug to control unit (See arrow) and mount W.H. of Hydrostatic Unit
(Bayonet Locking).
Fig. 1569
5.
Insert W.H. 8(2x, Hydraulic Control and oil sensors) into the housing lid.
Fix
W.H. with cable clips (See arrow).
Fig. 1570
30-335
Method of intervention
6.
Provide pressure sensor with new seal ring and mount it.
Tightening torque:
MA = 20 Nm
Fig. 1571
7.
Fig. 1572
30.6.62 - Reassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Use grease to fix rectangular rings (2x, See arrows) into the countersinks
of the housing lid.
WARNING
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1573
2.
Fig. 1574
30-336
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1575
2.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings (See arrows) into the countersinks
of the valve block.
WARNING
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1577
3.
Mount valve block and fix it with hexagon nuts and cylindrical screws.
Tightening torque (M8):
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1578
30-337
Method of intervention
4.
Install directional valves into the valve block until contact position.
Now fix them by means of claw and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque:
MA = 9 Nm
Fig. 1579
5.
Fig. 1580
6.
Fig. 1581
7.
Provide pressure sensor with new seal ring and mount it.
Tightening torque:
MA = 20 Nm
Fig. 1582
30-338
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1583
9.
Fig. 1584
Provide fittings and screw plugs with new seal rings and mount them.
Then fit the pipe union (See figure for installation position)
1.1. Pipe Union
MA = 60 Nm
1.2. Fitting
MA = 90 Nm
1.3. Screw plug
MA = 35 Nm
1
2
2
WARNING
Wet thread of fitting with Loctite (Type # 243)!
3
Fig. 1585
WARNING
This operation is only required when using a new valve
block!
30-339
Method of intervention
2.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings and O-Rings (See arrows) into the
countersinks of the valve block.
WARNING
Use new rectangular rings and O-Rings!
Fig. 1586
3.
Fig. 1587
4.
Mount O-Rings (See arrows) onto the cooler PRV, lubrication PRV and
brake cooling oil PRV (4).
WARNING
Installation of the O-Rings is only necessary when they are
replaced!
WARNING
Pressure relief valves are supplied with O-Ring.
Fig. 1588
5.
Insert the pressure relief valves and the spacer part (See following figure).
Legend:
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
Cooler PRV
Lubrication PRV
Spacer part
Brake cooling oil PRV
Screw plug
1
2
3
5
Fig. 1589
30-340
Method of intervention
6.
Provide screw plug (5) with new O-Ring and fit it.
Tightening torque:
MA = 30 Nm
Fig. 1590
7.
Place O-Rings (2x, See arrows) into the countersinks of the filter head.
Fig. 1591
8.
Fig. 1592
9.
Fig. 1593
30-341
Method of intervention
10.
Fig. 1594
11.
Fig. 1595
12.
Fig. 1596
30-342
Method of intervention
30.6.65 - Reassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Grease O-Rings (See arrows) and insert them into the annular grooves of
the pump housing.
Fig. 1597
2.
Fig. 1598
3.
Maintain contact position of pump shaft and fix spur gearwith retaining ring.
Fig. 1599
4.
Fig. 1600
30-343
Method of intervention
5.
Engage retaining ring into the inner annular groove of the sleeve.
Then mount sleeve to the pump shaft until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1601
6.
Fig. 1602
7.
Grease O-Rings and insert them into the annular grooves of the straight
tube.
Then insert straight tube into the housing hole until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1603
8.
Grease O-Rings and insert them into the annular grooves of the straight
tube.
Then insert straight tube and intermediate ring into the housing holes until
contact is obtained.
Fig. 1604
30-344
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1605
Fig. 1606
2.
Legend to figure:
Table 353
Digit / Numer
Colour
A
Grey
B
Black
C
Green
D
Brown
1
Grey
2
Black
3
Green
4
Brown
5
Orange
W.H. = Wiring Harness
I.S. = Inductive Sensor
A C 1
B D 2
3 5
Typology
(W.H.)
(I.S.)
Fig. 1607
30-345
Method of intervention
3.
Fix control unit by means of hexagon screws and hexagon nuts with washers.
Tightening torque (M6):
1
9
MA = 9.5 Nm
WARNING
13
12
14
10
11
6
7
Fig. 1608
WARNING
Wet mounting surface with proper sealing agent.
Fig. 1609
2.
1
3
Fig. 1610
3.
Use lifting tackle (S) to position the hydrostatic unit in the housing lid, connecting the plugs wiring harness/pressure sensors at the same time.
(S) Load carrying fixture: 5.9035.467.0
Fig. 1611
30-346
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1612
5.
Support the spur gear and fix it by means of hexagon screw and washer.
Tightening torque (M10/10.9):
MA = 68 Nm
WARNING
This operation is to be done on both spur gears!
WARNING
Wet threads of hexagon screws with Loctite (Type # 243)!
6.
Fig. 1613
Fig. 1614
7.
Fig. 1615
30-347
Method of intervention
8.
Oil the O-Rings (2x) and insert them into the annular grooves of the line
and grease them.
Now insert the line into the hydrostatic unit until contact.
Fig. 1616
9.
Fig. 1617
10.
Oil the O-Rings (2x) and insert them into the annular grooves of the screw
plug.
Fit the screw plug.
Tightening torque:
MA = 160 Nm
Fig. 1618
11.
Fig. 1619
30-348
Method of intervention
12.
Fig. 1620
Fig. 1621
2.
Fig. 1622
Install cylindrical pins (2x, see 1) and stud bolts (4x, see 2).
Tightening torque
MA = 33 Nm
2
WARNING
Wet threads of stud bolts with Loctite (type No.: 243)!
Fig. 1623
30-349
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1624
3.
Insert plate (see arrow) into the transmission housing and fix it by hexagon
screws.
Tightening torque
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1625
Insert bearing outer ring (see arrow) into the housing hole until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1626
2.
Heat both tapered roller bearings and mount them to the drive shaft until
contact is obtained.
IMPORTANT
Adjust both bearings after cooling down!
Fig. 1627
30-350
Method of intervention
3.
Insert shaft seal (also refer to the following sketch) into the bearing cover
until contact is obtained.
(S) Driver tool: 5.9035.359.0
(S) Handle: 5.9035.222.0
IMPORTANT
Wet outer diameter of the shaft seal ring with spirit just before installation!
Fig. 1628
4.
Legend:
1 = Bearing cover
2 = Shaft seal ring
1
Fig. 1629
5.
Grease O-ring (see arrow) and insert it into the annular groove.
Fig. 1630
6.
Insert bearing outer ring (1) into the bearing hole until contact is obtained.
Grease O-ring (2) and insert it into the annular groove.
Fig. 1631
30-351
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 1632
8.
Insert the preassembled drive shaft into the transmission housing and fix it
by means of the preassembled bearing cover.
Fig. 1633
9.
Fig. 1634
10.
Position the dial indicator at the drive shaft and measure the existing axial
play.
IMPORTANT
Any deviation from the required axial play must be corrected
with appropriate shims!
Fig. 1635
30-352
Method of intervention
30.6.71 - Reassembly of intermediate housing (7210 TTVAgrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1636
MA = 120 Nm
Wet mounting face (see arrow) with sealing agent (Loctite type No.: 574).
Fig. 1637
3.
Use lifting tackle to bring the intermediate housing into contact position with
the transmission housing.
(S) Eyebolts: 5.9035.425.0
Fig. 1638
30-353
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1639
5.
Fig. 1640
6.
Insert intermediate tube into the intermediate housing and fix it using a
retaining ring.
Fig. 1641
7.
Fig. 1642
30-354
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1643
IMPORTANT
If nominal dimension deviation on pinion, tapered roller
bearing and housing is zero, shim thickness is 1.40 mm.
Fig. 1644
3.
Fig. 1646
30-355
Method of intervention
4.
5.
Deviation / example:
Basic shim dimension/thickn. = 1.40 mm . . . . . 1.40 mm
Housing deviation e.g. +5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 0.05 mm
Pinion deviation e.g. 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00 mm
Bearing deviation e.g. 38.95 mm . . . . . . . . . . . + 0.05 mm
Thickness of determined shim = . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.50 mm
In case of results up to 0.02 mm or 0.07, respectively, round down to next shim thickness.
In case of results as of 0.03 mm or 0.08, respectively, round up to the next shim thickness.
Place the determined shim (e.g. thickness = 1.50 mm) into the bearing hole
and adjust bearing outer ring until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1647
6.
Heat tapered roller bearing and mount it to the pinion until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1648
7.
Fig. 1649
8.
Place ratchet wheel (1) and afterwards spur gear (2) into the housing.
IMPORTANT
Observe correct installation position of the ratchet wheel,
see Figure!
Fig. 1650
30-356
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1651
10.
Fig. 1652
11.
Fig. 1653
12.
Insert bearing outer ring into the housing hole until contact is obtained.
Then heat tapered roller bearing and mount it to the pinion until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1654
30-357
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 1655
14.
Relieve bearing by means of slight hits and rotate pinion in both directions
several times.
Then check rolling torque using the torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
This setting of the bearing refers to the installation of new
bearings! In case of used bearings try to achieve the lower
value of the specified bearing rolling torque!
Fig. 1656
15.
Fig. 1657
30-358
Method of intervention
30.6.73 - Reassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Oil O-rings (3x, see arrows) and insert them into the annular grooves of
cylinder bush and piston.
Then mount piston into the cylinder bush until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1658
2.
Fig. 1659
3.
Insert ratchet with leg spring (see arrow) into the housing and fix it with bolt.
Fig. 1660
4.
Insert tab into the fork head and fix it by using flange bolt, spacer and retaining ring.
Fig. 1661
30-359
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1662
6.
Insert support roller into the lever and fix it by means of flange bolt, spacer
and retaining ring.
IMPORTANT
Observe installation direction, see Figure!
WARNING
Secure the rollers of the support roller!
Fig. 1663
7.
Fig. 1664
8.
Fig. 1665
30-360
Method of intervention
9.
Install tab in the lever by means of bolt, spacer and retaining ring.
Fig. 1666
10.
Fig. 1667
11.
In case of a correct setting (also refer to the following Figure) the support
roller of the ratchet must be in contact position with the setting device (S).
IMPORTANT
Despite the contact position to the support roller, it must be
easy to pull out the setting device (S)!
Check by positioning the ratchet on a tooth of the ratchet wheel (tooth on
tooth position).
There must be little play (0.1 mm).
Fig. 1668
12.
Fig. 1669
30-361
Method of intervention
13.
Fix fork head (after completed park lock setting) by means of cylindrical
screws.
Tightening torque
MA = 23 Nm
WARNING
Wet threads of cylindrical screws with Loctite (type No.:
243)!
Fig. 1670
14.
Fig. 1671
15.
Provide the screw plug with a new seal ring and install it.
Tightening torque
MA = 40 Nm
Fig. 1672
30-362
Method of intervention
30.6.74 - Reassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drIve) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Version with slotted nut
1.
Fig. 1673
2.
Grease O-rings (see arrows) and place them into the annular grooves of
pressure cylinder and piston.
Fig. 1674
3.
Fig. 1675
4.
Mount preassembled pressure cylinder onto the clutch carrier until contact
is obtained.
Fig. 1676
30-363
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1677
6.
Fig. 1678
7.
Fig. 1679
8.
Engage retaining ring (also see Figure 55) into the annular groove of the
clutch carrier.
Fig. 1680
30-364
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1681
10.
Fig. 1682
11.
Fig. 1683
12.
Fig. 1684
30-365
Method of intervention
Version with washer and retaining ring
1.
Fig. 1685
2.
Grease O-rings (see arrows) and place them into the annular grooves of
pressure cylinder and piston.
Fig. 1686
3.
Fig. 1687
4.
Mount preassembled pressure cylinder onto the clutch carrier until contact
is obtained.
Fig. 1688
30-366
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1689
6.
Fig. 1690
7.
Fig. 1691
8.
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the clutch carrier.
Fig. 1692
30-367
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1693
10.
Fig. 1694
11.
Preload cup springs with pressure sleeve (S) and engage retaining ring.
(S) Pressure sleeve: 5.9035.461.0
Fig. 1695
30-368
Method of intervention
Continues for both version
1.
Fig. 1696
2.
Fig. 1697
3.
Install bearing outer ring (1) into the housing hole until contact is obtained
and insert spur gear (2).
1
Fig. 1698
4.
Fig. 1699
30-369
Method of intervention
5.
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the clutch carrier.
Fig. 1700
6.
Insert bearing outer ring (see arrow) into the housing hole until contact is
obtained.
Then heat tapered roller bearing and mount it to the clutch carrier until
contact is obtained.
Fig. 1701
7.
Fig. 1702
8.
Position dial indicator at the clutch carrier and measure the axial play.
Fig. 1703
30-370
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1704
10.
Place seal ring (see arrow) into the annular groove of the clutch carrier and
use grease to position it centrically.
Fig. 1705
11.
Grease O-ring (see arrow) and insert it into the annular groove of the cover.
Fig. 1706
12.
Place cover into the housing and fix it by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M8/8.8)
MA = 23 Nm
WARNING
Wet mounting face with Loctite (type No.: 574)!
Fig. 1707
30-371
Method of intervention
30.6.75 - Reassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Mount bearing unit (tapered roller bearing with spacer ring) into the spur
gear.
WARNING
Replace bearing unit as a complete assy only (both tapered
roller bearings and spacer ring)!
Fig. 1708
2.
Fig. 1709
3.
Fig. 1710
4.
Fig. 1711
30-372
Method of intervention
30.6.76 - Reinstallation of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1712
2.
Use lifting tackle (S) to place the plug-in module into the transmission housing and fix it by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M12/10.9)
MA = 115 Nm
(S) Load carrying fixture: 5.9035.426.0
Fig. 1713
3.
Mount pressure line (see arrow) by means of fitting and cap screw.
Tightening torque
MA = 40 Nm
IMPORTANT
Provide fitting with a new seal ring!
Fig. 1714
4.
3
1
Fig. 1715
30-373
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1716
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the output shaft.
Fig. 1717
2.
Heat both tapered roller bearings and mount them onto the shaft until contact with the retaining ring is obtained.
IMPORTANT
Adjust bearings after cooling down!
Fig. 1718
3.
Mount bearing outer ring into the bearing cover until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1719
30-374
Method of intervention
4.
Support the bearing cover (see arrow), mount the preassembled output
shaft and insert the bearing outer ring until contact is obtained
Fig. 1720
5.
Fig. 1721
6.
Engage the retaining ring into the annular groove until contact with the
groove base is obtained.
Then grease the O-ring (see arrow) and insert it into the annular groove.
Fig. 1722
7.
30-375
Method of intervention
8.
9.
Insert the preassembled drive shaft into the transmission housing and fix it
by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M10/8.8)
MA = 46 Nm
Fig. 1725
IMPORTANT
The following operations are only required when using
a new
housing lid!
Fit plugs (6x, see arrows).
Fig. 1726
2.
30-376
Fig. 1727
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1728
4.
Fig. 1729
Mount all screw plugs and stud bolts (Figure 5 and 6) into the
plate.
Legend:
1 = Screw plug (M14x1.5)
MA = 35 Nm
4
3
MA = 35 Nm
3 = Screw plug (M10x1)
Fig. 1730
MA = 25 Nm
4 = Stud bolt (M8x60)
MA = 9 Nm
5 = Stud bolt (M8x80)
MA = 9 Nm
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a new
plate!
30-377
Method of intervention
2.
Legend:
1 = Screw plug (M12x1.5)
MA = 35 Nm
2 = Screw plug (M12x1.5)
MA = 35 Nm
3 = Screw plug (M10x1)
MA = 25 Nm
Fig. 1731
WARNING
Wet threads of stud bolts with Loctite (type No.: 243)!
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a new
plate!
3.
2
1
MA = 60 Nm
2 = Fitting
MA = 90 Nm
3 = Fitting
MA = 55 Nm
4 = Fitting
Fig. 1732
MA = 35 Nm
WARNING
Wet thread of fitting (2) with Loctite (type No.: 243)!
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a new
plate!
30-378
Method of intervention
4.
Insert one back-up ring and one O-ring each into the countersinks of the
cover plate (see arrows).
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a new
plate!
Fig. 1733
5.
6.
Use grease to fix O-rings and rectangular rings into the countersinks of the
plate.
(S) Eyebolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
IMPORTANT
Use new O-rings and rectangular rings!
Fig. 1735
7.
Use the lifting tackle to bring plate into contact position with the housing lid
and fix it with cylindrical screws and hexagon nuts.
Tightening torque
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1736
30-379
Method of intervention
30.6.80 - Reassembly of valve block (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
2.
Fig. 1737
Wet throttle with Loctite (type No.: 638) and mount it.
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a
new valve block!
Fig. 1738
3.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings (see arrows) into the countersinks
of the valve block.
IMPORTANT
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1739
4.
Mount the valve block and fix it with cylindrical screws and hexagon nuts
with washers.
Tightening torque
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1740
30-380
Method of intervention
30.6.81 - Reassembly of wiring harnesses (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of wiring harness (hydrostatic unit)
1.
Wet mounting surface with sealing agent (Terostat-MS 935 black DK 310,
ZF order No.: 5.9035.482.0)!
Then insert wiring harness into housing lid and fix it with hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 6.0 Nm
WARNING
Wet threads of Figure 16 hexagon screws with Loctite (type
No.: 243)!
Fig. 1741
Mount wiring harness into the housing lid and fix it with clip and cylindrical
screw.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 6.0 Nm
Fig. 1742
2.
Connect plug and fix cable with cable clip (see arrow).
Fig. 1743
3.
Fix wiring harness to the plate using cable clamps (2x, see arrows).
Fig. 1744
30-381
Method of intervention
4.
Insert plug through the plate from behind and use retaining ring to fix it.
IMPORTANT
Ensure correct position of the O-ring!
Fig. 1745
5.
Fix holders (4x, see arrows) to the valve block using flat-head screws.
Fig. 1746
6.
Fix wiring harness to the valve block/holders using cable clamps (4x).
Fig. 1747
30-382
Method of intervention
30.6.82 - Reassembly of inductive sensors, pressure sensors, valves (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of inductive sensors
1.
Mount inductive sensors (5x) into housing lid and sensor cover.
Tightening torque
MA = 45 Nm
(S) Plug insert: 5.9035.404.0
IMPORTANT
Connection plugs of the inductive sensors are marked
in different colors, for installation position see following Figure!
Fig. 1748
2.
WARNING
Wet threads of inductive sensors with Loctite (type No.:
243)!
1
3
1 = Orange
2 = Green
3 = Brown
4 = Black
5 = Grey
IMPORTANT
For an improved view of the inductive sensors, the opposite Figure shows the housing lid without plate!
Fig. 1749
Fig. 1750
30-383
Method of intervention
Reassembly of pressure sensors
1.
Fit new seal rings to both pressure sensors (see arrows) and install them.
Tightening torque
MA = 20 Nm
Fig. 1751
2.
Fig. 1752
Mount directional valve into the valve block until contact is obtained.
Then fix it by means of claw and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque
MA = 9 +2 Nm
Fig. 1753
2.
The opposite sketch shows the arrangement and installation position of the
directional valves.
Fig. 1754
30-384
Method of intervention
Reassembly of 4/3 directional valve (PS)
1.
The opposite Figure shows the installation position of the 4/3 directional
valve.
Fig. 1755
2.
Mount valve.
Tightening torque
MA = 30 Nm
Fig. 1756
3.
Fig. 1757
4.
Fig. 1758
30-385
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1759
30.6.83 - Reassembly of control unit (hydrostatic unit) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Wet mounting surface with sealing agent (Terostat-MS 935 black DK 310,
ZF order No.: 5.9035.482.0)!
Then fix control unit by means of cylindrical screws.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 9.5 Nm
IMPORTANT
Wet threads of cylindrical screws with Loctite (type No.:
243)!
Fig. 1760
2.
Fig. 1761
30.6.84 - Reassembly of pressure relief valves (PRV) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Insert cooler PRV (1), lubrication PRV (2), spacer part (3) and brake cooling
oil PRV (4) into the hole (see following figure).
Fig. 1762
30-386
Method of intervention
2.
Provide screw plug (5) with new O-ring and fit it.
Tightening torque
MA = 30 Nm
Fig. 1763
Place O-rings (2x, see arrows) into the countersinks of the filter head.
Fig. 1764
2.
Fig. 1765
3.
Fig. 1766
30-387
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1767
5.
Install plugs (2x, see arrows) and fix them by means of cable clip (see arrow).
Fig. 1768
30.6.86 - Reassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Insert wiring harness (hydrostatic unit) into the housing lid and fasten it by
means of fixing plate and hexagon screw.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 9.5 Nm
Fig. 1769
2.
Wet mounting surface with sealing agent (Terostat-MS 935 black DK 310,
ZF order No.: 5.9035.482.0)!
Then fix control unit by means of cylindrical screws.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 9.5 Nm
WARNING
Wet threads of cylindrical screws with Loctite (type No.:
243)!
Fig. 1770
30-388
Method of intervention
3.
Insert wiring harness (TCU / HCU) into the housing lid and fasten it with
fixing plate and hexagon screw.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 9.5 Nm
Fig. 1771
4.
Fit plug to control unit (see arrow) and mount wiring harness of hydrostatic
unit (bayonet locking).
Fig. 1772
5.
Insert wiring harnesses (2x, hydraulic control and oil sensors) into the housing lid and fix them with cable clips (see arrow).
Fig. 1773
6.
Provide pressure sensor with new seal ring and mount it.
Tightening torque
MA = 20 Nm
Fig. 1774
30-389
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 1775
30.6.87 - Reassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Use grease to fix rectangular rings (2x, see arrows) into the countersinks
of the housing lid.
IMPORTANT
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1776
2.
Fig. 1777
3.
Fig. 1778
30-390
Method of intervention
30.6.88 - Reassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
2.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings (see arrows) into the countersinks
of the valve block.
IMPORTANT
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1780
3.
Mount valve block and fix it with hexagon nuts and cylindrical screws.
Tightening torque (M8)
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1781
4.
Install directional valves into the valve block until contact position.
Now fix them by means of claw and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque
MA = 9 +2 Nm
Fig. 1782
30-391
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1783
6.
Provide pressure sensor with new seal ring and mount it.
Tightening torque
MA = 20 Nm
Fig. 1784
7.
Fig. 1785
8.
Fig. 1786
30-392
Method of intervention
30.6.89 - Reassembly of valve block (all wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron
->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1787
2.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings (see arrows) into the countersinks
of the valve block
IMPORTANT
Use new rectangular rings!
Fig. 1788
3.
Mount valve block and fix it with hexagon nuts and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque (M8)
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1789
4.
Mount directional valve into the valve block until contact is obtained.
Then fix it by means of claw and cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque
MA = 9 +2 Nm
Fig. 1790
30-393
Method of intervention
30.6.90 - Reassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple)
(7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Provide fittings and screw plugs with new seal rings and mount them.
Then fit the pipe union (see Figure for installation position).
1 = Pipe union
1
2
MA = 60 Nm
2 = Fitting
MA = 90 Nm
3 = Screw plug
2
MA = 35 Nm
WARNING
3
3
Fig. 1791
IMPORTANT
This operation is only required when using a new valve
block!
2.
Use grease to fix the rectangular rings and O-rings (see arrows) into the
countersinks of the valve block.
IMPORTANT
Use new rectangular rings and O-rings!
Fig. 1792
3.
Fig. 1793
30-394
Method of intervention
4.
Insert cooler PRV (1), lubrication PRV (2), spacer part (3) and brake cooling
oil PRV (4) into the hole (see following Figure).
2
5
Fig. 1794
5.
Provide screw plug (5) with new O-ring and fit it.
Tightening torque
MA = 30 Nm
Fig. 1795
6.
Place O-rings (2x, see arrows) into the countersinks of the filter head.
Fig. 1796
7.
Fig. 1797
30-395
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1798
9.
Fig. 1799
10.
Fig. 1800
11.
Fig. 1801
30-396
Method of intervention
12.
Fig. 1802
Grease O-rings (see arrows) and insert them into the annular grooves of
the pump housing.
Fig. 1803
2.
Fig. 1804
3.
Maintain contact position of pump shaft and fix spur gear with retaining ring.
Fig. 1805
30-397
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1806
5.
Engage retaining ring into the inner annular groove of the sleeve.
Then mount sleeve to the pump shaft until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1807
6.
Fig. 1808
7.
Grease O-rings and insert them into the annular grooves of the straight
tube.
Then insert straight tube into the housing hole until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1809
30-398
Method of intervention
8.
Grease O-rings and insert them into the annular grooves of the straight
tube.
Then insert straight tube and intermediate ring into the housing holes until
contact is obtained.
Fig. 1810
9.
Fig. 1811
Fig. 1812
2.
Legend:
A = Grey (wiring harness)
B = Black (wiring harness)
C = Green (wiring harness)
D = Brown (wiring harness)
1 = Grey (inductive sensor)
2 = Black (inductive sensor)
3 = Green (inductive sensor)
4 = Brown (inductive sensor)
5 = Orange (inductive sensor)
Fig. 1813
30-399
Method of intervention
3.
Fix control unit by means of hexagon screws and hexagon nuts with washers.
Tightening torque (M6)
13
MA = 9.5 Nm
12
IMPORTANT
Observe order of tightening. Start from the center to tighten
the screws and nuts!
11
14
2
10
Fig. 1814
WARNING
Wet mounting surface with sealing agent (Terostat-MS 935
black DK 310, ZF order No.: 5.9035.482.0)!
Fig. 1815
2.
Use the lifting tackle (S) to lift the hydrostatic unit into the housing lid.
(S) Load carrying fixture: 5.9035.467.0
Fig. 1816
3.
Fig. 1817
30-400
Method of intervention
4.
Support the spur gear (see arrow) and fix it by means of hexagon screw
and washer.
Tightening torque (M10/10.9)
MA = 68 Nm
IMPORTANT
This operation is to be done on both spur gears!
WARNING
Fig. 1818
Fig. 1819
6.
Align hydrostatic unit centrically and insert bushing into the housing lid until
contact.
Fig. 1820
7.
Insert O-rings (2x) into the annular grooves of the line and grease them.
Now insert the line into the hydrostatic unit until contact.
Fig. 1821
30-401
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 1822
9.
Insert O-rings (2x) into the annular grooves of the screw plug and grease
them.
Now fit the screw plug.
Tightening torque
MA = 160 Nm
Fig. 1823
10.
11.
Fig. 1824
30-402
Method of intervention
30.6.94 - Reassembly of suction filter (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Grease O-ring and insert the suction filter into the housing hole until contact
is obtained.
Fig. 1825
2.
Provide cover with new O-ring and fix it by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1826
Insert both cylindrical pins (See arrows) into the holes until contact is obtained..
Fig. 1827
2.
Fig. 1828
30-403
Method of intervention
3.
Insert sleeves (2x, See arrows) into the cover until contact is obtained.
WARNING
Cover is supplied as a complete component with preassembled piston!
Fig. 1829
4.
Fig. 1830
5.
Fig. 1831
6.
Legend to figure:
6.1. Cup Springs
6.2. Clutch Ring
6.3. Cover (cpl. with piston)
1
2
3
Fig. 1832
30-404
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 1833
8.
Fig. 1834
9.
Fit slotted pin (Rotation Stop) with the opening in circumferential direction.
WARNING
Slotted pin (See arrow) is to be flush-mounted, that means
it must not protrude!
Fig. 1835
10.
Fig. 1836
30-405
Method of intervention
11.
Fig. 1837
Fig. 1838
CAUTION
To prevent seizing, tighten the tight-fit screws first. Do NOT
use an impact wrench!
2.
Fig. 1839
3.
Fig. 1840
30-406
Method of intervention
4.
Legend to sketch:
4.1. Spring holder
4.2. Cup springs
1
2
Fig. 1841
5.
Place preassembled spring holder into the bracket (see arrow) and fix it
with hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M8/8.8):
MA = 23 Nm
Note
Tighten spring holder equally until contact is obtained!
Fig. 1842
6.
Fig. 1843
7.
Fig. 1844
30-407
Method of intervention
30.6.97 - Reassembly of P3/P4 planetary drive
1.
Use grease to fix the thrust washers into the planetary carrier.
Note
Ensure correct installation; position the rotation stop (tab) in
the respective locking hole!
Fig. 1845
2.
Fig. 1846
3.
Centrically align planetary gears and thrust washers and fix them by planetary pin.
Fig. 1847
4.
Fig. 1848
30-408
Method of intervention
30.6.98 - Reassembly of K3/K4 clutch (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Press ball bearing onto the clutch carrier until contact is obtained.
IMPORTANT
Clutch carrier is supplied as a complete component
with preassembled piston!
Fig. 1849
2.
Insert needle bearing (1) and slotted pin (2) into the clutch carrier until
contact is obtained.
1
Fig. 1850
3.
Fig. 1851
Reassembly of K3 clutch
1.
Fig. 1852
30-409
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 1853
3.
Legend:
1 = Axial washer
2 = Cup springs
3 = Clutch ring
4 = Clutch carrier (cpl. with piston)
1
2
1
3
4
Fig. 1854
4.
Preload axial washer/cup springs with a press and engage retaining ring
into the annular groove of the clutch carrier.
(S) Press bush: 5.9035.458.0
Fig. 1855
5.
Fig. 1856
30-410
Method of intervention
Reassembly of K4 clutch
1.
Fig. 1857
2.
Fig. 1858
3.
Legend:
1 = Cup springs
2 = Clutch ring
3 = Clutch carrier
1
2
3
Fig. 1859
4.
Fig. 1860
30-411
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1861
6.
WARNING
Fig. 1862
Insert the carrier into the clutch ring and fix it with a snap ring.
Fig. 1863
8.
Insert the preassembled clutch carrier into the P3/P4 planetary carrier and
fix it with a snap ring.
Fig. 1864
30-412
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1865
10.
IMPORTANT
Prior to reassembly, preload the piston rings in a tube
with an inner diameter of 50 mm (see Figure)!
Fig. 1866
11.
Insert clutch carrier (complete with planetary drive) into the bracket until
contact is obtained.
WARNING
Install clutch carrier with great care to avoid damage to the
piston rings and contact face in the bracket!
Fig. 1867
30-413
Method of intervention
30.6.99 - Reassembly of K3/K4 Clutch (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Press ball bearing onto the clutch carrier until contact is obtained.
WARNING
Clutch carrier is supplied as a complete component with
preassembled piston!
Fig. 1868
2.
Insert needle bearing (See arrow) into the clutch carrier until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1869
3.
Fig. 1870
4.
Fig. 1871
30-414
Method of intervention
5.
Legend to figure:
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
Axial Washer
Cup Springs
Clutch Ring
Clutch Carrier (cpl. with piston)
1
2
1
3
4
Fig. 1872
6.
Fig. 1873
7.
Fig. 1874
8.
Fig. 1875
30-415
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1876
10.
Legend to figure:
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
Cup Springs
Clutch Ring
Clutch Carrier
1
2
3
Fig. 1877
11.
Fig. 1878
12.
Fig. 1879
30-416
Method of intervention
13.
14.
Fig. 1880
Insert the carrier into the clutch ring and fix it with a snap ring.
WARNING
Check correct position of teeth clutch carrier/clutch ring and
align them, if required.
Fig. 1881
15.
Insert the preassembled clutch carrier into the P3/P4 planetary carrier and
fix it with a snap ring.
Fig. 1882
16.
Grease the annular grooves and install piston rings (4x, See arrows).
Fig. 1883
30-417
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 1884
18.
Insert clutch carrier (Complete with planetary drive) into the bracket until
contact is obtained.
WARNING
Install clutch carrier with great care to avoid damage to the
piston rings and contact face in the bracket!
Fig. 1885
19.
Insert ring gear into the bearing bracket until contact is obtained..
Fig. 1886
30-418
Method of intervention
30.6.100 - Reassembly of K1 Clutch
1.
Fig. 1887
Fig. 1888
2.
Fig. 1889
3.
Legend to figure:
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
Washer
Cup Springs
Clutch Ring
Clutch Carrier (cpl. with piston)
1
2
3
4
Fig. 1890
30-419
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 1891
5.
Fig. 1892
6.
Place hub into the clutch carrier and fix it with a snap ring.
Fig. 1893
7.
Insert the sun gear into the clutch carrier and fix it with a retaining ring.
Fig. 1894
30-420
Method of intervention
8.
Grease O-Rings (2x, See arrows) and insert them into the annular grooves
of the K3/K4 clutch carrier.
Fig. 1895
9.
Maintain contact position of P3/P4 planetary drive and mount preassembled KV clutch.
Fig. 1896
10.
Fig. 1897
30-421
Method of intervention
30.6.102 - Reassembly of P5/P6 planetary drive
1.
Planetary Gear
Needle Cage
Planetary Gear (Double planetary gear)
Spacer Sleeve
1
3
2
2
Fig. 1898
2.
3.
4.
Fig. 1900
30-422
Method of intervention
5.
Insert the planetary gear into the planetary carrier/between the thrust washers.
Then centrically align the planetary gear and thrust washers and fix them
with a planetary pin.
WARNING
Observe installation position of planetary pins.
WARNING
Planetary pins for double planetary gears have two oil holes!
6.
Fig. 1902
7.
Insert ball bearing into the planetary carrier until contact is obtained and fix
it with a snap ring.
Fig. 1904
8.
Press needle sleeve into the sun gear until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1905
30-423
Method of intervention
9.
Mount planetary carrier to the sun gear until contact is obtained and fit
spacer.
Fig. 1906
10.
Engage retaining ring into the annular groove of the sun gear.
Fig. 1907
11.
Fig. 1908
12.
Fig. 1909
30-424
Method of intervention
13.
Insert the ball bearing into the bracket until contact is obtained and fix it with
a retaining ring.
Fig. 1910
14.
Insert ball bearing into the sun gear until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1911
15.
Fig. 1912
16.
Fig. 1913
30-425
Method of intervention
17.
WARNING
Wet thread of slotted nut with Loctite (Type # 243)!
18.
Fig. 1914
Fig. 1915
Use grease to fix the thrust washer into the clutch carrier.
WARNING
Observe the installation position!
WARNING
Fit thrust washer with the chamfer (On outer diameter) facing the clutch carrier!
WARNING
Slotted pin in the clutch carrier must be fixed in the hole of
the thrust washer (Also see following sketch)!
2.
Legend to figure:
2.1. Clutch Carrier
2.2. Slotted Pin
2.3. Thrust Washer
Fig. 1916
1
2
3
Fig. 1917
30-426
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 1918
4.
Press needle sleeves into the hollow shaft from both sides until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1919
5.
Fig. 1920
6.
Fig. 1921
30-427
Method of intervention
7.
Press needle sleeves into the ring gear from both sides until contact is
obtained.
Fig. 1922
8.
Fig. 1923
9.
Insert preassembled central shaft into the clutch carrier until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1924
10.
Fig. 1925
30-428
Method of intervention
11.
Planetary Gear
Needle Cage
Planetary Gear (Double planetary gear)
Spacer Sleeve
2
3
2
2 4
Fig. 1926
12.
13.
Insert the planetary gear into the planetary carrier/between the thrust washers.
Then centrically align the planetary gear and thrust washers and fix them
with a planetary pin.
WARNING
Observe installation position of planetary pins.
WARNING
Planetary pins for single planetary gears have only one oil
hole!
14.
Fig. 1928
30-429
Method of intervention
15.
Insert the planetary gear into the planetary carrier/between the thrust washers.
Then centrically align the planetary gear and thrust washers and fix them
with a planetary pin.
WARNING
Observe installation position of planetary pins.
WARNING
Planetary pins for double planetary gears have two oil holes!
16.
Fig. 1930
Fig. 1931
17.
Fig. 1932
18.
Use grease to fix the thrust washer into the planetary carrier.
WARNING
Observe the installation position!
WARNING
Position the rotation stop (tab) in the locking hole!
Fig. 1933
30-430
Method of intervention
19.
Fig. 1934
Heat inner ring and install it on the bearing flange until contact is obtained.
WARNING
Wet inner diameter with Loctite (Type # 649)!
WARNING
Adjust inner ring after cooling-down!
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
2.
Fig. 1935
Press needle bearing into the bearing flange until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1936
3.
Insert slotted pin (See arrow) into the hole until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1937
30-431
Method of intervention
4.
Put on retaining ring (See arrow) and press ball bearing to contact position.
Fig. 1938
5.
Fig. 1939
6.
Fig. 1940
7.
Heat tapered roller bearing and mount it until contact with the spur gear.
WARNING
Adjust tapered roller bearing after cooling-down!
WARNING
Wear safety gloves!
Fig. 1941
30-432
Method of intervention
8.
Press both bearing outer rings into the spur gear until contact position.
Fig. 1942
9.
Fig. 1943
10.
Fig. 1944
11.
Fig. 1945
30-433
Method of intervention
12.
Position dial indicator at the spur gear and measure the axial play.
Fig. 1946
13.
Fig. 1947
14.
After having set the axial play, secure slotted nut by fixing it into place.
Fig. 1948
15.
Insert the preassembled bearing flange into the spur gear and fix it with a
retaining ring.
Fig. 1949
30-434
Method of intervention
16.
Engage snap ring into the annular groove of the spur gear.
Fig. 1950
17.
Use the screw driver to press the snap ring into the annular groove of the
spur gear and mount the ring gear.
WARNING
Take care that the snap ring is exactly positioned!
WARNING
Engagement into the annular groove of the ring gear must
be audible!
Fig. 1951
18.
Use grease to fix the thrust washer into the bearing flange.
WARNING
Observe the installation position!
WARNING
Fit thrust washer with the chamfer (on outer diameter) facing
the bearing flange (downwards)!
WARNING
Fig. 1952
Legend to figure:
19.1.
19.2.
19.3.
Thrust Washer
Slotted Pin
Bearing Flange
1
2
3
Fig. 1953
30-435
Method of intervention
20.
Fig. 1954
21.
22.
Fig. 1955
Fig. 1956
30-436
Method of intervention
30.6.105 - Reinstallation of cartridge (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1957
2.
Wet mounting surface (see 1) with sealing agent (Loctite type No.: 574).
Then insert cylindrical pins (see 2) into the holes until contact is obtained.
Fig. 1958
3.
Use grease to fix O-rings (3x, see arrows) into the countersinks of the housing lid.
Fig. 1959
4.
Mount cartridge into the transmission housing by means of lifting tackle (S)
and secure it with two hexagon screws.
(S) Lifting hook: 5.9035.382.0
Fig. 1960
30-437
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1961
6.
Shift sleeve onto sun gear and use assembly fixture (S) to fix slotted pin
(also refer to the following sketch).
(S) Assembly fixture: 5.9035.387.0
IMPORTANT
Use of the specified assembly fixture ensures the exact
installation position of the slotted pin!
Fig. 1962
7.
Legend:
1 = Pinion
2 = Sleeve
3 = Slotted pin
4 = Sun gear
Fig. 1963
8.
Fig. 1964
30-438
Method of intervention
9.
Wet mounting face with sealing agent (Henkel Terostat - MS 935 black DK
310, ZF order No.: 5.9035.482.0).
Then provide hexagon screw with new seal ring and install cover.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8)
MA = 9.5 Nm
Fig. 1965
10.
Place the O-ring (see 1) into the annular groove of the filter housing and
oil it.
Then insert filter into the filter housing.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that an O-ring is installed in the filter (see 2)!
Fig. 1966
11.
Fig. 1967
12.
Fig. 1968
30-439
Method of intervention
30.6.106 - Reinstallation of Cartridge (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1969
2.
Wet mounting surface (See arrow 1) with sealing agent (Loctite Type #
574).
Then insert cylindrical pins (See arrows 2) into the holes until contact is
obtained.
1
2
Fig. 1970
3.
Use grease to fix O-Rings (3x, See arrows) into the countersinks of the
housing lid.
Fig. 1971
4.
Mount cartridge into the transmission housing by means of lifting tackle (S)
and secure it with two hexagon screws.
(S) Hook: 5.9035.382.0
Fig. 1972
30-440
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 1973
6.
Fig. 1974
7.
Legend to figure:
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
Pinion
Sleeve
Slotted Pin
Sun Gear
2 3
1
Fig. 1975
8.
Fig. 1976
30-441
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 1977
10.
Place the O-Ring (See arrow 1) into the annular groove of the filter housing
and oil it.
Then insert filter into the filter housing.
CAUTION
Make sure that an O-Ring is installed in the filter (See arrow 2)!
1
2
Fig. 1978
11.
Fig. 1979
12.
Fit stud bolts (2x, See arrows) into the housing lid.
Tightening torque:
MA = 9 Nm
WARNING
Wet threads of stud bolts with Loctite (Type # 243)!
Fig. 1980
30-442
Method of intervention
13.
Use grease to fix the seal rings (See arrows) into the countersinks of the
valve block.
Fig. 1981
14.
Fix preassembled valve block to the housing lid by means of hexagon nuts.
Tightening torque:
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1982
15.
Oil the O-Ring and install them into the annular grooves of the directional
valve.
Fasten the directional valve to the valve block by means of fixing plate and
cylindrical screw.
Tightening torque:
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 1983
16.
Fig. 1984
30-443
Method of intervention
30.6.107 - Fitting of rear axle to the transmission (7230 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Remove the transmission from the assembly truck and lay it down on a
H.D. (Heavy-Duty) pallet.
(S) Eyebolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
(S) Eyebolt (M18): 5.9035.378.0
Fig. 1985
2.
Mount input shaft into the PTO clutch until contact is obtained.
Install cylindrical pins (2x, See arrows).
Fig. 1986
3.
Fig. 1987
4.
Use a lifting tackle (S) to bring the rear axle into contact position with the
transmission.
Fix rear axle by means of hexagon screws.
Tightening torque (M14/10.9):
MA = 185 Nm
(S) Eyebolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
Fig. 1988
30-444
Method of intervention
30.6.108 - Pipes and closing components (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Pipes
1.
Fig. 1989
Closing components
1.
Table 354
Screw
Typology
M 12 x 1.5
M 14 x 1.5
M 18 x 1.5
M 22 x 1.5
M 26 x 1.5
M 33 x 2.0
M 56 x 2.0
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Tightening torques
Torque
MA = 35 Nm
MA = 40 Nm
MA = 50 Nm
MA = 60 Nm
MA = 80 Nm
MA = 120 Nm
MA = 160 Nm
WARNING
Tightening torques are not applicable for screw plugs in the shift and control area.
WARNING
Please refer to the related chapters!
30-445
Method of intervention
30.7 - E0 - Rear axle
30.7.1 - Removing the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 1990
2.
Fasten the axle housing with suitable lift equipment and loosen the union.
Remove the axle housing and the ring gear.
(S) Upper holes (M12): 5.9035.377.0
WARNING
Support the weight of the axle housing on the opposite side.
Fig. 1991
3.
Fig. 1992
4.
Fig. 1993
30-446
Method of intervention
5.
Remove the planet gear from the planet gear carrier using the two arm
extractor tool.
Fig. 1994
6.
Fig. 1995
7.
Fig. 1996
8.
Remove the axle housing from the rear half axle using the two arm extractor.
Remove the tapered roller bearing once it is free.
Fig. 1997
30-447
Method of intervention
9.
If necessary, push the two outer bearing races out of the axle housing.
Fig. 1998
10.
Remove the tapered roller bearing from the rear half shaft.
(S) Gripper tool: 5.9035.475.0
Fig. 1999
11.
Fig. 2000
30-448
Method of intervention
30.7.2 - Removing brakes (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2001
2.
Remove the split pin (1), remove the disc and disconnect the tie-rod (2).
Disconnect the tensioner spring (3) and fold the actuator mechanism upwards.
2
1
3
Fig. 2002
3.
Fig. 2003
4.
Fig. 2004
30-449
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2005
6.
Fig. 2006
7.
Fig. 2007
8.
If necessary, remove the split pin (see arrow), remove the pins and remove
the tie-rod.
WARNING
No further disassembly of the brakes is possible. The brakes
are safety components and are supplied as complete assemblies.
Fig. 2008
30-450
Method of intervention
9.
Check that the rubber bush (see arrow) is undamaged. Lift out of the hole
if necessary.
Fig. 2009
30.7.3 - Removing the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Remove the lubrication line (see arrow) for the ring gear.
Fig. 2010
2.
Fig. 2011
3.
Fig. 2012
30-451
Method of intervention
4.
Push the differential towards the right (arrow) with an assembly lever (S).
(S) Assembly lever: 5.9035.203.0
WARNING
Support the differential (see figure).
Then remove the right outer bearing race and lift the differential from the
rear axle housing.
Fig. 2013
5.
Fig. 2014
6.
Fig. 2015
7.
Separate the compensation chamber, complete with the piston (1) and the
ring gear (2), from the differential case (3).
Push the piston out of the compensation chamber with compressed air.
3
2
Fig. 2016
30-452
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 2017
9.
Fig. 2018
10.
Fig. 2019
11.
Fig. 2020
30-453
Method of intervention
30.7.4 - Removing the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2021
2.
Fig. 2022
3.
Fig. 2023
4.
Fig. 2024
30-454
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2025
6.
Separate the cover together with the PTO engagement clutch from the rear
axle housing.
(S) Assembly lever: 5.9035.203.0
WARNING
Take care not to loose the O-rings when they are released!
Fig. 2026
7.
Fig. 2027
8.
Push the two spring pins into the piston until the control fork is free.
Fig. 2028
30-455
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 2029
10.
Fig. 2030
11.
Fig. 2031
12.
Fig. 2032
30-456
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 2033
14.
Fig. 2034
15.
Lift the clutch, together with the control fork, out of the cover.
Remove the control fork complete with sliders.
Fig. 2035
16.
Fig. 2036
30-457
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 2037
18.
Fig. 2038
19.
Fig. 2039
20.
Fig. 2040
30-458
Method of intervention
21.
Remove the piston together with the thrust plate from the clutch shaft.
Fig. 2041
22.
Fig. 2042
23.
Fig. 2043
24.
Fig. 2044
30-459
Method of intervention
25.
Remove the two rectangular section rings and remove the seal lip ring (see
arrows).
Fig. 2045
26.
Fig. 2046
27.
Remove: the face gears, sleeve, sleeve mount and needle roller bearings.
Fig. 2047
28.
Remove the outer bearing race through the bearing hole, pulling out with
the lever.
Fig. 2048
30-460
Method of intervention
29.
Fig. 2049
30.
Fig. 2050
31.
Remove the control fork complete with sliders and the sleeve.
Fig. 2051
32.
Fig. 2052
30-461
Method of intervention
33.
Remove the thrust spring, the spring guide and the spacer via the hole in
the cover using magnets.
Fig. 2053
34.
Fig. 2054
35.
Fig. 2055
36.
Fig. 2056
30-462
Method of intervention
37.
Fig. 2057
38.
Fig. 2058
39.
Fig. 2059
40.
Remove the fastener fork (S), the flange and the PTO.
Fig. 2060
30-463
Method of intervention
41.
Fig. 2061
42.
Fig. 2062
43.
Fig. 2063
44.
Fig. 2064
30-464
Method of intervention
45.
Fig. 2065
46.
Remove the outer circlip of the bearings and the shaft seal ring (see arrows).
Fig. 2066
47.
Remove the outer bearing races (see arrows) from the rear axle housing.
Fig. 2067
30-465
Method of intervention
30.7.5 - Removing the oil feed (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2068
2.
Fig. 2069
3.
Fig. 2070
4.
Fig. 2071
30-466
Method of intervention
30.7.6 - Removing the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Remove the split pin (1), remove the disc and disconnect the pins (2).
Loosen the fastener securing the brake bleed pipe to the bearing mount.
WARNING
Perform on both sides.
1
2
Fig. 2072
2.
Loosen the hexagonal head screws and remove the entire lifter, complete
with brake shaft, using suitable lift equipment.
Fig. 2073
3.
Fig. 2074
4.
Separate the bearing mount, the lifter shaft and the brake shaft.
If necessary, remove the bush and the sliding bearing from the bearing
mounts.
Fig. 2075
30-467
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2076
30.7.7 - Fitting lifter, oil feed and blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
3
5
1
6
7
7
7
5
Fig. 2077
WARNING
Moisten the thread of the stud bolts with Loctite 243!
30.7.8 - Fitting the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
2
3
Fig. 2078
30-468
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 2079
3.
In figure:
3.1. Lifter shaft
3.2. Milled line
3.3. Bush
3
2
Fig. 2080
4.
Brake shaft
Tie-rod
Pins
Line
Hexagonal head nut
WARNING
5
4
1
4
2
5.
Fig. 2082
30-469
Method of intervention
6.
Fit the ring (arrow 1) and the Bowden cable (arrow 2) on the brake shaft
and fasten with spring pins.
2
Fig. 2083
7.
Using suitable lift equipment, bring the lifter into the correct assembly position and fasten with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M20/10.9):
MA= 560 Nm
Fig. 2084
8.
Fasten the tie-rod (1) onto the actuator mechanism with pins (2).
Fit the disc (3) and fasten with the split pin (4).
1
2
3
Fig. 2085
30-470
Method of intervention
30.7.9 - Fitting the oil feed (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2086
2.
Fig. 2087
3.
Fig. 2088
4.
WARNING
Moisten the contact surfaces with Loctite 574!
Fig. 2089
30-471
Method of intervention
5.
1
2
MA= 40 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
6
5
3
MA= 45 Nm
Pos. 2
Torque (threaded connectors):
MA = 25 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
MA= 45 Nm
Pos. 3
Torque (threaded connectors, valve block):
MA= 50 Nm
Torque (threaded connectors, rear axle housing):
MA= 35 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
MA= 80 Nm
Pos. 4
Torque (threaded connectors, valve block):
MA= 50 Nm
Torque (threaded connectors, rear axle housing):
MA= 35 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
MA= 80 Nm
Pos. 5
Torque (threaded connectors):
MA = 25 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
MA= 45 Nm
Pos. 6
Torque (threaded connectors):
MA = 25 Nm
Torque (sleeve nut):
30-472
Fig. 2090
Method of intervention
30.7.10 - Fitting blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250
TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Table 355
M101.0
M221.5
M301.5
M332.0
M381.5
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
MA = 20 Nm
MA= 60 Nm
MA= 100 Nm
MA= 120 Nm
MA= 140 Nm
Fig. 2091
30.7.11 - Fitting the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the PTO transmission
1.
Fit the shaft seal ring (see arrow) fully into its seat in the hole in the cover.
(S) Installation tool: 5.9035.311.0
(S) Handle: 5.9035.222.0
WARNING
Moisten the outer diameter of the shaft seal ring with alcohol
immediately before fitting.
WARNING
Fill the gap between the dust seal lip and the seal lip with
grease.
2.
Fig. 2092
Fig. 2093
3.
Fig. 2094
30-473
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 2095
5.
Fig. 2096
6.
Fig. 2097
7.
Fig. 2098
30-474
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 2099
9.
Fig. 2100
10.
Fig. 2101
11.
Fig. 2102
30-475
Method of intervention
12.
Bring the two inner bearing races into contact with the pinion using a two
arm extractor tool.
WARNING
Pressing on the PTO bring the two inner bearing races into
contact with the pinion.
Fig. 2103
13.
Adjust the bearing endfloat to a value between 0.05 and 0.10 mm:
Fit the outer bearing race.
Fig. 2104
14.
Measure the distance I from the front surface of the outer bearing race to
the flange mating surface of the cover.
Measurement I (example) = 187.70 mm
(S) Final measurements: 5.9035.316.0
(S) Measurement calliper: 5.9035.229.0
WARNING
Measure at different points and calculate the average value!
Fig. 2105
15.
Measure the distance II from the flange mating surface of the rear axle
housing to the contact surface of the shim.
Calculation example:
(Measurement II) 190.50 mm (Measurement I) 187.70 mm =
-------------------------------------------------------(Difference) 2.80 mm
(Bearing endfloat 0.05 ... 0.10 mm) 0.10 mm -------------------------------------------------------(Result = shim) S = 2.70 mm
Fig. 2106
30-476
Method of intervention
16.
Fit the shim of the calculated thickness (e.g. 2.70 mm) in the bearing hole.
Bring the outer bearing race back into contact.
Fig. 2107
17.
Fasten the PTO and the flange with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M12/12.9):
MA= 135 Nm
Fig. 2108
18.
Fit the cylindrical pins (see arrow) fully into their seats in the console.
Fig. 2109
19.
Fig. 2110
30-477
Method of intervention
Fit the hydraulic PTO clutch
1.
Adjust the actuating travel of the disc pack to 5.75 mm. (-0.4) (figures 01
13):
In figure:
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
Clutch shaft
Piston
Circlip
Thrust plate
End washer
Disc carrier
Circlip
4
3
1
7
5,75 - 0,40
Fig. 2111
2.
3.
Fig. 2113
4.
Push the piston, preassembled with the thrust plate, fully into its seat on
the clutch shaft.
WARNING
Temporarily fit all the components without seals in order to
measure actuation travel.
Fig. 2114
30-478
Method of intervention
5.
Place the thrust springs (x3) at 120 from one another on the thrust plate.
Fig. 2115
6.
Fit the end washer, bringing it into contact with the disc carrier.
Fig. 2116
7.
Fig. 2117
8.
Fig. 2118
30-479
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 2119
10.
Fig. 2120
11.
12.
30-480
Method of intervention
13.
14.
Fig. 2123
Fig. 2124
15.
Fig. 2125
16.
Fig. 2126
30-481
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 2127
18.
Fig. 2128
19.
WARNING
The inner discs are corrugated and must be installed with
the corrugated sides facing one another. In other terms, the
inner discs must be installed in layers with the gaps between
the teeth of one disc facing the gaps on the other disc. The
half teeth (see arrows) must be positioned on the left and
right hand sides of the gap in alternation.
Fig. 2129
20.
Oil the seal lip ring (see arrow) and fit into the ring groove on the piston.
WARNING
Ensure that the gear is installed correctly as shown in the
following figure!
Fig. 2130
30-482
Method of intervention
21.
In figure:
21.1.
21.2.
21.3.
21.4.
21.5.
21.6.
21.7.
Fig. 2131
22.
Fit the thrust springs (every 2 parts/hole) into the holes in the piston pocket
using grease.
Fig. 2132
23.
Fit the piston preassembled with the thrust plate into the disc carrier.
Fig. 2133
24.
Fig. 2134
30-483
Method of intervention
25.
Oil the seal lip ring (see arrow) and fit into the ring groove on the clutch
shaft.
WARNING
Ensure that the components are assembled in the correct
positions.
WARNING
Orient the groove on the front side upwards (facing towards
the chamber).
Fig. 2135
26.
Fit the preassembled clutch assembly on the clutch shaft and fasten with
a circlip.
Fig. 2136
27.
Fig. 2137
28.
Check that the actuating travel of the disc pack is 5.75 mm -0.4:
Apply an axial force F of 4500 + 4500 N to the clutch shaft.
(S) Load cell: 5.9035.236.0
WARNING
If the specified actuating travel of 5.75 mm -0.4 is not
reached, this means that an error was made when determining the measurement of the adjuster washer (figure 01
14).
WARNING
This error must be corrected before continuing!
30-484
Fig. 2138
Method of intervention
29.
Fit the heated roller bearing fully into its seat on the clutch shaft.
WARNING
Reposition the roller bearing correctly once cooled!
WARNING
Wear protective gloves!
Fig. 2139
30.
Fig. 2140
31.
32.
Fig. 2142
30-485
Method of intervention
33.
Fit the face gear (arrow 1) and the retainer ring (arrow 2).
Fit the heated roller bearing fully into its seat.
WARNING
Reposition the roller bearing correctly once cooled!
WARNING
34.
Fig. 2144
35.
Fig. 2145
36.
Fit the outer bearing race (see arrow) in the clutch housing.
Fig. 2146
30-486
Method of intervention
37.
38.
Fit the outer bearing race (see arrow) fully into its seat.
Fig. 2148
Adjust the endfloat of the PTO clutch to a value between 0.05 and 0.10 mm:
Fit the preassembled clutch.
Fit the outer bearing race (see arrow).
WARNING
To ensure that the clutch is fitted in precisely the correct
position, the measurements must be made without the PTO
brake fitted.
Fig. 2149
2.
Measure the distance I from the front surface of the outer bearing race to
the flat surface.
Measurement I (example) = 256.65 mm
(S) Final measurements: 5.9035.316.0
(S) Measurement calliper: 5.9035.229.0
Then lift the clutch off the cover again.
WARNING
Measure at different points and calculate the average value!
Fig. 2150
30-487
Method of intervention
3.
Measure the distance II from the flange mating surface of the rear axle
housing to the contact surface of the shim.
Measurement II (example) = 258.10 mm
Calculation example:
(Measurement II) 258.10 mm (Measurement I) 256.65 mm =
-------------------------------------------------------(Difference) 1.45 mm (Endfloat 0.05 ... 0.10 mm) 0.07 mm. =
-------------------------------------------------------(Result = shim) s = 1.38 mm
4.
Fig. 2151
Fit the shim of the calculated thickness (e.g. 1.38 mm) in the bearing hole.
Fit the outer bearing race fully into its seat.
Fig. 2152
5.
Fig. 2153
6.
Fig. 2154
30-488
Method of intervention
7.
Fig. 2155
8.
Fit the sliders (see arrow) in the control fork using grease.
Fig. 2156
9.
Fig. 2157
10.
Lift the clutch, together with the control fork, into the cover.
Fig. 2158
30-489
Method of intervention
11.
Fit the oiled O-ring (see arrow) into the ring groove on the piston.
Fig. 2159
12.
Insert the piston into the hole in the cover and into the control fork until the
lower ring groove (also see following figure) can no longer be seen.
WARNING
Hold the control fork in the upper position (see arrow).
Fig. 2160
13.
Fit the oiled O-ring (see arrow) into the ring groove on the piston.
Move the piston into the correct position.
WARNING
Align the holes in the control fork and in the piston.
Fig. 2161
14.
Fig. 2162
30-490
Method of intervention
15.
16.
S = A B C + 0.2
Lift the control fork together with the sleeve, maintaining contact with the
face gear.
Measure the distance A from the contact surface of the hole blanking screw
to the front surface of the piston.
Measurement A (example) = 21.27 mm
(S) Final measurements: 5.9035.316.0
(S) Measurement calliper: 5.9035.229.0
Fig. 2164
17.
Measure distance B from the front surface to the collar of the hole blanking
screw.
Measurement B (example) = 16.03 mm
Fig. 2165
18.
Fig. 2166
30-491
Method of intervention
19.
Fig. 2167
20.
Fig. 2168
21.
Fig. 2169
22.
Adjust the control fork at a PTO rotation speed of 540 rpm in ECO mode
(figure 22...27)
S = A B C + 0.2
Lift the control fork together with the sleeve, maintaining contact with the
face gear.
Measure the distance A from the contact surface of the hole blanking screw
to the front surface of the piston.
Measurement A (example) = 23.00 mm
(S) Final measurements: 5.9035.316.0
(S) Measurement calliper: 5.9035.229.0
30-492
Fig. 2170
Method of intervention
23.
Measure distance B from the front surface to the collar of the hole blanking
screw.
Measurement B (example) = 16.03 mm
Fig. 2171
24.
25.
Fig. 2172
Fig. 2173
26.
Fig. 2174
30-493
Method of intervention
27.
Fig. 2175
28.
Fig. 2176
29.
Fig. 2177
30.
Fit the sliders (see arrow) in the control fork using grease.
Fig. 2178
30-494
Method of intervention
31.
Fig. 2179
32.
Fig. 2180
33.
Fig. 2181
34.
Fig. 2182
30-495
Method of intervention
35.
Fit the oiled O-ring (see arrow) into the ring groove on the piston.
Fig. 2183
36.
Adjust the control fork at a PTO rotation speed of 1000 rpm in ECO mode
(figure 36...42)
S = A B C + 0.2
Hold the control fork in contact with the sleeve and the face gears using
the piston.
Measure the distance A from the contact surface of the hole blanking screw
to the front surface of the piston.
Measurement A (example) = 21.98 mm
Fig. 2184
37.
Measure distance B from the front surface to the collar of the hole blanking
screw.
Measurement B (example) = 16.05 mm
Fig. 2185
38.
30-496
Fig. 2186
Method of intervention
39.
Fig. 2187
40.
Fig. 2188
41.
Fig. 2189
42.
Fig. 2190
30-497
Method of intervention
43.
Fig. 2191
44.
Affix the O-rings (see arrows) in the recesses on the rear axle housing with
grease.
Fig. 2192
45.
46.
Fasten the cover with screws, removing the fastener pins (S).
Torque (M12/8.8):
MA= 79 Nm
Torque (M18/8.8):
MA= 280 Nm
Torque (M20/10.9):
MA= 620 Nm
Fig. 2194
30-498
Method of intervention
47.
Fasten the solenoid valves with new oiled O-rings, using a suspension
plate.
Torque:
MA= 9 Nm
Fig. 2195
48.
Fig. 2196
49.
Fig. 2197
30-499
Method of intervention
30.7.12 - Fitting the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fit the retainer ring and the axle pinion in the differential case.
WARNING
Ensure that the retainer ring is installed in the correct position!
WARNING
Fit the retainer ring with the bevelled inner diameter facing
towards the axle pinion (upwards).
Fig. 2198
2.
Fit the compensation pinion into the case with the retainer rings, and fasten
with the compensation axle.
WARNING
Ensure that the retainer rings are aligned correctly axially!
WARNING
The lug (see arrow) must engage with the groove in the
case.
Fig. 2199
3.
Fig. 2200
4.
30-500
Fig. 2201
Method of intervention
5.
6.
Fig. 2202
Oil the O-rings (see arrows) and fit in the ring seats on the piston.
Fig. 2203
7.
Press-fit the piston fully into its seat in the compensation chamber.
WARNING
Ensure that the gear is installed correctly as shown in the
figure!
Fig. 2204
8.
Fig. 2205
9.
10.
Lift the differential into the rear axle housing and support in this position (see arrow).
30-501
Method of intervention
11.
12.
13.
14.
Fit the outer bearing races through the holes in the case on both sides (bringing them into contact with the tapered roller bearings).
Prefit the right hand adjuster screw (looking towards front).
12.1. Adjuster screw
12.2. Rectangular section rings
12.3. O-ring
Fit the two adjustment screws.
(S) Socket wrench: 5.9035.185.0
Adjust the ring gear:
1. The theoretical assembly measurement (E) is indicated on the ring gear.
2. Deviation from the theoretical value is etched on the ring gear by an
electric arc etching machine.
3. The desired assembly measurement
is calculated from the theoretical measurement
(E) and the deviation. Set with a tolerance of 0.025 mm.
Example:
(Theoretical
assembly measurement) 97.00 +
(Deviation) + 0.2 =
Fig. 2206
-------------------------------------------------------(Effective
assembly measurement) 97.2 0.025
If no deviation is indicated, observe the theoretical assembly measurement:
(E) = 97.00 0.025.
15.
4. The ring gear is adjusted using a measurement calliper (S) placed precisely in contact with the two cylindrical pins. When adjusting the assembly
measurement, the average value of the circularity deviation of the measurement surface must be measured. The assembly measurement must be
applied with reference to this average value.
5. The maximum circularity deviation permitted is 0.06 mm.
6. After adjusting the ring gear, adjust the rolling resistance torque of the
differential mount to a value between 5 and 7 Nm.
Adjust the assembly measurements by turning the two adjustment screws
and checking the results.
(S) Measurement calliper: 5.9035.229.0
(S) Gauge: 5.9035.449.0
Fig. 2207
30-502
Method of intervention
16.
Check that the bearing preload is between 5 and 7 Nm. Adjust if necessary
by turning the adjuster screw.
WARNING
Once set, do not adjust the ring gear again!
Fig. 2208
17.
Fig. 2209
18.
Fit the stop bracket and fasten with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M8/8.8):
MA = 23 Nm
WARNING
Moisten the threads of the hexagonal head screws with Loctite 243!
Fig. 2210
19.
Fig. 2211
30-503
Method of intervention
30.7.13 - Fitting brakes (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2212
2.
Fasten the tie-rod (1) with the pins (2) and secure with the split pin (3).
1
Fig. 2213
3.
Fig. 2214
4.
Fit the shaft seal ring fully into its seat in the brake plate.
Oil the O-rings (see arrow) and fit into the ring groove.
WARNING
Moisten the outer diameter of the shaft seal ring with alcohol
immediately before fitting.
WARNING
Grease the space between the seal lips.
Fig. 2215
30-504
Method of intervention
5.
Fit the preassembled brake plate on the rear axle housing, bringing it
against the respective contact surface.
Fasten the rear axle housing with the hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M12/8.8):
MA= 79 Nm
WARNING
Fit the hexagonal head screws into the two threaded holes
with the disc.
Fig. 2216
6.
Fit the O-ring (see arrow 1) on the shaft of the central pinion.
Fit the rectangular section rings (see arrow 2).
2
2
Fig. 2217
7.
Push the shaft of the central pinion completely into its seat.
Fig. 2218
8.
Fit the rubber bush on the tie-rod and into the ring groove of the tie-rod.
Then fit the rubber bush completely into it seat in the rear axle housing.
(S) Installation tool: 5.9035.238.0
WARNING
Moisten the contact surface with Loctite 574!
Fig. 2219
30-505
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 2220
10.
Fit the actuator mechanism and fasten with cylindrical head screws.
Torque (M10/10.9):
MA= 68 Nm
Fig. 2221
11.
Fasten the line onto the bearing mount (see arrow) with the clamp, the
hexagonal head screw and the hexagonal head nut.
Torque (M5/8.8):
MA= 5,5 Nm
Fig. 2222
12.
Fasten the tie-rod (1) onto the actuator mechanism with pins.
Fit the disc (2) and fasten with the split pin (3).
Then attach the tensioner spring (4).
3
4
Fig. 2223
30-506
Method of intervention
13.
Fit the disc with the radius facing downwards and tighten the hexagonal
head nut.
Torque:
MA= 15 Nm
Then loosen the hexagonal head nut by 2 turns.
Fig. 2224
14.
Fig. 2225
30.7.14 - Fitting the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
1.
Press-fit the wheel pivots fully into their respective seats in the rear half
axle.
(S) Installation tool: 5.9035.304.0
(S) Insert (M22x1.5): 5.9035.305.0
WARNING
The special tool (S) may only be used for replacing individual wheel pivots with the rear half axle mounted!
Fig. 2226
2.
30-507
Method of intervention
3.
In figure:
1 = rear half axle
2 = shaft seal ring
3 = axle housing
4 = tapered roller bearing
X = fill with grease
Fill 50 75% of the volume with grease.
3
2
1
Fig. 2228
4.
Heat the tapered roller bearing and install fully into its respective seat in
the rear half axle.
WARNING
Wear protective gloves!
WARNING
Reposition the tapered roller bearing correctly once cooled!
Fig. 2229
5.
Fit the two outer bearing races against the respective contact surfaces on
the axle housing.
Fig. 2230
6.
Fit the axle housing onto the rear half axle using suitable lift equipment.
(S) Suspension ring: 5.9035.479.0
WARNING
Moisten the surface of the shaft seal ring with alcohol immediately before fitting.
Fig. 2231
30-508
Method of intervention
7.
Heat the tapered roller bearing and install fully into its respective seat.
WARNING
Wear protective gloves!
WARNING
Reposition the tapered roller bearing correctly once cooled!
Fig. 2232
8.
Fig. 2233
9.
Fit the mount, turning the ring nut until there is no endfloat.
Maximum permissible endfloat 0 0.015 mm.
WARNING
During adjustment, turn the axle housing several times in
both directions.
Fig. 2234
10.
Fit the circlip (see arrow) into the lower ring groove on the planet gear.
Fit the retainer ring.
WARNING
Ensure that the planet gear is installed in the right way
around (part number facing upwards).
Fig. 2235
30-509
Method of intervention
11.
Fit the cylindrical roller bearing in the planet gear with the wider diameter
facing downwards, pressing the cylindrical roller bearing through the bush
in the housing.
Fit the retainer ring and fasten the cylindrical roller bearing with a circlip.
Fig. 2236
12.
Fig. 2237
13.
Fig. 2238
14.
Fig. 2239
30-510
Method of intervention
15.
In figure:
1 = planet gear carrier
2 = spring pin
X = assembly
measurement 2.0 mm (+ 0.5)
1
2
Fig. 2240
16.
Fit the ball (see arrow) into the shaft, using grease.
Fit a new threaded pin.
WARNING
Moisten the thread of the threaded pin with Loctite 243!
Fig. 2241
17.
Fit the planet gear carrier onto the rear half axle using suitable lift equipment.
WARNING
Ensure that the planet gear carrier is aligned correctly axially. Rotate the planet gear carrier to engage the spring pin
(figure 15) correctly in one of the grooves of the ring nut.
Fig. 2242
18.
Adjust the endfloat of the planet gear carrier: 0.1 mm. 0.4 mm:
adjust the endfloat by turning the threaded pin.
Refit the spring pin again (see also figure 15) after adjusting the endfloat
of the sun gear.
(S) Press-fit pin: 5.9035.443.0
Fig. 2243
30-511
Method of intervention
19.
Fig. 2244
20.
Fit the ring gear on the rear axle housing, bringing it against the respective
contact surface.
WARNING
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite 574!
Fig. 2245
21.
Fit the axle housing against the respective contact surface using suitable
lift equipment.
(S) Upper holes (M12): 5.9035.377.0
Fasten the axle housing with hexagonal head screws and hexagonal nuts.
Torque (M12/10.9):
MA= 115 Nm
WARNING
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite 574!
Fig. 2246
30-512
Method of intervention
30.7.15 - Separating rear axle from transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Loosen the hole blanking screws on the gearbox housing and on the rear
axle housing and drain the oil.
Fig. 2247
2.
Fig. 2248
3.
Fig. 2249
4.
Place the complete assembly (transmission and rear axle) on a pallet with
a high load capacity.
Then fasten the axle with lifting equipment and loosen the assembly fastened with screws.
(S) Upper holes (M12): 5.9035.377.0
(S) Upper holes (M18): 5.9035.378.0
Fig. 2250
30-513
Method of intervention
5.
Fit the two fastener pins (S) and separate the rear axle from the transmission.
(S) Fastener pins (M16): 5.9035.251.0
(S) Assembly lever: 5.9035.203.0
Fig. 2251
Fig. 2252
2.
Secure the axle stub with lifting gear and loosen the threaded connection.
Then, remove the axle stub and ring gear.
m
Fig. 2253
3.
Loosen the grub screw and pull the released planet carrier away from the
rear axle shaft using lifting gear.
Fig. 2254
30-514
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 2255
5.
Pull the planetary gear away from the planet carrier using a two-arm puller.
Fig. 2256
6.
Pry out the snap rings on both sides and remove the released cylindrical
roller bearing along with the thrust plates.
Fig. 2257
7.
Fig. 2258
30-515
Method of intervention
8.
Pull the axle stub away from the rear axle shaft using a two-arm puller.
Remove the released tapered roller bearing.
Fig. 2259
9.
If necessary, drive out the two bearing outer races from the axle stub.
Fig. 2260
10.
Pull the tapered roller bearing away from the rear axle shaft.
m
Fig. 2261
11.
Fig. 2262
30-516
Method of intervention
30.7.17 - Brake Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2263
2.
Pull the cotter pin (1), remove the washer and detach the pull rod (2).
Then, detach the extension spring (3) and fold the actuator upward.
Fig. 2264
3.
Fig. 2265
4.
Fig. 2266
30-517
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2267
6.
Fig. 2268
7.
If necessary, pull the cotter pin (see arrow), pull the bolt and remove the
pull rod.
DANGER
No further disassembly of the brake is permitted (safety
component) - the brake is supplied as a complete unit!
Fig. 2269
8.
Check the rubber grommet (see arrow) for damage - lever it out of the bore
if necessary.
Fig. 2270
30-518
Method of intervention
30.7.18 - Differential - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Remove the lubrication lines for ring gear (1) and differential mounting (2).
Fig. 2271
2.
Loosen the hexagon bolts and remove the released locking plate.
Fig. 2272
3.
Fig. 2273
4.
Press the differential to the right (see arrow) using an assembly lever (S).
m
Then, remove the right bearing outer race and lift the differential out of the
rear axle housing.
Fig. 2274
30-519
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2275
6.
Secure the axle stub with lifting gear and loosen the threaded connection.
Fig. 2276
7.
Separate the differential housing together with piston (1) and ring gear (2)
from differential casing (3).
Then, push the piston out of the differential housing using compressed air.
Fig. 2277
8.
Remove the thrust plate, disk pack and axle bevel gear.
Fig. 2278
30-520
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 2279
10.
Pull the differential axles and remove the released differential bevel gears
and thrust plates.
Fig. 2280
11.
Fig. 2281
30-521
Method of intervention
30.7.19 - PTO Transmission - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2282
2.
Loosen the hexagon bolts and take out the two gearshift actuators.
Fig. 2283
3.
Lever
Roll pin
Flange bearing
O-ring
Shift shaft
Fig. 2284
4.
Loosen the threaded connection and remove the entire PTO transmission.
Fig. 2285
30-522
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2286
6.
Loosen the hexagon bolts and remove the released PTO stub shaft.
Fig. 2287
7.
Loosen the cap bolt and pull out the rpm sensor from the hole.
Fig. 2288
8.
Loosen the threaded connection, take off the end cover and remove the
adjusting disk located behind.
Then, lever the shaft seal out of the end cover.
Fig. 2289
30-523
Method of intervention
9.
Loosen the hexagon bolts, take off the cover and remove the adjusting disk
located behind.
Fig. 2290
10.
Loosen the screw plug and pull out the piston and compression spring from
from the hole in the cover.
Fig. 2291
11.
Pull the bell housing away from the clutch shaft using a three-arm puller.
Fig. 2292
12.
Heat up the bell housing and pull the ball bearing out of the bore.
CAUTION
The ball bearing is secured with Loctite (Type No.: 649) !
Fig. 2293
30-524
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 2294
14.
Push the piston out of the pressure cylinder using compressed air.
Fig. 2295
15.
Remove the two plain compression rings (arrow 1) and spacer ring (arrow
2).
Fig. 2296
16.
Fig. 2297
30-525
Method of intervention
17.
Lift the roller bearing (see arrow) through the sensor rotor (see Drawing 19
also) and out of the bearing seat until the sensor rotor can turn freely.
Fig. 2298
18.
Turn the sensor rotor until the profiles are overlapping (flange shaft and
sensor rotor).
CAUTION
When the two profiles are congruent with each other, the
sensor rotor can be heard to click into the flange shaft.
Fig. 2299
19.
CAUTION
Lift the roller bearing over the sensor rotor (see arrows)!
Drawing legend:
19.1.
19.2.
19.3.
Flange shaft
Roller bearing
Sensor rotor
Fig. 2300
20.
Turn the housing through 180 and press out the flange shaft using a twoarm puller.
Fig. 2301
30-526
Method of intervention
21.
Fig. 2302
22.
Drive out the two bearing pins and the clutch shaft (see arrows).
Fig. 2303
23.
Remove all the individual parts (spur gears, double spur gears, sleeve carriers, shift collars) from the PTO shaft housing.
Fig. 2304
24.
Pull the roller bearing away from the double spur gear and bearing pin.
m
m
Fig. 2305
30-527
Method of intervention
30.7.20 - Oil Supply - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2306
2.
Loosen the hexagon bolts and take out the released valve block.
Fig. 2307
3.
Fig. 2308
4.
Loosen the cap bolts and take out the released valve block.
Fig. 2309
30-528
Method of intervention
5.
Loosen the cap bolt and pull out the solenoid from the valve block.
Fig. 2310
6.
Remove the pressure line (arrow 1) and pressure line (arrow 2).
Fig. 2311
Loosen the hexagon bolts and remove the complete lifting unit and brake
shaft using lifting gear.
Fig. 2312
2.
Fig. 2313
30-529
Method of intervention
3.
Separate the bearing brackets, drive shaft and brake shaft from each other.
Fig. 2314
4.
Fig. 2315
Bushing
Bushings
Vent valve
Screw plug with seal ring MA = 35 Nm
Screw plug MA = 120 Nm
Oil level indicator
Stud bolt MA = 23 Nm 5
DANGER
Smear the thread of the stud bolts with Loctite (Type No.
243).
Fig. 2316
Fig. 2317
30-530
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 2318
3.
Fig. 2319
4.
Drawing legend:
4.1. Drive shaft
4.2. Stamped line
4.3. Bushing
Fig. 2320
5.
Brake shaft
Pull rod
Pin
Tube
Nut
Fig. 2321
30-531
Method of intervention
6.
Fig. 2322
7.
Mount the ring (arrow 1) and brake lever (arrow 2) on the brake shaft and
fix them with roll pins.
Fig. 2323
8.
Bring the preassembled lift unit into position using lifting gear and fasten
with hexagon bolts.
Tightening torque (M20/10.9) MA = 560 Nm
Fig. 2324
30-532
Method of intervention
30.7.24 - Oil Supply - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fit the nipples with new seal rings and mount them (3x, see arrows).
m
Tightening torque MA = 55 Nm
Fig. 2325
2.
Fit the nipple with a new seal ring and mount it (see arrow).
m
Tightening torque MA = 55 Nm
Fig. 2326
3.
Fit the nipples (1) with new seal rings and mount them.
Tightening torque MA = 90 Nm
Then, mount the threaded connection (2)
m
Tightening torque MA = 45 Nm
Fig. 2327
4.
Tightening torque MA = 45 Nm
Fig. 2328
30-533
Method of intervention
5.
Oil the O-rings (3x, see arrows) and insert in the ring grooves in the solenoid valve.
Fig. 2329
6.
Fit the nipples with new seal rings and mount them (2x, see arrows).
Tightening torque (M8/8.8) MA = 35 Nm
Then, fasten the solenoid valves with a claw and cap bolts.
m
Fig. 2330
7.
Insert the O-rings (3x, see arrows) in the countersinks in the valve block.
Fig. 2331
8.
Fig. 2332
30-534
Method of intervention
9.
Tightening torque MA = 35 Nm
CAUTION
Fit the banjo bolt with new seal rings!
Fig. 2333
10.
Fit the nipples (4x) with new seal rings and mount them.
m
Fig. 2334
11.
Oil the O-rings (3x) and insert in the ring grooves in the solenoid valves.
Then, fasten the solenoid valves with a claw and cap bolts.
m
Fig. 2335
12.
Place the seal and fasten the preassembled valve block with hexagon bolts.
m
Fig. 2336
30-535
Method of intervention
13.
Tightening torque MA = 80 Nm
Fig. 2337
14.
Tightening torque MA = 80 Nm
Fig. 2338
Fig. 2339
2.
Fit the outer bearing races (x3, see arrows) in the PTO housing.
Fig. 2340
30-536
Method of intervention
3.
Preassemble the tapered roller bearings (1), tube (2), face gear (3), sleeve
(4), sleeve mount (5) and face gear (6) as shown in the figure aside.
Fig. 2341
4.
Fig. 2342
5.
Heat the tapered roller bearing and install fully into its respective seat on
the clutch shaft.
CAUTION
Reposition the bearings once cooled!
Fig. 2343
6.
Fit the clutch shaft fully in its seat using the two arm extractor tool.
Fit the rectangular section rings (x3, see arrows) in the ring seats on clutch
shaft and secure in the correct position with grease.
Fig. 2344
30-537
Method of intervention
7.
Fit the outer bearing race fully into its seat in the housing.
Fig. 2345
8.
Cover
Thrust spring
Piston
Hole blanking screw
Fig. 2346
9.
Fig. 2347
10.
Measure the distance II from the contact surface of the outer bearing race
to the flange mating surface of the cover.
Measurement II, example: 9.31 mm Calculation example A:
m
m
m
m
Fig. 2348
30-538
Method of intervention
11.
Fit the adjustment washer (e.g. s = 1.00 mm) into the hole in the housing.
Fig. 2349
12.
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite ( 574) and fasten the cover
with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M8/8.8):
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 2350
13.
Fig. 2351
14.
Fit the outer bearing races and the two roller bearings into the face gear on
both sides of the double face gear.
Fig. 2352
30-539
Method of intervention
15.
Fit the outer bearing race (see arrow) into the double face gear.
Fig. 2353
16.
Heat the roller bearings and install fully in their seats on the double face
gear.
CAUTION
Reposition the bearings once cooled!
Fig. 2354
17.
Fig. 2355
18.
Fit the sleeve, sleeve mount, face gear and transducer wheel.
Fig. 2356
30-540
Method of intervention
19.
Fit the flanged shaft fully in its seat using the two arm extractor tool.
CAUTION
Ensure that the flanged shaft and transducer wheel cover
are aligned correctly.
Fig. 2357
20.
Lift the transducer wheel (see arrow) and turn by 60 (see figure).
Fig. 2358
21.
Heat the roller bearings (see arrow) and fit fully into their seats on the
flanged shaft.
CAUTION
Reposition the bearings once cooled!
DANGER
The transducer wheel must be secured by contact with the
roller bearing and must not be rotated again.
Fig. 2359
22.
Fit the outer bearing race fully into its seat in the housing.
Fig. 2360
30-541
Method of intervention
23.
Fit the shaft seal ring (see arrow) fully into its seat in the cover.
CAUTION
Moisten the outer diameter of the shaft seal ring with alcohol
immediately before fitting.
Fig. 2361
24.
Adjust the bearing endfloat to a value between 0.01 and 0.06 mm:
Measure the distance I from the flange mating surface of the PTO housing
to the front surface of the outer bearing race.
Measurement I, example: 5.23 mm -
Fig. 2362
25.
Measure the distance II from the contact surface of the outer bearing race
to the flange mating surface of the cover.
Measurement II, example: 4.40 mm Calculation example A:
m
m
m
m
26.
Fit the adjustment washer (e.g. s = 0.80 mm) into the hole in the housing.
Fig. 2364
30-542
Method of intervention
27.
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite ( 574) and fasten the cover
with hexagonal head screws and hexagonal head nuts.
Torque M
MA = 23 Nm
Fig. 2365
28.
Fig. 2366
29.
Grease the O-ring see figure) and install in the ring seat on the bearing
pins.
Heat the two roller bearings and fit the bearing pins fully into their seats in
the PTO housing and on the double face gear.
CAUTION
Ensure that the parts are aligned correctly radially. Align the
groove and the hole in the housing.
Fig. 2367
30.
Grease the O-ring see figure) and install in the ring seat on the bearing
pins.
Heat the roller bearings and install fully in their seats on the bearing pins.
CAUTION
Reposition the roller bearing correctly once cooled!
Fig. 2368
30-543
Method of intervention
31.
Fit the bearing pins fully into their seats in the PTO housing and on the
double face gear.
CAUTION
Ensure that the parts are aligned correctly radially. Align the
groove and the hole in the housing.
Fig. 2369
32.
Fit the spring pins (x2, see arrows) fully into their seats on the bearing pins.
Fig. 2370
33.
Adjust the endfloat of the double face gear bearings to a value between
0.01 and 0.05 mm by turning the hexagonal head nut.
Fasten with hexagonal head nuts.
Fig. 2371
34.
Adjust the endfloat of the second double face gear bearings to a value
between 0.01 and 0.05 mm by turning the ring nut.
(S) Ring nut wrench 5.9035.439.0
Fasten the ring nut.
Fig. 2372
30-544
Method of intervention
35.
Fit the thrust spring and the balls in the holes in the disc carrier.
Fig. 2373
36.
37.
Fig. 2375
38.
Fig. 2376
30-545
Method of intervention
39.
Oil the O-ring (see arrow) and install in the ring seat on the piston.
Fig. 2377
40.
Fig. 2378
41.
Fig. 2379
42.
Fig. 2380
30-546
Method of intervention
43.
Fig. 2381
44.
Fit the preassembled clutch assembly on the clutch shaft and fasten with
a circlip.
Remove the installation tool (S).
Fig. 2382
45.
Press-fit the ball bearings fully into their seats in the clutch housing.
DANGER
Moisten the outer diameter of the ball bearings with Loctite
( 649)!
Fig. 2383
46.
Heat the ball roller bearing and install fully into its respective seat in the
clutch housing.
Fig. 2384
30-547
Method of intervention
47.
Fit the thrust spring and the ball in the two control forks and fasten with a
press-fit pin (S) (see figure aside).
(S) Press-fit pin: 5.9035.450.0
Fig. 2385
48.
Fig. 2386
49.
Fig. 2387
50.
Fig. 2388
30-548
Method of intervention
51.
Fit the PTO transmission in the rear axle housing and fasten with hexagonal head screws and hexagonal head nuts.
Torque
MA = 46 Nm
CAUTION
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite ( 574)!
Fig. 2389
52.
Lever
Spring pin
Flange bearing
O-Ring
Control shaft
Fig. 2390
53.
Fit the two selector actuator mechanisms in the rear axle housing and fasten with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M8/8.8):
MA = 23 Nm
CAUTION
Moisten the flange mating surface with Loctite ( 574)!
Fig. 2391
54.
Fig. 2392
30-549
Method of intervention
30.7.26 - Fitting the differential (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fit the retainer ring and the axle pinion in the differential case.
CAUTION
Fit the retainer ring, ensuring that it is fitted in the correct
position, with the bevelled inner diameter facing towards the
axle pinion (upwards).
Fig. 2393
2.
Fit the compensation pinion into the case with the retainer rings, and fasten
with the compensation axle.
CAUTION
Ensure that the retainer rings is aligned correctly radially.
The lug (see arrow) must engage with the groove in the
case.
Fig. 2394
3.
Fig. 2395
4.
Fit the two fastener pins (S) and the ring gear.
Then fit the axle pinion and the retainer ring.
m
Fig. 2396
30-550
Method of intervention
5.
6.
Oil the O-rings (see arrows) and fit in the ring seats on the piston.
Fig. 2398
7.
Press-fit the piston fully into its seat in the compensation chamber.
CAUTION
Ensure that the part is installed correctly as shown in the
figure!
Fig. 2399
8.
Fig. 2400
30-551
Method of intervention
9.
Fig. 2401
10.
Lift the differential into the rear axle housing and support in this position
(see arrow).
Fig. 2402
11.
Fit the outer bearing races through the holes in the case on both sides
(bringing them into contact with the tapered roller bearings).
Fig. 2403
12.
Adjuster screw
Rectangular section rings
Figure: O-ring
Fig. 2404
30-552
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 2405
14.
Table 356
Example:
84,00
+
Theoretical
assembly measurement
15.
0,2
Deviation
84,2 0,025
Desired
assembly measurement
Fig. 2406
Fig. 2407
30-553
Method of intervention
16.
Check that the bearing preload is between 5 and 7 Nm. Adjust if necessary
by turning the adjuster screw.
DANGER
Once set, do not adjust the ring gear again!
Fig. 2408
17.
Fig. 2409
18.
Fit the stop bracket and fasten with hexagonal head screws.
Torque (M8/8.8):
MA = 23 Nm
DANGER
Moisten the threads of the hexagonal head screws with Loctite ( 243).
Fig. 2410
19.
Fig. 2411
30-554
Method of intervention
30.7.27 - Brake Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Mount the external plates and coated disks alternately, starting with an external plate.
CAUTION
For disk coatings, also see the corresponding replacement
parts list.!
DANGER
Note the radial installation position of the coated disks, the
cooling oil bores must be mounted flush!
Fig. 2412
2.
Fix the pull rod (1) with pin (2) and secure with cotter pin (3).
Fig. 2413
3.
Fig. 2414
4.
Fig. 2415
30-555
Method of intervention
5.
Mount the preassembled brake plate in position in the rear axle housing
and fasten with hexagon bolts.
Tightening torque (M12/8.8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA = 79 Nm
CAUTION
Fit the hexagon bolts in the two threaded holes with washers.
Fig. 2416
6.
Grease the seal ring and insert in the ring groove on the pinion (see arrow).
Fig. 2417
7.
Fig. 2418
8.
Slip the rubber grommet over the pull rod and insert it in the ring groove of
the pull rod .
Then, insert the rubber grommet in position in the rear axle housing.
CAUTION
Smear the contact surface with Loctite (Type No.574).
Fig. 2419
30-556
Method of intervention
9.
Tightening torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA = 25
Fig. 2420
10.
Fig. 2421
11.
Fasten the line to the bearing bracket with clamp, hexagon bolt and hexagon nut (see arrow).
Fig. 2422
12.
Attach the pull rod (1) to the pin and secure with washer (2) and cotter pin
(3).
Then, attach the extension spring (4).
Fig. 2423
30-557
Method of intervention
13.
Place the washer with radius facing downward and screw on the hexagon
nut.
Tightening torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA = 10 Nm
Loosen the hexagon nut by 1.5 turns and secure with the jam nut (see illustration below).
m
Fig. 2424
14.
Fig. 2425
Press the cylindrical roller into position in the rear axle shaft.
DANGER
Smear the outside diameter with Loctite (Type No. 649).
Fig. 2426
2.
Press the wheel studs into position in the rear axle shaft.
m
Fig. 2427
30-558
Method of intervention
3.
4.
Drawing legend:
4.1. Rear axle shaft
4.2. Shaft seal
X. Grease filling
Fill 50 75% of the volume with grease (ZF part number: 0671 190 079).
m
Fig. 2429
5.
Heat up the tapered roller bearing and mount in position on the rear axle
shaft.
CAUTION
Re-adjust the tapered roller bearing after it has cooled.
Fig. 2430
6.
Insert the two bearing outer races in position in the axle stub.
Fig. 2431
30-559
Method of intervention
7.
Using lifting gear, slip the axle stub onto the rear axle shaft.
CAUTION
Smear the sealing surface of the shaft seal with ethyl alcohol immediately before mounting.
Fig. 2432
8.
Fig. 2433
9.
Fig. 2434
10.
11.
Fig. 2435
30-560
Method of intervention
12.
Fit the snap ring (see arrow) into the lower ring groove in the planetary gear
and insert the thrust plate.
CAUTION
Check that the planetary gear is correctly positioned (parts
number facing upward)!
Fig. 2436
13.
Insert the cylindrical roller bearing in the planetary gear with the large radius facing downward to do this, push the cylindrical roller bearing through
the packing sleeve.
Then, insert the thrust plate and fix the cylindrical roller bearing with the
snap ring.
Fig. 2437
14.
Heat up the bearing inner race and and fit the planetary gears in position
with the large radius toward the planet carrier (facing downward).
CAUTION
Re-adjust the cylindrical roller bearing after it has cooled!
Fig. 2438
15.
Fig. 2439
30-561
Method of intervention
16.
Fig. 2440
17.
Drawing legend
17.1.
17.2.
m
Planet carrier
Roll pin
X. Installed dimension 2.5+0.5 mm
Fig. 2441
18.
Insert the ball with grease in the shaft (see arrow) and mount a new grub
screw.
DANGER
Smear the thread of the grub screw with Loctite (Type No.
243).
Fig. 2442
19.
Using lifting gear, mount the planet carrier on the rear axle shaft.
DANGER
Note the radial installation position - turn the planet carrier
so that the roll pin (illustration 15) fits into a groove in the
slotted nut!
Fig. 2443
30-562
Method of intervention
20.
Fig. 2444
21.
Fig. 2445
22.
Fit the ring gear into position in the rear axle housing.
DANGER
Smear the flange-on surface with Loctite (Type No. 574).
Fig. 2446
23.
Using lifting gear, fit the preassembled axle stub into position.
(S) Eye bolts (M12): 5.9035.377.0
Then, fasten the axle stub with hexagon bolts and hexagon nuts.
m
Fig. 2447
30-563
Method of intervention
30.7.29 - Attaching rear axle to gearbox (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
1.
Fig. 2448
2.
Fig. 2449
3.
Fig. 2450
4.
Using lifting gear (S), bring the rear axle into position at the gearbox and
fasten with hexagon bolts.
m
Fig. 2451
30-564
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2452
6.
DANGER
Before putting the assembly into service, read the data and/or specifications and the instructions in the ZF operators manual, and the specifications and instructions of the vehicle manufacturer!
30.7.30 - Procedure for checking EPB travel (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Purpose of the document
SMatic 180+
The purpose of this document is to illustrate the procedure for checking the travel of the EPB (Electric Parking Brake) system, P/N:
0.018.6330.4/10.
The document is compatible with software versions:
Transmission:
l
30-565
Method of intervention
Fig. 2453
30-566
Method of intervention
To perform the operations described above the main actions are as follows, in sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Removal of the EPB system may be required in the following cases (examples given are indicative only):
l
l
The following section describes the operations involved in removing, refitting and adjusting the EPB system.
With regard to removal, refitting and mechanically adjusting the braking system, refer to the relative standard.
WARNING
During maintenance [Maintenance] operations, the EPB system may be locked in a position in which it will NOT brake
the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle is in a condition of safety before performing the following operations.
DANGER
During maintenance [Maintenance] operations, the EPB system activates automatically. Stay out of the braking system area and do not operate in any way in order to prevent injuries to the limbs.
30-567
Method of intervention
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
After a few seconds the ART will present the screen page shown here.
Select: [1] -HLHP TTV by pressing the relative button on the tester keypad.
A V A I L A B L E
T E S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
M E N U
1 -
H L H P
T T V
C H O I
S E
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2456
= = = = =
D E U T Z
S
1 1
T R A N S
S P E E D
T Y R E
S U S P .
A S M
P T O f o
R A D A R
A I R
C
D I S T R
F . L I F
C A B . M
[
H
T
C 1
- 0
M .
L
T
3
4
:
:
: 6
:
:
r w :
:
.
:
.
:
T
:
R D :
H P
= =
V
S M A
4 A F 2
- 2 0 1 4
S 2 4 0
4 0 K m
5 0 / 6 5
3 V I +
Y e s
N o
Y e s
Y e s
7
C A
N o
N o
E ]
E x i
= = =
T I C
H D
/ h
R 4 2
N m 3
Fig. 2457
Select:
2 - Calibration [Calibrations]
Finally, the next page will open.
l
M A I N
M E N U
-------------------
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
o
a
e
l
n
l
s
a
i
i
t
r
t o r s
b r a t i
E ]
L i
o n s
s t
E x i
Fig. 2458
30-568
Method of intervention
Select:
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
Finally, the next page will open.
l
C A L I
B R A T I
= =
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B CD -
=
a
P
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
E ]
=
T
P
A
L
S
S
C
D
E
A
P
A
M
=
r
T
S
i
u
y
A
i
n
i
a
g
R
O N
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
r i
n e
o n
B
s k
C
M E N U
o n
b u t
o r
d i t i o n e r
r a k e
y
a b i n
E x i
Fig. 2459
Select:
2 Maintenance [Maintenance].
Finally, the next page will open.
l
P A R K
B R A K E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1
2
3
4
A
M
C
C
u
a
a
o
t
i
l
n
o
n t
i b
f i
A p p l
e n a n
.
s l
g u r a
y
c e
o p e
t i o n
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2460
Select:
3 - Default position [Default pos.]
If the command is accepted the system displays the next screen page and the
EPB device assumes the default position.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2461
30-569
Method of intervention
Turn the ignition switch to Stop.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
O p e r a t i o n
e x e c u t e d
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E x i
Fig. 2462
Remove the Bowden cable forked end to the transmission control lever with an
appropriate clip as illustrated in the figure.
Fig. 2463
WARNING
Do not remove the EPB actuator under any circumstances!
Adjusting the service brakes (right wheel and left wheel)
WARNING
Ensure that the threaded brake adjuster screws are clean and free of rust or paint.
Step 1 - Loosen check nut (1).
Step 2 - Tighten the nut (2) to a torque of 30 Nm.
Step 3 - Undo the nut (2) completely.
Step 4 - Tighten the nut (2) to 15 Nm.
Step 5 - Loosen the nut (2) by 1.75 turns.
Once adjustment is complete, tighten the check nut (1) to a torque of 80 Nm.
30-570
Method of intervention
Fig. 2464
Fig. 2465
30-571
Method of intervention
Use the appropriate feeler gauge as illustrated in the figure. During this operation
pull the tie-rod in order to eliminate the mechanical system clearance.
Fig. 2466
Procedure composed of 1 initialization and 9 apply and release cycles for bedding in of the Bowden cable and the brake
system.
2. Fixing:
l
Fastening EPB unit to bracket (not required if EPB actuator was not removed).
3. Mechanical adjustment:
l
4. Validation:
l
Consisting of initialization of the EPB device, whereby the system identifies the limit positions of the activation stroke:
Bedding in
During this phase the EPB carries out 10 bedding in cycles of the entire system (engagement and release of the park brake); when
these cycles have been completed the EPB goes into the Apply position.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket and turn the ignition
switch to ON. After a few seconds the ART will display the screen page shown
in the figure.
Select in the following order:
2 - Calibration [Calibrations],
B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
l 2 Maintenance [Maintenance].
The page shown in the figure will be displayed.
l
l
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2466
30-572
Method of intervention
The following information is displayed:
Status [Status]:
l
Position [Position]:
Current EPB position expressed in mm.
Recovery:
l
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2467
System initialization.
Default position [Default pos.]:
l
Brings the EPB to the correct position for adjustment of the Bowden cable.
Apply [Apply]:
l
30-573
Method of intervention
Select:
6 - Test cycles [Cycle tests].
If the command is accepted the initialisation procedure begins.
If the initialisation procedure completes:
CORRECTLY
the system proceeds with the bedding-in cycle, displaying the relative
screen page: Bedding-in cycles in progress. Please wait... indicating the
number of cycles performed and the current status of the procedure.
INCORRECTLY
l
P A R K
C Y C L E
=
S
P
R
=
=
t
o
e
=
=
a
s
c
=
=
t
i
o
=
=
u
t
v
=
=
s
i
e
=
=
:
o
r
=
B R A K E
T E S T S
= = = = = = = = =
n :
y :
= = = = = = = = =
n i t i a l i z a t i o n
I n
P r o g r e s s
P l e a s e
W a i t . . .
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2468
At the end of the 9 bedding-in cycles the EPB system assumes the apply position
and the user is presented with the screen page shown in the figure.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2469
STOP
Fig. 2470
30-574
Method of intervention
Mechanical adjustment
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket and turn the ignition
switch to ON. After a few seconds the ART will display the screen page shown
in the figure.
Select HLHP TTV by pressing the relative button on the tester keypad.
A V A I L A B L E
T E S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
M E N U
1 -
H L H P
T T V
C H O I
S E
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2470
2 - Calibration [Calibrations],
m B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
m 2 Maintenance [Maintenance].
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2470
STOP
Fig. 2470
Fig. 2471
30-575
Method of intervention
Tighten the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts by one more turn with a suitable
19 mm wrench.
Fig. 2472
Validation
In this stage the EPB system is initialized electronically and an Apply/Release procedure is performed. In this manner the system is
able to identify the correct operating travel, thus allowing the user to check the correct mechanical adjustment of the Bowden cable.
Proceed as follows:
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket, turn the tractor ignition switch to ON and select HLHP TTV. Then:
l
l
l
l
2 - Calibration [Calibrations],
B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
2 Maintenance [Maintenance],
2 - Initialize [Init.].
The EPB system carries out an initialisation, stopping in the Apply position.
Check that on the display, in correspondence to the second line: Position: xx.xx,
the value in Apply is between: 30.00 and 34.00 mm.
WARNING
This course refers both to a braking system with new brakes and
a system in which mechanical adjustment of the brakes has been
carried out.
3 possible conditions:
l
a) If the value is between 30.00 and 34.00 proceed with carrying out the
next operations.
b) If the value is lower than 30.00, the following will appear on the display:
Initialisation failed Switch off the system and adjust the Bowden. Turn
the tractor ignition switch to Stop, loosen the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts (with a suitable 19 mm wrench) by a 1/4 turn, and restart the
procedure from the beginning.
c) If the value is greater than 34.00, select: [3] - Default and turn the tractor
ignition switch to Stop. Tighten the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts
1/4 turn (using an appropriate 19 mm wrench) and restart the procedure
from the beginning.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2472
2
3
STOP
Fig. 2472
Reconnect the trailer pneumatic brake tie-rod, adjusting the length of the tie-rod so that it will fit onto the ball joints.
30-576
Method of intervention
Repeat the validation procedure with the tie-rod connected.
M A I N
M E N U
-------------------
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
o
a
e
l
n
l
s
a
i
i
t
r
t o r s
b r a t i
E ]
L i
o n s
s t
E x i
Fig. 2472
If the clearing is completed successfully the screen shown in the figure will appear.
A L A R M
L I
S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
A l
a r
m s
e r
a r
b e e n
a s e d .
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E x i
Fig. 2473
Clear statistics
To clear the system statistics saved on the Service ECU proceed as follows:
Starting from the main Menu select in the following order:
l
l
l
l
l
1 - Monitor [Monitor]
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
5 - Statistics [Statistics]
5 - Failure [Failure]
C - Erase [Erase]
Then, starting again from the main Menu select in the following order:
l
l
l
l
l
1 - Monitor [Monitor]
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
5 - Statistics [Statistics]
1 - Page 1 [Page 1]
C - Erase [Erase]
30-577
Method of intervention
30.7.31 - Procedure to check EPB stroke (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Purpose of the document
The procedure described is valid for machines with the following transmission:
l
SMatic 240
The purpose of this document is to illustrate the actions to take in order to check the stroke of the EPB (Electric Parking Brake) system, P/N: 0.018.6330.4/10.
The document is compatible with software versions:
Transmission:
l
Fig. 2473
30-578
Method of intervention
To perform the operations described above the main actions are as follows, in sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Removal of the EPB system may be required in cases including but not limited to the following:
l
l
The following section describes the operations involved in removing, refitting and adjusting the EPB system.
With regard to removal, refitting and mechanically adjusting the braking system, refer to the relative standard.
30-579
Method of intervention
WARNING
During Maintenance operations, the EPB system may be locked in a position that DOES NOT guarantee braking of
the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle is in a condition of safety before performing the following operations.
DANGER
During the Maintenance operations the EPB system carries out automatic activations. Stay out of the braking system
area and do not operate in any way in order to prevent injuries to the limbs.
A V A I L A B L E
T E S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
M E N U
1 -
H L H P
T T V
C H O I
S E
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2473
= = = = =
D E U T Z
S
1 1
T R A N S
S P E E D
T Y R E
S U S P .
A S M
P T O f o
R A D A R
A I R
C
D I S T R
F . L I F
C A B . M
[
H
T
C 1
- 0
M .
L
T
3
4
:
:
: 6
:
:
r w :
:
.
:
.
:
T
:
R D :
H P
= =
V
S M A
4 A F 2
- 2 0 1 4
S 2 4 0
4 0 K m
5 0 / 6 5
3 V I +
Y e s
N o
Y e s
Y e s
7
C A
N o
N o
E ]
E x i
= = =
T I C
H D
/ h
R 4 2
N m 3
Fig. 2473
30-580
Method of intervention
Select:
2 - Calibrations [Calibrations]
Finally, the next page will open.
l
M A I N
M E N U
-------------------
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
o
a
e
l
n
l
s
a
i
i
t
r
t o r s
b r a t i
E ]
L i
o n s
s t
E x i
Fig. 2473
Select:
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
Finally, the next page will open.
l
C A L I
B R A T I
= =
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B CD -
=
a
P
M
f
s
s
N
s
g
r
r
r
-
= = = = = = = = = = =
n s m i s s i o n
E ]
=
T
P
A
L
S
S
C
D
E
A
P
A
M
=
r
T
S
i
u
y
A
i
n
i
a
g
R
O N
t
p e n s i
t e m
t
i
C
k
o
D
r i
n e
o n
B
s k
C
M E N U
o n
b u t
o r
d i t i o n e r
r a k e
y
a b i n
E x i
Fig. 2473
Select:
2 - Maintenance [Maintenance].
Finally, the next page will open.
l
P A R K
B R A K E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1
2
3
4
A
M
C
C
u
a
a
o
t
i
l
n
o
n t
i b
f i
A p p l
e n a n
.
s l
g u r a
y
c e
o p e
t i o n
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E x i
Fig. 2473
30-581
Method of intervention
Select:
3 - Default position [Default pos.]
If the command is accepted the system displays the next screen page and the
EPB device assumes the default position.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
O p e r a t i o n
e x e c u t e d
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E x i
Fig. 2473
Remove the bowden cable forked end to the transmission control lever with an
appropriate clip as illustrated in the figure.
Fig. 2473
WARNING
(!) Only for Smatic 240 transmissions (!): Disconnect the trailer pneumatic brake tie-rod in order to remove any mechanical hindrance.
WARNING
Do not remove the EPB actuator unit under any circumstances!
Adjusting the service brakes (right wheel and left wheel)
WARNING
Ensure that the brake threaded set screws are clean and free of rust or pain.
30-582
Method of intervention
Step 1 - Loosen check nut (1).
Step 2 - Tighten the nut (2) to a torque of 30 Nm.
Step 3 - Fully unscrew the nut (2).
Step 4 - Tighten the nut (2) to a torque of 15 Nm.
Step 5 - Loosen the nut (2) by 2 turns.
Once adjustment has been completed, tighten the check nut (1) to a torque of 80 Nm.
Fig. 2473
30-583
Method of intervention
Loosen the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts (with an appropriate 19 mm
wrench) until obtaining clearance of about 1 mm.
Fig. 2473
Use the appropriate feeler gauge as illustrated in the figure. During this operation
pull the tie-rod in order to eliminate the mechanical system clearance.
Fig. 2473
Procedure composed of 1 initialization and 9 apply and release cycles for bedding in of the Bowden cable and the brake
system.
2. Fixing:
l
Fixing of the EPB to the bracket (not required if the EPB actuator unit was not removed).
3. Mechanical adjustment:
l
4. Validation:
l
Consisting of initialization of the EPB device, whereby the system identifies the limit positions of the activation stroke:
Bedding in
During this phase the EPB carries out 10 bedding in cycles of the entire system (engagement and release of the park brake); when
these cycles have been completed the EPB goes into the Apply position.
To do this, proceed as follows:
30-584
Method of intervention
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket and turn the ignition key
to ON. After a few seconds the ART will display the screen page shown in the
figure.
Select in the following order:
2 - Calibrations [Calibrations],
B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
l 2 - Maintenance [Maintenance].
The page shown in the figure will be displayed.
l
l
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
Position [Position]:
Current EPB position expressed in mm.
Recovery:
l
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
System initialization.
Default position [Default pos.]:
l
Brings the EPB to the correct position for adjustment of the Bowden cable.
Apply [Apply]:
l
30-585
Method of intervention
Select:
6 - Cycle tests [Cycle tests].
If the command is accepted the initialisation procedure begins.
If the initialisation procedure completes:
CORRECTLY
the system proceeds with the bedding-in cycle, displaying the relative
screen page: Bedding-in cycles in progress. Please wait... indicating the
number of cycles performed and the current status of the procedure.
INCORRECTLY
l
P A R K
C Y C L E
=
S
P
R
=
=
t
o
e
=
=
a
s
c
=
=
t
i
o
=
=
u
t
v
=
=
s
i
e
=
=
:
o
r
=
B R A K E
T E S T S
= = = = = = = = =
n :
y :
= = = = = = = = =
n i t i a l i z a t i o n
I n
P r o g r e s s
P l e a s e
W a i t . . .
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2473
At the end of the 9 bedding-in cycles the EPB system assumes the apply position
and the user is presented with the screen page shown in the figure.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
At this point the key must be turned to the Stop position. (1)
2
3
STOP
Fig. 2473
30-586
Method of intervention
Mechanical adjustment
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket and turn the ignition key
to ON. After a few seconds the ART will display the screen page shown in the
figure.
Select HLHP TTV by pressing the relative button on the tester keypad.
A V A I L A B L E
T E S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
M E N U
1 -
H L H P
T T V
C H O I
S E
E x i
E ]
Fig. 2473
2 - Calibrations [Calibrations],
m B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
m 2 - Maintenance [Maintenance].
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
= =
a t
s i
c o
.
m
= =
E E
I n
D e
A p
R e
C y
= =
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
= =
:
o n
r y
P P
= =
O M
.
u l
y
a s
e
= =
E ]
=
N
:
:
L
=
= = = = = =
O T
I N I
N
W A R
Y
= = = = = =
p o s .
=
T
A
N
0
=
e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
STOP
Fig. 2473
Fig. 2473
30-587
Method of intervention
Tighten the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts 1 more turn (using an appropriate
19 mm wrench).
Fig. 2473
Validation
In this stage the EPB system is initialized electronically and an Apply/Release procedure is performed. In this manner the system is
able to identify the correct operating stroke, thus allowing the user to check the correct mechanical adjustment of the Bowden cable.
Proceed as follows:
Connect the ART device to the vehicle diagnostic socket, turn the tractor ignition key to ON and select HLHP TTV. Then:
l
l
l
l
2 - Calibrations [Calibrations],
B - Park Brake [Park Brake],
2 - Maintenance [Maintenance],
2 - Initialisation [Init.].
The EPB system carries out an initialisation, stopping in the Apply position.
Check that on the display, in correspondence to the second line: Position: xx.xx,
the value in Apply is between: 30.00 and 34.00 mm.
WARNING
This course refers both to a braking system with new brakes and
a system in which mechanical adjustment of the brakes has been
carried out.
3 possible conditions:
l
a) If the value is between 30.00 and 34.00 proceed with carrying out the
next operations.
b) If the value is lower than 30.00, the following will appear on the display:
Initialisation Failed Switch off the system and adjust the bowden. Turn
the tractor ignition key to Stop and loosen the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts (with an appropriate 19 mm wrench) 1/4 turn and restart the
procedure from the beginning.
c) If the value is greater than 34.00, select: [3] - Default and turn the tractor
ignition key to Stop. Tighten the transmission tie-rod adjustment nuts 1/4
turn (using an appropriate 19 mm wrench) and restart the procedure from
the beginning.
P A R K
B R A K E
M A I N T E N A N C E
=
S
P
R
N
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
t
o
e
u
=
=
=
a
s
c
m
=
E
I
D
A
R
C
=
=
t
i
o
.
=
E
n
e
p
e
y
=
=
u
t
v
=
P
i
f
p
l
c
=
=
s
i
e
A
=
R
t
a
l
e
l
=
=
:
o
r
P
=
O
.
u
y
a
e
=
E ]
= = = = =
A
3
n :
y :
P L Y
= = = = =
M
l
=
P
4
W
=
P
.
A
=
L
6
R
=
Y
0
N
0
= = = =
p o s .
s e
T e s t s
= = = = = = = = =
E x i
Fig. 2473
2
3
STOP
Fig. 2473
Reconnect the trailer pneumatic brake tie-rod, adjusting the length of the tie-rod so that it will fit onto the ball joints.
30-588
Method of intervention
Repeat the validation procedure with the tie-rod connected.
M A I N
M E N U
-------------------
1
2
3
4
M
C
T
A
o
a
e
l
n
l
s
a
i
i
t
r
t o r s
b r a t i
E ]
L i
o n s
s t
E x i
Fig. 2473
If the clearing is completed successfully the screen shown in the figure will appear.
A L A R M
L I
S T
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
A l
a r
m s
e r
a r
b e e n
a s e d .
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[
E ]
E x i
Fig. 2473
Clear statistics
To clear the system statistics saved on the Service ECU proceed as follows:
Starting from the main Menu select in the following order:
l
l
l
l
l
1 - Monitor [Monitor]
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
5 - Statistics [Statistics]
5 - Failure [Failure]
C - Erase [Erase]
Then, starting again from the main Menu select in the following order:
l
l
l
l
l
1 - Monitor [Monitor]
B - Park Brake [Park Brake]
5 - Statistics [Statistics]
1 - Page 1 [Page 1]
C - Erase [Erase]
30-589
Method of intervention
30.8 - F0 - Front axle
Tie-rod
Lock nut
Ball joint rod
Screw
Locknut
Axle beam
Toe-in check
1.
IMPORTANT:
The two bars should be secured at the midpoint of their
length, so that they are perfectly perpendicular to the supporting surface of the hub and parallel to the axis of the pinion; ensure the two bars are aligned.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Place two identical straight bars, 1 metre in length, on the outsides of the
front wheels, securing them in position with two nuts on the studs on the
wheel hubs.
30-590
Fig. 2475
Method of intervention
2.
NOTE:
Take the shortest distance, changing the point of measurement.
Using a tape measure, measure the distances in millimetres M between the
two ends of the two bars.
Fig. 2476
3.
Check that the difference between the measurements at the outside edged
of the wheel hubs is within the specified tolerance range.
The nominal toe-in value (A) refers to the distance between the outside diameters of the wheel hub flanges, thus the distance (M) measured between
the ends of the bars must be adjusted proportionally
nominal. nominal = A (0, -2) => measured toe-in = M (0, -5)
Fig. 2477
4.
If the toe-in is not within the specified tolerance range, using two wrenches
on tie-rods (1), screw ball joint rods (3) in or out as required, adjusting both
sides equally.
Fig. 2478
5.
After adjustment, tighten lock nuts (2) of tie-rods (1) to the specified torque.
Fig. 2479
30-591
Method of intervention
Steering angle adjustment
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
NOTE:
The tractor is supplied with the steering angle set to 30.
Adjust the mechanical steering stops on the pinion side to the indicated
value A, by screwing the screws (4) in or out.
Secure screws (4) in position by tightening lock nut (5) to the specified
torque.
Adjust the steering angle by selecting the corresponding value of A.
Fig. 2480
Table 357
Steering 30
angle
Value of 79 mm
A
35
40
45
50
53
66 mm
52 mm
37 mm
23 mm
16 mm
30-592
Method of intervention
30.8.2 - Steering cylinders assembly
Tie-rod
Lock nut
Ball joint
Fixing bolt
Cylinder
Ball joint
Lock nut
Tie-rod
Steering knuckle
Nut
Steering knuckle
Nut
Oil seal
Oil seal
Steering cylinder end cap
Cylinder body
Oil seal
Cylinder rod
Oil seal
Steering cylinder head
Oil seal
Oil seal
Bulkhead fittings
Tube
Fittings
Tube
Screws
Flange
Bushes
30-593
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Disconnect the pipes (24) and (26) from the unions (25) on the axle beam
and steering cylinder end caps.
Fig. 2482
2.
Remove the unions (25) from the steering cylinder end caps (15) and (20).
Fig. 2483
3.
If necessary, remove the bulkhead unions (23) from the axle beam assembly.
Fig. 2484
4.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the nut.
Loosen the nuts (10) and (12) securing the steering tie-rods by a few turns
to take them beyond the end of the threaded pin.
Tap the nut with a hammer to separate the tie-rod from the steering knuckle.
Fig. 2485
5.
Undo the screws (27) and remove the flange (28) and bushings (29) using
a rubber mallet if necessary.
Fig. 2486
30-594
Method of intervention
6.
Remove steering tie-rods (1) and (8) by loosening nuts (2) and (7), and
check their condition.
Unscrew retaining screws (4) and withdraw cylinder (5) from its seat, using
a rubber mallet to help free it, if necessary.
Remove only those parts which are to be overhauled or renewed
Fig. 2487
7.
Detach
(15) and (20) and extract the rod (18) from the cylinder body (16).
Recover all seals and O-rings (13, 14, 17, 19, 21 and 22) from the cylinder
rod and end caps.
Fig. 2488
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Install new oil seals (13, 14, 17, 19, 21 and 22) on rod (18) and on cylinder
end caps (15) and (20).
Insert rod (18) in cylinder body (16) and fit end caps (15) and (20).
Fig. 2489
2.
Fit ball joints (3) and (6) to the ends of rod (18), tightening them with a
torque wrench to the specified torque.
Fig. 2490
30-595
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 2491
4.
IMPORTANT:
The end caps (15) and (20) must adhere perfectly to the
cylinder (16).
Hold the end caps (15) and (20) against the cylinder (16) and tighten down
the retainer screws (4) to the specified torque.
Fig. 2492
5.
IMPORTANT:
Check that the gap between the end caps and the cylinder
is no more than 0.1 mm.
Use a 0.1 mm feeler gauge; it must not be able to fit between the end caps
and the cylinder.
Fig. 2493
6.
Fig. 2494
30-596
Method of intervention
7.
Fit pipe unions (25) to steering cylinder end caps (15) and (20).
Fig. 2495
8.
Fit bulkhead unions (23) to the axle beam assembly and tighten to the
specified torque.
Fig. 2496
9.
Attach the pipes (24) and (26) to the unions (23) in the axle assembly and
in the steering cylinder end caps.
Fig. 2497
10.
NOTE:
It is necessary to unscrew lock nut (2) to carry out this operation.
NOTE:
Repeat the above operations on the opposite side.
11.
Fig. 2498
Insert the ball joint of tie-rod (8) in the relative location on steering knuckle
(9)
Fit and tighten retaining nut (10) with a torque wrench to the specified
torque.
Repeat the above operations on the opposite side.
Fig. 2499
30-597
Method of intervention
12.
Do not tighten nuts (2) and (7) of tie-rods (1) and (8) until the toe-in has
been adjusted.
See para. 30.8.1 - Toe-in/steering angle/... - page 30-590
Fig. 2500
30-598
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Withdraw the two (one of the left and one on the right) double U joints (1)
from the axle beam (2).
Fig. 2502
2.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the cover.
Fig. 2503
3.
NOTES:
This operation will destroy the oil seals (4).
Remove oil seals (4) from axle beam (2) using a puller.
IMPORTANT:
Take care not to damage the bush seats.
Remove bushes (5) from axle beam (2) only if they are worn and require
renewal.
Fig. 2504
30-599
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Install bearing (5) in axle beam (2) using drift 5.9035.161.0 and a hammer.
Install oil seal (4) in axle beam (2) using drift 5.9035.162.0 and a hammer.
Fig. 2505
2.
IMPORTANT:
Orient oil seal (4) as shown in the figure.
Fig. 2506
3.
IMPORTANT:
Do not damage the oil seal (4).
Fig. 2507
4.
NOTE:
Install the right way round as shown
Fit cover (3) from the side of the short shaft of the double U joint using drift
5.9035.166.0 (b).
Fig. 2508
30-600
Method of intervention
30.8.4 - Flange assembly
Screw
Washer
Shim
Flange
Cover
Oil seal
O-ring
Washer
Pinion shaft
Differential carrier
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Remove screw (1) from pinion shaft (9).
Recover washer (2) and shims (3).
Fig. 2510
30-601
Method of intervention
2.
Fig. 2511
3.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy oil seal (6).
Fig. 2512
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
NOTE:
Do not install O-ring (7).
Fig. 2513
Fig. 2514
30-602
Method of intervention
3.
Check that the flange is snug and measure the distance Q from the end of
the pinion shaft to the contact surface for washer (3).
Fig. 2515
4.
Select shims (3) of thickness (S) from those available to bring the play
within the indicated range:
Q-S= 0.00 to 0.05 mm
Table 358
GAMMA SPESSORI - SHIMS RANGE
Thickness - mm 0.05
Quantity
-
0.10
-
0.20
Fig. 2516
5.
Fig. 2517
6.
Fig. 2518
30-603
Method of intervention
30.8.5 - Differential assembly - carrier
Axle beam
Locating dowel
Locating dowel
Differential cage
Screw
Adjuster ringnut
Bearing
Differential carrier
Bush
Screw
Screw
Bearing
O-ring
O-ring
Adjustment nut
30-604
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Drain all the oil from the differential.
IMPORTANT:
Support differential carrier (8) using a hoist or a suitable
stand.
Unscrew and remove the screws (10) and withdraw the differential carrier
(8).
Fig. 2520
2.
Fig. 2521
3.
Before removing ringnuts (6) and (15), make indelible reference marks on
the nuts and differential carrier (8) to ensure correct positioning on reassembly.
Fig. 2522
4.
Fig. 2523
30-605
Method of intervention
5.
NOTES:
Adjuster ringnuts (6) and (15) are not identical; note which
way round the nuts are installed relative to the crown wheel.
Unscrew adjuster ringnuts (6) and (15) with special wrench 5.9035.025.0.
Fig. 2524
6.
Fig. 2525
7.
Remove the cones of bearings (7) and (12) using a lever in the positions
indicated.
Fig. 2526
8.
Fig. 2527
9.
Fig. 2528
30-606
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
IMPORTANT:
If new bearings are not fitted, make sure that the cones are
not inverted but reinstalled in their original positions.
Install bearing (7) on adjuster ring (6) using service tool 5.9035.158.0
Fig. 2529
2.
Lubricate and install O-rings (13) and (14) on adjuster ring (15).
Fig. 2530
3.
Install bearing (12) on adjuster ring (15) using service tool 5.9035.158.0
Fig. 2531
4.
IMPORTANT:
Check that the crown wheel is installed the right way round.
Fig. 2532
30-607
Method of intervention
5.
Install adjuster ring (6) on differential carrier (8) from the crown wheel side.
Fig. 2533
6.
Fig. 2534
7.
NOTE:
Check that differential bearings are properly seated, tapping
them gently with a rubber mallet if necessary.
Tighten adjuster rings (6) and (15) onto the differential carrier using service
tool 5.9035.025.0 to take up the play and apply a slight preload to the differential bearings.
Fig. 2535
8.
Fig. 2536
30-608
Method of intervention
9.
While holding the pinion firm, rotate the crown wheel alternately in opposite
directions and note the pinion/crown wheel backlash shown on the dial
gauge.
Measure the backlash at two or more points (teeth) by turning the crown
wheel, and take the average value.
Check if the value is within the prescribed limits:
0.15 to 0.20 mm
Adjust the backlash by turning the adjuster rings (6) and (15) with service
tool 5.9035.025.0.
Fig. 2537
10.
Fig. 2538
11.
Fig. 2539
12.
NOTE:
Use this method only if the bearings have already been run
in.
Once the correct crown wheel/pinion backlash has been established, measure the total preload Tm of the bearings (crown wheel/pinion system), using a dynamometer and a string wrapped around the splined end of the
pinion shaft.
The measured value must be equal to the initial value:
Tm = T0
Fig. 2540
30-609
Method of intervention
13.
If new bearings have been installed, measure the total bearing preload Tm
(crown wheel/pinion system), using a dynamometer and a string wrapped
around service tool 5.9035.021.0 installed on the splined end of the pinion
shaft.
Fig. 2541
14.
IMPORTANT:
Acceptable values with new bearings.
15.
Fig. 2542
If the measured value is not within the specified range, check carefully that
all the components are correctly installed and adjust the differential carrier
adjuster rings (6) and (15):
(A) - if the measured preload is below the specified minimum value, screw
in both adjuster rings (6) and (15) by equal amounts, maintaining the crown
wheel /pinion backlash unchanged;
(B) - if the measured preload is exceeds the specified maximum value,
unscrew both adjuster rings (6) and (15) by equal amounts, maintaining the
crown wheel /pinion backlash unchanged.
Fig. 2543
16.
NOTE:
Apply the recommend adhesive to the threads of the screws.
IMPORTANT:
Only turn the adjuster rings (6) and (15) the minimum
amount necessary to allow insertion of retaining screws (5)
and (11).
After completing all the adjustment operations, install the adjuster ring retaining screws (5) and (11).
Tighten the adjuster ring retaining screws (5) and (11) with a torque wrench
to the specified torque.
30-610
Fig. 2544
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 2545
18.
NOTE:
Check that the dowels (2) and (3) are located correctly.
Before bringing the machined surfaces of parts into contact, check that
there are no contaminants present and clean thoroughly using specific detergents.
Apply a film of sealant to the contact surfaces of axle beam (1) and the differential carrier (8).
Fig. 2546
19.
Fit differential carrier (8) to axle beam (1), securing it with the screws (10)
tightened to the specified torque.
Fig. 2547
30-611
Method of intervention
30.8.6 - Checking the bevel gear pair
1.
NOTE:
To check the tooth contact pattern of the bevel gear pair,
coat the crown wheel with minium and rotate to identify the
tooth contact pattern. The tooth contact pattern should always be checked on both sides of the teeth of the crown
wheel.
Fig. 2548
2.
3.
Corrections:
3.1. move the pinion to correct tooth contact type X.
3.2. move the pinion to correct tooth contact type Z.
Fig. 2550
30-612
Method of intervention
30.8.7 - Differential disassembly
Bearing cup
Dowel
Fixing bolt
Crown wheel
Differential cage
Planetary reduction gear
Cross gate
Planet gear
Thrust washer
Planet carrier pin
Planet carrier pin
Dowel
Planetary reduction gear
Spacer
Pressure plate
Disc
O-ring
O-ring
Piston
Washer
O-ring
Cover
Fixing bolt
Oil seal
O-ring
Spacer
O-ring
Oil seal
Washer
Bearing cup
30-613
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
See para. 30.8.5 - Differential assembly ... - page 30-604
Fig. 2552
2.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seal.
Fig. 2553
3.
Withdraw the bearing cups (1) and (30) from the crown wheel (4) and from
differential case (22) using a puller.
Remove the washer (29).
Fig. 2554
4.
Fig. 2555
30-614
Method of intervention
5.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seal.
Fig. 2556
6.
Fig. 2557
7.
Fig. 2558
8.
Fig. 2559
9.
NOTE:
Separate, carefully clean and examine all the removed components, checking them for wear and functionality.
Remove from differential case (5): pressure plates (14), pressure plates
(15), disks (16) and planet gear (13).
Fig. 2560
30-615
Method of intervention
10.
NOTE:
Examine all the removed components, checking them for
wear and condition.
Using a pin punch, drive the dowels (12) out of their holes and remove
planet pins (10) and (11) along with the cross gate (7).
Disassemble and recover all the parts from differential case: planet gears
(8), thrust washers (9), planet gear (6).
Fig. 2561
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Install the pins (10) and (11), the cross gate (7), planet gears (8) and thrust
washers (9) on the differential case (5).
Mount the dowels (12).
Fig. 2562
2.
Fig. 2563
3.
Fig. 2564
30-616
Method of intervention
4.
Fig. 2565
5.
Fig. 2566
6.
Lubricate new O-rings (17) and (18) and install them on piston (19).
Fig. 2567
7.
Fig. 2568
30-617
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 2569
9.
Lubricate new O-rings (25) and (27) and install them on spacer (26).
Fig. 2570
10.
Fig. 2571
11.
Fig. 2572
30-618
Method of intervention
12.
Fig. 2573
13.
Fig. 2574
14.
Fig. 2575
15.
Fig. 2576
30-619
Method of intervention
16.
Install differential lock pressure plate (20) in cover (22) with a thin smear
of grease.
Fig. 2577
17.
Fig. 2578
18.
Fig. 2579
19.
Fig. 2580
30-620
Method of intervention
20.
Fig. 2581
21.
Fig. 2582
22.
Fig. 2583
23.
Fig. 2584
30-621
Method of intervention
24.
Fig. 2585
Grease nipple
Drilled screw
Rear pivot bracket
Bush
O-ring
Bush
Oil seal
Bush
Washer
Axle beam
Thrust washer
Bush
Bush
Oil seal
Drilled screw
Grease nipple
30-622
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Remove grease nipple (1) only if necessary.
Withdraw rear pivot bracket (3) from the differential carrier.
Fig. 2587
2.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the O-ring.
Fig. 2588
30-623
Method of intervention
3.
Fig. 2589
4.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seal.
Fig. 2590
5.
Fig. 2591
6.
NOTE:
It is advisable to cut bush (8) with a chisel; this operation will
destroy the bush.
Only if necessary, remove bush (8) and thrust washer (9) from the differential carrier.
Fig. 2592
7.
Fig. 2593
30-624
Method of intervention
8.
Fig. 2594
9.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seal.
Fig. 2595
10.
NOTE:
It is advisable to cut bush (12) with a chisel; this operation
will destroy the bush.
Only if necessary, remove bush (12) and thrust washer (11) from axle housing (10).
Fig. 2596
11.
Fig. 2597
30-625
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
NOTE:
If necessary, use a drift and hammer to install bush (8).
2.
Fig. 2599
3.
IMPORTANT:
Position bush (6) so the screw hole is aligned with the screw
hole in the pivot bracket.
Install bush (6) in rear pivot bracket (3).
Install drilled screw (2).
Install grease nipple (1)
Fig. 2600
4.
Fig. 2601
5.
NOTE:
Install the O-ring in the side of the pivot bracket shown.
Fig. 2602
30-626
Method of intervention
6.
IMPORTANT:
Take care not to damage the O-ring (5) when fitting rear
pivot bracket to the axle housing.
Install rear pivot bracket (3) on the differential carrier.
Tighten screw (2) to the specified torque.
Fig. 2603
7.
NOTE:
If necessary, use a drift and hammer to install bush (12).
Install thrust washer (11) in its seat on the front pivot bracket.
Heat bush (12) to 110 - 120C and install it on axle housing (10).
Fig. 2604
8.
Fig. 2605
9.
Install oil seal (14) with drift 5.9035.167.0 and lubricate it.
Fig. 2606
10.
IMPORTANT:
Caution: position bush (13) so the screw hole is aligned with
the screw hole in the pivot bracket (17)
Install bush (13) in front pivot bracket (17) using a suitable drift and a hammer.
Fit screw (15).
Install grease nipple (16).
Fig. 2607
30-627
Method of intervention
11.
Fig. 2608
Bevel pinion
Shim
Bearing
Washer
Collapsible spacer
Washer
Differential carrier
Bearing
Lock washer
Nut
30-628
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
See previous sections before disassembling the bevel pinion assembly.
Remove the differential assembly.
See para. 30.8.5 - Differential assembly ... - page 30-604
Fig. 2610
2.
Fig. 2611
3.
Fig. 2612
4.
Tap the end of the shaft with a rubber mallet to drive out bevel pinion (1).
IMPORTANT:
Do not allow bevel pinion (1) to fall.
Recover washers (4) and (6), collapsible spacer (5) and cones of bearings
(3) and (8).
Fig. 2613
30-629
Method of intervention
5.
Remove the cups of bearings (3) and (8) from differential carrier (7) using
a drift and a hammer.
Fig. 2614
6.
To remove the cone of roller bearing (3) from bevel pinion (1), use a commercial puller.
Recover the cone of bearing (3) and underlying shim (2).
Fig. 2615
7.
Inspect the condition of all the components of the bevel pinion assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Nut (10) and collapsible spacer (5) must be renewed on reassembly.
Fig. 2616
30-630
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
See following sections before assembling the assembly.
Place differential carrier (7) on the workbench.
Seat the cups of bearings (3) and (8) using service tools 5.9035.039.0 and
5.9035.005.0 and a hammer.
Fig. 2617
2.
Install the cones of bearings (3) and (8) in their respective seats.
Install the dummy pinion 5.9035.037.0 (a1) and nut (10).
Tighten the nut until all bearing play is taken up.
Fig. 2618
3.
Install the dummy differential cage (a2) 5.9035.018.0 and (a3) 5.9035.004.0
as shown in the figure.
Fig. 2619
4.
Use a depth gauge to measure X (distance between the axis of the differential cage bearings and the contact point on the pinion).
Fig. 2620
30-631
Method of intervention
5.
To determine the thickness (S) of the shim required between the head of
the pinion and the bearing, subtract the value (V) stamped on the pinion
face (V= prescribed bevel pinion distance) from the measured distance (X).
S=X-V mm
Fig. 2621
6.
Select a shim of thickness (S) from those available and install it on the
pinion shaft under the head of the pinion.
NOTE:
Take care to install the shim the right way round.
Table 359
SHIM THICKNESSES
2.5
-
7.
2.6
-
2.7
-
2.8
-
2.9
-
3.0
-
3.1
-
3.2
-
3.3
-
3.4
-
Fig. 2622
Fig. 2623
8.
After having selected shim (2) and installed it with the chamfered side facing the gear, install bearing (3) on pinion shaft (1) using a press and service
tool 5.9035.038.0, making sure it is correctly seated.
Install washers (4) and (6) and a new collapsible spacer (5).
NOTE:
Always fit a new spacer (5).
Fig. 2624
30-632
Method of intervention
9.
Install preassembled bevel pinion assembly (1) in differential carrier (7) and
bearing cone (8) on the pinion shaft, as shown in the figure.
To seat bearing (8), use drift 5.9035.038.0 and a hammer.
Fig. 2625
10.
Install lock washer (9) tighten a new nut (10) onto the pinion shaft.
Fig. 2626
11.
Tighten pinion nut (10) using special wrench 5.9035.002.0 and pinion shaft
holder 5.9035.007.0.
IMPORTANT:
The tightening torque is determined by measurement of the
preload on the bearings; tighten nut (10) progressively.
NOTE:
If the nut is overtightened, collapsible spacer (5) will have to
be renewed and the procedure repeated.
12.
When checking the preload, it is a good idea to tap the end of the pinion
shaft with a soft mallet to help seat the bearings.
Fig. 2627
To measure preload Pm on taper roller bearings (3) and (8), use a dynamometer and a string wrapped around the splined end of the pinion shaft
(1).
NOTE:
Use this method only if the bearings have already been run
in, otherwise see point [13].
The measured value must be equal to the initial value (see D.10.1.1):
Pm = P0
See point [15].
Fig. 2628
30-633
Method of intervention
13.
If new taper roller bearings are used, to measure the preload Pm use a
dynamometer and a string wrapped around service tool 5.9035.021.0 installed on pinion shaft (1).
Fig. 2629
14.
The effective preload Pm is measured on service tool 5.9035.021.0 (calibrated diameter Dm= 104.4 mm).
The measured value must be within the following range:
Pm = 31 to 45 N
IMPORTANT:
Acceptable values with new bearings.
Fig. 2630
15.
To adjust the preload, tighten nut (10) gradually, taking not to tighten it beyond the require amount.
IMPORTANT:
All preloads must be measured without oil seals installed.
After obtaining the prescribed preload, stake pinion nut (10) using a punch
and hammer.
Fig. 2631
30-634
Method of intervention
30.8.10 - Planetary reduction gear assembly
Fixing bolt
Planet carrier
O-ring
Circlip
Planetary reduction gear
Bearing
Cap
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Drain all the oil from the planetary reduction gear.
Fig. 2633
30-635
Method of intervention
2.
Unscrew and remove the two planet carrier (2) retainer screws (1).
Fig. 2634
3.
Remove planet carrier (2) from the wheel hub and recover the relative Oring (3).
Place planet carrier (2) on a suitable surface and inspect for wear.
Fig. 2635
4.
NOTE:
Remove bearing (6) from gear (5). If a gear has to be replaced, replace the pair.
Only if necessary: Remove the circlips (4) from the planet carrier (2) and
use a puller to remove the planet gears (5) complete with bearings (6).
Fig. 2636
30-636
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Assemble the bearing (6) with tool 5.9035.149.0.
Fig. 2637
2.
Fig. 2638
3.
NOTE:
Make sure the chamfered side of the bearings (6) is oriented
towards the planet carrier (2).
Fit the complete gears (5) to the planet carrier (2) along with circlips (4).
Fig. 2639
4.
Fig. 2640
30-637
Method of intervention
5.
NOTE:
Rotate the pinion to move the double U joint
Apply a circlip to hold the planet carrier assembly tight against the wheel
hub, as shown in the figure, then rotate the assembly back and forth using
a lever to mesh the gears of the planetary unit with the double U joint and
the wheel hub ring gear.
Fit retaining screws (1) and tighten to the specified torque.
Fig. 2641
6.
Fig. 2642
Circlip
Bush
Fixing bolt
Ring gear carrier
Bearing
Stud
30-638
Method of intervention
Wheel hub
Bearing
Oil seal
Lower kingpin
Fixing bolt
Oil seal
Bearing
Steering knuckle
Bearing
Oil seal
Shim
Fixing bolt
Kingpins
Upper kingpin
Screw
Bearing
Stop ring
Oil seal
Axle beam
Bush
30-639
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
IMPORTANT:
Take care not to damage the double U joint
Insert a lever between the axle beam and steering knuckle (14) and in between the elements of the double U joint on the axle shaft.
Lever the double U joint towards the wheel hub in order to remove circlip
(1).
2.
Fig. 2644
Fig. 2645
3.
Unscrew and remove the retaining screws (3) of the ring gear carrier hub
(4).
Fig. 2646
4.
Fig. 2647
30-640
Method of intervention
5.
NOTE:
Recover the cone of bearing (5).
Fig. 2648
6.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy oil seal (9).
Place hub (7) on a flat surface and remove oil seal (9) with a lever.
Withdraw the bearing cups (5) and (8) using a drift and a hammer.
Fig. 2649
7.
Remove bearing cone (8) from the steering knuckle shank (14) using a
commercial puller.
Fig. 2650
8.
NOTE:
Recover the shims and note down their sizes.
30-641
Method of intervention
9.
DANGER:
Danger: Before removing kingpins (19) and (10), attach
steering knuckle (14) to a hoist with a sling or rope or employ another system to support its weight; implement all established operator safety precautions.
Unscrew and remove retaining screws (18) and (11) of the upper (20) and
lower kingpins (10)
Fig. 2652
10.
NOTE:
Mark and note down the number of shims mounted on each
side.
Remove kingpins (19) and (10).
Recover shims (17).
Fig. 2653
11.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seals (12) and (16).
Only if necessary, remove the cones of bearings (13) and (15) and seals
(12) and (16) from the kingpins (10) and (19).
Fig. 2654
12.
Only if necessary, remove the bearing cups (13) and (15) from axle beam
(25).
Fig. 2655
13.
Withdraw the steering knuckle (14) from the axle beam and from the shorter
shaft of the double U joint assembly.
Fig. 2656
30-642
Method of intervention
14.
NOTE:
This operation will destroy the oil seal.
Place steering knuckle (14) on a flat surface and withdraw oil seal (24) using a lever .
Fig. 2657
15.
Fig. 2658
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
NOTE:
Do not tighten nut (20) until the steering angle has been
adjusted
See para. 30.8.1 - Toe-in/steering angle/... - page 30-590
Fig. 2659
2.
Seat bearing (22) in steering knuckle (14) using tool 5.9035.151.0 and a
hammer or press.
Fig. 2660
30-643
Method of intervention
30-644
Method of intervention
8.
The special Set Right bearings (5) and (8) do not require any specific
preload or play adjustments. In any case, before installing new parts, check
the dimensions indicated.
A= 23.150 23.200 mm
B= 77.275 77.325 mm
C= 27.000 27.100 mm
Fig. 2666
9.
NOTE:
Do not lubricate the seal ring (9).
Seat the cups of the taper roller bearings (8) and (5) on wheel hub (7) using
service tool 5.9035.041.0 and a press or hammer.
Install oil seal (9) on wheel hub (7) using tool 5.9035.150.0 and a hammer.
Fig. 2667
10.
Install the cone of taper roller bearing (8) on steering knuckle (14) with
service tool 5.9035.153.0.
Install the wheel hub (7) on steering knuckle (14) and locate bearing cone
(5)
Fig. 2668
11.
Grease two new O-rings and install on the wheel hub assembly (4) in the
position shown.
Fig. 2669
30-645
Method of intervention
12.
NOTE:
Align the locating holes on ring gear carrier (4) and on steering knuckle (16); the locating holes are identified by punch
marks.
Install ring gear carrier assembly (4).
Fig. 2670
13.
NOTE:
Do not tighten screws (3).
Screw in screws (3) to seat ring gear carrier assembly (4) against wheel
hub (7).
Fig. 2671
14.
DANGER:
Secure the steering knuckle/wheel hub assembly with a
rope.
Lubricate the lips of the steering knuckle seal ring and use tool 5.9035.168.0.
Fit the half axle into the steering knuckle and assemble the knuckle/hub
assembly to the axle beam.
Fig. 2672
15.
Insert service tool 5.9035.168.0 (a) in the axle shaft of the double U joint
assembly.
Fig. 2673
16.
Fig. 2674
30-646
Method of intervention
17.
Fig. 2675
18.
Lever the double U joint towards the wheel hub to insert and complete the
assembly.
Fig. 2676
19.
Fig. 2677
20.
Fig. 2678
30-647
Method of intervention
21.
Insert a lever between the axle beam and steering knuckle (14) and in between the elements of the double U joint on the axle shaft.
Lever the double U joint towards the wheel hub to facilitate installation of
the circlip (1).
Fig. 2679
22.
NOTE:
Make sure that circlip (1) is seated correctly.
Install circlip (1) on the end of the splined hub and press it into its groove.
Push the double U joint by hand to its end position and check that the circlip
seats.
Fig. 2680
23.
Fig. 2681
24.
Unscrew bolts (18), raise the upper kingpin and remove the shims.
Fit pairs of shims between the upper kingpin and the steering knuckle according to the measured play Z.
Caution: Make sure to fit each pair of shims in such a way as to alternate
the position of the slit.
Make up shim (W) from the available shims by using the following formula:
W=[U-Z-(0.70.9)] mm
where 0.70.9 is the bearing preload.
Tighten the screws (18) to the specified torque.
Fig. 2682
30-648
Method of intervention
25.
Make up shim (W) from the available shims by using the following formula:
Table 360
GAMMA SPESSORI - SHIMS RANGE
Thickness - mm 0.15
Quantity
-
0.20
-
0.50
-
Fig. 2683
26.
NOTE:
Assemble the elements of the sensor assembly as described previously in this manual.
See para. 30.11.2 - Steering position sens... - page 30-686
Fig. 2684
Planet carrier
Wheel hub
Circlip
Pressure plates
30-649
Method of intervention
Pressure plates
Brake disc
Fixing bolt
Ring gear carrier
Ring gear
O-ring
Fixing bolt
Pressure plate
Screw
Screw
Circlip
Circlip
Brake piston
O-ring
O-ring
Bush
Spacer
Washer
Spacer
Spring
Washer
30-650
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Remove the planet carrier (1) from the wheel hub (2).
See para. 30.8.10 - Planetary reduction ge... - page 30-635
Fig. 2686
2.
Unscrew and remove the retaining screws (7) of the ring gear carrier (8).
Fig. 2687
3.
NOTE:
Use two screws (7) in holes A as extractors.
Remove ring gear carrier (8) complete with the ring gear (9).
Fig. 2688
4.
Fig. 2689
30-651
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2690
6.
NOTE:
Recover all the components of the self-adjust kit.
Remove the bolts (13) and (14) of the self-adjust kit along with the pressure
plate (12).
Fig. 2691
7.
Remove circlip (15) and separate ring gear carrier assembly (8) from ring
gear (9).
Fig. 2692
8.
Only if necessary, remove the steel circlip (16) from ring gear (9).
Fig. 2693
30-652
Method of intervention
9.
To remove brake piston (17) fit service tool 5.9035.169.0 (s1) and the two
screws (7) used previously for removal of the ring gear retaining hub, as
shown in the figure.
Screw in screws (7) to withdraw brake piston (17).
Remove the O-rings (18, 19) from the piston (17).
Inspect the removed parts for wear.
Fig. 2694
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Fit two new O-Rings (18, 19) on piston (17).
Insert piston (17) in ring gear retaining hub (8).
Fig. 2695
2.
NOTE:
Mark all components to facilitate re-assembly.
Temporarily mount the pressure plate (12) on the ring gear carrier (8) using
the bolts (11) to align the marks a between the two plates and the ring
gear (9) as a template.
Fig. 2696
3.
NOTE:
Fit the circlip in the 2nd seat.
If previously removed, fit the steel circlip (16) into the ring gear (9).
Fig. 2697
30-653
Method of intervention
4.
Press bushes (20) into the seats indicated in the ring gear carrier (8) until
flush with the inner contact surface of pressure plate (12) using service tool
5.9035.065.0.
Fig. 2698
5.
Fit the ring gear carrier (8) into the ring gear (9) and secure with the steel
circlip (15).
Fig. 2699
6.
Insert the other parts of the self-adjust kit as shown in the figure.
Fig. 2700
7.
NOTE:
Make sure to align the marks.
Assemble the brake pressure plate (12) to the ring gear carrier (8) with the
bolts (11).
Fig. 2701
8.
NOTE:
The self-adjust kit must be assembled as shown in the figure.
Finish the assembly with the bolts (13) and (14) of the selfadjust kit.
Tighten fixing screws (13) and (14) of the self-adjust kit to the specified
torque.
Fig. 2702
30-654
Method of intervention
9.
Grease two new O-rings (10) and fit to ring gear carrier (8) in the position
shown.
Fig. 2703
10.
Fig. 2704
11.
IMPORTANT:
In the case of renewal of the brake disc only, drive the pressure plate (12) into its seat using a drift (p1) and a hammer.
NOTE:
Position the drift with care to avoid damaging the piston.
Fig. 2705
12.
Insert brake disc (6) and brake pressure plates (4) and (5) in ring gear (9).
Secure the discs with circlip (3).
Fig. 2706
30-655
Method of intervention
13.
Fig. 2707
30-656
Method of intervention
30.9 - G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
30.9.1 - Handbrake adjustment
Adjustment
1.
Check that the handbrake indicator light activator button under the lever in
the cab is set in an intermediate position.
Fig. 2708
2.
Install the reaction plate on the carriage and the return spring between the
reaction plate and the mechanism lever.
Fig. 2709
3.
Completely unscrew the fastener nut at the end of the Bowden cable to
permit installation of the reaction bracket.
Fig. 2710
4.
Tighten the Bowden cable fastener nut onto the reaction bracket with a 19
mm wrench.
Fig. 2711
30-657
Method of intervention
5.
Place the reaction bracket over the threaded holes on the transmission and
tighten the three fastener screws with a 13 mm wrench.
Fig. 2712
6.
Insert the connector pin between the fork on the Bowden cable ferrule and
the mechanism lever on the carriage.
Fig. 2713
7.
With the handbrake lever completely lowered, adjust the two tie-rods so
that the free play between the screw and the shim is no more than 1 mm.
Fig. 2714
8.
For versions with pneumatic braking. Lower the handbrake lever completely and turn the braking valve control lever downwards.
Fig. 2715
30-658
Method of intervention
9.
Adjust the length of the control tie-rod so that it will fit onto the ball joints.
Fig. 2716
This paragraph described the procedure for troubleshooting problems with the Thermo 90 S and Thermo 90 ST heater.
WARNING
These troubleshooting procedures require a thorough understanding of the structure and operation of the individual
components of the heater, and can therefore only be performed by suitably trained personnel.
In case of doubt, see the chapter Supplementary heating - Webasto - General description or Supplementary heating - Webasto Description of operation for explanations of the operating principles.
WARNING
The scope of troubleshooting is generally limited to identifying the faulty components causing the problem.
The following causes of malfunctions are not taken into consideration by the troubleshooting procedures, and must therefore be
checked specifically to rule them out as the reason for a malfunction:
l
l
l
l
l
l
corroded pins
spurious pin contact
incorrectly crimped pins
corrosion on cables and fuses
corrosion on battery terminals
excessively high ambient temperature
After identifying and resolving each fault, turn the heater off and on again and perform a functional test of the vehicle.
Table 361
Fault symptom
Possible cause
Solution
Heater switches off auto- No combustion after starting and after repeated ECU in fault lockout state. Switch the heater off and
matically
start attempt
on again.
Flame extinguishes during operation
If the heater still does not work, contact a Webasto
technical support centre
Heater overheats due to lack/loss of coolant
Top up the coolant
Loss of voltage lasting more than 20 seconds
Check fuses, pin connectors and state of charge of
the battery
Combustion not detected when system started
Check flame detector and relative connections
In many cases, the probable cause of the malfunction is the burner. Inspect the burner visually as indicated in the section Visual
inspection of burner.
30-659
Method of intervention
Fault symptoms in case of automatic shutdown due to fault
In the case of a switch operated heater, the type of fault is indicated while the heater is operating in inertial mode by a flashing code
indicated by the power-on lamp.
To determine the error code, count the number of long flashes following the initial sequence of five short flashes.
On the Thermo 90 S heater with standard timer, the error is indicated on the timer display.
The following table is given as a guideline only.
Table 362
Fault symptom
Possible cause
ECU faulty
Fuel system
Combustion air/exhaust gas pipe
Burner
2 flashes (fuel delivery cut off during Fuel delivery system
operation)
3 flashes (undervoltage)
Burner
Electric power feed
10 flashes (overheat)
11 flashes (circulation pump faulty)
Solution
Check fuses
Check battery connections:
+ on 12 / on 9 / + on 3, pin X12 (Thermo 90 S)
+ on 12 / on 9 / + on 3, pin X8 (Thermo 90 ST)
Replace ECU
Check fuel level
Check fuel filter
Bleed the fuel system
Inspect the combustion air/exhaust gas pipe and, if necessary, clean and remove any foreign objects
Clean burner or replace if necessary
Check fuel level
Check fuel filter
Bleed the fuel system
Clean burner or replace if necessary
Check battery
Check electrical connections
Replace flame sensor
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace flame sensor
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace temperature sensor
Check coolant level
Bleed the coolant circuit
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace metering pump
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace combustion air fan
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace glow plug
Check coolant level and top up if necessary
Check wiring loom for damage, lost continuity
circuits
Replace circulation pump
or short
or short
or short
or short
or short
or short
30-660
Method of intervention
Burner housing
The starter air hole must not be obstructed. If it is obstructed, the heater will not start.
4
6
Fuel pipe
Gasket washer
Flame sensor
Insulation
Glow plug
Body
Screw
Bracket
Start air hole
Corrective action
Carefully clean out the start air hole to remove foreign objects or contamination (for example, use a 1.5 mm diameter metal wire).
Remove the glow plug beforehand.
30-661
Method of intervention
Rear wall with metal evaporator
The outlet hole of the pilot flame (1) must not be obstructed. If it is obstructed, the
heater will not start.
Fig. 2718
Corrective action
Replace the burner.
Cracks, flaking material or discolouration (black deposits or other marks) on the evaporator are not a sign of burner failure and may
therefore be considered insignificant.
It is normal for coke deposits to form on the surface of the evaporator, but not on the outlet aperture of the pilot flame. Normally, the
burner self-cleans when switching between full and partial load.
Combustion chamber
The combustion chamber (1) must not show any signs of damage such as dents,
for example.
Dents in the combustion chamber may cause incorrect combustion or the formation of coke deposits in the heater.
Corrective action
Replace the burner.
The combustion chamber ventilation holes (3) must not be obstructed with coke.
Ventilation holes obstructed with coke may prevent starting or cause incorrect
problems.
3
4
Fig. 2719
Corrective action
Carefully scrape off the coke to clear the ventilation holes.
Complete burner
The cables of the glow plug and the flame sensor must be routed correctly as
shown in the figure.
Fig. 2720
The screw connection between the housing and the combustion chamber (1) must
be tightened securely.
The housing and the combustion chamber (4) must be securely connected with
no free play; check the connection by trying to wiggle the combustion tube slightly.
3
4
Fig. 2720
30-662
Method of intervention
The gasket washer (5) must encircle the combustion tube fully and form a gas
tight seal.
Fig. 2721
The gap (or free play) between the edge if the housing and the upper edge of the
combustion chamber (1) must not be uniform around the entire circumference.
3
4
Fig. 2721
Fig. 2722
This chapter describes the tests to be performed on the heater, either fitted in or removed from the vehicle, to test the functions and
performance of the heater.
CAUTION
Do not operate the heater in an enclosed space (such as a garage or workshop) without an exhaust extraction system.
Settings
Adjusting CO2 content
The factory setting for the combustion air volume may be adjusted. To modify the setting, turn the relative adjuster screw.
Adjustment procedure
Turn screw clockwise to lower the CO2 value (leave the heater running for approximately 5 minutes before taking measurement).
Coarse adjustment: Turn the adjuster screw completely clockwise then turn back by one turn.
30-663
Method of intervention
Checking individual components
Checking resistance of temperature sensor
Test the temperature sensor electrically with a digital multimeter. At ambient temperature, the values measured should be as follows:
Table 363
resistance at 25 C:
test current:
Table 364
glow plug
resistance at 25 C:
test current:
12 Volts (red)
0.3 ... 0.6
< 5 mA
24 Volts (green)
1.3 ... 1.44
< 5 mA
Table 365
Cold test: resistance at 25 C:
test current:
Hot test: resistance at 800 20 C:
(approximately 20 mm length of ceramic rod incandescent)
test current:
3.0 0.4
< 5 mA
8 1.0
< 5 mA
Table 366
Min. motor speed in correct operating range: 1,800 rpm
Max. motor speed in correct operating range: 5,600 rpm
( 9 %)
( 9 %)
If the motor speed is not within the indicated range, replace the combustion air fan as described in the chapter Supplementary heating - Webasto - Repairs - Replacing the combustion air fan.
This chapter describes the maintenance procedures which may be performed on the heater installed in the vehicle.
30-664
Method of intervention
Working on vehicle
CAUTION
The temperature in the vicinity of the heater must never exceed 90 C (such high temperatures are possible, for example, when painting the vehicle). See Supplementary heating - Webasto - Technical specifications.
Maintenance
To ensure the safety of the heater, perform the following maintenance procedures immediately before or after each season when the
heater is used:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Clean the exterior of the heater (do not allow water into the heater).
Check that the electric connections are securely fastened and show no signs of contact corrosion.
Check that the exhaust and combustion air pipes are not damaged or obstructed.
Check the seal integrity of the fuel line and filter.
Check the seal integrity of the coolant circuit and circulation pump.
Check that the hoses are free of cracks.
Replace the fuel filter (if fitted).
30-665
Method of intervention
a
b
c
d
B
Fig. 2723
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
30-666
Method of intervention
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Circulation pump
Water pump
Cooler
Regulator valve
Exhaust silencer
Metering pump
Combustion air intake pipe
Thermostat
ECU (user defined installation location for Thermo 90 S)
ECU (installation position for Thermo 90 ST, user defined installation location for Thermo 90 S)
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 367
Permitted height for fuel inlet H (m)
0.00
1.00
2.00
Permitted height of fuel pickup S (m)
0.00
0.50
1.00
30-667
Method of intervention
30-668
Method of intervention
3
2
C
Fig. 2725
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Layout of holes
The tank pickup device may only be used with metal fuel tanks
Plastic fuel tank
O-ring
O-ring
Fuel tank connection
l
l
l
The fuel delivery line may usually be identified by the fact that it has an incorporated fuel filter.
30-669
Method of intervention
l
If the vehicle fuel system includes a fuel vapour venting system, the fuel connection for the heater must be upstream of the
vapour vent system.
Installations where fuel is collected from the delivery or return line may only be made using the specific Webasto fuel pickup device.
The fuel pickup device must be installed accordingly to allow air or gas bubbles to rise naturally towards the fuel tank. Air or gas
bubbles may form in the fuel line in the event of leakage from the carburettor or vehicle fuel pump, or at ambient temperatures above
the fuel evaporation point.
The fuel connection for the heater should not be made near the engine as heat from the engine may cause gas bubbles to form in
the fuel line, compromising the combustion process.
When installing the heater in vehicles with fuel injection, determine if the fuel pump is situated inside or outside the fuel tank.
If the fuel pump is installed inside the fuel tank, fuel for the heater may only be collected from the return line provided that the line
almost reaches the bottom of the tank and is not controlled by a check valve.
Otherwise, the return line must be extended accordingly. If the fuel pump is installed outside the fuel tank, the fuel connection for the
heater must be made between the tank and the pump.
from
tank
to engine
to metering
pump
Method of intervention
Connection between 2 lines with flexible hose
The figure shows an example of a correct fuel line connection with a flexible hose.
CAUTION
Fig. 2727
Fig. 2727
30-671
Method of intervention
Metering pump, installation position and fasteners - 12 V and 24 V petrol and
Diesel DP2
Fig. 2728
Fig. 2729
Installation position
Before installing the metering pump, check that the maximum pressure measured at the pickup point is less than 0.2 bar.
Preferably install the pump in an area of the vehicle not exposed to high temperatures. The ambient temperature must not exceed
+20 C (for petrol heaters) or +40 C (diesel heaters) in any operating condition.
The metering pump and the fuel lines must not be installed in areas exposed to radiant heat produced by hot components of the
vehicle. Install a heat shield if necessary.
Preferably install close to the fuel tank.
Installation and fastening
The metering pump must be fastened with an anti-vibration mount. To ensure that the pump vents air bubbles naturally, it must be
installed in a position complying with indications given in the figure.
Fuel filter
If there is a possibility of contamination in the fuel, use only Webasto filters (Part No. 487 171). Preferably install in a vertical position.
If this is not possible, install in a horizontal position.
Install in the correct position as indicated and ensure that the direction of fuel flow is correct.
Combustion air delivery
The combustion air must never be aspirated from an enclosed area occupied by persons. The combustion air intake aperture must
not face forwards, but must be oriented appropriately to prevent fouling or obstruction with dirt or snow and prevent the aspiration of
water splashes.
The air intake pipe (min. internal diameter 30 mm) may measure between 0.5 m and 5 m in length, and may include multiple curvatures not exceeding a total angle of 360. Minimum curvature radius: 45 mm.
The combustion air intake must not be situated above the exhaust pipe.
If it is not possible to install the combustion air intake pipe in a downwards facing position, a 4 mm diameter water drain hole must
be made at the lowest point of the pipe.
If the heater is installed near the fuel tank in the same compartment, the combustion air must be aspirated from the exterior and the
exhaust gases must also be ducted to the exterior. The air and exhaust passages must be protected against water splashes.
If the heater is installed in an enclosed container, a ventilation hole measuring at least 6 cm2 must be made in the container. If the
temperature in the container exceeds the maximum permitted ambient temperature for operating the heater (see technical specifications), the ventilation aperture must be enlarged accordingly.
Exhaust pipe
The exhaust gas pipe (internal diameter 38 mm) may measure between 0.5 m and 5 m in length, and may include multiple curvatures
not exceeding a total angle of 360 and with a minimum curvature radius of 85 mm. The exhaust pipe silencer is mandatory and must
30-672
Method of intervention
be installed near the heater.
To ensure an angle of 90 10, the fastener point must not be further than 150 mm from the end of the exhaust pipe.
The outlet of the exhaust pipe must not face forwards.
The outlet of the exhaust pipe must be oriented appropriately to prevent obstruction with snow or mud.
The exhaust pipe must be made from rigid steel or steel alloy with a minimum wall
thickness of 1.0 mm, or from flexible piping (in steel alloy only). The exhaust pipe
must be fastened appropriately to the heater, using a pipe clamp, for example.
Refer to the applicable legislation for all other requisites.
Fig. 2730
For ADR only: comply with the requisites with ADR legislation for installing the exhaust pipe.
Method of intervention
Replacing temperature limiter
The procedure for replacing the temperature limiter is the same whether the heater is installed in the vehicle or removed from the
vehicle.
Perform the replacement procedure described in the paragraph Supplementary heating - Webasto - Repairs - Replacing temperature limiter.
Replacing temperature sensor
The procedure for replacing the temperature sensor is the same whether the heater is installed in the vehicle or removed from the
vehicle.
Perform the replacement procedure described in the paragraph Supplementary heating - Webasto - Repairs - Replacing temperature sensor.
Replacing the combustion air fan
The procedure for replacing the combustion air fan is the same whether the heater is installed in the vehicle or removed from the
vehicle.
Perform the replacement procedure described in the paragraph Supplementary heating - Webasto - Repairs - Replacing combustion
air fan.
Commissioning
After installing the heater, bleed the coolant circuit and the fuel system thoroughly. Follow the respective procedures indicated by the
manufacturer of the vehicle.
During the functional test, check the seal integrity of all the coolant and fuel connections and check that the connections are correctly
fastened.
If the heater malfunctions during the test, troubleshoot the fault as indicated in the chapter Supplementary heating - Webasto - Troubleshooting.
This chapter described the repair procedures permitted with the heater removed from the vehicle. Performing any disassembly procedure other than those described herein will void the warranty.
For reassembly, use only the original spare parts contained in the respective kit.
Procedures on disassembled components
In general, all seals and gaskets between disassembled components must be discarded and replaced.
Screening and winnowing
Clean all disassembled components.
Visual inspection
Check all components and replace any damaged parts (with cracks, deformation, wear etc.).
Check pins and wires for corrosion, poor electrical contact, incorrect crimping etc., and repair if necessary.
Check that the pin contacts show no signs of corrosion and that all contacts are fastened correctly. Repair if necessary.
30-674
Method of intervention
Electrical connections (Thermo 90 S)
Top cover
Removal tool
Retainer wedge
Retainer tab (12 pieces)
Push the wire into the contact hole until it locks in place.
Fit the retainer wedge in the pin connector with the screwdriver part of the removal tool, and push until it locks into place.
Refit the top cover
30-675
Method of intervention
Replacing circulation pump
O-ring
Circulation pump
Clamp
Screw (2)
The Thermo 90 ST heater is shown in the figure. In the case of the Thermo 90 S heater, the ECU may also be mounted on the combustion air fan; the position of the ECU does not influence the procedure for replacing the circulation pump.
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reassemble
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
30-676
Method of intervention
Replacing temperature limiter
1
6
5
Protective cap
Clamp
Temperature limiter
Heat exchanger
Gasket ring
Temperature sensor
The Thermo 90 ST heater is shown in the figure. In the case of the Thermo 90 S heater, the ECU may also be mounted on the combustion air fan; the position of the ECU does not influence the procedure for replacing the temperature sensor.
Disassembly
Only remove the temperature limiter if it must be replaced with a new component.
Perform the functional test with the temperature limiter installed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Once removed, the temperature limiter must always be replaced with a new component.
30-677
Method of intervention
Reassemble
If this component is not installed correctly, the heat exchanger will overheat and be irreparably damaged.
1.
Fit the new temperature limiter (3) in the heat exchanger (4) and push the spring into its seat.
m The spring must seat perceptibly and audibly into the relative groove. Only once the spring is securely fitted is the
temperature limiter installed correctly.
m If the spring does not seat perceptibly in the groove:
m clean the mating surface for the temperature limiter on the heat exchanger.
m clean the groove in the heat exchanger.
m check that the retainer tabs at the two sides of the spring are not missing. If necessary, replace the temperature limiter.
Fit the protective cap (1) and fasten with the clamp (2).
Tighten the clamp (1) to 1 Nm 10 %.
Prepare the electrical connections.
Install the heater (see Maintenance).
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
Reassemble
1.
2.
3.
4.
4
1
5
Method of intervention
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reassemble
Fit the shaped gasket ring correctly (3), applying grease (e.g. petroleum jelly) and taking care not to crush the ring itself.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fit the combustion air fan (1) in the installation position complete with the new gasket ring (3), and fasten with the screws (2).
Tighten the screws (2) to 3 Nm 10 %.
m In the case of Thermo 90 S/Thermo 90 ST heaters with the ECU mounted on a flange, also fit the ECU.
Prepare the electrical connections.
Install the heater (see Maintenance).
30-679
Method of intervention
Replacing the burner, the flame sensor and the glow plug
1
13
12
11
7
8
10
2
5
Fig. 2735 - Replacing the burner, the flame sensor and the glow plug
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Burner
Helical membrane
Burner head
Washer
Screw
Glow plug
Flame sensor
Bracket
30-680
Method of intervention
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Insulation
Nut (2)
Sheath
Sheath
Sheath
While a Thermo 90 ST heater is illustrated in this figure, the figure is also applicable for the Thermo 90 S heater.
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Reassemble
1.
2.
3.
7
Fig. 2736
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Push the insulation (9) onto the bracket (8) and fit the bracket in the installation position.
m Lay out the cables of the flame sensor and the glow plug correctly as shown in the figure.
Fasten the bracket (8) with the nuts (10). Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm 10 %.
Secure the fuel cable with the screw (5) and the relative washer (4). Tighten the screw to 3 Nm 10 %.
Fit the combustion air fan.
Prepare the electrical connections.
30-681
Method of intervention
6.
3
2
Burner head
V clamp
Heat exchanger
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Reassemble
The burner head outlet or exhaust gas connection may also be straightened during installation in the vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fit the burner head (1) in the heat exchanger (3), adjust if necessary and fasten with the V clamp (2).
If necessary, tighten the fastener screw of the V clamp to 3 Nm 10 %.
Fit the burner, the flame sensor and the glow plug.
Fit the combustion air fan.
Install the heater (see Maintenance).
30-682
Method of intervention
Replacing the heat exchanger
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Reassemble
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fasten the pin housing onto the heat exchanger and fit the pin in its housing.
Fit the burner head.
Fit the burner, the flame sensor and the glow plug.
Fit the combustion air fan.
Fit the temperature sensor
Fit the temperature limiter.
Fit the circulation pump.
Fit the heater.
30-683
Method of intervention
30.10 - H0 - Hydraulic system
This assembly standard (939451 - 06/05/2013 - rev0) defines the correct tightening torque to be applied to the hydraulic power steering unit fastener screws.
Installation
Tighten in two steps as follows:
l
l
tighten in a crossed pattern, applying 50% of the torque indicated in the table
tighten in a crossed pattern, applying the definitive torque indicated in the table
939451
Fig. 2738 - Tightening the hydraulic power steering unit fastener screws
Legend
1.
Screw
30-684
Method of intervention
Table 368
Screw
M8 (class 8.8)
M8, M10 (class 10.9)
CS
20 + - 10%
30 + - 10%
30-685
Method of intervention
30.11 - L0 - Electrical system
30.11.1 - Fitting BDS cables
1.
Fit the BDS on the machine, tightening the nuts to the specified torque
while preventing the BDS itself from turning.
Fig. 2739
2.
Fit the battery cables and tighten the nuts to a torque of 18 Nm.
Fig. 2740
3.
DANGER
The BDS terminal pins must be connected with the correct
polarity. The terminal pin which is connected to the battery
is identified by a red stamp or symbol.
Fig. 2741
30-686
Method of intervention
30.11.2 - Steering position sensor assembly
Cap
Drilled screw
Washer
Sensor pin
Screw
Pin
Pump housing
Bearing
Screw
Sensor
Sensor cover
Bush
Electrical wiring
Bush
Rubber grommet
Gudgeon pin
Connector
Sheath
Cap
Axle beam
30-687
Method of intervention
Disassembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Unscrew and remove plug (1).
Fig. 2743
2.
Fig. 2744
3.
Fig. 2745
4.
Fig. 2746
30-688
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2747
6.
Cut wires (13) on the side of wiring connector (17) and recover rubber
bush (14).
Fig. 2748
7.
Fig. 2749
8.
Withdraw sensor wires (13) and recover the rubber bush (12).
Fig. 2750
30-689
Method of intervention
Assembly
1.
Some figures may not show the axle exactly as it is on your tractor, but the
procedure described remains unchanged.
Assemble the sensor cover (11) as shown in the figure.
Fig. 2751
2.
Fig. 2752
3.
Fig. 2753
4.
Insert the three wires (13) in sheath (18) in the axle housing.
Push the wires in as far as they will go.
Fig. 2754
30-690
Method of intervention
5.
Fig. 2755
6.
Fig. 2756
7.
Fig. 2757
8.
Fig. 2758
9.
Fig. 2759
30-691
Method of intervention
10.
Fig. 2760
11.
Assemble each pin (16) to the connector (17) respecting the position indicated.
Fig. 2761
12.
NOTE:
Insert a rubber grommet (15) in position (h) to close the hole.
Wiring diagram.
Fig. 2762
13.
Assembly diagram.
Fig. 2763
30-692
Method of intervention
14.
Fig. 2764
15.
Fig. 2765
16.
Fig. 2766
17.
Fig. 2767
18.
Adjust the position of the sensor using a screwdriver, as shown in the figure.
During the adjustment, the wheels on the axle should be in the straightahead position and the sensor should be receiving a 5V power supply
Fig. 2768
30-693
Method of intervention
19.
The sensor is positioned correctly when the sensor output voltage is with
the specified range:
2,50.2 V
Fig. 2769
20.
Fig. 2770
30-694
Method of intervention
30.12 - R0 - Rear lift
Fig. 2771
l
30-695
Method of intervention
30.13 - S0 - Wheels
Fig. 2772
l
Screws of the bracket must not touch inside of the tyres. Otherwise, displace bracket! Distance, at least 25 mm
After assembling of the left and right front tyres, you have to check that no assembly component (bolt, nut and bracket) is in contact
with the inside of the tyres and will damage the tyre by driving.
30-696
40 - Wiring diagrams
40-1
Wiring diagrams
40.1 - Introduction
40.1.1 - Introduction
For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
l
Introduction
m Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for troubleshooting and repairs, and the
instruments required for fault diagnosis.
Components list
m Contains the components of the electrical systems, organised by type.
m Indicates the system code, the component code and description, the technical data required for functional testing and
a description of the pin-outs of the ECUs.
Systems
m Contains the wiring diagrams of the tractors systems.
Wiring harnesses
m Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positions of connectors on the tractor.
Introduction
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to fault diagnosis of the tractors electrical and electronic
systems. The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information regarding the tractors systems and components. Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line with our policy of continuous
product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our printed documentation, the data contained in this document are
subject to modification and as such are not binding.
Definition of components and symbols
To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, definitions for some of the key terms used in this unit are listed below.
Table 369
TERM
Connector
Temperature sensor
Pressure sensor
Position sensor
Pressure switch
Thermostat
Switch
Solenoid valve
DESCRIPTION
Chapter Components shows the wiring diagrams for certain switches and buttons. The following symbols are used for ease of
interpretation:
Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position)
Contact between pins CLOSED (unstable switch position)
Indicator LED
Indicator light
40-2
Wiring diagrams
Diode
General rules
The inspection, maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair operations are essential to ensure that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and breakdowns. This paragraph describes repair procedures and aims to help improve
the quality of repairs.
Modification of the tractors electrical/electronic circuits
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the connection of any non-approved electrical
appliances or components. In particular, if the electrical system or a component is altered without the Manufacturers authorisation,
the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.
Main wiring faults
Bad contact between connectors
l
The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or oxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.
The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or soldered area, but the wires are subjected
to excessive strain, leading to breakage of the insulation and a poor connection or breakage of the wire.
Disconnecting wiring
l
If connectors are disconnected by pulling on the cables, or if components are removed with the wires still connected, or if the
wiring is subject to impact by a heavy object this could damage the soldering or crimping of wires on the pins and some wires
may break.
The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however, when cleaning the tractor with pressure washers or steam washers water could penetrate or condense in the connectors. As the connectors are designed to
prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in will be unable to drain out, and thus may cause short circuits across the
pins. It is therefore good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of compressed air after washing the tractor.
If the connectors or pin contact surfaces show signs of oil or grease contamination, this will prevent the passage of current
(oil and grease are electrical insulators) creating a poor contact. Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low
pressure jet of compressed air and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the contacts.
Important
Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them. Use dry oil-free compressed air.
Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded or oxidised.
Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.
If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the casing, clean it thoroughly.
If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying force. For connectors with clips, insert the two
halves until they clip together.
Cleaning and drying wiring
40-3
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if necessary, with water or steam. If the
wiring must be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the connectors; if water penetrates the connector,
clean it thoroughly.
Check that the connector is not short circuited due to the presence of water by testing for continuity across the pins.
After checking that the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using a deoxidising product.
When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts supplied by the manufacturer.
When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 or ISO 8820 standards, and in particular:
m fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
m bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C
m fuse F51 (100A) and F52 (200A) ISO 8820.
The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and
release the manufacturer from all liability.
When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards marked on the original relay.
Diagnostic instruments
For the correct diagnosis of any faults in the tractors electrical system, the following instruments are required:
l
l
l
COLOUR CODES
A
B
S
G
H
L
M
N
R
S
V
Z
Light blue
White
Orange
Yellow
Grey
Blue
Brown
Black
Red
Pink
Green
Purple
The name of this branch of electrical science is derived from the word ELECTRON, the name given to a small electrically charged
particle.
The movement of electrons produces electrical current, which we know more about for its effects - heat, light, magnetism, electrolysis, etc. - than for its actual nature.
While electrical engineering is concerned with these external effects of electrical current, electronics deals with way materials react
to the gain or loss of electrons.
Electrons in fact move from (-) to (+), but according to a convention that was established before the emergence of modern atomic
theory, electric current flows in the opposite direction from (+) to (-).
Using electronics it is possible to program complex logical processes, which could not be achieved in other ways.
The various applications of electronics on our tractors can be divided into two groups:
l
40-4
Invisible electronics, which operate without requiring any intervention of the driver, (voltage regulation, rectification of the current produced by the alternator, timing, etc.);
Wiring diagrams
l
Visible electronics, ranging from the visible and audible information to made available to the driver via the vehicles instruments and signalling systems, to the control systems that serve to optimise work processes (Performance Monitor, SBA
System, I-Monitor, etc.).
Conductors,
Insulators,
Semiconductors
Fig. 2773
Under certain conditions, electrons can move from one atom to another.
If the number of electrons in an atom is the same as the number of protons, the atom is neutral (it has no charge).
If the number of electrons exceeds the number of protons, the atom is negatively charged, while if it loses electrons it will become
positively charged.
40-5
Wiring diagrams
Atomic structure of matter
The atom is the smallest particle of a simple element that can combine with other
atoms to form molecules.
Fig. 2774
The composition of the nucleus and the number of electrons present in an atom
determine which element it belongs to.
Fig. 2775
Electron (Planet)
Nucleus (Sun)
Fig. 2776
Electrical charges of the same sign (1) repel each other while charges of opposite
signs (2) attract.
Fig. 2777
40-6
Wiring diagrams
40.1.3 - Basic electronics for mechanics (2/2)
Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors
The behaviour exhibited by different materials in response to electricity derives from their atomic structure:
1.
2.
In conductors (generally metals), electrons are able to move freely from one atom to another;
In insulators (generally metalloids) electron movement is restricted to varying degrees, depending on the type of material.
Their atoms are not able to acquire electrons.
Semiconductors (germanium, silicon, selenium, etc.), are materials which in their pure state may act as insulators, but with
the addition of precisely calibrated amounts certain impurities, they can become conductors. Their electrical properties thus
lie somewhere in the range between insulators and conductors. If these materials in their pure state are subjected to a technical process known as doping (the addition of impurities with a certain number of atoms with free electrical charges), they
become positively or negatively charged, depending on the specific process.
3.
Electrical voltage
We have talked about external causes that can provoke the movement of electrons in atoms.
One of these external causes is voltage or potential difference, which exerts a force on electrical charges, causing them to start
moving.
This force is known as electromotive force; the force supplied by electrical sources (battery, dynamo, alternator).
The concept of voltage or potential difference is illustrated by the example shown
here.
l
Fig. 2778
For water to flow from A to B, there must a difference in level h when the
valve closed.
The difference between the height of water in A and that in B creates a difference in pressure.
Fig. 2779
When the valve is opened, water flows from A to B until the point where the two
pressures are equalised.
The same happens with electrical current:
l
Fig. 2780
40-7
Wiring diagrams
Resistance
The water model can also be used to explain the concept of electrical resistance. If water encounters obstacles when flowing through
a pipe the the flow rate will slow or the direction of flow will change .
The same applies to electrical current; obstacles of an electrical nature reduce the flow of electrons. Every material offers some degree resistance to the flow of electrons; the level of this resistance will depend on its atomic structure and its dimensions. Obstacles
in a water course will slow down or change the direction of the water flow.
Electrical resistance can be compared to a restriction in the conductor or scaling
on the inside of a water pipe.
Fig. 2781
The electrical resistance of a material can be defined as the opposition it presents to the flow of electrons and varies according to the
nature of the material and its dimensions.
Electrical continuity
Staying with the water analogy, lets examine how to obtain a continuous flow of water in a circuit. 424For the flow to be continuous,
the water must be returned to basin 1.
In this hydraulic circuit, the function of the pump (2) is to return the water to basin
or tank (1).
Fig. 2782
Similarly, for current to flow continuously in an electrical circuit, the electrons must return from the positively charged terminal to the
negatively charged terminal, in order to maintain a potential difference between the two terminals. This is the job of the electrical
power source.
Wiring diagrams
Schematic representation of a electrical power source
A = Positive terminal
B = Negative terminal
G = Generator
Fig. 2783
Fig. 2784
Simple circuit with switch I closed. The battery powers the resistance R. A voltage drop occurs between the terminals of the power source, caused by the circulation of current in the source itself, which has its own internal resistance.
Vd = r A
r = internal resistance of the power source in series with the other elements of the
circuit
A = current flowing through the circuit
Fig. 2785
Wiring diagrams
value before returning once again to zero. This complete sequence is referred to as one cycle.
If a cycle is performed once every second, then the frequency of the alternating current is said to be 1 Hertz. In domestic electrical
supplies, the frequency of the supply is 50 Hz.
Frequency is thus the number of complete cycles performed in one second.
A period is defined as the time required for an alternating sine wave to complete one cycle, i.e. from zero to a positive peak to zero
to a negative peak and back to zero.
This time period is expressed in seconds and is denoted by the letter T.
The alternating current wave form illustrated in the graph is called sinusoidal.
T = 1 period
A = Amplitude
B = Positive voltage
C = Negative voltage
Fig. 2786
The number of cycles per second is the FREQUENCY and is expressed in Hertz and denoted with the letter f.
f=1T
T=1f
An AC current with a frequency of 50 Hertz therefore has a period of 1 50 = 0.02 seconds.
Fig. 2787
Fig. 2788
40-10
Wiring diagrams
VOLTAGE Symbol V
Voltage: Difference in potential; (emf); force that causes electrons to flow
Units: Volts
Measuring instrument: Voltmeter.
Connection to circuit: in parallel.
Resistance
In an electrical circuit, voltage and current are both dependent on RESISTANCE, i.e. the opposition to the flow of electrons in a
material.
We have already mentioned how the motion of electrons occurs as a result of forces produced by the collision of these minute particles.
This phenomenon generates heat and is this reason why materials heat up when current passes through them.
The greater the current (the greater the number of electrons in motion) the more heat is produced.
As the temperature increases, the movement of the electrons also increases, and the electrons find it more difficult to move under
the influence of the voltage.
In some materials, this resistance is minimal; these materials are good conductors of current (conductors: copper, aluminium, silver,
etc.). In others, the resistance is so high that it is difficult for electrons to move (insulators: mica, porcelain, glass, paper, etc.)
In addition to the nature of the material, resistance is also affected by its dimensions:
l
l
LENGTH: the greater the length of the conductor the greater the number of collisions between atoms and free electrons.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA; the greater the cross-sectional area, the greater the number of free electrons. Resistance is
inversely proportional to cross-sectional area.
TEMPERATURE, the motion of atoms and consequently the probability of collision with free atoms increases proportionally
with the temperature, thus increasing also the resistance.
The electrical circuits on the tractor are generally comprised of wire conductors with a cross-sectional area that is negligible in comparison with their length.
Single colour.
Spiral striping with max. pitch 50 mm
Horizontal striping.
With narrow-spaced coloured rings.
With wide spaced rings.
With rings in groups of 2 of same or different colours, depending on use.
With coloured rings in groups of 3
Wiring diagrams
Units: Ohm (Omega ).
Measuring instrument: Ohmmeter (tester), or voltmeter and ammeter when in presence of voltage.
Power
The power developed or dissipated is given by the formula:
Power = Voltage x Current
Watt (W) = Volts x Amps
In mechanical engineering, power is still commonly expressed in terms of horsepower: hp
The relationship between horsepower and Watts is given in the following equation:
40-12
Wiring diagrams
1 hp = 736 W = 0.736 kW
1 kW = 1.36 hp
Dissipated power, in electrical terms, is power transformed into heat and is given by:
Power = Voltage x Current = Resistance x Current x Current
given that:
W=VI
V=RI
then:
W = R I I = R I
megakilohectodecadecicentimillimicronanopico-
M
k
h
da
D
S
M
N
P
Multiply by
Divide by
1,000,000
1000
100
10
-
10
100
1.000
1,000,000
1,000,000,000
1,000,000,000,000
Electronic components are used in circuits to modulate (vary, modify), control and regulate electrical values or to protect other devices.
In particular, electronic semiconductor components exploit the various reactions of electrons to heat, magnetism, and light in order
to generate small electrical signals. These electrical signals, when suitably modified, can be used by signalling devices or to control
other components.
Components can be classified on the basis of the functions they perform; components used to control or amplify power signals are
deemed ACTIVE; components which neither control nor amplify power are deemed PASSIVE.
Resistors*
Components of various design comprised of a conductor with a known resistivity that when included in a circuit causes a voltage
drop.
They are therefore used to change voltage and current; they come in different shapes and sizes, depending on their type, ohmic
resistance value, tolerance and heat dispersion characteristics.
Table 372
TYPES OF RESISTORS
FIXED
VARIABLE
wirewound
film
-
wirewound
film
Linear or non-linear variation
SENSITIVE
RESIS-
All resistors are defined by their dimensions and characteristics: ohmic value, and maximum operating temperature.
* N.B. To avoid confusion, in this manual the term RESISTANCE is used for the value expressed in ohms which represents the opposition to the flow of electrical current.
The term RESISTOR is used for the component used to introduce resistance into an electrical circuit.
Resistors are of two types: fixed or variable.
(the term resistance is also often used for the component).
40-13
Wiring diagrams
Fixed resistors
How to determine the ohmic value of a resistor
In wirewound resistors, the value is printed with decimal point (or comma) and the
omega symbol.
If the value of the resistor is 10.5 ohms, the marking will be: 10.5 ohms
sometimes the letter R is used in place of the decimal separator (point or comma):
10 R5
On resistors with values measured in thousand of ohms, the printed value will
include the letter k, which stands for thousand (1000): 10.5 kohms (10,500 ohms)
Fig. 2790
Fig. 2791
Fig. 2792
Fig. 2793
40-14
Wiring diagrams
Preventing arcing between the resistor and sliding contact.
The figure shows a way to prevent the arcing between the resistor and the sliding
contact that may occur in the case of poor contact.
This connection allows some of the current to flow through the full length of the
resistor. The voltage drop between the sliding contact and the resistor is less than
V1, thus reducing the possibility of arcing.
The resistor of the rheostat can be sized so that the resistance can be varied in
both a linear and a non-linear way.
Fig. 2794
Voltage divider
Voltage dividers with fixed resistors or potentiometers are used whenever circuits require electrical power below the standard voltages available on the tractor (12 Volts with engine off and 14.5 Volts with engine running).
Voltage dividers are found in the voltage regulator of the alternator and in the electronic control units.
Thermistors (Thermally Sensitive Resistors)
These are semiconductor resistors in which the resistance decreases as the temperature rises, ranging from just a few ohms at 0 C
to tens of thousands of ohms at 100 C; they are used to detect changes in temperature.
They may be either self-heating, if the heat is produced by the current flowing through them, or externally heated, if sensitive to the
temperature of the environment or the component on which they are mounted.
There are two types: PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) and NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
With PTC thermistors, resistance increases with the temperature, while with the NTC type, resistance decreases as the temperature
rises.
NTC types are available with resistance values ranging from just a few ohms to several hundred kohms.
Operating characteristics of NTC thermistors
Fig. 2795
Fig. 2796
40-15
Wiring diagrams
Capacitor
This component consists of a pair of conductors, generally in the form of flat plates, separated by an insulator (dielectric). Its function
to store electrical charge from a power supply.
This charge can then be given as and when required.
Symbol
Fig. 2797
Fig. 2798
The amount of electrical charge that a capacitor can store is referred to as its capacitance (C), and is measured in farads (F). In
practice, however, the farad is too large for general use so the following units are used instead:
mF = millifarad = 1/1,000 F
F = microfarad = 1/1,000,000 F
nF = nanofarad = 1/1,000,000,000 F
On closing the switch, the electrons start moving but their flow is impeded by the dielectric. Electrons will therefore accumulate in the
plate connected to the negative terminal (-) of the generator, causing negative charge to build up. In the meantime the positive plate
loses electrons, thereby becoming positively charged. A potential difference is thus created across the plates of the capacitor, and
this increases until it equals the potential difference of the generator.
The capacitance of the capacitor is therefore proportional to the applied voltage and to the surface area of the plates and is inversely
proportional to the distance d between the plates. It also depends on the type of dielectric used.
The process described above is known as charging the capacitor, and is complete when the capacitor is fully charged. If a resistor
or a load of another type is connected to the capacitor, the latter discharges as electrons flow in opposite direction and the potential
difference between the plates decreases to zero.
Diodes
A diode can be defined simply as a junction between two semiconductors, one made of P-type material and the other made of N-type
material.
40-16
Wiring diagrams
A diode is a junction between two semiconductors, one made of P type material
and the other made of N type material.
Fig. 2799
The contact between the two semiconductors in different situations of electrical charge forms a barrier to electrical current flow at
the junction.
This barrier prevents the current from flowing through the diode.
Fig. 2800
Fig. 2801
Fig. 2802
The situation at the junction between the two semiconductors changes when a voltage is applied across the anode and cathode; the
diode is polarised, as shown in the figure.
When a voltage is applied to the diode, it polarises in the two ways indicated.
40-17
Wiring diagrams
(A) = Direct polarisation (forward biasing)
( - ) = Cathode
( + ) = Anode
Fig. 2803
Fig. 2804
With forward biasing (positive connected to the anode and negative to the cathode) the resistance to current flow is significantly
reduced and the diode allows current to flow, providing that the applied voltage exceeds the threshold value, i.e. the voltage required
to initiate the process by which the barrier is reduced.
If the polarity of the diode is reversed, there is no electron flow except for the very weak current that crosses the junction. If the reverse voltage applied to the diode exceeds a certain value (thousand of Volts) the reverse current flowing through the diode will increase
rapidly to the point where the junction is damaged.
The function of the diode is therefore to allow current flow in one direction only, from the anode (+) to the cathode ( - ).
It this way it acts as an electrical one-way valve.
Forward biased diode allows current flow.
The lamp illuminates,
Fig. 2805
40-18
Wiring diagrams
Reverse biased diode blocks current flow.
The lamp does not illuminate.
Fig. 2806
Fig. 2807
Zener diode
We have already mentioned how diodes do not tolerate reverse voltage, as when this reaches a certain level, the reverse current flow
will increase significantly to the point where the diode itself is damaged.
The Zener diode is specifically designed to allow a certain amount of reverse current flow without damage to the junction.
It is also possible to make this reverse current flow occurs at a certain reverse voltage, known as zener voltage.
A zener diode can therefore be defined as semiconductor with a special PN junction with controlled reverse bias properties.
If forward biased, the Zener diode behaves just like a normal diode, while if reverse biased, it prevents current flow until the voltage
reaches the critical level, which is defined as the Zener point.
At this point the current increases rapidly.
40-19
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2808
The behaviour of the Zener diode can thus be compared to that of a pressure relief valve in a hydraulic circuit.
a) current and water flow
b) no current or water flow,
c) the water flows when it overcomes the opposing force of the valve spring. Likewise, the current flows when the voltage reaches
the zener point.
Fig. 2809
40-20
Wiring diagrams
LED
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fig. 2810
LEDs are often used for signal lamps as their power consumption is very low, they require only low levels of reverse current and they
are impact resistant.
A typical application is as an indicator lamp, which, unlike a conventional bulb, can be flashed on and off repeatedly without failing.
They are also used to display segmented symbols and alphanumeric digits.
40-21
Wiring diagrams
When voltage is applied across terminals (E) and (C), no current flows through
the transistor.
Fig. 2812
If a weak voltage is applied simultaneously to the base terminal, the transistor becomes a conductor and current flows between the
emitter and collector.
When voltage is also applied to the base terminal, the transistor allows current
flow.
Fig. 2813
When the voltage applied to the base terminal is modified, the current flow between the emitter and collector will also vary proportionally. From this behaviour are derived the two main characteristics of the transistor:
1.
Current does not flow through the transistor if the circuit between the emitter and collector is interrupted, i.e. no voltage applied.
The current flowing through the transistor is directly proportional to current that flows through the emitter-base circuit, within
the operating limits of the transistor. This means that the base current (the current that flows between the emitter and base) is
proportional to the collector current (the current flow between the emitter and the collector) and therefore the latter increases.
2.
Given these two characteristics, a transistor can function as a switch (by removing the voltage at the base) or as an amplifier.
With a transistor, a weak current flowing from the emitter E to the base B (PNP transistor) or from the base to the emitter (NPN
transistor), can be used to control a strong current flow from the emitter to the collector (PNP) or from the collector to emitter (NPN).
This is the most useful characteristic of the transistor, which can be summarised in the equation:
a = ( Ic ) ( Ib )
This parameter, however, varies according to the collector current and voltage, as well as the temperature of the transistor.
The difference between NPN-type and PNP-type transistors lies solely in the direction of the current flow. The operating limits of
transistors are:
l
l
40-22
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2815
Typical connection of a transistor. The resistor R limits the current and protects the transistor.
40-23
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2816
Typical connection of a transistor. The resistor R limits the current and protects the transistor.
Fig. 2817
40-24
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2818
Circuit diagrams show use of an electromagnetic relay (B) and use of a transistor as a relay (A). U = Load in main circuit.
40-25
Wiring diagrams
40.2 - Components
73
82
94
16
28
Fig. 2819
Table 373
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Voltage
+12V
0V
+12V
0V
+12V
0V
0V
Description
Table 374
Pin
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40-26
Voltage
0V
Description
Sensors negative
CANBUS distributor interface (CAN-H)
Steering angle sensor signal input
Front axle suspension position sensor signal input
Front hitch position sensor signal input
RH draft sensor signal input
Wiring diagrams
Pin
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Voltage
Description
0V
Sensors negative
Table 375
Pin
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
Voltage
Description
+5V
+5V
+5V
Table 376
Pin
91
92
93
Voltage
Description
Wiring diagrams
Pin
94
Voltage
Description
10
13
16
11
14
17
12
15
18
Fig. 2820
Table 377
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Voltage
Description
10
13
16
11
14
17
12
15
18
Fig. 2821
40-28
Wiring diagrams
Table 378
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Voltage
Description
10
13
11
14
12
15
Fig. 2822
Table 379
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Voltage
Description
12V
0V
12V
40-29
Wiring diagrams
Connector M001c pins
10
13
16
11
14
17
12
15
18
Fig. 2823
Table 380
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Voltage
0V
5V
0V
5V
5V
5V
Description
75
91
58
74
41
57
24
40
23
Fig. 2824
Table 381
Pin
1
2
40-30
Voltage
+12V
0V
Description
Wiring diagrams
Pin
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Voltage
+12V
0V
+12V
0V
Description
+5V
+5V
Not used
Accelerator pedal position sensor power feed
Table 382
Pin
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Voltage
Description
Not used
Not used
Ambient temperature sensor
HOLD button signal input
Not used
0V
40-31
Wiring diagrams
Pin
62
Voltage
Description
Table 383
Pin
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
Voltage
Description
GND
+12V
GND
85
64
105
84
43
63
22
42
21
Fig. 2825
Table 384
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
40-32
Voltage
Description
Wiring diagrams
Pin
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Voltage
Description
Not used
Table 385
Pin
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Voltage
Description
+5V
Table 386
Pin
63
64
Voltage
Description
Wiring diagrams
Pin
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
40-34
Voltage
Description
Wiring diagrams
40.2.4 - Main power relay switch (TGC/RME-SA1)
Field of application
Main power relay switch for disconnecting battery from 12V vehicle electrical system, intended for use in agricultural vehicles.
Definitions
Table 387
Code
TGC/RME-SA1
Activation
Deactivation
S (ON-OFF)
Status LED
tAB
tAC
tDC
tAUX
t1stON
tACrefrac
tEMEdetect
tEMErefrac
TX
dcX
TERREPET
tERFILTER
TA
SW
Description
Version 1 (1) of bistable, mechanically retained (/RM) main power relay switch (TGC) with electronic system control board (E) for specific client (SA).
Normal operating state of device, with battery connected to vehicle electrical system.
Rest state of device, with battery isolated from vehicle electrical system.
Remote electric command with two stable states (ON - OFF) for switching device on and off.
Indicator lamp or LED installed on exterior of device to indicate status of device itself.
Coil power feed time.
Controlled switch on time Time elapsing between operation of ON control by user and effective
closure of main contact.
Controlled switch off time Time elapsing between operation of OFF control by user and effective
aperture of main contact.
Duration of AUX line activation pulse.
Duration of first status LED pulse on closure of main contacts.
Time interval during which device inhibits all manoeuvres following a failed power on command.
Maximum time interval during which user must complete manoeuvre on the SON-OFF control to
trigger emergency disable state.
Time interval during which device inhibits activation following emergency disable.
Period or duration of status LED flash during state X (state X for different cases defined in document).
Duty cycle, or duration of status LED pulse during state X (state X for different cases defined in
document).
Repeat period of pulse sequence indicating active error code.
Time period for which fault condition relative to control signal channels must persist in order to be
indicated.
General ambient conditions:
Temperature: 23C (5C),
Atmospheric pressure: 960 mbar (100 mbar),
Relative humidity: 60% (15%).
Device management software.
Notes
This document contains frequent references to:
l
l
the electrical wiring diagram contained in the paragraph Electrical Connections, and
the paragraph relative to the Pin List.
General description
The TGC/RME-SA1 is a device used to disconnect batteries from the vehicle electrical system. The device consists of a pair of fixed
contacts, connected to the battery and the electrical system respectively, and a mobile contact (main contact), which connects the
two fixed contacts.
The mobile contact is moved by a relay switch which, when powered briefly, moves the contact from the position in which it connects
the fixed contacts into the position in which the fixed contacts are disconnected, and vice versa.
Due to the cam shape of the mobile core, both positions of the mobile contact are mechanically stable.
This prevents the mobile contact from returning to the previous position once it has moved.
The device is subdivided into the following parts:
l
Power section:
bistable relay switch with one main contact for disconnecting the battery positive terminal from the electrical system of the
vehicle.
Electronic control unit (ECU):
for managing functions of complete device.
40-35
Wiring diagrams
l
Wiring loom,
which includes:
1. an auxiliary positive power feed line available for external utilities (AUX);
2. the ground line of the device (GND);
3. two lines (CH1 and CH2) for connection to the remote electric control (SON-OFF), for commanding device activation
and deactivation states;
4. status LED driver line, for indicating status of device (in normal and fault conditions) (LIGHT)
5. the power line for the aforementioned command and status LED lines (COM+)
6. a line for reading the ignition switched power signal (+15).
The electric control (SON-OFF) is managed with two lines (CH1 and CH2) to:
l
l
The electric control used consists of a deviator switch (see connection diagram), which switches the positive power feed received
from COM+ to CH1 and CH2 to command deactivation and activation states respectively.
As a result, both commands are associated with a clearly defined voltage, which minimises the risk of misinterpreting a fault state
caused by an interruption or short circuit in the line as a command signal.
The device may be interfaced with an external indicator lamp (status LED driven from LIGHT line) to indicate the status of the device
itself. In the connection diagram given here, the status LED is integrated in the control.
Description of function
Normal operation
Activation
Switching the control SON-OFF from OFF to ON, with the TGC/RME-SA1 device in deactivated state:
l
l
l
the LIGHT line (t1stON) activates for a prolonged period and then flashes (flash mode parameters: TON and dcON);
the AUX line is activated with a single pulse with the duration tAUX;
the main contact is closed, after a delay time of tAC.
The tAC delay time covers the wake-up cycle from sleep mode, which is in effect when the device is in deactivated state (see next
paragraph), and the read and filter operations relative to the command signal channels CH1 and CH2.
This sequence is performed completely independently of the ignition switch (+15) state identified. The LIGHT line continues to produce a flashing signal uninterruptedly until the next change in state requested by the user.
The AUX line pulse is generated after the change in state of the main contact, to permit utilities operating with ignition switched power
to be disabled (from an external relay) and prevent the possibility of the contact closing while under power. This condition applies if
the user requests activation with the ignition switch (+15) on and with the relative utilities (e.g. lights and fans) already connected.
The activation sequence is illustrated in the following diagram:
40-36
Wiring diagrams
t AC
MAIN C.
Closed
Open
COIL DRIVE
t 1stON
LIGHT
t AUX
AUX
S ON-OFF
+15
LED Blink
ON
OFF
DO NOT CARE
Fig. 2826
Note 1:
If the device is powered with the SON-OFF control already switched to ON, no change in state is implemented. In
this case, the control must first be returned to OFF and then switched back to ON to activate. This condition applies
primarily in the event of installation or maintenance of the device, when the battery is connected to the device with the
lever on the control inadvertently left in the ON position.
Note 2:
If the manoeuvre to close the main contact fails, the device repeats the attempt to perform the manoeuvre a number
of times, extending the duration of the AUX line activation pulse. This pulse remains active until the repeat attempts
are concluded, whether they successfully lead to the closure of the contact or not.
Note 3:
If the repeat attempts to close the main contact (see previous note) conclude without success, and the device remains
in deactivated state, the SON-OFF control is locked out for a period tACrefrac, during which no more attempts of the
manoeuvre may be performed. At the end of this period, if the control was switched to ON, it must first be switched to
OFF and then to ON again to perform a new closure manoeuvre.
Note 4:
With reference to Note 2 and Note 3, concerning a situation in which the manoeuvre to close the main contact fails,
see the detailed explanations in the paragraph relative to the management of fault states, and the error table.
Deactivation
Switching the control SON-OFF from ON to OFF, with the TGC/RME-SA1 device in activated state and with the ignition switch (+15)
OFF:
l
Wiring diagrams
l
During the delay time tDC, the LIGHT line flashes (flash mode parameters TOFFdelay and dcOFFdelay).
In addition to covering the read and filter operations relative to the command signal channels CH1 and CH2, the delay time tDC is
set long enough to also allow the electronic control units of the vehicle to perform all the operations necessary before disconnection
of the system from the battery pack.
If the user restores the initial status of the control (by switching SON-OFF back to ON) during the tDC delay time, the deactivation
sequence is interrupted and the active state is restored, as indicated by the flashing LIGHT line. The main contact remains closed.
The deactivation sequence described above is illustrated in the following diagram:
t DC
MAIN C.
Closed
Open
COIL DRIVE
LED delay Blink
LIGHT
S ON-OFF
+15
ON
OFF
OFF
Fig. 2827
If, however, the ignition switch state (+15) is on when the user requests deactivation, the LIGHT line generates a warning flash (flash
mode parameters TOFF&KEY and dcOFF&KEY), and the command is NOT executed. The LIGHT line continues to flash for as long
as the fault condition persists: in other terms, for as long as the battery disconnect request exists with the ignition switch in on state
(+15 active).
This also applies if the ignition switch state changes to active during the delay time tDC - in this case, the sequence is interrupted,
the main contact remains closed and the warning flash signal described above is generated.
Once the deactivation sequence is completed, the device enters sleep mode, minimising battery current absorption.
Emergency deactivation
With the TGC/RME-SA1 in activated state and in any ignition switch state (+15), performing:
l
l
l
:
l
l
l
40-38
Wiring diagrams
This is an emergency main contact aperture sequence and must therefore only be performed in situations of real emergency where
the battery must be disconnected as quickly as possible without implementing the normal delayed procedure.
l
l
This sequence may also be performed with the ignition switch on.
Immediately after opening the contact, this sequence causes a state in which, for a period of time (tEMErefrac), device activation is locked out, with the contact forced open.
Therefore, if the lever on the SON-OFF control is returned to ON while performing the final ON-OFF manoeuvre in the emergency
sequence, the device remains in the deactivated state and may not be activated again until the lock-out period elapses. Once this
period has elapsed, the control must first switched to OFF and then to ON again to activate the device.
Conversely, if the user only performs the first two ON-OFF-ON manoeuvres in the emergency sequence and fails to perform the
third within the time limit tEMEdetect, the second of these manoeuvres is considered a normal deactivation request and the device
implements the normal sequence described in the previous paragraph.
The emergency deactivation sequence described above is illustrated in the following diagram:
MAIN C.
Closed
Open
COIL CMD
LIGHT
S ON-OFF
+15
Blink
ON
OFF
<t EMEdetect
t EMErefrac
DO NOT CARE
Fig. 2828
In the event of a fault concerning the aperture or closure of the main contact, before generating the error state signal, the
device performs a number of attempts to repeat the manoeuvre and resolve the fault. The error state continues to be indicated
until a new status LED flash mode is necessary.
If a short circuit to ground in the AUX line is detected, the device instantaneously deactivates the line via both the protection
circuit integrated in the hardware driver and via the device management SW, which switches off the driver itself.
In all other cases, the fault is indicated only, with no corrective action implemented by the device. The fault continues to be indicated
for as long as the fault state itself persists.
40-39
Wiring diagrams
For details on error codes and the conditions in which they are generated, see the paragraph relative to the error table. Descriptions
of faults, organised by type, are given as follows.
See para. 20.5.8 - Alarm List, Electronic... - page 20-497
Control faults (COM)
These are faults concerning the control and recognition of the control status by the device. Control status recognition is made possible
by dual channels for reading control status (CH1 and CH2). Any permanent status not recognised as valid generates an error code.
See the COM errors listed in the error table for details.
See para. 20.5.8 - Alarm List, Electronic... - page 20-497
Faults relative to the status of the main contact (MCO)
These are faults relative to the status of the main contact - in other terms, conditions where the main contact does not maintain or
fails to attain the expected status.
See the MCO errors listed in the error table for details.
See para. 20.5.8 - Alarm List, Electronic... - page 20-497
Faults relative to the auxiliary power line status (AUX)
These are faults associated with short circuits on the AUX line.
See the AUX errors listed in the error table for details.
See para. 20.5.8 - Alarm List, Electronic... - page 20-497
Electrical connections
The electrical diagram for the connection of the TGC/RME-SA1 device to the vehicle electrical system is given below:
40-40
Wiring diagrams
LOAD POSITIVE LINE
PCB
Vbat
ON OFF
IGNITION KEY
SON-OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Vbat
CH2
COM+
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
Vbat
OFF
+15
LOAD
LIGHT
CH1
ON
GND
AUX
L2 (OPT)
uC & Drivers
+
-
Fig. 2829
Pin list
The table relative to the 8 pin connector, with details of the respective pin functions, is given as follows. See the relative paragraph
later in this document for electrical characteristics.
Table 388
Pin No.
Pin type
Label
2
3
4
Power - IN
Input signal
Output signal
GND
CH1
LIGHT
Power - OUT
COM+
6
7
8
Input signal
Input signal
/
CH2
+15
/
Power - OUT
AUX
Description of function
40-41
Wiring diagrams
40.2.5 - A - Starting and charging
Table 389
Sys- P/N
tem
A001
A004
A005
A006
A007
A008
A009
A010
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
04258670
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Alternator B+
Alternator D+
Cylinder 1 injector
Cylinder 2 injector
Cylinder 3 injector
Cylinder 4 injector
Cylinder 5 injector
Cylinder 6 injector
Preheating device
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-210
40-469
40-469
40-210
40-469
40-210
40-144
40-106
40-106
40-106
40-106
40-106
40-106
40-116
40-514
40-514
40-512
40-512
40-589
40-589
40-576
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-589
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-407
40-388
40-116
40-487
40-469
40-250
40-397
40-379
40-210
40-210
40-469
40-178
40-450
40-469
40-210
40-450
40-178
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40.2.6 - B - Fuses
Table 390
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
Fuse (250A)
B002
Fuse (200A)
B003
Fuse (40A)
B004
Fuse (15A)
B005
B006
Not used
Fuse (15A)
B007
B008
Not used
Fuse (3A)
40-42
Characteristics/notes
40-450
40-178
40-216
40-168
40-231
40-469
40-156
40-331
40-297
40-116
40-366
40-144
Wiring diagrams
Table 391
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
B009
B010
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (10A)
B011
B012
B013
Fuse (10A)
Not used
Fuse (15A)
B014
Fuse (30A)
B015
Fuse (20A)
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-422
40-147
40-431
40-210
40-442
40-120
40-207
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-465
40-106
40-120
40-231
40-216
40-297
40-207
40-465
40-120
40-210
40-469
40-210
40-469
40-465
40-207
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-231
40-480
40-112
40-216
40-469
40-331
40-210
40-321
40-297
40-480
40-216
40-321
40-231
40-297
40-331
40-112
40-487
40-407
40-397
40-388
40-379
40-487
40-388
40-407
40-397
40-379
40-250
40-116
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-589
Table 392
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B016
Fuse (30A)
B017
Fuse (30A)
B018
Fuse (50A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
B020
Characteristics/Notes
40-43
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
B021
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Fuse (30A)
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-210
40-321
40-469
40-514
40-514
40-514
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-349
40-210
40-231
40-250
40-469
40-297
40-480
40-210
40-321
40-216
40-331
40-196
40-200
40-216
40-250
40-210
40-231
40-297
40-469
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-207
40-297
40-231
40-465
40-250
40-216
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-465
40-207
40-349
40-200
40-196
40-418
40-207
40-465
40-207
40-465
40-450
40-216
40-465
40-207
40-231
40-297
40-250
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 393
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Table 394
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
40-44
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-112
40-207
40-297
40-331
40-465
40-321
40-216
40-231
40-250
40-147
40-465
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-422
40-431
40-341
40-156
40-207
40-297
40-116
40-231
40-147
40-250
40-331
40-144
40-106
40-133
40-156
40-465
40-125
40-422
40-120
40-480
40-168
40-207
40-366
40-321
40-216
40-442
40-431
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-196
40-200
40-133
40-125
40-366
40-207
40-465
40-474
40-315
40-141
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 395
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Table 396
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-45
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-231
40-336
40-309
40-194
40-144
40-250
40-321
40-297
40-207
40-465
40-349
40-106
40-207
40-465
40-465
40-442
40-168
40-207
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-487
40-207
40-277
40-268
40-250
40-231
40-407
40-388
40-373
40-379
40-371
40-286
40-465
40-397
40-245
40-407
40-397
40-388
40-487
40-379
40-465
40-207
40-349
40-465
40-207
40-465
40-349
40-207
40-341
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-207
40-480
40-321
40-465
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 397
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Table 398
Sys- P/N
tem
40-46
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
5A Fuse - Transmission
(F1-A/15, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission
(F1-A/15, +15)
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-147
40-156
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-349
40-112
40-465
40-465
40-450
40-431
40-422
40-178
40-207
40-250
40-465
40-366
40-207
40-480
40-231
40-250
40-297
40-216
40-474
40-125
40-133
40-309
40-321
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-474
40-336
40-250
40-231
40-216
40-315
40-465
40-297
40-309
40-207
40-231
40-125
40-250
40-297
40-133
40-465
40-216
40-207
40-349
40-465
40-346
40-207
40-207
40-349
40-465
40-349
40-418
40-207
40-465
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 399
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-47
Wiring diagrams
Table 400
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-210
40-418
40-178
40-210
40-469
40-450
40-331
40-207
40-349
40-465
40-349
40-210
40-469
40-200
40-469
40-210
40-196
40-210
40-200
40-196
40-469
40-450
40-178
40-207
40-321
40-465
40-450
40-178
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-366
40-133
40-210
40-125
40-297
40-216
40-469
40-250
40-231
40-196
40-216
40-469
40-231
40-200
40-210
40-297
40-250
40-418
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 401
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
40-48
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
5A Fuse - Transmission
control unit (F1-B/3, +30)
5A Fuse - Transmission
control unit (F1-B/3, +30)
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-125
40-210
40-297
40-309
40-231
40-216
40-480
40-366
40-321
40-469
40-133
40-250
40-474
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-349
40-210
40-210
40-469
40-480
40-144
40-321
40-366
40-346
40-210
40-469
40-422
40-431
40-156
40-210
40-147
40-469
40-277
40-379
40-469
40-286
40-371
40-268
40-210
40-373
40-487
40-397
40-231
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-407
40-388
40-245
40-216
40-250
40-431
40-156
40-147
40-422
40-210
40-469
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 402
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Table 403
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/notes
40-49
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-200
40-178
40-147
40-194
40-422
40-341
40-196
40-349
40-474
40-450
40-431
40-156
40-315
40-309
40-210
40-147
40-147
40-469
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-431
40-156
40-422
40-465
40-156
40-422
40-147
40-422
40-147
40-156
40-431
40-210
40-431
40-469
40-422
40-147
40-156
40-210
40-349
40-469
40-465
40-210
40-469
40-112
40-207
40-349
40-469
40-210
40-178
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 404
Sys- P/N
tem
Bf011
Description
40-50
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Table 405
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-231
40-147
40-250
40-297
40-156
40-112
40-216
40-178
40-210
40-469
40-422
40-450
40-431
40-418
40-210
40-469
40-178
40-469
40-450
40-210
40-210
40-349
40-469
40-349
40-210
40-469
40-315
40-250
40-133
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-309
40-144
40-194
40-196
40-336
40-141
40-125
40-297
40-469
40-349
40-366
40-321
40-200
40-210
40-480
40-231
40-474
40-168
40-210
40-469
40-442
40-469
40-210
40-450
40-178
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 406
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-51
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-216
40-210
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-397
40-469
40-231
40-120
40-210
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-250
40-469
40-116
40-144
40-106
40-112
40-210
40-465
40-469
40-207
40-469
40-465
40-210
40-207
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-210
40-112
40-474
40-168
40-309
40-156
40-331
40-133
40-315
40-141
40-474
40-349
40-321
40-168
40-147
40-422
40-349
40-450
40-442
40-422
40-125
40-366
40-498
40-498
40-498
40-583
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-583
40-576
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-576
40-583
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
Table 407
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40.2.7 - C - Grounds
Table 408
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C001 2.9559.047.0
C002
Engine ground
C002
Engine ground
40-52
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C002
Description
Characteristics/notes
Engine ground
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-250
40-407
40-379
40-487
40-397
40-418
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-112
40-216
40-120
40-465
40-231
40-297
40-207
40-431
40-210
40-331
40-379
40-407
40-487
40-388
40-397
40-341
40-469
40-309
40-297
40-156
40-336
40-442
40-231
40-216
40-178
40-144
40-106
40-480
40-498
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-583
40-498
40-583
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-583
40-498
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-156
40-250
40-397
40-268
40-474
40-286
40-147
40-194
40-196
40-309
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 409
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C002
Engine ground
C002
Characteristics/notes
Engine ground
Table 410
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Cab ground
Characteristics/notes
40-53
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
Cab ground
C003
Cab ground
Characteristics/notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-373
40-297
40-141
40-231
40-379
40-133
40-442
40-216
40-450
40-487
40-178
40-210
40-200
40-321
40-321
40-315
40-125
40-116
40-388
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-528
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-144
40-465
40-349
40-120
40-112
40-106
40-366
40-407
40-422
40-431
40-480
40-250
40-450
40-371
40-341
40-349
40-315
40-321
40-474
40-216
40-168
40-245
40-178
40-231
40-200
40-442
40-116
40-480
40-196
40-133
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 411
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
Cab ground
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
Cab ground
40-54
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Table 412
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Cab ground
Cab ground
C004 2.9559.064.0
Cab ground
Negative terminal of the
auxiliary battery
C005
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-309
40-431
40-194
40-156
40-331
40-297
40-277
40-106
40-125
40-144
40-422
40-268
40-286
40-147
40-366
40-277
40-112
40-297
40-480
40-321
40-231
40-216
40-331
40-349
40-346
40-341
40-178
40-418
40-450
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-442
40-156
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-133
40-431
40-341
40-125
40-147
40-168
40-168
40-442
40-341
40-431
40-422
40-125
40-133
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-496
40-496
40-571
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
Table 413
Sys- P/N
tem
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
D001
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-55
Wiring diagrams
D002
Table 414
Sys- P/N
tem
D002
D002
D002
D002
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-469
40-210
40-210
40-514
40-571
40-514
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-422
40-147
40-168
40-156
40-168
40-156
40-147
40-431
40-431
40-422
40-566
40-524
40-524
40-524
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-566
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-442
40-168
40-450
40-168
40-178
40-178
40-442
40-450
40-566
40-524
40-566
40-571
40-571
40-524
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-147
40-147
40-168
40-156
40-431
40-168
40-156
40-422
40-431
40-422
40-526
40-571
40-526
40-526
40-567
40-571
40-571
40-567
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-168
40-450
40-442
40-178
40-571
40-571
40-567
40-567
40-526
D003
Table 415
Sys- P/N
tem
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
D003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D004
Table 416
Sys- P/N
tem
D004
D004
D004
D004
D004
D004
D004
D004
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D006
Table 417
Sys- P/N
tem
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
D006
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D007
Table 418
Sys- P/N
tem
D007
D007
D007
D007
D007
40-56
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D007
D007
D007
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-442
40-450
40-526
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-125
40-418
40-431
40-422
40-200
40-366
40-168
40-133
40-480
40-315
40-144
40-474
40-194
40-349
40-216
40-250
40-331
40-156
40-231
40-297
40-309
40-147
40-315
40-442
40-196
40-309
40-349
40-321
40-147
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-571
40-576
40-576
40-571
40-571
40-576
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-331
40-196
40-156
40-297
40-231
40-480
40-321
40-418
40-133
40-442
40-168
40-422
40-366
40-144
40-431
40-200
40-474
40-194
40-216
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
D008
Table 419
Sys- P/N
tem
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Table 420
Sys- P/N
tem
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
D008
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
40-57
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D008
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-125
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-321
40-450
40-341
40-112
40-349
40-442
40-366
40-168
40-178
40-216
40-336
40-116
40-315
40-231
40-480
40-297
40-431
40-331
40-250
40-331
40-200
40-156
40-422
40-125
40-147
40-474
40-309
40-144
40-141
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-133
40-196
40-147
40-112
40-106
40-116
40-125
40-133
40-144
40-156
40-422
40-366
40-331
40-196
40-200
40-141
40-178
40-349
40-297
40-442
40-309
40-583
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
D009
Table 421
Sys- P/N
tem
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Table 422
Sys- P/N
tem
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
40-58
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
D009
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-474
40-250
40-321
40-168
40-231
40-480
40-315
40-341
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-216
40-450
40-431
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-231
40-216
40-106
40-112
40-116
40-297
40-297
40-231
40-106
40-116
40-216
40-112
40-250
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-571
40-590
40-590
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-590
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-106
40-207
40-465
40-120
40-231
40-465
40-106
40-120
40-250
40-216
40-297
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
Table 423
Sys- P/N
tem
D009
D009
D009
D009
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D010
Table 424
Sys- P/N
tem
D010
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
D011
Table 425
Sys- P/N
tem
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
D011
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D012
Table 426
Sys- P/N
tem
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
D012
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-59
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D012
D012
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-207
40-571
40-518
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-321
40-442
40-431
40-422
40-349
40-397
40-147
40-250
40-487
40-388
40-407
40-379
40-156
40-373
40-450
40-480
40-147
40-168
40-156
40-422
40-431
40-442
40-450
40-349
40-250
40-379
40-168
40-388
40-397
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-407
40-480
40-321
40-487
40-373
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-277
40-487
40-397
40-379
40-371
40-231
40-216
40-245
40-371
40-407
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-559
40-559
40-559
40-537
40-537
D013
Table 427
Sys- P/N
tem
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Table 428
Sys- P/N
tem
D013
D013
D013
D013
D013
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D014
Table 429
Sys- P/N
tem
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
40-60
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
D014
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-373
40-407
40-371
40-487
40-388
40-286
40-250
40-268
40-277
40-286
40-397
40-388
40-268
40-379
40-373
40-231
40-371
40-216
40-559
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-245
40-297
40-297
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-286
40-277
40-268
40-250
40-268
40-277
40-286
40-250
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-418
40-250
40-216
40-297
40-200
40-196
40-231
40-216
40-196
40-297
40-231
40-418
40-250
40-200
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-556
40-556
40-556
40-556
40-556
40-556
40-556
Table 430
Sys- P/N
tem
D014
D014
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D015
Table 431
Sys- P/N
tem
D015
D015
D015
D015
D015
D015
D015
D015
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
D016
Table 432
Sys- P/N
tem
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
D016
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
40-61
Wiring diagrams
D021
Table 433
Sys- P/N
tem
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
D021
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-231
40-297
40-250
40-349
40-216
40-349
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-250
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-535
40-535
40-535
40-535
40-535
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-442
40-168
40-442
40-528
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-422
40-156
40-336
40-178
40-168
40-442
40-321
40-315
40-431
40-147
40-349
40-178
40-450
40-309
40-147
40-315
40-156
40-309
40-336
40-168
40-442
40-431
40-422
40-321
40-349
40-450
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-341
40-571
40-580
40-580
D022
Table 434
Sys- P/N
tem
D022
D022
D022
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
D023
Table 435
Sys- P/N
tem
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
D023
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D024
Table 436
Sys- P/N
tem
D024
D024
D024
40-62
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D024
D024
D024
D024
D024
D024
D024
D024
D024
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-418
40-346
40-450
40-418
40-178
40-346
40-341
40-178
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-341
40-178
40-346
40-349
40-349
40-450
40-341
40-346
40-178
40-450
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-156
40-147
40-168
40-321
40-349
40-178
40-336
40-442
40-315
40-309
40-309
40-450
40-156
40-147
40-336
40-178
40-442
40-349
40-315
40-168
40-321
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-571
40-522
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-450
40-569
40-569
D025
Table 437
Sys- P/N
tem
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
D025
Description
Characteristics/notes
D026
Table 438
Sys- P/N
tem
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
D026
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D027
Table 439
Sys- P/N
tem
D027
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
40-63
Wiring diagrams
D028
Table 440
Sys- P/N
tem
D028
D028
D028
D028
D028
D028
D028
D028
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-442
40-450
40-178
40-442
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-505
40-569
40-569
40-526
40-567
40-503
40-567
40-526
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-450
40-568
40-568
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-442
40-442
40-450
40-178
40-524
40-504
40-502
40-566
40-566
40-568
40-568
40-524
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-144
40-133
40-125
40-116
40-106
40-422
40-231
40-450
40-366
40-442
40-331
40-216
40-178
40-168
40-366
40-321
40-431
40-156
40-147
40-216
40-297
40-297
40-321
40-422
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-583
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-583
40-514
40-583
40-583
40-583
D029
Table 441
Sys- P/N
tem
D029
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D030
Table 442
Sys- P/N
tem
D030
D030
D030
D030
D030
D030
D030
D030
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D031
Table 443
Sys- P/N
tem
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
40-64
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-450
40-331
40-156
40-125
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-168
40-116
40-442
40-133
40-144
40-147
40-431
40-231
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-469
40-231
40-216
40-331
40-297
40-321
40-112
40-210
40-480
40-231
40-469
40-112
40-210
40-480
40-216
40-321
40-297
40-331
40-583
40-518
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-321
40-216
40-331
40-331
40-321
40-480
40-112
40-231
40-112
40-480
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-297
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-583
Table 444
Sys- P/N
tem
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
D031
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D032
Table 445
Sys- P/N
tem
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
D032
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D033
Table 446
Sys- P/N
tem
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
D033
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-65
Wiring diagrams
D034
Table 447
Sys- P/N
tem
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
D034
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-178
40-147
40-168
40-156
40-147
40-168
40-442
40-321
40-431
40-480
40-422
40-450
40-156
40-321
40-431
40-442
40-450
40-422
40-480
40-507
40-583
40-507
40-507
40-507
40-583
40-583
40-509
40-583
40-509
40-509
40-509
40-509
40-583
40-507
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-297
40-336
40-231
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-516
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-516
40-516
40-516
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-431
40-178
40-147
40-196
40-422
40-349
40-156
40-106
40-450
40-200
40-178
40-450
40-147
40-196
40-200
40-156
40-431
40-422
40-106
40-349
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-583
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
D035
Table 448
Sys- P/N
tem
D035
D035
D035
D035
D035
D035
D035
D035
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D036
Table 449
Sys- P/N
tem
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
D036
40-66
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
D037
Table 450
Sys- P/N
tem
D037
D037
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-141
40-141
40-499
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-194
40-194
40-549
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-331
40-331
40-533
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-309
40-309
40-474
40-474
40-531
40-576
40-531
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-133
40-125
40-125
40-133
40-531
40-531
40-576
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-474
40-474
40-499
40-576
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-474
40-474
40-309
40-309
40-531
40-576
40-531
40-576
D038
Table 451
Sys- P/N
tem
D038
D038
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D039
Table 452
Sys- P/N
tem
D039
D039
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D040
Table 453
Sys- P/N
tem
D040
D040
D040
D040
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D041
Table 454
Sys- P/N
tem
D041
D041
D041
D041
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D042
Table 455
Sys- P/N
tem
D042
D042
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D043
Table 456
Sys- P/N
tem
D043
D043
D043
D043
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-67
Wiring diagrams
D044
Table 457
Sys- P/N
tem
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
D044
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-147
40-422
40-431
40-442
40-315
40-168
40-487
40-156
40-147
40-442
40-315
40-168
40-487
40-422
40-156
40-431
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-309
40-474
40-474
40-309
40-576
40-576
40-588
40-588
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-178
40-178
40-571
40-522
40-522
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-506
40-506
40-502
40-502
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-522
Link to system
Link to wiring
D045
Table 458
Sys- P/N
tem
D045
D045
D045
D045
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D046
Table 459
Sys- P/N
tem
D046
D046
D046
D046
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D047
Table 460
Sys- P/N
tem
D047
D047
D047
D047
D047
D047
D047
D047
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D048
Table 461
Sys- P/N
tem
D048
40-68
Description
Not used
Characteristics/Notes
40-522
Wiring diagrams
D049
Table 462
Sys- P/N
tem
D049
D049
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-178
40-544
40-522
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-520
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-501
40-520
40-501
40-506
40-506
40-520
40-520
40-520
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-422
40-431
40-156
40-147
40-422
40-147
40-156
40-431
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
Link to system
Link to wiring
D050
Table 463
Sys- P/N
tem
D050
Description
Characteristics/notes
Not used
D051
Table 464
Sys- P/N
tem
D051
D051
D051
D051
D051
D051
D051
D051
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D052
Table 465
Sys- P/N
tem
D052
D052
D052
D052
D052
D052
D052
D052
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D053
Table 466
Sys- P/N
tem
D053
Description
Characteristics/notes
40-520
Not used
D054
Table 467
Sys- P/N
tem
D054
D054
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-592
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-554
40-580
40-580
40-546
D055
Table 468
Sys- P/N
tem
D055
D055
D055
D055
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-69
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D055
D055
D055
D055
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-546
40-554
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-580
40-547
40-547
40-552
40-552
40-580
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-591
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-349
40-450
40-349
40-178
40-178
40-178
40-349
40-450
40-178
40-349
40-450
40-349
40-450
40-178
40-349
40-349
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-349
40-580
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-580
40-551
40-551
40-551
40-545
40-545
40-545
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
D056
Table 469
Sys- P/N
tem
D056
D056
D056
D056
D056
D056
D056
D056
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D057
Table 470
Sys- P/N
tem
D057
D057
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D058
Table 471
Sys- P/N
tem
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
D058
40-70
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
D059
Table 472
Sys- P/N
tem
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
D059
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-178
40-349
40-178
40-341
40-341
40-450
40-450
40-341
40-349
40-178
40-349
40-341
40-178
40-178
40-349
40-450
40-341
40-450
40-450
40-341
40-178
40-450
40-349
40-450
40-349
40-341
40-178
40-349
40-561
40-580
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-563
40-561
40-580
40-545
40-561
40-580
40-545
40-545
40-551
40-551
40-551
40-551
40-580
40-545
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-341
40-450
40-580
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-277
40-407
40-286
40-397
40-268
40-407
40-388
40-379
40-268
40-250
40-397
40-286
40-388
40-487
40-487
40-277
40-487
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-563
40-537
40-561
40-561
Table 473
Sys- P/N
tem
D059
D059
D059
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D060
Table 474
Sys- P/N
tem
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
40-71
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-286
40-379
40-388
40-397
40-250
40-407
40-379
40-250
40-245
40-373
40-268
40-277
40-268
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-537
40-561
40-537
40-559
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-245
40-379
40-407
40-286
40-277
40-373
40-397
40-487
40-373
40-245
40-245
40-373
40-250
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-561
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-373
40-397
40-407
40-250
40-268
40-277
40-286
40-388
40-231
40-371
40-216
40-371
40-250
40-487
40-245
40-379
40-397
40-388
40-407
40-286
40-487
40-268
40-379
40-277
40-371
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-559
40-559
40-542
40-537
40-559
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-537
40-542
40-542
Table 475
Sys- P/N
tem
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
D060
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D062
Table 476
Sys- P/N
tem
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
40-72
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D062
D062
D062
D062
D062
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-373
40-231
40-371
40-216
40-245
40-250
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-277
40-286
40-407
40-268
40-277
40-250
40-268
40-286
40-407
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-277
40-286
40-487
40-250
40-268
40-407
40-379
40-487
40-277
40-286
40-268
40-250
40-388
40-379
40-407
40-397
40-397
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-537
40-512
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-388
40-397
40-487
40-379
40-379
40-397
40-407
40-487
40-407
40-510
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-512
D063
Table 477
Sys- P/N
tem
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
D063
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D064
Table 478
Sys- P/N
tem
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
D064
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D066
Table 479
Sys- P/N
tem
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
D066
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
40-73
Wiring diagrams
D067
Table 480
Sys- P/N
tem
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
D067
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-268
40-487
40-286
40-388
40-397
40-250
40-277
40-379
40-487
40-407
40-250
40-379
40-407
40-286
40-277
40-268
40-397
40-388
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-510
40-512
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-442
40-442
40-571
40-528
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-277
40-379
40-487
40-397
40-268
40-407
40-250
40-286
40-277
40-268
40-379
40-286
40-250
40-407
40-397
40-487
40-388
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-277
40-388
40-250
40-563
40-565
40-565
D068
Table 481
Sys- P/N
tem
D068
D068
D068
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
D069
Table 482
Sys- P/N
tem
D069
D069
D069
D069
D069
D069
D069
D069
D069
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D071
Table 483
Sys- P/N
tem
D071
D071
D071
40-74
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
D071
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-245
40-373
40-268
40-286
40-407
40-397
40-397
40-277
40-286
40-407
40-277
40-397
40-286
40-407
40-373
40-268
40-245
40-268
40-388
40-245
40-373
40-397
40-388
40-268
40-277
40-407
40-286
40-388
40-245
40-373
40-565
40-565
40-565
40-563
40-563
40-558
40-563
40-558
40-558
40-558
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-563
40-563
40-565
40-565
40-563
40-563
40-565
40-558
40-565
40-561
40-558
40-558
40-558
40-561
40-561
40-561
Link to system
Link to wiring
D072
Table 484
Sys- P/N
tem
D072
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-559
Not used
D073
Table 485
Sys- P/N
tem
D073
D073
D073
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-196
40-418
40-200
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-200
40-196
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-341
40-341
40-579
40-571
D074
Table 486
Sys- P/N
tem
D074
D074
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D075
Table 487
Sys- P/N
tem
D075
D075
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Characteristics/notes
40-75
Wiring diagrams
D076
Table 488
Sys- P/N
tem
D076
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-297
40-297
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-297
40-250
40-216
40-231
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-522
40-522
40-522
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-520
40-520
40-520
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-407
40-373
40-379
40-487
40-250
40-397
40-379
40-397
40-250
40-487
40-407
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
D077
Table 489
Sys- P/N
tem
D077
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
D078
Table 490
Sys- P/N
tem
D078
D078
D078
D078
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D079
Table 491
Sys- P/N
tem
D079
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
D080
Table 492
Sys- P/N
tem
D080
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Not used
D081
Table 493
Sys- P/N
tem
D081
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Not used
D086
Table 494
Sys- P/N
tem
D086
D086
D086
D086
D086
D086
D086
40-76
Description
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-373
40-559
40-537
40-559
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-106
40-590
40-592
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-106
40-592
40-590
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-570
40-570
40-570
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-321
40-321
40-583
40-586
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-321
40-321
40-586
40-583
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-418
40-418
40-576
40-585
40-576
D087
Table 495
Sys- P/N
tem
D087
D087
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D088
Table 496
Sys- P/N
tem
D088
D088
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D089
Table 497
Sys- P/N
tem
D089
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring connector
D090
Table 498
Sys- P/N
tem
D090
D090
D090
D090
D090
D090
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D091
Table 499
Sys- P/N
tem
D091
D091
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D092
Table 500
Sys- P/N
tem
D092
D092
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D093
Table 501
Sys- P/N
tem
D093
D093
Description
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Not used
Characteristics/Notes
40-77
Wiring diagrams
D094
Table 502
Sys- P/N
tem
D094
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-346
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-512
D095
Table 503
Sys- P/N
tem
D095
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
Description
E001 2.8339.278.0/20
Instrument panel
E002 2.8339.278.0/20
Instrument panel
E002 2.8339.278.0/20
Instrument panel
E003 0.018.9908.4/40
Work Display
E004 01169304
Horn
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-442
40-422
40-156
40-147
40-250
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-366
40-331
40-106
40-116
40-125
40-133
40-442
40-144
40-168
40-431
40-250
40-480
40-216
40-331
40-231
40-321
40-297
40-147
40-422
40-431
40-156
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-216
40-245
40-268
40-286
40-373
40-371
40-397
40-277
40-407
40-231
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
Table 505
Sys- P/N
tem
40-78
Description
0.019.0639.0
I-Monitor
0.019.0639.0
I-Monitor
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
E006 04414773
E007 04414773
RH rotating beacon
LH rotating beacon
0.019.0639.0
Characteristics/Notes
I-Monitor
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-373
40-371
40-407
40-397
40-349
40-349
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-542
40-592
40-591
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-431
40-422
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-168
40-442
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-431
40-422
40-442
40-168
40-147
40-431
40-156
40-422
40-422
40-431
40-156
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-431
40-147
40-431
40-422
40-147
40-156
40-571
40-567
40-567
40-526
40-526
40-567
40-526
40-569
40-524
40-524
40-566
40-566
40-566
40-568
40-524
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-349
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-349
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-349
40-522
F001
F003 2.8059.039.0
F004
F004
F005
F005
2.8059.039.0
2.8059.530.0
2.8059.535.0
2.8059.039.0
2.8059.039.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
LH carpet light
RH sidelight
RH sidelight
RH turn indicator
RH turn indicator
LH sidelight
LH sidelight
2.8059.039.0
F006 2.8059.535.0
F006 2.8059.530.0
F007 2.8039.005.0
LH sidelight
LH turn indicator
LH turn indicator
RH high beam headlight
F008 2.8039.004.0
F009 2.8039.004.0
F010 2.8039.005.0
Table 507
Sys- P/N
tem
F011 2.8039.305.0
F012 2.8039.305.0
F013 2.8039.307.0/20
F014 2.8039.305.0
F015 2.8039.305.0
F016 2.8039.306.0/20
F017 0.019.5137.4
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-79
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F018 2.8059.534.0
F019 2.8059.532.0
F020 2.8059.531.0
F021 0.019.5138.4
F022 2.8059.534.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
F023 2.8059.532.0
F024 2.8059.531.0
F025 2.8039.023.0
F026 04414115
F027 2.8039.023.0
F028 2.8039.023.0
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-522
40-321
40-147
40-156
40-349
40-168
40-522
40-522
40-522
40-520
40-520
40-321
40-156
40-147
40-178
40-156
40-147
40-422
40-431
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-520
40-520
40-520
40-544
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-506
40-506
40-506
40-506
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-546
40-546
40-554
40-554
40-554
40-178
40-546
40-450
40-554
40-450
40-546
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-547
40-547
40-552
40-552
40-547
40-547
40-552
40-552
40-545
40-178
40-563
40-450
40-563
40-178
40-561
40-450
40-561
40-178
40-551
40-450
40-545
Table 508
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F029 2.8039.019.0
F030 2.8039.032.0
F030 2.8039.018.0
F030 2.8039.032.0
F030 2.8039.018.0
F031 2.8039.019.0
F031 2.8039.032.0
F032 2.8039.018.0
F032 2.8039.032.0
F033 2.8039.019.0
F033 2.8039.019.0
F033 2.8039.019.0
F033 2.8039.032.0
F033 2.8039.032.0
F033 2.8039.032.0
F033 2.8039.019.0
40-80
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F033 2.8039.032.0
F034 2.8039.032.0
F034 2.8039.019.0
F034 2.8039.019.0
F034 2.8039.019.0
F034 2.8039.032.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
work
40-450
40-551
work
40-450
40-561
work
40-450
40-545
work
40-450
40-563
work
40-178
40-563
work
40-450
40-551
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-545
40-178
40-551
40-178
40-561
40-178
40-551
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-563
40-563
40-561
40-551
40-545
40-545
40-561
40-450
40-563
40-178
40-563
40-178
40-561
40-450
40-561
40-450
40-551
40-178
40-545
40-450
40-545
40-178
40-551
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-504
40-502
40-502
40-568
40-504
40-568
40-505
40-450
40-503
Table 509
Sys- P/N
tem
F034 2.8039.019.0
F034 2.8039.032.0
F034 2.8039.032.0
F035 2.8039.032.0
F035 2.8039.019.0
F035 2.8039.032.0
F035 2.8039.019.0
F035 2.8039.032.0
F036 2.8039.019.0
F036 2.8039.019.0
F036 2.8039.032.0
F036 2.8039.032.0
F036 2.8039.032.0
F036 2.8039.019.0
F036 2.8039.019.0
F036 2.8039.032.0
F037
F037
F037
F037
F037
F037
F038
2.8039.023.0
2.8039.016.0
2.8039.016.0
2.8039.023.0
2.8039.033.0
2.8039.033.0/10
2.8039.023.0
F038 2.8039.016.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-81
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F038 2.8039.016.0
F038 2.8039.023.0
F038 2.8039.033.0
F038 2.8039.033.0/10
Description
Rh front
arm)
Rh front
arm)
Rh front
arm)
Rh front
arm)
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-503
40-450
40-569
40-178
40-505
40-450
40-569
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-178
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-442
40-502
40-502
40-501
40-501
40-522
40-522
40-442
40-520
40-520
40-431
40-156
40-431
40-566
40-524
40-566
40-431
40-156
40-431
40-567
40-526
40-567
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-571
40-571
40-580
40-349
40-580
40-349
40-349
40-580
40-580
40-349
40-349
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-480
40-144
40-366
40-321
40-231
40-297
40-106
40-216
40-250
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 510
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F039 2.8039.016.0
F040 2.8039.016.0
F041
F041 2.8059.535.0
Not used
RH rear hazard warning
light - USA version
Not used
LH rear hazard warning
light - USA version
Left hand repeater headlight
Left hand repeater headlight
Right hand repeater headlight
F042
F042 2.8059.535.0
F043 2.8039.021.0/10
F043 2.8039.022.0/10
F044 2.8039.021.0/10
Characteristics/Notes
G001 2.8339.074.0
2.8339.074.0
G002 0.019.5437.4/10
G003 0.019.5437.4/10
G004 2.8339.231.0
G005
G006 0.019.0494.4/20
G007 0.019.0495.4/20
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Description
H001 0.019.2557.4/40
Armrest
0.019.2557.4/40
Armrest
40-82
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
H002 0.018.9910.4/20
H002 0.018.9910.4/20
H003 0.018.7370.4
0.018.7370.4
H005 0.015.8629.4
Characteristics/Notes
H007 0.017.9597.4
H007 0.017.9597.4
Monitor controls
H006 0.015.8629.4
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-178
40-231
40-450
40-147
40-349
40-112
40-422
40-297
40-431
40-156
40-250
40-125
40-133
40-125
40-133
40-349
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-496
40-580
40-349
40-580
40-487
40-373
40-286
40-250
40-277
40-268
40-397
40-388
40-407
40-245
40-379
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-442
40-571
40-571
40-349
40-571
I001 2.7659.110.0
Description
Hazard
switch
warning
Characteristics/Notes
lights
1
0
30
49
15
1
30
3
49
4
49a
5
Pin
15
49a
Pos
b
30
3
4
L
6
R
7
0
1
2.7659.110.0
I002 2.7659.405.0
Fig. 2830
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.405.0
Fig. 2831
40-83
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
I003 2.7649.100.0
40-321
40-571
I003 2.7649.100.0
40-480
40-571
I004 2.7649.100.0
40-321
40-571
I004 2.7649.100.0
40-480
40-571
I006 0.015.0485.4
Starter switch
40-207
40-465
40-112
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-125
40-133
40-431
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-156
40-431
40-571
40-571
83
15
75
Pos
Pin
50
30
86s
30
15
50
75
83
0
1
2
0.015.0485.4
I007
Safety switch
I008 2.7659.376.0
Fig. 2832
0
1
2
Pos
Pin
10
10
0
1
2
2.7659.376.0
I009 2.7659.377.0
Fig. 2833
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
2.7659.377.0
Fig. 2834
40-84
Wiring diagrams
Table 514
Sys- P/N
tem
I009 2.7659.377.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-422
40-147
40-571
40-571
40-474
40-309
40-315
40-194
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-315
40-500
40-315
40-500
40-336
40-522
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
2.7659.377.0
I010 2.7659.380.0
I011 2.7659.379.0
I012 2.7659.378.0
I013 2.7659.347.0
Fig. 2834
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
I014 2.7659.348.0
Fig. 2835
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
I015 2.7659.337.0
Fig. 2836
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.337.0
Fig. 2837
40-85
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I016 2.7659.337.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
RH distributor UP button
(on mudguard)
Pos
Pin
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-522
40-315
40-522
40-315
40-522
40-309
40-522
40-336
40-520
0
1
2.7659.337.0
I017 2.7659.347.0
Fig. 2837
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
I018 2.7659.348.0
Fig. 2837
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
I019 2.7659.350.0
Fig. 2837
0
1
3
2
1
Pos
Pin
3
270 Ohm
220 Ohm
2.7659.350.0
I020 2.7659.337.0
Fig. 2838
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.337.0
Fig. 2838
40-86
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I021 2.7659.337.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
LH distributor UP button
(on mudguard)
Pos
Pin
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-520
40-315
40-520
40-315
40-520
40-309
40-520
40-120
40-518
40-349
40-580
40-341
40-580
0
1
2.7659.337.0
I022 2.7659.347.0
Fig. 2838
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
I023 2.7659.348.0
Fig. 2838
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
I024 2.7659.350.0
Fig. 2838
0
1
3
2
1
Pos
Pin
3
270 Ohm
220 Ohm
2.7659.350.0
I025 2.7659.373.0
Fig. 2838
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.373.0
I026 2.7659.381.0
I027 2.7659.382.0
Fig. 2839
40-87
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I028 04414097
I029 2.7659.411.0
I030 2.7659.489.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-580
40-442
40-528
40-487
40-407
40-379
40-388
40-397
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-346
40-349
40-580
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-450
40-178
40-178
40-450
40-112
40-120
40-469
40-210
40-469
40-120
40-210
40-112
40-210
40-112
40-120
40-469
40-120
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-465
40-207
40-250
40-286
40-277
40-268
40-518
40-518
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
I031 2.7659.471.0
I031 2.7659.471.0
Fig. 2840
40.2.14 - J - Relays
Table 515
Sys- P/N
tem
J002
J003
J004
J005
J006 2.7659.368.0/10
J007
J008
J009
J010
J011
J012
J013
40-88
Description
2.7659.368.0/10
2.7659.368.0/10
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Table 516
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
J014
CAN-H
ISO11783
relay
J015
J016
J020
J021
J022
J023
J032 04216031
04216031
04216031
04216031
Characteristics/Notes
CANBUS
configuration
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-286
40-277
40-250
40-268
40-397
40-407
40-388
40-487
40-379
40-397
40-487
40-407
40-379
40-388
40-250
40-250
40-250
40-250
40-250
40-116
40-116
40-116
40-116
40-465
40-207
40-349
40-178
40-349
40-147
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-590
40-589
40-590
40-589
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-431
40-156
40-422
40-210
40-469
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-210
40-469
40-450
40-450
40-178
40-450
40-178
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-450
40-178
40-331
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-349
40-156
40-422
40-147
40-431
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 517
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-89
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-480
40-321
40-422
40-147
40-431
40-156
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-156
40-422
40-147
40-431
40-147
40-156
40-431
40-422
40-431
40-147
40-156
40-422
40-207
40-465
40-341
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-133
40-125
40-125
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-133
40-571
40-133
40-571
40-125
40-571
Table 518
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
K001 2.7099.037.0
K002 2.7099.740.0/10
K002 2.7099.740.0/10
K003 04429390/10
K003 04429390/10
40-90
Description
Characteristics/notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-571
Description
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-125
40-133
40-106
40-321
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-480
40-583
40-480
40-583
40-321
40-583
40-315
40-583
40-474
40-583
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
K009 04438352
K010 2.7059.834.0
Pin 1 = ground
40-309
Pin 2 = square wave signal
Pin 3 = 12 V power input
Resistance between Pin 2 and
Pin 3: approx.18 kOhm
High level: 3.5-5.5 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 40-144
2:
with tank full 177197 Ohm
with tank half full 58.566 Ohm
with tank empty 3.55.5 Ohm
K003 04429390/10
Table 520
Sys- P/N
tem
K004
K004
K005 0.900.0942.1
K006 2.7099.670.0/10
K006 2.7099.670.0/10
K007 2.7099.009.0
K007 2.7099.009.0
K008 2.7099.982.0
K009 04438352
Characteristics/Notes
Table 521
40-583
40-583
40-91
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
K010 2.7059.834.0
K011
K012 0.900.0272.2
K013 2.7099.035.0/10
Not used
Air cleaner clogged sensor
Engine coolant level sensor
Front axle speed sensor
K014 0.900.1420.3
K015 04426492/10
Link to system
40-144
40-144
Link to wiring
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-200
40-125
40-133
Air conditioning pressure Compressor connector (female 40-196
switch
connector): normally open contact
- with pressure increasing:
contact closed at max 2.4 bar
contact open at 28.5 1.5 bar
- with pressure decreasing:
contact closed at 19.5 1.5 bar
contact open at 1.2 0.3 Bar
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
Description
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-200
40-583
40-407
40-133
40-125
40-540
40-540
40-583
40-407
40-106
40-583
40-529
40-196
40-200
40-529
40-529
Table 522
Sys- P/N
tem
K015 04426492/10
K016
K016
K016 0.900.0504.8
K016
K017 04216354
Characteristics/Notes
T (C)
Rnom ()
Rmin ()
-40
39656
37013
42298
30
1662
1610
-35
30080
28173
31988
35
1389
1348
1430
-30
23026
21639
24414
40
1166
1133
1198
-25
17781
16763
18800
45
983,3
957,8
1009
-20
13846
13092
14600
50
833,2
812,9
853,4
-15
10867
10305
11429
55
709
693
725,1
-10
8594
8172
9015
60
605,9
593,2
618,7
-5
6845
6526
7164
65
520
509,8
530,1
Rnom ()
5490
Rmin ()
5248
Rmax ()
Rmax ()
1715
5732
70
447,9
439,8
456
4432
4247
4618
75
387,3
380,9
393,8
10
3601
3458
3743
80
336,1
331
341,3
15
2943
2833
3053
85
292,8
288,7
296,8
20
2420
2334
2505
90
255,8
252,6
259
25
2000
1934
2067
04216354
K018 0.014.4826.3
40-92
Fig. 2841
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
K019 0.009.2194.4/20
K020
K021 0.012.4371.0
K021 0.012.4371.0
K022 0.012.1507.4
K022 0.012.1507.4
K023 04438667
K024
K025 2.7099.982.0
K026 0.011.9428.0
K027 2.7099.033.0/10
K027 2.7099.033.0/10
K028 04416649
K028 04416649
K029
K030
K030
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-141
40-499
40-133
40-576
40-576
40-125
40-576
40-321
40-576
40-480
40-576
40-315
40-576
40-315
40-576
40-576
40-331
40-576
40-133
40-576
40-125
40-576
40-125
40-576
40-133
40-576
40-315
40-474
40-309
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-93
Wiring diagrams
Table 523
Sys- P/N
tem
K031 0.010.1214.4
K032 0.900.0064.4
K033 04904050
K034 04218185
K034 04218185
K034 04218185
K035 2.7059.007.0/10
K036 04218186
K036 04218186
K036 04218186
K037 04454440/20
K037 04454440/20
K037 04454440/20
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Rs ()
Rs ()
UO (V)
-40
169,7
1,9
0,725
200,5
1,9
0,835
25
219,6
1,9
0,900
50
238,5
1,9
0,963
100
275,9
1,9
1,081
200
349,0
1,8
1,293
300
419,7
1,9
1,478
400
488,1
2,4
1.640
500
554,1
2,9
1,783
600
617,8
3,4
1,909
700
679,2
3,8
2,022
800
738,2
4,2
2,123
850
766,8
4,4
2,170
Link to wiring
40-499
40-533
40-518
04904050
Fig. 2842
40-231
40-518
40-297
40-518
40-216
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-297
40-518
40-216
40-518
40-231
40-518
40-286
40-540
40-407
40-540
40-250
40-540
Link to system
Link to wiring
sensor
40-133
40-540
sensor
40-407
40-540
Table 524
Sys- P/N
tem
K038
K038
40-94
Description
Steering angle
(Agrosky)
Steering angle
(Agrosky)
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
K039
K044
K045 04199447
K046 04214103
K047 04210196
K048 04216645
Characteristics/Notes
T (C) [F]
Signal ()
-40 [-40]
44373
0 [32]
5774
25 [77]
2014
40 [104]
1150
80 [176]
315
125 [257]
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-106
40-106
40-570
40-570
40-570
40-590
40-590
40-106
40-590
40-106
40-590
40-106
40-590
40-106
40-106
40-106
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-200
40-200
40-556
40-556
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-315
40-583
40-141
40-499
40-141
40-141
40-499
40-499
40-474
40-309
40-133
40-125
40-315
40-576
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-576
40-474
40-309
40-474
40-309
40-474
40-309
40-331
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-533
98
Relative
pressure (bar)
Signal (V)
~ 1,000
0,5
~ 1,550
~ 2,100
max 1,6
~ 2,700
04216645
K049 04213842
K050 04213842
K051
K052 04210196
K055 0.014.1326.0
K056 0.014.1324.0
Fig. 2843
L001 04451764
L002 0.900.1132.5
L003 0.900.1132.5
L004 0.900.1132.5
L005
L006
L007
L008 04451764
L009
L010
L011
L012 0.900.0939.9
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-95
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
L013 0.018.3290.4
L014 0.900.0813.8
L015 2.4569.021.0
L016
L017
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-120
40-518
40-474
40-309
40-407
40-588
40-588
40-540
40-106
40-590
40-331
40-576
Description
M001 2.8519.133.0/20
2.8519.133.0/20
2.8519.133.0/20
2.8519.133.0/20
2.8519.133.0/20
M002 02959593
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-133
40-125
40-480
40-133
40-321
40-125
40-366
40-125
40-474
40-250
40-309
40-297
40-216
40-133
40-321
40-480
40-231
40-125
40-231
40-480
40-133
40-216
40-297
40-250
40-321
40-216
40-120
40-250
40-144
40-231
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-106
40-116
40-112
40-297
40-250
40-216
40-106
40-112
40-120
40-297
40-231
40-116
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 527
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M002 02959593
02959593
40-96
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003 2.8519.134.0/50
HLHP unit
M003 2.8519.134.0/50
HLHP unit
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-366
40-309
40-196
40-194
40-144
40-231
40-297
40-125
40-133
40-216
40-349
40-250
40-373
40-346
40-200
40-321
40-397
40-379
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-388
40-407
40-141
40-315
40-336
40-321
40-216
40-200
40-309
40-297
40-125
40-315
40-250
40-231
40-349
40-373
40-487
40-388
40-397
40-144
40-480
40-336
40-407
40-346
40-474
40-366
40-133
40-194
40-196
40-141
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-168
40-442
40-571
40-571
Table 528
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003 2.8519.134.0/50
HLHP unit
M003 2.8519.136.0/40
M003 2.8519.136.0/40
M003 2.8519.136.0/40
Characteristics/Notes
Table 529
Sys- P/N
tem
M004 2.8639.007.0/10
Description
Characteristics/Notes
40-97
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M005
M006 2.7099.977.4
Radar
M006 2.7099.976.4
Radar
M008 2.8519.148.0
M009 0.019.0636.0
AGROSKY Antenna
M009 0.019.0644.0
M009 0.019.0636.0
M009 0.019.0644.0
0.019.0644.0
AGROSKY Antenna
AGROSKY Antenna
AGROSKY Antenna
AGROSKY Antenna
40-98
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-133
40-216
40-297
40-366
40-231
40-125
40-315
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
40-576
Pin 1 = ground
Pin 2 = pulse signal (100 pulses/
metre)
Pin 3 = power 12 V
With the radar powered on, the
voltage at pin 2 should change
when a hand is passed in front of
the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24125
MHz 75 MHz
Pin 1 = ground
40-315
Pin 2 = pulse signal (100 pulses/
metre)
Pin 3 = power 12 V
With the radar powered on, the
voltage at pin 2 should change
when a hand is passed in front of
the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24300
MHz 75 MHz
40-231
40-216
40-297
40-349
40-388
40-245
40-373
40-407
40-268
40-397
40-397
40-286
40-407
40-277
40-576
40-535
40-535
40-535
40-535
40-565
40-565
40-565
40-558
40-565
40-558
40-558
40-558
40-558
40-558
Wiring diagrams
Table 530
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M010
Microphone
M011
M012 2.8639.012.0
2.4569.021.0
2.4569.021.0
M014 04509411
M015 0.019.5438.4/20
M016
M017 0.900.2223.9
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-397
40-373
40-407
40-388
40-487
40-379
40-277
40-407
40-379
40-286
40-250
40-388
40-397
40-487
40-268
40-442
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-528
40-286
40-250
40-407
40-407
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-250
40-106
40-200
40-418
40-418
40-418
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-556
40-556
40-585
40-580
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-341
40-341
40-583
40-583
40-331
40-297
40-231
40-321
40-112
40-480
40-216
40-194
40-194
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-549
40-549
40-112
40-112
40-112
40-120
40-120
40-341
40-518
40-511
40-590
40-518
40-518
40-580
N002 04414105
N003 04414105
N004 0.018.6330.4/10
N005 0.015.8702.4/10
N006 0.015.8702.4/10
Description
N007 0.900.2154.0
N007
N008
N009
N010
Starter motor
AdBlue pump
AdBlue dispenser
Rear screen wiper motor
0.900.2154.0
04600620
04600619
04413192
Characteristics/Notes
40-99
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
N011 0.019.6609.4
N012
Electronically controlled
hydraulic power steering
N013
N018 04414105
N019 04414105
N020 0.019.6494.0
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-341
40-341
40-341
40-341
40-286
40-245
40-277
40-397
40-250
40-268
40-349
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-571
40-341
40-341
40-579
40-579
40-418
40-585
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-216
40-297
40-231
40-231
40-216
40-250
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-250
40-231
40-297
40-216
40-250
40-297
40-216
40-231
40-250
40-297
40-231
40-250
40-216
40-231
40-297
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-250
40-216
40-194
40-112
40-120
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-518
O001
Description
Characteristics/Notes
O002
O003
O004
Table 533
Sys- P/N
tem
O005
O006 0.018.3706.4/10
40-100
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O007 0.018.3706.4/10
O008 0.018.3787.4/10
O009
O011
O012
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-120
40-518
40-120
40-518
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-349
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-580
40-286
40-250
40-277
40-268
40-245
40-250
40-286
40-268
40-277
40-245
40-268
40-286
40-277
40-245
40-250
40-250
40-277
40-268
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-286
40-537
Not used
Wiring connector
40-245
40-277
40-286
40-268
40-277
40-268
40-245
40-286
40-397
40-250
40-388
40-407
40-379
40-487
40-397
40-487
40-250
40-379
40-388
40-407
40-268
40-250
40-277
40-286
40-537
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-561
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
O013
Table 534
Sys- P/N
tem
O013
Description
Diode connector
Diode board
O015
Characteristics/Notes
40-101
Wiring diagrams
Table 535
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
O016
Diode board
O017
Diode board
O018
O019
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-397
40-407
40-388
40-487
40-379
40-487
40-388
40-379
40-407
40-397
40-286
40-250
40-286
40-250
40-418
40-418
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-540
40-585
40-585
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-346
40-346
40-349
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-349
40-200
40-196
40-168
40-178
40-156
40-321
40-450
40-422
40-442
40-147
40-431
40-480
40-216
40-231
40-336
40-297
40-297
40-336
40-231
40-216
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-336
40-216
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-507
40-507
40-507
40-509
40-509
40-509
40-509
40-507
40-509
40-509
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-336
40-297
40-231
40-516
40-516
40-516
P001 0.017.0265.4/10
P002 0.017.0265.4/10
P003 2.6039.020.0
Description
P006 2.6030.011.0
LH front loudspeaker
RH front loudspeaker
Auxiliary cab power outlet
socket (25A)
Power outlet socket in cab
Air conditioning compressor
Trailer socket
P006 2.6039.027.0
Trailer socket
P006 2.6030.011.0
P006 2.6039.027.0
Trailer socket
Trailer socket
P007 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 1
P008 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 2
P009 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 3
P010 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 4
P004 2.6039.517.0
P005 04437339/10
Characteristics/Notes
Table 537
Sys- P/N
tem
P010 2.3729.005.0
40-102
Description
Utility distributor 4
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P011 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 5
P012 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 6
P013 2.3729.005.0
Utility distributor 7
P014 2.6039.020.0
P015 2.6039.039.0
Characteristics/Notes
P016 0.017.0266.4/10
P017 0.017.0266.4/10
P018 0.015.8626.4
RH rear loudspeaker
LH rear loudspeaker
LH rear view mirror
P018 0.019.4636.4
P019 0.015.8625.4
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-216
40-231
40-336
40-297
40-231
40-216
40-336
40-297
40-297
40-336
40-216
40-231
40-349
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-576
40-442
40-147
40-168
40-431
40-422
40-156
40-346
40-346
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-500
40-580
40-580
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-349
40-268
40-286
40-407
40-388
40-487
40-277
40-379
40-397
40-250
40-407
40-379
40-487
40-397
40-388
40-379
40-250
40-388
40-397
40-407
40-268
40-286
40-277
40-487
40-250
40-268
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-535
40-535
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-510
40-512
40-512
Table 538
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
P019 0.015.8625.4
P019 0.019.4635.4
P020 04422324.4/10
04422324.4/10
P021
P022
Front ISOBUS
socket
11783
P023
Front ISOBUS
socket
11783
P024
40-103
Wiring diagrams
Table 539
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
P024
P025
P026
P027 2.6030.011.0
P028
0.019.6523.0
0.019.6523.0
Radio
Trailer socket
Electric aerial
Webasto unit
Webasto unit
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-397
40-388
40-487
40-379
40-286
40-407
40-277
40-407
40-379
40-487
40-388
40-397
40-346
40-321
40-346
40-418
40-418
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-512
40-580
40-586
40-580
40-585
40-585
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-366
40-216
40-250
40-231
40-297
40-388
40-487
40-397
40-407
40-379
40-379
40-277
40-250
40-397
40-388
40-487
40-286
40-407
40-268
40-418
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-559
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-585
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-112
40-469
40-210
40-210
40-469
40-210
40-469
40-511
40-511
40-511
40-583
40-583
40-514
40-514
40.2.21 - R - Diagnostics
Table 540
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
R001
R002
Diagnostic socket
CANBUS diagnostic connector
R003
RS 232 connector
R004
ISO11783
socket
R005
diagnostic
Description
T001 2.9559.047.0
2.9559.047.0
2.9559.047.0
40-104
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
T004 2.9559.064.0
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Link to system
Link to wiring
40-480
40-216
40-231
40-321
40-297
40-331
40-112
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-583
40-105
Wiring diagrams
40.3 - Systems
WATER IN FUEL
E2-67
HOLD SWITCH
HAND GAS
HOLD SWITCH
HAND GAS
+30
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
70
26
69
67
51
30
46
16
Bm013
20
29
84
58
85
86
87
65
64
66
48
49
37
33
30
A
B4
A
B3
D011
36
37
D087
+15
D011
C002
D036
19
35
16 11
10
18
K010
K017 K005
13
14
H001a
40-106
ECU
4
pos
GND
12
SIG.
11
SUPPLY
HAND GAS
15
HAND GAS
HOLD SWITCH
HOLD SWITCH
+15 ENGINE
+30
3A
20
34
1D
7.5A
D031
B008
10A
A
D6
B010
A
A7
D012
B
B3
Bb007
A
D5
To Can Bus
D009
+15
+30
C003
C003a
GND
WATER IN FUEL
50
10
GAS PEDAL
13
TANK INDICATOR
21
30A
3A
GND
M002a
+15 INSTRUMENT
M002
12
+15
Bb004
E002
M014
K003
Wiring diagrams
WATER IN FUEL
E2-67
HOLD SWITCH
HAND GAS
HOLD SWITCH
HAND GAS
+30
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
70
26
69
67
51
30
46
16
Bm013
20
29
84
58
85
86
87
65
64
66
48
49
37
33
30
A
B4
A
B3
D011
36
37
D087
+15
D011
C002
D036
19
35
16 11
10
18
K017 K005
13
14
H001a
ECU
4
pos
GND
12
SIG.
11
SUPPLY
HAND GAS
K010
15
HAND GAS
HOLD SWITCH
1
t
HOLD SWITCH
+15 ENGINE
+30
3A
20
34
1D
7.5A
D031
B008
10A
A
D6
B010
A
A7
D012
B
B3
Bb007
A
D5
To Can Bus
D009
+15
+30
C003
C003a
GND
WATER IN FUEL
50
10
GAS PEDAL
13
TANK INDICATOR
21
30A
3A
GND
M002a
+15 INSTRUMENT
M002
12
+15
Bb004
E002
M014
K003
40-107
Wiring diagrams
M002a
23
45
44
43
24
25
46
36
78
17
40
42
41
20
19
31
25
32
101
75
99
15
21
13
14
102
100
13
74
11
21
73
24
28
29
22
23
72
35
54
27
17
D011
22
26
D088
39
K044
K045
K046
K047
K048
K049
K050
D0078340
40-108
Wiring diagrams
Table 542
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B010
C002
Fuse (10A)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Engine
(F1-A/7, +15)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
A004
A005
A006
A007
A008
A009
B008
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
04504666
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-592
40-514
Cylinder 1 injector
Cylinder 2 injector
Cylinder 3 injector
Cylinder 4 injector
Cylinder 5 injector
Cylinder 6 injector
Fuse (3A)
Cab ground
Fig. 2846
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2847
Fig. 2848
40-571
40-571
Fig. 2849
40-109
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D011
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D087
Wiring connector
D088
Wiring connector
40-110
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2850
Fig. 2851
Fig. 2852
Fig. 2853
Fig. 2854
40-571
40-590
40-518
40-571
40-583
40-514
40-529
40-583
40-590
40-592
40-590
40-592
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
E002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Instrument panel
Fig. 2855
Armrest
40-571
Fig. 2856
Table 543
Sys- P/N
tem
K003
K005
K010
K017 04216354
K044
K045 04199447
K046 04214103
K047 04210196
K048 04216645
K049 04213842
K050 04213842
K052 04210196
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2857
40-583
40-583
40-529
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-590
40-111
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
L016
M002 02959593
02959593
M014 04509411
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-590
Turbocharger
40-112
Characteristics/Notes
40-571
Fig. 2858
Fig. 2858
40-571
40-590
Wiring diagrams
T001
+30a
+30b
C001
GND
+30
A8
C1
+15 WOLP
+30 WOLP
50
13
14
+30
3A
15A
75
C003
15A
A1
B8
C8
BATTERY
N004
J006
15
+30
+30
B017
30A
D032
B2
T004
GND
C004
B
C1
D033
+15
4
30A
B016
Bb002
D009
3
C002
J006a
J006b
To AdBlue
B
C5
1
83
Bb014
30
30A
6 A3A
+15
64
Bf018
58
GND
+50 KEY
+50 KEY
GND
H002
+30 WOLP
GND
D1
GND
Bf016
Bm013
+30
C003
+30
+30
I006
O005
GND
+30
95
D011
94
30A
+30
M002
3 K3A
N007
M002a
+30
BATTERY
AUXILIARY
D0078770
Table 544
Sys- P/N
tem
B016
B017
Description
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-113
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
15A Fuse - Ignition
key (F1-A/16, +30)
15A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/18, +30)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Battery negative
terminal
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
C004
D009
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Wiring connector
D011
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
C001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-498
40-498
Fig. 2860
Fig. 2861
40-583
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2862
Fig. 2863
40-114
40-571
40-571
40-590
40-518
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D033
Wiring connector
H002
I006
Starter switch
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-583
Fig. 2864
Fig. 2865
40-571
40-571
83
15
75
Pos
Pin
50
30
86s
30
15
50
75
83
0
1
2
0.015.0485.4
J006
Battery disconnect
contactor
Battery disconnect
contactor
Battery disconnect
contactor
Fig. 2867
Fig. 2866
40-518
40-511
Fig. 2868
40-511
Fig. 2869
40-115
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M002 02959593
02959593
N004
N007
E.P.B. device
Starter motor +30
O005
T001
T004
40-116
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2870
Fig. 2870
40-571
40-583
40-518
40-511
40-590
40-571
40-511
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.3 - S003 - Preheating
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
GND
INSTRUMENT
58
73
+30
88
58
D031
3A
+30
B008
63
D011
C003
+30
M002a
30A
Bm013
M002
250A
B001
C003a
A010
INSTRUMENT
150A
FUSE PDU3 (INSTRUM. +30)
19
GND
12
INSTRUMENT
21
B020
3A
Bb004
+15
A
D5
+30
D009
J032
E002
D0078760
40-117
Wiring diagrams
Table 545
Sys- P/N
tem
A010 04258670
Description
Characteristics/Notes
B001
B008
Fuse (3A)
B020
Pre-heating relay
supply fuse (150A)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Cab ground
C003
Cab ground
D009
Wiring connector
Position
Wiring loom
40-589
40-514
Fig. 2872
Fig. 2873
40-589
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 2874
Fig. 2875
Fig. 2876
40-118
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D011
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
J032 04216031
Preheating relay
04216031
Preheating relay
04216031
M002 02959593
Preheating relay
Engine control unit
02959593
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-590
40-583
40-514
Fig. 2877
Fig. 2878
Fig. 2879
Fig. 2880
40-571
40-590
40-589
40-590
40-589
40-571
40-571
Fig. 2880
40-119
Wiring diagrams
40.3.4 - S004 - AdBlue
M002
59
48
15
47
62
26
41
92
37
61
80
GND
89
GND
82
GND
GND
19
+30
57
+30
70
14
58
C003
30A
Bm013
+30
3A
Bb004
+15
10
+30
M002a
D012
J010
B3
B4
A5
A4
A3
C2
C1
A1
C7
A2
B1
B2
B7
B6
D8
A7
A8
A6
B8
B5
87a
C3
87
86
85 30
87a
87
86
C002
D6
K033
N009
11
12
10
87a
87
86
85
30
J006a
J006b
3
I025
87a
87
86
85 30
J006
10A
30A
J007
40-120
C002
C002
To Start
J009
C002
B014
N008
B011
+30
15A
B009
C002
K035
30
85
86 87
J011
87a
85
30
J008
D0068550
Wiring diagrams
M002
59
48
15
47
62
26
41
92
37
61
80
GND
89
GND
82
GND
GND
19
58
C003
30A
Bm013
+30
3A
Bb004
+15
57
+30
70
14
+30
10
+30
M002a
D012
J010
B3
B4
A5
A4
A3
C2
C1
A1
C7
A2
B1
B2
B7
B6
D8
A7
A8
A6
B8
B5
87a
C3
87
86
85 30
87a
87
86
C002
D6
K033
N009
11
12
10
87a
87
86
85
30
10A
30A
J009
J006a
J006b
To Start
I025
C002
C002
C002
2
B014
N008
B011
+30
15A
B009
C002
K035
87a
87
86
85 30
30
J007
85
86 87
J011
87a
85
30
J008
D0068550
J006
Table 546
Sys- P/N
tem
B009
Description
Fuse (15A)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-121
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
B011
B014
Description
C002
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
I025
Battery disconnect
switch
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-518
Fig. 2882
Fig. 2883
Fig. 2884
Fig. 2885
Pos
Pin
40-571
40-518
40-571
40-518
0
1
2.7659.373.0
J006
40-122
Battery disconnect
contactor
Fig. 2886
40-518
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
J008
J009
J010
J011
K033 04904050
K035
Wiring loom
40-511
Battery disconnect
contactor
Fig. 2887
Battery disconnect
contactor
J007
Position
Fig. 2888
40-511
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
T (C)
Rs ()
Rs ()
UO (V)
-40
169,7
1,9
0,725
200,5
1,9
0,835
25
219,6
1,9
0,900
50
238,5
1,9
0,963
100
275,9
1,9
1,081
200
349,0
1,8
1,293
300
419,7
1,9
1,478
400
488,1
2,4
1.640
500
554,1
2,9
1,783
600
617,8
3,4
1,909
700
679,2
3,8
2,022
800
738,2
4,2
2,123
850
766,8
4,4
2,170
40-518
04904050
Fig. 2889
40-518
40-123
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
L013
M002 02959593
02959593
N008 04600620
N009 04600619
O006
AdBlue pump
AdBlue dispenser
AdBlue pick-up line
with resistance
O007
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
Fig. 2890
Fig. 2891
Fig. 2891
Fig. 2892
Fig. 2893
40-124
40-571
40-571
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
pos
K001
L007
A
C6
K021
freq
M001
A
D5
B
B8
B
A2
K014
B
A5
A
C7
K027
I007
K004
A
A6
B
D5
A
B8
K016
D009
D008
20A
GND
+30 ECU
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
HYDRAULIC SENSOR
EV DF
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
+15 HLHP
ASM SIGNAL
NO SW
NC SW
+5 HLHP
OIL TEMP.SENSOR
+5V HLHP
M005
D009
D009
Bm003
A
D5
D008
+30
C003
D031
TRANSMISSION
AdBlue
delivery
pipeline with resistance
GND
A
C4
D008
3A
7.5A
Bb005
7
6
12
3
10
14
13
5
12
21
17
74
76
43
18
2
4
6
1
3
5
8
33
63
64
71
39
31
53
9
10
72
E002
Position
Supply
D009
+15
+15
A
B5
D008
C002
C003a
+30 SGR
Characteristics/Notes
Signal
3
5A
Bf003
13
M001b
SUPPLY
Bb004
+30
Description
SIG.
1
5A
Bb015
D008
O008
GND
D041
+15
+30
15A
Bf001
D008
Sys- P/N
tem
SUPPLY
15
SIG.
To fig. 2/2
D008
5A
Bb017
A
B6
GND
+15
Wiring diagrams
Wiring loom
40-518
Fig. 2894
M003
A
D3
K028
D0068560
40-125
Wiring diagrams
M005
M003
+30 SGR
TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
HYDRAULIC SENSOR
EV DF
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
+15 HLHP
ASM SIGNAL
NO SW
NC SW
+5 HLHP
OIL TEMP.SENSOR
+5V HLHP
12
10
14
13
12
21
17
74
76
43
18
33
63
64
71
39
31
53
10
72
A
D3
D008
+30
C003
D031
C003a
B
A5
D008
A
C4
A
C6
B
B8
B
A2
A
C7
D009
D008
D008
D009
D008
3A
7.5A
+15
C002
+15
Bb005
Bb004
+30
5A
+15
Bb015
+30
Bm003
D009
5A
Bf003
D008
15A
Bf001
+15
5A
A
D5
A
B5
Bb017
A
B6
D009
20A
13
D008
E002
M001b
A
A6
B
D5
A
B8
freq
L007
K021
K014
40-126
1
0
t
V
K001
M001
GND
Supply
Signal
SUPPLY
SIG.
GND
pos
SUPPLY
2
SIG.
1
GND
15
D041
To fig. 2/2
A
D5
K027
I007
K004
K016
K028
D0068560
l
pos
K001
2
1
2
L007
M001
A
C6
A
D5
K021
3
freq
B
B8
B
A2
2
1
K014
A
C7
2
0
K027
1
4
3
I007
1
1
2
K004
A
A6
B
D5
A
B8
3
1
2
GND
A
C4
D009
D008
D008
+15
+15
3A
7.5A
Bb005
+30
C003
D031
D009
B
A5
K016
D009
D008
20A
Bm003
A
D5
Supply
D009
D008
C002
C003a
5A
Bf003
+30 SGR
TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
HYDRAULIC SENSOR
EV DF
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
+15 HLHP
ASM SIGNAL
NO SW
NC SW
+5 HLHP
OIL TEMP.SENSOR
+5V HLHP
M005
Signal
Bb004
+30
A
B5
SUPPLY
2
5A
Bb015
D008
7
6
12
3
10
14
13
5
12
21
17
74
76
43
18
2
4
6
1
3
5
8
33
63
64
71
39
31
53
9
10
72
E002
SIG.
D041
+15
+30
15A
Bf001
D008
13
M001b
GND
SUPPLY
15
SIG.
To fig. 2/2
D008
5A
Bb017
A
B6
GND
+15
Wiring diagrams
M003
A
D3
2
1
K028
D0068560
40-127
Wiring diagrams
H003a
H003
K003
K002
pos
NEUTRAL
REVERSE
TUMB WHEEL +5
10
11
+5V TRANSMITION
FRONT
12
13
18
10
M001a
M001
To fig. 1/2
D001
22
11
SIG.
3,9
GND COM
3,9
20
3,9
19
pos
SIG.
21
GND
18
SUPPLY
GND
SIG.
1 0 2
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
pos
M001c
D0068570
Table 547
Sys- P/N
tem
40-128
Description
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 2897
Fig. 2898
Fig. 2899
40-571
40-571
40-496
40-571
Fig. 2900
40-129
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D041
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
H003
40-130
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 2901
Fig. 2902
Fig. 2903
Fig. 2904
Fig. 2905
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-514
40-531
40-576
40-571
40-496
40-496
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
I007
Safety switch
K001
Clutch
pedal
pressed proximity
sensor
K002
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2906
Fig. 2907
40-571
40-571
Table 548
Sys- P/N
tem
K003
K004
K014
K016
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2909
40-571
Fig. 2910
40-583
40-583
40-131
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
K021
K027
K028 04416649
L007
M001
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-576
Steering
40-576
40-576
40-531
Fig. 2911
Fig. 2912
Fig. 2912
Fig. 2912
Fig. 2912
40-132
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M005
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2913
Fig. 2913
40-571
40-576
40-133
Wiring diagrams
40.3.6 - S005A - Transmission - Version with performance steering
M005
M003
+30 SGR
TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
HYDRAULIC SENSOR
EV DF
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
+30
+30
+30
ASM SIGNAL
NO SW
NC SW
+5 HLHP
OIL TEMP.SENSOR
+5V HLHP
12
10
14
13
12
21
17
74
76
43
18
33
63
64
71
39
31
53
10
72
A
D3
D008
B
A5
+30
C003
D031
C003a
B
D5
D008
A
C6
B
B8
B
A2
A
C7
A
B8
K016
D008
D008
D009
A
A6
A
C4
D008
D009
7.5A
3A
+15
C002
+15
Bb005
Bb004
+30
5A
+15
Bb015
+30
Bm003
D009
5A
Bf003
D008
15A
Bf001
+15
5A
A
D5
A
B5
Bb017
A
B6
D009
20A
13
D008
E002
M001b
1
0
K001
L007
K021
K014
K027
I007
40-134
M001
3
GND
Supply
Signal
2
freq
GND
Supply
1
P
Signal
SUPPLY
To ISO 11783
SIG.
GND
pos
SUPPLY
2
SIG.
1
GND
15
K028
K004
D041
To fig. 2/2
A
D5
K038
D0078750
l
pos
K001
L007
1
K021
3
freq
2
1
K014
A
C7
2
0
K027
1
4
3
M001
2
I007
1
2
3
1
4
5
V
GND
2
B
A2
B
D5
Supply
1
B
B8
K016
A
A6
Signal
2
A
C6
GND
A
C4
D008
+15
D009
D008
+15
3A
7.5A
Bb005
+30
C003
D031
D009
D009
D008
20A
Bm003
A
D5
Supply
D009
D008
C002
Bb004
5A
Bf003
+30 SGR
TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
HYDRAULIC SENSOR
EV DF
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
+30
+30
+30
ASM SIGNAL
NO SW
NC SW
+5 HLHP
OIL TEMP.SENSOR
+5V HLHP
M005
Signal
C003a
+30
A
B5
SUPPLY
2
5A
Bb015
D008
7
6
12
3
10
14
13
5
12
21
17
74
76
43
18
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
33
63
64
71
39
31
53
9
10
72
E002
SIG.
D041
+15
+30
15A
Bf001
D008
13
M001b
GND
SUPPLY
15
SIG.
To fig. 2/2
D008
5A
Bb017
A
B6
GND
+15
Wiring diagrams
M003
B
A5
A
D3
A
B8
3
2
A
D5
K004
K028
To ISO 11783
K038
V
D0078750
40-135
Wiring diagrams
H003a
H003
K003
K002
pos
NEUTRAL
REVERSE
TUMB WHEEL +5
10
11
+5V TRANSMITION
FRONT
12
13
18
10
M001a
M001
To fig. 1/2
D001
22
11
SIG.
3,9
GND COM
3,9
20
3,9
19
pos
SIG.
21
GND
18
SUPPLY
GND
SIG.
1 0 2
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
pos
M001c
D0068570
Table 549
Sys- P/N
tem
40-136
Description
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 2916
Fig. 2917
Fig. 2918
40-571
40-571
40-496
40-571
Fig. 2919
40-137
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D041
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
H003
40-138
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 2920
Fig. 2921
Fig. 2922
Fig. 2923
Fig. 2924
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-514
40-531
40-576
40-571
40-496
40-496
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
I007
Safety switch
K001
Clutch
pedal
pressed proximity
sensor
K002
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2925
Fig. 2926
40-571
40-571
Table 550
Sys- P/N
tem
K003
K004
K014
K016
K021
K027
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2928
40-571
Fig. 2929
40-583
40-540
40-576
40-576
40-139
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
K028 04416649
K038
L007
M001
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-576
Oil
temperature Resistance between pin 1 and pin
sensor
2:
at 25C 1000 15 ohms
at 100C 1696 35 ohms
at 150C 2211 80 Ohms
Steering angle sensor (Agrosky)
Differential
lock
control
solenoid
valve
40-540
40-531
Fig. 2930
Fig. 2931
Fig. 2931
Fig. 2931
Fig. 2931
40-140
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M005
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2932
Fig. 2932
40-571
40-576
Bb005
SIG.
pos
SUPPLY
GND
D037
+15
C002
7.5A
D009
+30
+30
20A
A
B8
+30
A
C3
+30
B
A5
Bm003
A
C4
GND
A
C6
31
C003
A
C5
53
GND
34
GND
70
HLHP
FRONT AXLE
POS.SENS.
75
SENSOR
GND HLHP
+5V HLHP
82
SENSOR
GND HLHP
EV LS F.A.
EV DOWN F.A.
83
SENSOR
GND HLHP
EV UP F.A.
M003
K019
D0068580
Wiring diagrams
Bb005
SIG.
pos
SUPPLY
GND
D037
+15
C002
7.5A
D009
+30
+30
20A
A
B8
+30
A
C3
+30
B
A5
Bm003
A
C4
GND
A
C6
31
C003
A
C5
53
GND
34
GND
70
HLHP
FRONT AXLE
POS.SENS.
75
SENSOR
GND HLHP
+5V HLHP
82
SENSOR
GND HLHP
EV LS F.A.
EV DOWN F.A.
83
SENSOR
GND HLHP
EV UP F.A.
M003
K019
D0068580
Table 551
Sys- P/N
tem
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2934
40-142
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
Cab ground
D009
Wiring connector
D037
Wiring connector
K019
L002
L003
L004
M003
M003
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2935
Fig. 2936
40-571
40-583
40-499
40-583
40-499
40-499
40-499
40-499
40-571
Fig. 2937
40-571
Fig. 2937
40-143
Wiring diagrams
40.3.8 - S007 - Instrument panel
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
30A
Bm013
C003
C002
3A
1
0
Level
Signal
GND
D+
SUPPLY
+30
B008
+30
A001a
D0068590
K012
K010
K013
M002
A001a - Alternator D+
D008 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.020.8658.4)
D008 (F) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.020.8664.4)
D009 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.020.8658.4)
D009 (F) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.021.0396.4)
D031 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.021.0396.4)
D031 (F) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.018.9845.4/10)
E002 - Instrument panel
H001 - Armrest
K010 - Fuel level sensor
K012 - Air filter clogging sensor
K013 - Engine coolant level sensor
M002 - Engine ECU
M003 - HLHP control unit
M003 - HLHP unit - USA version
40-144
20A
GND
Bm003
HLHP
C003
3A
Bb004
7.5A
SENSOR
GND HLHP
Bb005
SENSOR
GND HLHP
+5V HLHP
+30
31
+15
B
B3
53
+30
A
C2
+5V HLHP
+30
SENSOR
GND HLHP
58
+30
+30 ARMREST
36
C003a
B
B4
+15
B
B3
72
15A
57
+30
A
B6
18
D031
A
D5
+30 ARMREST
62
D009
D008
A
C5
Bf005
81
GND
12
+15
CUSTER
GND
26
GND
HENTER
25
GND
ESCAPE
GND
DECREMENT
+15
INSTRUMENT
23
16
10
GND
INCREMENT
24
15
DECREMENT
ESCAPE
14
INCREMENT
ENTER
13
ENGINE
PRESSURE
ENGINE
PRESSURE
13
12
COLLANT
LEVEL
GND
11
COLLANT
LEVEL
TANK
INDICATOR
21
M003
COLLANT
LEVEL
AIR FILTER
C003a
FUSE PDU3
H001
D+
E002
Wiring diagrams
Table 552
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
C002
Fuse (3A)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
15A Fuse - Armrest
(F1-B/5, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-576
Alternator D+
Cab ground
Fig. 2939
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2940
Fig. 2941
40-571
40-571
Fig. 2942
40-145
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
H001
Armrest
K010
K012
K013
40-146
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 2943
Fig. 2944
Fig. 2945
Fig. 2946
Fig. 2947
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M002 02959593
M003
HLHP unit
M003
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2948
Fig. 2949
40-571
40-571
Fig. 2949
40-147
Wiring diagrams
40.3.9 - S008 - Lights Version without front hitch
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
F024
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
87a
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D001
15A
Bf014
7.5A
Bf013
7.5A
Bf011
Bf010
10 11
+30
15A
Bf009
C003a
To fig. 2/2
D052
2
30
A
D8
5A
A
D7
D001
87 86 85
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
D009
D023
Bf007
To ISO 11783
+30
D026
To ISO 11783
To fig. 2/2
D013
85 30
D052
86
15A
87
C003a
87a
13
14
23
12
16
21
H002
D044
D003
P006
C002
D008
C003a
C002
To ISO 11783
D009
D034
D009
11
+15 INSTRUMENT
I009
3A
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
B008
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
1
GND
POSITION
10
+58
+15 WOLP
I008
2
7
+30 WOLP
D013
+30
+15
+30
D006
To fig. 2/2
C003
3
B
B3
A
A2
GND
A
A3
A
D5
+30 WOLP
C003a
5A
Bf012
+30
5A
Bf011
+15
C003a
10
D001
D013
+30
+30
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078300
40-148
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-149
Wiring diagrams
F020
17
C003a
C003a
12
15
A
D8
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
A
D7
D036
D006
B
A1
C002
C002
D009
A
B7
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
+15
To fig. 1/2
15A
12
Bb003
D026
D001
HORN
CONTROL
16
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
F003
D0078740
40-150
Wiring diagrams
Table 553
Sys- P/N
tem
B008
Bf011
Bf011
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-571
Fuse (3A)
15A Fuse - Windscreen wiper (F1A/3, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
15A Fuse - Lights
relay
protection
(F1-B/7, +30)
15A Fuse - Lights
relay
protection
(F1-B/9, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Left
hand sidelights (F1B/10, +30)
5A Fuse - Road
lights/Top lights relay protection (F1B/11, +30)
5A Fuse - Road
lights/Top lights relay protection (F1B/11, +30)
5A Fuse - Lights
(F1-B/12, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Right
hand sidelights (F1B/13, +30)
15A Fuse - Sidelights relay protection (F1-B/14, +30)
15A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/18, +30)
Engine ground
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 2952
40-151
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
D006
Wiring connector
Fig. 2953
Fig. 2954
Fig. 2955
Fig. 2956
Fig. 2957
Fig. 2958
40-152
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-571
40-524
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D006
Wiring connector
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-526
Fig. 2959
Fig. 2960
Fig. 2961
Fig. 2962
D023
Wiring connector
Fig. 2963
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-520
Fig. 2964
40-153
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D026
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-522
Wiring connector
Fig. 2965
Table 554
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D031
Wiring connector
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
D052
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
E004 01169304
Horn
40-154
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-514
Fig. 2966
Fig. 2967
Fig. 2968
Fig. 2969
40-583
40-507
40-529
40-583
40-500
40-576
40-496
40-520
40-571
40-529
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F003
RH sidelight
F005
LH sidelight
F007
F026 04414115
H002
RH high beam
headlight
RH low beam headlight
LH low beam headlight
LH high beam
headlight
Right hand rear
sidelight
Left hand rear sidelight
License plate light
Work light switch
I008
F008
F009
F010
F020
F024
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-526
Fig. 2970
Fig. 2971
40-524
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-522
40-520
40-496
40-571
Fig. 2972
40-571
0
1
2
Pos
Pin
10
10
0
1
2
2.7659.376.0
Fig. 2974
Fig. 2973
40-155
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I009
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
2.7659.377.0
P006
P015
40-156
Fig. 2975
Fig. 2976
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-507
40-500
Wiring diagrams
40.3.10 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh006
Jh001
F024
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D006
D003
D003
D001
D001
+30
D013
+30
3
13
14
23
12
16
21
P006
C002
D008
To fig. 2/2
D044
D003
3
11
C003a
C002
To ISO 11783
D009
D034
B008
D009
H002
I009
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
POSITION
10
+58
B
B3
A
A2
+15 WOLP
I008
A
A3
+30 WOLP
3A
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
To fig. 2/2
C003a
C003
3
GND
A
D5
+30 WOLP
3A
+30
+15
+30
D006
3
C003a
D013
D001
+15
5A
Bf012
5A
Bf011
+30
15A
Bf014
Bf011
+30
15A
Bf009
To fig. 2/2
C003a
10 11
To ISO 11783
10
30
To fig. 2/2
D052
To fig. 2/2
+30
87 86 85
7.5A
D009
D006
D052
C003a
A
D7
Bf007
15A
A
D8
To ISO 11783
To fig. 2/2
D026
D013
1
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
7.5A
87a
Bf013
Bf010
85 30
D023
86
5A
87
87a
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078310
Fig. 2977 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
F024
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D001
D001
3
13
14
23
12
16
21
P006
D044
To fig. 2/2
C002
D008
C003a
C002
D003
3
11
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078310
Fig. 2977 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-158
15A
Bf014
D013
To ISO 11783
D009
D034
B008
D009
H002
I009
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
POSITION
10
+58
B
B3
A
A2
+15 WOLP
I008
A
A3
+30 WOLP
3A
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
To fig. 2/2
C003
3
GND
A
D5
+30 WOLP
3A
+30
+15
+30
D006
3
C003a
+15
5A
Bf012
5A
Bf011
+30
C003a
D013
D001
+30
+30
+30
Bf011
7.5A
15A
Bf009
To fig. 2/2
C003a
10 11
To ISO 11783
10
30
To fig. 2/2
D052
To fig. 2/2
+30
87 86 85
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
D006
D003
D003
D009
D006
D052
C003a
A
D7
Bf007
15A
A
D8
To ISO 11783
To fig. 2/2
D026
D013
1
7.5A
87a
Bf013
Bf010
85 30
D023
86
5A
87
87a
Wiring diagrams
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
F024
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D001
D001
3
15A
Bf014
D013
13
14
23
12
16
21
P006
C002
D008
To fig. 2/2
D044
D003
3
11
C003a
C002
To ISO 11783
D009
D034
B008
D009
H002
I009
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
POSITION
10
+58
B
B3
A
A2
+15 WOLP
I008
A
A3
+30 WOLP
3A
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
To fig. 2/2
C003
3
GND
A
D5
+30 WOLP
3A
+30
+15
+30
D006
3
C003a
+15
5A
Bf012
5A
Bf011
+30
C003a
D013
D001
+30
+30
+30
Bf011
7.5A
15A
Bf009
To fig. 2/2
C003a
10 11
To ISO 11783
10
30
To fig. 2/2
D052
To fig. 2/2
+30
87 86 85
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
D006
D003
D003
D009
D006
D052
C003a
A
D7
Bf007
15A
A
D8
To ISO 11783
To fig. 2/2
D026
D013
1
7.5A
87a
Bf013
Bf010
85 30
D023
86
5A
87
87a
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078310
Fig. 2977 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
F024
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D001
D001
3
I009
13
14
23
12
16
21
P006
D044
To fig. 2/2
C002
D008
C003a
C002
D003
3
11
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078310
Fig. 2977 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
40-160
15A
Bf014
D013
To ISO 11783
D009
D034
B008
D009
H002
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
POSITION
10
+58
B
B3
A
A2
+15 WOLP
I008
A
A3
+30 WOLP
3A
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
To fig. 2/2
C003
3
GND
A
D5
+30 WOLP
3A
+30
+15
+30
D006
3
C003a
+15
5A
Bf012
5A
Bf011
+30
C003a
D013
D001
+30
+30
+30
Bf011
7.5A
15A
Bf009
To fig. 2/2
C003a
10 11
To ISO 11783
10
30
To fig. 2/2
D052
To fig. 2/2
+30
87 86 85
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
D006
D003
D003
D009
D006
D052
C003a
A
D7
Bf007
15A
A
D8
To ISO 11783
To fig. 2/2
D026
D013
1
7.5A
87a
Bf013
Bf010
85 30
D023
86
5A
87
87a
Wiring diagrams
F043
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D001
C003a
15
A
D7
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
D026
D036
16
To fig. 1/2
12
A
D8
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
D006
B
A1
C002
C002
D009
A
B7
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
+15
C003a
15A
12 17
Bb003
D006
D003
HORN
CONTROL
F044
F003
F020
D0069030
Fig. 2978 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
F043
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D001
C003a
15
A
D7
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
D026
D036
16
To fig. 1/2
12
A
D8
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
D006
B
A1
C002
C002
D009
A
B7
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
+15
C003a
15A
12 17
Bb003
D006
D003
HORN
CONTROL
F044
F003
F020
D0069030
Fig. 2978 - S009 - Lights Version with front hitch - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
40-162
Wiring diagrams
Table 555
Sys- P/N
tem
B008
Bf011
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fuse (3A)
Fig. 2979
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 2980
40-163
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
Fig. 2981
Fig. 2982
Fig. 2983
Fig. 2984
Fig. 2985
40-164
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-571
40-524
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D006
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Wiring connector
Fig. 2986
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
Fig. 2987
Fig. 2988
Fig. 2989
40-526
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
Fig. 2990
40-165
Wiring diagrams
Table 556
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
D052
Wiring connector
40-166
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-520
Fig. 2991
Fig. 2992
Fig. 2993
Fig. 2994
Fig. 2995
40-571
40-522
40-583
40-514
40-583
40-507
40-529
40-583
40-500
40-576
40-496
40-520
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
E002
Instrument panel
E004 01169304
F003
Horn
RH sidelight
F005
LH sidelight
F007
RH high beam
headlight
RH low beam headlight
LH low beam headlight
LH high beam
headlight
Right hand rear
sidelight
Left hand rear sidelight
License plate light
Left hand repeater
headlight
F008
F009
F010
F020
F024
F026 04414115
F043
F044
H002
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 2996
Fig. 2997
Fig. 2998
40-529
40-526
40-524
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-522
40-520
40-496
40-524
Fig. 2999
40-526
40-571
40-167
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I008
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Pos
Pin
10
10
0
1
2
Fig. 3001
2.7659.376.0
I009
Fig. 3000
40-571
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
Fig. 3003
2.7659.377.0
Fig. 3002
Table 557
Sys- P/N
tem
P006
P015
40-168
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-507
40-500
Wiring diagrams
40.3.11 - S010 - Turn indicators
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTR OL
DIRECTION
LEFT
TRAILER 2
TRAILER1
49A
49A
49A
49A
DIR. COM
49
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
11
10
12
D001
+15 INSTRUMENT
12
16
17
18
+15
D068
C003a
DIRECTION
RIGHT
E001
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
3A
GND
21
Bb004
FUSE PDU3
E002
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
Bm007
15A
Bb008
L
M004
3
TRAILER 1
49
D003
C003a
C003a
D034
D031
R
5
49a
6
L
7
R
2
30B(-)
1
+15
3
+30
4
49(+)
I001
+30
31
3A
B008
TRAILER 2
12
49A
GND
To iso 11783
12
C003a
D013
4
D006
D007
A
A4
C002
A
A5
D004
A
D5
D023
D026
D009
5
C003a
C003a
C002
D044
6
+30
B
B4
+15
B
D2
20A
D022
D008
P015
P006
F018
F022
F006
F004
D0078730
Wiring diagrams
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTR OL
DIRECTION
LEFT
TRAILER 2
TRAILER1
49A
49A
49A
49A
DIR. COM
49
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
11
10
12
D001
+15 INSTRUMENT
12
16
17
18
+15
D068
C003a
DIRECTION
RIGHT
E001
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
3A
GND
21
Bb004
FUSE PDU3
E002
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
P015
P006
F018
F022
F006
F004
D0078730
Bm007
15A
Bb008
2
40-170
3
TRAILER 1
C003a
49
D003
D006
C003a
D034
D031
R
M004
+30
31
3A
B008
TRAILER 2
12
49A
GND
To iso 11783
12
C003a
D013
4
D007
D004
A
A4
C002
A
A5
D023
D026
D009
5
A
D5
C003a
C003a
C002
D044
6
+30
B
B4
+15
B
D2
20A
D022
D008
5
49a
6
L
7
R
2
30B(-)
1
+15
I001
3
+30
4
49(+)
Wiring diagrams
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTR OL
DIRECTION
LEFT
TRAILER 2
TRAILER1
49A
49A
49A
49A
DIR. COM
49
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
11
10
12
D001
+15 INSTRUMENT
12
16
17
18
+15
D068
C003a
DIRECTION
RIGHT
E001
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
3A
GND
21
Bb004
FUSE PDU3
E002
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
Bm007
15A
Bb008
L
TRAILER 1
C003a
49
D003
M004
5
49a
6
L
7
R
2
30B(-)
1
+15
3
+30
4
49(+)
I001
D006
C003a
D034
D031
R
+30
31
3A
B008
TRAILER 2
12
49A
GND
To iso 11783
12
C003a
D013
4
D007
D004
A
A4
C002
A
A5
D023
D026
D009
5
A
D5
C003a
C003a
C002
D044
6
+30
B
B4
+15
B
D2
20A
D022
D008
P015
P006
F018
F022
F006
F004
D0078730
Wiring diagrams
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTR OL
DIRECTION
LEFT
TRAILER 2
TRAILER1
49A
49A
49A
49A
DIR. COM
49
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
11
10
12
D001
+15 INSTRUMENT
12
16
17
18
+15
D068
C003a
DIRECTION
RIGHT
E001
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
3A
GND
21
Bb004
FUSE PDU3
E002
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
P015
P006
F018
F022
F006
Bm007
15A
Bb008
2
40-172
F004
D0078730
3
TRAILER 1
C003a
49
D003
D006
C003a
D034
D031
R
M004
+30
31
3A
B008
TRAILER 2
12
49A
GND
To iso 11783
12
C003a
D013
4
D007
D004
A
A4
C002
A
A5
D023
D026
D009
5
A
D5
C003a
C003a
C002
D044
6
+30
B
B4
+15
B
D2
20A
D022
D008
5
49a
6
L
7
R
2
30B(-)
1
+15
I001
3
+30
4
49(+)
Wiring diagrams
Table 558
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
C002
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
15A Fuse - EU/USA
emergency lights
(F1-A/8, +15)
20A Fuse - EU/USA
emergency lights
(F2/7-10, +30)
Engine ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3005
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3006
Fig. 3007
Fig. 3008
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3009
40-173
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D003
Wiring connector
D004
Wiring connector
D004
Wiring connector
D006
Wiring connector
D006
Wiring connector
D007
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-524
Fig. 3010
Fig. 3011
Fig. 3012
Fig. 3013
Fig. 3014
Fig. 3015
40-174
40-571
40-524
40-571
40-526
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D007
Wiring connector
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D022
Configuration connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-526
Fig. 3016
Fig. 3017
Fig. 3018
Fig. 3019
Fig. 3020
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-175
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-520
Fig. 3021
Fig. 3022
40-571
40-522
40-583
40-514
Fig. 3023
Table 559
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D034
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
D068
Configuration connector
Instrument panel
E001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-507
Fig. 3024
40-571
Fig. 3025
40-176
40-500
40-576
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
E002
Instrument panel
F004
RH turn indicator
F006
LH turn indicator
F018
F022
I001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3026
Fig. 3027
Fig. 3028
40-526
40-524
40-522
40-520
40-571
0
30
49
Pin
15
1
30
3
49
4
49a
5
Pos
15
49a
b
30
3
4
L
6
R
7
0
1
2.7659.110.0
M004
P006
P015
Trailer socket
Front implement
power outlet socket
Fig. 3030
Fig. 3029
40-571
Fig. 3031
40-507
40-500
40-177
Wiring diagrams
40.3.12 - S011 - Work lights
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-178
+30
+58
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
19
23
21
+58
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
C005
C005
C005
15
10
C005
11
13
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
+30
+58
D009
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
19
23
+58
21
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-180
+30
+58
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
19
23
21
+58
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
+30
+58
D009
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
19
23
+58
21
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-182
+30
+58
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
19
23
21
+58
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
+30
+58
D009
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
19
23
+58
21
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
F034 - Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
F034 - Left hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
F035 - Right hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
F036 - Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
F036 - Right hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
F039 - Low left hand rear work light
F040 - Low right hand rear work light
H002 - Work light control
J002 - Left hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
J003 - Right hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
Jd001 - Hitch service light relay (R4/1)
40-183
Wiring diagrams
Jg002
P006
87a
87 86
15A
J002
30
87
To fig. 2/2
+30
F031
F029
F030
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
F025
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-184
+30
+58
D009
B
D4
A
D2
14
13
17
18
H002
7.5A
Bf010
+15
D009
19
23
21
+58
AUX TRAILER
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
GND
3A
Bb014
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
C003
D049
D058
D059
D058
D056
D055
D056
1
To fig. 2/2
D031
D004
D007
D031
10A
+30
15A
Bf018
C003a
C003a
D046
C005
C005
C005
C005
Bf017
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
4
C005
C005
C005
13
15
10
C005
11
D031
+30
+30
15A
Ba006
+30
C003
15A
D025
Ba005
To fig. 2/2
C003
20A
87a
To fig. 2/2
30
30
15A
86 85
86 85
B004
87
87
Bm008
87a
40A
2
87a
30
D031
D031
15A
Jg001
86 85
B003
85
+30
87
85 86
Jd001
86
To fig. 2/2
30
30
20A
Je001
86 85
Bc002
30
87
87a
B006
+30
C003a
B
D1
D026
86 85
87
D023
87
87a
J003
Jg003
D009
C002
Je002
30
85
Bf020
D034
D0078400
F012
F015
F014
F011
F028
F040
F039
F027
C003a
3
D028
D007
D004
3
To fig. 1/2
C003a
To fig. 1/2
C003a
1
D030
D036
17
To fig. 1/2
D026
3
D047
To fig. 1/2
C003a
D031
D023
C002
To fig. 1/2
C002
To fig. 1/2
D051
D031
C002
To fig. 1/2
D031
C002
D031
To fig. 1/2
Wiring diagrams
F037
F038
D0078200
F012
F015
F014
F011
F028
F040
F039
F027
C003a
3
D028
D007
D004
3
To fig. 1/2
C003a
To fig. 1/2
C003a
1
D030
D036
17
To fig. 1/2
D026
3
D047
To fig. 1/2
C003a
D031
D023
C002
To fig. 1/2
C002
To fig. 1/2
D051
D031
C002
To fig. 1/2
D031
C002
D031
To fig. 1/2
Wiring diagrams
F037
F038
D0078200
Table 560
Sys- P/N
tem
B003
B004
B006
40-186
Description
Fuse (40A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (15A)
15A Fuse - Rear
work light fuse
(F3/5)
15A Fuse - Rear
work light fuse
(F3/6)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
20A Fuse - Low
rear work light relay
protection (F4/2-5,
+30)
15A Fuse - Front
work lights (R6/1-5)
15A Fuse - Front
work lights (R6/4-8)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C005
D004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3034
Fig. 3035
Fig. 3036
40-571
40-571
40-580
40-571
Fig. 3037
40-187
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D004
Wiring connector
D007
Wiring connector
D007
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D024
Wiring connector
(yellow)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-524
Fig. 3038
Fig. 3039
Fig. 3040
Fig. 3041
Fig. 3042
Fig. 3043
40-188
40-571
40-526
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-580
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D025
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Wiring connector
(brown)
Fig. 3044
Table 561
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D026
Wiring connector
D028
Wiring connector
D028
Wiring connector
D030
Wiring connector
D030
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-522
Fig. 3045
Fig. 3046
Fig. 3047
40-505
40-503
40-526
40-504
40-502
40-524
40-583
40-514
Fig. 3048
40-189
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D046
Wiring connector
D047
Wiring connector
D049
Wiring connector
D051
Wiring connector
40-190
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-507
Fig. 3049
Fig. 3050
Fig. 3051
40-529
40-583
40-571
40-522
40-506
40-502
40-522
40-544
40-522
40-506
40-501
40-520
Wiring diagrams
Table 562
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D055
Wiring connector
D056
Wiring connector
D058
Wiring connector
D059
Wiring connector
F011
F012
F014
F015
F025
F027
F028
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-546
40-554
40-580
40-547
40-552
40-580
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-544
40-506
40-506
Table 563
Sys- P/N
tem
F029
F029
F030
F030
F031
F031
F032
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-546
40-554
40-546
40-554
40-547
40-552
40-547
40-191
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F032
F033
F033
F033
F033
F034
F034
F034
F034
F035
F035
F035
F035
F036
F036
F036
F036
F037
F037
40-192
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-552
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-504
40-502
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F037
F038
F038
F038
F039
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-504
40-505
40-503
40-505
40-502
Table 564
Sys- P/N
tem
F040
H002
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-501
J002
J003
P006
Characteristics/Notes
40-571
Fig. 3052
Fig. 3053
40-514
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-507
40-193
Wiring diagrams
40.3.13 - S012 - Semi-active cab suspension
53
A
A7
B
C5
B
C6
B
C4
B
C7
B
C2
B
C3
A
A6
GND
SEMSOR
DUMPER
GIGHT +
LINEAR
SENSOR RIGHT
DUMPER
RIGHT -
GND
SEMSOR
GND
SEMSOR
DUMPER
LEFT -
20A
+30
Bm003
C003
7.5A
+15
7.5A
2
R3
I012
O005
N006
2
GND
SEMSOR
LINEAR
SENSOR LEFT
DUMPER
LEFT +
10
R1
R2
C003a
Bf010
+58
D038
Bb005
D008
31
+30
22
+30
SENSOR
GND HLHP
23
+30
LINEAR
SENSOR LEFT
94
GND
DUMPER
RIGHT -
LINEAR
SENSOR RIGHT
78
GND
DUMPER
LEFT +
79
GND
DUMPER
RIGHT +
93
HLHP
DUMPER
LEFT -
71
SENSOR
GND HLHP
+5V HLHP
24
SENSOR
GND HLHP
SEMI ACTIVE
CABIN
M003
N005
D0068610
Table 565
Sys- P/N
tem
40-194
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D008
Wiring connector
D038
Wiring connector
I012
Semi-active
cab
control switch
M003
HLHP unit
Fig. 3055
Fig. 3056
Fig. 3057
Fig. 3058
40-571
40-571
40-576
40-549
40-576
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3059
40-195
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
N005
N006
O005
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3059
40-549
40-549
40-571
13
+30
+30
GND
+30
GND
+30
20A
GND
Bm003
C003
+15 HLH
7.5A
7.5A
+15
C003a
Bb005
+58
11
B
C1
D009
D016
B
A8
B
B8
B
C6
B
D7
B
C7
B
D8
A
B1
21
18
2
0
t
K018
K015
P005
D036
To fig. 2/2
Bf010
+30
3
To Webasto
7.5A
Bf002
7.5A
Ba003
+30
D008
1
To fig. 2/2
10
62
30A
Bc013
7.5A
Ba009
+15
+30
40A
To Webasto
C003a
Bc017
D073
D074
1
AC ENGAGEMENT
M003
D0078690
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
D074
D073
D016
D0078700
40-197
Wiring diagrams
Table 566
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
D008
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3062
Fig. 3063
Fig. 3064
40-198
40-571
40-571
40-576
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D016
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D073
Wiring connector
D074
K015
Wiring connector
Air
conditioning Compressor connector (female
pressure switch
connector): normally open contact
- with pressure increasing:
contact closed at max 2.4 bar
contact open at 28.5 1.5 bar
- with pressure decreasing:
contact closed at 19.5 1.5 bar
contact open at 1.2 0.3 Bar
External air temperature sensor
K018
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3065
Fig. 3066
Fig. 3067
Fig. 3068
40-556
40-571
40-529
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-529
40-199
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
P005
Air
conditioning
compressor
40-200
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3069
Fig. 3069
40-571
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.15 - S014 - Automatic air conditioning
13
+30
+30
GND
+30
GND
+30
20A
GND
Bm003
C003
+15 HLH
7.5A
7.5A
+15
C003a
Bb005
+58
11
B
C1
D009
D016
B
A8
B
B8
B
C6
B
D7
B
C7
B
D8
A
B1
To fig. 2/3
21
18
2
0
t
K018
D0078660
K015
P005
D036
Bf010
+30
3
To Webasto
7.5A
Bf002
7.5A
Ba003
+30
D008
1
To fig. 3/3
10
62
30A
Bc013
7.5A
Ba009
+15
+30
40A
To Webasto
Bc017
C003a
D073
D074
1
AC ENGAGEMENT
M003
40-201
Wiring diagrams
24
25
21
10
ATTUATOR
ATTUATOR
SENSOR SOLAR
SENSOR SOLAR
To fig. 1/3
+30KEY
GND
17
16
26
SW BINARY
18
+15KEY
15
+58 POSITION
6
EXTERNAL SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
Blue
22
EXTERNAL SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
To fig. 3/3
D016
ATTUATOR
K055
ATTUATOR
K056
23
25
21
16
18
22
10
14
17
15
24
Yellow
M015
D0078670
40-202
Wiring diagrams
D074
D073
D0078680
Table 567
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-203
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3073
Fig. 3074
Fig. 3075
Fig. 3076
40-204
40-571
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D016
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D073
Wiring connector
D074
K014
Wiring connector
Front axle speed
sensor
Air
conditioning Compressor connector (female
pressure switch
connector): normally open contact
- with pressure increasing:
contact closed at max 2.4 bar
contact open at 28.5 1.5 bar
- with pressure decreasing:
contact closed at 19.5 1.5 bar
contact open at 1.2 0.3 Bar
External air temperature sensor
Sunlight sensor
K015
K018
K055
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-556
40-571
Fig. 3077
Fig. 3078
Fig. 3079
40-529
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-529
40-556
Fig. 3080
40-205
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
K056
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M015
Air
conditioning
control unit (blue
connector)
Air
conditioning
compressor
P005
40-206
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-556
Fig. 3081
Fig. 3082
Fig. 3083
40-571
40-571
40-556
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.16 - S015 - +15 Positives
Jn001
Ja001
I006
0
30
87a
87 86 85
40A
+30
40A
Bf016
Bm017
30
1 2
83
15
15
75
50
78
50
+30
3A
Bm015
Bb020
30
15A
30
+30
87 86 85
C003
87a
5A
3A
7.5A
10A
15A
5A
7.5A
5A
3A
5A
5A
5A
7.5A
Ba010
Bb004
Bb005
Bb006
Bb007
Bb008
Bb009
Bb010
Bf012
Ba007
Ba008
Ba009
Be002
8C
C002
15A
Bb019
Bc003
B015
3A
Bb018
20A
15A
Bb016
D012
7.5A
15A
Bb015
B010
7.5A
Bb003
Bb013
10A
3A
7.5A
20A
Bb011
Bb012
B013
5A
15A
7.5A
Bb002
Bb014
15A
10A
Bb001
Bb017
87a
87 86 85
30
J012
D0078720
40-207
Wiring diagrams
Table 568
Sys- P/N
tem
B010
B013
B015
40-208
Description
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (20A)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
5A fuse - Fuse
(F3/8, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning fuse (F3/9,
+15)
15A Fuse - U.S.A.
trailer lights fuse
(F3/10, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO
11786
(F1-A/1,
+15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
15A Fuse - Windscreen wiper (F1A/3, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Pneumatic seat (F1-A/6,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Engine
(F1-A/7, +15)
15A Fuse - EU/USA
emergency lights
(F1-A/8, +15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Rear
view mirrors (F1A/11, +15)
10A Fuse - Rear
windscreen wiper
(F1-A/12, +15)
15A Fuse - Brake
lights
(F1-A/13,
+15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 569
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
D012
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-518
Fig. 3085
40-518
Fig. 3086
40-209
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D012
Wiring connector
I006
Starter switch
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3087
40-571
83
15
75
Pos
Pin
50
30
86s
30
15
50
75
83
0
1
2
0.015.0485.4
J012
40-210
Fig. 3088
Fig. 3089
40-518
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
250A
20A
40A
B016
30A
30A
3A
87a
Bm002
Bm001
20A
86 87
B021
87a
B008
Je001
Je002
B015
+30a
T001b
T001
T001a
+30b
GND
+30
C001
C002
J006a
J006b
4
86 87
20A
30A
B014
A001
3
85
To AdBlue
30
B003
D032
B+
B002
C003
B001
20A
Bm003
85
To working lights
20A
Bm007
20A
Bm008
20A
Bm013
Bm015
Bm009
20A
30A
40A
Bm017
40A
15A
Ba002
Bc001
Ba001
3A
20A
20A
Bc008
Bc002
20A
Bf001
Bc017
40A
30
D002
7.5A
Bf002
Bf003
5A
7.5A
Bf004
15A
Bf005
Bf006
5A
15A
Bf008
Bf009
Bf007
15A
15A
15A
Bf014
Bf011
5A
15A
Bf015
3A
Bf017
Bf016
15A
10A
Bf018
Bf019
5A
15A
Bf020
5A
15A
Bc013
30A
Ba004
BATTERY
D0078320
J006
A001 - Alternator B+
D002 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.020.8658.4)
D002 (F) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.018.9845.4/10)
D032 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.021.0396.4)
D032 (F) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.018.9992.4/10)
J006 - Battery disconnect contactor
J006a - Battery disconnect contactor
J006b - Battery disconnect contactor
Je001 - Relay for front work lights on cab roof (R6/1)
Je002 - Relay for rear work lights on cab roof (R6/2)
40-211
Wiring diagrams
Table 570
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
A001
Alternator B+
B001
Fuse (250A)
B002
B003
B008
Fuse (200A)
Fuse (40A)
Fuse (3A)
B014
B015
B016
B021
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (20A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
15A Fuse - Lights
fuse and power
outlet socket (F3/1,
+30)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
20A fuse - Webasto
(heater) (F4/1-4,
+30)
20A Fuse - Low
rear work light relay
protection (F4/2-5,
+30)
20A Fuse - Rear
defrost (F4/8-11)
30A fuse - Heating unit (F4/13-14,
+30)
40-212
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-589
40-512
40-514
Fig. 3091
Fig. 3092
Fig. 3093
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Bf011
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-213
Wiring diagrams
Table 571
Sys- P/N
tem
C001
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-498
40-498
Fig. 3094
40-214
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
Cab ground
D002
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
J006
Battery disconnect
contactor
Battery disconnect
contactor
Battery disconnect
contactor
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3095
Fig. 3096
Fig. 3097
40-571
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-511
Fig. 3098
Fig. 3099
40-511
40-571
40-571
40-215
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
T001
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-511
40-216
Characteristics/Notes
Fig. 3100
40-583
40-514
Wiring diagrams
40.3.18 - S017 - CAN BUS Line - Standard version
28
24
12
14
13
+15
+15
7.5A
C003
20A
+30
27
CAN-H AUX
15A
CAN-L AUX
Bf018
+15 HLHP
+30
GND
GND
GND
GND
3A
+30
CAN-L AUX
+30
49
Bb014
+30
50
H002
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L VEHIC
30
Bb005
CAN-H VEHIC
32
Bm003
CAN-L DISTR
CAN-H DISTR
O004
C003
M003
O003
To fig. 2/3
B
A3
C003a
5A
Ba004
Ba007
R002
CAN-L ENG.
CAN-H ENG.
GND
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
86
85
83
82
58
C003
D016
+30
To manual heating
C003a
+15
10A
Bb001
10
B2
C2
B8
C8
Ba002
3A
Bb004
CAN L
To fig. 2/3
+30
3A
C003a
+15
12
GND
11
+15
13
CAN H
D021
D014
14
To Webasto
CAN-H VEHIC.
C003a
CAN-L VEHIC.
+30
CAN-H DISTR.
7.5A
CAN-L DISTR.
Bf002
CAN-H VEHIC.
30A
CAN-L VEHIC.
Bm013
CAN-H ENG.
M002
CAN-L ENG.
F
N
+15
7.50A
+15
CAN-L AUTOG.
CAN-H AUTOG.
5A
Bb016
Bb002
CAN-H ISO
+15
CAN-L AUX
CAN-L ISO
CAN-H AUX
10
+30
B
A4
5A
A
D5
D078
A
C7
D009
B
C1
CAN RES
CAN-H VEHIC.
10
20
19
+30
CAN RES
+30 WOOD
+15 I
INSTUMENT
GND
FUSE PDU3
E002
GND
14
CAN-H AUX
15
CAN-L AUX
11
CAN-L VEHIC.
12
CAN-H VEHIC.
21
+15 CLUSTER
5
GND
M008
O002
E003
H001a
D0078530
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-218
Wiring diagrams
P012
12
B016
C3
C2
A8
C8
CAN-H
CAN-L
11
P013
D035
D032
C1
GND
C004 T004
-31
B8
A1
30A
B008
D031
4
C002
GND
CAN H 2
CAN L 2
10
+15 EPB
4
GND
3
CAN-H
2
CAN-L
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
5
3
30A
+30
B017
D033
3A
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
CAN-H
GND
CAN-L
SUPPLY
+30
P010
P007
30A
P011
+30
P008
D009
N004
13
14
17
18
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
+30 ECU
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
CAN L
VEICHLE
CAN H
VEICHLE
10
17
18
U
U
V
3A
Bb004
+15
C003a
+15
5A
Bb017
Bf001
7.5A
+30
5A
+15
Bb015
5A
16
17
10
15
16
A
B3
A
B2
A
B5
A
B6
12
13
+15
TRASMISSION
+30 SGR
CAN L
12
CAN H
11
D062
C002
13
GND
D014
D008
To fig. 1/3
+30
Bf003
C003a
+30
15A
Bf008
+30
20A
+15
3A
Bm009
Bb009
C003a
K039
14
R002
GND
CAN-H
M001c
CAN-L
SUPPLY
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
M001b
To fig. 1/3
GND
B
A3
+15 CLUSTER
B
A4
+15 TRANSMISSION
A
D5
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
B
C1
D090
A
C7
GND
C002
C002
P009
10
CAN L
ISOBUS
22
21
CAN H
VEICHLE
CAN H
ISOBUS
CAN L
VEICHLE
CAN L AUX
+30 MONITOR
+15 MONITOR
GND
24
GND
23
CAN H AUX
M005
E005a
D0078120
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
O001
16
10
18
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M014
O009
40-220
K034
3
GND
K036
4
SUPPLY
CAN-L
CAN-H
GND
CAN-H
SUPPLY
CAN-L
2
ECU
D0068760
Wiring diagrams
16
10
18
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M002a
O001
O009
K034
3
GND
K036
4
SUPPLY
M014
CAN-L
CAN-H
GND
CAN-H
SUPPLY
CAN-L
2
ECU
D0068760
Table 572
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
B010
B013
B016
B017
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3104
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-221
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
40-222
Description
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO
11786
(F1-A/1,
+15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Radar/
PTO/distributors
(F1-A/16, +15)
5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/17, +15)
7.5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/1, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning
system
fuse (F1/2, +30)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
15A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/18, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
20A Fuse - Steering
(F2/9-12, +30)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C004
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3105
Fig. 3106
Fig. 3107
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-223
Wiring diagrams
Table 573
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D011
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3108
Fig. 3109
Fig. 3110
Fig. 3111
Fig. 3112
40-224
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-590
40-518
40-571
40-559
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D014
Wiring connector
D016
Wiring connector
D021
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3113
Fig. 3114
Fig. 3115
Fig. 3116
Fig. 3117
40-556
40-571
40-535
40-571
40-583
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3118
40-225
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D035
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D078
Wiring connector
D090
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-516
40-583
Fig. 3119
Fig. 3120
Fig. 3121
Fig. 3122
Fig. 3123
40-226
40-559
40-542
40-571
40-583
40-570
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
E003
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Work Display
I-Monitor
Armrest
H002
Characteristics/Notes
Fig. 3124
Fig. 3125
Fig. 3126
40-542
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3127
40-227
Wiring diagrams
Table 574
Sys- P/N
tem
K034 04218185
K036 04218186
K039
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
M002 02959593
02959593
M003
Characteristics/Notes
HLHP unit
40-518
40-570
40-571
Fig. 3128
Fig. 3128
Fig. 3129
Fig. 3129
Fig. 3130
40-228
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
M005
M008
M014 04509411
N004
O001
O002
Turbocharger
E.P.B. device
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
O003
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3130
40-576
40-535
Fig. 3131
40-590
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3132
Fig. 3132
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3133
40-229
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
O004
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
R002
T004
40-230
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
O009
Characteristics/Notes
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
Fig. 3133
Fig. 3134
Fig. 3134
40-571
40-571
40-518
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-571
Fig. 3135
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.19 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system
28
24
12
14
13
+15
+15
7.5A
C003
20A
+30
27
CAN-H AUX
15A
CAN-L AUX
Bf018
+15 HLHP
+30
GND
GND
GND
GND
3A
+30
CAN-L AUX
+30
49
Bb014
+30
50
H002
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L VEHIC
30
Bb005
CAN-H VEHIC
32
Bm003
CAN-L DISTR
CAN-H DISTR
O004
C003
M003
O003
To fig. 2/3
B
A3
C003a
5A
Ba004
Ba007
R002
GND
+30
+30
+30
58
14
15
18
17
D016
+30
C003
C003a
+15
10A
Bb001
B2
C2
B8
C8
Ba002
3A
Bb004
CAN L
To fig. 2/3
+30
10
3A
C003a
+15
GND
12
+15
11
CAN H
13
Blue
M015
D021
D014
14
To Webasto
GND
82
+15KEY
GND
83
C003a
GND
85
GND
CAN-H ENG.
86
+30
CAN-L ENG.
7.5A
CAN-H VEHIC.
Bf002
CAN-L VEHIC.
+30KEY
CAN-H DISTR.
CAN-L DISTR.
CAN-H VEHIC.
30A
CAN-L VEHIC.
Bm013
CAN-H ENG.
M002
CAN-L ENG.
F
N
+15
7.50A
+15
CAN-L AUTOG.
CAN-H AUTOG.
5A
Bb016
Bb002
CAN-H ISO
+15
CAN-L AUX
CAN-L ISO
CAN-H AUX
10
+30
B
A4
5A
A
D5
D078
A
C7
D009
B
C1
O002
CAN RES
CAN-H VEHIC.
10
20
19
+30
CAN RES
+30 WOOD
+15 I
INSTUMENT
GND
FUSE PDU3
E002
GND
14
CAN-H AUX
15
CAN-L AUX
11
CAN-L VEHIC.
12
CAN-H VEHIC.
21
+15 CLUSTER
5
GND
M008
E003
H001a
D0078530
Fig. 3136 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system - System (1/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-232
Wiring diagrams
P012
12
B016
30A
D032
B008
C3
C2
A8
C8
CAN-L
CAN-H
GND
C1
11
P013
B8
A1
30A
C004 T004
-31
C002
GND
CAN H 2
D035
CAN L 2
10
+15 EPB
4
GND
3
CAN-H
2
CAN-L
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
5
3
+30
B017
D033
3A
GND
D031
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
CAN-H
GND
CAN-L
SUPPLY
+30
P010
P007
30A
P011
+30
P008
D009
N004
13
14
17
18
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
+30 ECU
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
CAN L
VEICHLE
CAN H
VEICHLE
10
17
18
U
U
V
3A
Bb004
+15
C003a
+15
5A
Bb017
Bf001
7.5A
+30
5A
+15
Bb015
5A
16
17
10
15
16
A
B3
A
B2
A
B5
A
B6
12
13
+15
TRASMISSION
+30 SGR
CAN L
12
CAN H
11
D062
C002
13
GND
D014
D008
To fig. 1/3
+30
Bf003
C003a
+30
15A
Bf008
+30
20A
+15
3A
Bm009
Bb009
C003a
K039
14
R002
GND
CAN-H
M001c
CAN-L
SUPPLY
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
M001b
To fig. 1/3
GND
B
A3
+15 CLUSTER
B
A4
+15 TRANSMISSION
A
D5
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
B
C1
D090
A
C7
GND
C002
C002
P009
10
CAN L
ISOBUS
22
21
CAN H
VEICHLE
CAN H
ISOBUS
CAN L
VEICHLE
CAN L AUX
+30 MONITOR
+15 MONITOR
GND
24
GND
23
CAN H AUX
M005
E005a
D0078120
Fig. 3137 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system - System (2/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
O001
16
10
18
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M014
O009
K034
3
GND
K036
4
SUPPLY
CAN-L
CAN-H
GND
CAN-H
SUPPLY
CAN-L
2
ECU
D0068760
Fig. 3138 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system - System (3/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-234
Wiring diagrams
16
10
18
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M002a
O001
O009
K034
3
GND
K036
4
SUPPLY
M014
CAN-L
CAN-H
GND
CAN-H
SUPPLY
CAN-L
2
ECU
D0068760
Fig. 3138 - S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system - System (3/3)
l
l
l
l
Table 575
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
B010
B013
B016
B017
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3139
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-235
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
40-236
Description
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO
11786
(F1-A/1,
+15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Radar/
PTO/distributors
(F1-A/16, +15)
5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/17, +15)
7.5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/1, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning
system
fuse (F1/2, +30)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
15A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/18, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
20A Fuse - Steering
(F2/9-12, +30)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C004
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3140
Fig. 3141
Fig. 3142
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-237
Wiring diagrams
Table 576
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D011
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3143
Fig. 3144
Fig. 3145
Fig. 3146
Fig. 3147
40-238
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-590
40-518
40-571
40-559
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D014
Wiring connector
D016
Wiring connector
D021
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3148
Fig. 3149
Fig. 3150
Fig. 3151
Fig. 3152
40-556
40-571
40-535
40-571
40-583
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3153
40-239
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D035
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D078
Wiring connector
D090
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
E003
Work Display
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-516
40-583
Fig. 3154
Fig. 3155
Fig. 3156
Fig. 3157
Fig. 3158
40-240
40-559
40-542
40-571
40-583
40-570
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
I-Monitor
Fig. 3159
Table 577
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
H002
K034 04218185
K036 04218186
K039
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Armrest
Fig. 3160
Fig. 3161
40-571
40-518
40-518
40-570
40-571
Fig. 3162
40-241
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M002 02959593
02959593
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M005
40-242
Characteristics/Notes
Fig. 3162
Fig. 3163
Fig. 3163
Fig. 3164
Fig. 3164
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M008
M014 04509411
N004
O001
Turbocharger
E.P.B. device
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
O002
O003
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-535
Fig. 3165
40-590
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3166
Fig. 3166
Fig. 3167
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3167
40-243
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O004
Description
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
R002
T004
40-244
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
O009
Characteristics/Notes
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
Fig. 3168
Fig. 3168
40-571
40-518
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-571
Fig. 3169
40-583
Wiring diagrams
+30
D014
3A
15A
CAN-l
Bf008
CAN-H
Bb009
H007
120 ohm
C003a
O013c
+15
40.3.20 - S017B - Visual guidance Can Bus line - Version without ISO11783
17
18
14
13
15
16
D060
10
17
10
23
24
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
21
22
CAN-L
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
M009
E005a
O013b
3
CAN-H
O013
D062
16
CAN-H AUX
D071
N012
120 ohm
O012
D0078550
Fig. 3170 - Visual guidance Can Bus line - Version without ISO11783 - System
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
+30
D014
3A
15A
CAN-l
Bf008
CAN-H
Bb009
H007
120 ohm
C003a
O013c
+15
Wiring diagrams
17
18
14
13
15
16
D060
10
D071
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-L
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
M009
E005a
O013b
3
CAN-H
O013
D062
16
N012
120 ohm
O012
D0078550
Fig. 3170 - Visual guidance Can Bus line - Version without ISO11783 - System
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-246
Wiring diagrams
Table 578
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3171
Fig. 3172
Fig. 3173
Fig. 3174
40-559
40-571
40-559
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3175
40-247
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D071
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-559
Fig. 3176
Fig. 3177
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
M009
AGROSKY Antenna
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
N012
Fig. 3178
Fig. 3179
40-565
40-561
40-563
40-542
40-559
40-565
40-559
Fig. 3180
40-248
40-542
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O012
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-559
O013
Characteristics/Notes
Not used
CAN line termination connector
Fig. 3181
Fig. 3181
Fig. 3182
40-559
40-559
40-561
40-561
40-249
Wiring diagrams
40.3.21 - S018 - CAN BUS Line - Version with ISO 11783
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
CAN-L AUX
CAN-H AUX
49
27
28
10
14
12
13
7.5A
15A
+30
Bf018
C003
+15
C003a
+30
3A
Bb014
5A
Ba007
CAN-L DISTR.
CAN-H DISTR.
CAN-L VEHIC.
CAN-H VEHIC.
CAN-L ENG.
CAN-H ENG.
GND
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
86
85
83
82
58
D016
+30
C003
To Webasto
CAN-H VEHIC.
C003a
CAN-L VEHIC.
+30
CAN-H ENG.
7.5A
CAN-L ENG.
Bf002
CAN-H AUTOG.
30A
CAN-L AUTOG.
Bm013
CAN-L ISO
M002
CAN-H ISO
R002
CAN-L AUX
+15
+15
7.50A
5A
Bb016
Bb002
24
B
A3
CAN-H AUX
+15
Ba004
B
A4
5A
A
D5
D009
A
C7
H002
D078
B
C1
O004
+15
C003
+30
Bm003
O003
Bb005
+30
50
20A
30
CAN-H VEHIC
CAN-L DISTR
32
CAN-L VEHIC
CAN-H DISTR
M003
12
10
C003a
10A
CAN RES
CAN RES
CAN-H VEHIC.
Ba002
3A
10
20
O002
19
+30
+15 I
INSTUMENT
+30 WOOD
FUSE PDU3
E002
GND
14
GND
15
CAN-H AUX
11
CAN-L AUX
12
CAN-L VEHIC.
21
CAN-H VEHIC.
5
GND
Bb004
+15 CLUSTER
To fig. 2/3
+30
11
3A
13
+15
14
C003a
D014
D021
Bb001
+15
E003
H001a
D0078610
Fig. 3183 - CAN BUS line - Version with ISO 11783 - System (1/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-250
Wiring diagrams
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
+30
GND
4
50
9
81
28
27
30
32
84
D064
J013
CAN H ISOBUS
FRONT
CAN L ISOBUS
FRONT
120 ohm
M011
R004
O015
FRONT RELAY
COIL
CAN H AUTOG.
CAN L AUTOG.
CAN1 L
CAN1 H
+ ANT
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
J014
87a
A8
D3
D8
C003a
Bb009
To fig. 1/3
D2
A6
A3
C8
D064
A2
To fig. 3/3
D014
D1
D064
A1
D064
A7
15A
Bf008
To fig. 3/3
+30
86 87
20A
85
Bm009
30
To fig. 3/3
87a
+15
86 87
3A
85
+30
30
To fig.3/3
A5
16
15
14
13
11
12
10
17
18
D015
To fig. 3/3
D013
D069
64
8
47
10
D062
To fig. 3/3
15
16
17
O012
4
3
4
5
H007
N012
120 ohm
O013
77
92
M003
D060
D086
120 ohm
13
D062a
P021
D062
D062a
13
D063
14
+ MONITOR (HLHP2)
D069a
2
4
7
10
D086a
D0078780
O014
Fig. 3184 - CAN BUS line - Version with ISO 11783 - System (2/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
GND
GND
GND
+ ANT
CAN1 H
CAN1 L
CAN L AUTOG.
CAN H AUTOG.
FRONT RELAY
COIL
+30
+30
GND
+30
+30
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
CAN L VEHICLE
4
50
9
81
28
27
30
32
84
D064
J013
CAN H ISOBUS
FRONT
CAN L ISOBUS
FRONT
120 ohm
M011
R004
O015
J014
87a
A8
D3
D8
C003a
Bb009
To fig. 1/3
D2
A6
A3
C8
D064
A2
To fig. 3/3
D014
D1
D064
A1
D064
A7
15A
Bf008
To fig. 3/3
+30
86 87
20A
85
Bm009
30
To fig. 3/3
87a
+15
86 87
3A
85
+30
30
To fig.3/3
A5
16
15
14
13
11
12
10
17
18
D015
To fig. 3/3
D013
D069
64
8
47
D062
To fig. 3/3
15
16
17
D060
D086
2
4
7
D086a
4
D0078780
O014
Fig. 3184 - CAN BUS line - Version with ISO 11783 - System (2/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-252
4
3
4
5
120 ohm
13
O012
10
D062a
P021
D062
10
D062a
13
D063
14
H007
N012
120 ohm
O013
77
92
+ MONITOR (HLHP2)
D069a
M003
Wiring diagrams
GND
GND
GND
+ ANT
CAN1 H
CAN1 L
CAN L AUTOG.
CAN H AUTOG.
FRONT RELAY
COIL
+30
+30
GND
+30
+30
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
CAN L VEHICLE
4
50
9
81
28
27
30
32
84
D064
J013
CAN H ISOBUS
FRONT
CAN L ISOBUS
FRONT
120 ohm
M011
R004
O015
J014
87a
A8
D3
D8
C003a
Bb009
To fig. 1/3
D2
A6
A3
C8
D064
A2
To fig. 3/3
D014
D1
D064
A1
D064
A7
15A
Bf008
To fig. 3/3
+30
86 87
20A
85
Bm009
30
To fig. 3/3
87a
+15
86 87
3A
85
+30
30
To fig.3/3
A5
16
15
14
13
11
12
10
17
18
D015
To fig. 3/3
D013
D069
64
8
47
10
D062
To fig. 3/3
15
16
17
O012
4
3
4
5
H007
N012
120 ohm
O013
77
92
M003
D060
D086
120 ohm
13
D062a
P021
D062
D062a
13
D063
14
+ MONITOR (HLHP2)
D069a
2
4
7
10
D086a
D0078780
O014
Fig. 3184 - CAN BUS line - Version with ISO 11783 - System (2/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-253
Wiring diagrams
M002a
O001
M011
J020
J021
J022
J023
16
10
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
98
77
83
79
77
29
30
85
86 87
30
87a
85
86 87
30
87a
85
86
87
30
87a
D012
D011
11
18
85
86
87
87a
D089
C003
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
120 ohm
1D
6C
5C
D063
To fig. 2/3
To Can bus standard
B3
B5
B4
B2
D064
1
CAN-L
3
GND
CAN-H
D095
120 ohm
ECU
K037
O018
M013a
M014
M001b
A5
30
85
86 87
+15 CLUSTER
A3
GND
A2
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
A6
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
D2
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
D3
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
D8
+15 TRANSMISSION
A8
+30 ECU
D1
GND
A1
R002
CAN L
VEICHLE
D064
A7
M001c
CAN H
VEICHLE
J016
To fig. 2/3
13
14
10
17
18
87a
17
Fig. 3185 - CAN BUS line - Version with ISO 11783 - System (3/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-254
C003a
3A
+15
Bb004
+30
+15
5A
7.5A
Bb017
Bf001
Bb015
5A
A
B3
A
B2
A
B5
A
B6
P023
18
To fig. 2/3
To fig. 2/3
+15
+30
P024
D008
D014
+30
5A
Bf003
50A
C003a
250A
C002
120 ohm
D067
B001
B019
D015
D0078620
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 579
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
Fuse (250A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO
11786
(F1-A/1,
+15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3186
40-512
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-255
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Radar/
PTO/distributors
(F1-A/16, +15)
5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/17, +15)
7.5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/1, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning
system
fuse (F1/2, +30)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
15A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/18, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
20A Fuse - Steering
(F2/9-12, +30)
30A Fuse - Engine
(F2/13-14, +30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-512
Fig. 3187
Fig. 3188
40-256
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D011
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Fig. 3189
Fig. 3190
Fig. 3191
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-590
40-257
Wiring diagrams
Table 580
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
Fig. 3192
Fig. 3193
Fig. 3194
Fig. 3195
Fig. 3196
Fig. 3197
40-258
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D015
Wiring connector
D015
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
D016
Wiring connector
D021
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3198
Fig. 3199
Fig. 3199
Fig. 3200
Fig. 3201
40-537
40-571
40-556
40-571
40-535
40-571
40-537
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3202
40-259
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
Fig. 3203
Fig. 3204
Fig. 3205
Fig. 3206
Fig. 3207
Fig. 3208
40-260
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D069
D071
D078
D086
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-537
40-565
40-571
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Fig. 3209
Fig. 3210
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3210
40-261
Wiring diagrams
Table 581
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D089
D095
E002
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Instrument panel
E003
Work Display
Armrest
H002
H007
Monitor controls
J013
CAN-L CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
CAN-H CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
J014
40-262
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-512
40-571
Fig. 3211
Fig. 3212
Fig. 3213
Fig. 3214
Fig. 3215
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
J016
J020
J021
J022
J023
K037
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
ISOBUS
relay
(30A)
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Steering wheel an- Pin 1: CAN-L signal
Pin 2: 9 - 32V power feed
gle sensor
M002 02959593
02959593
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-540
Pin 3: ground
Pin 4: CAN-H signal
40-571
Fig. 3217
Fig. 3217
Fig. 3218
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3218
40-263
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M011
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power
steering
(grey connector)
M014 04509411
N012
Turbocharger
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3219
Fig. 3219
Fig. 3220
Fig. 3221
Fig. 3222
40-264
40-571
40-537
40-540
40-590
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Table 582
Sys- P/N
tem
O001
O002
Description
O004
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
O003
Characteristics/Notes
40-571
Fig. 3223
Fig. 3223
Fig. 3224
Fig. 3224
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3225
40-265
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
O012
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
O013
O013
O014
Diode connector
Fig. 3225
Fig. 3226
Fig. 3226
Fig. 3227
Fig. 3227
Fig. 3228
40-266
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
O015
O018
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Diode board
P021
P023
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Fig. 3228
Fig. 3229
Fig. 3230
Fig. 3230
Fig. 3231
40-537
40-540
40-540
40-537
40-510
40-267
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P024
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R002
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
Fig. 3232
Fig. 3233
Fig. 3234
40-268
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
40.3.22 - S018A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
P021
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L Autog.
CAN-H Autog.
CAN-L Vehicle
CAN-H Vehicle
27
28
30
32
49
50
J013
1
17
16
87a
87
86 85
30
11
12
A3
A2
10
To fig. 2/2
D014
D062
D062
D063
7
To fig. 2/2
P023
D015
To fig. 2/2
To fig. 2/2
15
16
D064
D062
D014
O015
14
17
120 ohm
13
10
C003
D067
18
D060
D064
D014
D069
D069a
CAN-L ISOBUS
M011
To fig. 2/2
P024
4
CAN-l
CAN-H
O013
D2
D3
30
85
86 87
87a
120 ohm
O012
H007
N012
R004
J014
D0078570
Fig. 3235 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-270
Wiring diagrams
O013c
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
10
+30
15A
D014
3A
D060
Bb009
C003a
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
+15
O013b
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-L
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
D071
To fig. 1/2
D062
CAN-H
16
1
M009
E005a
D0078560
Fig. 3236 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
O013c
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
10
+30
15A
D014
3A
D060
Bb009
C003a
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
+15
O013b
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-L
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
D071
To fig. 1/2
16
2
D062
CAN-H
M009
E005a
D0078560
Fig. 3236 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
Table 583
Sys- P/N
tem
40-272
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D015
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
Fig. 3237
Fig. 3238
Fig. 3239
Fig. 3240
Fig. 3241
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3242
40-273
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
40-274
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
Fig. 3243
Fig. 3244
Fig. 3245
Fig. 3246
Fig. 3247
Fig. 3248
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D069
D071
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-537
40-565
40-561
40-563
40-542
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
J013
CAN-L CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
CAN-H CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
J014
Fig. 3249
Fig. 3250
40-537
40-537
40-537
Table 584
Sys- P/N
tem
M009
M011
N012
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-565
AGROSKY Antenna
ISO 11783 control
unit
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
40-537
Fig. 3251
40-537
Fig. 3252
40-275
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O012
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
O013
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
CAN line termination connector
O015
P021
Fig. 3253
Fig. 3253
Fig. 3254
Fig. 3254
Fig. 3255
Fig. 3256
40-276
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-561
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
P023
P024
R004
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
40-512
Fig. 3257
40-537
Fig. 3258
40-277
Wiring diagrams
40.3.23 - S018B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
P021
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L Autog.
CAN-H Autog.
CAN-L Vehicle
CAN-H Vehicle
27
28
30
32
49
50
J013
1
17
16
87a
87
86 85
30
11
12
A3
A2
10
To fig. 2/2
D014
D062
D062
D063
7
To fig. 2/2
P023
D015
To fig. 2/2
To fig. 2/2
15
16
D064
D062
D014
O015
14
17
120 ohm
13
10
C003
D067
18
D060
D064
D014
D069
D069a
CAN-L ISOBUS
M011
To fig. 2/2
P024
4
CAN-l
CAN-H
O013
D2
D3
30
85
86 87
87a
120 ohm
O012
H007
N012
R004
J014
D0078570
Fig. 3259 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-278
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-279
Wiring diagrams
O013c
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
10
+30
15A
D014
3A
D060
Bb009
C003a
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
+15
O013b
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
CAN-H ISOBUS
D062
CAN-H ISOBUS
16
1
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
D071
To fig. 1/2
M009a
E005a
D0078580
Fig. 3260 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-280
Wiring diagrams
O013c
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
10
+30
15A
D014
3A
D060
Bb009
C003a
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
+15
O013b
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
CAN-H ISOBUS
D062
CAN-H ISOBUS
16
1
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
D071
To fig. 1/2
M009a
E005a
D0078580
Fig. 3260 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
Table 585
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-281
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D015
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-282
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-563
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
40-283
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D069
D071
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-537
40-565
40-561
40-563
40-542
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
J013
CAN-L CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
CAN-H CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
J014
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-537
40-537
40-537
Table 586
Sys- P/N
tem
M009
M011
N012
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-565
AGROSKY Antenna
ISO 11783 control
unit
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
40-537
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-284
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O012
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
O013
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring connector
CAN line termination connector
O015
P021
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-561
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3260
40-285
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
P023
P024
R004
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
40-512
Fig. 3260
Fig. 3260
40-286
40-537
Wiring diagrams
40.3.24 - S018C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
P021
CAN-H Autog.
30
32
J013
5
49
0
17
16
87a
87
86 85
30
11
12
A3
A2
10
To fig. 2/2
D014
P023
4
To fig. 2/2
5
1
16
D064
D062
D014
O015
14
17
120 ohm
13
10
To fig. 2/2
To fig. 2/2
D015
D062
D062
D063
7
C003
D067
18
D060
D064
D014
D069
D069a
CAN-L Autog.
28
CAN-H Vehicle
CAN-H ISOBUS
27
CAN-L Vehicle
CAN-L ISOBUS
M011
To fig. 2/2
P024
45
CAN-l
CAN-H
O013
D2
D3
30
85
86 87
87a
120 ohm
O012
H007
N012
R004
J014
D0078600
Fig. 3261 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-288
Wiring diagrams
M013a
O013c
K037
O018
120 ohm
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
1
+30
+15
10
15A
3A
C003a
Bb009
D014
D063
D060
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
O013b
To fig. 1/2
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
CAN-H ISOBUS
D062
CAN-H ISOBUS
16
1
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
D071
To fig. 1/2
M009a
E005a
D0078590
Fig. 3262 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
M013a
O013c
K037
O018
120 ohm
120 ohm
To fig. 1/2
1
+30
+15
10
15A
3A
C003a
Bb009
D014
D063
D060
To fig. 1/2
Bf008
O013b
To fig. 1/2
16
15
17
10
21
22
23
24
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
GND
GND
+15 MONITOR
+30 MONITOR
CAN-H ISOBUS
D062
CAN-H ISOBUS
16
1
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
D071
To fig. 1/2
M009a
E005a
D0078590
Fig. 3262 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
Table 587
Sys- P/N
tem
40-290
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D015
Wiring connector
D015
Wiring connector
Fig. 3263
Fig. 3264
Fig. 3265
Fig. 3266
Fig. 3267
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Fig. 3268
40-291
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-561
40-563
40-537
Fig. 3269
Fig. 3270
Fig. 3271
Fig. 3272
Fig. 3273
Fig. 3274
40-292
40-542
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D064
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D071
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3275
Fig. 3276
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
J013
CAN-L CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
CAN-H CANBUS
ISO11783 configuration relay
J014
Fig. 3277
Fig. 3278
40-510
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-558
40-561
40-563
40-558
40-542
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-293
Wiring diagrams
Table 588
Sys- P/N
tem
K037
M011
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-540
AGROSKY Antenna
ISO 11783 control
unit
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power
steering
(grey connector)
N012
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
O012
Pin 3: ground
Pin 4: CAN-H signal
40-558
40-537
Fig. 3280
Fig. 3281
Fig. 3282
Fig. 3283
Fig. 3283
40-294
40-540
40-537
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O013
O015
O018
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Wiring connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
P021
P023
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Fig. 3284
40-561
40-561
40-537
Fig. 3285
Fig. 3286
Fig. 3286
Fig. 3287
40-540
40-540
40-537
40-510
40-295
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P024
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
Fig. 3288
Fig. 3289
40-296
40-537
Wiring diagrams
40.3.25 - S019 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor
M003
+30
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
CAN-L AUX
CAN-H AUX
30
50
49
27
28
H002
7.5A
O004
+15
+30
C003
20A
Bb005
CAN-L VEHIC
32
Bm003
CAN-H VEHIC
CAN-L DISTR
CAN-H DISTR
O003
24
14
12
13
To fig. 2/3
1
CAN-L VEHIC.
CAN-H VEHIC.
CAN-L ENG.
CAN-H ENG.
GND
GND
GND
GND
+30
+30
+30
86
85
83
82
58
C003
15A
3A
Bf018
5
D016
+30
C003a
+15
10A
Bb001
B2
C2
B8
C8
Ba002
Bb004
CAN L
To fig. 2/3
+30
3A
C003a
+15
3A
10
GND
+15
14
CAN H
D021
D014
To Webasto
CAN-H DISTR.
C003a
CAN-L DISTR.
+30
CAN-H VEHIC.
7.5A
CAN-L VEHIC.
Bf002
CAN-H ENG.
30A
CAN-L ENG.
Bm013
CAN-L AUX
D014a
C003
Bb014
M002
R002
13
+30
+30
+15
+15
C003a
Ba007
+15
CAN-L AUX
+15
7.50A
5A
Bb016
Bb002
5A
B
A3
Ba004
B
A4
5A
A
D5
D009
A
C7
D078
10
B
C1
CAN RES
CAN-H VEHIC.
10
20
19
+30
CAN RES
+30 WOOD
+15 I
INSTUMENT
GND
FUSE PDU3
E002
GND
14
CAN-H AUX
15
CAN-L AUX
11
CAN-L VEHIC.
12
CAN-H VEHIC.
21
+15 CLUSTER
5
GND
M008
O002
E003
H001a
D0078640
Fig. 3290 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor - System (1/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-298
Wiring diagrams
P012
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
A8
C8
B8
A1
30A
+30
C004 T004
10
-31
CAN-H
11
12
D035
GND
2
CAN-L
SUPPLY
C002
5
1
P013
B016
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
D032
30A
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
D033
3A
B017
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
B008
D031
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
+30
P010
P007
30A
P011
+30
P008
B
C1
A
C7
A
D5
B
A4
C3
C2
CAN L 2
CAN H 2
GND
C1
+15 EPB
D009
C002
C002
P009
B
A3
N004
D090
To fig. 2/3
GND
+30 ECU
+15 TRANSMISSION
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
CAN H
TRANSMISSION
CAN L
TRANSMISSION
R002
CAN L
VEICHLE
1
SUPPLY
2
GND
3
CAN-H
CAN-L
M001c
CAN H
VEICHLE
M001b
13
14
10
17
18
17
18
+15 CLUSTER
GND
U
V
U
3A
Bb004
+15
C003a
+15
+30
7.5A
Bb017
Bf001
5A
5A
5A
Bb015
+15
A
B3
A
B2
A
B5
A
B6
12
13
+30 SGR
+15
TRASMISSION
10
CAN L
CAN H
14
C002
13
GND
D014a
D014
D008
To fig. 1/3
+30
C003a
Bf003
K039
120 ohm
D077
M005
D0078370
Fig. 3291 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor - System (2/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
O001
16
10
18
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M014
O009
Fig. 3292 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor - System (3/3)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-300
K034
3
GND
2
CAN-L
K036
4
SUPPLY
ECU
CAN-H
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-L
CAN-H
D0078650
Wiring diagrams
16
10
18
CAN-H2
CAN-H ENG
98
77
6C
5C
15A
C002
B013
+15
+15
10A
1D
B010
11
D012
D011
C003
CAN-L2
CAN-H ENG
M002a
O001
M014
O009
K034
3
GND
2
CAN-L
K036
4
SUPPLY
ECU
CAN-H
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-L
CAN-H
D0078650
Fig. 3292 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor - System (3/3)
l
l
Table 589
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
B010
B013
B016
B017
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
Characteristics /Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3293
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-301
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C002
Description
Characteristics /Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3294
40-302
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
C004
Characteristics /Notes
D008
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
Fig. 3295
Fig. 3296
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3297
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3298
40-303
Wiring diagrams
Table 590
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D011
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D012
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D016
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D021
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
40-304
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-590
40-518
Fig. 3299
Fig. 3300
Fig. 3301
Fig. 3302
Fig. 3303
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-556
40-571
40-535
40-571
40-583
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D035
Wiring connector
D077
D078
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
D090
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
E003
Work Display
Armrest
H002
K034 04218185
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-516
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3304
Fig. 3305
Fig. 3306
Fig. 3307
Fig. 3308
40-583
40-570
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-518
40-305
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
K036 04218186
K039
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-570
Table 591
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
M002 02959593
02959593
M003
Characteristics/Notes
HLHP unit
Fig. 3309
Fig. 3309
Fig. 3310
Fig. 3310
Fig. 3311
40-306
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
M005
M008
M014 04509411
N004
O001
O002
O003
Turbocharger
E.P.B. device
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3311
40-576
40-535
Fig. 3312
40-590
40-583
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3313
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3314
40-571
40-307
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O004
O009
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
R002
T004
40-308
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
Fig. 3315
40-571
40-518
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-571
Fig. 3316
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.26 - S020 - PTO
10
L006
7.5A
D043
B
A6
A
D2
B
A7
A
A6
10
11
13
14
EV PTO 1400
EV PTO 540E
EV PTO 1000N
+15 TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
Bb016
D043
+15
C002
C002
C003a
C003a
19
58
80
89
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
PTO SELECTION
FRONT PTO EV
EXTERNAL PTO
+15 HLHP
I019
M003
C002
D009
D009
D008
A
C7
A
D4
2
freq
3
SUPPLY
SIG.
GND
10
Bf003
Bb015
+15
C003a
D026
1
+30
A
D7
C003a
10
D008
D008
7.5A
Bf010
+15
7.5A
Bb005
D023
D045
C002
20A
B
A4
+58
C002
C003
+30
Bm003
D008
D045
A
D3
L010
D040
+30
D023
L011
5A
freq
SIG.
L009
I024
GND
SUPPLY
I010
K030
5A
L014
K009
M001b
D0068670
Wiring diagrams
freq
10
L006
7.5A
D043
C002
C002
C003a
C003a
B
A6
A
D2
B
A7
A
A6
10
11
13
14
EV PTO 540E
EV PTO 1000N
+15 TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
D043
EV PTO 1400
7.5A
Bb016
19
58
80
89
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
PTO SELECTION
FRONT PTO EV
EXTERNAL PTO
+15 HLHP
I019
C002
D009
D009
D008
3
SUPPLY
A
C7
A
D4
SIG.
GND
Bf003
Bb015
+15
C003a
D026
1
+30
A
D7
10
C003a
10
D008
D008
+15
+15
7.5A
Bb005
D023
D045
C002
20A
B
A4
+58
C002
Bf010
D008
D045
C003
+30
Bm003
L010
D040
+30
D023
A
D3
L011
GND
SIG.
L009
I024
5A
SUPPLY
I010
K030
5A
L014
freq
K009
M001b
M003
D0068670
Table 592
Sys- P/N
tem
40-310
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D008
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3318
Fig. 3319
Fig. 3320
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3321
40-311
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D040
Wiring connector
D043
Wiring connector
D045
Wiring connector
I010
PTO
switch
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3322
Fig. 3323
Fig. 3324
Fig. 3325
selector
Fig. 3326
40-312
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-522
40-531
40-576
40-531
40-576
40-588
40-576
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I019
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-522
0
1
3
2
1
Pos
Pin
3
270 Ohm
220 Ohm
2.7659.350.0
I024
Fig. 3327
40-520
0
1
3
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
3
270 Ohm
220 Ohm
2.7659.350.0
Fig. 3327
Table 593
Sys- P/N
tem
K009 04438352
K030
L006
L009
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-576
40-531
Fig. 3328
40-531
Fig. 3329
40-313
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
L010
L011
L014
M003
HLHP unit
M003
40-314
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-531
Fig. 3330
Fig. 3331
40-531
40-588
40-571
Fig. 3332
Fig. 3333
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
40.3.27 - S021 - Front and rear hitches
K025
D026
D023
I013
1
I018
I023
I022
0
SIG.
GND RADAR
I017
SUPPLY
pos
GND
SUPPLY
SIG.
GND
SIG.
pos
GND
SUPPLY
L008
K023
SIG.
RADAR SIGNAL
K029
SUPPLY
+15 RADAR
K008
GND
L001
M006
A
D3
B
A6
D009
3
53
20
26
70
31
35
37
38
59
71
51
60
73
42
29
41
GND
EV UP-
RADAR SIGNAL
+5V HLHP
CONFORT PK UP
+5 HLHP
EV UP+
CONFORT PK DOW
EV DOWN+
+15 HLHP
EXTERNAL UP
EV DOWN-
DW
A
A2
GND
B
B2
GND
B
B6
+30
A
A7
M003
+58
D023
D023
D008
7.5A
D026
9
+30
A
B8
A
D4
+30
B
B5
Bb005
D044
2
B
B1
C003a
A
B8
D008
D009
D008
A
A4
7.5A
A
A5
Bf010
B
A5
D009
A
B4
D008
A
C8
D008
A
A6
D008
D009
D008
C003
C002
20A
Bm003
+30
+15
Bb016
D044
D008
+15
I014
7.5A
C002
10
I011
D0068680
Wiring diagrams
D026
D023
GND RADAR
I013
1
I018
I023
I022
0
pos
SIG.
RADAR SIGNAL
I017
SUPPLY
GND
SUPPLY
SIG.
p
GND
pos
SIG.
SUPPLY
L008
K023
GND
+15 RADAR
K025
SIG.
K029
SUPPLY
K008
GND
L001
M006
A
D3
B
A6
D009
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
53
20
26
70
31
35
37
38
59
71
51
60
73
42
29
41
EV UP-
RADAR SIGNAL
+5V HLHP
CONFORT PK UP
+5 HLHP
EV UP+
CONFORT PK DOW
EV DOWN+
+15 HLHP
EXTERNAL UP
EV DOWN-
DW
40-316
+58
D023
D023
D026
D008
7.5A
Bb005
D044
GND
A
A2
GND
B
B2
GND
B
B6
+30
A
A7
+30
A
B8
A
D4
+30
B
B5
M003
B
B1
C003a
A
B8
D008
D009
D008
A
A4
7.5A
A
A5
Bf010
B
A5
D009
A
B4
D008
A
C8
D008
A
A6
D008
D009
D008
C003
C002
20A
Bm003
+30
+15
Bb016
D044
D008
+15
I014
7.5A
C002
10
I011
D0068680
Wiring diagrams
Table 594
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D008
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3335
Fig. 3336
Fig. 3337
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3338
40-317
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
I011
I013
Characteristics/Notes
Position
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3339
Fig. 3340
Fig. 3341
Fig. 3342
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
Fig. 3343
40-318
Wiring loom
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-522
40-500
40-576
40-571
40-500
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I014
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-500
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
I017
RH rear hitch
DOWN button (on
mudguard)
Fig. 3344
40-522
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
I018
RH rear hitch UP
button (on mudguard)
Fig. 3344
1
40-522
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
I022
LH rear hitch
DOWN button (on
mudguard)
Fig. 3344
40-520
0
1
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.347.0
I023
LH rear hitch UP
button (on mudguard)
Fig. 3344
1
40-520
2
1
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.348.0
Fig. 3344
40-319
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
K008
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
Table 595
Sys- P/N
tem
K023 04438667
K025
K029
L001 04451764
L008 04451764
M003
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-576
M003
M006
Radar
40-320
Characteristics/Notes
40-576
40-576
40-583
40-576
40-571
Fig. 3345
Pin 1 = ground
Pin 2 = pulse signal (100 pulses/
metre)
Pin 3 = power 12 V
With the radar powered on, the
voltage at pin 2 should change
when a hand is passed in front of
the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24125
MHz 75 MHz
Fig. 3345
40-571
40-576
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
M006
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Radar
Pin 1 = ground
Pin 2 = pulse signal (100 pulses/
metre)
Pin 3 = power 12 V
With the radar powered on, the
voltage at pin 2 should change
when a hand is passed in front of
the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24300
MHz 75 MHz
Wiring loom
40-576
Jh002
30
54
M001b
A
A6
20A
+30
Bm003
C003
7.5A
Bb005
+15
+15
+15
Be002
B
C8
12
A
B1
A
A8
C002
P006
M001c
D092
D091
A
C3
BRAKE SENSOR
14
+50 ECU
13
D034
A
C1
D008
M001a
10
GND
14
+15 TRANSMISSION
BRAKE SWITCH RH
13
+BRAKE SWITCH
D009
C002
C003a
C003a
+30
86 85
WARNING
LAMP
87
HLHP
87a
+30
+30
C003a
11
5A
Bf003
+15
5A
Bb015
30A
Bb013
B021
D031
D026
D013
15A
D023
C003a
D009
To ISO 11783
GND
SIG.
SUPPLY
+30
M003
+30
F023
GND
F019
GND
K022
GND
I003
30A
I004
P027
D0078350
Wiring diagrams
Jh002
87
86 85
30
54
M001b
A
A6
A
B1
P006
M001c
A
A8
D092
A
P027
D0078350
40-322
20A
+30
+15
Be002
B
C8
12
C002
Bm003
C003
7.5A
+15
Bb005
+30
D091
A
C3
BRAKE SENSOR
14
+50 ECU
13
D034
A
C1
D008
M001a
10
GND
14
+15 TRANSMISSION
BRAKE SWITCH RH
13
+BRAKE SWITCH
D009
C002
C003a
C003a
+30
87a
WARNING
LAMP
30A
+30
C003a
11
5A
Bf003
+15
5A
Bb015
Bb013
To ISO 11783
B021
D026
D013
HLHP
D031
15A
+15
D023
C003a
D009
GND
SIG.
SUPPLY
+30
M003
+30
F023
GND
F019
GND
K022
GND
I003
30A
I004
Wiring diagrams
Jh002
87
86 85
30
54
M001b
A
A6
20A
+30
Bm003
C003
7.5A
+15
Bb005
+15
+30
Be002
B
C8
12
A
B1
A
A8
C002
P006
M001c
D092
D091
A
C3
BRAKE SENSOR
14
+50 ECU
13
D034
A
C1
D008
M001a
10
GND
14
+15 TRANSMISSION
BRAKE SWITCH RH
13
+BRAKE SWITCH
D009
C002
C003a
C003a
+30
87a
WARNING
LAMP
30A
+30
C003a
11
5A
Bf003
+15
5A
Bb015
Bb013
To ISO 11783
B021
D026
D013
HLHP
D031
15A
+15
D023
C003a
D009
GND
SIG.
SUPPLY
+30
M003
+30
F023
GND
F019
GND
K022
GND
I003
30A
I004
P027
D0078350
40-323
Wiring diagrams
E003
+30
+30 WOOD
C002
+15
C004
+30
30A
B016
C002
+15
5A
Bb002
+30
B017
B
C1
D033
D033
D009
D009
D009
B
C3
D032
30A
C003
20A
Bm003
A
B5
3A
A
C8
Ba002
A
B2
P
1
+30
B
B7
GND
A
C1
C003a
B
C2
C003a
B
D6
+15 CLUSTER
12
3A
11
GND
EPB LED
12
Bb004
SMART SW
13
+30
Bf005
14
D009
15
GND
+30 ARMREST
18
GND
+5V HLHP
17
+30 ARMREST
15A
16
K007
0
K006
+15 CLUSTER
H001
B
C4
B4
C1
A8
A5
C6
B1
B3
A4
42
A1
B6
C8
B8
C7
SMART SW
SPB LED
30 (MAIN BATTERY-30A)
GND
PRESS. BRAKE SW
84
GND
72
GND
53
GND -31
+30
40
+15 EPB
+30
31
16
+5V HLHP
+30
T004
1
M003
40-324
N004
GND
BATTERY
AUXILIARY
D0078360
+30
Wiring diagrams
Table 596
Sys- P/N
tem
B016
B017
B021
Description
C002
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
15A Fuse - Brake
lights
(F1-A/13,
+15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
15A fuse - ABS
trailer socket (R6/26, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - Armrest
(F1-B/5, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3348
40-571
Fig. 3349
40-325
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C004
D008
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Fig. 3350
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3351
Fig. 3352
Fig. 3353
Fig. 3354
40-326
40-583
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-520
Fig. 3355
Fig. 3356
40-571
40-522
40-583
40-514
Fig. 3357
Table 597
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3358
40-518
40-583
Fig. 3359
40-327
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D034
Wiring connector
D091
Wiring connector
D091
Wiring connector
D092
Wiring connector
D092
Wiring connector
E003
Work Display
F019
40-328
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-507
Fig. 3360
Fig. 3361
Fig. 3362
Fig. 3363
Fig. 3364
Fig. 3365
40-583
40-586
40-583
40-586
40-571
40-522
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F023
H001
I003
I004
K006
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-520
40-571
Fig. 3366
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-329
Wiring diagrams
Table 598
Sys- P/N
tem
K007
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
K022
M003
HLHP unit
40-576
40-571
Fig. 3370
Fig. 3370
Fig. 3370
Fig. 3371
40-330
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
N004
P006
P027
E.P.B. device
Trailer socket
Trailer socket
T004
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3371
Fig. 3372
40-583
40-509
40-586
40-583
40-331
Wiring diagrams
40.3.29 - S023 - Hydraulic trailer braking
E002
TRAILER LIGHT (HYDR)
+15 INSTRUMENT
+30 WOOD
+30
+15 CLUSTER
GND
GND
TRAILER INDICATOR
10
12
21
18
Jg004
87
87a
86 85
30
D009
GND
E003
C002
D008
20A
Bc003
C003a
+15
D009
D008
+30
+15
B
B2
B
D1
B
D5
C004
D039
+15
B017
5A
Bb002
D039
30A
B016
C002
+30
3A
B
D3
+30
30A
D033
D032
B
C1
D033
D009
B
C8
B008
D008
C003a
3A
Ba002
D031
3A
C003a
Bb004
A
D5
C8
B8
K026
C1
K032
A8
+15 EPB
A2
GND -31
A1
30 (MAIN BATTERY-30A)
T004
2
GND
+30
L012 L017
D0078280
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-332
BATTERY
AUXILIARY
N004
Wiring diagrams
E002
TRAILER LIGHT (HYDR)
+15 INSTRUMENT
+30 WOOD
+30
+15 CLUSTER
GND
GND
TRAILER INDICATOR
10
12
21
18
Jg004
87
87a
86 85
30
D009
GND
E003
C002
D008
20A
Bc003
C003a
+15
D009
D008
+30
+15
B
B2
B
D1
B
D5
C004
D039
+15
B017
5A
Bb002
D039
30A
B016
C002
+30
3A
B
D3
+30
30A
D033
D032
B
C1
D033
D009
B
C8
B008
D008
C003a
3A
Ba002
D031
3A
C003a
Bb004
A
D5
C1
C8
B8
A8
K026
A2
+15 EPB
K032
A1
GND -31
30 (MAIN BATTERY-30A)
T004
2
GND
+30
BATTERY
AUXILIARY
L012 L017
N004
D0078280
40-333
Wiring diagrams
Table 599
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
B016
B017
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
20A Fuse - Seat/
brakes
(F4/3-6,
+15)
Engine ground
C002
Cab ground
C004
D008
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3374
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3375
Fig. 3376
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3377
40-334
40-518
40-518
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
D039
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3378
Fig. 3379
Fig. 3380
Fig. 3381
Fig. 3382
40-583
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
40-533
40-576
40-571
Fig. 3383
40-335
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
E003
Work Display
K026
Fig. 3384
40-571
40-576
Table 600
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
K032
L012
Trailer
parking
brake control solenoid valve
L017
EPB
solenoid
valve
E.P.B. device
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
N004
T004
40-336
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-533
Fig. 3385
Fig. 3386
40-533
40-576
40-583
40-583
Wiring diagrams
40.3.30 - S024 - Hydraulic distributors
12
11
P007
P010
+30
2
0
1
1
2
0
1
1
20A
+30
Bm003
2
0
I021
I015
I016
P012
GND
CAN-H
4
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
CAN-H
P011
SUPPLY
GND
2
CAN-L
1
SUPPLY
CAN-H
P008
CAN-L
GND
CAN-L
SUPPLY
P013
1
1
I020
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
SUPPLY
CAN-L
C003
7.5A
+15
Bb005
D035
11
2
0
P009
D026
D023
D009
C002
A
C7
10
+30
11
+30
GND
HLHP
GND
EXT. DISTR.
12
GND
EXT. DISTR.
13
7.5A
Bb016
+15
M003
D0078630
Wiring diagrams
+30
+30
11
+30
GND
HLHP
GND
EXT. DISTR.
12
GND
EXT. DISTR.
13
D009
C002
A
C7
D035
12
11
P011
P007
P010
1
1
2
0
1
1
20A
+30
2
0
I021
I015
I016
P012
GND
CAN-H
4
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
CAN-H
SUPPLY
GND
2
CAN-L
1
SUPPLY
CAN-H
P008
CAN-L
GND
CAN-L
SUPPLY
2
0
P013
1
1
I020
SUPPLY
GND
CAN-H
CAN-L
SUPPLY
11
2
0
P009
10
Bm003
C003
7.5A
D026
D023
+15
Bb005
7.5A
Bb016
+15
M003
D0078630
Table 601
Sys- P/N
tem
40-338
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
D009
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3388
Fig. 3389
Fig. 3390
Fig. 3391
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-522
Fig. 3392
40-339
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D035
Wiring connector
I015
RH
distributor
DOWN button (on
mudguard)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-516
40-583
Fig. 3393
Pos
Pin
40-522
0
1
2.7659.337.0
I016
Fig. 3394
RH distributor UP
button (on mudguard)
Pos
Pin
40-522
0
1
2.7659.337.0
I020
Fig. 3394
LH
distributor
DOWN button (on
mudguard)
Pos
Pin
40-520
0
1
2.7659.337.0
I021
Fig. 3394
LH distributor UP
button (on mudguard)
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.337.0
Fig. 3394
40-340
40-520
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
Utility distributor 1
Utility distributor 2
Utility distributor 3
Utility distributor 4
Utility distributor 5
Utility distributor 6
Utility distributor 7
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3395
Fig. 3395
40-571
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-516
40-341
Wiring diagrams
40.3.31 - S025 - Windscreen wipers
N011
FRONT WIPER
CONTROL
M
-31
N010
53
D059
2
53
12
C002
15A
Bb003
C003a
+15
7.5A
+58
D009
D075
+15
10A
Bf010
Bb012
C003a
B
A7
B
B1
86
31
85
T
1
I
87a
53S
87
15
N019 N018
Jn002
N003
N002
D0078270
40-342
30
53M
R7
13
D024
C005
D001
D025
C005
53a
-31b
C005
I027
M
-31
53a
-31b
FRONT WWSHER
PUMP CONTROL
14
15
16
Wiring diagrams
N011
FRONT WIPER
CONTROL
M
-31
N010
53
D059
2
53
12
13
14
15
16
D024
C005
D001
D025
C005
53a
C002
Bb003
C003a
+15
7.5A
+58
D009
D075
+15
10A
Bf010
Bb012
C003a
15A
-31b
C005
I027
M
-31
53a
-31b
FRONT WWSHER
PUMP CONTROL
B
A7
B
B1
86
31
85
T
1
I
87a
53S
87
15
30
53M
R7
N019 N018
Jn002
N003
N002
D0078270
Table 602
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-343
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
C005
D001
D009
Wiring connector
D024
Wiring connector
(yellow)
40-583
Fig. 3397
Fig. 3398
Fig. 3399
Fig. 3400
Fig. 3401
40-344
40-571
40-580
40-496
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-580
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D025
Wiring connector
(brown)
D059
Wiring connector
D075
Wiring connector
I027
N002 04414105
N003 04414105
N010 04413192
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3402
Fig. 3403
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-571
40-579
40-580
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-580
40-345
Wiring diagrams
Table 603
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
N011
Windscreen wiper
motor
N018 04414105
N019 04414105
Rear windscreen
washer pump
Position
Wiring loom
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-579
Fig. 3404
40-579
Fig. 3405
P016
1
P002
1
16 12
13
12
14
10
15
11
+58
C005
D024
D025
D024
C005
5
15
3
0
P026
40-346
87
+15
5A
+30
5A
Bb018
Bf006
D025
D094
2
65
P001
LIGHT BAR
P017
D025
P028
M003
16
10
I031
D0078290
Wiring diagrams
P016
1
P002
1
16 12
13
12
14
10
15
11
+58
C005
D024
D025
D024
C005
5
87
+15
5A
+30
5A
Bb018
Bf006
D025
D094
2
65
P001
LIGHT BAR
P017
15
3
0
P026
D025
P028
M003
16
10
I031
D0078290
Table 604
Sys- P/N
tem
C005
D024
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
5A Fuse - Radio
(F1-A/18, +15)
5A Fuse - Radio
(F1-B/6, +30)
Cab ground (roof)
Wiring connector
(yellow)
40-571
40-580
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3407
40-347
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
D025
Wiring connector
(brown)
D094
Wiring connector
I031
M003
M003
P001
LH front loudspeaker
P002
RH front
speaker
loud-
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3408
Fig. 3409
Fig. 3410
Fig. 3410
Fig. 3411
Fig. 3412
40-348
40-580
40-580
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
P016
Description
P026
RH rear loudspeaker
LH rear loudspeaker
Radio
P028
Electric aerial
P017
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-580
40-580
40-580
Fig. 3413
40-580
40-349
Wiring diagrams
40.3.33 - S027 - Accessories
P014
20
22
23
87a
87
86 85
E007
30
E006
+15 ISO
14
I002
+30 DIN 2
10
Jg006
SERVICE LIGHT
+58
BEACON
CAB LIGHT SW
13
DOOR SW
GND
+15 WOLP
+30 WOLP
15
I028
F001
D024
AMBIENT LIGHT
+30 WOLP
H002
D008
7.5A
Bb019
20A
+15
LIGHT BAR
53
31
14
N013
P004
5A
16
P003
2
19
2
1
10
15
8
7
1
F013 F016
D079
+58
C005
+15
+30
C002
11
D024
G004
20A
Bm003
C003
D024
G007
70
D025
Bb018
D025
9
6
C003a
+30
20A
Bm001
+15
7.5A
Bb019
C003a
C003a
10
G006
Bm002
+30
+30
65
+30
87
+30
+5V HLHP
GND
GND
D009
2
-
C002
C005
GND
D036
1
+
A
A8
+30
15A
Ba001
C003a
+15
Bc003
20A
C005
D024
D024
5A
Ba008
+15
+30
3A
Bf015
-
A
D1
A
A1
A
A1
C005
C003a
+30
C003a
To ISO 11783
M003
11
1
+
D057
D054
15A
Bf004
D013
D025
To fig. 2/3
C003a
11
D076
C005
+58
C003a
7.5A
Bf010
3A
+15
D024
Bb014
C003
12
2
0
I031
D0078250
40-350
Wiring diagrams
P014
20
22
23
87a
87
86 85
E007
30
E006
+15 ISO
14
I002
+30 DIN 2
10
Jg006
SERVICE LIGHT
+58
BEACON
CAB LIGHT SW
13
DOOR SW
GND
+15 WOLP
+30 WOLP
15
I028
F001
D024
AMBIENT LIGHT
+30 WOLP
H002
D008
7.5A
Bb019
20A
+15
LIGHT BAR
53
31
14
N013
P004
5A
16
P003
2
19
2
1
10
15
8
7
1
F013 F016
D079
+58
C005
+15
+30
C002
11
D024
G004
20A
Bm003
C003
D024
G007
70
D025
Bb018
D025
9
6
C003a
+30
20A
Bm001
+15
7.5A
Bb019
C003a
C003a
10
G006
Bm002
+30
+30
65
+30
87
+30
+5V HLHP
GND
GND
D009
2
-
C002
C005
GND
D036
1
+
A
A8
+30
15A
Ba001
C003a
+15
Bc003
20A
C005
D024
D024
5A
Ba008
+15
+30
3A
Bf015
-
A
D1
A
A1
A
A1
C005
C003a
+30
C003a
To ISO 11783
M003
11
1
+
D057
D054
15A
Bf004
D013
D025
To fig. 2/3
C003a
11
D076
C005
+58
C003a
7.5A
Bf010
3A
+15
D024
Bb014
C003
12
2
0
I031
D0078250
Wiring diagrams
P014
20
22
23
87a
87
86 85
E007
30
E006
+15 ISO
14
I002
+30 DIN 2
10
Jg006
SERVICE LIGHT
+58
BEACON
CAB LIGHT SW
13
DOOR SW
GND
+15 WOLP
+30 WOLP
15
I028
F001
D024
AMBIENT LIGHT
+30 WOLP
H002
D008
7.5A
Bb019
20A
+15
LIGHT BAR
53
31
14
N013
P004
5A
16
P003
2
19
2
1
10
15
8
7
1
F013 F016
D079
+58
C005
+15
+30
C002
11
D024
G004
20A
Bm003
C003
D024
G007
70
D025
Bb018
D025
9
6
C003a
+30
20A
Bm001
+15
7.5A
Bb019
C003a
C003a
10
G006
Bm002
+30
+30
65
+30
87
+30
+5V HLHP
GND
GND
D009
2
-
C002
C005
GND
D036
1
+
A
A8
+30
15A
Ba001
C003a
+15
Bc003
20A
C005
D024
D024
5A
Ba008
+15
+30
3A
Bf015
-
A
D1
A
A1
A
A1
C005
C003a
+30
C003a
To ISO 11783
M003
11
1
+
D057
D054
15A
Bf004
D013
D025
To fig. 2/3
C003a
11
D076
C005
+58
C003a
7.5A
Bf010
3A
+15
D024
Bb014
C003
12
2
0
I031
D0078250
40-352
l
-
G006
1
+
2
-
G007
A
B
0
1
G004
D
1
2
N013
A
B
P004
A
C
2
11
14
F013 F016
A
A1
P003
19
2
1
10
8
LIGHT BAR
7
1
2
4
6
1
3
5
87
65
16
9
6
+30
+15
7.5A
1
+15 ISO
+30 DIN 2
E007
Bb019
D008
H002
20A
Bm002
C002
C005
+5V HLHP
D057
E006
C005
D079
+15
5A
D054
I002
D025
30
Bb018
+30
C003a
86 85
+58
+30
15A
Jg006
C005
+30
D013
D025
Bf004
11
+30
C003a
To ISO 11783
C005
+30
GND
D076
87
20A
GND
5A
Ba008
GND
C003a
+15
87a
Bm003
C003
+30
+15
D025
D009
10
C002
20A
Bm001
7.5A
Bb019
C003a
C003a
C003a
23
+30
22
15A
SERVICE LIGHT
+58
20
Ba001
7.5A
BEACON
C003a
+58
+15
Bf010
CAB LIGHT SW
14
20A
Bc003
C005
+30
10
D036
11
3A
Bf015
3A
DOOR SW
4
+15 WOLP
+15
D024
GND
13
I028
D024
Bb014
C003
+30 WOLP
D024
To fig. 2/3
D024
AMBIENT LIGHT
+30 WOLP
15
F001
D024
1
+
D024
C003a
Wiring diagrams
P014
12
A
A1
A
D1
A
A8
M003
70
9
53
31
2
1
8
15
I031
D0078250
40-353
Wiring diagrams
87a
+58
GND
+58
GND
Jd003
87 86
85 30
D024
I026
G005
H005
G001a
G001
H006
D024
13
D010
D024
D024
To fig. 1/3
C005
C003a
20A
7.5A
Bc008
14
+15
C005
C005
Bb011
10A
Bb012
+15
C005
15A
+30
Ba001
15
+30
C003a
D025
D059
D058
C005
4
1
1
+
2
-
G003
2
-
1
+
G002
13
O011
12
3
4
P018
C005
C005
C005
C005
7.5A
+15
Bb006
C005
13
40-354
11
10
12
17
16
15
13
4
3
11
12
10
P019
14
10
11
12
D0078230
Wiring diagrams
87a
+58
GND
+58
GND
Jd003
87 86
85 30
D024
I026
G005
H005
G001a
G001
H006
D024
13
D010
D024
D024
To fig. 1/3
C005
C003a
20A
7.5A
Bc008
14
+15
C005
C005
Bb011
10A
Bb012
+15
C005
15A
+30
Ba001
15
+30
C003a
D025
C005
C005
C005
D058
D059
C005
C005
7.5A
+15
Bb006
C005
13
4
1
1
+
2
-
G003
2
-
1
+
G002
13
O011
12
3
4
P018
11
10
12
17
16
15
13
4
3
11
12
10
P019
14
10
11
12
D0078230
Wiring diagrams
87a
+58
GND
+58
GND
Jd003
87 86
85 30
D024
I026
G005
H005
G001a
G001
H006
D024
13
D010
D024
D024
To fig. 1/3
C005
C003a
20A
7.5A
Bc008
14
+15
C005
C005
Bb011
10A
Bb012
+15
C005
15A
+30
Ba001
15
+30
C003a
D025
2
-
G003
2
-
1
+
G002
13
12
3
4
O011
C005
D059
D058
C005
4
1
1
+
C005
C005
C005
7.5A
+15
Bb006
C005
13
40-356
P018
11
10
12
17
16
15
13
4
3
11
12
10
P019
14
10
11
12
D0078230
Wiring diagrams
Jd001
C003a
+15
1
F021
F017
P020a
B6
B7
B8
C8
PTO SPEED
WHEEL
RADAR
LIFT POS
-31 GND
B5
LIFT OFF/ON
B4
-31 GND
B3
+15
LIFT POS
RADAR
WHEEL
PTO SPEED
D080
10A
Bb001
D026
D021
+30
C003a
10A
D046
Bf017 C003
30
LIFT OFF/ON
D081
86 85
87
D080a
D023
D081a
C003a
D050
87a
M008
P020
D0078240
Table 605
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-357
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
40-358
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C005
D008
D009
Wiring connector
D010
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3417
Fig. 3418
Fig. 3419
Fig. 3420
Fig. 3421
40-571
40-571
40-580
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
Fig. 3422
40-359
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3423
40-537
Fig. 3424
Table 606
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D021
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D024
Wiring connector
(yellow)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-535
40-571
Fig. 3425
Fig. 3426
Fig. 3427
40-360
40-571
40-520
40-571
40-580
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D025
Wiring connector
(brown)
D026
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D046
Wiring connector
D050
D054
Not used
Wiring connector
D057
Wiring connector
D058
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3428
Fig. 3429
Fig. 3430
Fig. 3431
40-571
40-522
40-529
40-583
40-571
40-522
40-520
40-592
40-580
40-591
40-580
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-580
40-361
Wiring diagrams
Table 607
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D059
Wiring connector
D076
D079
D080
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
RH rotating beacon
LH rotating beacon
LH carpet light
D081
E006 04414773
E007 04414773
F001
F013
F016
F017
F021
G001
G002
G003
40-362
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-571
40-571
40-522
40-522
40-520
40-520
40-592
40-591
40-571
Fig. 3432
40-529
40-529
40-522
40-520
40-571
Fig. 3433
Fig. 3434
40-571
40-580
40-580
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
G004
G005
G006
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-580
40-580
G007
H002
H005
H006
Characteristics/Notes
40-571
Fig. 3435
Fig. 3436
Fig. 3437
40-571
40-571
40-580
40-580
40-363
Wiring diagrams
Table 608
Sys- P/N
tem
I002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Pos
Pin
0
1
2.7659.405.0
I026
I028 04414097
I031
M003
M003
M008
Fig. 3439
Fig. 3438
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3440
Fig. 3440
Fig. 3441
40-364
40-571
40-535
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
N013
Pneumatic
compressor
O011
P003
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring loom
40-571
seat
P004
P014
P018
P018
P018
P018
P019
P019
P019
P019
P020
Position
Fig. 3442
40-580
40-571
Fig. 3443
Fig. 3444
40-571
40-576
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-535
Fig. 3445
40-365
40-366
11
12
16
18
14
R001
RX INSTRUMENT
ISO 9141
+5V HLHP
+30 ARMREST
15
11
12
13
19
ISO 9141
10
+15 CLUSTER
TX INSTRUMENT
15A
Bf005
B
B5
RX INSTRUMENT
ISO SGR
3A
C003a
+30
D008
+15
C003a
+30
D031
5A
Bf003
5A
Bb015
7.5A
D009
+30
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
ISO 9141
+5V HLHP
+15 TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
ISO 4191
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
RX INSTRUMENT
TX INSTRUMENT
12
15
1
3
5
2
4
6
8
21
31
53
72
10
13
14
15
5
12
20
21
22
M001b
3A
B008
C003a
+30
C003a
+15
+15
Bb005
ISO SGR
M003
TX INSTRUMENT
ISO 9141
Bb004
C003
20A
Bm003
+30 SGR
M005
Characteristics/Notes
+30 ARMREST
13
GND
A
B5
+30
D008
Description
+15 CLUSTER
7.5A
C002
Sys- P/N
tem
ISO 9141
+30
Bf001
Wiring diagrams
Position
Wiring loom
Fig. 3445
E002
A
D5
H001
D0068970
Wiring diagrams
M003
E002
ISO SGR
+30
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
+15 HLHP
ISO 9141
+5V HLHP
+15 TRANSMISSION
GND
+30 ECU
ISO 4191
GND
+15 INSTRUMENT
RX INSTRUMENT
TX INSTRUMENT
12
15
21
31
53
72
10
13
14
15
12
20
21
22
5A
A
D5
D031
C003a
+30
Bf003
5A
C003a
Bb015
+15
+15
7.5A
Bb005
Bm003
20A
C003
C002
A
B5
+30
D008
D009
+30 SGR
M001b
M005
3A
B008
7.5A
16
18
14
ISO 9141
ISO SGR
TX INSTRUMENT
RX INSTRUMENT
ISO 9141
+5V HLHP
+30 ARMREST
15
11
12
13
19
ISO 9141
12
+15 CLUSTER
11
RX INSTRUMENT
10
TX INSTRUMENT
+30 ARMREST
R001
C003a
+30
1
GND
15A
Bf005
D008
+15
13
+15 CLUSTER
3A
B
B5
ISO 9141
Bb004
C003a
+30
+30
Bf001
H001
D0068970
40-367
Wiring diagrams
Table 609
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B008
Fuse (3A)
C002
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/1, +30)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - Armrest
(F1-B/5, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3447
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3448
Fig. 3449
40-368
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
H001
Armrest
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Fig. 3450
Fig. 3451
Fig. 3452
Fig. 3453
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-514
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3454
40-369
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M005
R001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3455
Fig. 3456
Fig. 3456
40-571
40-576
40-571
Fig. 3457
40-370
40-571
Wiring diagrams
40.3.35 - S029 - Monitor
E005a
+30 MONITOR
+15 MONITOR
GND
GND
MIC-
RS232 RX
RS232 TX
GROUND
CAN-H ISOBUS
CAN-L ISOBUS
CAN-H VEHICLE
CAN-L VEHICLE
CAN-H AUX
CAN-L AUX
MIC+
+ ANT
E005b
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
20
24
D062
D062
14
10
12
11
15
13
D014
C003a
3A
Bb009
+15
15A
+30
Bf008
D0068960
Table 610
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-371
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Fig. 3459
Fig. 3460
Fig. 3461
Fig. 3462
Fig. 3463
Fig. 3464
40-372
40-571
40-537
40-559
40-542
40-537
40-559
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D062
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
Wiring connector
I-Monitor
I-Monitor
Fig. 3465
Fig. 3466
40-542
40-542
Fig. 3466
40-373
Wiring diagrams
40.3.36 - S030 - Agrosky - Version with visual guidance, without ISO11783
H007
MIC +
24
20
15
14
D086
D086b
3A
77
D014
+15
Bb009
M010
+Monitor (HLHP2)
C003
M003
D062
D014
+ ANT
E005b
D013
D062
+30
9
D062
10
10
+15 MONITOR
GND
17
16
18
GROUND
RS232 RX
12
RS232 TX
MIC -
M009
13
+30 MONITOR
10
GND
D062
13
D062
14
RS232 RX
11
17
RS232 TX
Supply +12V
GND
18
GND
D071
D014
15A
13
Bf008
12
D060
11
E005a
D0078520
Fig. 3467 - Agrosky - Version with visual guidance, without ISO11783 ISO11783 - System
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-374
Wiring diagrams
H007
MIC +
24
20
15
14
D086
D086b
3A
77
D014
+15
Bb009
M010
+Monitor (HLHP2)
C003
M003
D062
D014
+ ANT
E005b
D013
D062
11
10
+30
+15 MONITOR
GND
17
16
18
GROUND
RS232 RX
12
RS232 TX
MIC -
M009
13
+30 MONITOR
10
GND
D062
10
D062
13
D062
14
RS232 RX
17
RS232 TX
Supply +12V
18
GND
GND
D071
D014
15A
13
Bf008
12
D060
11
E005a
D0078520
Fig. 3467 - Agrosky - Version with visual guidance, without ISO11783 ISO11783 - System
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
Table 611
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3468
Fig. 3469
Fig. 3470
Fig. 3471
Fig. 3472
40-376
40-559
40-571
40-559
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D060
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D071
Wiring connector
D086
Configuration connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-559
Fig. 3473
Fig. 3474
Fig. 3475
Fig. 3476
40-561
40-563
40-559
40-542
40-565
40-561
40-563
40-559
Fig. 3477
40-377
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-559
Configuration connector
I-Monitor
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
M003
HLHP unit
M003
Fig. 3477
Fig. 3478
Fig. 3478
Fig. 3479
Fig. 3480
Fig. 3480
40-378
40-542
40-542
40-559
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
M009
M010
Description
AGROSKY
tenna
Microphone
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-565
An-
40-559
Fig. 3481
40-379
Wiring diagrams
To Direction indicators
M003
Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
D013
77
11
12
10
13
D062
To fig.2/2
10
30
86
85
16
15
24
C003
3A
Bb010
+15
40-380
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
35
37
36
34
M011
I030
Direction light LH
Direction light RH
10
Stop light
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
CUT OFF EV
87
GND
87
86
GND
85
O016
D014
30
87a
GND
O017
87a
D0078440
Wiring diagrams
13
D014
D060
D086a D086
O014
10
13
11
12
To fig. 1/2
15A
R004
2
D014
Bf008
+30
+15
D062
3A
14
15
Bb009
H007
TBC RTN-
A4
A8
D8
D1
A1
50A
B018
A7
85
86 87
87a
30
85
86
87
16
15
D067
30
D069a
Supply +12V
antenna
C002
30A
84
M011
A5
B019
74
Relay 50A
command
Front relay
command
C003
TBC PWR
D069
+15
C002
M010
D014
+30
P024
-31 BATT
R003
D064
P025
-31 KEY
P021
81
+30
250A
B001
-31 BATT
D066
-31 KEY
+15
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
P022
P023
87a
D0078210
J016
J015
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 612
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
Fuse (250A)
B018
B019
Fuse (50A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
Engine ground
C002
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3484
40-571
40-571
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3485
40-382
40-512
40-512
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C003
Cab ground
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3486
Fig. 3487
Fig. 3488
Fig. 3489
Fig. 3490
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
40-537
40-561
40-563
40-537
Fig. 3491
40-383
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D066
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
40-384
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-542
Fig. 3492
Fig. 3493
Fig. 3494
Fig. 3495
Fig. 3496
40-537
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
40-510
40-512
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D086
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Configuration connector
Fig. 3497
Configuration connector
40-537
Fig. 3497
Table 613
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
H007
Monitor controls
I030
Performance
Steering system
activation switch
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3498
40-537
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
J015
ISOBUS
(50A)
relay
J016
ISOBUS
(30A)
relay
Fig. 3500
Fig. 3499
40-512
Fig. 3501
40-512
40-385
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M010
Microphone
M011
O014
Diode connector
Diode board
O016
O017
40-386
Diode board
Diode board
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3502
Fig. 3503
Fig. 3504
Fig. 3505
Fig. 3505
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P021
P022
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
P023
P024
P025
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R003
RS 232 connector
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3506
40-510
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3507
Fig. 3508
Fig. 3509
40-512
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3510
40-387
Wiring diagrams
To Direction indicators
M003
+Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
40.3.38 - S031A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
D013
77
11
12
10
13
D062
To fig.2/2
10
16
15
I030
24
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
35
37
36
Rear work light
Direction light LH
Direction light RH
10
Stop light
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
87
Direction light LH
85
86
CUT OFF EV
30
GND
87
86
GND
85
O016
D014
30
87a
GND
O017
87a
34
M011
C003
3A
+15
Bb010
D0078460
Fig. 3511 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-388
+15
l
1
5
4
6
7
8
O017
85
86
9
87
10
C003
30
D014
87a
3A
Bb010
86
85
3
16
15
I030
4
6
24
7
12
41
8
89
88
42
Position light
Half beam
Full beam
Stop light
To fig.2/2
D062
1
2
3
4
23
22
35
37
36
10
12
Direction light LH
11
Direction light RH
13
75
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
CUT OFF EV
GND
30
O016
GND
87a
GND
D013
+Monitor (HLHP2)
To Direction indicators
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
Wiring diagrams
M003
77
6
8
9
13
10
87
34
M011
D0078460
Fig. 3511 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (1/2)
40-389
Wiring diagrams
RS232 TX
RS232 RX
Supply +12V
GND
GND
M009
6
12
10
11
13
18
16
17
13
11
12
D062
Bb009
10
RS232 TX
14
RS232 RX
GROUND
MIC -
+30 MONITOR
20
GND
+15 MONITOR
24
GND
MIC+
E005a
+ANT
E005b
To fig. 1/2
15A
R004
2
D014
Bf008
+30
+15
15
3A
12
D014
D060
D086b D086
D071
O014
H007
84
Relay 50A
command
Front relay
command
M011
A4
A7
A8
D8
D1
50A
B018
30A
C002
B019
A5
C002
86
87
87a
30
85
86 87
16
15
D067
85
A1
30
D069a
74
C003
D069
D014
87a
D0078470
J016
J015
Fig. 3512 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-390
M010
D064
TBC RTN-
+30
+15
-31 BATT
P024
TBC PWR
P025
-31 KEY
R003
P021
81
Supply +12V
antenna
+30
250A
B001
-31 KEY
-31 BATT
+15
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
D066
P022
P023
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 614
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
B018
Fuse (250A)
Fuse (50A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
Engine ground
C002
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-512
Fig. 3513
40-512
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-510
40-391
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
Fig. 3514
Fig. 3515
Fig. 3516
Fig. 3517
Fig. 3518
Fig. 3519
40-392
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D066
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D071
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3520
Fig. 3521
Fig. 3522
Fig. 3523
40-542
40-537
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
40-510
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-565
40-561
40-563
40-393
Wiring diagrams
Table 615
Sys- P/N
tem
D086
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
I-Monitor
I-Monitor
H007
Characteristics/Notes
Monitor controls
Fig. 3524
Fig. 3524
Fig. 3525
Fig. 3525
Fig. 3526
40-394
40-537
40-542
40-542
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I030
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Performance
Steering system
activation switch
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
J015
ISOBUS
(50A)
relay
J016
ISOBUS
(30A)
HLHP unit
relay
M003
Fig. 3527
40-512
Fig. 3529
40-512
40-571
M003
M009
AGROSKY
tenna
Microphone
M010
Fig. 3528
An-
Fig. 3530
Fig. 3530
40-571
40-565
40-537
Fig. 3531
40-395
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M011
O014
Diode connector
Diode board
O016
O017
P021
Diode board
Diode board
ISO 11783 socket
in cab
P022
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
P023
P024
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3532
Fig. 3533
Fig. 3533
Fig. 3534
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-510
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3535
40-396
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P025
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R003
RS 232 connector
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
Fig. 3536
Fig. 3537
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3538
40-397
Wiring diagrams
To Direction indicators
+Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
92
77
11
12
10
14
13
D014
M003
D013
N012
To Accessories
40.3.39 - S031B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
D062
To fig.2/2
20A
+30
Bm009
10
16
15
I030
24
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
35
37
36
34
Direction light LH
Direction light RH
10
Stop light
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
87
Direction light LH
85
CUT OFF EV
86
30
87
GND
86
GND
85
O016
D014
30
87a
GND
O017
87a
M011
C003
3A
+15
Bb010
D0078480
Fig. 3539 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-398
+15
l
1
5
4
6
7
8
O017
85
86
9
87
10
C003
30
D014
87a
3A
Bb010
86
85
3
16
15
I030
4
6
24
7
12
41
8
89
88
42
Full beam
Stop light
To fig.2/2
D062
1
2
3
4
23
22
35
14
37
10
12
Direction light LH
11
Direction light RH
13
Half beam
75
Position light
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
20A
D014
36
To Direction indicators
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
+Monitor (HLHP2)
8
Supply CUT OFF
D013
N012
+30
Bm009
1
CUT OFF EV
30
GND
O016
GND
87a
GND
Wiring diagrams
M003
92
77
9
13
10
87
34
M011
D0078480
Fig. 3539 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (1/2)
40-399
Wiring diagrams
Supply +12V
GND
Shield
RS232 TX
RS232 RX
RS232 RX
RS232 TX
Shield
Shield
Supply +12V
12
11
10
10
11
12
12
10
11
13
11
12
18
16
17
13
11
12
D014
D062
Bb009
10
RS232 TX
14
RS232 RX
GROUND
MIC -
+30 MONITOR
20
GND
+15 MONITOR
24
GND
MIC+
E005a
+ANT
E005b
To fig. 1/2
15A
R004
2
D014
Bf008
+30
+15
15
3A
D060
D086a D086
D071
O014
M009
Supply +12V
M009a
H007
74
84
Relay 50A
command
Front relay
command
M011
A4
A7
A8
D8
D1
50A
B018
30A
C002
B019
C002
85
86
87
J016
87a
30
85
86 87
16
15
D067
30
A1
C003
87a
J015
Fig. 3540 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-400
M010
D069 D069a
R003
D014
A5
D064
TBC RTN-
+30
+15
-31 BATT
P024
TBC PWR
P025
-31 KEY
P021
81
Supply +12V
antenna
+30
250A
B001
-31 KEY
-31 BATT
+15
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
D066
P022
P023
D0078490
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 616
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
B018
Fuse (250A)
Fuse (50A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
20A Fuse - Steering
(F2/9-12, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-512
Fig. 3541
40-512
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-401
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3542
Fig. 3543
Fig. 3544
Fig. 3545
Fig. 3546
Fig. 3547
40-402
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D066
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D071
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3548
Fig. 3549
Fig. 3550
Fig. 3551
40-542
40-537
40-512
40-537
40-510
40-512
40-510
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-558
40-561
40-563
40-403
Wiring diagrams
Table 617
Sys- P/N
tem
D086
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
I-Monitor
40-537
40-542
Fig. 3552
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
I030
Performance
Steering system
activation switch
Fig. 3552
Fig. 3553
40-542
40-537
40-537
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
J015
ISOBUS
(50A)
relay
J016
ISOBUS
(30A)
relay
40-404
Fig. 3555
Fig. 3554
40-512
Fig. 3556
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M009
AGROSKY
tenna
AGROSKY
tenna
Microphone
M010
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
An-
Fig. 3557
Fig. 3557
N012
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power steering
40-558
40-558
An-
M011
40-571
40-537
Fig. 3558
Fig. 3559
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3560
40-405
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
O014
Description
O016
O017
P021
Diode board
Diode board
ISO 11783 socket
in cab
P022
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
P024
P025
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Diode connector
Diode board
P023
Characteristics/Notes
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Fig. 3561
Fig. 3561
Fig. 3562
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-510
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3563
Fig. 3564
40-406
40-537
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
R003
RS 232 connector
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3565
40-537
Fig. 3566
40-407
Wiring diagrams
To Direction indicators
M003
+Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
40.3.40 - S031C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
K016
3
13
37
36
34
D062
10
10
GND
Supply
Signal
12
GND
Black
3
11
1
To fig.2/2
Signal
Grey
2
K038
M013b
Supply
To Transmission
D013
77
87a
85
86
87
87a
O016
30
86
85
16
15
87
24
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
Direction light LH
Stop light
Direction light RH
10
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
CUT OFF EV
GND
GND
D014
GND
D063
30
O017
35
M011
C003
3A
Bb010
I030
+15
D0078500
Fig. 3567 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-408
To Direction indicators
M003
+Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
Wiring diagrams
K016
3
13
37
36
34
D062
10
10
GND
Supply
Signal
12
GND
Black
3
11
1
To fig.2/2
Signal
Grey
2
K038
M013b
Supply
To Transmission
D013
77
87a
85
86
87
87a
O016
30
86
85
16
15
87
24
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
Direction light LH
Stop light
Direction light RH
10
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
CUT OFF EV
GND
GND
D014
GND
D063
30
O017
35
M011
C003
3A
Bb010
I030
+15
D0078500
Fig. 3567 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-409
Wiring diagrams
Supply +12V
GND
Shield
RS232 TX
RS232 RX
RS232 RX
RS232 TX
Shield
Shield
Supply +12V
12
11
10
10
11
12
12
10
11
13
11
12
18
16
17
13
11
12
D014
D062
Bb009
10
RS232 TX
14
RS232 RX
GROUND
MIC -
+30 MONITOR
20
GND
+15 MONITOR
24
GND
MIC+
E005a
+ANT
E005b
To fig. 1/2
15A
R004
2
D014
Bf008
+30
+15
15
3A
D060
D086a D086
D071
O014
M009
Supply +12V
M009a
H007
74
84
Relay 50A
command
Front relay
command
M011
A4
A7
A8
D8
D1
50A
B018
30A
B019
C002
C002
86
87
87a
30
A1
85
86 87
16
15
D067
85
J016
87a
J015
Fig. 3568 - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-410
M010
C003
30
R003
D069 D069a
D014
A5
D064
TBC RTN-
+30
+15
-31 BATT
P024
TBC PWR
P025
-31 KEY
P021
81
Supply +12V
antenna
+30
250A
B001
-31 KEY
-31 BATT
+15
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
D066
P022
P023
D0078510
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 618
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
B018
Fuse (250A)
Fuse (50A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-512
Fig. 3569
40-512
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-411
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3570
Fig. 3571
Fig. 3572
Fig. 3573
Fig. 3574
Fig. 3575
40-412
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D063
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
40-561
40-563
Fig. 3576
Fig. 3577
Fig. 3578
Fig. 3579
Fig. 3580
40-542
40-537
40-537
40-540
40-512
40-537
Fig. 3581
40-413
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D066
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D071
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
40-512
40-510
40-512
40-537
40-537
40-558
40-561
40-563
Table 619
Sys- P/N
tem
D086
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
I-Monitor
40-537
40-542
Fig. 3582
I-Monitor
H007
Monitor controls
I030
Performance
Steering system
activation switch
Fig. 3582
Fig. 3583
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
Fig. 3584
40-414
Fig. 3585
40-542
40-537
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
J015
ISOBUS
(50A)
J016
ISOBUS
relay
(30A)
Wiring connector
K016
K037
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
relay
Fig. 3586
40-540
40-583
40-540
K038
L015
AGROSKY control
disable
solenoid
valve
M003
HLHP unit
M003
M009
AGROSKY
tenna
Pin 3: ground
Pin 4: CAN-H signal
40-540
Fig. 3588
Fig. 3589
An-
40-512
Fig. 3590
Fig. 3590
40-540
40-571
40-571
40-558
40-415
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
M010
M011
Description
AGROSKY
tenna
Microphone
Characteristics/Notes
Wiring loom
40-558
An-
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power
steering
(grey connector)
Electronically controlled
hydraulic
power
steering
(black connector)
O014
Position
Diode connector
40-537
Fig. 3591
Fig. 3592
Fig. 3593
Fig. 3594
Fig. 3595
40-416
40-537
40-540
40-540
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
O016
O017
P021
Diode board
Diode board
ISO 11783 socket
in cab
P022
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
P023
P024
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Diode board
P025
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R003
RS 232 connector
Fig. 3595
Fig. 3596
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-510
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3597
Fig. 3598
40-512
40-537
Fig. 3599
40-417
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
R004
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3600
40-418
Wiring diagrams
40.3.41 - S032 - Webasto
A5
A8
A1
C7
12
2
FUEL POUMP
B5
N020
FUEL POUMP
B3
DIAGNOSTIC
B6
DIODO
C5
GND
C1
R005
+30 WEBASTO
A2
GND
A3
GND
B1
P029a
GND
B2
A7
O019
THERMO CALL 86/30
C3
A6
DENSO ECU
A4
B4
C8
THERMO CALL 85
M016
D093
P029b
7
B
B7
B
D6
B
D4
B
B8
B
C1
B
A8
A
A3
10
Bc001
+30
20A
7.5A
+30
10
17
THERMO
CALL 86/30
THERMO
CALL 86/30
WEBASTO
(THERMO CALL)
16
C005
18
THERMO
ALL 85
+15KEY
D024
Bf019
17
B
A1
5A
D073
D016
+30
7.5A
+15
3A
+15
A
D8
Bf002
Ba009
Bb020
D008
C002
M015
M017
D0078260
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 620
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C005
D008
D016
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3602
Fig. 3603
Fig. 3604
40-420
40-580
40-571
40-576
40-556
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D024
Wiring connector
(yellow)
D073
Wiring connector
D093
Wiring connector
D093
Wiring connector
M015
Air
conditioning
control unit (blue
connector)
M016
Relay unit
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3605
Fig. 3606
Fig. 3607
Fig. 3608
Fig. 3609
40-571
40-576
40-585
40-556
40-585
Fig. 3610
40-421
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M017
Webasto ECU
N020
Webasto
circuit
pump
LED carrier connector
Diode
Webasto unit
O019
R005
40-422
Webasto unit
Webasto diagnostic
connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-580
Fig. 3611
40-585
40-585
40-585
40-585
Fig. 3612
40-585
40-585
Wiring diagrams
40.3.42 - S033 - Lights - Version without front hitch (U.S.A.)
Jd006
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87 86 85
87a
D009
A
D8
30
D001
D001
D013
15A
D006
D013
11
13
14
23
12
16
21
FUSE PDU3 (INSTRUM.+30)
I009
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
10
POSITION
+58
I008
+15 WOLP
+30 WOLP
GND
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
To ISO 11783
H002
E002
D044
D003
P006
F005a
C002
D008
C003a
C002
B
B3
A
A2
D034
D009
A
D5
D009
3A
C003
Bb004
C003a
+15
D031
3A
B008
3A
Bb014
5A
Bf018
C003a
+15
5A
Bf012
+30
5A
+30
1
9
10
Bf011
+15
+30
D001
To ISO 11783
+30
7.5A
Bf010
Bf014
10 11
Bf013
C003a
+30
87 86 85
87a
FL/AL
LH
0
7.5A
A
D7
30
15A
D023
15A
Bf007
30
Bf009
C003a
87 86 85
87a
+30
85 30
C003a
86
To fig. 2/2
87
D052
87a
F005
58L
31
P015
D0078410
Fig. 3613 - S033 - Lights - Version without front hitch (USA) - System (1/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-424
Wiring diagrams
D001
HORN
CONTROL
15A
17
12
15
A
D8
C003a
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
A
D7
D036
D006
B
A1
C002
C002
D009
A
B7
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
+15
Bb003
12
16
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
F003
F003a
D0078130
Fig. 3614 - S033 - Lights - Version without front hitch (USA) - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-425
Wiring diagrams
Table 621
Sys- P/N
tem
B008
Bf011
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fuse (3A)
Fig. 3615
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3616
40-426
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
D006
Wiring connector
D008
Wiring connector
Fig. 3617
Fig. 3618
Fig. 3619
Fig. 3620
Fig. 3621
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-566
40-571
40-567
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3622
40-427
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3623
Fig. 3624
Fig. 3625
Fig. 3626
40-428
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-520
Wiring diagrams
Table 622
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D031
Wiring connector
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
D052
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
E004 01169304
F003
Horn
RH sidelight
RH sidelight
F005
LH sidelight
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-514
40-509
40-583
Fig. 3627
Fig. 3628
Fig. 3629
Fig. 3630
40-529
40-583
40-500
40-576
40-496
40-520
40-571
40-529
40-567
40-567
40-566
Fig. 3631
40-429
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F007
F026 04414115
H002
RH high beam
headlight
RH low beam headlight
LH low beam headlight
LH high beam
headlight
License plate light
Work light switch
I008
F008
F009
F010
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-566
LH sidelight
Fig. 3632
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-496
40-571
Fig. 3633
40-571
0
1
2
Pos
Pin
10
10
0
1
2
2.7659.376.0
I009
Fig. 3635
Fig. 3634
40-571
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
2.7659.377.0
Fig. 3636
Fig. 3637
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Sidelights
relay
(R3/5)
Low beam relay
(R3/6)
Trailer socket
Front implement
power outlet socket
P006
P015
40-571
40-509
40-500
Jh003
87 86 85
30
87 86 85
87a
30
D009
87a
B
A1
Jh001
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
Jh004
To fig. 2/2
F026
Jh006
C003a
A
D1
Jh005
87
86
85 30
87a
87 86 85
30
87a
87 86 85
30
D052
87a
A
D8
A
D7
15A
Bf014
D013
11
13
14
23
12
16
21
C002
D008
D044
To fig. 2/2
C003a
D009
C002
D003
D009
D034
H002
To ISO 11783
B008
+15
D031
3
I009
+15 INSTRUMENT
GND
POSITION
10
+58
+15 WOLP
I008
B
B3
A
A2
+30 WOLP
3A
Bb004
C003a
C003a
C003
3
GND
A
D5
+30 WOLP
3A
+30
+15
3A
5A
To fig. 2/2
+15
5A
Bf012
5A
Bf011
+30
10
Bb014
Bf018
D013
+30
D006
D001
To ISO 11783
+30
7.5A
7.5A
Bf013
Bf010
+30
+30
10 11
5A
Bf011
D001
15A
Bf009
To fig. 2/2
C003a
To fig. 2/2
C003a
Bf007
15A
30
+30
87 86 85
87a
D001
FL/AL
LH
0
D006
D003
D003
C003a
D009
D006
D023
P006
F005
58L
31
P015
E002
D0078420
Fig. 3638 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.) - System (1/2)
40-431
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-432
Wiring diagrams
F043
HORN
CONTROL
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
C002
B
A1
12
15
A
D8
A
D7
D036
C002
D009
A
B7
C003a
C003a
15A
D009
+15
Bb003
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D001
12 17
F003
D006
D003
F044
16
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
D0078140
Fig. 3639 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.) - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Wiring diagrams
F043
HORN
CONTROL
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
C002
B
A1
12
15
A
D8
A
D7
D036
C002
D009
A
B7
C003a
C003a
15A
D009
+15
Bb003
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D001
12 17
F003
D006
D003
F044
16
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
D0078140
Fig. 3639 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.) - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-434
Wiring diagrams
F043
HORN
CONTROL
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D009
A
D1
C002
B
A1
12
15
A
D8
A
D7
D036
C002
D009
A
B7
C003a
C003a
15A
D009
+15
Bb003
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D001
12 17
F003
D006
D003
F044
16
E004
F009
13
F008
F007
F010
D0078140
Fig. 3639 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.) - System (2/2)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-435
Wiring diagrams
Table 623
Sys- P/N
tem
B008
Bf011
C002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fuse (3A)
Fig. 3640
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3641
40-436
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
C003
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D003
Wiring connector
D006
Wiring connector
D008
Wiring connector
Fig. 3642
Fig. 3643
Fig. 3644
Fig. 3645
Fig. 3646
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-566
40-571
40-567
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3647
40-437
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
40-438
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3648
Fig. 3649
Fig. 3650
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-520
40-583
40-514
Wiring diagrams
Table 624
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D044
Wiring connector
D052
Wiring connector
E002
Instrument panel
E004 01169304
F003
Horn
RH sidelight
F005
LH sidelight
F007
RH high beam
headlight
RH low beam headlight
F008
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-509
40-583
Fig. 3651
Fig. 3652
Fig. 3653
Fig. 3654
Fig. 3655
40-529
40-583
40-500
40-576
40-496
40-520
40-571
40-529
40-567
40-566
40-529
40-529
40-439
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F009
F010
F026 04414115
F043
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-529
F043
F044
F044
H002
40-529
40-496
40-566
Fig. 3656
Fig. 3656
Fig. 3657
Fig. 3657
Fig. 3658
40-440
40-566
40-567
40-567
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
I008
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Pos
Pin
10
10
0
1
2
2.7659.376.0
I009
Fig. 3660
Fig. 3659
40-571
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
0
1
2.7659.377.0
P006
P015
Fig. 3661
Fig. 3662
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-509
40-500
40-441
Wiring diagrams
40.3.44 - S035 - Turn indicators (U.S.A.)
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTR OL
DIRECTION
LEFT
TRAILER 2
TRAILER1
49A
49A
49A
49A
DIR. COM
49
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION
LAMP RIGHT
11
10
12
D001
+15 INSTRUMENT
12
16
17
18
+15
D068
C003a
DIRECTION
RIGHT
E001
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
3A
GND
21
Bb004
FUSE PDU3
E002
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
19
20
To fig. 2/2
To fig. 2/2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D008
D022
12
P015
P006
F041
F042
F006
F004
40-442
20A
15A
Bm007
C003a
M004
D0078150
3
TRAILER 1
TRAILER 2
49A
49
D007
D004
1
GND
C003a
C003a
12
D028
D030
D034
D031
R
+30
31
3A
B008
C003a
A
A4
D023
A
A5
C003a
A
D5
D026
C002
C003a
To iso 11783
D009
D044
C002
D013
Bb008
+30
B
B4
+15
B
D2
5
49a
6
L
7
R
2
30B(-)
I001
1
+15
3
+30
4
49(+)
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40-443
Wiring diagrams
I029
To fig. 1/2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
49(+)
+30
+15
30B(-)
49a
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
HAZARD RH (USA)
LAMP LT USA
B3
B2
A8
B4
A1
B8
C003
LAMP RH USA
A6
-31
EXTREMELY LT
B1
+30
TRAILER LT
EXTREMELY RH
A4
HAZARD IN
B6
+15
A2
RIGHT
B7
LEFT
C2
HAZARD LIGHT
C1
+15
A5
HAZARD LT
A3
TRAILER RH
D022
M012
10
11
12
20
D068
To fig. 1/2
D0078430
Table 625
Sys- P/N
tem
B008
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fuse (3A)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
15A Fuse - EU/USA
emergency lights
(F1-A/8, +15)
40-444
Characteristics/Notes
Fig. 3665
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D001
Wiring connector
D004
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3666
Fig. 3667
Fig. 3668
Fig. 3669
40-528
40-571
40-496
40-571
40-566
40-571
Fig. 3670
40-445
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D007
Wiring connector
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D022
Wiring connector
D022
Wiring connector
40-446
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-567
40-571
Fig. 3671
Fig. 3672
Fig. 3673
Fig. 3674
Fig. 3675
Fig. 3676
40-571
40-576
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
40-528
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D023
Wiring connector
D026
Wiring connector
D028
Wiring connector
D028
Wiring connector
D030
Wiring connector
D030
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-520
Fig. 3677
Fig. 3678
Fig. 3679
Fig. 3680
Fig. 3681
40-571
40-522
40-567
40-569
40-566
40-568
Fig. 3682
40-447
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D031
Wiring connector
D034
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-583
40-514
40-509
40-583
Fig. 3683
Table 626
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D044
Wiring connector
D068
Wiring connector
D068
E001
Configuration connector
Instrument panel
E002
Instrument panel
F004
RH turn indicator
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-500
40-576
40-528
Fig. 3684
40-571
Fig. 3685
Fig. 3686
Fig. 3687
40-448
40-571
40-571
40-569
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
F006
LH turn indicator
F041
RH rear hazard
warning light - USA
version
LH rear hazard
warning light - USA
version
Hazard
warning
lights switch
F042
I001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-568
Fig. 3688
40-522
40-520
40-571
Pin
15
1
30
3
49
4
49a
5
15
49a
L
Pos
30
30
49
3
4
L
6
R
7
0
1
2.7659.110.0
I029
Hazard
warning
lights switch
M004
M012
P006
P015
Trailer socket
Front implement
power outlet socket
Fig. 3690
Fig. 3689
40-528
Fig. 3691
Fig. 3692
Fig. 3693
40-571
40-528
40-509
40-500
40-449
Wiring diagrams
40.3.45 - S036 - Work lights (U.S.A.)
J003
Jg003
F032
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
D031
+30 USA
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
C003
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
GND
30
23
H002
D0068790
40-450
B003
D031
86 85
B
D1
D013
D058
F030
C005
C005
C005
D059
F029
87
30
85
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D024
F031
87 86
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87a
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
15A
D025
11
30
15A
20A
D026
3
Bc002
D023
D034
C003
87a
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
+30 USA
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
Wiring diagrams
J003
Jg003
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
+30 USA
C003
D031
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
B003
D031
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
F032
GND
F030
D013
D058
F029
C005
C005
C005
30
B
D1
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D059
F031
86 85
30
85
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87 86
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
D024
D025
11
8
87a
87
15A
20A
D026
Bc002
D023
D034
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87a
15A
C003
+30 USA
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
30
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
23
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
H002
D0068790
Wiring diagrams
J003
Jg003
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
+30 USA
C003
D031
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
23
H002
D0068790
40-452
B003
D031
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
F032
GND
F030
D013
D058
F029
C005
C005
C005
30
B
D1
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D059
F031
86 85
30
85
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87 86
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
D024
D025
11
8
87a
87
30
15A
20A
D026
Bc002
D023
D034
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87a
15A
C003
+30 USA
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
Wiring diagrams
J003
Jg003
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
+30 USA
C003
D031
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
B003
D031
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
F032
GND
F030
D013
D058
F029
C005
C005
C005
30
B
D1
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D059
F031
86 85
30
85
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87 86
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
D024
D025
11
8
87a
87
15A
20A
D026
Bc002
D023
D034
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87a
15A
C003
+30 USA
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
30
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
23
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
H002
D0068790
Wiring diagrams
J003
Jg003
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
+30 USA
C003
D031
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
+30 WOLP
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
23
H002
D0068790
40-454
B003
D031
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
F032
GND
F030
D013
D058
F029
C005
C005
C005
30
B
D1
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D059
F031
86 85
30
85
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87 86
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
D024
D025
11
8
87a
87
30
15A
20A
D026
Bc002
D023
D034
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87a
15A
C003
+30 USA
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
Wiring diagrams
J003
Jg003
F034
F035
F036
F033
40A
+30 USA
C003
D031
To fig. 2/2
D031
+30 USA
D004
D007
To fig. 2/2
+58
D009
Bf010
+30 USA
15A
Bf018
+15 USA
D009
Bb014
3A
+30 USA
C003
A
D2
19
21
14
13
17
18
FRONT ROOF
FRONT LOW
B
D4
+30 WOLP
To fig. 2/2
+30 WOLP
+15 WOLP
REAR ROOF
B003
D031
20A
To fig. 2/2
15A
D031
Bf020
F032
GND
F030
D013
D058
F029
C005
C005
C005
30
B
D1
C003a
15A
Be004
15A
Be001
D059
F031
86 85
30
85
12
C005
D056
D055
D058
C005
C005
C005
D056
13
15
10
87 86
D009
+30 USA
+30 USA
D024
D025
11
8
87a
87
15A
20A
D026
Bc002
D023
D034
To fig. 2/2
+15 USA
Ba010
B
A8
15A
Ba006
87a
15A
C003
+30 USA
87
85 86
2
87a
D009
C003
B
D2
15A
Ba005
30
Jg001
To fig. 2/2
Jg002
30
7.5A
30
86 85
86 85
23
+58
87
87a
Je001
87
B004
30
D031
85
15A
30
86 85
86
AUX TRAILER
87
87a
B006
87
Bm008
P006
Je002
J002
H002
D0068790
F036 - Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
F036 - Right hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
H002 - Work light control
J002 - Left hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
J003 - Right hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
Je001 - Relay for front work lights on cab roof (R6/1)
Je002 - Relay for rear work lights on cab roof (R6/2)
Jg001 - Relay for low front work lights (R1-A/1)
Jg002 - Relay for trailer electrical power outlet sockets (R1-A/2)
Jg003 - Relay for low rear work lights (R1-A/3)
P006 - Trailer socket
40-455
F012
F015
F014
F011
F028
F040
F039
F027
C003a
D007
D028
D030
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D004
C003a
1
D027
D027a
D029a
To fig. 1/2
D026
3
D029
D036
17
D047
To fig. 1/2
C003a
D031
D023
C002
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
C002
D051
D031
C002
To fig. 1/2
D031
C002
D031
To fig. 1/2
C003a
Wiring diagrams
F037
F038
D0078380
40-456
F012
F015
F014
F011
F028
F040
F039
F027
C003a
D007
D028
D030
To fig. 1/2
To fig. 1/2
D004
C003a
1
D027
D027a
D029a
To fig. 1/2
D026
3
D029
D036
17
D047
To fig. 1/2
C003a
D031
D023
C002
To fig. 1/2
C002
To fig. 1/2
D051
D031
C002
To fig. 1/2
D031
C002
D031
To fig. 1/2
C003a
Wiring diagrams
F037
F038
D0078380
Table 627
Sys- P/N
tem
B003
B004
B006
Description
Fuse (40A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (15A)
15A Fuse - Rear
work light fuse
(F3/5)
15A Fuse - Rear
work light fuse
(F3/6)
15A Fuse - U.S.A.
trailer lights fuse
(F3/10, +15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
20A Fuse - Low
rear work light relay
protection (F4/2-5,
+30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-457
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C005
D004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3696
Fig. 3697
Fig. 3698
Fig. 3699
40-458
40-571
40-571
40-580
40-566
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D004
Wiring connector
D007
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D023
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3700
Fig. 3701
Fig. 3702
Fig. 3703
Fig. 3704
40-567
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-520
Fig. 3705
40-459
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
D024
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Wiring connector
(yellow)
Fig. 3706
Table 628
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D025
Wiring connector
(brown)
D026
Wiring connector
D027
D028
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
D028
Wiring connector
D029
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
40-460
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-580
Fig. 3707
Fig. 3708
Fig. 3709
Fig. 3710
40-571
40-522
40-569
40-569
40-567
40-569
40-568
40-568
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D030
Wiring connector
D030
Wiring connector
D031
Wiring connector
D034
Wiring connector
D036
Wiring connector
D047
Wiring connector
D051
Wiring connector
D055
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-566
Fig. 3711
Fig. 3712
Fig. 3713
40-568
40-583
40-514
40-509
40-583
40-529
40-583
40-506
40-502
40-522
40-522
40-506
40-501
40-520
40-520
40-546
40-554
40-580
40-580
40-461
Wiring diagrams
Table 629
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D056
Wiring connector
D058
Wiring connector
D059
Wiring connector
F011
F012
F014
F015
F027
F028
F029
F029
F030
F030
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-547
40-552
40-580
40-580
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-545
40-551
40-580
40-561
40-563
40-580
40-580
40-580
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-529
40-506
40-506
40-546
40-554
40-546
40-554
Table 630
Sys- P/N
tem
F031
F031
40-462
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-547
40-552
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F032
F032
F033
F033
F033
F033
F034
F034
F034
F034
F035
F035
F035
F035
F036
F036
F036
F036
F037
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-547
40-552
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-545
40-551
40-561
40-563
40-502
40-463
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
F037
F037
F038
F038
F038
F039
F040
H002
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-568
40-568
Fig. 3714
40-569
40-569
Fig. 3715
40-502
40-501
40-571
Fig. 3716
40-464
40-503
Wiring diagrams
Table 631
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
J002
J003
P006
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3717
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-509
40-465
Wiring diagrams
40.3.46 - S037 - +15 Positives (U.S.A.)
Jn001
Ja001
I006
0
30
87a
87 86 85
40A
+30
40A
Bf016
Bm017
30
1 2
83
15
15
75
50
78
50
+30
3A
Bm015
Bb020
30
15A
30
+30
87 86 85
C003
87a
5A
3A
7.5A
10A
15A
5A
7.5A
5A
3A
5A
5A
5A
7.5A
Ba010
Bb004
Bb005
Bb006
Bb007
Bb008
Bb009
Bb010
Bf012
Ba007
Ba008
Ba009
Be002
8C
C002
15A
Bb019
Bc003
B015
3A
Bb018
20A
15A
Bb016
D012
7.5A
15A
Bb015
B010
7.5A
Bb003
Bb013
10A
3A
7.5A
20A
Bb011
Bb012
B013
5A
15A
7.5A
Bb002
Bb014
15A
10A
Bb001
Bb017
87a
87 86 85
J012
40-466
30
D0078450
Wiring diagrams
Table 632
Sys- P/N
tem
B010
B013
B015
Description
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (20A)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/7, +15)
5A fuse - Fuse
(F3/8, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning fuse (F3/9,
+15)
15A Fuse - U.S.A.
trailer lights fuse
(F3/10, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO
11786
(F1-A/1,
+15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1A/2, +15)
15A Fuse - Windscreen wiper (F1A/3, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F1-A/5,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Pneumatic seat (F1-A/6,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Engine
(F1-A/7, +15)
15A Fuse - EU/USA
emergency lights
(F1-A/8, +15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
7.5A Fuse - Rear
view mirrors (F1A/11, +15)
10A Fuse - Rear
windscreen wiper
(F1-A/12, +15)
15A Fuse - Brake
lights
(F1-A/13,
+15)
3A Fuse - Work
light display (F1A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-467
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 633
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
D012
Wiring connector
40-468
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-518
Fig. 3719
Fig. 3720
40-571
40-518
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
I006
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Starter switch
83
50
30
86s
15
75
Pin
Pos
30
15
50
75
83
0
1
2
0.015.0485.4
J012
Fig. 3721
40-518
40-571
40-571
250A
40A
B016
30A
30A
3A
Bm002
Bm001
20A
20A
Bm003
Bm007
85
To working lights
85
86 87
87a
86 87
B021
87a
B008
Je001
Je002
B015
+30a
T001b
T001
+30b
GND
+30
C001
C002
J006a
T001a
20A
B014
30A
J006b
3
30
B003
To AdBlue
B002
D032
D+
A001
B+
20A
C003
B001
20A
20A
Bm008
20A
Bm013
Bm009
20A
30A
Bm017
Bm015
40A
40A
Bc001
Ba001
15A
20A
Bc002
Ba002
3A
20A
Bc008
20A
Bf001
Bc017
40A
30
D002
7.5A
Bf002
Bf003
5A
7.5A
Bf004
15A
Bf005
Bf006
5A
15A
Bf008
Bf009
Bf007
15A
15A
15A
Bf014
Bf011
5A
15A
Bf015
3A
Bf017
Bf016
15A
10A
Bf019
Bf020
Bf018
15A
5A
5A
15A
Bc013
30A
Ba004
BATTERY
D0078330
J006
A001 - Alternator B+
D002 (M) - Wiring connector (Wiring loom 0.020.8658.4)
40-469
250A
40A
B016
30A
30A
3A
Bm002
Bm001
20A
20A
Bm003
Bm007
85
To working lights
85
86 87
87a
86 87
87a
B021
B008
Je001
Je002
B015
+30a
T001b
T001
+30b
GND
+30
C001
C002
J006a
T001a
20A
B014
30A
J006b
3
30
B003
To AdBlue
B002
D032
D+
A001
B+
20A
C003
B001
20A
20A
Bm008
20A
Bm013
Bm009
20A
30A
Bm017
Bm015
40A
40A
Bc001
Ba001
15A
20A
Bc002
Ba002
3A
20A
Bc008
20A
Bf001
Bc017
40A
30
D002
7.5A
Bf002
Bf003
5A
7.5A
Bf004
15A
Bf005
Bf006
5A
15A
Bf008
Bf009
Bf007
15A
15A
15A
Bf014
Bf011
5A
15A
Bf015
3A
Bf017
Bf016
15A
10A
Bf019
Bf020
Bf018
15A
5A
5A
15A
Bc013
30A
Ba004
Wiring diagrams
BATTERY
D0078330
J006
Table 634
Sys- P/N
tem
A001
40-470
Description
Alternator B+
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-589
40-512
40-514
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
Fuse (250A)
B002
B003
B008
Fuse (200A)
Fuse (40A)
Fuse (3A)
B014
B015
B016
B021
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (20A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
15A Fuse - Lights
fuse and power
outlet socket (F3/1,
+30)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
5A fuse - Tierra
fuse (F3/4, +30)
20A fuse - Webasto
(heater) (F4/1-4,
+30)
20A Fuse - Low
rear work light relay
protection (F4/2-5,
+30)
20A Fuse - Rear
defrost (F4/8-11)
30A fuse - Heating unit (F4/13-14,
+30)
40A Fuse - Heating
system (F4/17-18,
+30)
7.5A Fuse - SGR
Transmission (F1A/1, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning
system
fuse (F1/2, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3723
Fig. 3724
40-514
40-514
40-514
40-518
40-518
40-518
40-514
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-471
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Bf011
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Table 635
Sys- P/N
tem
40-472
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
D002
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
J006
Battery disconnect
contactor
Battery disconnect
contactor
C001
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-498
40-498
Fig. 3725
Fig. 3726
40-528
40-571
40-514
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-511
Fig. 3727
40-473
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
T001
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-511
Battery disconnect
contactor
40-474
Characteristics/Notes
Fig. 3728
40-571
40-571
40-511
Fig. 3729
40-583
40-514
Wiring diagrams
40.3.48 - S039 - PTO (USA)
L014
freq
10
freq
L010
L006
+30 USA
C003a
+15 USA
C002
7.5A
Bb016
+15 USA
C002
C002
C003a
C002
7.5A
+58
C002
D045
C003
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
PTO SELECTION
FRONT PTO EV
+15 HLHP
46
M003
2
freq
K009
5A
Bf003
D009
D008
10
11
13
14
+30 ECU
GND
80
A
D4
58
A
A6
+15 TRANSMISSION
19
B
A7
A
D2
EV PTO 1000N
B
A6
EV PTO 540E
A
C7
EV PTO 1400
D009
SIG.
GND
1
+30
A
D7
SUPPLY
B
A4
5A
Bb015
+15 USA
D008
Bb005
2
7.5A
20A
D043
+30 USA
C002
A
D3
Bm003
Bf010
D008
D043
D040
D045
D042
L011
GND
SIG.
GND
SIG.
L009
K031
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
I010
K030
M001b
D0068780
Wiring diagrams
L014
freq
10
L010
L006
+30 USA
C003a
+15 USA
C002
7.5A
Bb016
+15 USA
C002
C002
C003a
C002
7.5A
+58
C002
D045
C003
+30
+30
GND
GND
GND
PTO SELECTION
FRONT PTO EV
+15 HLHP
46
2
freq
5A
Bf003
D009
D008
K009
10
11
13
14
+30 ECU
GND
80
A
D4
58
A
A6
+15 TRANSMISSION
19
B
A7
A
D2
EV PTO 1000N
B
A6
EV PTO 540E
A
C7
EV PTO 1400
D009
SIG.
GND
1
+30
A
D7
SUPPLY
B
A4
5A
Bb015
+15 USA
D008
Bb005
2
7.5A
20A
D043
+30 USA
C002
A
D3
Bm003
Bf010
D008
D043
D040
D045
D042
L011
GND
freq
SIG.
GND
SIG.
L009
K031
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
I010
K030
M001b
M003
D0068780
Table 636
Sys- P/N
tem
40-476
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
D008
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-576
Fig. 3731
Fig. 3732
Fig. 3733
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3734
40-477
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D009
Wiring connector
D040
Wiring connector
D042
Wiring connector
D043
Wiring connector
D045
Wiring connector
I010
PTO
switch
K009 04438352
40-478
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3735
Fig. 3736
selector
Fig. 3737
40-531
40-576
40-499
40-576
40-531
40-576
40-588
40-576
40-571
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Table 637
Sys- P/N
tem
K030
K031
L006
Description
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-576
L009
L010
L011
L014
40-499
40-531
Fig. 3738
Fig. 3739
Fig. 3740
Fig. 3741
40-531
40-531
40-531
40-588
40-479
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M003
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
Fig. 3742
Fig. 3743
40-480
40-571
Wiring diagrams
40.3.49 - S040 - Braking (U.S.A.)
E003
SMART SW
EPB LED
GND
+15 CLUSTER
GND
+30
+30 WOOD
12
B
D6
A
C1
B
B7
A
B2
A
C8
13
14
12
11
P
1
D009
15
GND
18
GND
+30 ARMREST
17
+30 ARMREST
+5V HLHP
16
+15 CLUSTER
K007
0
K006
H001
C002
3A
+30
C004
C002
5A
B016
B017
B
C1
D033
D033
D009
D009
D009
B
C3
D032
30A
C003
20A
Bm003
+30
+15
+15
C003a
Ba002
C003a
A
B5
3A
Bb004
15A
+30
Bf005
B
C2
B
C4
B4
C1
A8
A5
C6
B1
B3
A4
42
A1
B6
C8
B8
C7
SMART SW
SPB LED
30 (MAIN BATTERY-30A)
GND
PRESS. BRAKE SW
84
GND
72
GND
53
GND -31
+30
40
+15 EPB
+30
31
16
+5V HLHP
+30
T004
1
M003
N004
GND
+30
BATTERY
AUXILIARY
D0068710
40-481
Wiring diagrams
I004
I003
K022
Jh002
87a
87
86 85
30
D013
GND
SIG.
SUPPLY
15A
Bb013
D008
6
10
13
14
+BRAKE SWITCH
GND
+50 ECU
BRAKE SENSOR
M001b
M001c
40-482
D009
C002
D034
C003a
13
+15 TRANSMISSION
A
B1
BRAKE SWITCH RH
A
C3
A
C1
14
M001a
A
A6
+30
5A
Bf003
5A
Bb015
+15
+15
C003a
To ISO 11783
P006
D0078160
Wiring diagrams
Table 638
Sys- P/N
tem
B016
B017
Description
C002
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - Work
Display Fuse (F3/2,
+30)
3A Fuse - Cluster
(F1-A/4, +15)
15A Fuse - Brake
lights
(F1-A/13,
+15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15,
+15)
5A Fuse - Transmission control unit
(F1-B/3, +30)
15A Fuse - Armrest
(F1-B/5, +30)
20A Fuse - HLHP
control unit (F2/3-6,
+30)
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
Cab ground
C004
Negative terminal
of the auxiliary battery
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-518
40-518
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-583
Fig. 3746
Fig. 3747
Fig. 3748
40-571
40-571
40-583
40-483
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D008
Wiring connector
D009
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D032
Wiring connector
D033
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
40-576
Fig. 3749
Fig. 3750
Fig. 3751
Fig. 3752
Fig. 3753
Fig. 3754
40-484
40-571
40-583
40-571
40-537
40-518
40-583
40-518
40-583
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
D034
Wiring connector
E003
Work Display
H001
Armrest
I003
Position
Wiring loom
40-509
40-583
Fig. 3755
Fig. 3756
Fig. 3757
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-485
Wiring diagrams
Table 639
Sys- P/N
tem
I004
K006
K007
K022
Description
Position
Wiring loom
40-571
LH brake
switch
M003
N004
P006
T004
E.P.B. device
Trailer socket
Positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery
40-486
Characteristics/Notes
40-571
40-583
40-583
40-576
40-571
40-571
40-571
Fig. 3761
Fig. 3762
40-571
40-583
40-509
40-583
Wiring diagrams
To Direction indicators
To Work lights
M003
Monitor (HLHP2)
To Brakes
To Lights
To Lights
To Accessories
D013
77
11
12
10
13
12
36
34
74
D062
To fig 2/2
10
30
86
85
16
15
75
13
12
41
89
88
42
23
22
35
37
Trailer wl USA
24
Direction light LH
Direction light RH
10
Stop light
Full beam
Half beam
Position light
Trailer WL USA
Direction light LH
CUT OFF EV
87
GND
87
86
GND
85
O016
D014
30
87a
GND
O017
87a
M011
C003
3A
D0078220
+15
Bb010
I030
Wiring diagrams
13
D014
D060
D086a D086
O014
10
13
11
12
To fig. 1/2
15A
R004
2
D014
Bf008
+30
+15
D044
3A
14
15
Bb009
H007
TBC RTN-
A4
A7
A8
D8
D1
A1
85
86 87
87a
30
85
86
87
87a
D0078210
J016
J015
40-488
16
15
D067
30
D069a
Relay 50A
command
50A
B018
30A
C002
B019
Front relay
command
M011
A5
C002
84
C003
TBC PWR
74
D069
+15
D014
+30
D064
-31 BATT
P024
-31 KEY
P025
Supply +12V
antenna
P021
81
+30
250A
B001
-31 BATT
D066
-31 KEY
+15
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
P022
P023
R003
M010
Wiring diagrams
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Table 640
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
B001
Fuse (250A)
B018
Fuse (50A)
B019
Fuse (30A)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9,
+15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS
11783
(F1-A/10,
+15)
15A Fuse - iMonitor
(F1-B/8, +30)
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-514
Fig. 3765
Fig. 3766
40-512
40-512
40-571
40-571
40-571
40-489
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
C002
Engine ground
C003
Cab ground
D013
Wiring connector
D013
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
D014
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3767
Fig. 3768
Fig. 3769
Fig. 3770
Fig. 3771
Fig. 3772
40-490
40-571
40-571
40-537
40-571
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D044
Wiring connector
D060
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D062
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
D064
Wiring connector
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-500
40-576
40-537
40-561
40-563
40-537
Fig. 3773
Fig. 3774
Fig. 3775
Fig. 3776
40-542
40-537
40-512
40-537
Fig. 3777
40-491
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
D066
Wiring connector
D067
Wiring connector
D069
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
D086
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3778
Fig. 3779
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3780
40-492
40-510
40-512
Wiring diagrams
Table 641
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
Characteristics/Notes
H007
Monitor controls
I030
Performance
Steering system
activation switch
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3781
40-537
0
1
Pos
Pin
10
10
1
2
2.7659.489.0
J015
ISOBUS
(50A)
J016
ISOBUS
relay
(30A)
HLHP unit - USA
version
M003
M010
Microphone
relay
Fig. 3783
Fig. 3782
40-512
Fig. 3784
40-512
40-571
Fig. 3785
40-537
Fig. 3786
40-493
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
M011
O014
Diode connector
Diode board
O016
O017
P021
Diode board
Diode board
ISO 11783 socket
in cab
P022
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Front
ISOBUS
11783 socket
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
P023
P024
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-537
Fig. 3787
Fig. 3788
Fig. 3788
Fig. 3789
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-537
40-510
40-510
40-512
Fig. 3790
40-494
40-537
Wiring diagrams
Sys- P/N
tem
Description
P025
Rear
ISOBUS
11783 socket
R003
RS 232 connector
R004
Characteristics/Notes
Position
Wiring loom
40-512
Fig. 3791
Fig. 3792
40-537
40-537
Fig. 3793
40-495
Wiring diagrams
40.4 - Wiring harnesses
D052
F026
D0067800
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D052
F026
Wiring connector
License plate light
M1
H1
D052
F026
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067810
40-496
Wiring diagrams
40.4.2 - 0.014.0007.4/20 - Lights selector switch
D001
H003
H003a
D0067580
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D001
H003
H003a
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Shuttle control lever
Shuttle control lever
40-497
Wiring diagrams
LOW BEAM
HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
DIRECTION
LIGHT
CONTROL
FRONT WASHER
PUMP CONTROL
H003
0FF 0N 0N 0FF
FRONT WIPER
CONTROL
HORN
CONTROL
FL/AL
LH
0
H003a
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
RV0.75
C0.75
NGL0.75
BV0.75
V0.75
NG0.75
MB0.75
G0.75
NR0.75
Z0.75
N0.75
B0.75
G0.75
BN1
R1
NB1
NV1
NVB1
22
D001
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067590
C002
D0049921
40-498
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
C001
C002
DESCRIPTION
Wiring diagrams
40.4.4 - 0.015.3974.4/10 - Front axle suspension
L002
DW
L003
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
12
11
14 10
13 9
8
UP
L004
LS
D037
K019
D0049953
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D037
K019
L002
L003
L004
DW
UP
LS
Wiring connector
Front axle suspension position sensor
Front axle Down control solenoid
Front axle Up control solenoid
Front axle suspension Load Sensing control coil
D037
1
M1
X1
X1
L004
L003
L002
VB1
C1
V1
M1
CB1
M1
1
CN1
GL1
M1
K019
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0049962
40-499
Wiring diagrams
3
2
N1
N1
BN1
BN1
AMP
SL1
D042
SL1
AMP
K031
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0067730
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D042
K031
Wiring connector
PTO speed sensor - (USA Export)
D044
I013
DW
DW
I014
1
UP
54
54
L
R
58
R
P015
D0067740
Wiring diagrams
Table 647
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D044
I013
I014
P015
DW
UP
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Front lift DOWN control pushbutton
Front lift UP control pushbutton
Front implement power outlet socket
M1
1
I013
I014
M1
SG0.5
S0.5
G1
A1
AN1
54A
M11.5
X1
54
2
1
3
4
D044
5
6
58L
P015
58R
L
R
31
M1
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067750
D051
F040
D0067820
Fig. 3804 - Rear LH lower work light on cab - Xenon version (1/2)
Table 648
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D051
F040
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
RH lower rear work light
40-501
Wiring diagrams
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
1
F040
M1
VG1
D051
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067830
Fig. 3805 - Rear LH lower work light on cab - Xenon version (2/2)
D047
F039
D0067840
Fig. 3806 - Rear RH lower work light on cab - Xenon version (1/2)
Table 649
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D047
F039
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
LH lower rear work light
F039
M1
VG1
1
2
D047
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067850
Fig. 3807 - Rear RH lower work light on cab - Xenon version (2/2)
40-502
Wiring diagrams
F037
D030
D0050086
Fig. 3808 - LH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version (1/2)
Table 650
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F037
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D030
F037
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Lh front work light (on arm)
B1
1
2
1
2
M1
D030
D0050346
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
Fig. 3809 - LH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version (2/2)
F038
D028
D0050085
Fig. 3810 - RH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version (1/2)
Table 651
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D028
F038
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Rh front work light (on arm)
40-503
Wiring diagrams
F038
B1
1
2
1
2
M1
D028
D0050345
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
Fig. 3811 - RH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version (2/2)
F037
1 4
2 3
D030
1
D0057907
40-504
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D030
F037
F037
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Lh front work light (on arm)
Lh front work light (on arm)
Wiring diagrams
1
D030
2
3
VR1
M1
1
2
F037
D0067700
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Viole
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
F038
1 4
2 3
D028
1
D0057906
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D028
F038
F038
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Rh front work light (on arm)
Rh front work light (on arm)
40-505
Wiring diagrams
1
D028
2
3
VR1
M1
1
2
F038
D0058404
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D047
F027
D0067780
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D047
F027
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
RH lower rear work light
D047
M1
VR1
1
2
F027
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067790
40-506
Wiring diagrams
D051
F028
D0067760
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D051
F028
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
LH lower rear work light
D051
M1
VR1
1
2
F028
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067770
40-507
Wiring diagrams
40.4.15 - 0.017.8425.4/10 - Rear trailer socket
D034
1
6
P006
TRAILER EU
D0067630
TRAILER EU
40-508
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D034
P006
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Trailer socket
Wiring diagrams
P006
2
6
7
5
4
1
3
Z-1.5 (W.L.)
2
6
7
5
4
1
3
RN-1.5 (STOP)
GN-1 (+58 RH)
G-1 (+58LT)
A-1.5 (DIR RH)
AN-1.5 (DIR LT)
N1.5 (-31)
W.L.
EU/USA
EU
EU/USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
D034
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078190
40-509
Wiring diagrams
D034
1
6
TRAILER USA
P006
D0067900
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D034
P006
TRAILER EU
P006
7
4
6
5
3
1
2
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Trailer socket
8
6
5
4
1
3
2
USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
EU/USA
USA
D034
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0067910
40-510
Wiring diagrams
40.4.17 - 0.017.8887.4/10 - ISO 11783 - Front line
C002
P022
P023
D067
D066
D0067860
Engine ground
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Front ISOBUS 11783 socket
Front ISOBUS 11783 socket
C002
D066
D067
P022
P023
DESCRIPTION
D066
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
V4
V8
C002
D067
8M
M1
N1
A1
B1
+15
M4
-31 KEY
-31 BATT
P022
TBC RTN-
TBC PWR
CAN H B
CAN L B
P023
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067870
40-511
Wiring diagrams
40.4.18 - 0.018.8803.4 - Battery positive terminal
T001
J006a
N007
J006b
D0059371
40-512
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
J006a
J006b
N007
T001
DESCRIPTION
Wiring diagrams
40.4.19 - 0.018.9843.4/20 - ISO 11783 - Rear line
D064
R2 87
R1 87
30A
R1 30
R2 30
R1 85
J016
C002
D095
R2 86
R1 86
R2 85
50A
J015
D067
P025
P024
2
50A
B018
B019
30A
D066
A001
D0077780
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A001
B018
B019
C002
D064
D066
D067
D095
J015
J016
P024
P025
DESCRIPTION
Alternator B+
Fuse (50A)
Fuse (30A)
Engine ground
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
ISOBUS relay (50A)
ISOBUS relay (30A)
Rear ISOBUS 11783 socket
Rear ISOBUS 11783 socket
40-513
V8
V4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
X+EP
BV1
X+EP
X+EP
R2 87
D064
M4 X-31
X-31
X60
A001
1
2
MN1
M1
N1
A1
B1
M1
V1
M1
N1
A1
B1
M1
V1
C
E
F
A
D
V8
M8
M4
V4
CAN H B
CAN L B
ECU GND
ECU PWR
TBC RTNTBC PWR
B019
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
B018
10
11
12
3
1
2
4
+30
-31 BATT
-31 KEY
+15
CAN H B
CAN L B
13
50A
R2 30
D095
J015
J016
C002
ECU -31(ECU -31)
+15(ECU PWR)
ECU -31(TBC RTN) FRONT
+15(TBC PWR) FRONT
40-514
R2 86
R1 86
D067
D066
R2 85
R1 85
30A
R1 30
R1 87
Wiring diagrams
P024 P025
V8
V4
M1
MN1
M1
BV1
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
V
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Z
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
N
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
S
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
R
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0077790
Wiring diagrams
40.4.20 - 0.018.9845.4/10 - Fuses and relays
J002
J004
30
86
87
85
30
86
87
85
B004
1
15A
10A
B005
B006
86
85
30
86
J003
F1
F2
RN1
15A
30
87
10A
87
85
J005
F3
3A
B008
F4
B007
F7
40A
D031
B021
B002
C8
B003
R 35
B001
250A
R 50
F8
30A
F6
200A
F5
T001b
12 VIE PF
A001
D002
D0077700
F5
F6
F7
F1
F2
F3
F4
F3
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A001
B001
B002
B003
B004
B005
B006
B007
B008
DESCRIPTION
Alternator B+
Fuse (250A)
Fuse (200A)
Fuse (40A)
Fuse (15A)
Not used
Fuse (15A)
Not used
Fuse (3A)
40-515
Wiring diagrams
Fuse (30A)
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Left hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
Right hand work light relay (on engine cowl)
Not used
Not used
Battery positive terminal
8 GV 2.5(W.L.RIGHT UP)
9 GV 2.5(W.L.RIGHT MED)
10 GV 2.5(W.L.RIGHT DW)
+30 WEBASTO RN2.5
+30 WABASTO RN2.5
10A
F3
F4
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
30
86
87
85
30
86
87
85
B008
R 35
C8
B003
86
87
85
3A
30
86
87
85
F3
30A
F8
B021
R 50
B002
40A
F7
B001
200A
F6
250A
F5
30
M0.5
8 G 2.5(W.L.LEFT DW)
15A
B007
F2
J005
10A
RM1
5 RN 1(+30FUSE INSTRUMENT)
B006
M0.5
4 M 1(-31)
1.5
1.5
J004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RM1
2 G 2.5(W.L.LEFT MED)
F1
M0.5
15A
B005
M0.5
B004
D031
J003
B021
D002
D031
J002
J003
J004
J005
T001b
RM1
F8
DESCRIPTION
J002
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
RM1
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
W 2 4.5
W 2 4.5
A001
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
T001b
D002
40-516
D0077710
Wiring diagrams
5
3
D2
3
4 3
D3
D7
D6
2 1
2 1
3
4 3
2 1
D4
D6
D1
P012
3
4 3
2 1
D5
D1
4 3
D2
P007
2 1
P008
D3
4 3
P009
2 1
D4
P010
3
4 3
2 1
D5
4 3
P011
7
8
12 11 10 9
D035
P013
D7
D0066920
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D035
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Utility distributor 1
Utility distributor 2
Utility distributor 3
Utility distributor 4
Utility distributor 5
Utility distributor 6
Utility distributor 7
40-517
Wiring diagrams
12
11
10
7
4
3
5
4
12 11 10
D035
9
8
3
2
1
2 1
4 3
2 1
4 3
P013
2 1
P012
4 3
2 1
4 3
P008
P007
SA-H7
SA-L7
SA-L6
SA-L3
SA-L2
SA-L1
SA-H3
SA-H6
SA-H2
SA-H1
SA-1
SA-L4
SA-L5
SA-H5
4 3
2 1
3
4 3
2 1
4 3
P009
2 1
P011
SA-H4
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
P010
D0066910
Fig. 3832
4 3
2 1
.02
D.M
K034
NOx B5
2
4
3
1
I025
NOx
B5
ON/OFF SW
ON/OFF
SW
EV .22
AT
UREA T.
16
HE
K035
UREA T.16
1
3
L013
TEMP.
S.04
EV HEAT
K036
NOx A6
4 3 2 1
NOx A6
2
1
K033
TEMP. S.04
N008
SUPP. M.01
10
11
12
SUPP.
M.01
2
3
IN
MA TT
BA
BACH
-UP
BATT.
O009
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
J006
D012
B
3A
2A
3B
2B
3C
2C
1C
2D
1D
1B
3D
5A
4A
5B
4B
5C
4C
4D
5D
6A
6B
6C
6D
7A
7B
7C
7D
MAIN BATT
1A
D032
8A
8B
8C
8D
-31
D033
C002
-31
+30
1
1
1
2
2
BACKFLOW
O007
O008
OUTLET
INLET
BACKFLOW
OU
TLE
T
BACK-UP BATT.
O006
INLET
N007
+30
D0066790
30A
30A
B012
20A
B009
MU4
MU1
Wiring diagrams
J008
J009
Supply module
Suction line
Trottle line
J011
J012
12
11
10
18
85
14
87a
30
87
9
8
7
13
86
86
87a
30
87
85
R6
87a
30
87
85
R5
R4
86
87
30
87a
85
R3
16
85
87a
15
30
17
MTA
87
86
86
86
keng
21
K30 K31
MK6
Urea poump(M10)/
Heaters supply relay
MTA
B017
K29
K27 K28
Pressure line
FEPBBK
FEPB
J007
MK3 MF3
FSMH
10A 15A
J010
MK4
MU6
B014
FY31
87a
MK1 MU3
B011
MF1
FNOX
10A 15A
B016
B013
FY25
KENG
B010
B015
FYWG 30A
30
87
85
R2
R1
D0068470
MU1
MU2
MU3
MU4
MU5
MU6
MF1
MF2
MF3
-31
MAIN BATT
BACK-UP BATT.
ON/OFF SW
MK1
MK2
MK3
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
B009
B010
B011
B012
B013
B014
B015
B016
B017
C002
D012
D032
D033
I025
J006
J007
J008
J009
DESCRIPTION
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (10A)
Fuse (10A)
Not used
Fuse (15A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (20A)
Fuse (30A)
Fuse (30A)
Engine ground
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Battery disconnect switch
Battery disconnect contactor
AD Blue pump control relay
AdBlue suction line heater power supply relay
AdBlue return line heater power supply relay
40-519
Wiring diagrams
Table 664
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
J010
J011
J012
K033
K034
K035
K036
L013
N007
N008
N009
O006
O007
O008
O009
B016
B015
B013
B014
B010
B009
1 2
N007
K034
4
L013
K033
1
I025
K035
K036
4
CAN H
CAN L
GND
+15 NOxa
B1 LEVEL
B1 COM
B1 TEMPERATURE
Z1 SW COM
V1 OFF
G1 ON
A1 SAFETY LED
CAN H
CAN L
GND
+15 NOXb
18
B4 EPBBK
17
B4 EPBBK
30A
16
B4 EPB
B2.5 +30
B2.5 +30
20A
30A
14
15
13
B4 EPB
12
B2.5 +30
15A
11
B2.5 +30
10
10A
10A
5
15A
B1.5 FY25
30
30A
87
PINA1
PINB1
85
87a
30
86
87
J010
PINA1
PINB1
85
87a
30
86
B2.5 +30
Urea tank heating EV(Y31)
B1 Pressure line heater (K30)
85
87
PINA1
PINB1
87a
J011
86
30
B1 FNOX/W.gate (KENG)
PINA1
PINB1
87
85
30
87a
86
PINA1
87
PINB1
87a
85
PINA1
PINB1
86
30
87
J012
85
87a
J007
86
J008
B011
N009
J009
MK4
MK5
MK6
TEMP.S. 04
Nox B5
UREA T. 16
NOx A6
EV HEAT.22
+30
SUPP. M. 01
D.M.02
INLET
BACKFLOW
OUTLET
DESCRIPTION
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
B1.5
SA-2
D8
D7
B1 +15
D6
D5
D4
SA-CANH1
SA-CANH2
D3
SA-CANL2
SA-CANL1
D2
B1.5 FY25
B1 FNOX/W.gate (KENG)
UREA PUMP (M10)
CAN L
CAN H
D1
C8
C7
C6
C5
2D
3A
3B
3C
3D
4B
4C
4D
5A
5B
5C
5D
6A
6B
6C
6D
7A
7B
7C
7D
8C
8D
B8
B7
B6
8A
B5
8B
2C
4A
2A
2B
C1
1B
C002
C2
1C
1A
SA-1
C3
1D
C4
D012
B4
B3
B2
B1
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1 -31
G1 ON
A1 SAFETY LED
Z1 SW COM
V1 OFF
B1 +15
6
12
10
11
CAN L
CAN H
B4 EPB
B4 EPB
B4 EPBBK
B4 EPBBK
B
SA-3
Marrone/Brown
Azzurro/Blue
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
11
10
12
6
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Viola/Violet
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
1
B
O006
1 2 3 4
40-520
D033
O007
8 7 6 5
D032
O008
O009
N008
J006
D0066800
Wiring diagrams
40.4.23 - 0.019.2378.4/40 - LH mudguard
D052
LIGHT
D081
D081a
F021
PLATE
F042
A
D051
HT
LIG
LIFT
PL
AT
1
2
LIF
T
D081b
1
LWL
F022
LWL
DIR
D023
DIR
F023
STOP
5 4
12 11
10 9
3 2
1
3 2
8 7 1
6
5 4
3
2
3
1
2
1
W
O
RK
STOP
PO
S
3
D050
2
1
F024
2
1
D053
POS
WORK
3
2
DIS
DO TRIB
W
N
B
RI
ST
DI UP
1
2
1
PTO
DOWN
UP
3
1
I021
DISTRIB
UP
I020
DISTRIB
DOWN
I023
UP
PTO
I024
I022
DOWN
D0077880
PLATE
WORK
LIFT
LWL
LIGHT
DIR
STOP
POS
DISTRIB DOWN
DISTRIB UP
DOWN
UP
PTO
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D023
D050
D051
D052
D053
D081
D081a
D081b
F021
F022
F023
F024
F042
F042
I020
I021
I022
I023
I024
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Not used
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Not used
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Not used
LH rear cosmetic light
Left hand rear turn indicator
LH rear brake light
Left hand rear sidelight
Not used
LH rear hazard warning light - USA version
LH distributor DOWN button (on mudguard)
LH distributor UP button (on mudguard)
LH rear lift DOWN button (on mudguard)
LH rear lift UP button (on mudguard)
LH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
40-521
Wiring diagrams
F022
A-N 1 DIRECTION
S-V 1 EXT.DISTR.SW DW
M 1.5 GND
M 1 GND
M 1 GND
A-N 1 DIRECTION
M 0.75 GND
M 1.5 GND
I023
V 0.75 UP
V-B 0.75 UP
I022
3
-
SA-2
SA-3
I021
I020
M 0.75 GND
B 0.75 LIFT WL
M 0.75 GND
B 0.75 PTO
M 0.75 GND
3
3
2 1
1
1
2 1
1
1
2 1
A
1
D052
D081b
D081a
M 1.5 GND
S-V 1 EXT.DISTR.SW DW
B 1.5
SA-4
B-V 1 EXT.DISTR.SW UP
-
D050
L 1 DW
3 2 1
5 4
3 2 1
8 7 6
V 0.75 UP
5 4
12 11 10 9
L 1 DW
D051
B 0.75 PTO
D053
B-V 1 EXT.DISTR.SW UP
10
D081
11
D023
M 1 GND
12
F021
B 1.5
M 1.5 GND
F023
B 0.75 LIFT WL
F024
F042
I024
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077890
40-522
Wiring diagrams
5
3
D2
3
4 3
D3
D7
D6
2 1
2 1
3
4 3
2 1
D4
D6
D1
P012
3
4 3
2 1
D5
D1
4 3
D2
P007
2 1
P008
D3
4 3
P009
2 1
D4
P010
3
4 3
2 1
D5
4 3
P011
7
8
12 11 10 9
D035
P013
D7
D0066920
PLATE
WORK
LIFT
LWL
LIGHT
DIR
STOP
POS
DISTRIB DOWN
DISTRIB UP
DOWN
UP
PTO
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D026
D046
D047
D048
D049
D080
D080a
D080b
F017
F018
F019
F020
F041
F041
I015
I016
I017
I018
I019
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Not used
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Not used
RH rear cosmetic light
Right hand rear turn indicator
RH rear brake light
Right hand rear sidelight
Not used
RH rear hazard warning light - USA version
RH distributor DOWN button (on mudguard)
RH distributor UP button (on mudguard)
RH rear lift DOWN button (on mudguard)
RH rear lift UP button (on mudguard)
RH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
40-523
Wiring diagrams
12
11
10
7
4
3
5
4
12 11 10
D035
9
8
3
2
1
2 1
4 3
P013
2 1
P012
4 3
2 1
4 3
2 1
4 3
P008
P007
SA-H7
SA-L7
SA-L1
SA-L6
SA-L3
SA-L2
SA-H3
SA-H1
SA-H6
SA-H2
SA-1
SA-L4
SA-L5
SA-H5
2 1
4 3
3
4 3
2 1
4 3
2 1
40-524
P009
P011
SA-H4
P010
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0066910
Wiring diagrams
40.4.25 - 0.019.2379.4/20 - Front LH lower work lights on cab
D004
3
2
F005
D003
2
4
1
2
1
TS
IH
T.L
F006
W
LO .
W.L
4
1
F043
T. LIGHTS
3
4
2
1
D030
LOW W.L.
D0067540
LOW W.L.
T.LIGHTS
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D003
D004
D030
F005
F006
F043
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
LH sidelight
LH turn indicator
Left hand repeater headlight
40-525
Wiring diagrams
M1
G1
2
1
F005
A1
M1
F006
M1.5
M1.5
H1.5
V1.5
M1.5
G1
2
M1.5
H1.5
B1.5
V1.5
G1
A1
SA-1
D003
B1.5
M1.5
M1
D004
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
2
1
3
4
2
1
D030
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
F043
D0067550
40-526
Wiring diagrams
40.4.26 - 0.019.2379.4/20 - Front RH lower work lights on cab
D007
3
2
1 4
2 3
F003
D006
1 4
2 3
2
1
TS
IH
T.L
F004
3
1
W
LO .
W.L
F044
T. LIGHTS
3
4
2
1
D028
LOW W.L.
D0067560
LOW W.L.
T.LIGHTS
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D006
D007
D028
F003
F004
F044
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
RH sidelight
RH turn indicator
Right hand repeater headlight
40-527
Wiring diagrams
M1
G1
2
1
F003
A1
M1
F004
M1.5
M1.5
H1.5
V1.5
M1.5
G1
2
M1.5
H1.5
B1.5
V1.5
G1
A1
SA-1
D006
B1.5
M1.5
M1
D007
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
F044
2
1
D028
D0067570
M012
HAZARD
02 USA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAZARD
02 USA
9 8 7 6
5 4 3 2 1
C003
9 8 7 6
5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
D022
10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5
18 19 20
6 7 8 9
D068
D0077740
40-528
Wiring diagrams
Table 669
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C003
D022
D068
I029
M012
HAZARD 02 USA
Cab ground
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Hazard warning lights switch
Turn indicator control unit (USA)
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
6
5
7
1
B6
M 1 -31
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B7
B5
G 1.5 HAZARD IN
B4
B3
B2
R 2.5 +15
B1
B 2.5 +15
A8
A7
SA-3
SA-1
A6
A 1 TRAILER LT
A5
V-N 1 HAZARD LT
A4
A-N 1 TRAILER RH
A3
A2
R 2.5 +30
A1
B 1.5 +15
15
R 1.5 +30
B-V 1 EXTREMELY LT
14
B-L 1 EXTREMELY RH
A 1 TRAILER LT
V-N 1 HAZARD LT
A-N 1 TRAILER RH
17 16 15 14 13
6
13
18
12
8
12 11 10
4
D022
17
11
20 19 18
16
8
6
M 1 -31
10 11 12
1
13 14 15 16 17
4
18 19 20
6
D068
M 2.5 -31
SA-2
C003
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
G 1.5 HAZARD IN
B8
C1
C
C2
M 2.5 -31
B-V 1 EXTREMELY LT
B-L 1 EXTREMELY RH
7
M012
C3
I029
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077750
40-529
Wiring diagrams
40.4.28 - 0.019.2383.4/20 - Engine cowl
F014
F
F015
C
RH
AMP
F012
F016
2
F013
LT
K018
2
AMP
F011
AMP
F010
LT
F009
LT
D036
E004
K017
F008 F007
AT
RH
RH
RH
RH
LT
LT
C
F
LT
F
C
RH
AT
-
40-530
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D036
E004
F007
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F013
F014
F015
F016
K017
K018
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Horn
RH high beam headlight
RH low beam headlight
LH low beam headlight
LH high beam headlight
Rh front work light - on cowl
RH centre front work light - on engine cowl
Not used
LH centre front work light - on engine cowl
Lh front work light - on cowl
Not used
Air temperature sensor
External air temperature sensor
D0066830
Wiring diagrams
LOW BEAM LIGHTS
X10
X11
S0.75
M0.75
S0.75
M0.75
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
X2
BEAM LIGHTS
X1
GR1.5
M1.5
GR1.5
M1.5
B1.5
M1.5
B1.5
M1.5
F016
F013
K017
K018
E004
F011
F014
F015
F012
F008
F009
1
2
1
2
F007
F010
D036
V2.5
M 2.5
M0.75
GR2.5
B2.5
M 2.5
3
11
12
13
15
1
7
4
5
6
9
8
HV0.75
ZB0.75
ZV0.75
GN1
M1
M2.5
BN2.5
M2.5
GV2.5
M 2.5
S0.75
HB0.75
19
20
18
21
16
17
14
2
10
B2.5
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0066840
40-531
Wiring diagrams
40.4.29 - 0.019.2474.4/10 - Rear PTO
L009
1000E
L010
1000N
D043
EV RATIO
L011
540E
D040
EV PTO
D041
EV DIFF
L006
EV PTO
L007
EV DIFF
D0066850
EV PTO
EV DIFF
EV RATIO
EV PTO
EV DIFF
1000E
1000N
540E
40-532
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D040
D041
D043
L006
L007
L009
L010
L011
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Rear PTO control solenoid valve
Differential lock control solenoid valve
PTO 1,000 E engagement control solenoid valve
PTO 1,000N engagement control solenoid valve
PTO 540E engagement control solenoid valve
R-V0.75 EV750
V-B0.75 EV1000
V-Z0.75 EV1400
V-Z0.75 EV1400
M1 GND
M0.75 GND
1
1
D043
2 3 4 5
Wiring diagrams
SA-1
R-V0.75 EV750
M0.75 GND
L0.75 EV PTO
M0.75 -31
L0.75 EV PTO
R-L0.75 EV DIFF.
2
M0.75 -31
M0.75 -31
1
R-L0.75 EV DIFF.
M0.75 -31
M0.75 GND
V-B0.75 EV1000
L009
L010
L011
L007
D041
L006
D040
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0066860
40-533
Wiring diagrams
L012
D039
K032
D0067290
40-534
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D039
K032
L012
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Trailer braking low pressure switch
Trailer parking brake control solenoid valve
Wiring diagrams
L012
B12
2
1
mPm
A-N1
M1
1
2
3
4
1
3
4
D039
M1
H1
H-N1
A-N1
4
3
2
1
H-N1
K032
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
H1
D0067300
40-535
Wiring diagrams
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
1
Wiring connector
ISO 11786 control unit
ISO 11786 socket
ISO 11786 socket
40-536
D021
M008
P020
P020a
DESCRIPTION
M008
P020a
P020
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
D021
D0067310
Wiring diagrams
M1 -31 GND
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
L0.75 CAN H
C2
4
3
2
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
M008
B2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B8
B0.75 CAN L
L0.75 CAN H
M1 -31 GND
L1 +15
D021
C1
L1 +15
B1 LIFT POS
L1 RADAR
V1 WHEEL
G1 PTO SPEED
C1 LIFT OFF/ON
B0.75 CAN L
SA-2
B1
SA-1
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
L1 +15
M1 -31 GND
L1 RADAR
V1 WHEEL
G1 PTO SPEED
C1 LIFT OFF/ON
B1 LIFT POS
A1
P020
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
P020a
D0067320
40-537
Wiring diagrams
40.4.32 - 0.019.2617.4/70 - ISO 11783 - Cab line
E
D063
3
6
D089
TECU
TECU
51
72
50
73
94
X125 STOLL
29
5 6
M011
N012
3 4
7
28
R003
3
6
5
8
12
15
11
18
10
14
21
13
17
20
16
19
11
8
12
5
9
2
6
3B
5B
4A
6D
5C
4B
3A
5D
4C
7B
6A
8D
7C
6B
5A
7D
6C
7A
8C
8B
8A
DIODO
DIO
DO
2A
4D
3C
O014
D062
2B
15
3D
18
2C
14
1A
21
10
17
6 7 8 9
13
1B
20
2D
16
1C
19
1D
D062a
1 2 3 4
1 2
D064
4
3
O014a
2
1
4
3
2
BY25
5
2
1
BY25
5
R004
RES CAN
VEHICLE
GEARBOX
RES.
A
C
B
O015 D015
4
5
6
3
10
I030
1
2
M010
AMP
3
GEA
RBO
RES
X
.
RE
S
HIC CA
N
LE
1
4
5
14 13
AUTOG.
120
12 11 10
VE
D060
O013 O013a
luca
AUTOG.
ISO
BU
luca
luca
15
17
16
5
18
8
2
1
2
4
8
9
5
6
2
3
14
13
D069
D014
12
11
10
1
ISOBUS
D086a
D013
AGI4
14
P021 D069a
6
13
12
11
AGI4
SGR1
D086
10
9
D086b
SGR1
1 2
See diagram C
4
3
AUX
O012 O012a
AUX
H007
D0077760
ISOBUS
GEARBOX RES.
AGI4
SGR1
AUX
CAN BRIDGE ISOBUS
CAN BRIDGE ISOBUS
40-538
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D013
D014
D015
D060
D062
D062a
D063
D064
D069
D069a
D086
D086a
D086b
D089
H007
I030
J013
J014
J020
J021
J022
J023
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Monitor controls
Performance Steering system activation switch
CAN-L CANBUS ISO11783 configuration relay
CAN-H CANBUS ISO11783 configuration relay
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Stoll application relay
Wiring diagrams
Table 675
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AMP
2 3
O014
SA-30
(+30)
M 1.5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
R2_87
R2_85
6
3
10
16 17 18
5
14 13
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
1
2
3
C-N 0.75
C-N 0.75
C-N 0.75
5
6
9
3
12 11 10
4
R-N 0.75
L-B 0.75
R-N 0.75
L-B 0.75
1
2
3
4
5
6
M 0.75
A 0.75
B 0.75
1 M-N 1
2 B 0.75
3 Z 0.75
4 A 0.75
5 S 0.75
6 N 0.75
7 V 1
8 M 0.75
9 M 1
A M 1
B R-N 1
C L 0.75
D B 0.75
E
F
G
H S 0.75
J Z 0.75
L-B 1
M 1
V 0.75
G 0.75
M 0.75
1
2
3
4
G-N 0.75
G-N 0.75
M 0.75
G-N 0.75
Z-H 0.75
10
Z-N 0.75
Z 0.75
12 13 14 15
4
21
8
4
R2_86
7
3
19
7
3
R2_30
20
6
2
R1_87
Z-B 0.75
2
B 0.5
9 10 11
2 1
18
5
1
V 1
R2_87a
R1_87a
R1_85
M 2.5
M 1
M 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C 0.75
C-N 0.75
C-B 0.75
R-N 0.75
L-B 0.75
G 0.5 RS232_B
C-B 0.75
A 0.75
C 0.75
M 1
A 0.75
B 0.75
B 0.5
321
16
N 0.75
S 0.75
Z 0.75
O017
V 1
O016
V 1
R1_86
L 1
M-B 1
G-N 1
R1
H 1
R6_30
J021
J022
J023
R6_87a
R6_87
R6_86
R5_87a
R5_86
R5_87
R6_85
R5_85
R5_30
R1
M 0.5
M 0.5
J020
R4_30
R4_85
R1
M 0.5
R3_85
R3_30
R1
M 0.5
R4_87
R4_86
R4_87a
J014
R3_87a
R3_87
R3_86
R2_87
M-N 1
A 0.75
R2_87a
R2_86
R2_85
M 1
Z 0.75 R1_30
R1_85
M 0.5
6
R2_30
R1_87a
R1_87
R1_86
V 0.75
G 0.75
V 0.75
G 0.75
A 0.75
C 0.75
M-N 1
M-N 1
B 0.75
J013
6
5
5
4
12 13 14
10 11
2
1
3
2
1
2
654
17
15
3
4
F
E
14
G
D
13
H
A
12
J
C
D086b
B 0.75
A 0.75
SA-10
D069
R004
M 1
M 0.75
V 1
N 0.75
S 0.75
A 0.75
Z 0.75
B 0.75
M-N 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D069a
6
D086a
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C-N 0.75
1 L-B 1
2 R 1.5
3 L 1
4 R 1.5
5 M 1.5
6 R-N 1.5
7 C 0.75
8 A 0.75
9 B 1
10 L 1
11 A 0.75
12 B 0.75
13 G 0.75
14 V 0.75
15 M 1.5
16 M 1.5
17 L 1
18 B 1
P021
B 0.75
A 0.75
I030
D014
D086
H007
1
2
3
4
5
6
6 7 8 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1 2 3 4
R003
A 0.5
A-B 0.5
SA-8
10
CANL-10
M 1.5
S 0.75
SA-7(GND)
11
CANH-10-
L 0.75
B 0.75
CANL-11
B 0.75
L 0.75
CANH-11
M 1
O015
SCH-4
M 0.75
O013a
SA-4(GND)
CANL-17
M 1
L 0.75
B 0.75
ISOH-5
ISOL-5
4
3
2
1
B 0.75
L 0.75
4
3
2
1
O012a
O013
3
C 0.75
A 0.75
CANH-15
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
4
3
2
1
CANL-15
-
A 0.75
C 0.75
L 0.75
D060
CANH-14
CANL-16
8B
8C
8A
8D
7B
7D
7C
7A
6D
6C
6B
6A
5D
5C
5B
5A
4D
G 0.75
V 0.75
CANL-14
-
G 0.75
V 0.75
S
Z
C
A
V
G
G-N 0.75
B 0.75
-
4C
K2
CANH-17
B 0.75
L 0.75
CANH-12
CANH-16
D089
O012
CANL-12
-
SCH-1
4B
A 0.75
C 0.75
ISOL-6
R1
ISOH-6
-
ISOL-1
S 0.75
Z 0.75
A 0.75
B 0.75
V 0.75
G 0.75
- B 0.5
4A
S 0.75
Z 0.75
C 0.75
A 0.75
D064
TBC-
H-V 1
ISOH-4
3D
30
85
3C
8687a 87
30
85
3B
8687a 87
30
85
3A
8687a 87
30
85
2D
8687a 87
30
85
2C
8687a 87
30
85
O014a
ISOH-1
-
ISOL-4
M010
TBC+
A 0.75
B 0.75
A 0.75
B 0.75
0.75
0.75
0.5
2.5
1.5
SA-6
A 0.75
M 0.75
2B
ISOH-3
A1
2A
A2
1C
ISOL-3
-
B 0.75
A 0.75
1B
SA-15
-CANL-13
CANH-13
-
1D
(+15)
1A
M 1.5
R-N 1
A-B 0.5
B 0.75
L 0.75
G 0.75
V 0.75
B 0.75
A 0.75
SCH-3
-
B 0.5
D062a
A 0.75
B 0.75
M 1
Z 0.75
S 0.75
A 0.75
C 0.75
A 0.75
C 0.75
SA-RWL -
V-G 1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BY255
120
ISOL-2
-
B 0.75
A 0.75
C-N 0.75
A 0.5
C
A
S
M
R
N 0.75 D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
Z 0.75 D3
S 0.75 D2
M 0.75 D1
-31 M1 C8
A1 UP + 0.5 C7
A1 UP - 0.5 C6
HYDROLOCK 0.5 C5
COMFORT DRIVE 0.5 C4
B1 DOWN + 0.5 C3
B1 DOWN - 0.5 C2
A2 SHOVEL UP + 0.5 C1
A2 SHOVEL UP - 0.5 B8
B2 SHOVEL DOWN + 0.5 B7
B2 SHOVEL DOWN - 0.5 B6
FUNCTION 1 0.5 B5
FUNCTION 2 0.5 B4
3TH SERVICE 0.5 B3
4TH SERVICE 0.5 B2
B1
N 0.75 A8
V 1 A7
M 1 A6
B-V 1 A5
M-N 1 A4
B 0.75 A3
A 0.75 A2
M 0.75 A1
ISOH-2
K1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CANL-18
8687a 87
N012
16 17 18
19 20 21
10 11 12
13 14 15
D062
BY255
CANH-18
G-N 0.5
M-B 0.5
V 0.5
M-B 1
B 0.5
A-N 0.5
M-B 0.5
R-N 0.5
H 0.5
H 1
H 1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
4
4
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
3
2
1
D013
C 0.75
C-L 0.75
-
C-N 0.75
14 S 0.5
13 V-G 1
12 M-V 0.5
H-V 0.5
11 H-V 1
B 0.75
L 0.75
G-N 0.5
R-N 0.5
A 0.75
C 0.75
M-B 0.5
B 0.5
V 0.5
V 0.5
B 0.75
A 0.75
A-N 0.5
M-B 0.5
L 1
M-V 0.5
H-V 0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
R-N 1
M 1
R-N 1
M 1
R-N 1
M 1
Z-N 0.75
V 1
M-N 1
Z-H 0.75
94
Z 0.75 A
Z-B 0.75 B
M 1 C
D
A 0.75 E
C 0.75 F
G
H
K
J
N
L
M
1
2
D015
M011
73
72
28
51
50
L
2
29
1 2
3 4
5 6
D063
L 0.75
H 0.5
H 1
DIODE
B-V 1
AUTOG.
Microphone
ISO 11783 control unit
Electronically controlled hydraulic power steering
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
Diode connector
Diode board
CAN line termination connector
Diode board
Diode board
ISO 11783 socket in cab
RS 232 connector
ISO11783 diagnostic socket
B 0.75
M010
M011
N012
O012
O012a
O013
O013a
O014
O014a
O015
O016
O017
P021
R003
R004
C-L 0.75
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077770
K2
F2
+15 KEY
FRONT WIPER
K1
CAN BRIDGE
ISOBUS
CAN BRIDGE
ISOBUS
3
9
6
2
1
11
8
5
20A
20A
7
4
14
20A
20A
15A
20A
15A
7
20A
R7
16
18
15A
R6
10
30A
40A
12
13
15
171
40A
R4
HALF BEAM
LAMBORGHINI
1
HALF BEAM
REAR WINDOW
DEFROST
5
10
13
15
17
POSITION
FULL BEAM
NORMAL/TOP
HALF BEAM
BRAKE
5
3
2
NORMAL/TOP
FULL BEAM
F4
12
11
30A
40A
20A
14
16
18
20A
R3
10
DIODES ISOBUS
BEACON
HYDRAULIK TRAILER
BRAKE
R1-A
DIODES ISOBUS
10
15A
20A
1
11
5A
7.5A
F1-B
5A
15A
3A
15A
15A
7.5A
15A
15A
5A
10A
5A
F3
7.5A
F1-A
3A
10A
3A
15A
7.5A
3A
15A
11
20A
1
2.9939.503.0/10
15A
5A
15A
7.5A
15A
5
1
5A
7.5A
5A
5A
7.5A
3A
7.5A
5A
15A
7.5A
20
3A
10A
7.5A
20
10
15A
5A
15A
7.5A
5A
7
2
7.5A
5A
15A
1
3A
15A
+15 KEY
Wiring diagrams
J014
J020
J013
J022
J023
J021
O016
O017
See diagram C
D0077900
40-540
Wiring diagrams
40.4.33 - 0.019.3658.4/20 - Agrosky solenoid valve
L015
K037
O018a
1 2
3 4
12
O018
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
D063
G F E
H M L
2
N
1
J K D
A
B C
4
1
K038
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
M013a
M013b
K016
D0077680
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D063
K016
K037
K038
L015
M013a
M013b
O018
O018a
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Steering wheel angle sensor
Steering angle sensor (Agrosky)
AGROSKY control disable solenoid valve
Electronically controlled hydraulic power steering (grey connector)
Electronically controlled hydraulic power steering (black connector)
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
40-541
Wiring diagrams
D063
H
1
M
A
J
C 0.75 CAN-L
A 0.75 CAN-H
C 0.75 CAN-L
M 1 GND -31
SA-2
CAN-L1
-
CAN-H1
A 0.75 CAN-H
M 1 GND -31
C 0.75 CAN-L
1 2 3 4
4
3
K037
SA-1
M013b
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
A
Z 0.75 +15 SENSOR
M 1 GND -31
A 0.75 CAN-H
M013a
CAN-H2
CAN-L2
4
3
2
120
A 0.75 CAN-H
C 0.75 CAN-L
O018a
3
O018
M 1 GND -31
L015
5
6
40-542
K038
K016
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077690
Wiring diagrams
40.4.34 - 0.019.3659.4/10 - On-board monitor - Armrest
19
13
21
14
20
3
5
25
2
3
8 11 14 17 20
9 12 15 18 21
5
6
7 10 13 16 19
26
E005a
14
20
D070
21
3
AMP
5
25
7
26
13
19
E005b
D0067370
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D070
E005a
E005b
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
I-Monitor
I-Monitor
40-543
Wiring diagrams
26
26
25
25
24
23
22
21
24
23
22
21
A 0.5 MIC +
20
20
19
19
SCH-2
18
17
17
16
16
18
E005b
CAN L
8
7
CAN H
26
19
13
10
11
10
12
11
21 AMP 25
13
12
14
13
14
15
14
20
15
6
5
21
20
19
A 0.5 MIC +
M 1.5 GND
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
6
3
9 12 15 18 21
6
5
2
8 11 14 17 20
4
1
7 10 13 16 19
21
20
E005a
25
19
5
3
8
14
3
1
4
SCH-1
SA-5
26
M 1 GND
13
M 1 GND
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D070
D0067380
D049
F025
D0067390
40-544
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D049
F025
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Rear service light
Wiring diagrams
D049
V-R1
V-R1
M1
M1
2
1
F025
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0067400
N011
F035
1
2
D059
RH
1
2
10
11
RH
F036
4
12
13
14
15
5
17 18
7
8
1
2
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
P019
F034
16
F033
1
2
LH
10
11
D058
12
13
14
LH
P018
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
D0067410
LH
RH
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D058
D059
F033
F034
F035
F036
N011
P018
P019
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Left hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Windscreen wiper motor
LH rear view mirror
RH rear view mirror
40-545
Wiring diagrams
M 1.5 GND
V-B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
M 1.5 GND
1
2
1
2
F035
4
3
N011
18
F036
17
16
15
M 1.5 GND
SA-1
SA-2
D059
8
17 18
8 M 1 LED BAR -
M 1.5 GND
16
6
5
10
11
12
P019
M 1.5 GND
12 13 14 15
10
11
M 1.5 GND
12
13
14
9 10 11
M 1.5 GND
7 1 LED BAR +
G-N
6 COMAND MIRRORS UP\DOWN BIG (RH)
G 0.75
M 1.5 GND
M 1.5 GND
14
13
12
M 1.5 GND
11
10
D058
M 1.5 GND
M 1 LED BAR -
4 5 6
M 1 LED BAR -
12 13 14
SA-4
10 11
7 8 9
6
5
10
11
12
1
2
1 2 3
F034
1
2
10
4 5 6
F033
11
1 2 3
P018
12
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067420
F029
1
2
AMP
3
D055
F030
1
2
D0067430
40-546
Wiring diagrams
Table 680
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F030
D055
F029
F030
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Right hand inner rear work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer rear work light (on cab roof)
1
2
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
D055
M1.5 GND
AMP
2 3
F029
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067440
40-547
Wiring diagrams
40.4.38 - 0.019.4689.4/20 - LH rear work lights on cab roof
F032
1
2
AMP
3
D056
F031
1
2
D0067431
40-548
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D056
F031
F032
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Left hand inner rear work light (on cab roof)
Left hand outer rear work light (on cab roof)
Wiring diagrams
F032
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
D056
M1.5 GND
AMP
2 3
F031
1
2
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067441
40-549
6
5
4
1
2
3
Wiring diagrams
N005
D038
6
5
4
1
2
3
2 1
14 13
7 6 5 4 3
12 11 10 9 8
D0067450
N006
40-550
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D038
N005
N006
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Left hand cab suspension
Right hand cab suspension
1
2
3
Wiring diagrams
6
5
4
N005
D038
14
13
12
11
10
9
5
4
SA-2
SA-1
1
2
3
5
4
6
5
4
N006
2 1
14 13
7 6 5 4 3
12 11 10 9 8
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0067460
2
1
10
11
RH
F036
F035
N011
4
12
13
14
D059
15
RH
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 2 3
LH
10
11
12
13
14
4 5 6
D058
LH
7
8
9
6
5
4
3
10
11
12
P018
17 18
F034
F033
16
P019
D0067470
Fig. 3871 - Front top work lights on cab - LED version (1/2)
40-551
Wiring diagrams
Table 683
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
LH
RH
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D058
D059
F033
F034
F035
F036
N011
P018
P019
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Left hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Windscreen wiper motor
LH rear view mirror
RH rear view mirror
M 1.5 GND
M 1.5 GND
M 1.5 GND
F035
N011
17
16
15
10
M 1.5 GND
M 1 LED BAR -
SA-1
SA-2
D059
8
17 18
11
16
15
12
14
M 1.5 GND
13
12
M 1.5 GND
10
11
M 1.5 GND
11
12
13
10
14
10
11
12
P019
F036
18
M 1.5 GND
B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
4
3
2
1
M 1.5 GND
12
11
M 1 LED BAR -
D058
8
9
12
7
10
11
M 1.5 GND
4 5 6
13
10
12 13 14
14
M 1.5 GND
B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
10 11
M 1 LED BAR -
1 2 3
F033
10
4 5 6
F034
11
1 2 3
P018
12
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067480
Fig. 3872 - Front top work lights on cab - LED version (2/2)
40-552
Wiring diagrams
1
2
F031
1
2
2 3 4
AMP
1 2 3 4
F032
D056
D0067710
Fig. 3873 - LH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version (1/2)
Table 684
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D056
F031
F032
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Left hand inner rear work light (on cab roof)
Left hand outer rear work light (on cab roof)
40-553
1
2
D056
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
AMP
2 3
F031
F032
Wiring diagrams
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067720
Fig. 3874 - LH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version (2/2)
40-554
1
2
F029
Wiring diagrams
1
2
2 3 4
AMP
1 2 3 4
F030
D055
D0067490
Fig. 3875 - RH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version (1/2)
Table 685
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D055
F029
F030
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Right hand inner rear work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer rear work light (on cab roof)
40-555
1
2
D055
M1.5 GND
M1.5 GND
AMP
2 3
F029
F030
Wiring diagrams
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0067500
Fig. 3876 - RH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version (2/2)
40-556
Wiring diagrams
D016
4
3
2
1
5
10
K055
2 1
3
1
K056
4
3
2
1
13
26 25 24 23 22
13 12 11 10
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
8
M015
D0066810
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D016
K055
K056
M015
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Sunlight sensor
Temperature sensor
Air conditioning control unit (blue connector)
40-557
Wiring diagrams
4
2
1
M-N0.75 ATTUATORE
R-N0.75 ATTUATORE
K056
13
2
3
4
5
6
7
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
8
9
B0.75 ATTUATORE
13 12 11 10
C-N0.75 ATTUATORE
26 25 24 23 22
K055
M015
17
16
15
14
10
C-N0.75 ATTUATORE
B0.75 ATTUATORE
B0.75 SW BINARY
18
10
21
M-N0.75 ATTUATORE
22
R-N0.75 ATTUATORE
24
B0.75 SW BINARY
25
26
D016
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0066820
10
11
12
M009
D071
1
12
11
10
11
12
10
M009a
D0077820
40-558
Wiring diagrams
Table 687
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
12
M009
11
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D071
M009
M009a
Wiring connector
AGROSKY Antenna
AGROSKY Antenna
B 1 SCH
V 0.5 RS232 TX RS232-B
10
B 1 SCH
1
5
6
8
7
SCH-4
M009a
12
B 1 SCH
11
V 0.5 RS232 TX
10
G 0.5 RS232 RX
M 0.75 GND
B 1 SCH
G 0.5 RS232 RX
10
V 0.5 RS232 TX
11
12
D071
2
M 0.75 GND
SA-1
10
12
11
9 10 11 12
2
3
5
8
7
9 10 11 12
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077830
40-559
Wiring diagrams
40.4.45 - 0.019.9826.4/30 - Agrosky - I-Monitor
19
16
20
13
10
17
21
14
18
11
15
8
12
5
9
2
6
D062
N012
1
4
2
5
3
6
D013
M010
2
8
3
9
4
10 11
O013a
12 13 14
TO
G.
AU
120
1
2
3
4
O013
1
2
3
4
1
2
12 11 10
12 13 14 15
5
6
4
1
O012
D014
D072
12
0
O012a
16 17 18
14 13
AUTOG.
9 10 11
D060
4
3
2
1
2
6
3
7
5
9
R003
D086
4
1
5
2
6
3
3
6
2
1
R1
SG
2
6
SGR1
I4
AG
AU
D086b
D086a
2
1
3
4
AGI4
H007
AUX
D0077870
AGI4
SGR1
AUX
AUTOG.
40-560
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D013
D014
D060
D060
D062
D072
D086
D086a
D086b
H007
M010
N012
O012
O012a
O013
O013a
R003
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Not used
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Monitor controls
Microphone
Electronically controlled hydraulic power steering
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
CAN line termination connector
RS 232 connector
Wiring diagrams
H007
1 2 3 4
R 2.5 +30
CAN-L AUX
CAN-H AUX
CANL-13
M 1.5 GND
M 1 GND
M 1.5 GND
CAN H VEHICLE
R 1.5 +30
R 2.5 +30
SA-1
L 0.75 +15
R 1.5 +30
SA-4
M 1 GND
CANL-14
CANH-14
CANH-13
V 0.5 RS232 TX
CANL-17
SCH-1
G 0.5 RS232 RX
CANH-17
V 0.5 RS232 TX
- CANL-16
SCH-4
M 1 GND
V 0.5 RS232 TX
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9
R003
CANH-16
G 0.5 RS232 RX
C-N 0.75 + ANT
CAN-L AUX
SA-3
7
2
14 13
6
12 11 10
4
8
3
7
1
120
6
5
L-B 0.75 +15 ANTENNA
4
3
R-N 0.75 +30 ANTENNA 2
1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
D086a
O012
O012a
120
CAN-H AUX
D014
G 0.5 RS232 RX
CAN-H AUX
CAN L VEHICLE
10 11 12
CAN-L AUX
CAN-H AUX
16 17 18
CAN L VEHICLE
C 0.75 CAN L AUTOG.
19 20 21
CAN H VEHICLE
A 0.75 CAN H AUTOG.
13 14 15
CAN-L AUX
V 0.5 RS232 TX
CAN-L AUX
CAN-H AUX
16 17 18
M 1.5 GND
SCH-3
SA-2
G 0.5 RS232 RX
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 13 14 15
M 1.5 GND
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
-
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
CANH-12
D086
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
C-N 0.75 + ANTENNA COM 3
C-N 0.75 + ANTENNA COM 2
C-N 0.75 + ANTENNA COM 1
CANL-12
-
CAN L VEHICLE
CAN H VEHICLE
M 1 GND
D072
D086b
R 1.5 +30
5
4
3
2
1
9 10 11
D060
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L 0.75 +15
M 1.5 GND
SA-6
M 1 GND
M 1 GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D062
M 2.5 GND
21
20
19
18
17
16
15 C-N 0.75 + ANT (MON/TECO IN)
14 A 0.5 MIC +
13
12
11
10
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
2 1
N012
6
5
4
3
2
1
D013
M010
O013
O013a
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077870
40-561
Wiring diagrams
40.4.46 - 0.019.9827.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - LED version with Agrosky
D071
4
6
7
10
11
12
ANTENNA
N011
1
2
F035
2 1
ANTENNA
4 1
3 2
2
3
RH
1
2
9 10 11
4 3 2
4 3 2 1
F036
2 1
O013c
4
12 13 14 15
5
6
7
RH
16 17 18
7
8
9
10
6
5
4
3
2
11
12
P019
D059
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
2 1
13
2 1
12
4
11
14
1
1
10 11
4
5
6
12 13 14
D058
LH
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
40-562
10
456
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
LH
D00778060
Fig. 3883 - Front work lights on cab roof - LED version with Agrosky (1/2)
Table 689
LH
RH
D060
123
P018
F034
F033
1 2 3 4
O013b
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D058
D059
D060
D071
F033
F034
F035
F036
N011
O013b
O013b
O013c
P018
P019
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Left hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Windscreen wiper motor
Not used
Wiring connector
CAN line termination connector
LH rear view mirror
RH rear view mirror
Wiring diagrams
O013b
3
4
1
2
1
1
O013c
11 RS232 TX
D071
10 RS232 RX
9
B 1 SCH
RS232 TX
12 C 0.75 + ANT.
SCH
10 11
4
5
6
12 13 14
N011
CAN-H1
6
5
4
10
11
12
4
5
6
12 13 14
1
2
2
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
6
5
10
11
12
1
10 11
16 17 18
12 13 14 15
D059
D058
6
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
18
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
M 1 GND
N-B 1 FRONT WORK LIGHT
F034
2
1
2
1
F033
SA-4
M
- 1 GND MIRROR DEFROST BIG
Z 1 +15 MIRROR DEFROST BIG
M 1 GND MIRROR DEFROST SMALL
SA-3
Z 1 +15 MIRROR DEFROST SMALL
M 0.5 LED BAR G-N 0.5 LED BAR +
M-B 0.5 COMAND MIRROR UP/DOWN BIG (LT)
B-N 0.5 COMAND MIRROR DX/SX BIG (LT)
R 0.5 COMAND MIRROR COMMON BIG (LT)
B-C 0.5 COMAND MIRROR UP/DOWN SMALL (LT)
C-B 0.5 COMAND MIRROR DX/SX SMALL (LT)
G-R 0.5 COMAND MIRROR COMMON SMALL (LT)
M 1 GND
V-B 1 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
P018
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
9 10 11
P019
F036
F035
1
2
3
4
SCH-1
CAN-L1
SCH
CAN-H2
M 0.75 GND
RS232 RX
D060
3
CAN-L2
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C 0.75 + ANT.
G 0.5 RS232 RX
V 0.5 RS232 TX
Z 0.75 CAN-L ISOBUS
S 0.75 CAN-H ISOBUS
M 0.75 GND
C 0.75 CAN-L AUTOG.
A 0.75 CAN-H AUTOG.
SCH-2
M 1 GND
B 1 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
M 1 GND
B-N 1 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078070
Fig. 3884 - Front work lights on cab roof - LED version with Agrosky (2/2)
40-563
Wiring diagrams
40.4.47 - 0.019.9828.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - Version with Agrosky
D071
8
N011
12
11
10
ANTENNA
ante
nna
F035
1
2
D059
RH
1
2
1
10
11
RH
F036
4
12
13
14
15
5
7
8
17 18
7
8
9
10
8
3
10
5
4
3
2
1
3
4
7
1
11
12
11
12
4
13
14
D060
D058
F034
LH
1
2
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
10 11 12 13 14
4 5 6
LH
1 2 3
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
P018
F033
16
P019
D0077990
Fig. 3885 - Front work lights on cab roof - Version with Agrosky (1/2)
Table 690
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
LH
RH
antenna
40-564
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D058
D059
D060
D071
F033
F034
F035
F036
N011
P018
P019
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Left hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Left hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand outer front work light (on cab roof)
Right hand inner front work light (on cab roof)
Windscreen wiper motor
LH rear view mirror
RH rear view mirror
Wiring diagrams
D071
12
11
RS232 TX
10
RS232 RX
B 1 SCH
10 11
4
5
6
12 13 14
N011
4
7
8
6
5
4
10
11
12
12 13 14 15
5
6
7
8
16 17 18
10 11
4
5
6
12 13 14
7
8
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
6
5
10
11
12
2 M 1.5 GND
1 B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
D058
4
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D059
2
SA-1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 M 1.5 GND
1 B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
F034
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F033
P018
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 M 1.5 GND
1 N-B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT
9 10 11
P019
10
F036
2 M 1.5 GND
1 V-B 1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
1
2
11
F035
1
2
3
4
B 1 SCH
V 0.5 RS232 TX
G 0.5 RS232 RX
C-N 0.75 + ANT
SCH-1
SCH
M 0.75 GND
D060
5
RS232 RX
RS232 TX
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SCH
SCH-2
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078000
Fig. 3886 - Front work lights on cab roof - Version with Agrosky (2/2)
D071
12
11
10
9
8
7
M009
10
11
12
D0077950
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D071
M009
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
AGROSKY Antenna
40-565
Wiring diagrams
12
G 0.5 RS232 RX
V 0.5 RS232 TX
M 0.75 GND
SA-1
M 0.75 GND
M009
D071
2
10
SCH-1
SCH-2
11
B 1 SCH
SCH
10
10
V 0.5 RS232 TX
G 0.5 RS232 RX
12
M 0.75 GND
11
11
12
2
1
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077960
F037
1 4
2 3
D030
1
D0057907
LOW W.L.
T.LIGHTS
40-566
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D003
D004
D030
F005
F005a
F043
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
LH sidelight
LH sidelight
Left hand repeater headlight
Wiring diagrams
1
D030
2
3
VR1
M1
1
2
F037
D0067700
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Viole
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
F038
1 4
2 3
D028
1
D0057906
LOW W.L.
T.LIGHTS
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D006
D007
D028
F003
F003a
F044
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
RH sidelight
RH sidelight
Right hand repeater headlight
40-567
Wiring diagrams
1
D028
2
3
VR1
M1
1
2
F038
D0058404
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
F037
2
1
1
D029a
1
D029
2
1
D030
2
1
2
1
F006
D0078041
40-568
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D029
D029a
D030
F006
F037
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
LH turn indicator
Lh front work light (on arm)
Wiring diagrams
2
M 1.5 GND
D029
A 1 HAZARD RH (USA)
M 1.5 GND
SA-1
D030
M 1 GND
F006
A 1 HAZARD RH (USA)
M 1 GND
M 1 GND
2
1
F037
D029a
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078051
F038
2
1
1
D027a
1
D027
2
1
D028
2
1
2
1
F004
D0078040
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D027
D027a
D028
F004
F038
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
RH turn indicator
Rh front work light (on arm)
40-569
Wiring diagrams
2
M 1.5 GND
D027
A 1 HAZARD RH (USA)
M 1.5 GND
SA-1
D028
M 1 GND
F004
A 1 HAZARD RH (USA)
M 1 GND
M 1 GND
2
1
F038
D027a
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078050
1
2
4
3
D090
4
1
2
3
K039
D0077930
40-570
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D090
K039
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Brake hydraulic system pressure sensor - 60 Km/h
Wiring diagrams
4
M 0.75 GND
1
2
4
3
D090
M 0.75 GND
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
K039
1
CAN-L
CAN-H
D0077940
I003
I001
RIGHT
1
I004
1
4
G006
2
1
5A
3B
2B
3A
1C
1B
1D
3D
6A
5D
8A
6
5
4
3
2
1
7D
8D
8C
8B
6D
7C
6C
7B
6B
7A
4D
5C
4C
5B
4B
5A
2D
3C
2C
3B
2B
3A
1C
1B
TOP LH
C003
RH
ICE
RV
4
STOOL
4 5
6
1 2
3
AMBIENT SX
LO
W LT
6
5
3
4
2
1
FR
O003a
K002
FR LOWLT
D003
120
AMBIENT SX
P001
C003a
STOOL
D010
O003
SE
1A
2A
4A
6A
8A
94
72
50
28
1A
2A
7A
2C
6B
3C
6C
7B
2D
4A
7C
4B
14
16
13
15
10
12
9
11
8
7
6D
5B
8B
4C
8C
5C
1A
1B
1C
1D
2A
2B 3A
2C
2D 3C 3B
1A
3D
4A
1B
4B
4C 5B 5A
2A
4D 5C
2B 3A
5D
2C
6A
2D 3C 3B
6B 7A
6C
3D
4A
6D 7C 7B
4B
7D
4C 5B 5A
8A
4D 5C
8B
8C
5D
6A
8D
6B 7A
6C
6D 7C 7B
7D
8A
8B
1C
7D
8D
4D
1D
3D
5D
8C
D007
1D
D009
RH
8D
FR LOW
G007
3
1
1
2
K001
73
51
29
7
4
3
TOP LH RH
SERVICE
5
FR LOWRH
1
14
1
15
2
16
17
4
13
18
5
19
6
20
7
21
8
22
9
23
10
24
11
25
12
26
13
31
21
32
11
22
33
12
23
34
13
24
35
14
25
10
36
15
26
37
16
27
38
17
28
39
18
29
40
19
30
DX
18
20
22
17
19
21
20
10
EN
BI
P002
M003
D008
A
AM
D001
E003
D006
AMBIENT DX
E002
6 5
4 3
12 11
10 9
LEFT
FT
RI
GH
LE
E001
8
P
TO
LH
LT
D004
PET
LH
K003
O002
To sheet 2
CAR
4
3
2
1
4
22
1
8D
8C
7D
6D
91
57
74
2D
40
23
5A
4A
3B
2B
1C
7A
6A
5B
4B
3C
2C
1D
8A
7B
6B
5C
4C
8B
7C
6C
5D
4D
3D
3A
2A
1B
24 41
4
M002a
58
75
1A
1 41
7 013 16
2 5 81
1
14 17
3 61
9 2 1518
21
42
63
84
D012
O002a
105
CARPET LH
43
F001
85
64
I002
TOP LH LT
120
M002
INE
ENG
16
13
10 14 17
11 1518
9 12
8
ENGINE
120
O001
M001
O001a
1 4
2 5 7 10
3 6 8 11 13
9 12 14
15
15
14
13
21
20
19
12
11
10
18
17
16
27
26
25
33
32
31
24
23
22
30
29
28
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
D011
1 4 7 1013 16
2 5 8 1114 17
3 6 9 12 1518
M001b
34
M001a
M001c
D0077590
40-571
Wiring diagrams
Table 697
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F3-1
F3-2
F3-3
F3-4
F3-5
F3-6
F3-7
F3-8
F3-9
F3-10
F1-A-1
F1-A-2 2
F1-A-3
F1-A-4
F1-A-5
F1-A-6
F1-A-7
F1-A-8
F1-A-9
F1-A-10
F1-A-11
F1-A-12
F1-A-13
F1-A-14
F1-A-15
F1-A-16
F1-A-17
F1-A-18
F1-A-19
F1-A-20
F4-1-4
F4-2-5
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Ba001
Ba002
Ba003
Ba004
Ba005
Ba006
Ba007
Ba008
Ba009
Ba010
Bb001
Bb002
Bb003
Bb004
Bb005
Bb006
Bb007
Bb008
Bb009
Bb010
Bb011
Bb012
Bb013
Bb014
Bb015
Bb016
Bb017
Bb018
Bb019
Bb020
Bc001
Bc002
15A Fuse - Lights fuse and power outlet socket (F3/1, +30)
3A Fuse - Work Display Fuse (F3/2, +30)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning compressor fuse (F3/3)
5A fuse - Tierra fuse (F3/4, +30)
15A Fuse - Rear work light fuse (F3/5)
15A Fuse - Rear work light fuse (F3/6)
5A fuse - Tierra fuse (F3/7, +15)
5A fuse - Fuse (F3/8, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Air conditioning fuse (F3/9, +15)
15A Fuse - U.S.A. trailer lights fuse (F3/10, +15)
10A Fuse - ISO 11786 (F1-A/1, +15)
5A Fuse - EPB (F1-A/2, +15)
15A Fuse - Windscreen wiper (F1-A/3, +15)
3A Fuse - Cluster (F1-A/4, +15)
7.5A Fuse - HLHP control unit (F1-A/5, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Pneumatic seat (F1-A/6, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Engine (F1-A/7, +15)
15A Fuse - EU/USA emergency lights (F1-A/8, +15)
3A Fuse - iMonitor + MMI (F1-A/9, +15)
3A Fuse - ISOBUS 11783 (F1-A/10, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Rear view mirrors (F1-A/11, +15)
10A Fuse - Rear windscreen wiper (F1-A/12, +15)
15A Fuse - Brake lights (F1-A/13, +15)
3A Fuse - Work light display (F1-A/14, +15)
5A Fuse - Transmission (F1-A/15, +15)
7.5A Fuse - Radar/PTO/distributors (F1-A/16, +15)
5A Fuse - SGR Transmission (F1-A/17, +15)
5A Fuse - Radio (F1-A/18, +15)
7.5A Fuse - External electric power outlet sockets (F1-A/19, +15)
3A Fuse - Ignition key (F1-A/20, +15)
20A fuse - Webasto (heater) (F4/1-4, +30)
20A Fuse - Low rear work light relay protection (F4/2-5, +30)
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Table 698
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F4-3-6
F4-8-11
F4-13-14
F4-17-18
R6-1-5
R6-2-6
R6-4-8
F1-B-1
F1-B-2
F1-B-3
F1-B-4
F1-B-5
F1-B-6
F1-B-7
F1-B-8
F1-B-9
F1-B-10
F1-B-11
F1-B-12
F1-B-13
F1-B-14
F1-B-15
F1-B-16
F1-B-17
40-572
Bc003
Bc008
Bc013
Bc017
Be001
Be002
Be004
Bf001
Bf002
Bf003
Bf004
Bf005
Bf006
Bf007
Bf008
Bf009
Bf010
Bf011
Bf012
Bf013
Bf014
Bf015
Bf016
Bf017
Wiring diagrams
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F1-B-18
F1-B-19
F1-B-20
F2-1-4
F2-2-5
F2-3-6
F2-7-10
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Bf018
Bf019
Bf020
Bm001
Bm002
Bm003
Bm007
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Table 699
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
F2-8-11
F2-9-12
F2-13-14
F2-15-16
F2-17-18
FR LOW LT
TOP LH LT
FR LOW RH
TOP LH RH
STOOL
ISO BUS
MON MMI
ISO 11783
Bm008
Bm009
Bm013
Bm015
Bm017
C002
C003
C003a
C003b
D001
D002
D003
D004
D006
D007
D008
D009
D010
D011
D012
D013
D014
D014a
D015
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Table 700
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
A/C
ISO 11786
EU CONF.
USA CONF.
WEBASTO
TIERRA
EXTER.LIGHT
CARPET LH
D015a
D016
D021
D022
D023
D024
D025
D026
D046
D068
D073
D074
D075
D076
D077
D077a
D078
D079
E001
E002
E003
F001
G001
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector (yellow)
Wiring connector (brown)
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Configuration connector
Configuration connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
Work Display
LH carpet light
Cab courtesy light
40-573
Wiring diagrams
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
AMBIENT RH
AMBIENT LH
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
G001a
G006
G007
H001
H001a
H002
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Table 701
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
I001
I002
RIGHT
I003
LEFT
I004
I006
SWITCH COM
I007
LIGHT SW
I008
TOP SW
I009
PTO SEL
I010
LIFT SW
I011
SUSP. CAB
I012
+15 KEY
Ja001
LIFT SERVICE W.L.
Jd001
REAR WINDOW DE- Jd003
FROST
HALF BEAM LAMBO- Jd006
RGHINI
REAR ROFF W.L.
Je001
FRONT ROFF W.L.
Je002
FRONT LOW W.L.
Jg001
AUX TRAILER W.L.
Jg002
REAR LOW W.L.
Jg003
HYDRAULIC TRAILER Jg004
BRAKE
BEACON
Jg006
NORMAL/TOP
FULL Jh001
BEAM
BRAKE
Jh002
NORMAL/TOP
HALF Jh003
BEAM
FULL BEAM
Jh004
POSITION
Jh005
HALF BEAM
Jh006
+15 KEY
Jn001
FRONT WIPER
Jn002
Table 702
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
40-574
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
K001
K002
K003
K004
M001
M001a
M001b
M001c
M002
M002a
M003
M003
DESCRIPTION
Wiring diagrams
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
M004
N013
O001
O001a
O002
O002a
O003
O003a
O004
O004a
O005
P001
P002
P003
P004
R001
R002
Engine
CAN AUX
11
D076
10
9
12
11
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
12
H001a
8
7
6
D075
4
3
2
1
H001
G001
10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17 18
19 20 21
N013
G001a
3
2
K004
1
3
2
1
P003
1 2
D046
11
9
4
HT
IG
10 9
SUSP. CAB
7
4
5
8
6
1
10
7
7
4
1
WEBASTO
10
I010
SUSP. CAB
LIFT SW
I011 I012
9 10 11
12 13 14
2
3
10
PTO SEL
D073
ISO 11786
1 2 3
5 6 7
LIFT SW
CLIMA
D021
P004
SE
PT
O
EXTER. LIGHT
CLIMA
13
7 10
1 4 8 1114
2 5 9 12 15
3 6
2
1
MA B
L N PC
KUV RD
J T S E
HG F
12
5
11
R.L
10
TE
D079
D016
R002 R001
EX
12
10
D026
4
3
2
1
D074
I007
O004a
CAN AUX
SWITCH COM
20
SWITCH COM
17
NF.
CO
18
19
EU
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CAN AUX
D022
O004
2
78
See diagram B
120
11
TO
BAS
WE
IS
O
See diagram A
To sheet 1
EU CONF.
US
1
2
NF
A CO
D068
3 2
30
P
X
7
4
7
8
10
9
12
11
10
15
14
13
18
17
16
21
20
19
9
12
8
7
11
10
15
14
13
18
17
16
21
20
19
S
12 11 9
10
5
8
3
7
2
6
1
10
1
2
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
5 4
50
15
21 9
19 7
13 1
15 3
14 2
16 4
17 5
18 6
23 11
24 12
22 10
20 8
4
8
6
4
3
8 7
6
18 17
16
14 13
6
10
12 11
I009
TOP SW
LIGHT SW
8
3
7
1
15 14
13 12
11 10
4
9
1
MON MMI
D014
H002
TIERRA
TOP SW
LIGHT SW
I006
ISO BUS
1178
TIERRA
D078
MON MMI
ISO
ISO 11783
1
1
AMP
2 3
D013
ISO BUS
D077a
O005
13
12
11
D015
D015a
M004
D002
USA CONF.
C003b
C002
AMP
2 3
D014a
4
D077
D0077600
40-575
Je001
Jd001
Je002
15A
3
15A
Ja001
Bc003
Bc001
Jd003
Jd006
Be001
Be002
Jg001
Jn001
+15 KEY
Jg002
Jg004
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
FRONT WIPER
Bc008 Bc002
Jh001
Jh002
Jh003
Jh004
Jh005
Jh006
K1
HALF BEAM
CAN BRIDGE
ISOBUS
DIODES ISOBUS
NORMAL/TOP
HALF BEAM
CAN BRIDGE
ISOBUS
POSITION
R1-A
11
20
10
7.5A
15A
5A
5A
7.5A
3A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
5A
10A
5A
15A
5A
15A
7.5A
15A
F1-B
F3
15A
11
20
10
K2
7.5A
5A
5A
15A
7.5A
15A
5A
7.5A
3A
15A
DIODES ISOBUS
6
2
BRAKE
R3
7.5A
10A
15A
3A
5A
7.5A
5A
5A
7.5A
3A
F2
F1-A
3A
BEACON
R7
9
6
10
HYDRAULIK TRAILER
BRAKE
5
HALF BEAM
LAMBORGHINI
8
5
FULL BEAM
7
4
12
NORMAL/TOP
FULL BEAM
11
13
30A
10
14
15
F4
3A
15A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
15A
5A
10A
Bf010 Bf011
Bf008 Bf013
Bf009 Bf012
Bf006 Bf015
Bf007 Bf014
Bm013
15A
40A
171
20A
Bf003 Bf018
Bf004 Bf017
Bf005 Bf016
REAR WINDOW
DEFROST
40A
16
18
R4
20A
Bm015
Bf001 Bf020
Bf002 Bf019
12
20A
Bm017
2
5
11
+15 KEY
R6
5
4
10
30A
40A
20A
Bb010 Bb011
Bb009 Bb012
Bb008 Bb013
Bb007 Bb014
Bb006 Bb015
Bc013
13
Bc017
14
15
17
40-576
16
18
2.9939.503.0/10
Wiring diagrams
See diagram A
Jg003
Jg006
Bm009 Bm003
Bm008 Bm002
Bm007 Bm001
Jn002
Be004
D0077670
Wiring diagrams
40.4.55 - 0.020.8664.4 - RH transmission
A001a
D+
K029
K030
FZW SPEED
3
1
2
3
D043
K024
WEBASTO
L017
D044
6
3
2 1
CO.PA.
DR
HY
SW
TEM. SENS.
TEM.SENS.
K027
OIL F.P.
OIL F.P.
2
SA
PTO
RATIO
K025
K028
CO.PA.
C002
USA
EV FZW
D042
PTO RATIO
HYDR SW
EV FZW
P014
D045
10 11 12
9
4
8
5
12 11 10 9
7
6
PO
S
FRON
FZWEED
SP
WEBASTO
D093
D093a
D+
POS FRONT
T
AF
DR GHT
RI
R
2
BR
BO AK.
DY
K020
R
SG
A
C
B
1
LIMP
RADAR
HYDRY
M006
STEER
BRAK. BODY
3A 3B 3C 3D
4A 4B 4C 4D
7A 7B 7C 7D
2A 2B 2C 2D
6A 6B 6C 6D
5A 5B 5C 5D
8A 8B 8C 8D
1A 1B 1C 1D
3A 3B 3C 3D
4A 4B 4C 4D
7A 7B 7C 7D
K022
D039
AIR
6A 6B 6C 6D
K026
DIF
2A 2B 2C 2D
EV DOWN
EV
5A 5B 5C 5D
D008
RADAR
L008
1A 1B 1C 1D
8A 8B 8C 8D
LIM
HYDRY
AIR
EV DO
WN
DRAFT RIGHT
D038
D040
L005
CABIN
1
9
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 2
IA
K023
4 5 6 7
3
EV PTO
SS
PO
RE S.
AR
RU
K021
STEER
13 14
EV DIFF
8 9 10 11 12
CABIN
D041
M005
SGR
RUSSIA
EV PTO
POS. REAR
D0077630
R
CABIN
HYDRY
EV PTO
EV DIFF
USA
PTO RATIO
CO.PA.
EV FZW
WEBASTO
LIMP
STEER
BRAK.BODY
POS. REAR
HYDR SW
DRAFT RIGHT
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A001a
C002
D008
D038
D039
D040
D041
D042
D043
D044
D045
D093
D093a
K020
K021
K022
K023
K024
K025
DESCRIPTION
Alternator D+
Engine ground
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Not used
Not used
Steering system pressure switch
Brakes circuit pressure sensor
Rear lifter position sensor
Not used
Lift draft sensor (RH)
40-577
Wiring diagrams
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
M 1 GND
K027
R 1
R 1
L 1
6L
10
11
L 1 DENSO ECU
12
4
11
M 2.5 GND 10
12
B_C1
B_A8
B_C6
B_C5
D008
B_C4
B_C3
B_C2
B_B8
B_B7
B_B6
B_B5
B_B4
B_B3
B_B2
B_B1
B_A7
B_A6
B_A5
B_A4
B_A3
B_A2
B_A1
A_D8
A_D7
3A 3B 3C 3D
A_D6
A_D5
A_D4
A_D3
A_D2
4A 4B 4C 4D
R-L0.75 EV DF
M0.75 EV REAR PTO PROP.
B_C7
7A 7B 7C 7D
SA-1
B_C8
6A 6B 6C 6D
SA-4
B_D1
2A 2B 2C 2D
SA-5
B_D2
5A 5B 5C 5D
B_D3
1A 1B 1C 1D
B_D4
2A 2B 2C 2D
B_D5
1A 1B 1C 1D
B_D6
8A 8B 8C 8D
B_D7
3A 3B 3C 3D
B_D8
SA-6
SA-2
4A 4B 4C 4D
7A 7B 7C 7D
6A 6B 6C 6D
12 11 10 9
5A 5B 5C 5D
D093a
1
2
3
1
2
3
10 11 12
D093
1
2
8A 8B 8C 8D
A_D1
A_C8
A_C7
A_C6
A_C5
A_C4
A_C3
A_C2
A_C1
A_B8
A_B7
3
2
L005
L008
D041
K023
D040
H-N0.75 AIR
L017
K026
K025
K024
D042
2
1
M1 GND
K030
A001a
VISTA A
1
3
P014
L1 D+
K029
SGR
RADAR
RADAR
K028
K026
K027
K028
K029
K030
L005
L008
L017
M005
M006
M006
P014
AIR
OIL F.P.
TEM.SENS.
POS FRONT
FZW SPEED
RUSSIA
EV DOWN
DESCRIPTION
D045
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
SA-3
A_B6
A_A8
A_A3
M1 GND
A_B5
A_B4
A_B3
A_B2
A_B1
A_A7
A_A6
A_A5
A_A4
A_A2
A_A1
X181
GND [32]
M-L1 REVERSE
R-V0.75 WM LIMP HOME
M-G1 FRONT
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
S-G0.75 CONFORT PK UP
S0.75 CONFORT PK DW
G-N0.75 +58
A0.75 DIRECTION LEFT
A-N0.75 DIRECTION RIGHT
M0.75 GND CONFORT
2
2
C002
M 2.5 GND
>P.B.T.P.<
3
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
K020
1
9
10 2
11 3
M005
12 4
Viola/Violet
13 5
Azzurr o/Blue
14 6
Arancio/Orange
15 7
Verde/Green
16 8
Marrone/Brown
M006
K022
K021
1 2
D038
D044
5
13 14
8 9 10 11 12
3 4 5 6 7
D039
40-578
A B
C
A
D043
D0077640
Wiring diagrams
40.4.56 - 0.020.8854.4 - Windscreen washer pumps
N018
2
FP
2
1
FP
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
D075
RP
2
1
2
1
N019
RP
D0077720
FP
RP
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D075
N018
N019
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Windscreen washer pump
Rear windscreen washer pump
40-579
Wiring diagrams
N019
N018
M 1 GND
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D075
40-580
M 1 GND
4
Bianco/White
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Verde/Green
Arancio/Orange
Marrone/Brown
SA-1
M 1 GND
D0077730
Wiring diagrams
40.4.57 - 0.020.8862.4 - Roof
P028
ANTENNA
NN
TE
AN
A
G004
D057
P017
I028
D056
4
6 5 4
6 5 4
3 2 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
LH
D058
LH
3 2 1
G003
I026
DEFROST
21
43
7
65
98
110
121
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
G005
TH
10
10
MO
ER
LL
CA
LIGHT BAR
I031
LIGHT BAR
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
RH
O011
RH
THERMO CALL
DEFROST
H006
N010
D059
M017
D094
D055
CAN RADIO
8
7
10 11 12
16 17 18
19 20 21
13 14 15
8
7
10 11 12
16 17 18
19 20 21
13 14 15
5
2
D024
9 13
10 14
D025
G002
1115
12 16
4
7
H005
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
10
C005
I027
P016
CA
RA N
DIO
P026
2
D054
D0077650
LH
LH
RH
RH
CAN RADIO
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
C005
D024
D025
D054
D055
D055
D056
D056
D057
D058
D058
D059
D059
D094
G002
G003
G004
G005
H005
DESCRIPTION
40-582
D024
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
10 11 12
19 20 21
16 17 18
D025
I031
10
I027
M0.75 GND
G1 +58
G1 +58
G1 +58
M1 GND
L 1 REAR RH+
10
R-V1 +12
M6 GND
M1 GND
M0.5 GND
M1 GND
M6 GND
M1 GND
SA-7
SA-10
G-N1 MIRROR LED LIGHT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M1 GND
N-R1 +15 MIRROR UP SMALL
B-C0.5 COMAND MIRROR UP/DOWN SMALL (LT)
M-B0.75 COMAND MIRROR UP/DOWN BIG (LT)
C-B0.5 COMAND MIRROR DX/SX SMALL (LT)
B-N0.75 COMAND MIRROR DX/SX BIG (LT)
G-R0.5 COMAND MIRROR COMMON SMALL (LT)
R0.75 COMAND MIRROR COMMON BIG (LT)
G0.5 +58
M1 GND
14
13
12
11
10
M1 GND
Z1 OUT DEFROST SW
G-N1 MIRROR LED LIGHT
M1 GND
B-N1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
M1.5 GND
B1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT 1
M1.5 GND
B-C0.5 COMAND MIRROR UP/DOWN SMALL (LT)
C-B0.5 COMAND MIRROR DX/SX SMALL (LT)
G-R0.5 COMAND MIRROR COMMON SMALL (LT)
M1.5 1
G-V1.5 FLASHER COMAND 2
6 5 4
M1.5 GND 1
G-V1.5 FLASHER COMAND 2
D057
D054
G004
M1 GND
V1 31b ZERO
N1 (53/1Sp) SPEED
R-V1.5 +12
SA-1
M6 GND
4 3 2 1
10
M0.5 GND
G0.75 +58
M0.5 GND
H-L0.75 LED ATTIVAZIONE
SA-9
10
654321
1211109 8 7
C005
M 0.75 GND
21
20
19
18
17
M6 GND
15
16
M 1 GND
SA-5
13
14
10
12
11
21
20
19
17
16
15
14
13
M 0.75 GND
13 14 15
12
11
10
19 20 21
16 17 18
13 14 15
10 11 12
G1 +58
M1 GND
R-V1.5 +12
V1 31b ZERO
M1.5 GND
N1 (53/1Sp) SPEED
1
2
G1 +58
M1 GND
P016
2
D055
1
G002
2
O011
R0.75 +30 WEBASTO(THERMOCALL)
D058
B 1 REAR LT-
M1.5 GND
V1.5 87 REAR WPRK LIGHT
2 M1.5 GND
1 V-N1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT 1
M1.5
M1 GND
X101
12
M1.5 GND 8
11
SA-2
10
-
SA-8
SA-4
M0.5 GND
V 0.75 TW1 CAN-L 2
M2.5 GND
Z2.5 REAR DEFROST
M1.5 GND
3 C-B1.5 87 REAR WPRK LIGHT
2 M1.5 GND
1 C1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT 1
G-R 1 +30 RADIO
2 1
N010
M-L 0.5 THERMO CALL 85
I028
6
Z1 OUT DEFROST SW 14
M1.5 GND 10
L 1 REAR RH+
13
B 1 REAR LT12
M 1 GND
8
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
M017
H006
4 3 2 1
9
1
D056
2
P017
1
ANTENNA
9 13
10 14
LIGHT BAR
THERMO CALL
H006
I026
I027
I028
I031
M017
N010
O011
P016
P017
P026
P028
1115
12 16
DEFROST
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
8 7 6 5
G003
4 3 2 1
Wiring diagrams
DESCRIPTION
6 5 4
3 2 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
3 2 1
18
D059
M1.5 GND 6
M1.5 GND 2
X105
D094
X103
1
P028
P026
R-V1 +12
R-V1.5 +12
SA-3
I026
G005
H005
D0077660
Wiring diagrams
40.4.58 - 0.021.0396.4 - LH transmission
N002
N003
FP
2
N004
RP
FP
EPB
D037
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RP
B
C
BRAKR
60Km/H
4
SUSP.
10 11 12
3
1 2
4 5 6 7
13 14
8 9 10 11 12
R:PTO
SPEED
D090
SUSP.
K009 D035
1
1
2
EPB
1
2
3
1
2
Schlemmer
D034
O
PT D
R. EE
SP
BRAKE
60 Km/H
B
A
ABS SOK
BUSTER
DRAFT
LEFT
EV
1
2
3
1
2
21 18 15 12 9 6
4 1
2
3
BRAKE
PRESS S
URE
2
BU
ST
ER
2
1
AXLE SP.
2
COOLANT L
1
3
4
2
K015
AC SW
2 1
8A 8B 8C 8D
K013
K014
AXLE SP.
7A 7B 7C 7D
COOLANT L
6A 6B 6C 6D
5A 5B 5C 5D
4A 4B 4C 4D
3A 3B 3C 3D
8A 8B 8C 8D
7A 7B 7C 7D
6A 6B 6C 6D
5A 5B 5C 5D
4A 4B 4C 4D
3A 3B 3C 3D
2A 2B 2C 2D
2A 2B 2C 2D
1A 1B 1C 1D
1A 1B 1C 1D
B A
2 1
FILTER
K012
12
10
11
6 9 8
5
4 7
2
3
1
D031
BUSTER
C002
SW
AC
K006
MA
BATTERY
BONNET
MA
BATTERY
D032
D036
BRAKES
PRESSURE
3
4
C004
ASM
ASM
FILTER
K016
Y
BK ER
TT
BA
T001a
T004
K007
BONNET
FUEL
FUEL
K010
3
4
FUEL
BK
BATTERY
DRAFT
LEFT
K005
D033
K008
EV UP
L001
BUSTER
ABS SOK
D092
P005
K011
20 17 14 11 8
K
SO
19 16 13 10 7
S
AB
FUEL
ABS SOK
UP
D091
D009
L
D0077610
L
MA BATTERY
BK BATTERY
BONNET
SUSP.
BRAKE 60 KM/H
ABS SOK
ABS SOK
FUEL
BUSTER
BRAKE PRESSURE
DRAFT LEFT
R.PTO SPEED
FUEL
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
C002
C004
D009
D031
D032
D033
D034
D035
D036
D037
D090
D091
D092
K005
K006
K007
K008
K009
K010
DESCRIPTION
Engine ground
Negative terminal of the auxiliary battery
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Water in fuel sensor
Brake circuit alarm pressure switch (15 Bar)
EPB pressure sensor
Lift draft sensor (LH)
PTO speed sensor
Fuel level sensor
40-583
7A 7B 7C 7D
6A 6B 6C 6D
D009
D092
2A 2B 2C 2D
1A 1B 1C 1D
3A 3B 3C 3D
4A 4B 4C 4D
5A 5B 5C 5D
6A 6B 6C 6D
7A 7B 7C 7D
8A 8B 8C 8D
2A 2B 2C 2D
3A 3B 3C 3D
4A 4B 4C 4D
5A 5B 5C 5D
1A 1B 1C 1D
B_A2
D036
V-B 1 HORN
K013
K012
20
21
17
18
19
M 2.5 GND
16
15
13
14
M 2.5 GND
V 1.5 W.L.RIGHT UP
M 2.5 GND
M 2.5 GND
10
11
12
M 2.5 GND
M 1 GND
M 1.5 GND
1
2
1
2
3
B_D8
B_D6
B_D7
M-N 1
B_D4
B_D5
B_D3
B_D1
B_D2
B_C7
B_C8
B_C5
B_C6
B_C4
B_C2
B_C3
B 0.75 EV UP-
L-G 0.75
B_B8
B_C1
B_B6
B_B7
B_B5
B_B3
B_B4
B_B1
B_B2
CAN H
B_A7
B_A8
B_A6
B_A4
B_A5
B_A3
A_D7
A_D8
B_A1
A_D5
A_D3
A_D4
A_D6
A_D1
A_D2
A_C8
A_C6
C-N 1 EV UP F.A.
A_C7
A_C4
A_C5
V-B 1 HORN
A_C2
A_C3
A_C1
A_B7
A_B8
A_B5
A_B6
A_B3
A_B4
A_B2
A_A8
A_B1
A_A6
M 0.75 GND
A_A7
A_A3
A_A4
A_A5
A_A1
A_A2
M 0.75 GND
K007
V 1.5 W.L.RIGHT UP
12
11
9
10
8 7
6 5 4 3
2
1
9
10
R 4 30 (main battery-30A)
4
1
M 0.75 GND
4
CAN H1
3
CAN L1
2
S-M 1 BP2
1
2
11
CAN-H1
4
3
12
B 1 + FRONT AXEL + front axle speed sensor
1
A
2
2
CAN-L1
B
B 1 X132/A_B1 A/C COMPRESSOR
T001a
B 1 X132-B_D7 PRESSUR SWITCH COMPRESSOR
2
A
B 1 ASM SEGNAL 1 ASM SEGNAL
C004
2
1
3
K005
2
B 1 GND SENSOR GND SENSOR HLHP
SA-2
2
T004
G-N 0.75 X132/A_A2 58L POS
B
3
10 11 12
4
7 9
8
14
13
12
11
10
4
5
6
C-N 1 EV UP F.A.
M 1 GND
1
L-G 0.75
S-M 1 BP1
M 0.75 GND
A
B
M 4 GND
R-N 4 +30
C8
B6
B3
B4
C6
C7
B8
A8
B1
C1
C2
C3
B2
A5
A6
A2
A4
A1
R 4 30 (main battery-30A)
M 0.75 GND
1
2
M 0.75 GND
1
2
B 0.75 EV UP-
A
4
N002
N003
L001
K008
D091
K011
K010
8 9
8
1
7
2
1
1
A
1
6 3
8
1
2
B A
M 0.75 GND
CAN H1
20 17 14 11 8
1
CAN L1
21 18 15 12 9
2
V-B 0.75 +D1
4
V-B 0.75 +D6
5
V-B 0.75 +D5
CAN L
8A 8B 8C 8D
40-584
7
13 14
D031
8
1
1
19 16 13 10 7
2
2
A
D032
M 0.75 -31
9
2
1
B
2
B
3
1
D034
10
2
N004
K009
CAN H
11
K011
K012
K013
K014
K015
K016
K016
L001
N002
N003
N004
P005
T001a
T004
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D035
12
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
BUSTER
FILTER
COOLANT L
AXLE SP.
AC SW
ASM
ASM
EV UP
FP
RP
EPB
K
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D033
B A
Wiring diagrams
DESCRIPTION
Not used
Air cleaner clogged sensor
Engine coolant level sensor
Front axle speed sensor
Air conditioning pressure switch
Steering angle sensor
Wiring connector
Rear lift UP control solenoid valve
Windscreen washer pump
Rear screen washer pump
E.P.B. device
Air conditioning compressor
Battery positive terminal
Positive terminal of the auxiliary battery
D037
3 4 5 6 7
10 11 12
1 2
SA-3
SA-1
SA-6
SA-9
P005
K016
K015
K014
C002
SA-8
1
D090
X135
K006
SA-4
SA-5
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077620
Wiring diagrams
40.4.59 - 0.021.0489.4 - Auxiliary heating - Webasto
1
2
P029b
GROUP
WEBASTO
12 11 10 9
M016
WEBASTO
RELAIS 4
WEBASTO
WEBASTO
RELAIS 4
WEBASTO
D093
GROUP
WEBASTO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FUEL
POUMP
FUEL
POUMP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
N020
1
2
1
2
O019
G
WE ROU
BA P
ST
O
DIAGN
OSTIC
O019a
R005
DIAGNOSTIC
12
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
P029a
GROUP
WEBASTO
D0078010
WEBASTO
WEBASTO RELAIS 4
FUEL PUMP
GROUP WEBASTO
GROUP WEBASTO
DIAGNOSTIC
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D093
M016
N020
O019
O019a
P029a
P029b
R005
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Relay unit
Webasto circuit pump
LED carrier connector
Diode
Webasto unit
Webasto unit
Webasto diagnostic connector
40-585
Wiring diagrams
6
5
12 11 10 9
M 2.5 GND
SA-1
M-G 1
B-C 1
B-L 1
Z-G 1 DIODO
M-G 1
B-L 1
SA-3
G-R 1 DIAGNOSTIC
R005
O019a
B-L 1
SA-2
2
1
O019
M-G 1
M 0.75 GND
L 1 DENSO ECU
M 0.75 GND
SA-4
M016
A
SA-5
C8
C7
C5
C3
C1
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D093
2
4
6
12 10 8
1
5
7
11 9
P029a
SA-7
12
9
6
3
2
SA-6
P029b
V-C 1.5 FUEL POUMP
A 1.5 FUEL POUMP
2
1
2
1
N020
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0078020
40-586
Wiring diagrams
D091
TO BODY
B
A
P027
DY
BO
TO
A
SO BS
CK
ET
1
2
3
1
2
3
D092
ABS SOCKET
D0077970
TO BODY
ABS SOCKET
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D091
D092
P027
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Trailer socket
40-587
Wiring diagrams
D091
B
A
B
A
M 4 -31
R-N 4 +30
6
5
P027
M 4 -31
M 1.5 -31
D092
R-N 4 +30
V-N 0.75 WARNING ABS LAMP
3
2
M 1.5 -31
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
D0077980
L014
D045
D0055361
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D045
L014
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Front PTO control solenoid valve
D045
L014
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0055371
Wiring diagrams
40.4.62 - 04217216 - Preheating relay power supply
B020
A001
J032b
D0060901
K2b
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A001
B020
J032b
DESCRIPTION
Alternator B+
Pre-heating relay supply fuse (150A)
Preheating relay
B020
J032b
150A
A001
D0060811
A010
J032a
D0060910
R4
K2a
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A010
J032a
DESCRIPTION
Preheating device
Preheating relay
40-589
Wiring diagrams
A010
J032a
D0060800
J032a
K2a
M014
Y25
K048
J032
K2
D088
B48
X32.2
D087
X32.1
K044
B49
D011
X17.1
N007
K047
B43
K050
B51
K046
X17.1
X32.1
X32.2
K2
K2a
B49
B40.2
B40.1
B43
B48
B6
B51
40-590
D011
D087
D088
J032
J032a
K044
K045
K046
K047
K048
K049
K050
B44
B6
L016
Y19
D0060922
B40.2
K049
B40.1
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
K045
K052
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
Preheating relay
Preheating relay
RAIL pressure sensor
Crankshaft speed sensor
Camshaft speed sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Turbine air temperature/pressure sensor
Oil pressure sensor
Fuel low pressure sensor
Wiring diagrams
CODE STAMPED ON
CONNECTOR
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
39 40 42 41
33 12
5 5 2 7
1 2
1 2
30 20 19
Not used
Engine oil temperature sensor
Proportional solenoid valve
Turbocharger
Starter motor
31 25 32
1 15 21
1 2 3
24
9 14 13
28 29 22 23
26
27
17
6 7
5 4 18 10 11 16
2 3 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
2 3
M014
J032
J032a
N007
K050
1 2
K049
K048
K047
L016
K046
D088
K045
D087
2 5 7
K044
D011
34 35 36 37
K052
K051
K052
L016
M014
N007
K051
B70
B44
Y19
Y25
DESCRIPTION
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0071991
E007
D057
D0050223
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D057
E007
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Left hand rotating beacon
40-591
Wiring diagrams
E007
Z1
D057
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0050234
E006
D054
D0050222
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
D054
E006
DESCRIPTION
Wiring connector
Right hand rotating beacon
E006
Z1
1
2
D054
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orang e
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0050233
40-592
Wiring diagrams
40.4.67 - 04502029 - Fuel injectors
A009
A008
A007
Y15.6
A006
Y15.3
A005
A004
Y15.4
Y15.2
Y15.5
Y15.1
D064
D088
X32.2
D063
D087
X32.1
D0073021
Y15.1
Y15.5
Y15.3
Y15.6
Y15.2
Y15.4
X32.1
X32.2
INTERCONNECTION
CODE
A004
A005
A006
A007
A008
A009
D087
D088
DESCRIPTION
Cylinder 1 injector
Cylinder 2 injector
Cylinder 3 injector
Cylinder 4 injector
Cylinder 5 injector
Cylinder 6 injector
Wiring connector
Wiring connector
40-593
Wiring diagrams
A009
A008
A007
A006
A005
A004
D088
D087
Marrone/Br own
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurr o/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Blac k
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ello w
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gra y
D0073031
40-594
INDEX
0
0.012.2018.4/20 - License plate light
0.014.0007.4/20 - Lights selector switch
0.014.5144.4/10 - Battery negative
0.015.3974.4/10 - Front axle suspension
0.015.4257.4/10 - PTO sensor (USA)
0.015.5429.4/20 - Front lift control
0.016.0642.4/20 - Rear LH lower work light on cab - Xenon version
0.016.0642.4/20 - Rear RH lower work light on cab - Xenon version
0.016.0650.4/10 - LH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version
0.016.0650.4/10 - RH front supplementary work light on arm - Xenon version
0.017.0496.4/10 - Supplementary RH front work light on arm
0.017.0497.4/10 - Rear LH lower work light on cab
0.017.0497.4/10 - Rear RH lower work light on cab
0.017.8425.4/10 - Rear trailer socket
0.017.8426.4 - Rear trailer socket (U.S.A.)
0.017.8887.4/10 - ISO 11783 - Front line
0.018.8803.4 - Battery positive terminal
0.018.9843.4/20 - ISO 11783 - Rear line
0.018.9845.4/10 - Fuses and relays
0.018.9990.4/10 - Distributors
0.018.9992.4/10 - AdBlue
0.019.2378.4/40 - LH mudguard
0.019.2378.4/40 - RH mudguard
0.019.2379.4/20 - Front LH lower work lights on cab
0.019.2379.4/20 - Front RH lower work lights on cab
0.019.2380.4/30 - Hazard warning lights switch (USA)
0.019.2383.4/20 - Engine cowl
0.019.2474.4/10 - Rear PTO
0.019.2539.4/10 - Hydraulic braking
0.019.2571.4/10 - ISO 11786
0.019.2617.4/70 - ISO 11783 - Cab line
0.019.3658.4/20 - Agrosky solenoid valve
0.019.3659.4/10 - On-board monitor - Armrest
0.019.4559.4/10 - Rear service work light
0.019.4688.4/10 - Front top work lights on cab
0.019.4689.4/20 - LH rear work lights on cab roof
0.019.4689.4/20 - RH rear work lights on cab roof
0.019.4711.4/10 - Semi-active cab
0.019.4913.4/10 - Front top work lights on cab - LED version
0.019.4914.4/20 - LH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version
0.019.4914.4/20 - RH rear work lights on cab roof - LED version
0.019.5311.4/10 - Automatic A/C system interface
0.019.9825.4/10 - Agrosky antenna (Assisted Steering)
0.019.9826.4/30 - Agrosky - I-Monitor
0.019.9827.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - LED version with Agrosky
0.019.9828.4/10 - Front work lights on cab roof - Version with Agrosky
0.019.9829.4/20 - Agrosky antenna (Visual guidance)
0.020.1009.4 - Front LH lower work lights on cab (USA)
0.020.1009.4 - Front RH lower work lights on cab (USA)
0.020.1026.4/10 - LH front supplementary work light on arm (U.S.A.)
0.020.1026.4/10 - RH front supplementary work light on arm (U.S.A.)
0.020.5056.4 - Brake hydraulic system pressure sensor - 60 km/h
0.020.8658.4 - Side instrument panel
0.020.8664.4 - RH transmission
0.020.8854.4 - Windscreen washer pumps
0.020.8862.4 - Roof
0.021.0396.4 - LH transmission
0.021.0489.4 - Auxiliary heating - Webasto
0.021.0490.4 - Trailer socket with ABS brakes
0.900.0816.0 - Front PTO
04217216 - Preheating relay power supply
04217217 - Preheating
04218107 - Engine
04436707 - Left hand rotating beacon
04436707 - RH rotating beacon
04502029 - Fuel injectors
40-496
40-496
40-498
40-499
40-499
40-500
40-501
40-502
40-502
40-503
40-504, 40-505
40-506
40-506
40-507
40-509
40-510
40-511
40-512
40-514
40-516
40-518
40-520
40-522
40-524
40-526
40-528
40-529
40-531
40-533
40-535
40-537
40-540
40-542
40-544
40-545
40-547
40-546
40-549
40-551
40-552
40-554
40-556
40-558
40-559
40-561
40-563
40-565
40-566
40-567
40-568
40-569
40-570
40-571
40-576
40-579
40-580
40-583
40-585
40-586
40-588
40-589
40-589
40-590
40-591
40-592
40-592
2
2.8519.133.0/20 - Transmission control unit
40-28
INDEX
2.8519.134.0/50 - HLHP control unit
40-26
4
45 cc variable displacement pump
10-181
6
63 cc variable displacement pump
10-183
9
939267 - Tyre fitting (23/11/2010)
939272 - Pulling force sensor (23/11/2010)
30-696
30-695
A
A - Starting and charging
A/C drive belt alignment and tension adjustment
AC system alarms
Air conditioning system
Air trailer braking system - CH Export version
Air trailer braking system - DE Export version
Air trailer braking system - Italy version
All Round Tester (ART SAME)
Alternator tightening torques
Ancillary utility distributor - 10-way version
Armrest alarms
ART connection
Assembly and disassembly of the camshaft (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the connecting rod drum (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the control elements (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the crankshaft (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the distribution valve (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the oil intake pipe (L3)
Assembly and disassembly of the piston cooling nozzles (L3)
Attaching rear axle to gearbox (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Axle pivot bearings assembly
Axle shaft assembly
Axle Stub - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Axle Stub - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
40-42
30-179
20-484
10-164
10-216
10-213
10-211
20-7
0-13
10-208
20-459
20-6
30-158
30-132
30-166
30-119
30-161
30-168, 30-169
30-107, 30-108
30-564
30-622
30-598
30-558
30-514
B
B - Fuses
B0 - Engine
Basic electronics for mechanics (1/2)
Basic electronics for mechanics (2/2)
Battery terminal tightening torques
Bevel pinion assembly
Bodywork - Cab - Platform
Brake assembly
Brake Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Brake Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Braking system
40-42
30-8
40-4
40-7
0-12
30-628
10-164
30-649
30-555
30-517
10-206
C
C - Grounds
C0 - Engine accessories
Care and maintenance - Adjustments and settings
Care and maintenance - SCR
Care and maintenance work - Belt transmissions
Care and maintenance work - Cooling system
II
40-52
30-185
10-88
10-76
10-84
10-77
INDEX
Care and maintenance work - Electrical system
Care and maintenance work - Engine cleaning
Care and maintenance work - Fuel distribution system
Care and maintenance work - Intake system
Care and maintenance work - Lubricant oil system
Cartridge valve tightening torques
Changing the crankshaft ring gasket (flywheel side)
Check and adjust valve clearances
Check the camshaft (L3)
Check the crankshaft bearings (L3)
Check the endfloat of the crankshaft (L3)
Checking the bevel gear pair
Commissioning and calibrating the tractor
Components
Compression test
Compressor
Connecting rod drum check (L3)
Conversion factors
Crankshaft check (L3)
10-90
10-80
10-68
10-80
10-60
30-7
30-18
30-40
30-160
30-131
30-125
30-612
20-108
40-26
30-35
10-218
30-140
0-10, 0-23
30-122
D
D - Intermediate connections
D0 - Transmission
Description of function (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Diagnostic sockets and connections
Diagnostic tools
Diagnostics
Differential - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Differential assembly - carrier
Differential disassembly
Disassembly and assembly of the gear box (L3)
Disassembly and completion of the pilot unit (L3)
Disassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drive) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of control (TCU) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Control (TCU) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of drive shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Drive Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of filter head (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of hydrostatic unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Hydrostatic Unit (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Inductive Sensors (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of intermediate housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Intermediate Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of K1 clutch
Disassembly of K2 clutch (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of K2 Clutch (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of K3/K4 clutch
Disassembly of K3/K4 clutch and P3/P4 planetary drive
Disassembly of KR clutch
Disassembly of KV clutch
Disassembly of output shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Output Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of P1 ring gear carrier
Disassembly of P1/P2 Planetary drive
Disassembly of P3/P4 planetary drive
Disassembly of P5/P6 Planetary drive
Disassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of pinion (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Plug-In Module (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Agrotron
40-55
30-235
10-155
20-5
20-7
20-2
30-519
30-604
30-612
30-151, 30-154, 30-157
30-171, 30-175
30-298
30-262
30-262
Agrotron
Agrotron
30-269
30-310
30-312
Agrotron
30-268
30-258
30-260
Agrotron
30-289
30-289
Agrotron
30-308
30-309
Agrotron
30-250
30-254
30-256
Agrotron
30-252
30-251
30-254
30-249
30-306
30-307
Agrotron
30-242
30-245
30-253
30-247
30-304
30-302
30-290
30-291
III
INDEX
Disassembly of pressure relief valves (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of pump (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of shifting drum (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Shifting Drum (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of suction filter (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Suction filter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of valve block (all-wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of valves, pressure sensor, inductive sensors (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of W.H. and E.C.U. (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Disassembly of wiring harness, valve block and plate (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Disassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit
Disassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
30-268
30-263
30-265
30-241
30-241
30-302
30-267
30-267
30-276, 30-279
30-278
30-274
30-281
30-282
30-283
30-269
30-287
30-271
30-285
30-283
E
E - On-board instruments and visual and audible indicators
E0 - Rear axle
ECU alarms
ECU interrogation
ECUs interrogated by the All Round Tester (ART) and SDF Analyser
Electrical and electronic components (1/2)
Electrical and electronic components (2/2)
Electrohydraulic control valve alarms
Electronic battery master switch alarms
Engine
Engine accessories
Engine alarms
Engine control unit
Engine description - Coolant diagram
Engine description - Electrical/electronic system
Engine description - Exhaust gas after-treatment
Engine description - Exhaust gas recovery
Engine description - Fuel circuit diagram
Engine description - Images of engine
Engine description - Lubricant oil diagram
EPB Alarms
40-78
30-446
20-160
20-2
20-2
40-13
40-21
20-462
20-497
10-2
10-112
20-160
40-30
10-21
10-26
10-23
10-22
10-20
10-8
10-18
20-488
F
F - External lights
F0 - Front axle
Faults - Engine management
Fitting and removing counterweight drive system, checking (L3)
Fitting and removing crankshaft bearings (L3)
Fitting and removing the temperature sender (exhaust gas) (L3)
Fitting BDS cables
Fitting blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting brakes (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting lifter, oil feed and blanking elements (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting of rear axle to the transmission (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
IV
40-79
30-590
10-94
30-112
30-128
10-128
30-686
30-473
30-504
30-468
30-444
30-507
INDEX
Fitting the differential (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Fitting the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the oil feed (7230 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Fitting the PTO transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Flange assembly
Fluids - SCR reduction agent
Front axle
Front axle - Version with disc brakes
30-550
30-500
30-468
30-471
30-473
30-536
30-600
10-56
10-162
10-162
G
G - Interior lights
G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
General safety rules
40-82
30-657
0-2, 0-15
H
H - Electrical and manual controls
H0 - Hydraulic system
Handbrake adjustment
HLHP alarms
How diagnostics works
How to select the ECU interrogated
Hydraulic front axle suspension
Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic trailer braking system - Export version
Hydraulic trailer braking system - Italy version
40-82
30-684
30-657
20-462
20-2
20-2
10-197
10-185
10-178, 10-178
10-201
10-199
I
I - Circuit breakers
Index Repair instructions (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Index Repair instructions (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Installation
Installation and removal of the crankshaft sleeve
Installation and removal of the high pressure pump, Assembly position B
Installation and removal of the rotation device
Installation and removal of the rotation device (torsional vibration damper)
Installation of solenoid valves and cartridge valves
Installing and removing the temperature transmitter (Exhaust gas)
Installing and removing the thermostat
Introduction
40-83
30-2
30-4
30-6
30-20
30-54
30-229
30-231
30-6
30-220
30-207
0-2, 0-15, 40-2, 40-2
J
J - Relays
40-88
K
K - Sensors and transmitters
40-90
L
L - Electromagnets and solenoid valves
L0 - Electrical system
Lifting instructions
Lifting Unit - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Lifting Unit - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
40-95
30-686
0-4, 0-17
30-530
30-529
INDEX
Load sensing valve, pressure cut-off valve
10-188
M
M - Electrical/electronic devices, flasher units and timers
Main power relay switch (TGC/RME-SA1)
Maintenance - Maintenance schedule
Malfunctions - Malfunction table
Master cylinder
Menus available for each ECU
Motor description - construction type
40-96
40-35
10-58
10-92
10-206
20-3
10-2
N
N - Electric motors and actuators
NOx sensor (L3)
40-99
10-123, 10-123
O
O - Resistors, rheostats, diodes and diode boards
Oil Supply - Assembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Oil Supply - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Operating materials - Coolant
Operating materials - Fuel
Operating materials - lubricant oil
40-100
30-533
30-528
10-54
10-53
10-51
P
P - Various services
Pipes and closing components (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Planetary reduction gear assembly
Pneumatic trailer braking valve with unbraked front axle (2-way)
Positioning of the diagnostic sockets
Power steering
Preassembly of housing lid (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Preassembly of Housing Lid (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Preassembly of transmission housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Pressure cut-off valve
Pressure limiting valve
Pressure sensor (L3)
Pressure transducer (L3)
Priority valve
Procedure for checking EPB travel (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Procedure to check EPB stroke (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
PTO Transmission - Disassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Putting in service - Agrosky
Putting in service - Air conditioner
Putting in service - ASM
Putting in service - Basic procedure for startup
Putting in service - Delete alarms
Putting in service - Distributors
Putting in service - End of line settings
Putting in service - Engine
Putting in service - Introduction (Software HLHP versione SC134AE)
Putting in service - Lift
Putting in service - MR-D Cabin
Putting in service - Park brake
Putting in service - PTO
Putting in service - Suspension
Putting in service - System
Putting in service - Transmission
VI
40-102
30-445
30-635
10-222
20-5
10-196
30-376
30-333
30-349
10-219
10-221
10-113
10-112
10-195
30-565
30-578
30-522
20-155
20-150
20-123
20-108
20-158
20-138
20-112
20-147
20-108
20-125
20-155
20-154
20-122
20-129
20-131
20-113
INDEX
Q
Quick pressure release valve
10-220
R
R - Diagnostics
R0 - Rear lift
Rear Axle Housing - Preassembly (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of clutch (all-wheel-drIve) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of control (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Control (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of control unit (hydrostatic unit) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of drive shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Drive Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of filter head (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of hydrostatic unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Hydrostatic Unit (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of Inductive Sensors (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of inductive sensors, pressure sensors, valves (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of intermediate housing (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Intermediate Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of K1 Clutch
Reassembly of K2 Clutch
Reassembly of K3/K4 clutch (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of K3/K4 Clutch (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of KR clutch
Reassembly of KV Clutch
Reassembly of output shaft (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Output Shaft (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of P1 Ring gear carrier
Reassembly of P1/P2 planetary drive
Reassembly of P3/P4 planetary drive
Reassembly of P5/P6 planetary drive
Reassembly of park lock (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of pinion (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of plate (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Plug-In Module (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of pressure relief valves (PRV) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of pump (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Pump (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of spur gear (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of suction filter (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Suction filter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of Transmission Housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of valve block (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Valve Block (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of valve block (all wheel-drive / park lock) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of valve block (filter head, pressure relief valves, thermocouple) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of valve block (hydraulic control) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of Valve Block (P.R.V. - Pressure Relief Valve) (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of valve block (pressure reducing valve) (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
40-104
30-695
30-530
30-363
30-399
30-345
30-386
30-350
30-314
30-387
30-400
30-346
30-334
30-383
30-353
30-317
30-419
30-403
30-409
30-414
30-406
30-419
30-374
30-331
30-431
30-426
30-408
30-422
30-359
30-355
30-377
30-319
30-386
30-397
30-343
30-372
30-403
30-349
30-313
30-380
30-337, 30-339
30-393
30-394
30-391
30-336
30-390
VII
INDEX
Reassembly of W.H. and E.C.U. (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reassembly of wiring harnesses (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reassembly of wiring harnesses and control unit (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reinstallation of cartridge (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Reinstallation of Cartridge (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Reinstallation of plug-in module (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Remote control valve - 12-way version
Remote control valve - 14-way version
Remote control valve - 8-way version
Removal and assembly of the fan support
Removal and installation of the air conditioning compressor
Removal and installation of the exhaust pipe (auxiliaries)
Removal and installation of the fuel filter console
Removal and installation of the fuel lift pump
Removal and installation of the thermostat housing
Removal and refitting of fuel lines (fuel lift pump - pilot block)
Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - fuel lift pump)
Removal and refitting of fuel lines (pilot block - high pressure pump)
Removal and refitting of fuel lines (rail, cylinder head, pilot block - fuel filter)
Removal and refitting of oil cooler (auxiliary services)
Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
Removal and refitting of the lubricating oil return pipe (exhaust gas turbocharger)
Removal and refitting of the air intake pipe
Removal and refitting of the alternator (ribbed V-belt, level 1)
Removal and refitting of the alternator (ribbed V-belt, level 2)
Removal and refitting of the camshaft speed sensor
Removal and refitting of the charge air duct
Removal and refitting of the charge air manifold
Removal and refitting of the common rail
Removal and refitting of the crankcase breather
Removal and refitting of the crankshaft speed sensor
Removal and refitting of the cylinder head cover
Removal and refitting of the exhaust gas turbocharger
Removal and refitting of the fan support
Removal and refitting of the flywheel (fixing elements)
Removal and refitting of the front cover (fixing elements)
Removal and refitting of the heater
Removal and refitting of the heater (details)
Removal and refitting of the high-pressure pump, Installation position A
Removal and refitting of the injector
Removal and refitting of the lube oil cooler housing
Removal and refitting of the oil filler pipe
Removal and refitting of the oil sump pan
Removal and refitting of the pilot block
Removal and refitting of the starter motor
Removal and refitting of the torsional vibration damper
Removal and refitting of the V-belt pulley
Removal and refitting of the water pump
Removal of cartridge (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Removal of Cartridge (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Removing and fitting fuel lines (fuel delivery pump - fuel control block) (L3)
Removing and fitting NOx sensor (L3)
Removing and installing the belt tensioner (Level 1).
Removing and installing the belt tensioner (Level 2)
Removing and installing the console (Level 1)
Removing and installing the support console (Level 1)
Removing and installing the support console (Level 2)
Removing and installing the support plate (Level 1)
Removing and installing the vee-groove pulley (#1)
Removing and installing the vee-groove pulley (#2)
Removing and refitting the valve timing system (L3)
Removing brakes (7230 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTVAgrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Removing the axle housing (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Removing the differential (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Removing the lifter (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Removing the oil feed
(7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
VIII
30-334
30-381
30-388
30-437
30-440
30-373
10-209
10-210
10-208
30-215
30-232
30-87
30-185
30-187
30-211
30-189
30-195
30-193
30-198
30-43
30-92
30-94
30-77
30-224
30-223
30-227
30-74
30-75
30-66
30-8, 30-11
30-226
30-37
30-89
30-214
30-33
30-23
30-202
30-204
30-50
30-58
30-45
30-28
30-25
30-47
30-221
30-31
30-30
30-79
30-236
30-238
10-124
10-130
30-81
30-97
30-104
30-85
30-103, 30-105
30-82
30-98
30-101
30-164
30-449
30-446
30-451
30-467
30-466
INDEX
Removing the PTO (7230 TTV Agrotron
->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Renewal of the crankshaft oil seal
Repair level III
Replace the crankshaft O-ring (flywheel end) (L3)
Replacing the starter ring gear on the flywheel (L3)
->WSXAD00400LD50010,
7250
TTV
Agrotron
30-454
30-14
30-2, 30-4
30-147
30-109, 30-110
S
S0 - Wheels
S001 - Electrical engine governor
S002 - Starter
S003 - Preheating
S004 - AdBlue
S005 - Transmission
S005A - Transmission - Version with performance steering
S006 - Front axle suspension
S007 - Instrument panel
S008 - Lights Version without front hitch
S009 - Lights Version with front hitch
S010 - Turn indicators
S011 - Work lights
S012 - Semi-active cab suspension
S013 - Manual air conditioner
S014 - Automatic air conditioning
S015 - +15 Positives
S016 - +30 Positives
S017 - CAN BUS Line - Standard version
S017A - Standard CAN BUS line - Version with automatic A/C system
S017B - Visual guidance Can Bus line - Version without ISO11783
S018 - CAN BUS Line - Version with ISO 11783
S018A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
S018B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
S018C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
S019 - CAN BUS line - Version without I-Monitor
S020 - PTO
S021 - Front and rear hitches
S022 - Brakes
S023 - Hydraulic trailer braking
S024 - Hydraulic distributors
S025 - Windscreen wipers
S026 - Radio
S027 - Accessories
S028 - Diagnostics
S029 - Monitor
S030 - Agrosky - Version with visual guidance, without ISO11783
S031 - ISO 11783
S031A - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with visual guidance
S031B - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with assisted steering
S031C - ISO11783 Can Bus line - Version with performance steering
S032 - Webasto
S033 - Lights - Version without front hitch (U.S.A.)
S034 - Lights - Version with front hitch (U.S.A.)
S035 - Turn indicators (U.S.A.)
S036 - Work lights (U.S.A.)
S037 - +15 Positives (U.S.A.)
S038 - +30 Positives (U.S.A.)
S039 - PTO (USA)
S040 - Braking (U.S.A.)
S041 - ISO 11783 (U.S.A.)
Safety notes
Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations
SDF Analyser
SDF Analyser/CVT Diag connection
SDF Analyser/PC Tester connection
Separating rear axle from transmission (7210 TTV Agrotron ->WSXW830400LD50010)
Separation of Rear Axle from Transmission (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Serdia 2010
Serdia 2010 connection
Servo-brake valve for front axle
Solenoid valve tightening torques
Speed indicator (L3)
Standard tightening torques
30-696
40-106
40-112
40-116
40-120
40-125
40-133
40-141
40-144
40-147
40-156
40-168
40-178
40-194
40-196
40-200
40-207
40-210
40-216
40-231
40-245
40-250
40-268
40-277
40-286
40-297
40-309
40-315
40-321
40-331
40-336
40-341
40-346
40-349
40-366
40-371
40-373
40-379
40-388
40-397
40-407
40-418
40-422
40-431
40-442
40-450
40-465
40-469
40-474
40-480
40-487
0-2, 0-15
0-3, 0-16
20-11
20-6
20-6
30-513
30-235
20-14
20-6
10-198
30-6
10-121
0-12
IX
INDEX
Starter motor tightening torques
Steering cylinders assembly
Steering gear pump - Version with compressor
Steering gear pump - Version without compressor
Steering position sensor assembly
Supplementary heater - Webasto - Disassembly and reassembly
Supplementary heater - Webasto - Troubleshooting
Supplementary heater - Webasto - Wiring diagrams
Supplementary heating - Webasto - Description of operation
Supplementary heating - Webasto - Faults
Supplementary heating - Webasto - Functional tests
Supplementary heating - Webasto - General description
Supplementary heating - Webasto - Maintenance
Supplementary heating - Webasto - Technical specifications
System diagram (7230 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD00400LD50010, 7250 TTV Agrotron ->WSXAD30400LD50010)
Systems
0-13
30-592
10-204
10-203
30-686
30-674
30-659
10-174
10-170
10-172
30-663
10-165
30-664
10-173
10-151
40-106
T
T - Power supply points (+15 o +30)
Technical data - Engine data and adjustment data
Technical data - Tools
Temperature sender (exhaust gas) (L3)
Temperature sender (L3)
40-104
10-102
10-104
10-133
10-114, 10-115, 10-118,
10-119, 10-129
30-210
0-8, 0-21
30-684
0-5, 0-18
0-12
30-590
10-224
10-224
10-221
10-225
10-134
10-139
TTV Agrotron
10-145
10-134
20-229
10-159
10-97
10-99
U
Usage - Active regeneration
Usage - Controlling engine operation
Usage - Passive regeneration
Usage - Starting procedure
Use - Environmental conditions
Use - exhaust gas after-treatment systems
Use - First start-up
Use - Stop procedure
10-45
10-37
10-47
10-35
10-28
10-43
10-30
10-49
W
Wheel hub assembly
Wheel rim to hub screws and nuts tightening torques
Wiring harnesses
30-638
0-14
40-496
*307.W.0980.en.6.05*
02/2015
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale F. Cassani, 15 - 24047 Treviglio (BG) Italy
T + 39.0363.4211 F + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com
Deutz-Fahr is a
www.deutz-fahr.com
trademark